Big Book Big Book

Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page # Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page #
Tab 1 Tab 6
Drills 4 5 Toggle & Pneumatic/Hydraulic Clamping 37 1169
High Performance Drills 5 77 Spring-Loaded Devices 38 1232
Spade Drills & Indexable Drilling 6 159 Eyebolts and Hoist Rings 39 1250
Spotting Drills & Countersinks 7 190 Magnets 40 1260
Reamers 8 220 Coil Spring 41 1320
Counterbores 9 248 Belleville Disc Springs 42 1334
Light Industrial Cutting Tools 10 254 Tab 7
Tab 2 Small Calipers 44 1342
11 272
Taps & 12 & 273 IP Standards 43 1342
Thread Forming Taps 13 308 Statistical Process Control-SPC 45 1354
High Performance Taps 14 322 Outside Micrometers 46 1354
Pipe Taps 15 358 Specialty Micrometers 47 1355
External Threading 16 371 Indicators 48 1401
Thread Milling 17 391 Gage Block Specifications 49 1432
Thread Repair 18 400 Go/No-Go Measuring 50 1452
Tab 3 Tape Measures 51 1487
End Mills 19 428 Tab 8
Routing End Mill Technical Information 20 506 Vises 52 1595
Broaches 21 529 Lathe Chucks 53 1618
End Mills 22 544 Centers 54 1646
Routing End Mills 23 652 Drill Chucks 55 1697
Tab 4 Vibration Pads, Mounts & Hangers 56 1745
Chipbreaker Cross Reference &
ANSI Insert Nomenclature 24 677 Knurls 57 1762
Indexable Tool Holder Nomenclature 25 809 Tab 9
Carbide Threading System Nomenclature 26 850 Flat Stock & Drill Rod 58 1815
Boring Bars 27 905 Aluminum Alloys 59 1841
Tab 5 Brass, Bronze, Copper, Nickel & Iron 60 1845
Grinding Wheels 28 926 Stainless Steels 61 1855
Cut-off & Depressed Center Grinding Wheels 29 946 Polyurethane 62 1880
Coated Quick Change Discs 30 985 Rubber Sheeting 63 1883
Deburring Wheels 31 1011 Wire Cloth 64 1896
32 1033
Hand Files & 33 & 1034
Hand Deburring 34 1053
Abrasive Brushes 35 1063
Abrasive Blasting Media 36 1091

Page 1
 Big Book Big Book
Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page # Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page #
Tab 10 Tab 13
Socket Head Fasteners 65 1902 Eye Protection 102 2718
Nylon Fasteners 66 2014 Head Protection 103 2750
Electronic Hardware 67 2049 Hearing Protection 104 2756
Dowel Pins 68 2066 Respiratory Protection 105 2769
Blind Rivets 69 2080 Gloves 106 2787
Concrete Anchoring 70 2093 Cut Protection Gloves 107 2805
Padlock Keying Options 71 2124 Lineman's Gloves 108 2819
ANSI 107-2004 High Visibility Safety Apparel 109 2833
Cleanrooms 110 2843
Emergency Eyewash Stations & Drench Shwrs 111 2868
Tab 11 Fire Extinguishers 112 2875
Sockets 72 2190 Fall Protection 113 2881
Insulated Hand Tools 82 2359 Batteries 114 2907
Hex, Ball End Hex & Torx Tools 73 2231 Identification 115 2932
Torque Conversions 74 2241 Lockout / Tagout 116 2965
Torque Wrenches 75 2242 Matting 117 2975
Wrenches 76 2249 Sorbents 118 2990
Screwdrivers & Bits 77 2267 Safety Cans 119 2998
Nut Drivers 78 2282 Safety Cabinets 120 3002
Pliers 79 2298 Secondary Spill Containment 121 3006
Chisels & Punches 80 2324 Can Liners 122 3075
Hammers 81 2343 Wet Mops 123 3079
Non-Sparking Tools 83 2367 Tab 14
Utility Knives 84 2370 Shelving 124 3102
Pocket Knives 85 2376 Storage Racks 125 3111
Titanium Bonded Scissors & Snips 86 2382 Storage Bins 126 3123
Snips 87 2388 Tool Roller Cabinets, Workstations & Chest 127 3148
Handsaws 88 2390 Casters 128 3205
Battery Packs for Cordless Power Tools 89 2468 Caster Mounting Options & Terms 129 3206
Power Saws 90 2484 Caster Load Capacity by Duties & Definitions 130 3207
Pneumatic Grinder Safety 91 2532 Hydraulic Pumps, Cylinders & Fittings 131 3272
Pneumatic Tool Conversion Tables 92 2533 Mechanical Hand Lever Pullers/Hoists 132 3283
Pneumatic Impact Wrenches 93 2551 Mechanical / Hand Chain Hoists 133 3286
Screw Torque Guide 94 2562 Electric Hoists 134 3288
Tab 12 Air Hoists 135 3292
Foam Adhesives/Sealants/Void Fill 95 2604 Hoist Beam Trolleys 136 3294
Adhesives 97 2612 Slings 137 3301
Room Temperature Vulcanizing Silicones 96 2608 Wire Rope 138 3320
Industrial Markers 98 2628 Fibrous Rope 139 3323
Steel Hand Stamps 99 2634 Choosing The Correct Ladder 140 3333
Labeling 100 2641 Choosing a Rolling Ladder 141 3341
Metalworking Fluids 101 2709 Carton & Water Activated Box Sealing Tape 142 3367

Page 2
 Big Book Big Book
Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page # Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page #
Tab 15 Tab 16
Fluorescent Lamps 143 3390 Air Compressors 173 3838
Incandescent and Halogen Lamps 144 3397 Air System Components 174 3859
Conversion of Incandescent Lamps
to Compact Fluorescent Lamps 145 3403 Flexible Tubing 175 4018
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps 146 3406 Tygon Physical Properties 176 4027
Electric Ballasts 147 3412 Compression Tube Fittings 177 4067
NEMA Configurations 148 3447 Connector & Coupler Interchange Chart 178 4149
Steel Box Bracket Designations 149 3459 Tab 17
NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers 179 4166
Association) Enclosure Types 150 3477 Air Filters & 180 & 4167
National Electrical Code (NEC) Ratings 151 3502 Electric Heat 181 4210
Surge Suppression 152 3505 O-Rings 182 4274
Cords and Cables 153 3520 Mechanical Pump Seals 183 4330
Cable Connectors 154 3529 Technical/Informational Charts

Dimensions of Counterboring / Countersinking

Choosing a Fuse Class 155 3592 for Socket Head Cap Screws - Tab #10 184 2186
Time-Delay Fuses 156 3601 Surface Coatings - Tab #3a 185 538
Quick Visual Identification of
Automation Switch Terminology 157 3618 Carbide Insert Shapes - Tab #3b 186 672
Basics of Switches 158 3626 Decimal Equivalent Chart - Tab #3a 187 540
2404
Enclosed Relays 159 3634 Conversion Chart - Tab #11a & 14 188 & 3386
Choosing the Right Type of Sensor 160 3640 Liquid Measure Chart - Tab #14 189 3388
Contactors 161 3665
162 3672
Motors to 166 to 3676
Hazardous Location Motors 167 3692
Worm Gear Speed Reducers 168 3702
Mechanical Cam Clutches 169 3717
Sleeve Bearing Material 170 3740
Bearings 171 3766
Linear Motion Systems 172 3818

Page 3
 DRILL TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Drills

Drills are used in a variety of operations, from maintenance and repair to high volume precision hole-making. When selecting a drill, it is important to keep the following steps in mind: Choose the
right Drill Style, Grade and Length for the job, match the Tool Material to the workpiece material and select the best Drill Point for your application. For improved tool performance and tool life, add
a Coating or surface treatment.

Drill Style, Grade and Length Tool Material

With all the choices in the market, choosing the right drill can be difficult. If you know the In today’s competitive environment, getting the most out of your tooling is vital.
diameter and depth of the hole, amount of holes you need to make and the type of job, you Selecting the right tool material is a big step toward maximizing productivity and
are already halfway there. reducing cost per hole.
Styles:
High Speed Steel (HSS: M1, M2, M7, M50):
Straight Shank Drills are the most common style in the world. Shank size always matches the • Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost
cutting diameter. • Works well in free cutting and carbon steels, as well as soft, non-ferrous materials like
aluminum, brass, bronze and copper
• Twist Drills are the most widely used style in the world. For use in the widest application in • Able to handle less than ideal set-ups
ferrous and non-ferrous materials Cobalt (M-35, M-42):
• Parabolic Drills are for deep-hole drilling, reducing the need to peck • Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS
• Slow Spiral Drills are used for long chipping materials, such as aluminum and copper • Very little chipping or microchipping under severe cutting conditions, allowing the tool to
• Fast Spiral Drills are used for small chipping materials like stainless steel run 10% faster than HSS
• Half-Round Drills are used for deep-hole drilling of very soft materials, like brass • With the right point angle and helix, cobalt is the most cost-effective for machining cast
and rubber iron, heat-treated steels and titanium alloys
• Straight Flute Drills are designed to drill the hardest steels • Able to handle less than ideal set-ups
• Core Drills are used to enlarge existing holes
Powdered Metal (PM) Cobalt (ASP-30, ASP-60):
• A cost effective alternative to solid carbide, powdered metal is tougher and less prone
Reduced Shank Drills are a popular choice for maintenance and repair. Because the shank to breakage
size is smaller than the drill diameter, they can drill holes larger than the typical drill chuck • Tools perform well in materials <30HRC, as well as highly abrasive materials like high-
capacity. silicon aluminums
• 3⁄8w Reduced Shank drills holes up to 1⁄2w with a standard 3⁄8w chuck Solid Carbide:
• Silver and Deming (1⁄2w Reduced Shank) drills holes up to 11⁄2w with a 1⁄2w drill chuck • For high-performance applications; Carbide can run faster and withstand higher
• 3⁄4w Reduced Shank drills holes up to 2w with a 3⁄4w drill chuck temperatures, while providing good wear resistance
• Provides better rigidity than HSS, yielding a higher degree of dimensional accuracy, often
Taper Shank Drills are long length drills that are fitted with a special shank called a Morse eliminating the need to ream
Taper. These drills are made specifically for spindles that can hold Morse Taper shank drills. • Carbide is brittle, and tends to chip when conditions are not ideal; heavy feed rates are
more suitable for HSS and Cobalt tools
• Taper Shank Drills come in many styles: Stub Length, Extra Long, Core Drills, Hi-Helix, • Carbide is used in abrasive and tough-to-machine materials: cast iron, non-ferrous alloys,
Slow-Helix and Coolant-Fed glass, plastics and composites
• Carbide-Tipped tooling offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling at a reduced
cost, especially larger diameter tools
Grades:
• • General Purpose is a perfect choice for maintenance and repair or short production runs
in soft ferrous and non-ferrous materials (Refer to Drill Selection Chart on pages 2 & 3)
• • Heavy-Duty drills typically combine a split point to prevent walking, and stronger flutes Coatings
for better rigidity. They are an excellent choice when drilling harder materials
• • High Performance drills are typically designed for application specific operations where One of the best methods to improve the productivity or tool life of a drill is to add a coating or
productivity and cost per hole is a concern. Maximizing speeds/feeds is essential, so surface treatment. Coatings and surface treatments build a barrier between the drill and the
always review published manufacturer’s recommendations workpiece. Different coatings provide different results, so select carefully.

Lengths: Black Oxide (Surface Treated):

• Screw Machine - Stub length • Retains lubricants to aid in wear resistance and chip flow
• Jobber - Standard length • Not to be used in non-ferrous materials
• Taper - Long length Polished (Bright Finish):
• Extra Length • Polished drills do not have a coating, which helps increase chip flow in soft materials
• For use in aluminum, wood and plastics
Drill Points TiN (Titanium Nitride - Gold Color):
• Multi-purpose coating which increases tool life and performance
• Hardness and heat resistance allows tools to run at higher speeds and feeds (approx. 25%
The drill point you use has an impact on performance. Flat points provide better cutting to 30% higher than uncoated tools)
action, while more aggressive point angles create torque.
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride - Violet Gray Color):
• Harder and more wear resistant in moderate temperatures
Styles: • TiCN can provide the user the ability to run the job at higher spindle speeds, especially in
• 118° Point is designed to be an all-purpose point for soft metal, wood and plastics. stainless steels, cast iron and aluminum
Common on general purpose tools • Requires an increase of 35% to 50% in machining speeds
• 135° Split Point is designed to cut metal. Self-centering, it will not walk or slide when
starting a hole. Common on heavy-duty tools TiAlN (Titanium Aluminum Nitride - Violet Black Color):
• 130° Point is common on high-performance HSS parabolic drills. Disperses heat well, and • For high temperature and/or abrasive conditions
helps keep drill straight in deeper holes • Use in stainless steel, high alloy carbon steels, nickel-based high-temp alloys and titanium
• 140° Point is common on high-performance Carbide drills, and helps get the cutting edge alloys. Not to be used in aluminum
into tough materials quickly • Requires an increase of 75% to 100% in machining speeds

READY TO ORDER? - mscmetalworking.com 5

Page 4
 HIGH-PERFORMANCE DRILL TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...High Performance Drills

Cobalt Parabolic Drill Material Specific Color Band Drill Carbide Jobber Drill

Materials Surface Treatments

HSS Vanadium (HSSE) Polished (Bright Finish)
• 3% Vanadium • Polished drills do not have a coating, which helps increase chip flow in
• Abrasive wear resistance for increased toughness & tool life soft materials
• In addition to general applications, provides long life when drilling materials • For use in aluminum, wood and plastic
like stainless steels & high silicon aluminums
TiN (Titanium Nitride – Gold Color)
Cobalt (M-35 & M-42) • Multi-purpose coating which increases tool life and performance
• Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness • Hardness and heat resistance allows tools to run at increased speeds of
than HSS 25-35%
• Most cost effective for machining cast iron, heat treated steels
and titanium alloys TiAlN (Titanium Aluminum Nitride – Violet Black Color)
• For high temperature and/or abrasive conditions
Powdered Metal (PM) Cobalt • For use in stainless steel, high alloy carbon steels, nickel based high-temp
• A cost effective alternative to solid carbide, powdered metal is tougher and alloys and titanium alloys
less prone to breakage • Not to be used in aluminums
• Provides superior wear life in materials < 30HRC, as well as highly abrasive • Requires an increase of 75-100% of machining speeds
materials like high-silicon aluminums
FIREX®
Solid Carbide & Carbide Tipped • A Guhring exclusive, alternating ultra-thin coating layers combine the
• For high-performance applications; Carbide can run faster and withstand performance benefits of single layer coatings
higher temperatures while providing good wear resistance • Universal applicability of TiN, hardness and heat-resistance of TiAlN and
• Carbide is brittle and is best suited for abrasive and tough-to-machine shock resistance of TiCN
materials such as cast iron, non-ferrous alloys, glass, plastics and composites
• Carbide-Tipped offers many of the advantages of solid carbide drills at a
reduced cost, especially on the larger diameter drills

Drill Points
Styles
• 130° Point is common on high performance parabolic drills, disperses heat well and helps keep drill straight in deeper holes
• 135° Split Point is self-centering, it will not walk or slide when starting a hole
• 140° Point is common on high performance carbide drills, and helps get the cutting edge into tough materials quickly

Page 5 Page 77

HSS TiAlN Coated 120° Screw Machine Drills

Fractional & Wire Sizes
Grade: High-Performance
Designed for drilling tough materials such as stainless steel
Tool Material: Coating Advantages: Features: Need More Information?
HSS Vanadium (HSSE) TiAlN • Blue band for stainless steel • Refer to Page Nos. 2 & 3 for Drill Selection Guide
• Provides good wear resistance in mild • For use where extremely high temperatures are generated in • 3% Vanadium • Refer to Page No. 77 for Technical Information
steels, soft metals (aluminum, copper, machining stainless steels, nickel-based and titanium alloys • 120° 6 Facet point
brass, bronze and nonferrous materials) • Allows increase in machining speeds of 75-100%
Fractional Sizes • Not to be used in aluminum
Size Dec. Flute OAL Size Dec. Flute OAL Size Dec. Flute OAL Size Dec. Flute OAL
(In.) Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea.
5⁄64 0.0781 12 38 05493119 $6.99 3⁄16 0.1875 26 62 05493622 $9.99 19⁄64 0.2969 37 79 05494018 $17.99 13⁄32 0.4062 43 89 05494273 $24.99
3⁄32 0.0938 14 43 05493192 6.99 13⁄64 0.2031 26 62 05493705 10.99 5⁄16 0.3125 37 79 05494042 19.99 27⁄64 0.4219 47 95 05494299 27.99
7⁄64 0.1094 16 46 05493275 6.99 7⁄32 0.2188 28 66 05493762 10.99 21⁄64 0.3281 37 79 05494083 19.99 7⁄16 0.4375 47 95 05494315 27.99
1⁄8 0.1250 18 49 05493341 6.99 15⁄64 0.2344 28 66 05493804 14.99 11⁄32 0.3438 40 84 05494125 21.99 29⁄64 0.4531 47 95 05494323 28.99
9⁄64 0.1405 20 52 05493408 7.99 1⁄4 0.2500 31 70 05493853 14.99 23⁄64 0.3594 40 84 05494166 22.99 15⁄32 0.4688 51 102 05494331 29.99
5⁄32 0.1562 22 55 05493473 7.99 17⁄64 0.2660 34 74 05493903 14.99 3⁄8 0.3750 43 89 05494190 22.99 31⁄64 0.4844 51 102 05494356 32.99
11⁄64 0.1719 24 58 05493556 9.99 9⁄32 0.2812 34 74 05493978 16.99 25⁄64 0.3906 43 89 05494224 23.99 1⁄2 0.5000 51 102 05494364 33.99
Wire Sizes
Dec. Flute OAL Dec. Flute OAL Dec. Flute OAL Dec. Flute OAL
Size Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. Size Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. Size Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. Size Equiv. (In.) L (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea.
#47 0.0785 12 38 05493127 $6.99 #35 0.1100 16 46 05493283 $6.99 #23 0.1540 22 55 05493465 $7.99 #11 0.1910 26 62 05493648 $10.99
#46 0.0810 12 38 05493143 6.99 #34 0.1110 16 46 05493291 6.99 #22 0.1570 22 55 05493481 7.99 #10 0.1935 26 62 05493655 10.99
#45 0.0820 12 38 05493150 6.99 #33 0.1130 16 46 05493309 6.99 #21 0.1590 22 55 05493507 7.99 #9 0.1960 26 62 05493663 10.99
#44 0.0860 13 40 05493168 6.99 #32 0.1160 16 46 05493317 6.99 #20 0.1610 22 55 05493515 9.99 #8 0.1990 26 62 05493689 10.99
#43 0.0890 13 40 05493176 6.99 #31 0.1200 18 49 05493333 6.99 #19 0.1660 22 55 05493531 9.99 #7 0.2010 26 62 05493697 10.99
#42 0.0935 14 43 05493184 6.99 #30 0.1285 18 49 05493358 7.99 #18 0.1695 24 58 05493549 9.99 #6 0.2040 26 62 05493713 10.99
#41 0.0960 14 43 05493200 6.99 #29 0.1360 20 52 05493374 7.99 #17 0.1730 24 58 05493564 9.99 #5 0.2055 26 62 05493721 10.99
#40 0.0980 14 43 05493218 6.99 #28 0.1405 20 52 05493390 7.99 #16 0.1770 24 58 05493572 9.99 #4 0.2090 28 66 05493739 10.99
#39 0.0995 14 43 05493234 6.99 #27 0.1440 20 52 05493416 7.99 #15 0.1800 24 58 05493598 9.99 #3 0.2130 28 66 05493747 10.99
#38 0.1015 14 43 05493242 6.99 #26 0.1470 20 52 05493432 7.99 #14 0.1820 24 58 05493606 9.99 #2 0.2210 28 66 05493770 11.99
#37 0.1040 14 43 05493259 6.99 #25 0.1495 22 55 05493440 7.99 #13 0.1850 24 58 05493614 9.99 #1 0.2280 28 66 05493788 13.99
#36 0.1065 16 46 05493267 6.99 #24 0.1520 22 55 05493457 7.99 #12 0.1890 26 62 05493630 9.99

77
 SPADE & INDEXABLE DRILLING TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Spade Drills and Indexable Drilling

Spade Drill Spade Drill Insert Indexable Drill Indexable Drill Insert

Modular Drill

Spade Drills
• A drill bit, which contains a replaceable flat-end cutting blade with two cutting lips, used for deep hole drilling or larger holes ranging from 1” to 6” diameter
• Has special shanks called Holders and Blades (Inserts) may be quickly replaced which saves time during set-up
• Allows the user to drill many different diameter holes simply by changing the blade
• Types: Universal and High Performance
Straight Flute
• Recommended for horizontal machining center applications to maximize chip evacuation
Helical Flute
• Recommended for vertical machining center applications to break chips and enhance chip removal

Modular Drills

• Offers performance levels commonly achieved with solid carbide drills

• Unique locking system requires no screws or clamps
• Insert blades can be changed using a simple provided tool
• Drill body does not require removal from the machine or holder to change the insert blade
• Insert blades may be used on different drill bodies but must be of the same seat size

Indexable Drills

• More complex in design vs. spade drills and modular drills

• Uses two inserts: the inner insert cuts the inner portion of the hole while the outer insert responsible for the final hole diameter cuts the outer portion.
• Reduces machine cycle time by producing higher penetration rates, lowering chip friction and allowing for chip control
• In addition to drilling applications, they can perform boring, facing and turning operations

Types of Inserts for Indexable Drilling

Square Trigon
• Inside insert leads the cutting edge of the outside to cut a clearance path for the • Outside insert leads the cutting edge of the inside
lead corner of the outside insert
Tool Material
High Speed Steel (HSS: M1, M2, M7, M50)
• Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost
• Works well in free cutting and carbon steels, as well as soft non-ferrous materials like aluminum, brass, bronze and copper
• Able to handle less than ideal set-ups
Cobalt (M35, M-42, T-15)
• Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS
• Very little chipping or microchipping under severe cutting conditions, allowing the tool to run 10% faster than HSS
• With the right point angle and helix, cobalt is the most cost effective for machining cast iron, heat-treatable steels and titanium alloys
• Able to handle less than ideal set-ups
Solid Carbide
• For high-performance applications: carbide can run faster and withstand higher temperatures, while providing good wear resistance
• Provides better rigidity than HSS, yielding a higher degree of dimensional accuracy, often eliminating the need to ream
• Carbide is brittle, and tends to chip when conditions are not ideal; heavy feed rates are more suitable for HSS and Cobalt tools
• Carbide is used in abrasives and tough-to-machine materials: cast iron, non-ferrous alloys, glass, plastics and composites
Coatings
TiN (Titanium Nitride – Gold Color) TiAlN (Titanium Aluminum Nitride – Violet Black Color)
• Multi-purpose coating which increases tool life and performance • For high temperature and/or abrasive conditions
• Hardness and heat resistance allows tools to run at higher speeds and feeds • Use in stainless steel, high alloy carbon steels, nickel-based high-temp alloys and
(approx. 25% to 30% higher than uncoated tools) titanium alloys. Not to be used in aluminum.
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride – Violet Gray Color) • Requires an increase of 75% to 100% in machining speeds
• Harder and more wear resistant in moderate temperatures FIREX®
• TiCN can provide the user the ability to run the job at higher spindle speeds, • Exclusive by Guhring, alternating ultra-thin coating layers combines the
especially in stainless steels, cast iron and aluminum performance benefits of single layer coatings: universal applicability of TiN,
• Requires an increase of 35% to 50% in machining speeds hardness and heat resistance of TiAlN and shock resistance of TiCN

159
Page 6
DRILLS, COUNTERSINKS & REAMER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Spotting & Step Drills,

Countersinks & Center Reamers

Spotting Drill Countersink (Single Flute) Combined Drill & Countersink (Plain Type)

Holes are drilled in a workpiece for many different reasons. Often, the process begins with a spotting operation and ends with a countersinking operation.

Spotting/Center Drills Combined Drills & Countersinks

Starting a hole with a spot drill provides a true center for more accurate drilling. As the name implies, these tools are designed to improve productivity by
Always choose a spot drill with an equal or greater angle than the drill that will performing the drill and countersink operation in one pass.
be used to make the finished hole.
TYPES
ANGLES
Plain
90° • Most common style
• Used to create a chamfer for the hole that is being produced • Standard flute clearance
• Always select a size larger than the drill to be used to create the hole
Radius
120° • Have increased flute clearance
• Used for preparing a hole for a 118° or 120° drill bit • Provide better productivity and more accurate holes than all other countersinks

140° Bell or Bugle

• For preparing a hole for a 130° or 140° high performance drill bit • Bevels the outer edge of the hole, preparing the workpiece for additional
machining processes
Countersinks & Center Reamers
ANGLES
Countersinks are versatile tools that are typically used after a hole is drilled.
They can chamfer and deburr, but their primary function is to make an angled 60°
cut at the top of a hole to form a seat for a fastener. • Specifically for creating holes that will be used to machine between centers
Center reamers are designed for countersinking holes for centers, flathead
screws and rivets. They can also be used to clean and enlarge existing holes. 82°
• Designed to create holes that match the angle of the most popular flat
TYPES and oval head screws
Single Flute 90°
• Provides the best centering of all countersinks and a smoother surface finish • Use to create holes that match the angle of flat and oval head screws, and
• Suitable for hand-held operations and production set-ups to enlarge existing holes
3 & 4 Flute
MATERIALS
• Provide the best chip clearance and are suitable when machining plastics
and non-ferrous metals such as aluminum, copper, brass and bronze High Speed Steel (M1, M2, M7, M50)
6 Flute • Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost
• Works well in free cutting and carbon steels as well as soft, non-ferrous
• Allow the highest feed rates of all countersinks materials like aluminum, brass, bronze and copper
• Provide a longer life, as cutting load is distributed across more edges
Cobalt (M-35, M-42)
Drill Point
• Better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS
• Allows user to spot drill, countersink and edge chamfer with the same tool • Very little chipping or micro chipping under severe cutting conditions, allowing
the tool to run 10% faster than HSS
CNC • With the right point angle and helix, cobalt is the most cost-effective for
• Provide the tightest tolerances machining cast iron, heat-treated steels and titanium alloys

Chatterless Solid Carbide

• Reduce vibration and noise • For high-performance applications
• Can run faster and withstand higher temperatures, while providing good wear
resistance
Jobber Length Step Drills • Carbide is brittle and tends to chip when conditions are not ideal; heavy feed
rates are more suitable for HSS and Cobalt tools
• Step drills can produce holes with two or more diameters during one set-up. • Used in abrasive and tough-to-machine materials: cast iron, non-ferrous
• The step drill is a modified standard drill and functions as a combination tool alloys, glass, plastics and composites
because of the point which is ground to a desired diameter. This implies it has the • Not recommended for hand held operations
same flute for the different diameters.
• Jobber length step drills, sometimes known as subland drills, can be used for
drilling and countersinking flat head machine screws, drilling chamfered holes
prior to tapping and drilling and counterboring cap screw clearance holes.

190
Page 7
REAMERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of ...Reamers
Straight Flute Chucking Reamer Spiral Flute Chucking Reamer

Spiral Flute Taper Shank Bridge Reamer Straight Flute Hand Expansion Reamer

As the complexity of manufactured products intensifies, so does the need to create consistent, highly tolerant holes. Reamers are the perfect solution for enlarging or
finishing an existing hole to a specific size and tolerance.

Type Flute Styles

Chucking Reamers Straight Flute
• Intended for use in drill presses, lathes and screw machines • The most common reamer
• Most commonly used style for reaming holes to a tight tolerance • 45° Chamfer angle to ease the reamer into the existing hole
• Come in straight flute, RHS/RHC, LHS/LHC and expansion styles in standard and • With straight flutes, chips are forced forward into the hole, and should be used in
jobber lengths through-hole applications only
Hand Reamers Right Hand Spiral/Right Hand Cut (RHS/RHC)
• Have a square at the end of the shank, similar to a hand tap. This allows the user • Pull chips out of an existing hole
to turn the reamer with an adjustable wrench or a standard tap wrench • Ideal for blind-hole applications
• Constructed with a tapered cutting head to help the user push the tool into • Design adds extra shear to the finished hole
the workpiece
Shell Reamers Left Hand Spiral/Right Hand Cut (LHS/RHC)
• Similar to the cutting portion of a chucking reamer • Push chips forward and are ideal for through-hole applications
• Supplied without a shank • Design provides the finest hole finish
• A straight shank or taper shank arbor is used in conjunction with the shell Taper Pin
reamer, and is used as a complete cutting tool • Have a taper of 1/4w to the foot
Pipe Reamers • Designed to ream holes into which standard taper pins will fit
• Used to prepare a hole for tapping with a taper pipe tap
• Constructed with a square end on the shank. This allows the user to turn the Straight Flute and Left Hand Spiral Taper Pin
reamer with an adjustable wrench or a standard tap wrench • Meant primarily for hand reaming
• Best results are usually obtained if the hole to be reamed is drilled a few
Expansion Reamers thousandths smaller than the small diameter of the finish-reamed hole
• Built with an adjusting screw to alter the size of the cutting head. This allows an
expansion reamer to be reground many times Helical Taper Pin
Bridge Reamers • Designed especially for the shop producing taper-pin holes by machine reaming
• Designed to enlarge and align holes for rivets • Due to the High-Spiral construction, chips do not pack in the flutes
• Primarily used in steel construction using I-beams
• Shanks come in a variety of styles for portable electric drills, drill presses and
square-drive impact wrench sockets
Special Sizes
Repairman’s Reamers
• Built for the removal of burrs in pipe and conduit, and for enlarging holes in
sheet metal Over/Under Reamers
• Come in sizes 1/1000th inches above or below standard key sizes.
Material For example, an oversize reamer measuring 0.2510w or undersize of
0.2490w are offered as alternatives to a 1/4w or 0.2500w reamer
High Speed Steel (HSS, M1, M2, M7, M50) • These sizes will allow the user to create a tighter or looser hole than
• Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost the standard fractional size
• Works well in free cutting and carbon steels, as well as soft, non-ferrous
materials such as aluminum, brass, bronze and copper Special Decimal Sizes
• Cover all sizes outside of the standard fractional, letter, wire and metric sizes
Cobalt (M-35, M-42) • Manufactured in increments of 0.0010w
• Better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS
• Very little chipping or micro chipping under severe cutting conditions, allowing Dowel Pin Sizes
the tool to run 10% faster than HSS • Help the user prepare a perfect hole for dowel pin insertion
• With the right point angle and helix, cobalt is the most cost-effective for
machining cast iron, heat-treated steels and titanium alloys
Solid Carbide Machine Reaming
• For high-performance applications. Carbide can run faster and withstand higher To 3⁄32w .003w - .006w
temperatures, while providing good wear resistance 3⁄32w to 1⁄4w .008w - .010w
• Carbide is brittle and tends to chip when conditions are not ideal; heavy feed rates 1⁄4w to 1⁄2w .012w - .015w
are more suitable for HSS and cobalt tools 1⁄2wto 1w .017w - .020w
• Used in abrasive and tough-to-machine materials: cast iron, non-ferrous alloys,
1w to 2w .020w - .025w
glass, plastics and composites
<2w .030w - .035w
Carbide Tipped
• Offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling at a reduced cost, Hand Reaming
especially in larger diameter tools All Sizes .002w - .004w

220
Page 8
COUNTERBORES

Basics of...Counterbores

Solid Pilot Counterbore for Fillister Head Screws Interchangeable Pilot Counterbore
Counterbores are used to enlarge a portion of an existing hole to hide the head of a screw or to provide a seat for a nut. They come with solid or interchangeable pilots,
and many are built for making holes for a specific type of fastener.
Types Use a Counterbore for:
Solid Pilot
• Manufactured with the pilot attached to the cutting end of the tool • Socket head cap screws
• Provide a very accurate hole • Machine screws
• Fillister head screws
Interchangeable Pilot • Spot facing
• Do not come with an attached pilot
• Separate pilot is attached by sliding the shank through a pilot-hole built
into the counterbore
• Better flexibility, as a single tool can be used in many different hole diameters
by switching the pilot Page 9

HSS & Cobalt 3 Flute Solid Pilot HSS Interchangeable Pilot Straight &
Straight Shank Counterbore Sets Taper Shank Counterbore Sets
Fractional, Wire & Metric Sizes • Complete with Pilots in fitted case
For Socket Head Cap Screws Each set includes: 13 counterbores - 26 pilots
Counterbores: 1⁄4w to 1w by 16ths
Tool Material: Pilots: 1⁄8w, 5⁄32w, 3⁄16w and 1⁄4w with 3⁄32w shanks.
HSS 3⁄16w, 7⁄32w, 1⁄4w, 9⁄32w and 5⁄16w with 5⁄32w shanks.
• Provides good wear resistance in mild steels 1⁄4w, 5⁄16w, 3⁄8w, 7⁄16w, and 1⁄2w with 3⁄16w shanks.
and nonferrous materials such as plastics, 5⁄16w, 3⁄8w, 7⁄16w, 1⁄2w, 9⁄16w and 5⁄8w with 1⁄4w shanks.
aluminum, copper, brass and bronze 3⁄8w, 7⁄16w, 1⁄2w, 9⁄16w, 5⁄8w and 3⁄4w with 5⁄16w shanks.
Cobalt Type Order # Price/Set
• Provides better wear resistance in hardness and
toughness compared to HSS Straight Shank Set 08794844 $522.23
• For use in high-tensile alloys, titanium, cast iron, Inconel Taper Shank Set 08784837 565.17
and high-nickel stainless steels
Made in USA - HSS
No. of Size Supplied Standard Pilot 1⁄64w Oversized Pilot 1⁄32w Oversized Pilot
HSS Interchangeable Pilot Straight
Pcs. Range with: Order # Order # Order # Price Ea. Shank Counterbore Sets
10 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2w, Wood 08273047 08273039 08273021 $295.54
#4, #5 #6, #8, #10 Case
For Socket Head Cap Screws
• Short Series
Made in USA - HSS Pilots Sold Separately. Refer to Page No. 249 for Pilots.
No. of Size Supplied .5mm Oversized Pilot No. of Set Consists
Pcs. Range (mm) with: Order # Price Ea. Pieces of (In.) Order # Price/Set
8 M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M14 Wood Case 08273054 $313.93 6 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2 08794018 $137.70
7 1⁄4, 3⁄8, 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, 1 08794034 206.86
Keo - M-35 Cobalt 11 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 9⁄32, 5⁄16, 11⁄32, 08794026 248.45
3⁄8, 13⁄32, 7⁄16, 15⁄32, 1⁄2
No. of Size Supplied Standard Pilot 1⁄64w Oversized Pilot 1⁄32w Oversized Pilot

Pcs. Range with: Order # Order # Order # Price Ea.

7 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 1⁄2w, Plastic 02828762 02828770 02828788 $454.80
#6, #8, #10 Case Machine Tables
Steel Worktables
• 12 Gage steel shelves will not crack, splinter or absorb liquids
• Gray enamel finish • Solid steel angle legs
• Ships fully assembled • All welded construction
HSS 3 Flute Solid Pilot Straight & Ht. L W Wt.
(In.) (In.) (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Taper Shank Metric Counterbores 2 Shelf Units
Tool Material: 30 24 18 63 BU81442766 $277.87
HSS 30 24 24 73 BU81442774 299.01
• Provides good wear resistance in 30 36 18 79 BU05304613 312.83
mild steels and nonferrous materials Features: 30 36 24 93 BU81442782 363.32 3 Shelf Unit
such as plastics, aluminum, copper, • 20° Helix 30 48 24 113 BU81442790 408.64
brass and bronze • Metric sizes fit Din standards 32 36 18 74 BU81442659 309.81 • These all steel tables are ideal for tool and
Screw Size (mm) Cutter Dia. (mm) Pilot Dia. (mm)Shank Dia. (mm) OAL (mm) Order # Price Ea. 32 36 24 88 BU81442675 338.73 die work, assembly operations, maintenance
32 48 24 109 BU81442683 423.28 projects and as platforms for drill presses,
3 6 3.4 9.525 88.9 01569987 $36.57 table saws and belt sanders
4 8 4.5 9.525 88.9 01569995 40.32 32 60 24 131 BU03036761 516.50 • Rugged steel X-bracing under 3000 shelf
5 10 5.5 9.525 127 01570001 42.57 32 60 30 152 BU81442725 560.95 units to maintain flatness while improving
6 11 6.6 9.525 127 01570019 49.31 36 48 24 147 BU81442691 487.59 strength and rigidity
8 15 9 12.7 152.4 01570027 58.26 36 48 28 160 BU81442717 512.17 • The 30wH models have a 2000 Lbs. capacity
10 18 11 12.7 152.4 01570035 67.24 36 48 34 179 BU81442758 591.58 and all shelves have turned down edges
12 20 13 12.7 152.4 01570043 78.29 36 60 30 198 BU81442733 639.03 • The 32wH models have a 2000 Lbs. capacity
14 24 15 2MT 228.6 01570050 104.66 36 72 34 263 BU97494819 793.07 with turned down edges on the top shelf and
all others have turned up edges
16 26 17 2MT 228.6 01570068 177.66 3 Shelf Units • The 36wH models have a 3000 Lbs. capacity,
20 33 21 3MT 254 01570076 277.03 32 36 18 101 BU81442667 441.84 turned down edges on all shelves, heavy-
24 40 25.4 3MT 254 01570084 354.40 32 36 24 121 BU81442709 486.26 duty legs for increased capacity and
6 Piece Set (3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm) in wooden box 01570092 291.70 32 60 30 218 BU81442741 785.31 reinforced angle iron shelves

248
LIGHT INDUSTRIAL CUTTING TOOLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Light Industrial Cutting Tools

Hex Shank Drill (For Metal)
Reduced Shank Drill (For Metal)

Spade Bit (For Wood)

Auger Bit (For Wood)

Masonry Drill (For Concrete & Rebar)

Step Drill
Whether it is metal, wood or concrete and rebar, using the right tool can makes tough jobs easier.

For Metal For Concrete & Rebar

Drilling in metal requires a tough drill bit that stays razor sharp. In construction applications, it is necessary to create holes in concrete, brick and
Jobber Length other building materials. Matching the right tool to the drill is essential to increase
• Most common style in the world productivity.
• Shank sizes always match the cutting diameter DRILL TYPES
Maintenance Length Masonry Drills
• Slightly smaller than Jobber drills, making it easier to get into tight spaces • Designed for drilling deep holes in concrete, brick and other building materials
• Often have 3-flatted shanks to reduce slippage in the drill chuck • Come with a carbide tip attached to a steel drill body, making them super tough in the most
Reduced Shank abrasive jobs
• Popular choice for maintenance and repair • When buying masonry drills, it is important to know what kind of shank and what style is
• Because the shank size is smaller than the drill diameter, they can drill holes larger than right for your job
the typical drill chuck capacity Rebar Cutters
Hex Shank Built to take on the tough job of cutting through steel rebar in concrete structures
• More common for maintenance Have replacement heads and shanks
• Typically come with a 1⁄4w hex shaped shank that fits into a quick-change chuck. This Come in complete sets
allows you to swap accessories, such as drill and driver bits BIT STYLES
Rotary
For Wood • Cut like a drill, gradually grinding the building material to create a hole
While regular drill bits will do the job, selecting a specialized tool made for cutting wood will • Require constant pressure from the user
provide added productivity and smoother holes. • Are less productive than hammer bits
Augers Hammer
• Designed for drilling deep holes in wood • Cut by combining the percussion/impact action and the rotary grinding of a hammer drill
• Equipped with a screw point, which helps start holes and prevents walking • Because of the built-in movement of the hammer drill, they require less pressure by the
• For added ease of use, shanks are hex-shaped to reduce slippage user
Spade Bits SHANK STYLES
• Most economical choice to bore fast, clean holes in wood • Spline Shank
• Deep holes are difficult to make with spade bits • Straight Shank
• SDS
Forstner Bits
• SDS-Plus
• Popular choice for cutting flat-bottomed holes in wood or complete holes in wood framing
• SDS-Max
• Equipped with a screw point, which helps start holes and prevents walking
Bell Hangers
• Long drill bits with a hole for pulling wire
• Perfect for installing telephones, stereos and other applications

Multi Diameter Step Drills

Maintenance jobs often require drilling several holes of different sizes or the enlarging of an existing hole. Using a drill bit that can cut multiple diameters saves time and effort. Step drills provide
that functionality.
DRILL TYPES Hole-Enlarging Step Drills
Multiple Hole Step Drills • Designed to make an existing hole larger in thin materials
• Designed to create multiple sized holes in thin materials • Drill bit is stepped, with larger diameters toward the shank
• Drill bit is stepped, with larger diameters toward the shank • Allows the user to cut up to 10 different sized hole diameters
• Allows the user to cut up to 13 different sized hole diameters Omni Step Drills
Single Hole Step Drills • Designed to drill perfectly round holes in thin materials
• Designed to drill perfectly round holes in thin materials • Drill bit increases in diameter toward the shank, but is not stepped
• 3-flatted shank prevents slippage in a drill chuck • Allows the user to cut a range of sizes, but does not provide the accuracy of a stepped drill
Keys to Proper Use:
• Review “Step Thickness” before selecting tool
• “Step Thickness” refers to the maximum depth a step will cut a workpiece. For example, a step drill with a “Step Thickness” of 1⁄8w can cut a maximum depth of 1⁄8w
• Step Drills are perfect for use in Steel, Copper, Brass, Aluminum and other thin materials
• Additionally, they can be used for cutting composition board, wood, Plexiglas and plasticsPage 10 Page 254

Trinado™ HSS 135° Split Point 29 Pc. Cobalt Pilot Point Drill Bit Set
Mechanics’ Length Drill Bit Sets
• PILOT POINT® tip starts on contact for clean accurate holes and
• 3-Flat shank provides strong grip in cordless power tools reduces lock-up on breakthrough
• Convenient metal index • No-Spin shank eliminates the frustration of bit spinning in the chuck
• Finish: Bronze/black oxide • Size markings are located above the shank to prevent them from
Size Range (In.) No. of Pcs. Order # Price/Set wearing away
• Tapered web provides greater durability to reduce breaking
1⁄16- 1⁄4x64ths 13 09922352 $26.90 Mfr’s #DW1269 Set Includes:
1⁄16 - 1⁄2x32nds 15 09922360 74.79 • 1⁄16, 5⁄64, 3⁄32, 7⁄64, 1⁄8, 9⁄64, 5⁄32, 11⁄64, 3⁄16, 13⁄64, 7⁄32, 15⁄64, 1⁄4, 17⁄64, 9⁄32,
1⁄16 - 3⁄8x64ths 21 09922378 67.12 19⁄64, 5⁄16, 21⁄64, 11⁄32, 23⁄64, 3⁄8, 25⁄64, 13⁄32, 27⁄64, 7⁄16, 29⁄64, 15⁄32, 31⁄64 & 1⁄2w
1⁄16 - 1⁄2x64ths 29 09922386 139.46
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
DW1269 71854269 $143.46

254
TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Taps
A tap removes material from a pre-drilled or punched hole. The result of this cutting action produces threads within the drilled hole. These threads are used in
conjunction with screws or bolts to hold two pieces of material together. The cutting edges at the front of a tap remove material from the workpiece. The chips are
stored in the flutes, or pushed forward in front of the tap, or are drawn up along the flutes, removing the chips and cutting fluids from the hole.

Terminology Styles of Taps

Tap Legend: Hand - Hand taps are popular in hand use, in general machine tapping, or CNC
A = Overall Length tapping. They are also appropriate for tapping the vast majority of materials in
B = Thread Length Including Chamfer through or blind hole conditions
C = Square Length Spiral Point - Shoot chips ahead of the cutting action, thus reducing loading and
D = Shank Diameter clogging in the flutes. Sometimes referred to as a Gun® tap which is a registered
E = Size of Square trademark of Greenfield Tap & Die
Overall Length – Length of body and the shank Spiral Flute – Draw chips out of a tapped hole where chip disposal is a problem
Thread Length – Part of the body containing the threads Thread Forming – Do not cut threads, rather they form threads, eliminating the
Chamfer – Tapered portion at the front end of the tap. Both the chamfered portion problem of chip disposal
and the first full thread beyond the chamfer produce the finished thread of the part Pipe – General purpose pipe taps are appropriate for threading a wide variety of
materials both ferrous and non-ferrous. Ground thread pipe taps are standard in
Square (Flats) – The squared end of the tap shank
American Standard Pipe Form (NPT) and American Standard Dryseal Pipe Form
Square Length – Length of the square
(NPTF). NPT threads require the use of a “sealer” like Teflon® tape or pipe
Size of Square – Thickness of the square
compound. Dryseal taps are used to tap fittings, which will give a pressure tight
Shank – Part of the tap that fits into the tap holder. The end is made square for
joint without the use of a sealer. American National Standard Straight Pipe Thread
driving and rotating the tap. The square surface is known as flats
(NPS) is used when tapping pipe couplings
Body – Made up of the flutes, land, core, diameter, thread length and chamfer.
Extension - Have extra long shanks to reach places normally inaccessible
These elements produce the threaded hole
Miniature - Recommended for miniature applications where sizes are between 00 &
Flutes – Grooves or valleys that run along a body of a tap. They provide a path for
000 sizes
the removal of chips and carry cutting fluid to the front of the tap. Increasing the
Acme - Produce transvering motions on machine tools and are extensively used to
number of flutes, increases the strength of the tap and reduces the amount of
manufacture valves, jacks and other mechanisms. Have 29 degree angles
space for chip flow
Nut - Used in nut tapping. Shank is smaller than the minor diameter which permits
Land – The area of the tap between the flutes that contains the threads
several nuts to build up on the tap at the same time. Eliminates the need to reverse
Core – Center portion of the tap that separates the flutes and provides strength to
the tap after each nut is produced
the tap. As the number of flutes increases, the core becomes larger, increasing the
Pulley - Have longer length shanks to tap pulley hubs and set screw holes
strength of the tap
Screw Thread Insert (STI) - For use in tapping holes according to screw thread
Diameter – The diameters of the threads of a tap are largest at the front, behind the
standards
chamfer. The thread diameter decreases slightly toward the shank, known as the
Coolant Fed - Fluid prevents the accumulation of chips in blind holes reducing tap
back taper. The back taper creates clearance between the workpiece and the tap
breakage
Crest - The top surface joining two sides of a thread. In an internal thread the crest
High Performance - Designed for successful threading in a variety of part materials
is at it’s minor diameter. In an external thread the crest is at the major diameter
for high and low volume applications
Base of Thread - The bottom section of the thread
Through Hole – Hole that goes all the way through the part Hand Tap Chamfers
Blind Hole – Hole that does not go all the way through the part, but the threads
must come as close as possible to the bottom of the drilled hole A chamfer is the tapered portion at the front end of the tap. Both the chamfered
Major Diameter – The largest diameter of the thread. Also known as the outside portion and the first full thread beyond the chamfer produce the finished thread of
diameter the part.
Minor Diameter – The smallest diameter of the thread. Also known as the root
diameter
Thread Height – The radial distance between the crest and the base of thread
Length of Engagement – The length of contact between two mating threaded parts
Percentage of Thread – Calculated by determining one-half the difference between
the major diameter and the minor diameter of an internal thread and dividing it by
the thread height
Pitch – The distance between a point on a screw thread and a corresponding point
on the next thread. The pitch is equivalent to one divided by the number of threads
per inch
Ground Thread – More accurate threads than “cut” taps. Held to much closer limits
and tolerances
Taper (7-10 Threads) - Also known as a starter tap, a taper tap has the longest
Tap Standards standard chamfer and requires less tapping torque.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute Plug (3-5 Threads) - The most common chamfer for use by hand or machine in
• Sets industry standards and product guidelines to insure conformity and to through or blind holes. The most efficient chamfer available.
maintain the highest product standards Modified Bottoming (2-21⁄2 Threads) - Allows for threading close to the bottom of
blind holes. Due to the slightly longer chamfer and more working teeth, this
DIN - Deutsche Industries Norm chamfer is more efficient than a bottoming chamfer.
• German standards organization responsible for setting industrial standards Bottoming (1-2 Threads) - Use for threading close to the bottom of blind holes. The
of products least efficient standard chamfer available.
• European equivalent of ANSI
Materials

High Speed Steel (HSS) Powdered Metal (PM)

• Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost
• Works well in free cutting and carbon steels as well as soft, non-ferrous
matertials like aluminum, brass, bronze and copper
Cobalt
• Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS
• Very little chipping or microchipping under severe cutting conditions, allowing the
tool to run 10% faster than HSS
• Provides superior wear life in tapping exotic alloys, good heat and
abrasion resistance
Solid Carbide & Carbide Tipped
• For high-performance applications: specially developed for machining tough
steels and abrasive materials
• Carbide-Tipped tooling offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling at a
reduced cost, especially on larger diameter tools

272 CALL MSC TODAY 800-521-9520 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 11
 TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Taps (cont’d)

Explanation of Thread Limits(H & D) Surface Treatments
Example - 1⁄4-20 NC H3
In addition to the nominal size and pitch of a tap, there is another important Oxide (Blue/Black): Prevents galling, welding and loading during the threading
dimensional factor to be considered in selecting a ground thread tap. This is operation. Increases lubricity and works well in low carbon steels, stainless
the H limit of the pitch diameter of a tap. H means (high) above basic pitch steels and ferrous (iron based) metals.
diameter(A "D" corresponds to metric threads). These tap limits have been TiN (Titanium Nitride): Provides extreme hardness and heat resistance allowing
established to provide a choice in the selection of the tap size best suited to tools to run at higher speeds. Excellent for general-purpose use. Provides
produce the class of thread desired. The difference in size from one H limit to higher lubricity for improved chip flow, reduced buildup, edge formation and
the next is 0.0005w increments for taps through 1" diameter. Sizes over 1" chipping. Recommended for use in free machining steels and irons, high
diameter are separated by .001w diameter increments. If the threads in the part tensile steels, tough machining steels and plastics.
are too loose, smaller numbers such as H1 or H2 are used. If the threads are TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride): Harder and more wear resistant than TiN under
too tight, the H limit number is increased. Proper selection of the H limit conditions of moderate cutting temperatures. Provides the ability to run the job
number ensures that the threads are within the tolerance required by the part at higher speeds. Recommended for use in tough machining steels, ductile cast
print. Best rule of thumb: always select the largest “H” limit possible to achieve iron, cast aluminum, stainless steels, high temperature alloys, copper alloys
proper class of fit and maximum tool life. and titanium.
elektraLube®: An OSG exclusive, which reduces torque and helps prevent welding,
H1 / D1 basic to basic plus .0005”
loading, and galling between the tap and the workpiece. Recommended for use in
H2 / D2 basic plus .0005” - .0010”
stainless steels, steel forgings, tool & die steels, hot & cold rolled steels, high
H3 / D3 basic plus .0010” - .0015”
nickel alloys, beryllium, copper and some aluminum alloys.
H4 / D4 basic plus .0015” - .0020”
Blue Diamond®: A Reiff & Nestor exclusive, specially treated electrochemical
H5 / D5 basic plus .0020” - .0025”
surface designed to eliminate surface welding when tapping soft, stringy materials.
H6 / D6 basic plus .0025” - .0030”
Chrome: A bright chrome-plating process developed to increase tap life an impart
Class of Fit and anti-galling surface. Considered a heavy metal and produces hazardous dust
Unified system that relates standard screw thread classes to specific tap when ground. Breathing protection is recommended when regrinding chromed
tolerance limits. tools. Recommended for use in all non-chromium materials.
Class A = External Nitride: Recommended where abrasive or wearing conditions exist. It may be used
Class B = Internal for ferrous, non-ferrous or non-metallic materials.
Class 1A & 1B – For frequent quick assembly, loose assembly FIREX®: Alternating ultra-thin coating layers that combine the performance benefits
Class 2A & 2B – Fit is medium loose to eliminate seizure in assembly. Used for of single layer coatings: universal applicability of TiN, hardness and heat resistance
screws, bolts and nuts. of TiALN and shock resistance of TiCN.
Class 3A & 3B – Accuracy of thread is required, gages are used to ensure a Calculating Tap Drill Sizes
tight fit.
For Cutting Taps
Common Trouble Sources in Tapping Tap Drill Size = Tap Basic Major Diameter - Pitch
• Using wrong style or designated tap for the job Drill Size = Major Diameter - [(.01299 x desired % of thread) ÷ Threads per Inch]
• Using dull tap Drill Size (mm) = Major Diameter – (desired % of thread x pitch (mm) ÷ 76.98)
• Workpiece material too hard or soft for the tap being used For Forming Taps
• Over-packing of chips in the flutes Tap Drill Size = Major Diameter – (Pitch ÷ 2)
• Improper pre-tapped hole conditions (Size, depth, straightness, roundness, Drill Size = Major Diameter - [(0.0068 x desired % of thread) ÷ Threads per Inch]
glazed or work-hardened surface, chips in the bottom) Drill Size (mm) = Major Diameter – (desired % of thread x pitch (mm) ÷ 147.06)
• Misalignment of the tap and the prepared hole Formulas produce threads depending on the workpiece material. Verify findings
• Lack of/or improper lubrication and application with a "Machinery Handbook", MSC Order No. 85605756.
Signs that the above are occurring may be: welding of materials being
tapped, loading, chipping and breakage of taps, poor thread finish and low Calculating Percentage of Thread
tap wear life. % of Full Thread = Threads per Inch x (Major Dia. – Selected Drill Dia.) ÷ .01299
How to Read a Tap Size
Example - 1⁄4-20NC

The 1⁄4 represents the diameter of the thread in inches. The 20 represents the number of threads per inch or TPI. Standard taps are either standard coarse series
threads NC (1⁄4-20), fine series threads NF (1⁄4-28) or extra fine series NEF (1⁄4-32). There are other standard tap designations such as NPT or NPTF for tapered pipe
threads. Special taps are usually designated NS indicating a special thread size.
Technical Info
Inch - Tap & Drill Chart 75% Thread Metric - Tap & Drill Size 70-75%
Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread
Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size
0-80 3⁄64 5-44 38 1⁄4-28 3 9⁄16-18 33⁄64 M1.6 x .35 1.25 M4.5 x .75 3.75 M12 x 1.75 Y
1-64 53 6-32 36 5⁄16-18 F 5⁄8-11 17⁄32 M2 x 0.4 1.6 M5 x .8 4.2 M14 x 2 12
1-72 53 6-40 33 5⁄16-24 I 5⁄8-18 37⁄64 M2.5 x .45 2.05 M6 x 1 5 M16 x 2 14
2-56 50 8-32 29 3⁄8-16 5⁄16 3⁄4-10 21⁄32 M3 x .5 2.5 M7 x 1 6 M18 x 2.5 15.5
2-64 50 8-36 29 3⁄8-24 Q 3⁄4-16 11⁄16 M3 x .6 2.9 M8 x 1.25 6.75 M20 x 2.5 17.5
3-48 47 10-24 25 7⁄16-14 U 7⁄8-9 49⁄64 M4 x .7 3.3 M10 x 1.5 8.5
3-56 46 10-32 21 7⁄16-20 W 7⁄8-14 13⁄16

4-40 43 12-24 17 1⁄2-13 27⁄64 1-8 7⁄8

4-48 42 12-28 15 1⁄2-20 29⁄64 1-12 59⁄64

5-40 39 1⁄4-20 7 9⁄16-12 31⁄64 1-14 15⁄16

Inch - Tap Thread Length Metric - Tap Thread Length

Thread Size Thread Length Thread Size Thread Length Thread Size Thread Length Thread Size Thread Length Thread Size Thread Length Thread Size Thread Length Thread Size Thread Length
0 5⁄16 8 3⁄4 1⁄2 121⁄32 11⁄8 29⁄16 M1.6 x .35 5⁄16 M5 x .8 7⁄8 M16 x 2 113⁄16
1 3⁄8 10 7⁄8 9⁄16 121⁄32 11⁄4 29⁄16 M2 x 0.4 7⁄16 M6 x 1 1 M18 x 2.5 113⁄16
2 7⁄16 12 15⁄16 5⁄8 113⁄16 13⁄8 3 M2.5 x .45 1⁄2 M7 x 1 11⁄8 M20 x 2.5 2
3 1⁄2 1⁄4 1 11⁄16 113⁄16 11⁄2 3 M3 x .5 5⁄8 M8 x 1.25 11⁄8 M24 x 3 27⁄32
4 9⁄16 5⁄16 11⁄8 3⁄4 2 M3.5 x .6 11⁄16 M10 x 1.5 11⁄4 M30 x 3.5 29⁄16
5 5⁄8 3⁄8 11⁄4 7⁄8 27⁄32 M4 x .7 3⁄4 M12 x 1.75 121⁄32 M36 x 4 3
6 11⁄16 7⁄16 17⁄16 1 21⁄2 M4.5 x .75 7⁄8 M14 x 2 121⁄32

273
Page 12
THREAD FORMING TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Thread Forming Taps

Where to Use Thread Forming Taps

Materials particularly well suited for thread forming include aluminum, brass, copper, lead, stainless steel, carbon steel, cast steel, leaded steel and zinc. In general,
any material which produces a stringy chip is a good candidate for cold forming threads. If the chips are powdery, the material may be too brittle. Forming taps
generate threads without producing chips. The threads produced are much stronger than those created by cut taps because of the displacements of the grain of the
metal in the workpiece. Cutting taps produce chips which may interfere with the tapping process.

Thread forming taps are also known as: Fluteless Taps, Roll Taps & Cold Forming Taps.
Major Advantages to Thread Forming
1. Chipless Tapping – no chip removal problems in blind holes
2. Stronger Threads – the grain flow of formed threads follows the contour of the thread in steel and stainless steel, resulting in greater thread strength
3. Better Thread Gaging – forming taps create their own lead therefore the possibility of producing oversized threads is greatly reduced
4. Stronger Taps – the absence for the need for flutes results in a stronger more solid tap
5. Longer Tap Life – forming taps last 3 to 20 times longer because they have no cutting edge to dull
6. More Efficient Production – longer tap life, less tap breakage and faster tapping speeds (up to 2x faster than cutting taps)
7. Ideal for Non-Lead Screw Tappers – The ability to form their own lead makes forming taps well suited for NC machines or other machines without lead screws

Guidelines For Using Thread Forming Taps

Pre-Tap Hole Size -Thread forming taps require a larger pre-tap hole size than a Hardness Size and Pitch Range
cutting tap. Tapping with too small of a pre-tap hole size results in excessive 16 Rc 1” and smaller - 8 pitch and finer
tap wear, torque and possible tap breakage up to 11⁄2” - 10 pitch and finer
Lubrication - Forming Taps require good lubrication. Cutting oils are generally 17 - 23 Rc 1" and smaller - 10 pitch and finer
preferred because of their lubricity compared to water soluble coolants 24 - 35 Rc All machine screw sizes and miniature sizes
Styles - Standard, pipe and STI 30 - 35 Rc Extreme care – miniature sizes and machine screw sizes w/ 56 T.P.I.

Surface Treatments

Oxide (Blue/Black) TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride)

• Prevents galling & welding • Increases tool life
• Recommended for ferrous materials (iron based) • Improves thread finish
• Most effective when higher tapping speeds are available
TiN (Titanium Nitride) • Recommended for use in tough machining steels, ductile cast iron &
• Increases tool life stainless steels
• Improves thread finish
• Allows for higher tapping speeds
• Recommended for use in free machining steels and irons, high tensile
steels, tough machining steels and plastics

Calculating Tap Drill Sizes for Forming Taps

Tap Drill Size = Major Diameter - (Pitch ÷ 2)
Drill Size = Major Diameter - [(0.0068 x desired % of thread) ÷Threads per Inch]
Drill Size (mm) = Major Diameter - [0.0068 x desired % of thread x pitch (mm)] ÷ 147.06
Formulas produce threads depending on the workpiece material. Verify findings with a "Machinery Handbook", MSC Order No. 85605756. Page 308
Page 13

PM HSS Thredfloer® Forming Taps - Bottoming Style

Grade: Production Features:
Chamfer: Bottoming 13⁄4 - 2 Threads • Made from powdered metal tool steel for toughness and wear resistance
• Designed for tapping difficult materials
Ground Thread • Form internal threads by displacing the metal and producing no chips
• Ground thread for better surface finish and tighter tolerances
• Recommended for soft metals, such as ductile steel, copper, brass and aluminums Need More Information?
• Larger initial tap holes required • Refer to Page No. 308 for Technical Information
Fractional Sizes
List BXSG List BXSG
Thread Size Thread Limit OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. Thread Size Thread Limit OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea.
4-40 H3 17⁄8 49719917 $15.59 1⁄4-20 H6 21⁄2 49720113 $13.14 Metric Sizes
4-40 H4 17⁄8 49719925 15.59 1⁄4-28 H4 21⁄2 49720147 13.14 Thread Thread OAL List BXMSG Thread Thread OAL List BXMSG
6-32 H3 2 49719941 12.75 1⁄4-28 H5 21⁄2 49720154 13.14 Size Limit (In.) Order # Price Ea. Size Limit (In.) Order # Price Ea.
6-32 H4 2 49719958 12.75 3⁄8-16 H6 215⁄16 49720295 16.93 M3x0.5 D3 115⁄16 49716574 $16.21 M6x1 D5 21⁄2 49716657 $13.81
8-32 H3 21⁄8 49719982 12.75 3⁄8-16 H7 215⁄16 49720303 16.93 M3x0.5 D6 115⁄16 49716582 16.21 M6x1 D9 21⁄2 49716665 13.81
8-32 H4 21⁄8 49719990 12.75 3⁄8-24 H5 215⁄16 49720345 16.93 M3.5x0.6 D4 2 49716590 13.31 M8x1.25 D5 223⁄32 49716673 15.76
10-24 H3 23⁄8 49720022 12.75 3⁄8-24 H6 215⁄16 49720352 16.93 M3.5x0.6 D7 2 49716608 13.31 M8x1.25 D10 223⁄32 49716681 16.07
10-24 H4 23⁄8 49720030 12.75 5⁄16-18 H6 223⁄32 49720196 15.15 M4x0.7 D4 21⁄8 49716616 13.31 M10x1.5 D6 215⁄16 49716699 17.88
10-32 H3 23⁄8 49720063 12.75 5⁄16-18 H7 223⁄32 49720204 15.15 M4x0.7 D7 21⁄8 49716624 13.31 M10x1.5 D11 215⁄16 49716707 17.88
10-32 H4 23⁄8 49720071 12.75 5⁄16-24 H5 223⁄32 49720246 15.15 M5x0.8 D4 23⁄8 49716632 13.31 M12x1.75 D6 33⁄8 49716715 30.97
1⁄4-20 H5 21⁄2 49720105 13.14 5⁄16-24 H6 223⁄32 49720253 15.15 M5x0.8 D8 23⁄8 49716640 13.31 M12x1.75 D12 33⁄8 49716723 30.97

308
HIGH PERFORMANCE TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...High Performance Taps

Spiral Point Material Specific Color Band Tap Spiral Flute
High Performance Taps are designed and manufactured for successful threading in a variety of part materials for high and low volume applications. These materials
include aluminum, stainless steels, nickel alloys, titanium alloys, mold steels, irons, brass, bronze and plastics. Special geometries, tap surface treatments and
premium steels interact to offer the highest level of performance.
Special tool geometry creates less torque during tapping which allows better removal of chips so the tool can run cooler. CNC necked design taps increase the flow of
coolant to the cutting teeth and reduces surface contact between the tool and the workpiece for more efficient threading.

Materials

HSS Vanadium (HSSE) VC-10

• 3% Vanadium • Powder metallurgy HSS
• Abrasive wear resistance for increased toughness & tool life • Offers increased wear resistance & tool life
• In addition to general applications, provides long life when tapping materials
like stainless steels & high silicon aluminums Powdered Metal (PM) Cobalt
• Provides superior wear life in tapping exotic alloys, good heat and
abrasion resistance
Cobalt HSS-E
• 8% Cobalt Solid Carbide & Carbide Tipped
• High abrasive wear resistance • For high-performance applications: specially developed for machining tough
• High heat hardness steels and abrasive materials
• Best for heat resisting alloys, high speed tapping & dry applications • Carbide-Tipped tooling offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling
at a reduced cost, especially on larger diameter tools

Surface Treatments Chamfers

Oxide (Blue/Black)
• Prevents galling & welding. Recommended for Ferrous Materials (Iron Based)
Nitride
• A penetrating treatment giving a very hard thin shell or “case” on the tap’s thread
section which raises surface hardness appreciably
• Recommended where abrasive or premature wearing conditions exist
TiN (Titanium Nitride)
• Increases tool life and improves thread finish. Allows for higher tapping
speeds. Recommended for use in free machining steels and irons, high
tensile steels, tough machining steels and plastics Plug (3-5 Threads) - The most common chamfer for use by hand or machine in
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride) through or blind holes. The most efficient chamfer available
• Increases tool life. Improves thread finish. Most effective when higher
tapping speeds are available. Recommended for use in tough machining Modified Bottoming (2-21⁄2 Threads) - Allows for threading close to the bottom
steels, ductile cast iron, cast aluminum, stainless steel, high temperature of blind holes. Due to the slightly longer chamfer and more working teeth, this
alloys, copper alloys and titanium chamfer is more efficient than a bottoming chamfer
FIREX®
• Alternating ultra-thin coating layers combine the performance benefits of Bottoming (1-2 Threads) - Use for threading close to the bottom of blind holes.
single layer coatings: universal applicability of TiN, hardness and heat- The least efficient standard chamfer available
resistance of TiALN and shock resistance of TiCN

Page 322
Page 14

High Performance Tap Selector for Exotic Materials

Series Tap Type Style Tap Material Tap Application
8301 & 8351 Spiral Point; Oxide, TiN, TiCN Plug Vanadium High Speed Steel Stainless & Alloy Steel, less than 30 Rc
8304 & 8354 Spiral Flute; Oxide, TiN, TiCN Modified Bottoming Vanadium High Speed Steel Stainless & Alloy Steel, less than 30 Rc
8701 Extension Spiral Point Plug Vanadium High Speed Steel Stainless & Alloy Steel, less than 30 Rc
8314 Extension Spiral Flute Modified Bottoming Vanadium High Speed Steel Stainless & Alloy Steel, less than 30 Rc
8321 Slow Spiral Flute NPT & NPTF Vanadium High Speed Steel Stainless & Alloy Steel, less than 30 Rc
8330 Hand Plug Cobalt High Speed Steel Mold Steel, 30-45 Rc
8320 Taper Pipe Straight Flute Cobalt High Speed Steel Mold Steel, 30-45 Rc
8904 Spiral Flute Modified Bottoming Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Titanium, less than 30 Rc
8601 & 8651 Spiral Point; Oxide & Nitride Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Nickel Base & Exotic Alloy, less than 30 Rc
8801 Spiral Point Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Nickel Base & Exotic Alloy, less than 30 Rc
8604 & 8654 Spiral Flute Modified Bottoming Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Nickel Base & Exotic Alloy, less than 30 Rc
8804 Spiral Flute Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Nickel Base & Exotic Alloy, less than 30 Rc
8401 Spiral Point STI Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Nickel Base Alloy
8404 Spiral Flute STI Modified Bottoming Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Nickel Base Alloy
8901 & 8951 Left Hand Spiral Flute Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Titanium, Titanium Alloys, Magnesium, Beryllium, Soft Plastics
8954 Spiral Flute Modified Bottoming Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel Titanium, Titanium Alloys, Magnesium, Beryllium, Soft Plastics
8500 Forming Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel All Alloy Steels under 35 Rc, Stainless Steels
8502 Forming Bottoming Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel All Alloy Steels under 35 Rc, Stainless Steels
8510 Forming Plug Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel All Alloy Steels under 35 Rc, Stainless Steels
8512 Forming Bottoming Cobalt, Vanadium Premium Steel All Alloy Steels under 35 Rc, Stainless Steels

322
PIPE TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Pipe Taps

NPT / NPTF Interrupted Thread

Pipe Taps are used to cut internal threads in parts or fittings that will be mated with threaded pipe or fittings to make a pressure tight joint. Tapping pipe threads
requires higher cutting forces than regular machine thread tapping, because pipe threads require 100% thread depth versus approximately 75% thread depth for
machine threads, and all threads on tapered pipe taps are cutting, where as, only the chamfer threads on machine taps are cutting.
Types Styles
NPT – American National Standard Taper Pipe Threads
• For general use Regular Hook
• Assembly requires a thread sealant or Teflon® tape • General purpose for ferrous and non-ferrous materials producing small easily
broken chips
ANPT – Aeronautical National Form Taper Pipe Threads
• Same as NPT except closer gage tolerances required Low Hook
• Used for Cast Iron and Brass (materials with granular chips)
NPTF – Dryseal American National Standard Tapered Pipe Threads
• Assembly does not require a thread sealant. Seal is created by metal High Hook
to metal contact • Used for soft gummy material that tend to tear rather than cut clean and for
NPS - American National Standard Straight Pipe materials that produce stringy chips
• Threads in pipe couplings Spiral Flute
NPSC – American National Standard Straight Pipe • Draws chips out of a hole where chip disposal is a problem
• Threads in pipe couplings
NPSM – American National Standard Straight Pipe Forming
• Threads for free-fitting mechanical joints for fixtures • Forms internal threads by displacing the metal and produces no chips
NPSF – Dryseal American National Standard Fuel Internal Straight Pipe Threads Short Projection
BSPP – British Internal Straight Parallel Pipe Thread full form for mechanical joints • Designed for shallow hole applications
BSPT – British Internal Tapered Parallel Pipe Thread full form for pressure tight
joints Interrupted Threads
• Odd fluted tap with every other thread removed
Surface Treatments • Allows heavier chip to be cut, less drag and better coolant flow
• Requires less tapping torque
Oxide (Blue/Black)
• Prevents galling & welding Extension Taps
• Recommended for Ferrous Materials (Iron Based) • Allow greater reach in tapping parts
Chrome
• Increases tap life PTF-SAE Short
• Prevents galling • Dryseal form with short projection to be used where hole depth has restrictions
• Recommended for use in all non-chromium materials
Nitride
Guidelines for Using Pipe Taps
• A penetrating treatment giving a very hard thin shell or “case” on the tap’s
thread section which raises surface hardness appreciably • Proper hole size and depth, be it straight drilled or taper reamed
• Recommended where abrasive or premature wearing conditions exist • Rigid fixturing of part
TiN (Titanium Nitride) • Rigid machine spindle with enough torque to drive the tap
• Increases tool life • A generous and constant flow of cutting fluid
• Improves thread finish • Proper gages to check threads
• Allows for higher tapping speeds
• Recommended for use in free machining steels and irons, high tensile steels, NPT & NPS Pipe Tap Thread Lengths
tough machining steels and plastics
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride)
Thread Size Thread Length (In.) Thread Size Thread Length (In.)
• Harder and more wear resistant than TiN under conditions of moderate
1⁄16-27 11⁄16 3⁄4-14 13⁄8
cutting temperatures 1⁄8-27S 3⁄4 1-11-1⁄2 13⁄4
• Provides the ability to run the job at higher speeds 1⁄8-27 3⁄4 11⁄4-111⁄2 13⁄4
• Recommended for use in tough machining steels, ductile cast iron, cast 1⁄4-18 11⁄16 11⁄2-111⁄2 13⁄4
aluminum, stainless steels, high temperature alloys, copper alloys and 3⁄18-18 11⁄16 2-11-1⁄2 13⁄4
1⁄2-14 13⁄8
titanium
Blue Diamond®
• A special electro chemical surface treatment designed to eliminate surface Tap Drill Size
welding and promote chip flow when tapping soft stringy materials and
stainless steel Thread Size NPT Drill Size NPS Drill Size Thread Size NPT Drill Size NPS Drill Size
elektraLUBE® 1⁄16-27 D 1⁄4 3⁄4-14 59⁄64 15⁄16
1⁄8-27 R S 1-11-1⁄2 15⁄32 13⁄16
• An industry exclusive introduced by OSG 1⁄4-18 7⁄16 29⁄64
• Reduces torque to prevent welding, loading and galling between the tap and 11⁄4-111⁄2 11⁄2 133⁄64
3⁄8-18 37⁄64 19⁄32 11⁄2-111⁄2 147⁄64 13⁄4
the workpiece 1⁄2-14 23⁄32 47⁄64 2-11-1⁄2 27⁄32 27⁄32
• Recommended for use in stainless steels, steel forgings, tool & die steels,
hot & cold rolled steels, high nickel alloys, beryllium, copper and some Verify findings with a "Machinery Handbook", MSC Order No. 64367915.
aluminum alloys
Materials
High Speed Steel (HSS) HSS Vanadium (HSSE)
• Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost • 3% Vanadium
• Works well in free cutting and carbon steels as well as soft, non-ferrous • Abrasive wear resistance for increased toughness & tool life
matertials like aluminum, brass, bronze and copper • In addition to general applications, provides long life when tapping materials
Cobalt like stainless steels & high silicon aluminums
• Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS Carbide Tipped
• Very little chipping or micro-chipping under severe cutting conditions, • Offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling at a reduced cost,
allowing the tool to run 10% faster than HSS especially on larger diameter tools

358
Page 15
 EXTERNAL THREADING TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...External Threading

Round Adjustable Die Hex Die Thread Chaser Thread Roll

External threading is accomplished by using a variety of cutting tools design for cutting threads on the outside diameter of a workpiece.

Dies
Die Types:
Two Piece Die Blank Systems ( Little Giant® )
Round Adjustable Dies • Collet system designed for greater die adjustability for new threading or
• Originates a new thread thread repair
• Ideal for maintenance jobs • Consists of a cap and a guide(dies not included)
• Will cut external thread when held in a die stock
• Chamfered on both faces – one side has a 2-3 thread chamfer for threading, the Accessories:
other side has 1 – 1-1/2 thread chamfer for threading close to the shoulder • Die Stock - Holds round adjustable dies but specifically designed
• Standard in right hand Unified and American National Thread Form for holding open type adjustment dies
• Die Adapter - Converts a round die into a hex die. Good for jobs
Hex Rethreading Dies where die stocks can not be used due to lack of space
• Ideal for maintenance jobs • Die Holders - These tools have a straight shank and are used to
• Designed to repair a bruised or rusty thread hold round split adjustable dies
• Can be used in free machining materials
Die Materials
• Most cost effective rethreading tool available
• Can be used with a wrench instead of a die holder or die stock HSS – Used for cutting new threads in mild steels and non-ferrous materials
Carbon Steel – Used for rethreading and cleaning of threads

Chasers and Thread Rolls

Thread chasers are used to cut external threads and consist of self-opening die heads and collapsing taps. An advantage of chasing is after cutting the threads, the die
head self-opens and retracts eliminating the need to be backed off the work piece. All chasers protrude slightly from the face of the die heads to permit close to the
shoulder threading.
• For machine threading applications
• Supplied in sets of 4
• Ground thread for better surface finish and tighter tolerances
• For use in a variety of ferrous and non-ferrous materials
Chaser Styles: Chasers can be used for:
Geometric® • Small or large diameter work on excessively abrasive or hard materials
• Available in Standard or Projection • Fast changes on short run jobs or minimum set up changes for long run jobs
• Projection type offers more regrind life therefore more parts can be produced • For single or multiple spindle machine tools
in between regrinds
• Will fit styles D, DD, DS, DSA & DJ die heads Thread Rolls:
• Reversible, can be used on both sides
H&G™ Inserts • Sold in sets of 3
• Available in 00 Series or 100 Series • Designed for rolling threads from the end of the workpiece
• 100 Series Chasers will fit 101, 102 and 103 series die heads • Style N - threads diameters from #6 - 1-1⁄4”
• Used with Carriers that hold the chaser in place. The range of the carrier • For rotating or stationary use
allows threads of different diameters to be cut • Available in low or standard helix Page 371
Page 16

HSS & Carbon Round Split Adjustable Dies

13⁄16 - 2w OD
HSS Carbon NC & NF Thread
Thread Interstate Made in USA CLE-LINE List 0710 Greenfield List 6382 Made in USA Greenfield List 382
Size Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
13⁄16wOD
0-80 03771037 $10.25 88421011 $27.42
1-64 03771060 10.25
1-72 03771094 10.25
2-56 03771128 10.25 88421029 24.23
2-64 03771151 10.25 Features:
3-48 03771185 10.25 88421037 22.97 • For use in hand die stocks or die holders
• Adjustment is made by means of a screw in the die or in the
3-56 03771219 10.25
4-36 03771243 10.25 die stock
4-40 03771276 9.74 03690278 $27.05 88421045 18.50 • Carbon Steel - Used for rethreading and cleaning of threads
4-48 03771300 9.74 03690302 27.05 • HSS - Used for cutting new threads in mild steels and
5-40 03771334 9.74 03690336 27.29 40233603 $37.02 88420013 $38.17 88421052 19.64 nonferrous materials
5-44 03771367 9.74 03690369 27.29 40233629 37.02 40391922 38.17 Need More Information?
6-32 03771391 9.74 03690393 27.29 40233645 37.72 88420021 38.90 88421060 19.64 • Refer to Page No. 371 for Technical Information
6-40 03771425 9.74 03690427 27.29 40233660 37.02 40391930 38.17
8-32 03771458 9.74 03690450 27.05 40233686 37.02 88420039 38.17 88421078 19.64
8-36 03771482 9.74 03690484 27.29 40233702 37.02 40391948 38.17
10-24 03771516 9.74 03690518 27.29 40233728 39.20 88420047 40.42 88421086 19.64
10-32 03771540 9.74 03690542 27.05 40233744 37.02 88420054 38.17 88421094 19.64
Continued on next page

371
 THREAD MILLING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
THREAD MILLING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
®
O.K. Jr. Tap & Round Adjustable Die Sets
Size Range No. of Pcs.1 1 Ea. Tap & Adj. Die Sizes Accessories Mfr’s # Order # Price/Set HSS Taps & Carbon Dies
0-80 to 10-24 18 0-80, 1-72, 2-56, 3-48, 4-40, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock B8 88435722 $286.56
NC, NF 6-32, 8-32, 10-24 Features:
4 -40 to 1⁄4 16 4-40, 6-32, 8-32, 10-24, 10-32, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock B7 88435714 285.20 • Contain the most popular sizes in the
NC, NF 12-24, 1⁄4-20 automotive and maintenance fields
4-40 to 12-28 22 4-40, 4-48, 6-32, 6-40, 8-32, 8-36, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock B10 88435730 268.34 • Round Dies are chamfered on both faces. One
NC, NF 10-24, 10-32, 12-24, 12-28 side of the die has a 2 to 3 thread chamfer for
threading, the other side has a 1 to 11⁄2 thread
1⁄4
to 1⁄2 12 1⁄4-20, 5⁄16-18, 3⁄8-16, 7⁄16-14, 1⁄2-13 Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock C5 88435748 252.73 chamfer for threading close to a shoulder
NC • Steel case
1⁄4
to 1⁄2 24 1⁄4-20, 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock 3100 88435763 407.22
NC, NF, NPT 7⁄16-14, 7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 1⁄8-27 NPT

1⁄4
to 1 23 1⁄4-20, 5⁄16-18, 3⁄8-16, 7⁄16-14, 1⁄2-13, 5⁄8-11, 2 Tap Wrenches & 3 Die Stocks 407 88435755 911.41
NC 3⁄4-10, 7⁄8-9, 1-8
1⁄4
to 1 47 1⁄4-20, 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24, 2 Tap Wrenches & 3 Die Stocks 4312 88435771 1469.65
NC, NF, NS, NPT 7⁄16-14, 7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 9⁄16-12, 9⁄16-18,
5⁄8-11, 5⁄16-18, 3⁄4-10, 3⁄4-16, 7⁄8-9, 7⁄8-14, 1-8,

1-14 NS, 1⁄8-27 NPT

Tap Sizes
4-40 to 1, M14, M18 50 4-40, 6-32, 8-32, 10-24, 10-32, 12-24, 1⁄4-20, 4 Tap Wrenches & 3 Die Stocks 4700 88435789 1367.53
NC, NF, NS, NPT 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24, 7⁄16-14,
7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 9⁄16-12, 9⁄16-18, 5⁄8-18,
3⁄4-16, 7⁄8-14, 1-14NS, 1⁄8-27NPT, 1⁄4-18NPT,
1⁄8-18NPT, 1⁄2-14NPT, M14x1.25, M18x1.5

Die Sizes
1⁄4-20, 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24,
7⁄16-14, 7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 9⁄16-18, 5⁄8-18,
3⁄4-16, 7⁄8-14, 1-14 NS

1
All sets include screwdriver not reflected in No. of pieces.

Basics of...Thread Milling

Straight Helical
A thread mill will cut both internal and external threads and can cut any large size internal thread as long as the pitch stays the same.
For example: an 11⁄16-16 internal thread can be cut by a thread mill that is rated for the 9⁄16-16 thread.
Materials Coatings
Cobalt TiN
• Works well in aluminum • Provides extreme hardness and heat resistance allowing tools to run at higher
• Shock resistance of cobalt useful when thread milling on older machines speeds
• Excellent for general-purpose use. Provides higher lubricity for freer chip flow,
Carbide reduced buildup, edge formation and chipping
• Higher density and greater hardness allow maximum feeds and speeds • Recommended for use in free machining steels and irons, high tensile steels,
• Advanced tool coatings TiALN and FIREX® give maximum performance tough machining steels and plastics
TiCN
• The hard, smooth finish increases tool life and improves thread finish
Types • For machining steels, ductile cast iron, cast aluminum, stainless, high
temperature alloys and copper alloys
Helical
• High positive design distributes the chip load for a smoother cut. Great in TiAIN
tough and thin walled materials • Broad based application range, works well in highly abrasive materials
• Use in stainless steel, carbon steels, nickel-based high temp alloys, cast iron
Straight and titanium
• General use thread milling tool. Strong, fast cutting, great in rigid set ups • Enables the thread milling tool to be operated at higher cutting speeds
Single Profile FIREX®
• Provides controllable pitch diameter and cut length. Will cut a range of pitches, • Alternating ultra-thin coating layers combine the performance of single
very low side cutting pressure, great in unfavorable length to diameter ratios layer coatings
• Universal applicability of TiN, hardness and heat resistance of TiALN and
Staggered Tooth shock resistance of TiCN
• Every other tooth is removed in a staggered pattern to help distribute the
chip load for a smoother cut
Advantages of Thread Milling
• Complete operation in one set up
When to Use a Thread Mill Instead of a Tap • Lower horsepower required than for tapping
• For production threading over 3⁄8” • No upper limits to bore size. One tool will cut many different diameters
• When producing a wide variety of parts, threads and materials on the • Short easily manageable chips produced
same machine • Threads can be machined within 1/2 pitch of the bottom of blind holes
• Tapping can be performed in almost any material up to a hardness of • One tool will cut right and left hand threads
50HRC while Thread Milling can be performed in materials up to 60HRC • Hard materials are easier to thread mill compared to tapping
• Thread Mills are great for threading exotic materials and soft, non-ferrous • Better finish produced over tapping
alloys where tap breakage is often a problem • Will easily machine threaded parts with interrupted cuts
• Smaller cutting forces generated allows threading of thin walled parts • Better thread quality in soft gummy materials where taps normally tear
the material
• Shorter cycle times due to higher cutting speeds and rapid feed rates

391
Page 17
THREAD REPAIR TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Locking
Keys

Basics of...Thread Repair

Length

External Internal
Thread Thread

Free Running Screw Locking Tangless Keylocking Self-Locking

Thread Repair Inserts are used to quickly and permanently restore tapped holes, which have been stripped or damaged due to wear, corrosion or over torque.
4 Easy Steps for Coil Type Inserts Tools
Hand Installation
Drill – Drill hole
• Used to install inserts in tapped holes
Tap – Tap the hole to a sufficient depth to accommodate the insert length and
• Thread size of the insert to be installed will determine the choice of tool:
bolt being used
To install coarse threads use a Mandrel
Install – Install the appropriate length insert. Use the installation tool and wind
To install fine threads use a Prewinder
the insert into the hole until the top coil is ¼ - ½” below the surface Hand Extraction
Tang Removal – Remove the tang by using a break-off rod or a punch that fits • Used to remove inserts from a tapped hole
inside the insert • Place tool inside hole with insert to be removed. Strike head of the tool
Coil Type Inserts with a light blow and turn counter clockwise, maintaining steady
downward pressure
Free Running Tang Break-Off
• Can be used to repair tapped holes, which have been stripped or • Removes tang after installation to prevent interference with the end of an
damaged due to wear, corrosion or over-torque assembled bolt
• Coil tension holds insert in place without placing tension on • Available for use with sizes up to ½” and M12 nominal diameter
surrounding material Power
• Vibration & impact resistant • Used for high volume production
• Can be hand held or mounted on a work station
Screw Locking
• Consists of an air motor, adapter and front end assembly
• Features a locking mechanism that grips the bolt and prevents it from
• Front end assembly consists of: Prewinder
loosening under vibration or impact
• Eliminates the need for thread locking mechanisms Mandrel
• Allows repeated assembly and disassembly without appreciable loss of self- Spacers
locking torque Screw Thread Insert (STI) Taps
Tanged • For use in tapping holes according to screw thread standards
• Tangs must be removed to eliminate interference with the end of the Materials
assembled bolt
• Operation is automatic and can be operated with one hand Carbon Steel
• Tang break off tool is required • Standard, general purpose material
Tangless Stainless Steel
• Eliminates the need for a tang break-off tool • Corrosion resistant
• Installs quickly and easily from either end • Ideal for original equipment applications, repair and overhaul
Titanium
Strip Feed Reels • Superior strength to weight ratio
• Bulk inserts mounted on plastic strips available in reels of 500 or 1000 • Corrosion resistant
• Increases installation rates by minimizing handling • Excellent low pressure stability
• Used with power installation tooling to support high volume production
requirements Nitronic 60™
• Compatible with stainless steel screws
Surface Treatments for Coil Type Inserts • Ideal for vacuum environments
• Particle-free, non-magnetic with excellent gall resistance
®
Primer Free II
• Contains no chromates; RoHS compliant Non-Coil Type Inserts
• Eliminates need for zinc primer Solid
• Prevents galvanic corrosion between insert and parent material • Designed to fill holes that are too large or relocated holes that have been
• Eliminates locking torque issues associated with primers drilled or tapped in the wrong location
• Improves installation productivity Self-Locking
• Provides additional lubrication facilitating insert installation • Repairs stripped or worn threads in jigs, fixtures, bolster plates, dies and
Gall Resistant machine tools
• Material: Nitronic 60™ • Features a locking element to hold insert securley in place and will not loosen
• Requires no additional coatings or plating under vibration
• Non-magnetic & particle free Keylocking
• Ideal for use in vacuum environments • Features 2 or 4 locking keys that provide superior holding power in a variety
Dry Film Lubricant of materials
• Provides additional lubrication in high friction applications • Inserts with internal threads of size M7 or larger are furnished with 4 locking
• Temperature resistant up to 400° F keys, sizes smaller than M7 are supplied with 2 locking keys
• Contains corrosion resistant properties
Solid Thread Insert Styles
Thread Repair Kits • Thin Wall – Designed for applications where wall thickness or weight
is not an issue
• A convenient way to quickly repair tapped holes which have been stripped • Heavy-Duty – Most commonly used insert, available with coarse and
or damaged fine threads
• Most kits (unless otherwise noted) contain: Drills, taps, installation tools, • Extra Heavy-Duty – Designed with increased wall thickness and greater
tang break-off tools and a quantity of inserts external thread area for superior pull-out strength and holding power.
• Available in Inch, Metric, Spark Plug or Pipe Thread series In high sheer strength materials: provides comparable holding power
to heavy inserts. In low sheer strength materials: provides maximum
holding power and pull-out strength

400
Page 18
END MILLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...End Mills

End Mills are used for milling, profiling, contouring, slotting, counterboring, drilling and reaming.

Cutting Tool Materials End Mill Type

High Speed Steel (HSS): Provides good wear resistance and costs less than cobalt or carbide end
mills. HSS is used for general purpose milling of both ferrous and non-ferrous materials.
Cobalt (M-42: 8% Cobalt): Provides better wear resistance, higher hot hardness and toughness
than high speed steel. There is very little chipping or microchipping under severe cutting
conditions allowing the tool to run 10% faster than HSS, resulting in excellent metal removal
rates as well as good finishes. This material, combined with the proper geometry has proven the
most cost-effective for machining cast iron, heat treated steels and titanium alloys.
Powdered Metal (PM) Cobalt: A cost effective alternative to solid carbide, powdered metal is
tougher and less prone to breakage. Tools perform well in materials <30RC. PM is used in high-
shock and high-stock applications such as roughing.
Solid Carbide: Primarily used in finishing applications, carbide provides several advantages over
HSS or cobalt materials. Carbide can run much faster because of the material’s extreme
hardness. This allows the cutter to withstand high cutting temperatures and provides excellent
wear resistance. Carbide also provides better rigidity than HSS, which enables the end mill to
provide a higher degree of dimensional accuracy and superior surface finishes. Carbide provides
the user with the ability to run faster with less tool wear. However, the user should be aware that
carbide’s hardness comes at the expense of its toughness. Carbide is brittle and tends to chip
when conditions are not ideal, rather than wear. Heavy feed rates are more suitable for HSS and
cobalt tools. Carbide end mills, which can be run 2-3X faster than HSS, are best for maximizing
speed and tool life.
Carbide-Tipped: Offering some of the advantages of solid carbide tooling, carbide is brazed to the
cutting edges of steel tool bodies. This is particularly a cost-effective option for larger diameter
tools.
Finishing End Mills
Square End: Used for general milling applications
Ball End: Used for shallow slotting, contour milling and pocketing applications. Used to produce
a radius in the bottom of slots or pockets for added strength. Also used to create compound
curves for molds and dies where sharp corners must be avoided.
Corner Radius: End mill with radius ground on tops of flutes to help reduce chipping on the tip.
These are best used for mold applications, removing more material faster than ball end mills.
Tapered: Results in faster and freer cutting due to more evenly formed chips over the entire
length of the flute. Also has improved resistance to both operating side thrusts and deflections
due to constant helix.
Roughing End Mills
In order to improve productivity over a conventional end mill, the roughing end mill (also know
as a “hog mill”) was designed not to last longer, but to remove more material by taking heavier
cuts in a fixed amount of time, without creating vibration. Ideal for today’s rigid and powerful
CNC machinery.
Coarse Profile: This is the most commonly found profile. It is excellent in deep slotting
conditions and heavy side cuts, and its design draws the least amount of power consumption. It
is recommended for heavy machining conditions where high metal removal rates are required.
Fine Profile: Designed to increase tool life over a coarser profile, this style is recommended for
profiling operations, but NOT in the following conditions: (Depth of Cut) x (Width of Cut) >
Diameter squared (D2).
The fine profile has a shape, which provides the tool with a stronger edge that will last longer
and permits a better surface finish on the workpiece. Works well in harder materials such as
Inconel and Hastelloy.

Flute Types
Two Flute: The two-flute end mill has the greatest amount of flute space allowing for more chip
carrying capacity. Used primarily in slotting and pocketing of non-ferrous materials where chip
removal is a concern.
Three Flute: While this tool has the same flute space as two flutes, it has a larger cross sectional
area providing for greater strength and the ability to pocket and slot both ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.
Four/Multiple Flute: Ideal for peripheral and finish milling. The additional flutes allow faster feed
rates, but due to the reduced flute space, chip removal may be a problem. Produces a much
finer finish than two and three flute tools.

End Cut Types

Centercutting: The tools have one or more cutting edges at the tip to allow the user to plunge,
drill or ramp into a cut. This type of tool offers the user the greatest variety of applications.
Non-Centercutting: Peripheral teeth allow the user to side (radial) cut or contour an exterior
surface. Used in applications where plunge cutting is not necessary.
End Mill Selection Summary
Shank Types
• Select the shortest possible end mill for the greatest rigidity
Plain Shank: The most common, used in conjunction with a collet type holder • Select two or three flutes for slotting or heavy stock removal
Weldon Shank: The shank of the tool has 1 or 2 flats with set screws in holder that tighten on • Select multiple flutes for finishing and greater rigidity
flanks of flats to hold the end mill, preventing it from rotating. • Use the largest diameter possible for added strength and rigidity
• Use cobalt, PM/Plus, and carbide for tougher and harder materials, and for high
Surface Treatments production applications
• Apply coatings for higher feeds, speeds, and tool life
TiN (Titanium Nitride): Provides extreme hardness and heat resistance allowing tools coated with
TiN to run at higher speeds and feeds. Excellent for general-purpose use, TiN provides higher Common Milling Problems & Solutions
lubricity for freer chip flow, reduced buildup edge formation and cratering. Use caution on non-
ferrous materials because of a tendency to gall. Requires an increase of 25% to 30% in Excessive Chatter
machining speeds vs. uncoated tools. Problem: Vibration and sound are excessive when the tool engages the workpiece
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride): Harder and more wear resistant than TiN under conditions of Possible Solutions:
moderate cutting temperatures. TiCN can provide the users the ability to run the job at higher 1.Increase your feed
spindle speeds (50% over TiN), especially in stainless steels. Use caution on non-ferrous 2.Reduce your cutting forces by reducing speed and/or feed or axial and/or radial depth of cut
materials because of a tendency to gall. Requires an increase of 35% to 50% in machining 3.Increase your system’s rigidity by changing over to a stub length end mill or improving your
speeds vs. uncoated tools. workpiece fixturing
TiAlN (Titanium Aluminum Nitride): Ideal for conditions where extremely high temperatures are 4.Change geometry – use an end mill with variable flute spacing or a small circular margin
generated, TiAlN enables the users to increase the surface feet per minute (SFM), extend tool life Poor Surface Finish
and use less coolant. Ideal for stainless steel, high alloy carbon steels, nickel-based high- Problem: Work surface looks uneven and feels rough
temperature alloys and titanium alloys. Use caution in non-ferrous material because of a Possible Solutions:
tendency to gall. Requires an increase of 75% to 100% in machining speeds vs. uncoated tools. 1.Increase system rigidity
AlTiN (Aluminum Titanium Nitride): Used for machining aircraft/aerospace materials, nickel alloys, 2.Increase speed
stainless steel and titanium. Allows for aggressive speeds and feeds. Used in dry machining of 3.Reduce Feed
cast irons, nodular iron and selected carbon steel. Requires an increase of 75-100% in 4.Change to higher helix geometry
machining speeds vs. uncoated tools. 5.Change to an end mill with more flutes
Laser Coating: Used for high speed finishing and light metals such as aluminum. Laser works Excessive Wear of End Mill
well in abrasive materials such as graphite, plastics, and high silicone aluminums. The laser Problem: Tool is wearing at cutting edges causing poor performance
coating provides twice the lubricity of TiN, extends tool life and reduces edge wear. Possible Solutions:
ZrN (Zirconium Nitride): Offers an improved finish when used in aluminum, brass, copper and 1.Reduce Speed - A 50% reduction in speed will almost double the tool life
other non-ferrous materials. Has a higher oxidation temperature than TiN, resists sticking of 2.Increase/Decrease Feed - A feed rate that is too light will cause excess rubbing
heated aluminum, increases lubricity and prevents “edge buildup.” 3.Change Geometry of the Tool - Number of flutes, helix angle, length of cut
4.Change material grade and/or add a coating

RPM = SFM x 3.82 ÷ Tool Diameter
IPM = RPM x # of Flutes x Chip Load
Chip Load = IPM ÷ RPM x # of Flutes
SFM = .262 x Tool Diameter x RPM
Milling Formulas
Revolutions per Minute (RPM): How many revolutions the cutter has in one minute
Inches per Minute (IPM): Number of inches the cutter passes through the workpiece in one minute
Chip Load: The amount that each flute cuts during a single revolution of a cutting tool
Surface Feet per Minute (SFM): This is the cutting speed of the end mill in the United States. It is the
number of feet per minute that a given point on the circumference of a cutter travels per minute

428 CALL MSC TODAY 800-521-9520 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 19
END MILL SETS, ARBORS & ROUTING END MILLS
Corner Rounding HSS End Mill Set End Mill Dispensers
• Ideal for Bridgeport type machines Model #13350: Fractional
• 8 Pieces, 1 each size: 1⁄16, 3⁄32, 1⁄8, 5⁄32, 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16 & 3⁄8w • Color: Gray
• Sizes 1⁄16 thru 3⁄32w have 3⁄8w shank • 30 Prelabeled compartments
• Sizes 1⁄8 thru 3⁄8w have 1⁄2w shank • Holds 1⁄8, 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2, 9⁄16, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8 & 1w
• Complete with wood stand • Dimensions: 145⁄8wL x 73⁄8wW x 73⁄4wH
Order # Price Ea. Model Nos. 13300 & 13325: Fractional
All steel cabinet with plastic dividers to help protect and
85610392 $485.46 separate end mill sizes. Top drawer holds single end Model #13350
fractional end mills in the following sizes: 6 each 1⁄8, 3⁄16, 1⁄4,
5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, & 1⁄2w; 3 each 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, & 1w with 6 extra

compartments for a total of 41 compartments. 2nd Drawer

Slitting or Slotting Saw Arbors holds double end fractional end mills in the following sizes:
6 each 1⁄16, 3⁄32, 1⁄8w with 3⁄16w shank, 1⁄8 with 3⁄8 shank, 5⁄32 &
3⁄16w with 3⁄8w shank, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16 & 1⁄2. 3 each 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8 & 1w
Versatile arbor offers flexibility in sawing operations. Spring loaded mechanism readily accepts
saw blades with hole diameters from 1⁄2w to 1w. Blades are firmly secured in position with a hex for a total of 41 compartments. Lower drawer is undivided
head screw. Rust-resistant black oxide finish. For saws with 1⁄2w, 5⁄8w, 3⁄4w, 7⁄8w, & 1w holes. for extra end mills, cutters, drills, reamers and
miscellaneous tools. Dimensions: 11wH x 91⁄2wD x 261⁄4wW.
Shank Inside OAL
Dia. (In.) Hole Dia. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Model #13375: Metric
1⁄2 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, 1
Separates and identifies metric end mills from 2.0mm to Fractional Dispenser
23⁄8 08271058 $23.83 25.0mm. 68 pre-labeled compartments help you quickly
1⁄2 3⁄8 only 3 08271066 27.14 locate and use the proper cutting tool. Holds the following
R8 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, 1 5 08271082 47.18 metric end mills: 2.0mm, 2.5mm, 3.0mm, 3.5mm, 4.0mm,
4.5mm, 5.0mm, 5.5mm, 6.0mm, 7.0mm, 8.0mm, 9.0mm,
10.0mm, 11.0mm, 12.0mm, 12.5mm, 13.0mm, 14.0mm,
15.0mm, 16.0mm, 17.0mm, 18.0mm, 19.0mm, 20.0mm,
Accuhold Extension Holders 21.0mm, 22.0mm, 23.0mm, 24.0mm and 25.0mm.
Dimensions: Measures 26wW by 12wD by 95⁄16wH. Each
These holders are designed to provide accurate extension of end mills in long reach applications. drawer measures 231⁄8wW by 11 wD by 2wH.
T.I.R. .0003vv maximum, measured on nominal size gage pin, 1⁄2vv from the end. Size Range Wt. (Lbs.) Model # Order # Price Ea.
Hole Shank OAL 1⁄8 - 1w 10.25 13350 01512474 $113.25
Size (In.) Dia. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. 1⁄16 - 1w 2 Flute End Mills 37 13300 01694603 424.05
1⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄16 - 1w 4 Flute End Mills 37 13325 01694652 424.05
31⁄4 00625442 $203.88 Metric Dispenser
3⁄16 1⁄2 31⁄2 00625459 155.43 2.0 - 25.0mm 38 13375 01512516 476.96 2.0 to 25.0mm Case
1⁄4 5⁄8
• Recommended for maintaining concentricity
33⁄4 00625467 186.53 in long reach applications
3⁄8 3⁄4 41⁄2 00625475 194.39 • Two extra large set screws for secure
1⁄2 3⁄4 43⁄4 00625483 296.25 holding and a third for possible use with a
1⁄2 1 43⁄4 00625491 278.24 back up pin

Basics of...Routing End Mill Technical Information

New cutter styles and technologies in the manufacture of router bits are now Tool Materials
eliminating common dilemmas when machining plastics, such as chip High Speed Steel Use for optimum surface finish
Solid Carbide Use for fibrous or abrasive plastics
rewelding, hand deburring and slow feed rates. Polycrystalline Use for abrasive wood, plastic, or composite materials.
Routers are cutting tools with specific geometry for wood, plastics, Tool Types
Straight Flute Use for plastic hand feed applications
nonferrous metals and some composites. Traditionally, the term end mill Spiral Flute Use for plastic automatic feed applications
has been used to describe cutting tools designed for metal applications.
Flute Types
Routers can be used on CNC routers, machining centers and milling Single Flute Use for faster feed rates in softer materials
machines. Routers offer higher feed rates, heavy depths of cut and better Double Flute Use for better finish in harder materials
finishes in the materials they were designed for. Straight Flute Offers a neutral cutting action - creates higher cutting forces than a spiral flute
Upcut Spiral Use for grooving or slotting, for upward chip evacuation and best finish
on bottom side of piece part
Downcut Spiral Use for downward chip flow, better hold down in fixture and best finish
on top side of piece part
There are four general categories of plastics: Up/Down Spiral Use for double laminated material and best finish on top and bottom
Hard, Soft, Reinforced and Mechanical side of piece part
• Soft plastics are routed by removing long curls from the surface of the material being machined, so they tend to respond best to “O” flutes
• Hard plastics require a routing tool to chip the material off in small individual chunks, so bits with a straight rake face geomtery usually do the job best
• Reinforced plastics such as polyester and epoxy can add extra rigidity to the material, making it extremely difficult to machine. This requires a router with either a
high rake angle and high clearance (to cut freely with less heat build-up) or a strong cutting edge with a low rake angle to reduce chipping (though it will increase
heat build-up). PCD tools are commonly used in reinforced plastics due to their high wear resistance.
• Mechanical plastics are specifically created so they meet an applications needs. This can be strength, resistance to chemicals, high heat applications etc. These
materals machine similar to a soft plastic and respond best to "O" flute tools. Page 506
Page 20

HSS Double Edge Upcut & Downcut Spiral Flute Cutters

List 40-100
• Upcut designed for natural wood sheet, block and plate aluminum • Downcut designed for natural wood, sheet and aluminum extrusions
• Provides a smoother finish than single edge when grooving, slotting or blind routing Upcut Spiral
Size Shk. Flute OAL Upcut Spiral Downcut Spiral Size Shk. Flute OAL Upcut Spiral Downcut Spiral
(In.) Dia. (In.) L (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. (In.) Dia. (In.) L (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1⁄8 1⁄4 5⁄16 25⁄8 72624687 $8.77 5⁄16 1⁄2 1 31⁄2 76524438 $21.66 02077881 $18.29 Downcut Spiral
1⁄8 1⁄4 3⁄8 25⁄8 72624661 $8.77 3⁄8 3⁄8 1 3 76524446 13.47 76524529 18.51
3⁄16 1⁄4 5⁄8 27⁄8 83267047 9.52 09391129 9.52 3⁄8 1⁄2 1 31⁄2 59559732 16.09 76524537 18.29
1⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄4 76524412 7.14 65057952 7.73 1⁄2 1⁄2 11⁄4 31⁄4 86694296 18.29 76524545 18.82
1⁄4 1⁄4 1 3 82926965 8.89 76524495 8.89 1⁄2 1⁄2 11⁄2 31⁄2 76524453 21.43 76524552 20.38
1⁄4 1⁄2 3⁄4 31⁄4 72624794 16.96 76524487 16.03 3⁄4 1⁄2 11⁄4 31⁄4 76524461 47.45 76524560 47.45
5⁄16 5⁄16 1 3 76646264 15.04 76646314 12.78 Stack Sheet Cutting Slotting & Pocketing Through Cutting

506
 BROACHES

Basics of...Broaches

Keyway Broach Collared Bushing Square Broach

Definition of Broaches Broaching Operations

A broach is a bar-shaped cutting tool that contains a series of teeth, which get
progressively larger and/or differ in shape from the starting end. Each tooth
removes a small amount of material as the tool moves through the work piece in
a one-pass operation.
Please note: Broach types correspond to specific bushings i.e. a B-1 broach will
need a B-1 Collared Type bushing.
Types of Broaches
Internal: Shapes a round-drilled hole into any configuration. This broaching can
be done with either a push or a pull broach. Most broaches are push broaches.
Pull broaches (AF Stock) offer longer lengths of cut when broaching square and
hexagon shapes. Examples include: tooling fixtures, gear and pulley keyways,
keyways, rifling and all hole configurations.
External (Surface): Used in place of milling or shaping operations because it can
produce exact dimensions at a much faster rate. Examples include: flats,
notches, keyways, contoured surfaces, external gear teeth and serrations.
Accessories

Keyway: Slides through a bushing to produce a keyway. Shims are often
required to accomplish desired depth of cut.
Square: Have an oversized pilot leaving drill marks in the flats (to provide
relief) while establishing four corners. Longer lengths of cut are possible
with standard square broaches.
Full Square: Leaves no radius in the flats of the broached piece. The pilot
diameter will equal the finished square size.
Hexagon: Produces hexagonal holes.
Production Keyway Construction: Offers maximum speed and accuracy in
production runs of identical bores. Production keyway broaches require no
shims or bushings and can cut standard depth of 1/8w to 1/4w keyways in
one pass.
One-Pass Keyway: Designed for smaller production runs (several hundred) of
identical keyways.
AF Stock: Is a pull broach featuring superior tooth design for precision
keyway tolerances.
Bushings: A metal slotted liner that supports and guides the broach. Available in
Plain or Collared types. Collared bushings are for ease of use in smaller holes.
Shims: A thin piece of metal used to achieve a given depth of keyway in a bore.
Factors Affecting Broaching
Material to be Broached: Materials with hardness up to HRC 38 are best suited
for broaching. Harder materials are not recommended.
Tool Alignment: Proper tool alignment is necessary to avoid tool breakage or
drifting. To avoid producing a part outside of the required tolerance make sure at
least 2 teeth are engaged at all times and use bushings to provide support for
the broach.
Lubrication: Proper lubrication reduces friction and helps with chip removal.
Chip Removal: Clear chips with a stiff brush from the cutting section of broach
following each pass.

Page 21 Page 529

HSS Keyway Broach Sets

HSS & TiN Coated No. 30 Standard Set Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Cuts 15 Different Keyways.
The Titanium Advantage Consists of 3 broaches (1⁄8B, 3⁄16C, & 1⁄4wC) with 9 collared NuLine HSS 85211860 $209.76
bushings (B 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4w and C 7⁄8, 1, 11⁄8, 11⁄4, 13⁄8 & 11⁄2w). Dumont HSS 00309138 265.00
TiN (Titanium Nitride)
• Increase tool life 3 to 5 times
• Tool hardness increases No. 40A Standard Set Desc. Order # Price Ea.
• Tool speed may be improved Cuts 32 Different Keyways.
• TiN coating protects cutting edges Consists of 4 broaches (D5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, & 1⁄2w) and 8 plain NuLine HSS 85211902 $412.66
• Added lubricity lessens chip weld bushings (D 11⁄2, 15⁄8, 13⁄4, 17⁄8, 2, 21⁄8, 21⁄4 & 21⁄2w). Dumont HSS 00309146 563.00
• Improved surface finish
No. 40 Standard Set
Sets include all necessary shims. Dumont Cuts 32 Different Keyways.
Consists of 4 broaches (D 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2w) Desc. Order # Price Ea.
No. 00 Precision Sets Desc. Order # Price Ea. and 8 plain bushings (D 17⁄16, 19⁄16, 111⁄16, NuLine HSS 85211878 $412.66
Cuts 15 Different Keyways for Small 113⁄16, 115⁄16, 23⁄16, 27⁄16, & 215⁄16w).
Keyways & Bores. NuLine HSS 84817154 $134.26
Consists of 3 broaches (1⁄16, A, 3⁄32 A, 1⁄8w A) and Dumont HSS 00309104 177.00
Dumont HSS TiN 00310102 265.00 No. 401⁄2A Heavy-Duty Set Desc. Order # Price Ea.
5 collared bushings (A 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16 & 1⁄2w). Cuts 12 Different Keyways.
Consists of 2 broaches (5⁄8E, 3⁄4wE) and these 6 plain NuLine HSS 85211894 $449.21
No. 10 Standard Sets Dumont HSS 00309187 585.00
Cuts 18 Different Keyways. Desc. Order # Price Ea. bushings (E 23⁄8, 21⁄2, 25⁄8, 23⁄4, 27⁄8 & 3w).
Consists of 4 broaches (1⁄8 B, 3⁄16 B, 1⁄4 C, 3⁄8wC) NuLine HSS 84817162 $240.30
and these 9 collared bushings (B, 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8w, Dumont HSS 00309112 309.00
No. 401⁄2 Heavy-Duty Set
and C 1, 1⁄8, 11⁄4, 13⁄8 & 11⁄2w). Cuts 12 Different Keyways. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Dumont HSS TiN 00310110 485.00
Consists of 2 broaches (E 5⁄8 & 3⁄4w) and 6 plain
No. 10-10A Combination Sets bushings (E 25⁄16, 27⁄16, 29⁄16 , 211⁄16,213⁄16 & 215⁄16w). NuLine HSS 85211886 $449.21
Cuts 36 Different Keyways. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Consists of 4 broaches (1⁄8 B, 3⁄16 B, 1⁄4 C, 3⁄8wC) No. 50 Heavy-Duty Set
and these 18 collared bushings (B 1⁄2, 9⁄16, 5⁄8, 11⁄16, NuLine HSS 84817170 $308.69 Cuts 29 Different Keyways.
3⁄4, 13⁄16, 7⁄8, and C 15⁄16, 1, 11⁄16, 11⁄8, 13⁄16, 11⁄4, 15⁄16, Dumont HSS 00309153 396.00 Consists of 3 broaches (D 1⁄2, E 5⁄8 & E 3⁄4 Desc. Order # Price Ea.
13⁄8, 17⁄16, 11⁄2 & 19⁄16w). Dumont HSS TiN 00310151 585.00 and 17 plain bushings (D 2, 21⁄16, 21⁄8, 23⁄16,
NuLine HSS 85211910 $525.27
21⁄4w and E 25⁄16, 23⁄8, 27⁄16, 21⁄2, 29⁄16, 25⁄8,
No. 10A Standard Set 211⁄16, 23⁄4, 213⁄16, 27⁄8, 215⁄16, 3w).
Dumont HSS 76587435 1085.00
Cuts 18 Different Keyways. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Consists of 4 broaches (1⁄8B, 3⁄16B, 1⁄4C, 3⁄8wC)
NuLine HSS 85211837 $257.33 No. 100 Heavy-Duty Combination Set
and these 9 collared bushings (B 9⁄16, 11⁄16, 13⁄16 Cuts 102 Different Keyways.
Dumont HSS 00309120 309.00
and C 15⁄16, 11⁄16, 13⁄16, 15⁄16, 17⁄16 & 19⁄16w). Consists of 9 broaches (1⁄8B, 3⁄16B, 1⁄4C, 5⁄16C, 3⁄8D, 7⁄16D, 1⁄2D, 5⁄8E, 3⁄4E) and the following bushings:
7 collared B bushings (B1⁄2, 9⁄16, 5⁄8, 11⁄16, 3⁄4, 13⁄16 & 7⁄8w), 11 collared C bushings (C 15⁄16, 1, 11⁄16, 11⁄8,
No. 20 Combination Sets 13⁄16, 11⁄4, 15⁄16, 13⁄8, 17⁄16, 11⁄2, & 19⁄16w), 14 plain D bushings (D 17⁄16, 11⁄2, 19⁄16, 15⁄8, 111⁄16, 13⁄4, 113⁄16, 17⁄8,
Cuts 47 Different Keyways. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
115⁄16, 2, 21⁄16, 21⁄8, 23⁄16 & 21⁄4w), 12 plain E
Consists of 5 broaches (1⁄8B, 3⁄16B, 1⁄4C, 5⁄16C, NuLine HSS 85211852 $354.74 Desc. Order # Price Ea.
3⁄8wC) and these 18 collared bushings (B1⁄2, 9⁄16, bushings (E 25⁄16, 23⁄8, 27⁄16, 21⁄2, 29⁄16, 25⁄8,
Dumont HSS 00309179 454.00 211⁄16, 23⁄4, 213⁄16, 27⁄8, 215⁄16 & 3w). NuLine HSS 85211845 $903.34
5⁄8, 11⁄16, 3⁄4, 13⁄16, 7⁄8, and C15⁄16, 1, 11⁄16, 11⁄8, 13⁄16,
Dumont HSS TiN 00310128 664.00 Dumont HSS 99110959 1999.00
11⁄4, 15⁄16, 13⁄8, 17⁄16, 11⁄2 & 19⁄16w).

529
END MILLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...End Mills

End Mills are used for milling, profiling, contouring, slotting, counterboring, drilling and reaming.

Cutting Tool Materials End Mill Type

High Speed Steel (HSS): Provides good wear resistance and costs less than cobalt or carbide end
mills. HSS is used for general purpose milling of both ferrous and non-ferrous materials.
Cobalt (M-42: 8% Cobalt): Provides better wear resistance, higher hot hardness and toughness
than high speed steel. There is very little chipping or microchipping under severe cutting
conditions allowing the tool to run 10% faster than HSS, resulting in excellent metal removal
rates as well as good finishes. This material, combined with the proper geometry has proven the
most cost-effective for machining cast iron, heat treated steels and titanium alloys.
Powdered Metal (PM) Cobalt: A cost effective alternative to solid carbide, powdered metal is
tougher and less prone to breakage. Tools perform well in materials <30RC. PM is used in high-
shock and high-stock applications such as roughing.
Solid Carbide: Primarily used in finishing applications, carbide provides several advantages over
HSS or cobalt materials. Carbide can run much faster because of the material’s extreme
hardness. This allows the cutter to withstand high cutting temperatures and provides excellent
wear resistance. Carbide also provides better rigidity than HSS, which enables the end mill to
provide a higher degree of dimensional accuracy and superior surface finishes. Carbide provides
the user with the ability to run faster with less tool wear. However, the user should be aware that
carbide’s hardness comes at the expense of its toughness. Carbide is brittle and tends to chip
when conditions are not ideal, rather than wear. Heavy feed rates are more suitable for HSS and
cobalt tools. Carbide end mills, which can be run 2-3X faster than HSS, are best for maximizing
speed and tool life.
Carbide-Tipped: Offering some of the advantages of solid carbide tooling, carbide is brazed to the
cutting edges of steel tool bodies. This is particularly a cost-effective option for larger diameter
tools.
Finishing End Mills
Square End: Used for general milling applications
Ball End: Used for shallow slotting, contour milling and pocketing applications. Used to produce
a radius in the bottom of slots or pockets for added strength. Also used to create compound
curves for molds and dies where sharp corners must be avoided.
Corner Radius: End mill with radius ground on tops of flutes to help reduce chipping on the tip.
These are best used for mold applications, removing more material faster than ball end mills.
Tapered: Results in faster and freer cutting due to more evenly formed chips over the entire
length of the flute. Also has improved resistance to both operating side thrusts and deflections
due to constant helix.
Roughing End Mills
In order to improve productivity over a conventional end mill, the roughing end mill (also know
as a “hog mill”) was designed not to last longer, but to remove more material by taking heavier
cuts in a fixed amount of time, without creating vibration. Ideal for today’s rigid and powerful
CNC machinery.
Coarse Profile: This is the most commonly found profile. It is excellent in deep slotting
conditions and heavy side cuts, and its design draws the least amount of power consumption. It
is recommended for heavy machining conditions where high metal removal rates are required.
Fine Profile: Designed to increase tool life over a coarser profile, this style is recommended for
profiling operations, but NOT in the following conditions: (Depth of Cut) x (Width of Cut) >
Diameter squared (D2).
The fine profile has a shape, which provides the tool with a stronger edge that will last longer
and permits a better surface finish on the workpiece. Works well in harder materials such as
Inconel and Hastelloy.

Flute Types
Two Flute: The two-flute end mill has the greatest amount of flute space allowing for more chip
carrying capacity. Used primarily in slotting and pocketing of non-ferrous materials where chip
removal is a concern.
Three Flute: While this tool has the same flute space as two flutes, it has a larger cross sectional
area providing for greater strength and the ability to pocket and slot both ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.
Four/Multiple Flute: Ideal for peripheral and finish milling. The additional flutes allow faster feed
rates, but due to the reduced flute space, chip removal may be a problem. Produces a much
finer finish than two and three flute tools.

End Cut Types

Centercutting: The tools have one or more cutting edges at the tip to allow the user to plunge,
drill or ramp into a cut. This type of tool offers the user the greatest variety of applications.
Non-Centercutting: Peripheral teeth allow the user to side (radial) cut or contour an exterior
surface. Used in applications where plunge cutting is not necessary.
End Mill Selection Summary
Shank Types
• Select the shortest possible end mill for the greatest rigidity
Plain Shank: The most common, used in conjunction with a collet type holder • Select two or three flutes for slotting or heavy stock removal
Weldon Shank: The shank of the tool has 1 or 2 flats with set screws in holder that tighten on • Select multiple flutes for finishing and greater rigidity
flanks of flats to hold the end mill, preventing it from rotating. • Use the largest diameter possible for added strength and rigidity
• Use cobalt, PM/Plus, and carbide for tougher and harder materials, and for high
Surface Treatments production applications
• Apply coatings for higher feeds, speeds, and tool life
TiN (Titanium Nitride): Provides extreme hardness and heat resistance allowing tools coated with
TiN to run at higher speeds and feeds. Excellent for general-purpose use, TiN provides higher Common Milling Problems & Solutions
lubricity for freer chip flow, reduced buildup edge formation and cratering. Use caution on non-
ferrous materials because of a tendency to gall. Requires an increase of 25% to 30% in Excessive Chatter
machining speeds vs. uncoated tools. Problem: Vibration and sound are excessive when the tool engages the workpiece
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride): Harder and more wear resistant than TiN under conditions of Possible Solutions:
moderate cutting temperatures. TiCN can provide the users the ability to run the job at higher 1.Increase your feed
spindle speeds (50% over TiN), especially in stainless steels. Use caution on non-ferrous 2.Reduce your cutting forces by reducing speed and/or feed or axial and/or radial depth of cut
materials because of a tendency to gall. Requires an increase of 35% to 50% in machining 3.Increase your system’s rigidity by changing over to a stub length end mill or improving your
speeds vs. uncoated tools. workpiece fixturing
TiAlN (Titanium Aluminum Nitride): Ideal for conditions where extremely high temperatures are 4.Change geometry – use an end mill with variable flute spacing or a small circular margin
generated, TiAlN enables the users to increase the surface feet per minute (SFM), extend tool life Poor Surface Finish
and use less coolant. Ideal for stainless steel, high alloy carbon steels, nickel-based high- Problem: Work surface looks uneven and feels rough
temperature alloys and titanium alloys. Use caution in non-ferrous material because of a Possible Solutions:
tendency to gall. Requires an increase of 75% to 100% in machining speeds vs. uncoated tools. 1.Increase system rigidity
AlTiN (Aluminum Titanium Nitride): Used for machining aircraft/aerospace materials, nickel alloys, 2.Increase speed
stainless steel and titanium. Allows for aggressive speeds and feeds. Used in dry machining of 3.Reduce Feed
cast irons, nodular iron and selected carbon steel. Requires an increase of 75-100% in 4.Change to higher helix geometry
machining speeds vs. uncoated tools. 5.Change to an end mill with more flutes
Laser Coating: Used for high speed finishing and light metals such as aluminum. Laser works Excessive Wear of End Mill
well in abrasive materials such as graphite, plastics, and high silicone aluminums. The laser Problem: Tool is wearing at cutting edges causing poor performance
coating provides twice the lubricity of TiN, extends tool life and reduces edge wear. Possible Solutions:
ZrN (Zirconium Nitride): Offers an improved finish when used in aluminum, brass, copper and 1.Reduce Speed - A 50% reduction in speed will almost double the tool life
other non-ferrous materials. Has a higher oxidation temperature than TiN, resists sticking of 2.Increase/Decrease Feed - A feed rate that is too light will cause excess rubbing
heated aluminum, increases lubricity and prevents “edge buildup.” 3.Change Geometry of the Tool - Number of flutes, helix angle, length of cut
4.Change material grade and/or add a coating

RPM = SFM x 3.82 ÷ Tool Diameter
IPM = RPM x # of Flutes x Chip Load
Chip Load = IPM ÷ RPM x # of Flutes
SFM = .262 x Tool Diameter x RPM
Milling Formulas
Revolutions per Minute (RPM): How many revolutions the cutter has in one minute
Inches per Minute (IPM): Number of inches the cutter passes through the workpiece in one minute
Chip Load: The amount that each flute cuts during a single revolution of a cutting tool
Surface Feet per Minute (SFM): This is the cutting speed of the end mill in the United States. It is the
number of feet per minute that a given point on the circumference of a cutter travels per minute

544 CALL MSC TODAY 800-521-9520 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 22
ROUGHING END MILLS, SETS & ROUTING END MILLS
4 Flute Centercutting Chipbreaker End Mills
Solid Micrograin Carbide & AITiN Coated Surface Treatment: AlTiN (Aluminum Titanium Nitride)
• Recommended for difficult to machine materials
30° Helix • Used for aggressive machining of aircraft/aerospace materials, stainless
• Chipbreaker geometry permits extremely high feed steels, high alloy carbon steels, nickel-based high-temperature alloys
rates in roughing operation and titanium alloys. Also used in dry machining of cast irons, nodular iron and selected carbon steel
• Chipbreakers are designed to minimize cutting forces, • Extremely hard, wear resistant
reduce or eliminate chatter and prolong tool life • Provides increase of 75 to 100% in machining speeds vs. uncoated tools
Mill Shk. Accupro M.A. Ford - List 114 Accupro Mill Shk. Accupro M.A. Ford - List 114 Accupro
Dia. Dia. OAL LOC Solid Carbide LOC Solid Carbide LOC AlTiN Coated Dia. Dia. OAL LOC Solid Carbide LOC Solid Carbide LOC AlTiN Coated
(In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄2 1⁄4 67940163 $18.33 3⁄8 01946086 $21.07 1⁄4 00037804 $21.57 3⁄8 3⁄8 31⁄2 11⁄2 01952241 $81.90
1⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄2 1⁄2 67940155 19.25 1⁄2 73901944 14.16 3⁄8 3⁄8 4 13⁄4 67940312 $95.49 13⁄4 00037895 $112.34
1⁄8 1⁄8 21⁄4 3⁄4 67940171 18.63 7⁄16 7⁄16 23⁄4 1 67940320 79.02 1 73902025 48.19
1⁄8 1⁄8 21⁄2 1 01952084 29.23 3⁄4 00037812 33.81 7⁄16 7⁄16 4 2 67940338 87.81 13⁄4 01952282 106.11 2 00037903 103.30
3⁄16 3⁄16 2 3⁄8 67940197 24.06 3⁄8 73901951 13.34 1⁄2 1⁄2 21⁄2 5⁄8 67940353 66.33 5⁄8 73902033 49.63
3⁄16 3⁄16 2 5⁄8 67940189 25.33 9⁄16 01946128 29.48 5⁄8 00037820 29.80 1⁄2 1⁄2 3 1 67940346 73.67 1 01946326 96.95 1 00037911 86.67
3⁄16 3⁄16 21⁄2 3⁄4 67940205 27.86 3⁄4 73901969 21.62 1⁄2 1⁄2 4 2 67940361 135.27 2 01952324 134.19 2 00037929 159.14
3⁄16 3⁄16 3 11⁄8 67940213 25.33 11⁄8 01952126 40.76 11⁄8 00037838 29.80 5⁄8 5⁄8 3 7⁄8 67940387 148.79 7⁄8 73902058 95.51
1⁄4 1⁄4 2 3⁄8 67940239 26.76 3⁄8 73901977 17.08 5⁄8 5⁄8 31⁄2 11⁄4 67940379 163.68 11⁄4 73902041 100.16
1⁄4 1⁄4 21⁄2 3⁄4 67940221 29.73 3⁄4 01946169 36.01 3⁄4 00037846 34.98 5⁄8 5⁄8 45⁄8 21⁄2 01952407 263.38
1⁄4 1⁄4 3 11⁄8 67940247 42.93 11⁄4 01952167 49.79 11⁄8 00037853 50.50 3⁄4 3⁄4 4 11⁄2 67940395 180.05 11⁄2 73902066 138.42
5⁄16 5⁄16 2 1⁄2 67940262 35.05 1⁄2 73901985 23.04 3⁄4 3⁄4 5 21⁄4 67940403 198.02 21⁄4 73902074 190.56
5⁄16 5⁄16 21⁄2 3⁄4 67940254 38.94 13⁄16 01946201 49.29 3⁄4 00037861 45.81 3⁄4 3⁄4 6 3 67940411 217.85 3 73902082 290.80
5⁄16 5⁄16 3 11⁄8 67940270 53.19 11⁄8 00037879 62.58 3⁄4 3⁄4 51⁄4 3 01952480 387.54
5⁄16 5⁄16 31⁄4 13⁄8 01952209 68.23 1 1 4 13⁄4 67940429 239.63 13⁄4 73902090 251.42
3⁄8 3⁄8 2 5⁄8 67940296 39.70 5⁄8 73901993 27.79 1 1 5 21⁄4 67940437 263.60 21⁄4 73902108 357.20
3⁄8 3⁄8 21⁄2 7⁄8 67940288 44.11 7⁄8 01946243 59.20 7⁄8 00037887 51.89 1 1 6 3 01952647 591.96
3⁄8 3⁄8 3 11⁄8 67940304 48.52 11⁄8 73902017 43.67

2 & 4 Flute Single & Double End Mill Sets

Solid Micrograin Carbide - 30° Helix, Accupro 40° Helix
Square End Ball End
Description Order # Price/Set Order # Price/Set
2 Flute Single End 93031268 $110.78 93031243 $177.68 6 Pieces, 1 each : 1⁄8, 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8 & 1⁄2w
4 Flute Single End 93031300 110.78 93031284 177.68 Supplied in Plastic Case
2 Flute Double End - Stub Length 93031250 194.09 93031235 235.97
4 Flute Double End - Stub Length 93031292 194.09 93031276 235.97

Basics of...Routing End Mills

Tool Materials
New cutter styles and technologies in the manufacture of router bits are now High Speed Steel Use for optimum surface finish
eliminating common dilemmas when machining plastics, such as chip Solid Carbide Use for fibrous or abrasive plastics
rewelding, hand deburring and slow feed rates. Polycrystalline Use for abrasive wood, plastic, or pomposite materials.
Tool Types
Routers are cutting tools with specific geometry for wood, plastics, Straight Flute Use for plastic hand feed applications
nonferrous metals and some composites. Traditionally, the term end mill Spiral Flute Use for plastic automatic feed applications
has been used to describe cutting tools designed for metal applications. Flute Types
Routers can be used on CNC routers, machining centers and milling Single Flute Use for faster feed rates in softer materials
machines. Routers offer higher feed rates, heavy depths of cut and better Double Flute Use for better finish in harder materials
finishes in the materials they were designed for. Straight Flute Offers a neutral cutting action - creates higher cutting forces than a spiral flute
Upcut Spiral Use for grooving or slotting, for upward chip evacuation and best finish
on bottom side of piece part
Downcut Spiral Use for downward chip flow, better hold down in fixture and best finish
on top side of piece part
There are four general categories of plastics: Up/Down Spiral Use for double laminated material and best finish on top and bottom
Hard, Soft, Reinforced and Mechanical side of piece part

• Soft plastics are routed by removing long curls from the surface of the material being machined, so they tend to respond best to “O” flutes
• Hard plastics require a routing tool to chip the material off in small individual chunks, so bits with a straight rake face geomtery usually do the job best
• Reinforced plastics such as polyester and epoxy can add extra rigidity to the material, making it extremely difficult to machine. This requires a router with either a
high rake angle and high clearance (to cut freely with less heat build-up) or a strong cutting edge with a low rake angle to reduce chipping (though it will increase
heat build-up). PCD tools are commonly used in reinforced plastics due to their high wear resistance.
• Mechanical plastics are specifically created so they meet an applications needs. This can be strength, resistance to chemicals, high heat applications etc. These
materals machine similar to a soft plastic and respond best to "O" flute tools. Page 652
Page 23

Double Edge Chipbreakers for Wood

Size Shank Flute OAL Upcut Spiral Downcut Spiral Solid Carbide - List 60-300
(In.) Dia. (In.) L (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
3⁄8 3⁄8 11⁄8 3 76525377 $86.71 88783865 $86.71 30° Helix
1⁄2 1⁄2 11⁄8 3 88784285 118.18 76525443 118.18
1⁄2 1⁄2 15⁄8 31⁄2 65068835 126.14 76525450 126.14 • Designed for natural wood and
1⁄2 1⁄2 17⁄8 31⁄2 76525393 134.04 76525476 134.04 wood composites
1⁄2 1⁄2 21⁄8 4 76525385 141.94 76525468 141.94 • For faster feed rates than a
5⁄8 5⁄8 conventional two flute with a
21⁄8 4 76525401 275.51 76525484 275.51 smooth finish Slotting & Through
3⁄4 3⁄4 21⁄8 4 76525419 313.73 76525492 313.73 Pocketing Cutting

652
 CHIPBREAKER & ANSI INSERT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Chipbreaker Cross Reference

& ANSI Insert Nomenclature
Indexable Insert Chipbreaker Cross Reference
Note: Chart is intended to be used Operation Kennemetal Sandvik Seco Valenite Iscar Sumitomo Stellram Mitsubishi Tungaloy Hertel Interstate
as a guide to chipbreaker Fine Finishing FF PF MF2 C2, F2 RF,FF EFA, EFL, EFP 1A, 62 SH TS P
selections. The information listed is Fine Finishing UF UF, QF FF1 PF4 SF, SM EFA, FW, FX -62 FV, FW 01
approximate and all specific Finishing LF PF F1 F5 NF ESU, ESP, EEX -62 FV,FS MQ PS LF 2C
information should be obtained Finishing LF MF, -23 MF1 F5 TF ELU, ELUW, ESX 3F SH TM LF
from the manufacturers. Finishing FP MF1 F5 PP NSK 2B SH F
Finishing FN PF MF2 F4 PP ESU, ELU, ELUW, ESX 1A SA TS F
Finishing MP-K MF5 M4, M5 TF, GN NEX, NSX 3J MS, MV F
Kennemetal, Seco, Valenite, Iscar, Medium Machining CT SA CB 44
Sumitomo, Stellram, Hertel & Medium Machining MP MF MF3 M5 TF EEX, EUP 1A MS, SA SS M2 KC
Medium Machining MS M1 M2 VL NUP M1 HF
Interstate are currently
Medium Machining MN PM M2 M3 GN EGE, EUX 2N MS TM M2 MM
represented in the MSC Big Book. Medium Machining MN PM M3 F4 TNM EGU, EGUW 2N MA TM M2
Medium Machining MN QM M5 F4 NR, TNM EEX, EUP 4T MA TH M2
Medium Machining P 2C, 73 MR3 F5, C2 GN EGE, EGU, EGUW, EUX 2C, 73 MP SA M1
Medium Machining GP -23 M1 M2, F5 PP ESU, EEX, ELU 3J MS PP
Medium Machining UP M3 55, M5 GN NMU, NSX, NUZ MF5 GJ, MV M2
Roughing RP QM MR3 R7 NP EMU, EGE 2N MH TR R 55
Roughing RP QM MR4 R7 RP EMX 4M MH TH R
Roughing UN PR M5,MR7 R3 TNM ENZ, EMU 3M GH TU R
Roughing RN MR MR5 R3 NR EMU, EGE 5V MH SS R
Roughing RN PR MR4 R3 NR EMX 5V GH TU R
Heavy Roughing (Single Sided) RH HR R8 R9 RP EHG 4M HV TR
Heavy Roughing (Single Sided) RH HR RR9 R9 RP ENP 4M HV TR
Heavy Roughing (Single Sided) RM PR R4 R6 -12 EHG 5V HA TU
Heavy Roughing (Single Sided) RM PR R6 R7 NM ENP 4M HA -65
Heavy Roughing (Single Sided) RM HR R7 R7 NM EHP 4M HV -65

677
Page 24
 INDEXABLE TOOLHOLDER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Indexable Toolholder Nomenclature

All codes are equivalent
for all brands

* Valenite Standard

Page 25 Page 809

Machine Shop Trade Secrets Book

By James A. Harvey 2005, 320 pp.,
Written by an experienced machinist and plastic injection mold maker, this
groundbreaking manual will have users thinking and producing like
Metalworking Fluids experienced machinists. Machine Shop Trade Secrets provides practical
“how-to” information that can immediately be put to use to improve ones
• Premium soluble oil metalworking fluid recommended for a machining skills, craftsmanship, and productivity. Topics include how to:
wide variety of heavy-duty jobs, both ferrous and nonferrous work faster; select, make, and grind cutters; surface grind blocks, pins and
• For all machining and grinding operations shapes; cut threads, knurl parts and eliminate warp; choose realistic feeds,
• Minimizes the need for many fluids and machine recharges speeds and depths of cut; remove broken taps, drill bits and other hardware;
• Best use at 5-10% • Container: Pail apply proven CNC techniques to maximize output; improve surface finishes
• Undyed/Opaque • FOB Factory and hold tighter tolerances; assist engineers with design and manufacturing
issues; improve indicating skills and develop a “feel” for machining.
Desc. Container Size Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
CIMPERIAL 1070/LF 5 Gal. BU05930052 $145.35 BU93188498 $42.37

809
THREADING TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Carbide Threading System Nomenclature

CHOOSING INSERTS CHOOSING TOOL HOLDERS
1. Inserts which have the number 16 listed in the model number can only be Example
used with tool holders that have the number 16 at the end of the tool Tool Holder: SER 0500 F16
holder’s model number. Based on the thread profile which the customer would determine, the insert
2. If the insert model number contains the letters ER (external right hand) would be a 16 ER + thread + grade (e.g. 16 ER + A60 + P25C = 16 ER A60
which is the thread cutting method, the tool holder model number must P25C)
include those letters in order to accept the inserts. Spare parts for the tool holders are based on the last two numbers of the
Example tool holder’s model number. For tool holder SER 0500F16, spare parts
Threading inserts 16 ER A60 P25C (08701575) can be used with any of the ending with the number 16 will fit that holder.
tool holders listed below. Example
Threading tool holder: S16 - (08700452) Screw
SER 0500 F16 (08700023) SER 1000 M16 (08700056) A16 - (08700502) Anvil Screw
SER 0750 K16 (08700007) SER 1250 P16 (08700106) K16 - (08700601) Wrench
AE16+4.5 (08700650) Anvil Screw

Page
850
Page 26

Threading Tools - Recommended Grade Selection

HG630TR: PVD TiN coated grade for treated and hard alloy steels, 25 HRc and up at medium to low cutting speeds
HG330TR: PVD TiN coated micrograin for free cutting untreated alloy steels below 30 HRc. For stainless steels and cast iron
HG225TR: PVD TiALN coated sub-micrograin grade for stainless steels and exotic material at medium to high cutting speeds
HG220TR: PVD TiN coated grade for low cutting speed. Works well with wide range of stainless steels
Grades and Cutting Speed Recommendation
ISO Grades ISO Grades
Standard Material HG630TR HG330TR HG225TR HG220TR Standard Material HG630TR HG330TR HG225TR HG220TR
P Low & Med Carbon Steel 260-520 330-590 295-520 65-330 K Cast Iron 260-490 260-430 100-295
High Carbon Steel 260-390 260-520 260-490 100-260 N Nonferrous & Aluminimum 980-1970 980-2620 65-660
Alloy & Treated Steels 160-330 260-390 260-390 130-295 S Super Alloys 130-260 130-330 50-100
Cast Steel 260-460 390-520 330-460 100-260 H Hard Materials 65-130 65-160 50-100
M Stainless Steels 295-390 230-430 100-295
Note: Top Figures m/min., bottom figures Ft./min.

850
 BORING BAR TECH INFO & INDEXABLE BORING BARS

Basics of...Boring Bars

Master Gage Insert Nose Radius Chart
Insert Insert
I.C. (In.) Radius (In.)
1⁄4 .015
5⁄16

3⁄8 .031
1⁄2

5⁄8 .046
3⁄4

Page 905
Page 27

Clamp-On Boring Bars - A-CTFP Style

Steel Shank 60° Triangle
Bar Shk. OAL Min. Bore Coolant Hole Insert Order # Spare Parts
Style Dia. (In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Thread Size Style Right Hand Left Hand Price Ea. Clamp Clamp Screw • Use for boring to a square shoulder on the inside of the part
A08CTFPR/L2 1⁄2 8 0.600 1⁄16-27 NPT TPG 221 05695747 05695713 $89.03 83294017 03042124 • Clamp style boring bar is great for all machine types
A10CTFPR/L2 5⁄8 10 0.770 1⁄8-27 NPT TPG 221 05695754 05695721 107.90 88050281 03042173 • With through-the-bar coolant
A12CTFPR/L3 3⁄4 10 0.930 1⁄8-27 NPT TPG 322 05695762 05695739 129.68 03041449 03042173 • 5° Positive rake
A16CTFPR/L3 1 12 1.200 1⁄4-18 NPT TPG 322 05695390 05695382 174.71 03041498 03042090 • 0° Lead angle

Pin & Clamp Boring Bars - A-MCLN Style

Steel Shank 80° Diamond Combination Pin & Clamp

Bar Shk. OAL Min. Bore Edge to Coolant Hole Insert Order # Spare Parts
Style Dia. (In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Tip (In.) Thread Size Style Right Hand Left Hand Price Ea. Shim Lock Pin Clamp Clamp Screw • Boring bar internal boring and facing
A16MCLNR/L4 1 12 1.200 0.640 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695408 05695432 $221.73 — 03041068 03041498 03042090 • 5° Negative rake
A20UMCLNR/L4 11⁄4 14 1.470 0.765 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695416 05695440 247.20 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116 • Use 80° diamond inserts
A24UMCLNR/L4 11⁄2 14 1.760 0.890 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695424 05695457 275.80 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116 • Through-the-bar coolant
A28UMCLNR/L4 13⁄4 14 2.010 1.015 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695242 05695267 301.59 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116 • 5° Reverse lead angle
A32MCLNR/L4 2 16 2.400 1.281 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695259 05695275 327.37 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116

Pin & Clamp Boring Bars - A-MDUN Style

Steel Shank 55° Diamond Combination Pin & Clamp Bar
• The smaller 55° included angle interrupts chip flow sooner, giving you better chip control
• 3w Clearance angle • Through-the-bar coolant • 5° Negative rake
Shank OAL Min. Bore Edge to Coolant Hole Insert Order # Spare Parts
Bar Style Dia. (In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Tip (In.) Thread Size Style Right Hand Left Hand Price Ea. Shim Lock Pin Clamp Clamp Screw
A16MDUNR/L3 1 12 1.300 0.750 1⁄4-18 NPT DNMG 332 05695465 05695499 $225.11 — 08651481 03041449 03042157
A20UMDUNR/L4 11⁄4 14 1.705 1.000 1⁄4-18 NPT DNMG 432 05695473 05695507 268.73 03040193 03041076 03041472 03042140
A24UMDUN/L4 11⁄2 14 2.000 1.125 1⁄4-18 NPT DNMG 432 05695481 05695515 298.48 03040193 03041076 03041472 03042140
A32MDUNR/L4 2 16 2.500 1.375 1⁄4-18 NPT DNMG 432 05695283 05695291 357.25 03040193 03041076 03041472 03042140

Pin & Clamp Boring Bars - A-MSKN Style

90° Square Combination Pin & Clamp Bar
5° Negative Rake
Shank OAL Min. Bore Edge to Coolant Hole Insert Right Hand Left Hand Spare Parts
Bar Style Dia. (In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Tip (In.) Thread Size Style Order # Order # Price Ea. Shim Shim Screw Clamp Clamp Screw • Use this tool for boring
A24MSKNR/L4 1.500 14.000 1.760 0.890 1⁄4-18 NPT SN..432 05695309 05695325 $280.33 08651234 08651515 08662215 08662173 on interrupted cuts
A28MSKNR/L4 1.750 14.000 2.010 1.015 1⁄4-18 NPT SN..432 05695317 05695333 305.50 08651234 08651515 08662215 08662173

905
GRINDING WHEELS-TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Grinding Wheels

Toolroom Wheel Types (Used for Surface, Cylindrical and Tool & Cutter Grinders)
White:Light Grinding Applications - Produced with friable white aluminum oxide abrasive grain used for grinding heat sensitive steels and for easy to medium grind
high speed steels.
Pink: Light to Medium Grinding Applications - Produced with fused aluminum oxide alloyed with chromium and titanium oxide. Excellent shape retention. Ideal
applications include the working of alloyed and heat-sensitive steels.
Ruby: Medium to Heavy Grinding Applications - Produced with fused aluminum oxide with purity calcined alumin together with chromium oxide. Wheel is very versatile
for grinding a wide variety of tool steels, with excellent form holding capabilities.
Blue/Gray: Medium to Heavy Grinding Applications - Produced with sharp, monocrystaline, friable aluminum oxide. Aggressive, and known to keep well defined cutting
edges and shape retention. Off/white to blue/gray in appearance.
Ceramic: Light to Heavy Grinding Applications - Produced with ceramic alumina mix, this wheel is the best choice for grinding various tool steels. It has the highest
productivity, fastest stock removal rate with the longest life.
Grade Selection Assistance Choosing the Hardness of a Wheel
• Use coarser grits when finish is not important, rapid stock Hardness: The hardness of a wheel is dependent on the holding power of the
removal is necessary and there’s a large contact area bond, which is what holds the abrasive grains in the wheel. The amount of bond
• Use finer grits when finish is important, form needs to be in a wheel is the most important factor in determining the hardness of a wheel.
held and there’s a small contact area
Grit
Grit Size Particle Size Finish RMS Finish Grit Size Particle Size Finish RMS Finish Very Soft Soft Medium Hard Very Hard
46 .020 Over 32 Industrial 120 .0056 8-12 Very Fine D, E, F, G H, I, J, K L, M, N, O P, Q, R, S T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
60 .016 15-20 Smooth 150 .0048 6-10 Mirror Finish
80 .0105 12-18 Fine 220 .0026 5-6 Mirror Finish The information in this chart follows industry standards
100 .0085 10-15 Finer
The following guide will help determine the hardness grade to use, but the type of stock, RPM and finish required all play a part in the determination:
Softer Grades Medium Grades Harder Grades
Hard metals, such as hard tool steels, carbide Hard and soft metals Soft metals
Rapid stock removal is most important Balance between rapid stock removal and longer life Longer wheel life is most important
Large surface contact Medium surface contact Small, narrow surface contact
Tips:
• Wheel has short life: change to a harder grade • Need freer cutting action: change to a softer grade
• Need cooler cutting: change to a harder grade or a porous grade • Wet grinding allows for harder grades to be used without burning the work
Bench & Pedestal Grinding Wheel Types (Wheels Used for Off-hand Grinding)
Gray: Produced with semi-friable aluminum oxide grain. Used for steel applications.
Green: Produced with friable silicon carbide abrasive grain. Used for non-ferrous applications and sharpening carbide.
Safety Tip: Grinding wheels should be used properly following all manufacturer’s safety instructions.
Grade Selection Assistance
Grit Selection for Aluminum Oxide Grit Selection for Silicon Carbide
36 Grit Coarse grinding 80 Grit Medium grinding 60 Grit General Purpose/Rough grinding
46 Grit Coarse to Medium grinding 120 Grit Fine grinding 80 Grit General Purpose grinding
60 Grit Medium grinding 120 Grit Fine Finish grinding

Page 926
Page 28

NorPor™ Toolroom Grinding Wheels

Type 1 (Straight)
Dia. W Hole Hard- Pkg. White (38A) Pink (25A) Ruby (48A) Purple (3SGR)
(In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Grit ness Qty. Spec. Order # Price Ea. Spec. Order # Price Ea. Spec. Order # Price Ea. Spec. Order # Price Ea. • White Wheel - 38A abrasive is the
value priced choice for light
7 1⁄2 11⁄4 46 G 10 38A46-GVP2 82028762 $22.32 25A46-GVP2 82028721 $22.32 48A46-GVP2 82028689 $34.62 3SGR46-GVP2 82028648 $53.62 grinding applications
7 1⁄2 11⁄4 46 H 10 38A46-HVP2 82028770 22.32 25A46-HVP2 82028739 22.32 48A46-HVP2 82028697 34.62 3SGR46-HVP2 82028655 53.62 • Pink Wheel - 25A abrasive is cool
7 1⁄2 11⁄4 60 G 10 25A60-GVP2 82028747 22.32 3SGR60-GVP2 82028663 53.62 cutting and holds forms well
7 1⁄2 11⁄4 60 H 10 38A60-HVP2 82028796 22.32 25A60-HVP2 82028754 22.32 48A60-HVP2 82028713 34.62 3SGR60-HVP2 82028671 53.62 • Ruby Wheel - 48A abrasive is the
8 1⁄2 11⁄4 46 G 10 25A46-GVP2 82034844 27.06 3SGR46-GVP2 82034760 64.09 ruby color and porous ormulation
8 1⁄2 11⁄4 46 H 10 25A46-HVP2 82034851 27.06 48A46-HVP2 82034810 41.38 3SGR46-HVP2 82034778 64.09 for consistent performance
8 1⁄2 11⁄4 60 G 10 3SGR60-GVP2 82034786 64.09 • Purple Wheel - 3SGR abrasive
8 1⁄2 11⁄4 60 H 10 25A60-HVP2 82034877 27.06 48A60-HVP2 82034836 41.38 3SGR60-HVP2 82034794 64.09 combines SG and ruby abrasive
12 1 3 46 H 5 48A46-HVP2 82036856 143.02 3SGR46-HVP2 82036815 175.48 for heavy stock removal and
12 1 3 60 H 5 48A60-HVP2 82036872 143.02 3SGR60-HVP2 82036831 175.48 maximum productivity

Type 5 (One Side Recessed)

Dia. W Hole Recess Hard- Pkg. Ruby (48A) Purple (3SGR)
(In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Dia. (In.) D (In.) Grit ness Qty. Spec. Order # Price Ea. Spec. Order # Price Ea.
7 1 11⁄4 23⁄4 1⁄2 46 H 10 48A46-HVP2 82028853 $52.77 3SGR46-HVP2 82028812 $81.77
8 1 11⁄4 31⁄4 1⁄2 46 G 10 3SGR46-GVP2 82034927 99.17
8 1 11⁄4 31⁄4 1⁄2 46 H 10 48A46-HVP2 82034976 61.96 3SGR46-HVP2 82034935 99.17
12 11⁄2 5 71⁄2 1⁄2 46 H 5 3SGR46-HVP2 82036963 257.50
12 11⁄2 5 71⁄2 1⁄2 60 G 5 48A60-GVP2 82051426 209.89
14 11⁄2 5 8 1⁄2 46 G 5 3SGR46-GVP2 82056326 339.22 White (38A) Pink (25A) Ruby (48A) Purple (3SGR)
14 11⁄2 5 8 1⁄2 46 H 5 48A46-HVP2 82056375 275.99 3SGR46-HVP2 82056334 339.22
14 11⁄2 5 8 1⁄2 60 H 5 3SGR60-HVP2 82056359 339.22 Quantity Discounts High porosity grinding wheels utilizing Norton’s
14 2 5 8 1⁄2 46 G 5 3SGR46-GVP2 82056169 429.08 Save 10% on Pkg. Qty. new VP2 bond system, and combining specialized
14 2 5 8 1⁄2 46 H 5 48A46-HVP2 82056219 349.10 3SGR46-HVP2 82056177 429.08 Must Be Same Size & Style open structure with various abrasive grains.

926
CUT-OFF & DEPRESSED CENTER WHEELS-TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Cut-Off & Depressed Center Grinding Wheels

Cut-off wheels usually have a thickness measuring ¼” or less. Similar to surface grinding wheels, they are composed of abrasive grain, bond and in most cases
fiberglass reinforcement to add support to the side of the wheel. Non-reinforced wheels do not have fiberglass reinforcement and should only be used on types of
machines classified as “fixed base” where the work is securely clamped and guarded and where the wheel operates on a controlled cutting plane.

Cut-Off Wheels

Cut-off wheels are also known as Type 1 or straight wheels and are used strictly for cutting through most hard materials such as Iron, Aluminum and Stainless Steel.

Wheels can be either reinforced or non-reinforced. Reinforced wheels contain additional body strengthening fiberglass and are used with stationary or portable tools.
Non-reinforced wheels are used with stationary tools only.

Common Machines that use Cut-off Wheels

Pneumatic Cut-Off Saws: Wheels measuring

between 1-1/2” and 6” in diameter are Stationary Cut-Off Saws (Shop Cut-Off Saws):
designed for use on horizontal shaft grinders. Wheels with diameters measuring between
Wheels used with this type of machine should 10” and 24” should be used in conjunction
ALWAYS be reinforced. with stationary saws.
Circular Saws: Wheels between 6” and 8” in
diameter are designed for use with Circular
Saws. Wheels made with aluminum oxide
abrasive grain are meant for work on metal Chop Saw: Wheels measuring between 10”
materials, while those made with silicon and 16” in diameter and hole sizes with
carbide are engineered for use on masonry 7/64” are designed for use with Chop Saws.
materials such as concrete, brick and asphalt. These are available in aluminum oxide grains
Wheels used on these machines should for work on metal and in silicon carbide
ALWAYS be reinforced. grains for masonry.

Cut-Off Saws: Wheels measuring between 12” and 16” that are specially marked for high speeds can be used with High-Speed Saws,
powered either electrically or with gas. These wheels are made with either aluminum oxide for use on metal materials or with silicon
carbide for masonry work. Wheels used on these machines should ALWAYS be reinforced.

Depressed Center Wheels (Type 27, 28 & 29)

Depressed center wheels (also known as “raised hub” wheels) are available in Types 27, 28 and 29. They are sub-categories of bonded grinding wheels and can be
used for a variety of operations, usually determined by application. Wheels that are ¼” thick are designed to be used for grinding only. Wheels measuring less than
1/8” in thickness are designed for cutting or notching only. Wheels measuring exactly 1/8” thick are considered combination wheels and can be used for light grinding
operations or for cutting.
There are three types of depressed center wheels:
TYPE 27 TYPE 28 TYPE 29

Type 27 wheels are made with flat grinding rims or faces and are designed for side grinding.
Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped rims and are designed for corner and side grinding.
Type 29 wheels have reversed saucer shaped grinding rims and are designed for blending (stock removal that leaves a smooth finish).
*Type 28 and 29 wheels should not be used for cutting-off or notching operations.
Depending upon the application for which the wheel was designed, either aluminum oxide or silicon carbide is used in the manufacturing process. Aluminum oxide
abrasive grain is used in wheels made for metalworking. For high performance metalworking applications, ceramic, aluminum oxide or zirconia alumina may also be
used. Silicon carbide is used in wheels made for masonry. In this category, the bond is usually resin, however, in some cases for non-reinforced wheels the bond is
rubber or shellac.
Machines that use Type 27, 28 and 29 Wheels

Right Angle Grinders: Several wheels can be used in conjunction with a right angle grinder. All depressed center wheels (Type 27, Type 28 and Type 29)
are designed for use with this type of machine.

Safety Tip: It is recommended that all users be equipped with the proper safety attire, including cut-resistant safety gloves, eye & face protection,
hearing and respiratory protection.

946
Page 29
 COATED QUICK-CHANGE SANDING DISCS-TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of…Coated Quick Change Discs

No tools are needed for this twist-on and off fastening system which allows for a rapid disc change and maximizes productivity by minimizing downtime. For general
purpose, leveling and finishing operations and specialized grinding, deburring and blending. Best tool for stock removal on most types of ferrous and non-ferrous
metals, composites and fiberglass.
Abrasive Types & Applications
Ceramic Alumina: Is used in applications where the longest lasting, coolest cutting abrasive is required. Ceramic is an ideal choice for demanding applications on
exotic materials.
Zirconia Alumina: A sharp and long-lasting material that works well on a wide variety of heavy grinding operations. Zirconia Alumina is sometimes constructed on a
heavy, durable backing with a grinding aid (a sizing coat with adhesive that maintains the position of the actual abrasive grain coating) for cooler cutting.
Aluminum Oxide: Best used for economical, general purpose deburring and blending on ferrous and non-ferrous metals. A grinding aid is sometimes added to the
sandpaper during the manufacturing process for cooler cutting on harder to grind exotic alloys.
Silicon Carbide: Sharp abrasive grain provides high initial cut and penetration for work on non-ferrous materials.
Attachments
Quick Change Discs come in a choice of three safe, easy-to-use attachment types:
Type R: Features a roll-on/roll-off style fastener (External Thread) (Equivalent to Norton’s TR, Merit Type III or 3M’s Roloc fastening systems).
Type S: Features a turn-on/turn-off style fastener (1/4-1/2 turn to lock in place) (Equivalent to Norton’s TS Speed-Loc™, Merit Type II,
3M’s S and SM or Standard Abrasives’ Soc-Att® fastening system).
Type P: Is a snap-on/snap-off system (Equivalent to Merits Type I or 3M’s TP fastening system).

Backup Pads are available in all three

attachment types and are typically attached
to tools using a 1/4w straight shank.
Type R Type S Type P

For Use With Safety Tips

Quick change discs are primarily used with Improper use of any abrasive product could result in serious injury or possible
right angle grinders. These grinders are death. Please refer to and comply with ANSI B7.7 safety standards before using any
typically air powered, but can also be abrasive product. All users should use appropriate personal protective equipment
portable electric grinders. including safety glasses, face shields, gloves, aprons, hearing protection and dust
protection. Use wheel guards as supplied by the tool manufacturer. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the backup pad and disc. Page 985
Page 30

Quick-Change Sanding Discs -

Aluminum Oxide
Sanding discs provide a fast, efficient method for grinding, blending, leveling and finishing on all types of metals. These quick-change discs
utilize a tool-free, twist-on and off fastening system that makes fast work of disc changes to maximize productivity and minimize downtime.
Features by brand:
Tru-Maxx
• Aluminum oxide on tough, X-wt. resin bond cloth backing
Merit Abrasives
• Excellent general purpose grain suitable for all
ferrous metals, aluminum and most alloys
Standard Abrasives
• Aluminum oxide grain on 2-ply backing For use with pneumatic and
• Works well on flat or contour surfaces electric power tools and grinders.
Norton Metalite
• Premium aluminum oxide abrasive with a heavy, X-wt. cloth backing Type R - Type S - Type P -
• Ideal for aggressive stock removal applications • Resistant to heat Interchangeable Interchangeable Interchangeable
3M 361F Coating Advantages: Aluminum Oxide with Roloc, with TS, Socatt, with Click It, TP,
• General purpose disc for grinding, blending and • Best used for economical, general purpose grinding, Lockit, TR & Speedlock & Powerlock &
finishing on all metals deburring and blending ferrous and nonferrous materials Type III Styles Type II Styles Type I Styles
• Aluminum oxide grain on tough polyester backing • High cut rate and durability Refer to Page No. 989 for back-up pads for Type R, S & P.
Tru-Maxx Merit Abrasives Standard Abrasives Norton Metalite 3M 361F
Dia. Pkg. Type R Type S Type R Type S Type P Type R Type S Type P Type R Type S Type R
(In.) Grit Qty. Order # Order # Price/100 Order # Order # Order # Price/100 Order # Order # Order # Price/100 Order # Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
3⁄4 24 100 72377104 72378839 $43.35 98249220 $48.40
3⁄4 36 100 72377153 72378847 41.85 06690143 46.72
3⁄4 40 100 72377179 72378854 41.85 32964124 46.72
3⁄4 50 100 72377187 72378862 38.79 32964132 43.31
3⁄4 60 100 72378615 72378870 38.79 32964140 43.31
3⁄4 80 100 72377195 63264113 36.61 32964157 40.87
3⁄4 100 100 72378623 72378896 36.61 98292923 40.87
3⁄4 120 100 72377203 72378904 36.61 97883946 40.87
3⁄4 150 100 72378631 72378912 36.61 32964165 40.87
3⁄4 180 100 72377211 72378920 36.61 32964173 40.87
3⁄4 240 100 72377229 72378938 36.61 97883938 40.87
3⁄4 320 100 72377237 72378946 36.61 32964181 40.87
1
Pkg. Qty. 50
Continued on next page

985
 TECHNICAL INFORMATION & DEBURRING WHEELS

Basics of...Deburring Wheels

Deburring Wheels are used for deburring, finishing, polishing, blending and cleaning on a wide variety of substrates
such as metals, composites, plastics, glass and wood. To select the best wheel option, first, understand your priorities
for the application, then determine which wheel is best suited to accomplish those goals in that application. Deburring
Wheels generally last longer than conventional abrasive, minimize undercutting or gouging and provide an extremely
consistent finish.
Understanding Wheel Types and Nomenclature Factors to Consider When Choosing a Starting Point
Types of Wheels: • Application the wheel is to perform (deburring, finishing, etc.)
Convolute: Is a wrapped construction on a standard sized core. The outside • Composition of workpiece and material type/hardness
diameter of the wheel is used for the cutting action. These wheels are • Size and shape of the workpiece
unidirectional, which is indicated by an arrow printed on the side of the wheel. • Tool or machinery the wheel will run on
Unitized: Is a layered construction with a selection of center hole sizes and no core. • Previous and possible subsequent abrasive steps
In this construction, both the outside diameter and the sides can be used as the Factors Affecting Performance
cutting surface. Unitized wheels are bidirectional and are available in smaller sizes
that are often more suitable for hand tools. Product: Decide what is the most important process in your application (i.e.,
Density, Mineral & Grade: deburring, blending or polishing) then determine what is the most critical
Most manufacturers follow the same guidelines to describe the density, mineral attribute you want from the wheel (i.e., life, cut rate, type of finish,
and grade of the wheel. consistency, etc.)
Density: Is generally denoted with a number at the beginning of the sequence and Product Surface Speed: The surface speed of the wheel has a significant
refers to how tightly the wheel is layered or wrapped. A higher density usually impact on performance. Generally, lower speeds are desired for creating
means the wheel will last longer than the wheel with lower density in the same uniform satin finishes or when working on softer metals or materials.
product family. Higher speeds are generally recommended when removing or blending
Mineral: Is the type of grain used in the wheel to create the cutting action and is surface imperfections and tough burrs.
typically denoted as the second character in the sequence. Most commonly used
minerals in wheels are aluminum oxide (A) and silicon carbide (S). Different Recommended Operating Speeds (SFPM= Surface Feet Per Minute)
minerals will produce different results i.e. finishes. Decorative Finishing: 500-3000 SFPM
Grade: Is the range of size of the mineral used in the wheel and will typically be the Composites/Soft Materials: 1200-2700 SFPM
last part of the sequence. Grades of wheels can include and be abbreviated as Deburring: 5000-6500 SFPM
follows: Very Fine (VFN), Fine (FIN), Medium (MED), Coarse (CRS) and Extra Blending/Polishing 6000-8000 SFPM
Coarse (XCS). Hardness/Density: Softer wheels (lower numbers) are typically used for
A typical wheel description may look as follows: decorative finishing. They better conform to surface contours while
generating a more uniform finish. Harder wheels (higher numbers) are
used for the more difficult blending, cleaning and deburring operations.
Lubricant/Coolant: Coolants, like water and some water soluble oils reduce
heat and extend product life while increasing cut. In the case of most oils or
tallow lubricants, surface roughness can be reduced. The higher viscosity
Also, the size of the wheel is typically described in the following sequence; lubricants produce lower surface roughness, i.e., grease produces a finer
diameter (A), width (B) and core diameter (C). Example 8w x 1w x 3w would surface finish than oil. In automatic or semi-automatic operations, it is
describe a wheel with an 8w diameter, 1w width, and 3w core. desirable to use lubricants and coolants whenever possible.

Page 31 Page 1011

Light Deburring Wheels

Dia. W Hole Mfr’s Den- Brite Star Norton Scotch-Brite™ LD - WL Softer and lighter than regular deburring wheels. For light deburring
(In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Code sity Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. and finishing of softer metals. Removes feathered bands on
6 1⁄2 1 6SFIN 6 81243529 $41.92 01261627 $49.54 aluminum, brass, etc. Blends mill marks on soft metal surfaces.
6 1⁄2 1 7SFIN 7 81243537 41.92 05009063 $50.53 01261635 52.84 Features by brand:
6 1⁄2 1 8SFIN 8 81243511 41.92 05009071 50.53 01261643 52.84 Brite Star
6 1 1 6SVFIN 6 70538202 70.72 • A good, all purpose deburring wheel for lighter applications
6 1 1 6SFIN 6 81243438 50.90 70538228 70.72 01261650 74.01 • For cleaning, finishing, blending, deburring and polishing in
6 1 1 7SFIN 7 81243545 50.90 70537006 70.72 01261668 74.01 a variety of lighter applications
6 1 1 8SFIN 8 81243552 50.90 01261676 74.01 Norton - Bear Tex Series 1000
6 2 1 6SFIN 6 81243446 82.44 01261684 113.23 • Smear and heat resistant formula with a range of web densities (6-9)
6 2 1 7SFIN 7 81243560 82.44 01261692 120.83 • Waterproof and non-metallic
6 2 1 8SFIN 8 81243578 82.44 01261700 120.83 • Starting point for deburring and finishing applications
8 1⁄2 3 7SFIN 7 81243594 45.30 01261718 62.90 Scotch-Brite™
8 1⁄2 3 8SFIN 8 81243586 45.30 01261726 62.90 • Excellent for light deburring and polishing of a wide range of metals,
8 1 3 6SFIN 6 81243453 69.27 05009337 90.21 01261734 92.55 plastics and composites
8 1 3 7SFIN 7 81243602 69.27 05009360 90.21 01261742 92.55 • Cool running and cleaner than buffs and compounds
8 1 3 8SFIN 8 81243610 69.27 01261759 92.55 Coating Advantages:
8 2 3 6SFIN 6 81243461 113.61 01261767 151.23 Aluminum Oxide
8 2 3 7SFIN 7 81243628 113.61 01261775 161.37 • Best used for economical, general purpose grinding, deburring and blending ferrous
8 2 3 8SFIN 8 81243636 113.61 01261783 161.37 and nonferrous materials
10 1⁄2 5 7SFIN 7 81243644 51.71 82412412 72.82 • High cut rate and durability
10 1 5 7SFIN 7 81243669 78.99 05008677 109.78 01261791 113.25
Silicon Carbide
10 1 5 8SFIN 8 81243651 78.99 05008685 109.78 • Sharp abrasive grain providing high initial cut rate and penetration for work on
10 2 5 7SFIN 7 01261817 194.18 nonferrous materials
12 1⁄2 5 7SFIN 7 81243685 65.88 01261825 81.33
12 1⁄2 5 8SFIN 8 01261833 81.33
12 1 5 6SFIN 6 81243479 100.22 05008735 121.76 01261841 124.75 For Use with:
12 1 5 7SFIN 7 81243719 100.22 70537162 126.18 01261858 133.10
12 1 5 8SFIN 8 81243701 100.22 05008784 126.18 01261866 133.10
Refer to Page No.
12 2 5 6SFIN 6 01261874 221.76
1012 for bushings.
12 2 5 7SFIN 7 81243735 189.03 70537220 224.13 01261882 236.58
12 2 5 8SFIN 8 01261890 236.58
12 3 5 7SFIN 7 01261908 340.11
12 3 5 8AFIN 8 05008925 330.59 Bench Grinder Pedestal Grinder

1011
 HAND FILES-TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Hand Files

How to Choose the Right File
File selection depends on the size and contours of the item being shaped. It’s also based on common sense and personal preference. To achieve the desired results,
the user should first consider the work to be done, then select the appropriate size, coarseness, tooth type and shape of the file.
The size and the coarseness of a file are directly related. Larger files are relatively coarse; they remove more stock, but leave a rougher finish. Smaller files are finer;
they remove less stock, but leave a smoother finish.
Once file size and coarseness have been determined, tooth type should be selected. Generally speaking, double-cut files should be chosen for the fast removal of stock,
while smooth double-cut or single-cut files should be used for finishing.
File shape is extremely important in determining the final contour of the workpiece. A triangular file should be used on acute internal angles to clear out square corners
and to sharpen saw teeth. A flat file should be used for general purpose work, a square file for enlarging rectangular holes and a round file for enlarging round holes. A
half-round file can be used for dual purposes – the flat face for filing flat surfaces and the curved face for grooves.

Parts of a File

Tang Heel Belly Point

File Terminology:
Back: The convex side of a half-round or other similarly shaped file.
Edge and Safe Edge: The side surfaces of a file; may be smooth (safe edge) or have teeth.
Handle: A holder into which the tang of the file fits. If the file has an integral holder this is known as a solid handle file.
Pinning: Filings wedged between the file teeth.
Shelling: The breaking of file teeth, usually caused by using too much pressure, reverse filing, filing sharp corners or filing edges.
How a File Works: Tooth Type and Coarseness
Two different attributes determine how aggressively a file will remove material and how smooth a finish will result: the kind of teeth that have been cut into the file and
the coarseness of those teeth. The work to be accomplished – roughing or finishing – will determine the kind of teeth and grade of coarseness best for each
application.

Kinds of Teeth
Single-cut Teeth Double-cut Teeth Rasp-cut Teeth Curved-cut Teeth

Single-Cut Teeth: Has a single set of parallel, diagonal rows of teeth. Single-cut files are often used with light pressure to produce a smooth surface finish or to put a
keen edge on knives, shears or saws.
Double-Cut Teeth: Has two sets of teeth positioned diagonally on the file face at opposite angles to each other. The double-cut file is used with heavier pressure than
the single-cut for faster material removal.
Rasp-Cut Tooth: Commonly known as a rasp, has a series of individual teeth formed by a single-pointed tool. A rasp produces a rough cut and is used primarily on soft
materials such as wood, hooves, aluminum and lead.
Curved-Cut/Milled Tooth: Has its teeth arranged in curved contours across the file face. Curved-cut tooth files are often used in automotive body shops for smoothing
body panels.
Coarseness
Swiss Pattern Files are smaller in size and finer in coarseness than their American Pattern counterparts. Swiss Pattern Files are used for more precise and intricate work.
American Pattern
Bastard-cut Second-cut Smooth-cut

Most American pattern files are available in three grades of coarseness: bastard-cut, second-cut and smooth-cut. The degree of coarseness increases with longer file
length, but the differences between bastard, second and smooth-cut remain proportionate.
Swiss Pattern
00 0 1 2 3 4 6

Swiss pattern files are available in seven grades of coarseness: 00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6. As with American pattern files, the degree of coarseness of Swiss pattern files
increases with length, but the difference between grades remains proportionate.

1033
Page 32
HAND FILES TECHNICAL INFORMATION (CONT.)

Basics of...Hand Files (cont’d)

File Shapes

Blunt File Taper File

Type or shape describes the cross-section shape of the file, i.e., rectangular, square, round, half-round, triangular, etc. The area to be filed will determine the specific
type to be used. Type is further classified according to the contour of the file: blunt or taper.

A blunt file has a constant width with edges parallel from end to end. It is used when the item being filed is very uniform or consistent so only one size file is needed.
The cross-section of a taper file decreases from its heel to its point; it may taper in width, thickness or both. A taper file allows the user to vary the size of the file
contact area without actually changing files. It is useful when the workpiece is more complex, presenting different filing needs.

How to Use a File Correctly

Standard Grip Heavy Stroke Grip Light Stroke Grip

Standard Grip: For files needing two-handed operation, the handle should be grasped in one hand and the point of the file in the other hand. The file handle should be
rested in the palm with the thumb pointing along the top of the handle and the fingers gripping the underside. The point of the file should be grasped between the
thumb and the first two fingers with the thumb being on the top of the file.
Heavy Stroke Grip: When heavy filing strokes are required, the thumb on the point is normally in line with the file; the tip of the thumb pointed forward.
Light Stroke Grip: For lighter strokes, the thumb can be turned to as much as a right angle to the direction of the stroke.
If the file is being used one-handed for filing pins, dies or edged tools not being held in a vise, the forefinger, and not the thumb, is placed on top of the handle in line
with the file.
For normal flat filing, the file should be moved forward on an almost straight line of a single plane, changing its course only enough to prevent grooving.

On the reverse stroke, it is best to lift the file clear of the workpiece, except on very soft metals. Even then, the pressure should be very light – never more than the
weight of the file itself.
For normal filing, the vise should be about elbow height. When there is a great deal of heavy filing, it is better to have the work slightly lower. If the work is of a fine
and delicate nature, the work can be raised to eye level.

File Care

The teeth of the file should be protected when the file is not in use by hanging it on a rack or keeping it in a drawer with wooden divisions. Files should always be kept
clear of water or grease, since this impairs the filing action. It is advisable to wrap the file in a cloth for protection when it is carried in a toolbox.

The file teeth should be kept clean at all times by using a file card, or a wire file brush, to clear the grooves between the teeth.
Page
A file should never be used without a tight fitting handle. Serious accidents can result if the handle becomes detached exposing the sharp point of the tang. 1034
Page 33

Flat Files
American Pattern
• Flat files, which are of rectangular cross section and have double cut teeth, are commonly Save 10% on
used by machinists, machinery builders, ship and engine builders Pkg. Qty.
• Used wherever metal must be removed rapidly and finish is of secondary importance Must be same size
• Slightly tapered toward the points in both width and thickness; cut on both sides
Nicholson Import - Production Grade
Approx. Size Box Bastard Second Cut Smooth L Box Bastard Second Cut Smooth
L (In.) W (In.) Thick. (In.) Qty. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. (In.) Qty. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
4 15⁄32 31⁄32 12 80757016 $8.34 80757032 $10.36 4 12 70574017 $5.42 70574025 $6.08 70574033 $6.26
6 39⁄64 1⁄8 12 80757115 8.77 80757156 $9.16 80757131 10.99 6 12 70574215 5.43 70574223 6.05 70574231 6.78
8 25⁄32 13⁄64 12 80757214 10.85 80757222 11.94 80757230 12.79 8 12 70574413 7.05 70574421 7.84 70574439 8.40
10 31⁄32 1⁄4 6 80757313 13.44 80757321 15.52 80757339 16.96 10 12 70574512 8.83 70574520 10.19 70574538 11.19
12 15⁄32 9⁄32 6 80757412 18.41 80757420 20.83 80757438 23.05 12 6 70574611 12.03 70574629 13.77 70574637 15.21
1
14 111⁄32 7⁄32 6 80757511 25.31 80757529 29.10 80757537 31.95 14 6 70574710 16.61 00574723 12.05 70574736 21.14
16 117⁄32 11⁄32 6 80757610 33.50 1
Shop Grade

1034
 CARBIDE BURS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
TiN Coated Carbide Burs
1⁄4w Shank, 23⁄4w Overall
A B C D E
Cut Dia. (In.) Cut L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Cut Dia. (In.) Cut L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Cut Dia. (In.) Cut L (In.) Order # Price Ea.
A. Round Tree C. Pointed Tree E. Cylindrical
3⁄8 3⁄4 00451104 $36.79 3⁄8 3⁄4 00451146 $36.79 3⁄8 3⁄4 00451187 $38.44
1⁄2 1 00451005 44.36 1⁄2 1 00451047 42.26 1⁄2 1 00451088 44.36
B. 14° Included Angle D. Egg Sets of Above
3⁄8 11⁄16 00451120 36.13 3⁄8 5⁄8 00451161 36.79 5 Pc.-3⁄8 Cut Dia. 00451195 153.51
1⁄2 11⁄2 00451021 44.36 1⁄2 7⁄8 00451062 43.55 5 Pc.-1⁄2 Cut Dia. 00451096 189.73

Carbide 1⁄4w Extended Shank Burs

Cut Made in USA SGS Metal Removal 6w Long Steel Shank
Dia. LOC Single Cut Double Cut Single Cut Double Cut Single Cut Double Cut
Ind. # (In.) (In.) Order # Order # Price Ea. Order # Order # Price Ea. Order # Order # Price Ea. A
A. Cylindrical
SA-1L6 1⁄4 5⁄8 00455014 00457515 $17.96 05292263 05292495 $20.11 82309006 82309063 $25.41
SA-3L6 3⁄8 3⁄4 00455022 00457523 22.96 05292271 05292503 28.40 82309089 35.78
SA-5L6 1⁄2 1 00455030 00457531 39.48 05292289 05292511 44.25 82309048 82309105 55.82 B
B. Cylindrical - Ball Nose
SC-1L6 1⁄4 5⁄8 00455113 00457614 20.95 05292297 05292529 23.46 82309121 82309188 29.02
SC-3L6 3⁄8 3⁄4 00455121 00457622 23.49 05292305 05292537 31.55 82309147 82309204 39.15
SC-5L6 1⁄2 1 00455139 00457630 44.34 05292313 05292545 49.64 82309162 82309220 62.60
C. Ball C
SD-1L6 1⁄4 1⁄4 00455410 00457911 19.29 05292321 05292552 21.65 82309485 82309543 27.28
SD-3L6 3⁄8 3⁄8 00455428 00457929 23.18 05292339 05292560 25.96 82309501 82309568 32.79
SD-5L6 1⁄2 1⁄2 00455436 00457937 31.28 05292347 05292578 34.97 82309527 82309584 44.12
D
D. Egg Shape
SE-1L6 1⁄4 3⁄8 A73241705 23.44 05292354 05292586 26.05
SE-3L6 3⁄8 5⁄8 A72907710 A73241713 27.12 05292362 05292594 31.55
SE-5L6 1⁄2 7⁄8 A72907728 A73241721 41.60 05292370 05292602 46.23
E. Tree - Round Nose
SF-1L6 1⁄4 1⁄2 00455212 00457713 19.80 05292388 05292610 24.48 1
82309246 1
82309303 30.85 E
SF-3L6 3⁄8 3⁄4 00455220 00457721 25.08 05292396 05292628 30.94 82309261 82309329 39.06
SF-5L6 1⁄2 1 00455238 00457739 40.68 05292404 05292636 45.59 82309287 82309345 57.48
F. Tree - Pointed Nose
SG-1L6 1⁄4 1⁄2 A72907801 A73241796 22.03 05292412 05292644 24.48 F
SG-3L6 3⁄8 3⁄4 A73241804 29.61 05292420 05292651 32.91
SG-5L6 1⁄2 1 A73241812 40.49 05292438 05292669 44.97
G. Flame - Round Nose
SH-2L6 5⁄16 3⁄4 A73241853 27.26 05292446 05292677 32.48 G
SH-5L6 1⁄2 11⁄4 A72907876 A73241861 59.58 05292453 05292685 66.10
H. Tapered - 14° Included
SL-1L6 1⁄4 5⁄8 00455311 00457812 22.39 05292461 05292693 25.04 82309360 82309428 31.61
SL-3L6 3⁄8 11⁄16 00455329 00457820 35.29 05292479 05292701 39.46 82309386 82309444 49.71 H
SL-4L6 1⁄2 11⁄8 00455337 00457838 43.92 05292487 05292719 48.28 82309402 82309469 61.45
1
LOC: 5⁄8w

Basics of...Hand Deburring

What is Hand Deburring?
Hand deburring (sometimes referred to as "manual deburring") is one of the most common methods utilized when finishing metal and plastic products, usually
performed by applying a hand-held deburring tool against a fixed or hand-held part. These tools are available in a wide variety of configurations, including knives,
blades, scrapers, countersinks, files, brushes and rotary burs.
Important Parameters in Choosing the Proper Hand Deburring Tool
• Material and geometry of the part • Location of the burr and how difficult it is to reach • Number of work pieces being deburred
• Size and nature of the chips (ex. spiral or powder) • Length and location of the edge to be deburred
Deburring with blades and scrapers specially designed for the particular application will allow for the fast deburring of holes, close and far edges, internal
and external surfaces, slots, corners and the edges of a sheet.

Surfaces for Hand Deburring

The composition and construction of the deburring tools are also important for maximizing the tool life and the effective deburring process itself. By considering the
material being deburred and the desired tool life, an extensive choice of blades are available, each with different geometries and cutting angles. Blades are available in
high speed steel (HSS), TiN-coated HSS, cobalt HSS, ceramics or tungsten carbide. **Manufacturers’ recommendations are found in the blade section.

Slot/Keyway Outer Edge Flat Surface Sheets Straight Hole Edge Cross-Hole Hole Inner Inner Straight Hole
Edge Both Edges Surface Corners Back-Edge
Safety Tip: It is recommended that all users be equipped with the proper safety attire, including cut-resistant safety gloves and eye protection.

1053
Page 34
 DEBURRING TOOLS, SCRAPERS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Fine Deburring Tools & Set Adjustable Scraper & Deburring Tool
• Ideal for deburring delicate parts MADE IN SWITZERLAND
• Six double end tools with revolving, hardened steel discs
• The 12 disc sizes range from .060w dia. to .208w dia.
• Knurled handle for comfortable grip
Size Wheel Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Blade Specifications: Desc. Order # Price Ea.
• Accurately ground high speed steel
#1 0.060, 0.070 00572792 $18.35 • Has a triangular cross section and Complete Tool
#2 0.082, 0.092 00572784 18.35 finished on both ends Handle & 1 Straight Blade 05750013 $26.71
#3 0.106, 0.116 00572776 18.35 • Reversible for double life Extra Blades - 3w long
#4 0.134, 0.150 00572768 18.35 • Blades are used in hard to reach places Straight 05750104 11.53
#5 0.160, 0.185 00572750 18.35 • Handle is 41⁄2w long with a bullet nose 45? 05750450 11.53
#6 0.198, 0.208 00572800 18.35 collet face which serves as a non- 90? 05750906 11.53
6 Piece Set 0.060, 0.070, 0.082, 0.092, 0.106, 05753504 87.19 marring edge guide
• Furnished in
0.116, 0.134, 0.150, 0.160, 0.185, plastic pouch
0.198, 0.208

Basics of...Abrasive Brushes

Wire Wheel Brush Wire Cup Brush Wire End Brush Wire Internal Brush

Wheel Brushes: The outer circumference or “face” of this circular style Brush Configuration by Application Type
brush performs the work. Wheel brushes are ideal for removal of Wheel Cup End Internal
material, flash, rust, paint, cleaning weld bead, deburring, deflashing, Brightening ✓ ✓
edge blending, skiving and buffing. Fill materials include both crimped Buffing ✓
and straight wires of steel and stainless steel, brass and other non- Cleaning ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ferrous metals; treated and untreated natural fibers; and synthetics Deburring ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
such as nylon, plastic, and nylon/abrasive filaments for dry and wet Deflashing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
abrasive action. Brush diameters range from 5/8w to 22w. Descaling ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Dusting ✓
Cup Brushes: Are made in three types: knotted wire in steel and stainless Edge Blending ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
steel for heavy duty, crimped wire for lighter surface preparation and Finishing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
deburring service and abrasive nylon filaments for finishing work. Cup Hose Skiving ✓
brushes are easily mounted on CNC machines and portable tools, air-or Irregular Shapes ✓ ✓ ✓
Polishing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
electric-powered. Standard brush diameters range from less than one inch
up to nine inches, with wire diameters from .006w to .035w. Roughening ✓
Spot Facing ✓
End Brushes: Are designed to have the ends of the fill strands do the Stripping ✓ ✓ ✓
Surface Prep ✓ ✓ ✓
bulk of the work, although the sides can also be used to finish vertical
surfaces that parallel the shaft. They are especially suitable for CNC Texturing ✓
Weld Prep ✓ ✓ ✓
machines, portable air and electric tools in tight spaces. End brushes
are made in knot, crimped, and straight wire of carbon steel, stainless Brush Type by Material Process
steel, brass, Nylon/Abrasive filaments and other non-metallics. End Workpiece Material
brush diameters range from 3/16w to 3w.
Brush Material Aluminum Brass Copper Iron Plastic Steel Stainless Steel Wood
Internal Finishing Brushes: Also known as a “side action” or twisted wire Crimped Wire
brush, this style is primarily used in CNC machines, portable tools and drill Steel OK OK OK BC NR BC NR OK
presses for cross hole deburring and fast cleaning and finishing of such Stainless VG OK OK OK NR OK BC OK
Nonferrous OK BC BC OK VG OK OK OK
inaccessible surfaces as small diameter bores and internally threaded
surfaces. Internal finishing brushes are made in steel, stainless steel, brass, Knotted Wire
Steel NR OK OK BC NR BC NR OK
nylon and Nylon/Abrasive filaments. A number of special purpose power Stainless NR OK OK OK NR OK BC OK
and manual styles are included in the internal finishing category: tube, tube Nonferrous VG BC BC OK VG OK OK OK
& flue and power tube brushes. Sizes range from .030w up to 10w. Encapsulated Wire
Pliant Polymer NR NR NR BC NR BC BC NR
Brushing Speed and Pressure: In most operations, a lower speed than the Rigid Polymer NR NR NR BC NR BC BC NR
Maximum Safe Free Speeds (MSFS) will prove more efficient for you.
Natural Fibers
Lower speeds and lighter pressure gives longer brush life, generates less Tampico-Untreated VG VG VG OK VG BC BC OK
heat in the work, and requires less power. With wire brushes, the tips of the Treated VG VG VG VG OK BC BC NR
filaments do the actual work. With Nylon/Abrasive brushes, the tips and Sisal VG VG VG OK OK OK BC NR
sides of the filaments do the work. Where high brush pressures and speeds Synthetics
are required, it is recommended that a more aggressive brush be used. Nylon OK OK OK NR OK OK OK OK
This may be done by increasing wire size and/or abrasive grit size,
decreasing trim length, or in some instances, changing to another brush BC Best Choice for the combination
type. To protect against hazard, before starting the brush, during rotation, VG Very Good for the combination
and until rotation stops, operators and others in the area must wear IMPORTANT NOTE: Never exceed the
OK Suitable for the combination
SAFETY GOGGLES or FULL FACE SHIELDS WORN OVER SAFETY GLASSES recommended MAXIMUM SAFE FREE SPEED
WITH SIDE SHIELDS ANSI Z87.1 “Occupational Eye and Face Protection”. NR Not Recommended for the combination RPM (MSFS/MAX. SFS) rating of the brush.

1063
Page 35
 DUST COLLECTORS, PARTS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Model DC 1500 Model MS-1500 Media Separator
Inverted Bag Dust Collector
For Use with DC-1500 Dust Collector
• 21⁄4w Hose ends • 11⁄4w Adapter • 90 CFM • 11⁄2 HP motor • 6v Hose
• Comes with standard paper cartridge filter • Shipping weight: 22 Lbs. (1 box) The separator is hooked up between the blast cabinet and the
dust collection system. The cyclonic action spins the heavy
Constructed of thick wall plastic. particles (good media) down into the hopper, and the dust
Model Order # Price Ea. and fine particles are siphoned out into the dust collector.
DC 1500 09118878 $288.08 Dual Operational Options:
• Exhausts all materials from the cabinet from the bottom and feeds
Dust Collector Replacement Parts the gun system from the separator
Mfr’s # Desc. Order # Price Ea. • Exhausts the fine particles from the top and returns media to the
cabinet manually
DC15105 50 Micron Filter Bag 98754765 $35.41 • Dimensions: 61.5wH x 14wW x 14wD Ship Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
2055 50 Micron Cartridge Filter 75018325 24.85 • Hopper height: 28w
DC15400 Replacement Motor 65879009 79.46 • Inlet port: 2.5w 75 09258989 $329.21

Sandblaster Replacement Parts

Model DC4000 Dust Collector
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. For Cyclone
• The DC4000 dust collection system is designed for use in one or Guns Sandblasting Units
up to three blast cabinets 14 CFM Trigger Gun 7001 09116708 $50.96
• Perfect for shops that use their cabinet on a daily basis or for 14 CFM Foot Gun 7006 00240457 72.73
very large blast cabinets Foot Pedal with Gun 2031G 94193307 150.43
• Large paper cartridge filter and cloth wrap filter Nozzle Holder
• Trap door for easy debris removal 14 CFM Nozzle Holder 7005 96756572 27.26
• CFM: 400 • Horsepower: 1⁄3
• Overall dimensions: 19wW x 19wD x 60wH Foot Pedal
• For proper operation of dust collection system, regular Foot Pedal Assembly 2031 09116575 112.95
maintenance is required Nozzles
5 CFM Ceramic Nozzle 7009 09116716 24.73
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 5 CFM Tungsten Carbide Nozzle 7084 60767001 45.97
Dust Collector DC4000 60635638 $1285.74 14 CFM Ceramic Nozzle 7011 00540567 24.99
Replacement Cartridge Filter DC4100 07434509 187.27 14 CFM Tungsten Carbide Nozzle 7080 06642094 57.26
Replacement Cloth Wrap Filter DC4101 07434525 37.47 Offices
Replacement Motor DC4200 09258955 280.93 5 CFM Steel Orifice 7076 09116740 20.37
14 CFM Steel Orifice 7077 09116757 20.37
Mylar Shields (12 Pk.)
For 3824, 4826, 4040 2057 48417687 51.16
Blast Basket For 3024, 3624, 4224 Newer Unit, Square Edges 2047 82041823 34.29
For 3024, 3624, 4224 Older Unit, Rounded Edges 2052 09116591 41.57
• Basket for small parts For PK36, TF-5000, E500, 6035, FT60 2048 00240077 58.32
• Easy grip handle For TF-1000, PBH-2000, E100 2054 09116617 52.83
• Size: 71⁄2w x 71⁄8w Glass Replacement Units
• For use with all models For 3824, 4826, 4040 2001 67119669 48.27
• Perforated metal sides with solid bottom construction allows blast For 3024, 3624, 4224 Newer Unit, Square Edges 2006 86728466 31.29
media to flow out but parts to remain in basket
Rubber Gloves
Order # Price Ea. 18w For PBH-2000, TF-1000, 5000 2022 09116526 47.48
02435030 $42.02 24w Gloves For All Units 2023 09118613 55.69

Basics of...Abrasive Blasting Media

Blasting abrasives are used for cleaning, finishing, deburring and peening applications. Round spherical particles leave a smooth finish that slightly peens the surface,
ideal for work where tolerances are important. Harder and sharper materials clean faster by penetrating deeper. Grit numbers refer to the coarseness of the material.

Media Types
Glass Bead: is used in blast cabinets for honing, polishing, peening, finishing and removing light burrs. Produces a clean, bright, satin finish without dimensional
change of the part. Can also be used for peening without over stressing the metal.
Garnet: is a fine cutting abrasive used for quick removal of rust, corrosion and coatings from substrate. Also used for removing burrs and preparing metal for coating.
Crushed Glass: is an angular shaped blasting media for aggressive surface profiling, removal of paint, epoxy and other coatings. Crushed glass is free of heavy metals
such as lead, asbestos, titanium, etc.
Walnut Shell: is an angular shaped media for cleaning soft metals such as aluminum. This media will not affect the substrate.
Silicon Carbide: is the hardest blasting media available. The very fast cutting speed along with the material harshness will reduce blasting time. Contains no free silica
and does not create static. Can be recycled multiple times.
Aluminum Oxide: is a hard, fast cutting abrasive. Used in many applications such as, paint, rust, coating removal as well as deburring and preparing parts for plating
and welding.
Aluminum Oxide – Glass Bead Mix: 70 percent glass bead, 30 percent aluminum oxide for use when aluminum oxide results may be too harsh.
Media Efficiency Rating
Glass Crushed Walnut Silicon Aluminum Oxide
Bead Garnet Glass Shell Carbide Aluminum Oxide Glass Bead Mix
Cleaning Speed Med High High Med High Med/High High
Cleaning Metal Med Good Good Low Very Good Good Med
Blast Pressure 20-60 60-100 20-50 20-60 20-90 40-90 20-60
Metal Removal Very Low High Low/Med Low High Med/High Med
Hardness (MOH Scale) 5.5 7.5 5.5 1-4.5 9 9 5.5-9
Shape of Granule Spherical Granular Spherical Granules Angular Angular Spherical/Angular
Dust Level Low Med/High Low Low Med Med Med
Continued Use Ability Med/High Med Low Low Low/Med Med/High Med/High

1091
Page 36
 TOGGLE CLAMP TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Toggle & Pneumatic/Hydraulic Clamping

Toggle clamps provide ready-made, compact devices for a variety of applications, including:
Welding fixtures Equipment hold-downs Milling, drilling, bonding, sealing Inspection/gaging fixtures
Electronic test fixtures Injection Molding Machine tool positioners Door Closures
Latches for container lids Conveyors Production fixtures Assembly & Woodworking jigs
Considerations to Select the Proper Toggle Clamp
• Size and shape of parts to be held
• Consistency of part thickness (use spring-loaded device to compensate for variations)
• Holding capacity required
• Exerting force required
• Strength and dexterity of operator
• Operator’s position relative to the fixture (use vertical handle or low profile horizontal clamps)
• Frequency of operation (temporary or permanent fixture)
• Time cycle of operation (consider a conveyor or rotary fixture if set-up or curing time is needed)
• Cycle time & sequence (consider air clamps that can be operated faster and in sequence)
• Environment (should consider stainless steel for corrosive or non-magnetic applications)
Holding Capacity vs. Exerting Force
It is important to distinguish between the Holding Capacity and the Exerting or Clamping Force.
Holding Capacity: The holding capacity of a toggle clamp is defined as the maximum amount of force that may be applied to the clamping bar without creating
permanent deformation of the clamp components.
This maximum force is measured at a point closest to the mounting base, and it diminishes as the spindle approaches the end of the bar. The ratings for holding
capacity are maximum values and should not be exceeded. These values include a safety factor.
Exerting or Clamping Force: This value is calculated as the actual amount of force the clamp will exert on the work piece. Manual clamps present a number of variables
to determine actual exerting force.
• The force exerted on the handle by the operator • The mechanical advantage of the clamp’s linkage
• The point on the handle where the force is applied • The point on the clamping bar where the force will be applied to the work piece
Four Basic Types of Toggle Clamps

Hold-Down Clamps: Two Types: Vertical and horizontal Handle. Options Plier (Squeeze Action) Clamps: Available with 1 or 2 adjustable spindles.
include flanged, straight and weldable bases; Straight and T-handles; Trigger release allows for easy one-hand operation on most models.
solid bars and open or U-bars; carbon and stainless steel. Pneumatic Options include carbon and stainless steel, different jaw depths and
versions available for applications requiring automation. openings, depending on the requirements of the application.

Straight-Line Action Clamps: Many can be used as a pull or a push

Pull/Latch Action Clamps: Two Types: U-hook and J-hook. Ideal for clamp, and can lock in two positions. Several base mounting
sealing lids, doors, and molds. Threaded adjustments make them options are available, as are threaded bodies for through-hole
adaptable to most applications. Options include carbon, stainless mounting. Options include carbon and stainless steel models;
steel and rubber material; vertical and horizontal versions; latch flanged and straight bases; reverse action; variable stroke clamps.
plates available. Pneumatic versions are available for automated applications.
Pneumatic Clamping Hydraulic Clamping
Uses air-actuated cylinders to operate the clamping device. They are ideal for quick Ideal for machining applications where extremely high clamping forces are
clamping in repetitive production operations. Available in many styles, including required for part holding.
swing cylinders, hold-down and straight-line action, and retracting clamps. Can
easily retrofit many manual clamps with a pneumatic version, using the identical
mounting patterns. Benefits of using Hydraulic Clamps:
• Economically driven by air or electric power sources
Benefits of using Pneumatic Clamps: • Clamping components are small, yet generate high clamping forces
• Improves cycle time • Consistent and controllable clamping forces
• Increases productivity • Improves cycle time
• Can operate several clamps at one time • Increases productivity
• Can operate clamps sequentially • Can operate several clamps at one time
• Reduces operator fatigue • Can operate clamps sequentially
• Can operate clamps remotely for hard to reach areas • Can operate clamps remotely for hard to reach areas
• Improves safety and ergonomics • Reduces operator fatigue
• Consistent and controllable clamping forces • Improves safety and ergonomics

1169
Page 37
SPRING-LOADED DEVICES TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Spring-Loaded Devices

A Spring-Loaded device is a mechanism that adds value to a spring by encapsulating it in a body and providing a plunger tip or ball on one end which allows for
accurate and repeatable end forces.
Why Use a Spring-Loaded Device?
• One subassembly replaces multiple components • Accurate & repeatable end forces • Easier to install than standard springs
• Allows simple side loading (not possible with springs) • Repeatable projection • Minimal spring compression set
Plunger Main Categories
Standard Spring Plungers: Feature long travel and large bearing
Push-Fit: Designed for easy installation into wood, soft
surfaces that prevent blinding and assure perfect alignment at
plastic or aluminum. Ideal where a threaded ball
any extension. Great for a wide range of applications.
plunger is NOT practical or when threaded adjustments
are not required.
Stubby Spring Plungers: Compact unit provides considerable
plunger travel and high end forces ideal for applications where Flangless Push-Fit: Innovative design features no
space is restricted. Offer greater travel than Ball Plungers and flange on ball end allowing the plunger to be
less travel than Standard Plungers. inserted into the workpiece from the top or the
bottom, front or back. Excellent for use where
less clearance is available.
Ball Plungers: Smallest & Lightest Spring-Loaded Device. Hexnose Plungers: Can be utilized with a hex wrench
to speed up installation or removal process. Offer
greater travel than Ball Plungers and less travel than
Quick Release Plungers: Available in many retractable plunger Standard Plungers.
designs that can be easily withdrawn and re-engaged. Six
Long Travel Plungers: Ideal for High
Types: Knob, Knurled Knob, Hex Drive Knob, T-Handle, Pull-
Speed, long life applications
Ring, & Lever Type.
Materials
Carbon Steel: Provides better wear resistance of the plunger tip due to case hardening & is less expensive than Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel: Excellent for corrosive environments, food processing & high temp. applications (spring can withstand 600° F)
Nylon or Delrin®: Will not mar softer materials such as: Aluminum or Brass
Phenolic: Will not mar softer materials such as: Aluminum or Brass, but is more brittle than Nylon or Delrin®
Finishes
Zinc Plate: yellow, clear or black chromate conversion coat Black Oxide: Retains lubricants to aid in wear resistance
Additional Information
End Force: Spring-Loaded devices are designed to exert a precise end force Locking Elements: Forces threads on the opposite side of a spring-loaded device to
in the correct place at the correct time. End forces range from 125 to 200 lbs. compress against the mating threads of a tapped hole, providing a thread locking
Travel: This is the range of motion of the Plunger or Ball. Through range of property. They eliminate the need for checknuts, locking helicoils, or thread locking
travel, end forces increase from initial to final as the plunger or ball is depressed. adhesives. Max. Temp. limit: 250°F. Most Spring-Loaded Devices are available
Thread Sizes: with or without a Nylon Locking Element.
Class 2A Thread - Unified ANSI Types: Nylon Pellet: 5⁄16” and larger
Class 6g Thread - Metric Nylon Patch: ¼” and smaller
5 Steps to Selecting the Right Spring-Loaded Device:
1 Select the type of Spring-Loaded Device for your application 4 Determine if you need a Locking Element
2 Select appropriate end force for application 5 Select the appropriate thread size (hole diameter)
3 Select material, Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel, Phenolic, Nylon or Delrin® Page 1232
Page 38

Stubby Steel & Stainless Steel Spring Plungers

Inch Sizes
Product Applications:
• Ideal for restricted space applications
Features:
• Stubby plungers offer greater travel than ball plungers and less travel than standard plungers • Easy to install with a screwdriver
• Stainless steel plungers provide corrosion resistance • Wear resistant
Max.
Thread Thread Plunger Plunger End Steel Steel w/Locking Element Stainless Steel Stainless Steel w/Locking Element
Size L. Reach Dia. Force (Lbs.) Gibraltar Vlier Gibraltar Vlier Gibraltar Vlier Gibraltar Vlier
A B (In.) C (In.) D (In.) Initial Final Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
8-32 0.437 0.052 0.070 1⁄2 11⁄2 09244708 $3.87 62119870 $4.74 09244716 $3.87 62119888 $4.74 09245028 $6.45 62120175 $7.90 73260150 $6.45 62117874 $7.90
8-32 0.437 0.052 0.070 11⁄2 43⁄4 09244666 3.87 62119839 4.74 09244674 3.87 62119847 4.74 09244989 6.45 62120159 7.90 09244997 6.45 62117791 7.90
8-36 0.437 0.052 0.070 1⁄2 11⁄2 09244690 3.87 62119862 4.74 09244724 3.87 62119896 4.74 09245010 6.45 62120167 7.90 73260168 6.45 62117882 7.90
8-36 0.437 0.052 0.070 11⁄2 43⁄4 09244658 3.87 62119821 4.74 09244682 3.87 62119854 4.74 09244971 6.45 62120142 7.90 09245002 6.45 62117809 7.90
10-32 0.468 0.065 0.093 3⁄4 21⁄2 09244757 3.19 62119920 3.90 09244765 3.19 62119938 3.90 73260192 6.05 62120191 7.41 73260200 6.05 62117890 7.41
10-32 0.468 0.065 0.093 13⁄4 61⁄4 09244732 3.19 62119904 3.90 09244740 3.19 62119912 3.90 73260176 6.05 62120183 7.41 73260184 6.05 62117817 7.41
1⁄4-20 0.531 0.078 0.119 1 31⁄2 09244799 2.93 62119961 3.58 09244807 2.93 62119979 3.58 73260234 5.92 62120217 7.25 73260242 5.92 62117908 7.25
1⁄4-20 0.531 0.078 0.119 3 101⁄2 09244773 2.93 62119946 3.58 09244781 2.93 62119953 3.58 73260218 5.92 62120209 7.25 73260226 5.92 62117825 7.25
5⁄16-18 0.562 0.084 0.135 11⁄4 4 09244831 3.41 62120001 4.17 09244849 3.41 62120019 4.17 73260275 5.92 62120233 7.25 73260283 5.92 62117916 7.25
5⁄16-18 0.562 0.084 0.135 33⁄4 151⁄2 09244815 3.41 62119987 4.17 09244823 3.41 62119995 4.17 73260259 5.92 62120225 7.25 73260267 5.92 62117833 7.25
3⁄8-16 0.625 0.110 0.186 11⁄2 5 09244872 3.15 62120043 3.85 09244880 3.15 62120050 3.85 73260317 7.00 62120258 8.56 73260325 7.00 62117924 8.56
3⁄8-16 0.625 0.110 0.186 41⁄2 181⁄2 09244856 3.15 62120027 3.85 09244864 3.15 62120035 3.85 73260291 7.00 62120241 8.56 73260309 7.00 62117841 8.56
1⁄2-13 0.750 0.151 0.248 13⁄4 51⁄2 09244914 3.66 62120084 4.47 09244922 3.66 62120092 4.47 73260358 7.24 62120274 8.87 73260366 7.24 62117932 8.87
1⁄2-13 0.750 0.151 0.248 5 28 09244898 3.66 62120068 4.47 09244906 3.66 62120076 4.47 73260333 7.24 62120266 8.87 73260341 7.24 62117858 8.87
5⁄8-11 1.062 0.215 0.310 2 81⁄2 09244955 5.09 62120126 6.23 09244963 5.09 62120134 6.23 73260390 8.61 62120290 10.54 73260408 8.61 62117940 10.54
5⁄8-11 1.062 0.215 0.310 7 50 09244930 5.09 62120100 6.23 09244948 5.09 62120118 6.23 73260374 8.61 62120282 10.54 73260382 8.61 62117866 10.54

1232
EYEBOLTS & HOIST RINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Quick Release Pin Accessories
Flanged Pin Receptacles Flanged Pin Receptacles
Fits Depth Receptacle Flange Thick. Hole Width Mount Dia. Hex • Material: 303 Stainless Steel
Pin ± .010 Dia. ± .005 Thick Spacing ± .010 Hole ± .010 Size • Allow for proper mating holes with quick release
Dia. (In.) Style A (In.) B (In.) ± .005 C (In.) ± .010 D (In.) E (In.) Size F G (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. pins and can be mounted w/screws, rivets or bolts
1⁄4
• Great for blind hole applications
A 0.650 0.375 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 5⁄8 74759291 $21.79
5⁄16 A 0.783 0.469 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 3⁄4 74759093 23.16
3⁄8 A 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 15⁄16 74759192 23.46
1⁄2 A 1.195 0.750 0.10 1.125 0.875 10-32 — 11⁄8 74759218 29.36
1⁄4 B 0.650 0.375 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 5⁄8 74759234 21.79
5⁄16 B 0.783 0.469 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 3⁄4 74759259 23.16
3⁄8 B 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 15⁄16 74759275 23.46 A B C D
1⁄4 C 0.650 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 5⁄8 74759317 21.79
5⁄16 D 0.650 0.375 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 3⁄4 74759333 23.16
3⁄8 C 0.783 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 15⁄16 74759358 23.46
1⁄2 C 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.875 6-32 — 11⁄8 74759374 29.36
1⁄4 C 1.195 0.375 0.10 1.125 — 10-32 1.25 11⁄8 74759390 21.79
5⁄16 D 0.783 0.469 0.06 1.000 — 6-32 1.25 3⁄4 74759416 23.16
3⁄8 D 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 — 6-32 1.25 15⁄16 74759432 23.46
1⁄2 D 1.195 0.750 0.10 1.125 — 10-32 1.50 11⁄8 74759457 29.36
Receiver Caps
Fits Pin Dia. (In.) OAL A ± .010 (In.) OD B (In.) Order # Price Ea. Receiver Caps - Plain End
1⁄4
• Material: 303 Stainless Steel
0.58 0.375 59591321 $8.92 • Useful in applications where the receiving
5⁄16 0.65 0.469 59591339 9.34
3⁄8
hole is not within tolerance
0.73 0.562 59591347 10.61 • Caps fit over the end of the quick release pin
1⁄2 1.00 0.750 59591354 12.10 Receiver Caps
• Can replace cotter or hitch pins

Basics of...Eyebolts and Hoist Rings

Eyebolts and Hoist Rings are most commonly used as an anchor point to lift Large Dies and Fixtures, Heavy Machinery, Mobile Equipment, as well as for Structural
Handling Equipment and Cargo. To ensure maximum safety, careful consideration of the application should be made before making a selection.
Eyebolts Hoist Rings
Designed for vertical lifts only. Lateral or uneven forces Designed for heavy angular lifts and unbalanced loads. They
can significantly reduce handling load. Additionally, any have a 180° pivot on the bail and a 360-degree° swivel on the
modification of an eyebolt can also affect handling load. base. This combination allows a hoist ring to maintain its full
When selecting an Eye Bolt, consider the conditions: handling load at any angle (see formula below to calculate
• Zinc Plated - Good rust and corrosion resistance force per anchor point).
• Galvanized - Provides better rust protection than Zinc
• Alloy Steel - Improved load limits and temperature protection
• Stainless Steel - Best corrosion resistance

Determining Forces on Anchor Points

The force on each anchor point is not just the total weight divided by the number of anchor points; the lift angle also plays an important role. Force can be greater at
lower angles (see below).
F = W/ N sin A
A=65°, F= 4000/ 4 sin 65° = 1103lbs.
A=14°, F= 4000/ 4 sin 14° = 4134lbs.
Where F= pounds per anchor point in a 4000lbs, 4-point lift
F= Force on each hoist ring W = Total Weight (i.e. 4000 lbs) N= Number of hoist rings A= Lifting Angle
Source: American Drill Bushing, March 2004 Hoist Ring Page 1250
Page 39

Forged Plain & Shoulder Eye Bolts

Zinc Plated, Galvanized, Alloy Steel & Stainless
For use as an anchor point for vertical lifts. Workload limits are given for vertical lifts only. Eye
bolts are not recommended for angular lifts. When an angular lift is required, use a hoist ring.
• Thread class: 2A
• Zinc plated: Good rust and corrosion resistance
• Galvanized: Provides better rust protection than zinc Shoulder Style
• Alloy steel: Improved load limits compared to forged steel
• Stainless: Best corrosion resistance
1
Zinc Plated Galvanized Alloy Steel 304 Stainless Steel
Center Safe Safe Safe Safe
Thread Thread Eye Eye of Eye to Working Working Working Working
Size Length ID OD Shoulder Load Plain Shoulder Load Shoulder Load Plain Shoulder Load Plain Shoulder
A B (In.) D (In.) E (In.) C (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Order # Price Ea. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (Lbs.) Order # Order # Price Ea. (Lbs.) Order # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄4-20 1 3⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄16 480 74645243 74645375 $4.96 460 74644709 74644774 $11.52
5⁄16-18 11⁄8 7⁄8 17⁄16 7⁄8 850 74645250 74645383 5.24 780 74644717 74644782 17.99
3⁄8-16 11⁄4 1 111⁄16 11⁄16 1200 74645268 74645391 6.01 1300 74646852 $6.92 1480 74644949 74645003 $15.90 1160 74644725 74645326 18.58
1⁄2-13 11⁄2 13⁄16 21⁄8 15⁄16 2100 74645276 74646456 7.85 2400 74646860 8.99 2700 74644956 74645011 16.84 2150 74644733 74645334 24.77
5⁄8-11 13⁄4 13⁄8 29⁄16 119⁄32 3500 74645284 74646464 12.17 4000 74646878 15.33 4300 74644964 74645029 25.56 3440 74644741 74645342 46.23
3⁄4-10 2 115⁄32 213⁄16 123⁄32 4800 74645292 74646472 16.52 5000 74646886 20.17 6400 74644972 74645037 30.17 5140 74644758 74645359 49.76
7⁄8-9 21⁄4 111⁄16 31⁄4 23⁄16 5950 74645300 74646480 27.98 8800 74644980 74645045 47.08
1-8 21⁄2 113⁄16 39⁄16 113⁄16 7650 74645318 74646498 30.33 11600 74644998 74645052 60.27 9370 74644766 74645367 89.69
1
Galvanized style requires oversized nut

1250
MAGNETS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Magnets
Selection Factors
When selecting a magnet for your application, consider the physical shape of the part (round, convex, concave, etc.) and the surface condition (rough, rusty, dirty,
oily). Both can result in *air gaps between the contact points on the magnet & the work material, thereby reducing the magnetic holding power. These factors and the
information in this section will aid in choosing the correct magnet for your application.
*Air gap: Space between the part and the magnet (paint, plating, galvinizing, protective film, etc...)

Applications:
• Holding metal sheets and parts in place • Die inserts • Shearing, punching and forming operations
• Safety shield/removable panel mounts • Paint and plating racks • Press and Burn Table feeding operations
• Overhead conveyor racks • Spot welding fixtures • Capturing or separating metal
• Separating stacks of sheet metal • Hand assembly fixtures • Cleaning or lifting metal from floors & more
Maximum Pull vs. Average Pull
Maximum pull and average pull are derived from the same magnet but differ in how you present the information. We have chosen to use average pull in our catalog.
The maximum pull value is obtained by pulling a new magnet in a perpendicular motion off of a newly machined, thick piece of steel (ideal conditions is a lab). The
pounds of pull it takes to break the magnet away from the steel surface is the “maximum” pull pounds. Average pull values are then derived by taking this maximum
pull pounds and cutting it in half (50%). The average pull pounds are stated for the benefit and safety of the user, due to the fact that ideal conditions rarely exist in the
field. Refer back the “magnet selection factors” for the part shape and surface conditions.
Materials
Flexible Magnetic Strips: made of a Ferro Magnetic powder with a polymer bonding. These low energy strips resist demagnetization and
will not chip, crack or shatter. Flexible magnets form to any contour, used in office, manufacturing and inventory labeling and
appliance, advertising applications. Flexible magnets can be cut drilled or shaped. Maximum temperature 160 F (70C).

Ceramic: made of Strontium Ferrite (SrFe) in a sintering process. Ceramic magnets are staples in the electronic, automotive, medical, mining, industrial, oil
industries, etc. Ceramic magnets are medium strength magnet material with a high resistance to demagnetization, long time stability (losses 0.5% of its
magnetic strength in 100 years), brittle material that has to be cut with diamond tipped blades. Maximum temperature 350 F (176 C).

Alnico: made of Aluminum, Nickel and Cobalt (AlNiCo) in either a casting or sintering process. Used in application environments that have high heat, Alnico
magnets offer medium strength and the best temperature characteristics of any standard magnet material. Alnico magnets have a medium resistance to
demagnetization and are very hard and brittle. Machining or drilling cannot be accomplished by ordinary means. Maximum temperature 800 F (427 C)

Rare Earth Neodymium-Iron-Boron (NdFeB) Magnets: made in a sintered as well as bonded forms. Commonly referred to as Neo, this magnet material provides
the highest magnetic strength of any magnet material, very high resistance to demagnetization and is ideal for applications requiring maximum strength in a
limited area. Because of its high iron content, Neo is usually coated or plated to prevent oxidization; avoid grinding. Maximum temperature 200 F (94 C).

Rare Earth Samarium Cobalt (SmCo): made the same as Neo. Samarium Cobalt has the highest magnetic strength combined with high temperature range
which makes it ideal for applications requiring very high strength in hot environments. Maximum temperature 392 F (200 C).

Permanent Magnetic Material Properties

Magnetic Maximum Resistance
Type Components Strength Temperature to Demagnetization Color Machineable
Flexible Ferrite Magnetic Powder with a Polymer Bonding Very Low 160°F (70°C) Low Dark Brown Drill, Scissors
Ceramic Strontium Ferrite Low 350°F (176°C) High Dark Gray Diamond Wheel
Alnico Aluminum-Nickel-Cobalt Medium 800°F (427°C) Medium Silver EDM
Rare Earth Neodymium-Iron-Boron Unplated Very High 200°F (94°C) Very High Dark Green Avoid Grinding
Rare Earth Neodymium-Iron-Boron Nickel Plated Very High 200°F (94°C) Very High Bright Silver Avoid Grinding Page
Rare Earth Samarium Cobalt Very High 392°F (200°C) Very High Dark Gray Avoid Grinding 1260
Page 40

Welder’s Magnetic Squares ON/OFF Magnetic

Welding Angles/Squares
Multi-Purpose
Magnetic Squares • Switchable On/Off magnetic welding
angles or squares
• Rare earth magnet for powerful hold
• Holds components in position for
• Revisible for inside or outside hold
fast simple set-ups
• Holds flats or pipe
• Use for welding, brazing, soldering
• Easily allows debris to fall away
and assembly
00280115, 06997514, 06997530, when in Off position
• Provide instant 90° or 45° angles
06997506 00280123 06997522 • Adjustable welding angles adjust to
any angle
Avg. Mag. Ht. W Depth • Welding squares are fixed at 90° ON/OFF Adjustable ON/OFF 90° Magnetic
Type Pull (Lbs.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. inside or outside Welding Angle or Square Welding Square
Standard Magnetic Square 55 33⁄8 33⁄8 5⁄8 00280115 $10.39
Adjustable Magnetic Square 110 33⁄8 61⁄8 5⁄8 00280123 20.75 Avg. Pull (Lbs.) Ht. (In.) W (In.) D (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Standard HD Magnetic Square 75 43⁄8 33⁄4 3⁄4 06997514 21.22 Adjustable Welding Angles
Magnetic Square w/Welding Spatter Cover 75 43⁄8 33⁄4 3⁄4 06997506 24.92 150 8 51⁄2 8 AWA0150MS 63226450 $199.49
Magnetic Square w/Breakaway Handle 150 43⁄8 33⁄4 11⁄2 06997530 55.35 550 10 61⁄5 10 AWA0550MS 63226468 429.12
Magnetic Square w/Welding Spatter Cover 325 8 8 15⁄8 06997522 122.36 90° Welding Squares
& Breakaway Handle 150 8 13⁄4 8 MWA0150MS 63226476 185.14
550 12 23⁄4 12 MWA0550MS 63226484 400.42

1260
COIL SPRINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Extension
Basics of...Coil Springs Compression

Types
The most common type of spring is a Coil Spring or Helical Spring, used to store mechanical energy and subsequently release it. These Coil Springs can be close-
wound or open-wound and are made of hardened steel. The most common types are: Compression, Extension and Torsion.

COMPRESSION SPRINGS can be found in ballpoint pens and valve assemblies as well as thousands of other places. When you put a load on the spring, making
it shorter, it pushes back against the load and tries to get back to its original length. Compression Springs may be cylindrical, conical, tapered, concave or convex in
shape. The changing of spring ends, direction of the helix, material and finish allows a compression spring to meet a wide variety of special industrial needs; they are
the most common spring configuration and are usually placed over a rod or fitted inside a hole.
There are four basic types of compression spring ends, affecting the solid height, free length and other characteristics of the spring:
Open Ends, Not Ground: the ends of a compression spring are opened with a constant pitch for each coil
Open and Ground End: the ends of the spring are open and ground creating a flat surface
Square or Closed Ends (SQ): the ends of the spring are closed so that the end coils touch
Square (Closed) and Ground Ends (SG): the ends of the spring are closed so that the end coils touch & the end is ground to provide a flat plane

EXTENSION SPRINGS are found in garage door assemblies, vise-grip pliers, and carburetors as well as thousands of other places. When they are attached at both ends
and when the components they are attached to moves apart, the spring tries to bring them together again. Extension Springs are wound with initial tension known as
stored energy which holds the coils together and offers resistance to a pulling force. Extension Springs can have many different styles of ends, the most common
types of loops and hooks are “Machine” and “Crossover”. They can be closed (loops) or open (hooks).
Machine End: Wire comes directly off the body, then forming a circle across the center
Crossover End: Wire comes across the center of the spring
Double Loop: end consisting of two coils with no gap between the coils and the end of the wire
TORSION SPRINGS can be found on door hinges, door locks and clipboards as well as thousands of other places. When the ends of the torsion spring are attached to
the component, and when these components rotate around the center of the spring in the direction that winds the coil, the spring tries to push them back to their
original position. Torsion springs offer resistance to externally applied torque as the ends are rotated in angular deflection. Commonly used over an ardor or mandrel
for support. Torsion springs are subjected to bending stress rather than torsional. Normally close wound and are left hand or right hand wound.
Torsion springs are selected based on the Degree of Deflection required: usually 90, 180, 270 or 360° from the spring body.
Length of Leg: the length of the torsion spring leg is measured from the center of the body to the end of the leg or tip
Direction of Wind: torsion springs should be used in the direction that winds the coil
Coil Spring Materials, Finishes & Processes
HDMB Carbon Steel: Medium basic carbon cold drawn spring wire per ASTM 227, suitable for parts subjected to average stress and applications; also suited to static or
very low cycles
Music Wire: Spring wire, per ASTM-228, good for parts subjected to high stresses and requiring good thermal properties. For temperatures up to 250°F.
Type 302/304 Stainless Steel: Springs are manufactured to meet ASTM-A313, a high quality wire. For temperatures up to 550°F. Slightly magnetic. It is the most widely
used stainless spring wire because of high corrosion resistance properties and good tensile strength.
Black Oxide Coating (good) or Zinc Plating (better): improves the corrosion resistance of HDMB Carbon Steel and Music Wire
Passivation: an acid treatment performed on Stainless Steel Wire to remove contaminants and improve corrosion resistance
Nickel-coated Stainless Steel Springs: made from Suzuki™ Wire®, Nippon-Seisen wire and Sumiden® Type 302 nickel-coated stainless steel for superior corrosion
resistance particularly in marine environments. Nickel plating is used in electronics because it provides a good surface for soldering, prevents tarnishing, and conducts
electricity well.
Spring Terminology
Body Length: length from coil to coil, not including ends (hooks or loops)
Deflection at Load: the distance a spring compresses or extends when a given load is applied
Free Length (FL): the overall length of a spring in the unloaded position
Initial Tension (IT): the number of pounds of force it will take to overcome the tension holding the spring coils together before the spring will start to extend
Inside Dimension (ID): specified when the spring must fit over a rod or mandrel with enough clearance to operate freely
Load: the force applied to a spring that causes a deflection (i.e., movement)
Max Deflection: the difference between the overall length and maximum extension, measured on one side of spring
Maximum Extended Length: the length of an extension at full rated extension
Outside Dimension (OD): specified when the spring must fit into a circular hole (“Work in Hole Diameter) with enough clearance to operate freely or when there are
other housing issues)
Pitch: the distance from center to center of the wire in adjacent active coils
Solid Height: height of a compression spring under sufficient load to bring all coils into contact with adjacent coils
Spring Rate (stiffness): the change in load per unit deflection
Stress Relieve: a process that subjects the springs to low-temperature heat treatment to relieve residual stresses
Wire Size (WD): the diameter of the actual spring wire Page 1320
Page 41

1320
TORSION SPRINGS
Torsion Springs
Wire Leg No. Width @ Torque @ Carbon Steel Type 302 Stainless Steel Materials:
1 2
OD Dia. L of ID Torque 1⁄2 Leg L Pkg. Right Hand Left Hand Price/ Torque @ 1⁄2 Leg Right Hand Left Hand Price/ • Carbon Steel
(In.) (In.) (In.) Coils (In.) (In.) (In./Lbs.) Qty. Order # Order # Pkg. L (In./Lbs.) Order # Order # Pkg. • Type 302 Stainless Steel
90° Deflection Angle Product Features:
0.160 0.017 0.500 3.25 0.093 0.081 0.125 6 00042960 00043281 $5.67 • Right hand and left hand wound
0.235 0.025 0.750 3.25 0.140 0.096 0.402 6 00042978 00043299 5.67 • Offer resistance to externally applied torque as
0.281 0.030 1.000 3.25 0.172 0.116 0.670 6 00042986 00043307 5.67 the ends are rotated in angular deflection
0.288 0.032 1.000 3.25 0.172 0.152 0.879 6 00042994 00043315 5.67 Product Applications:
0.315 0.035 1.250 3.25 0.187 0.135 1.071 6 00043000 00043323 5.67 • Commonly used over an arbor or
0.309 0.040 1.250 4.25 0.187 0.198 1.473 6 00043018 00043331 5.67 mandrel for support
0.357 0.045 1.250 4.25 0.203 0.259 2.143 6 00043026 00043349 5.67
0.375 0.048 1.250 4.25 0.218 0.238 2.679 6 00043034 00043356 6.06
0.408 0.051 2.000 4.25 0.234 0.293 3.107 6 00043042 00043364 6.06
0.484 0.054 2.000 4.25 0.296 0.310 3.509 6 00043059 00043372 6.28
0.499 0.059 2.000 4.25 0.296 0.340 4.500 6 00043067 00043380 6.85
0.560 0.063 2.000 4.25 0.343 0.362 5.518 6 00043075 00043398 7.06
0.678 0.078 2.000 4.25 0.406 0.450 10.446 6 00043083 00043406 7.88
0.776 0.095 3.000 3.25 0.453 0.546 17.140 1 00043745 00043620 3.17 16.00 00043984 00043869 $4.42
0.848 0.106 3.500 3.25 0.500 0.604 22.470 1 00043752 00043638 4.36 20.97 00043992 00043877 6.12
0.989 0.125 4.000 4.25 0.591 0.844 34.290 1 00043778 00043653 7.41 32.00 00044016 00043893 10.36 90° Deflection Angle
1.102 0.135 4.000 4.25 0.666 0.911 42.860 1 00043794 00043679 7.52 40.00 00044032 00043919 10.58
180° Deflection Angle
0.109 0.012 0.375 5.00 0.067 0.086 0.050 6 00043091 00043414 5.67
0.133 0.014 0.500 5.00 0.078 0.150 0.075 6 00043109 00043422 5.67
0.130 0.015 0.500 5.00 0.078 0.107 0.100 6 00043117 00043430 5.67
0.183 0.015 0.750 4.00 0.109 0.075 0.100 6 00043125 00043448 5.67
0.216 0.018 0.750 4.00 0.140 0.109 0.150 6 00043133 00043455 5.67
0.224 0.025 0.750 6.00 0.140 0.206 0.402 6 00043141 00043463 5.67
0.249 0.028 1.000 6.00 0.140 0.238 0.552 6 00043158 00043471 5.67
0.450 0.035 1.250 4.00 0.281 0.212 1.071 6 00043166 00043489 5.67 180° Deflection Angle
0.404 0.048 1.250 7.00 0.250 0.450 2.679 6 00043174 00043497 6.06
0.526 0.059 2.000 7.00 0.328 0.560 4.500 6 00043182 00043505 6.85
0.767 0.063 2.000 5.00 0.500 0.475 5.518 6 00043190 00043513 8.05
0.803 0.078 2.000 6.00 0.500 0.660 10.446 6 00043208 00043521 8.47
0.982 0.106 3.500 7.00 0.609 0.998 22.500 1 00043786 00043661 4.04 21.00 00044024 00043901 5.67
1.082 0.125 4.000 9.00 0.666 1.438 34.280 1 00043802 00043687 6.57 32.00 00044040 00043927 9.17
1.189 0.135 4.000 9.00 0.735 1.553 42.860 1 00043810 00043695 7.52 40.00 00044057 00043935 10.58
1.356 0.125 4.000 7.00 0.885 1.188 34.290 1 00043828 00043703 7.52 32.00 00044065 00043943 10.58
270° Deflection Angle
0.259 0.017 0.750 4.75 0.156 0.123 0.125 6 00043216 00043539 5.67 270° Deflection Angle
0.184 0.021 0.750 9.75 0.109 0.266 0.234 6 00043224 00043547 5.67
0.187 0.023 0.750 9.75 0.109 0.282 0.330 6 00043232 00043554 5.67
0.353 0.038 1.250 9.75 0.218 0.465 1.275 6 00043240 00043562 5.67
0.556 0.045 2.000 6.75 0.359 0.415 2.143 1 00043257 00043570 5.67
0.826 0.070 2.000 7.75 0.531 0.717 7.500 1 00043265 00043588 8.05
1.342 0.106 3.500 7.75 0.891 1.076 22.500 1 00043836 00043711 4.36 21.00 00044073 00043950 6.12
1.666 0.135 4.000 9.75 1.112 1.654 42.860 1 00043729 00043604 7.52 40.00 00043968 00043844 10.58
360° Deflection Angle
0.271 0.021 1.000 8.50 0.187 0.242 0.234 6 00043273 00043596 5.67
0.798 0.063 2.000 10.50 0.516 0.820 5.520 1 00043760 00043646 2.40 5.15 00044008 00043885 3.32
1.755 0.135 4.000 12.50 1.188 2.025 42.860 1 00043737 00043612 7.52 40.00 00043976 00043851 10.58 360° Deflection Angle
1 2
OD = Cutout the spring will fit in and not impede spring ID = Max. rod dimension that will fit the spring

Basics of...Belleville Disc Springs

Belleville Springs are metal compression springs conically formed from a washer of spring steel material. The distinct advantage is the generation of high force in a
very short spring length and minimal movement when compressed. Belleville’s conical shape gives an even annular loading and it is ideal for use in modular systems
of construction.
• Ideal for applications where a large load is required in a small space
• Will return to their original free height over repeated loading
• Reduces the size of mated components, reduce machining time to
create those mated components
Belleville Springs Can Be Stacked as Follows
• Series: Provides the load of a single disc spring while
offering the combined deflection of the total number of
springs stacked
• Parallel: Provides the deflection of a single disc spring while
offering the combined load of the total number of springs
stacked
• Series-Parallel: Provides both increased load and deflection

Materials Used in Belleville Springs

• 1074 High Carbon Steel: commercial grade, hard steel, ASTM A684
• Type 302 Stainless Steel: corrosion resistant, ASTM A313
• 50 CrV Chrome Vanadium: has a high surface quality and are suitable for applications up to 425 F

1334
Page 42
CALIPERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...IP Standards

International Protection
IP Standards are a good way to compare the dust and water protection levels of different tools. “IP” stands for Ingress Protection (An enclosure spec) or International
Protection. The IP codes are normally two digit codes, such as IP65 or IP54.
The first digit - tells the amount of foreign objects (or dust) that can enter the enclosure.
The second digit - tells how watertight the enclosure is. As shown in the table below, the water protection spec is a good gage of how a tool will hold up against coolant
spray on a machine tool.
Protection Level Protection against human touch and foreign matter Protection against water
Type Description Type Description
4 - - Splash-proof type Has no harmful effect from water splashes coming
from any direction
5 Protection against dust Protection against harmful dust (penetration of dust not Jet-proof type Has no harmful effect from direct water jets coming
affecting the function is considered OK.) from any direction
6 Dust sealing Protection against the penetration of dust and perfect Water-resistant type Letting no water in from direct water jets coming from
protection against human touch any direction
7 - - Watertight type Letting no water in under specified conditions if Page
submerged 1342
Page 43

Basics of...Small Calipers

Calipers are extremely versatile measuring tools. Most calipers 12”/300mm and under can perform OD, ID and step measurements and normally have a depth rod for
measuring deep recesses. They are available with plastic, stainless steel and carbide jaws to match your measurement requirements and are available with either
vernier, dial or electronic displays. English dial calipers are normally graduated in .001” and have either .100” or .200” range per revolution. Metric dial calipers are
normally graduated in 0.01mm or 0.02mm and have either 1.0mm or 2.0mm range per revolution.

Standard Electronic Calipers Vernier Calipers

Standard Electronic Calipers are available with or without digital output. They
are used throughout industry due to their rugged design and their easy to read Vernier Calipers are available in inch, metric and inch/metric models. Smaller
display. vernier calipers have largely been supplanted by dial or electronic calipers.
Dial Calipers Waterproof Electronic Calipers

Dial Calipers are an extremely versatile measuring tool. They can measure OD,
ID, steps, and normally have a depth rod for measuring deep recesses. They
are easier to read than vernier calipers and are available in inch or metric
models.
Plastic Calipers
Waterproof Electronic Calipers are designed to be used in harsh fluid or dust
environments. They are available with or without digital output. They are
currently available in IP65 to IP67 protection levels. IP67 has the greatest
waterproof rating and can be subjected to flood coolant.
Solar Electronic Calipers

Plastic Calipers are available in electronic, dial or vernier configurations. They

are designed to be used when a non-marring jaw is required, such as Solar Electronic Calipers eliminate the problem of battery replacement/disposal
measuring X-rays, plants, animals or other fragile items and high accuracy is and the inherent costs. They are available with or without digital output. IP67
not required. rated waterproof models are also available.

Plasti-Cal Electronic Caliper Electronic Caliper

Lightweight Polycarbonate Frame • Large LCD ensures error-free reading
• Direct inch/metric/fraction conversion • No rack or pinions, scale is embedded in epoxy
• Absolute measurement • Large easy to read LCD • Thumb roll standard
• Resolution: 0.0005w/0.01mm/1⁄64w fractional Order # Price Ea. • OD, ID, step, and depth measurements
• Accuracy: ±0.008w/±0.200mm • Range: 6w/150mm • Inch/Metric conversion
• Durable vinyl pouch included • SPI #13-618-4 35518166 $22.75 • Measuring range: 0-6w/ 0-150mm SPI # Order # Price Ea.
• Resolution: 0.001w
• Jaw length: 119⁄32w 14-792-6 08228884 $42.00

Poly-Cal™ Electronic Caliper

• Inch/metric/fraction
Electronic Calipers
• Large easy to read display
• Resolution: .0005w (.01mm), fractions by Measuring Range (In.) Without Output
1⁄64w increments • An economical
Min. Max. Order # Price Ea.
• Accuracy: ±.008w/±.200mm • Direct inch/metric conversion electronic caliper
• 4-Way measuring • Lightweight polycarbonate frame 0 6 72457492 $39.00 for general use
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 0 8 80786973 69.00
• Measuring range: 0-6w (0-150mm) • Accuracy: ±0.001w
• Supplied with vinyl pouch 54-101-175 74040239 $23.00 0 12 72457500 99.00 • Resolution: 0.0005w

1342
CALIPERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...IP Standards

International Protection
IP Standards are a good way to compare the dust and water protection levels of different tools. “IP” stands for Ingress Protection (An enclosure spec) or International
Protection. The IP codes are normally two digit codes, such as IP65 or IP54.
The first digit - tells the amount of foreign objects (or dust) that can enter the enclosure.
The second digit - tells how watertight the enclosure is. As shown in the table below, the water protection spec is a good gage of how a tool will hold up against coolant
spray on a machine tool.
Protection Level Protection against human touch and foreign matter Protection against water
Type Description Type Description
4 - - Splash-proof type Has no harmful effect from water splashes coming
from any direction
5 Protection against dust Protection against harmful dust (penetration of dust not Jet-proof type Has no harmful effect from direct water jets coming
affecting the function is considered OK.) from any direction
6 Dust sealing Protection against the penetration of dust and perfect Water-resistant type Letting no water in from direct water jets coming from
protection against human touch any direction
7 - - Watertight type Letting no water in under specified conditions if
submerged

Basics of...Small Calipers

Calipers are extremely versatile measuring tools. Most calipers 12”/300mm and under can perform OD, ID and step measurements and normally have a depth rod for
measuring deep recesses. They are available with plastic, stainless steel and carbide jaws to match your measurement requirements and are available with either
vernier, dial or electronic displays. English dial calipers are normally graduated in .001” and have either .100” or .200” range per revolution. Metric dial calipers are
normally graduated in 0.01mm or 0.02mm and have either 1.0mm or 2.0mm range per revolution.

Standard Electronic Calipers Vernier Calipers

Standard Electronic Calipers are available with or without digital output. They
are used throughout industry due to their rugged design and their easy to read Vernier Calipers are available in inch, metric and inch/metric models. Smaller
display. vernier calipers have largely been supplanted by dial or electronic calipers.
Dial Calipers Waterproof Electronic Calipers

Dial Calipers are an extremely versatile measuring tool. They can measure OD,
ID, steps, and normally have a depth rod for measuring deep recesses. They
are easier to read than vernier calipers and are available in inch or metric
models.
Plastic Calipers
Waterproof Electronic Calipers are designed to be used in harsh fluid or dust
environments. They are available with or without digital output. They are
currently available in IP65 to IP67 protection levels. IP67 has the greatest
waterproof rating and can be subjected to flood coolant.
Solar Electronic Calipers

Plastic Calipers are available in electronic, dial or vernier configurations. They

are designed to be used when a non-marring jaw is required, such as Solar Electronic Calipers eliminate the problem of battery replacement/disposal
and the inherent costs. They are available with or without digital output. IP67 Page
measuring X-rays, plants, animals or other fragile items and high accuracy is 1342
not required. rated waterproof models are also available.
Page 44

Plasti-Cal Electronic Caliper Electronic Caliper

Lightweight Polycarbonate Frame • Large LCD ensures error-free reading
• Direct inch/metric/fraction conversion • No rack or pinions, scale is embedded in epoxy
• Absolute measurement • Large easy to read LCD • Thumb roll standard
• Resolution: 0.0005w/0.01mm/1⁄64w fractional Order # Price Ea. • OD, ID, step, and depth measurements
• Accuracy: ±0.008w/±0.200mm • Range: 6w/150mm • Inch/Metric conversion
• Durable vinyl pouch included • SPI #13-618-4 35518166 $22.75 • Measuring range: 0-6w/ 0-150mm SPI # Order # Price Ea.
• Resolution: 0.001w
• Jaw length: 119⁄32w 14-792-6 08228884 $42.00

Poly-Cal™ Electronic Caliper

• Inch/metric/fraction
Electronic Calipers
• Large easy to read display
• Resolution: .0005w (.01mm), fractions by Measuring Range (In.) Without Output
1⁄64w increments • An economical
Min. Max. Order # Price Ea.
• Accuracy: ±.008w/±.200mm • Direct inch/metric conversion electronic caliper
• 4-Way measuring • Lightweight polycarbonate frame 0 6 72457492 $39.00 for general use
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 0 8 80786973 69.00
• Measuring range: 0-6w (0-150mm) • Accuracy: ±0.001w
• Supplied with vinyl pouch 54-101-175 74040239 $23.00 0 12 72457500 99.00 • Resolution: 0.0005w

1342
SPC & OUTSIDE MICROMETERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Statistical Process Control - SPC

Statistical Process Control (SPC): Is a quality control system designed to provide product/process quality information during a product/process run. SPC is also used
after the fact to provide an in-depth analysis of product/process quality capability. The term “SPC” is generally used as an umbrella concept to cover quality systems
that rely on statistical analysis and charting using only a portion of the available data (i.e. part feature measurements) to predict the overall quality of the products/
process. This contrasts with the old method of making a batch of parts, sending them to the QC room for inspection, and then repairing or throwing out the reject Page
parts. In the early days of SPC, charting and statistical calculations were done by hand using a pencil and paper. Today a large assortment of electronic tools is
1354
available to reduce the cost of gathering data.
Page 45

Basics of…Outside Micrometers

Outside Micrometers: Are industry standard measuring tools because of their high
accuracy/resolution and ease of use. Mechanical OD micrometers are available in
.001w and .0001w (0.01mm and 0.001mm) graduations. Electronic OD micrometers
normally have .0001w or .00005w and 0.001mm resolutions. Standard OD
micrometers are available up to 40w/1000mm.
The accuracy of a micrometer is derived from several factors. The most significant
factors are: thread accuracy, flatness of measuring faces, parallelism between the
faces and rigidity of the frame which holds anvil and spindle.
OD micrometers are available in a variety of different spindle and anvil
configurations to allow the operator to measure difficult to reach features on a
workpiece. The measuring range on a typical OD micrometer is 1w (25mm). Some
special application micrometers have a smaller or greater range than 1w (25mm).
Wide range OD micrometers (interchangeable anvil micrometers) are available and
reduce the cost of a micrometer set, verses the cost of individual micrometers to
cover the same range (typically a 6w range).

Micrometer standards are used to verify (not calibrate) the zero opening position on micrometers when the micrometer spindle doesn’t contact the micrometer anvil,
such as micrometers over 1w (25mm) and some specialty micrometers.

What Makes a Micrometer Work?

The precision ground thread on the spindle is the basis for a micrometer’s high accuracy and resolution. An English
micrometer spindle uses 40 TPI. One revolution of the spindle advances the measuring face by .025w. The sleeve is
graduated every .025w and the thimble is graduated every .001w. In addition, the sleeve may also have a vernier scale
that allows the operator to resolve the micrometer reading to .0001w.
Precision Ground Screw Thread

Micrometer Thimbles

Plain Thimble Friction Thimble Ratchet Stop Ratchet Thimble

Several types of thimbles are available on micrometers. Micrometers are available with either a plain thimble (no constant force device) or with a friction thimble,
ratchet stop and ratchet thimble (constant force device). The constant force device helps the operator apply a consistent amount of torque to the thimble every
measurement. A constant force device also helps to ensure that deviations in measurements between operators are minimized. In addition, a “speeder” is available
for plain thimbles, ratchet stop and ratchet thimble micrometers. Speeders reduce the time it takes to open or close the micrometer spindle.

Measuring Faces:
In order to ensure an accurate measurement, the measuring faces of a micrometer
must be both flat and parallel. Micrometer measuring faces (anvil and spindle) are
normally faced with carbide to reduce wear caused by repeated use. Hardened
steel is sometimes used as the measuring face to reduce manufacturing cost.
Anvil Spindle

Decimal Equivalent Wall Chart

Fraction, Wire Gage, Letter & Metric Sizes
• Color coded for easy reading
• 22wW x 32wH. Two hole punched top and bottom for easy
wall mounting
• Wipes clean with damp cloth
• Durable - .015 gage white styrene plastic. Will not tear
• Decimal equivalents for fractional, letter, number and metric
sizes from .35 to 1w
• English-Metric length conversion
• Metric-English tap-drill reference • English tap-drill reference
• Straight pipe tap-drill reference • Taper pipe tap-drill reference
• Tap clearance reference • Shipping wt.: 11⁄2 Lbs.
Order # Price Ea.
BU06516801 $4.00

1354
SPC & OUTSIDE MICROMETERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Statistical Process Control - SPC

Statistical Process Control (SPC): Is a quality control system designed to provide product/process quality information during a product/process run. SPC is also used
after the fact to provide an in-depth analysis of product/process quality capability. The term “SPC” is generally used as an umbrella concept to cover quality systems
that rely on statistical analysis and charting using only a portion of the available data (i.e. part feature measurements) to predict the overall quality of the products/
process. This contrasts with the old method of making a batch of parts, sending them to the QC room for inspection, and then repairing or throwing out the reject
parts. In the early days of SPC, charting and statistical calculations were done by hand using a pencil and paper. Today a large assortment of electronic tools is
available to reduce the cost of gathering data.

Basics of…Outside Micrometers

Outside Micrometers: Are industry standard measuring tools because of their high
accuracy/resolution and ease of use. Mechanical OD micrometers are available in
.001w and .0001w (0.01mm and 0.001mm) graduations. Electronic OD micrometers
normally have .0001w or .00005w and 0.001mm resolutions. Standard OD
micrometers are available up to 40w/1000mm.
The accuracy of a micrometer is derived from several factors. The most significant
factors are: thread accuracy, flatness of measuring faces, parallelism between the
faces and rigidity of the frame which holds anvil and spindle.
OD micrometers are available in a variety of different spindle and anvil
configurations to allow the operator to measure difficult to reach features on a
workpiece. The measuring range on a typical OD micrometer is 1w (25mm). Some
special application micrometers have a smaller or greater range than 1w (25mm).
Wide range OD micrometers (interchangeable anvil micrometers) are available and
reduce the cost of a micrometer set, verses the cost of individual micrometers to
cover the same range (typically a 6w range).

Micrometer standards are used to verify (not calibrate) the zero opening position on micrometers when the micrometer spindle doesn’t contact the micrometer anvil,
such as micrometers over 1w (25mm) and some specialty micrometers.

What Makes a Micrometer Work?

The precision ground thread on the spindle is the basis for a micrometer’s high accuracy and resolution. An English
micrometer spindle uses 40 TPI. One revolution of the spindle advances the measuring face by .025w. The sleeve is
graduated every .025w and the thimble is graduated every .001w. In addition, the sleeve may also have a vernier scale
that allows the operator to resolve the micrometer reading to .0001w.
Precision Ground Screw Thread

Micrometer Thimbles

Plain Thimble Friction Thimble Ratchet Stop Ratchet Thimble

Several types of thimbles are available on micrometers. Micrometers are available with either a plain thimble (no constant force device) or with a friction thimble,
ratchet stop and ratchet thimble (constant force device). The constant force device helps the operator apply a consistent amount of torque to the thimble every
measurement. A constant force device also helps to ensure that deviations in measurements between operators are minimized. In addition, a “speeder” is available
for plain thimbles, ratchet stop and ratchet thimble micrometers. Speeders reduce the time it takes to open or close the micrometer spindle.

Measuring Faces:
In order to ensure an accurate measurement, the measuring faces of a micrometer
must be both flat and parallel. Micrometer measuring faces (anvil and spindle) are
normally faced with carbide to reduce wear caused by repeated use. Hardened
steel is sometimes used as the measuring face to reduce manufacturing cost. Page
Page 46 Anvil Spindle 1354

Decimal Equivalent Wall Chart

Fraction, Wire Gage, Letter & Metric Sizes
• Color coded for easy reading
• 22wW x 32wH. Two hole punched top and bottom for easy
wall mounting
• Wipes clean with damp cloth
• Durable - .015 gage white styrene plastic. Will not tear
• Decimal equivalents for fractional, letter, number and metric
sizes from .35 to 1w
• English-Metric length conversion
• Metric-English tap-drill reference • English tap-drill reference
• Straight pipe tap-drill reference • Taper pipe tap-drill reference
• Tap clearance reference • Shipping wt.: 11⁄2 Lbs.
Order # Price Ea.
BU06516801 $4.00

1354
 SPECIALTY MICROMETER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Specialty Micrometers

Many different types of specialty micrometers are available to measure difficult to reach configurations. While many times slip-on anvil adapters are available, a
specialty micrometer designed for the purpose is the best tool for the job.

Point Micrometers: Pointed spindle Tubing Micrometers: Used to

and anvil for measuring the web measure the wall thickness on
thickness of drills, small grooves tubing, pipe and other hard to reach
and other hard to reach places. Spherical or cylindrical
dimensions. Available in steel or anvils are available.
carbide 15° or 30° points.
Screw Thread Micrometers: Have
Blade Micrometers: Typically used interchangeable anvils that allow it
to measure groove diameters on to measure the pitch diameter
shafts or other narrow recessed of a thread.
features. Available in steel or
carbide blades of varying thickness. Ball (Spherical Face) Micrometers:
Spherical anvil and spherical anvil/
spindle micrometers are used to
Indicating Micrometers: Used as a measure the thickness of curved
Go/NoGo gage. The spindle is parts such as rod or crank bearings
locked after setting and a button and pipe wall thickness.
retracts the anvil for easy part
insertion. Indicating hands on the Multi-Anvil: Measures tube
dial allow the operator to easily thickness, shoulder distances, rivet
check for Go/NoGo. head height, etc. with
interchangeable anvils (flat anvil,
rod anvil, V-anvil). Supplied with
Disc Micrometers: Used to measure flat and rod anvils.
features along the length of a shaft Digit Micrometers: Have both an
or gear teeth requiring clearance “odometer" style counter and standard
from the micrometer frame and thimble graduations. The micrometer
thimble. Available with rotating or may be graduated English or English
non-rotating discs. and Metric.

Interchangeable Anvil Micrometers:

Spline Micrometers: Have a reduced Have an oversize frame and
diameter spindle and anvil to allow multiple anvils to allow a single
measurement of spline minor micrometer to be used over a 6”
diameters, slots and keyways range. This reduces tool cost for Page
infrequently measured ranges. 1355
Page 47

IP54 Electronic IP54 Electronic Micrometer

Micrometers & Sets
• Protected to IP54 specification
• Protected to IP54 specification • Direct RS232 output
• Large LCD display • Absolute and incremental modes
• Automatic switch off • Carbide measuring faces
• Resolution: .00005w/.001mm • Resolution: .00005w (.001mm)
• Direct RS232 output Fowler SPI • Rugged steel design
• Complete in shop hardened case • Large LCD display
• IP54 models are water, oil and fluid resistant Range Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Automatic switch off
• SPI models include certificate of calibration traceable to NIST • Complete in shop hardened case 0-1w/25mm 54-815-001-2 81922726 $149.85
• Carbide measuring faces • Standards included above 0-1w range • Includes ball attachment Cable 54-115-778 05722426 48.84
Measuring Range (In.) Fowler SPI
Min. Max. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. SPI # Order # Price Ea.
Micrometers
0 1 54-850-001 1
72520984 $86.82 IP54 QuadraMic
0 1 54-860-001 76200849 98.19 13-101-1 76831973 $103.00
1 2 54-860-002 76591973 113.70 13-102-9 76831981 118.00 Electronic Micrometer
2 3 54-860-003 65861379 130.23 13-103-7 76831999 133.00 • Large 4-way reading on LCD display
3 4 54-860-004 85215101 148.76 13-104-5 76832005 153.00 • Resolution: 0.00005w/0.001mm
4 5 54-860-005 85215119 162.79 13-105-2 76832013 169.00 • Absolute measuring system
5 6 54-860-006 85215127 182.33 13-106-0 76832021 187.00 • Direct RS232 output • Carbide measuring faces
6 7 13-107-8 76832039 199.00 • Features 2 displays that allow the user to read as
7 8 13-108-6 76832047 212.00 a right or left-handed micrometer -
Sets a push button inverts the display for a variety
0 3 54-860-103 67972703 342.07 13-113-6 76833276 339.00 of measuring positions
0 4 13-114-4 76833284 489.00 • Automatic switch off • Includes wooden case
0 6 54-860-106 05023007 830.24 • Water, oil and fluid resistant to IP54 standards Order # Price Ea.
• Measuring range: 0.0005w to 1w • Friction thimble
1
Not protected to IP54 standards. • Mfr’s #54-866-001 64249709 $168.31

1355
 INDICATORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Continued from previous page

Replacement Tips for the Most Popular Dial Test Indicators

For Brown & Sharpe Indicators For MSC #09989740, 09989757, 09989765, 09989773, 09989781
For Gem Dial Test Indicators - Steel - Gem Ball Point Length Brown & Sharpe SPI
Size (In.) Dec. Equiv. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
Point Dia. (In.) Point L (In.) Order # Price Ea.
Steel
0.109 1⁄2 06447593 $7.75 0.040w 1⁄2 0.5000 599-7050 97106751 $21.00 01946045 $15.00
0.080 1⁄2 0.5000 599-7049 97106744 21.00
0.120 1⁄2 0.5000 599-7051 97961379 21.00 01946052 15.00
For Compac Test Indicators 0.080 17⁄16 1.4375 599-7036-80 97030332 48.00 01946060 35.00
Compac SPI Carbide
Ball Size Material Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. 0.015 1⁄2 0.5000 599-7030-15 97287502 62.00
0.720w Point Length for MSC #06441851, 0.040 1⁄2 0.5000 599-7030-40 06226765 48.00 06445191 38.50
06441893, 06441935, 06441869, 06441901, 0.080 1⁄2 0.5000 06445209 38.50
06441943; for Compac #214A, 224A, 234A, 0.120 1⁄2 0.5000 599-7030-120 06226773 48.00 06445217 38.50
214GA, 224GA, 234GA, 215A, 215GA, 245GA 0.015 17⁄16 1.4375 01946078 35.00
0.080w Carbide 06441604 $26.00 06445258 $21.00 0.040 17⁄16 1.4375 599-7034-40 96006069 50.00 06445225 35.00
1.440w Point Length for MSC #06441877, 0.080 17⁄16 1.4375 599-7034-80 99044620 50.00 06445233 35.00
06441919, 06441950, 06441885, 06441927, 0.120 17⁄16 1.4375 599-7034-120 97437321 50.00 06445241 35.00
06441968; for Compac #213LA, 223LA, 233LA, Ruby Tips
213GLA, 223GLA, 233GLA 2mm 1⁄2 0.5000 01051499 30.00
0.080w Carbide 06441596 26.00 06445274 21.00 2mm 17⁄16 1.4375 01051507 30.00

Basics of...Indicators
Dial and Electronic Indicators are used throughout industry on gage fixtures, indicator stands and on mag bases to measure both static and dynamic features.
Dial Indicators are available in several dial sizes, graduations and spindle travel. Electronic Indicators have a variety of functions such as Max/Min/TIR, and
outputs that can be used for remote access.
Dial Indicators

Continuous Dial Face Single Revolution Dial Face

Dial Face Size: Dial Indicators are available in a variety of dial face sizes ranging
from series 0 to series 4, with series two (2 to 23⁄8” diameter face) being the
most common size.
Mounting: Dial Indicators can be mounted by their mounting stem or by using
special mounting backs. The mounting stem is available in either 3⁄8” Ø or 8mm
Ø for full metric indicators. A hybrid metric indicator with a 3⁄8” stem is also
available to fit American gage fixtures. Indicator mounting backs are available
in many different configurations, with the lug back being the most common.
Dial Indicator Points: The standard thread on an AGD style indicator point is
#4-48. Metric indicators use M2.5 x 0.45. Indicator points will normally
interchange between different brands of indicators.
Bearings and Jewels: Dial Indicators use either plain bearings, bushings or
jeweled bearings. Jeweled bearings are recommended for indicators subject to
high usage and indicators graduated in .0001”.
Electronic Indicators
Dial Indicator Accuracy: American Gage Design (AGD) Specifications require
that a dial indicator be accurate to within ± one graduation in the first 21⁄3
revolutions of the dial face.
Graduations and Range: Dial Indicator graduations range from .00002” to .010”
and spindle travel from .001” to 12”. Long range indicators (over one inch) are
subject to accuracy errors due to cosine error (a mounting problem) and gear
train error (over the long distance).
Dial Face Styles: Dial Indicators are available in four general types of dial faces:
Balanced, Continuous, Reversed (continuous), and Single Revolution
The dial face may also have a revolution counter. Balanced and single rev dial faces
are normally used on gage fixtures for a run of parts or to check for TIR. A
continuous dial face is normally used to measure the dimension of a feature.

Selecting an Electronic Indicator: Electronic Indicators are available in many different package sizes,
resolutions, spindle travel and features. Some electronic indicators can be controlled via remote controls or
cabled interfaces.When selecting an electronic indicator, you will need to define what your requirements are.
Start with resolution and stroke length. Will you need a single or multiple resolution indicator? What features
will you need, such as Max/Min/TIR, Preset, Go/NoGo, Analog/Digital display, battery or AC powered. Do you
need data output or does the indicator need to control a process via a PLC? Do you need the indicator to
perform internal calculations, or will the indicator replace the dial indicator on a dial bore gage?
Package Size: If package size or a remote display are the main considerations in choosing an electronic
indicator, most electronic indicators with output can be wired to a remote display. Separate “LVDT style”, or
small profile gages are available with remote displays. Top reading Electronic Indicators (similar to a back
plunger dial indicator) are another option if space is limited.
NOTE: caution when using Electronic Indicators. High static environments may cause erratic indicator
readings. If you must use an Electronic Indicator in a high static environment, insulate the indicator stem
and point, and ground the fixture.

1401
Page 48
SURFACE PLATES & GAGE BLOCK TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Black Granite Surface Plates Surface Plate Covers
Granite Surface Plates meet or exceed Federal Specification GGG-P-463c. Surface Plate Size
Size (In.) Thick. Unilateral Approx. L (In.) W (In.) Order # Price Ea.
L W (In.) Tolerance (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 12 18 00151019 $40.00
Toolroom Grade B No Ledge 18 18 00151027 55.00
9 12 2 .0002 30 00150003 $53.00 18 24 00151035 57.00
12 12 3 .0002 45 63324107 69.30 24 24 00151043 61.00
12 18 3 .0002 85 00150011 109.00 24 36 00151050 68.00
18 24 3 .0003 180 00150037 190.00 • Harder than steel 36 36 00151068 85.00
24 36 4 .0004 460 00150052 364.00 • Does not nick or burr 36 48 00151076 87.00 Designed to preserve and protect the
36 48 4 .0008 740 00150078 975.00 • Auto-collimator checked for 36 60 00151084 100.00 precise flatness and micro-finish from
Toolroom Grade B, with 2 Ledges overall accuracy 36 72 00151092 109.00 abrasive dust. Made of a strong vinyl
18 24 3 .0003 182 00468579 130.50 • Retains accuracy for years 48 72 00151100 128.00 material with soft cloth lining.
24 36 4 .0004 431 00468587 276.30 • Does not rust or corrode 48 96 00151118 149.00 • Color: Black
Inspection Grade A, No Ledge • Guaranteed repeat reading.
24 36 4 .0002 365 00468595 292.50 Prices include certificate of
inspection (not NIST traceable)
36 48 6 .0004 1140 00468603 528.30 Steel Stands for All Surface Plates
Inspection Grade A, with 2 Ledges
12 18 3 .0001 80 00150029 149.00 Ships carrier Freight Steel stands are fabricated from 2w x 2w x 1⁄4w thick angle iron, welded together for extra strength -
18 24 3 .00015 170 00150045 262.00 Class 50. easily support more than twice the weight of the surface plate. No assembly required; ready to
24 36 4 .0002 365 00150060 525.00 use. Gray enamel finish. Your choice of Rolling model with 4 non-locking swivel casters or
Stationary model. Approximate working height is 36w depending on surface plate. For exact
height, add stand height listed in chart to surface plate thickness.
1
Surface Plate Size Wt. Stand Rolling Stands Stationary Stands
Steel Surface Plates W. (In.) L (In.) (Lbs.) Ht. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
12 18 80 33 00150706 $465.03 00150508 $387.89
Serrated to Accommodate Easy Movement on Plate 18 24 95 36 00150714 487.54 00150516 400.74
L (In.) W (In.) Thick. (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 24 36 125 36 00150748 564.69 00150540 455.39
8 8 2 10 00921205 $404.24 36 48 175 30 00150763 784.34 00150565 548.61
12 12 2 15 00921213 498.39 36 60 225 30 00150771 980.43 00150573 673.98
36 72 250 30 A43713114 969.07 A43713106 681.12
48 72 300 28 00150813 1257.95 00150615 1151.87
48 96 350 26 00150821 1698.35 00150623 1551.54
Surface Plate Cleaner 1
4w Casters included in calculation of height
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals
Contains no chlorides, fluorides or sulphates. Nonflammable. Free from strong odors - Rolling & Stationary Granite
excellent for cleaning surface plates, metals, ceramics, as well as other hard surfaces.
Spray pump design reduces overspray. Surface Plate Stands
Container Size Order # Price Ea. These handsome stands are the strongest, most durable surface plate supports available. They
are structurally engineered to support twice the weight of the plate with ample safety factor. Both
16 oz. Pump Spray 00152017 $7.07
stands keep the surface plate at a comfortable 34w working height.
1 Pint A00540088 6.06
Please specify the thickness of the plate to be used with the stand; legs of proper length will be
1 Qt. 00152025 10.10
1⁄2 Gal. supplied to achieve the 34w height. Stands have a long-wearing baked enamel finish and are
00152033 15.15
Very Low Evaporation provided with leveling screws for stationary use or with locking casters.
1 Gal. 00152041 19.19 Rate - Use Much Less • Stands come pre-assembled and are welded together
5 Gal. A01310523 60.60 Than Ordinary Cleaners Surface Plate Sz. Wt. Stationary Rolling
W (In.) L (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
18 12 50 84371558 $451.00 84371616 $521.00
Surface Plate Cleaner 18 18 65 84371566 453.00 84371624 523.00
24 18 75 84371574 471.00 86434248 538.00
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals 24 24 85 73288219 484.00 84371632 568.00 Stationary
36 24 95 02437887 615.00 89296909 750.00
• Helps keep surface plates and other precision granite products in top condition 48 24 145 84371582 636.00 84371640 770.00
• Prevents abrasion of tools by dirt and other foreign particles
• The cleaner, which also acts as a degreaser and rust inhibitor, should be used 36 36 165 84371590 666.00 04199253 805.00
without water to minimize risk of rusting tools 36 48 116 86434164 675.00 84371657 813.00
1
36 60 124 86434172 715.00 62167564 846.00
Container Size Order # Price Ea. 72 36 235 84371608 746.00 84371665 906.00
55 Gallon Drum free 72 48 265 01223429 1136.00 84371673 1325.00
1 Gal. 86435542 $26.77 freight allowed within 2
1 Gal. (case of 4) 86435534 123.61 48 96 220 86434206 1200.00 84371681 1400.00
the limits of the United Rolling
55 Gal. Drum 86435518 640.53 States Mainland. 1
Wt.: 205 Lbs. 2Wt.: 345 Lbs.

Basics of...Gage Block Specifications

Certificate and Serial Number
• It is an absolute necessity that each gage block carries its own Serial Number for
calibration purposes and, to determine the actual size to the closest millionth of an inch
• A Certificate of Accuracy, traceable to NIST, is normally furnished with each gage block
set and individual gage block (unless otherwise noted)

Deviation in Millionths of an Inch

Nominal New Old New Old New Old New Old New
Size In. Grade K Grade 1 Grade 00 Grade 2 Grade 0 Grade 3 Grade AS-1 Grade B Grade AS-2
N < 0.05w ±12 ±2 ±4 +4 -2 ±6 +8 -4 ±12 +10 -6 ±24
0.05 < N < 0.4w ±10 ±2 ±3 +4 -2 ±5 +8 -4 ±8 +10 -6 ±18
0.4 < N < 1w ±12 ±2 ±3 +4 -2 ±6 +8 -4 ±12 +10 -6 ±24
1 < N < 2w ±16 ±4 ±4 +8 -4 ±8 +16 -8 ±16 +20 -12 ±32
2 < N < 3w ±20 ±5 ±5 +10 -5 ±10 +20 -10 ±20 +30 -18 ±40
3 < N < 4w ±24 ±6 ±6 +12 -6 ±12 +24 -12 ±24 +40 -24 ±48
4 < N < 5w ±32 ±7 ±8 +14 -7 ±16 +28 -14 ±32 +50 -30 ±64

1432
Page 49
PIN GAGE SETS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Go/No-Go Measuring

Go/No-Go gaging is an inexpensive but, very accurate measurement of hole diameter. Go/No-Go plug gage assemblies consist of a Go gage pin, No-Go gage pin,
handle & 2 bushings. The Go gage pin, (tolerance plus) represents the minimum size of the hole to be measured. The No-Go gage pin, (tolerance minus) represents the
maximum size of the hole to be measured. The hole is considered in tolerance if the Go goes into the hole & the No-Go does not.
Page 50 Page 1452

Class X Steel Pin Gage Sets

• Centerless finish with 10 micro finish or better Minus Tolerance Sets Plus Tolerance Sets Tolerances:
• Inspected to tolerance
Size Rge. (In.) No. of Size Rge. (In.) No. of How to Class
• Increments of .001w
Min. Max. Pcs. Order # Price/Set Min. Max. Pcs. Order # Price Ea. Interpret Tolerance: X
• Uniform 2w overall length
• All sharp corners broken 0.011 0.060 50 76463009 $486.88 0.011 0.060 50 76463090 $486.88 For Minus +.00000w
• Members marked with size 0.0115 0.0605 50 76463280 500.72 0.0115 0.0605 50 76463298 500.72 Tolerance Sets -.00004w
• High production runs for lower cost 0.061 0.250 190 76463017 1230.60 0.061 0.250 190 76463033 1230.60
For Plus +.00004w
• Greatest savings in ordering complete sets 0.0615 0.2505 190 76463306 1265.57 0.0615 0.2505 190 76463314 1265.57
0.251 0.500 250 76463025 1726.32 0.251 0.500 250 76463041 1726.32 Tolerance Sets -.00000w
Uses:
• Checking locations • Measuring hole sizes 0.2515 0.5005 250 76463322 1717.74 0.2515 0.5005 250 76463330 1717.74
• Checking distances between holes 0.501 0.625 125 76463058 1498.60 0.501 0.625 125 76463074 1498.60
• Setting micrometers • Measuring hole depths 0.626 0.750 125 76463066 1540.10 0.626 0.750 125 76463082 1540.10
0.751 0.832 82 76463348 1352.33 0.751 0.832 82 76463355 1352.33 Sets Furnished in
• GO and NO-GO gaging
0.833 0.916 84 76463363 1425.43 0.833 0.916 84 76463371 1425.43 Polymer Cases
Hardness:
• Heat treated to a hardness of 60/62 Rockwell “C” 0.917 1.000 84 76463389 1498.60 0.917 1.000 84 76463397 1498.60

Class Z Steel Pin Gage Sets

Inch Sets • Size and serial number are laser etched
Meas. Range (In) No. of on each piece (except MO gages) for
Min. Max. Pcs. Model # Order # Price Ea. easy identification Tolerances:
• Supplied with NIST certification
Plus Tolerance • All members are 2w long How to Interpret Tolerance: Class Z
0.011 0.060 50 M0P A00942144 $81.65 • Each gage has been inspected and For Minus +0.0000w
0.011 0.750 740 LCM A97418123 1406.55 features an 8 micro finish or better Tolerance Sets: -0.0001w
0.061 0.250 190 M1P A19705466 183.86 • Heat treated to a hardness of 60-62
0.251 0.500 250 M2P A19705474 272.45 Rockwell C for added durability For Plus +0.0001w
Tolerance Sets: -0.0000w
0.501 0.625 125 M3P A86890985 319.77 • Each set is supplied in its own case
0.626 0.750 125 M4P A97879654 353.78
0.751 0.832 82 M5P A97879662 600.89 Metric Sets
Minus Tolerance Meas. Range (mm) No. of
0.011 0.060 50 M0M A40060816 81.65 Min. Max. Pcs. Model # Order # Price Ea. 4 Drawer Cabinet with
0.011 1.000 990 L4M A88912944 3487.06 Plus Tolerance 4 Inserts of Your Choice
0.061 0.250 190 M1M A97441299 183.86 0.22 1.50 65 M0MMP A63321707 $106.14 Among these model sizes:
0.061 0.750 690 L1M A19862119 1343.43 1.52 7.70 310 M1MMP A63321715 374.21 M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6
0.251 0.500 250 M2M A98128689 272.45 7.72 12.70 250 M2MMP A63321723 402.77 inch or M1, M2 metric.
0.501 0.625 125 M3M A97089536 319.77 Minus Tolerance (Pins not included.)
0.626 0.750 125 M4M A86893443 353.78 0.22 1.50 65 M0MMM A63321756 106.14
0.751 0.832 82 M5M A94575198 600.89 1.52 7.70 310 M1MMM A63321764 374.21 Order # Price Ea.
0.833 0.916 84 M6M A97879670 701.04 7.72 12.70 250 M2MMM A63321772 402.77 A90810961 $413.33 90810961

Class ZZ Steel Pin Gage Sets

Inch Range: 0.011w - 1.000w/Metric Range: 0.20mm - 25.48mm Tolerance:
• Certificate of accuracy included • Inspected with equipment calibrated and traceable to NIST How to Interpret Tolerance: Class ZZ How to Interpret Tolerance: Class ZZ
• Use to measure hole sizes, slot widths, calculate distances between holes or use as GO/NO GO gaging
• Class ZZ guaranteed to 0.0002w on inch sets and 0.005mm on metric sets Inch Metric
• Hardend to a hardness of 60/62 Rockwell “C” For Minus Tolerance Sets +0.0000w For Minus Tolerance Sets +0.000mm
Black Oxide Coated Steel Sets -0.0002w -0.005mm
• Prevent corrosion and show gage wear For Plus Tolerance Sets +0.0002w For Plus Tolerance Sets +0.005mm
-0.0000w -0.000mm
Inch Sets
Plain Steel Black Oxide Coated Steel
Measuring No. of Minus Tolerance Plus Tolerance Minus Tolerance Plus Tolerance
Range (In.) Pcs. SPI # Order # SPI # Order # Price Ea. SPI # Order # SPI # Order # Price Ea.
0.011 - 0.060 50 13-121-9 02307544 13-120-1 02307536 $60.00 18-002-6 84495415 28-002-4 84495308 $65.00
0.061 - 0.250 190 13-123-5 02307569 13-122-7 02307551 130.00 18-003-4 84495423 28-003-2 84495316 145.00
0.251 - 0.500 250 13-125-0 02307585 13-124-3 02307577 195.00 18-004-2 84495431 28-004-0 84495324 215.00
0.501 - 0.625 125 13-127-6 02307601 13-126-8 02307593 230.00 18-005-9 84495449 28-005-7 84495332 250.00
0.626 - 0.750 125 13-129-2 02307627 13-128-4 02307619 250.00 18-006-7 84495456 28-006-5 84495340 275.00
0.751 - 0.832 82 13-131-8 02307643 13-130-0 02307635 340.00 18-007-5 84495464 28-007-3 84495357 375.00
0.833 - 0.916 84 13-133-4 02307668 13-132-6 02307650 365.00 18-008-3 84495472 28-008-1 84495365 400.00
0.917 - 1.000 84 13-135-9 02307684 13-134-2 02307676 420.00 18-009-1 84495480 28-009-9 84495373 460.00

Metric Sets - Plain Steel

Measuring Range (mm) No. of Minus Tolerance Plus Tolerance Measuring Range (mm) No. of Minus Tolerance Plus Tolerance
Min. Max. Pcs. SPI # Order # SPI # Order # Price Ea. Min. Max. Pcs. SPI # Order # SPI # Order # Price Ea.
0.20 1.28 55 15-455-9 A73896722 14-500-3 65378796 $69.00 16.50 18.98 125 15-460-9 A73896771 14-505-2 65378846 $275.00
1.30 4.98 185 15-456-7 A73896730 14-501-1 65378804 145.00 19.00 20.98 100 15-461-7 A73896789 14-506-0 65378853 515.00
5.00 9.98 250 15-457-5 A73896748 14-502-9 65378812 225.00 21.00 22.48 75 15-462-5 A73896797 14-507-8 65378861 435.00
10.00 13.98 200 15-458-3 A73896755 14-503-7 65378820 190.00 22.50 23.98 75 15-463-3 A73896805 14-508-6 65378879 445.00
14.00 16.48 125 15-459-1 A73896763 14-504-5 65378838 230.00 24.00 25.48 75 15-464-1 A73896813 14-509-4 65378887 476.00

1452
 TAPE MEASURES & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Jack Screw Utility Sets Fault Finder
Use when setting up machinery and in other machine shop applications. Perfect for leveling work Locates cracks and defects in metal, glass, plastics, aircraft and automotive, railroads, foundry
on planer beds and upright drills. 11⁄4w diameter jack (at base). and manufacturing. Finds cracks and faults quickly with immediate results.
• Two extension bases: 2w and 1w high, respectively • Low in chlorine and sulfur bearing solvents • One of the least flammable systems available
• Use extensions separately or together • It’s portable, accurate, versatile, simple to use • Conforms to MIL-I-25135; meets chlorine
• When used together, a height of 63⁄8w may be obtained with the jack and sulfur requirements of Navships 250-1500 and MIL STD 271
• Complete kit contains 4 cans of cleaner, 2 cans of
Meas. Rge. (In.) Min. developer, 2 cans of penetrant and 1 carrying case
Min. Max. Cap. (Lbs.) Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Desc. Size Order # Price Ea.
21⁄4 33⁄8 1000 SPI 97-954-2 64914203 $26.00
Complete Kit Complete Kit 00050211 $103.47
21⁄4 33⁄8 1000 Brown & Sharpe 599-680 67385138 31.93
Inspection Cleaner 12 oz. 00050229 6.82
Inspection Penetrant 12 oz. 00050237 7.28
Inspection Developer 12 oz. 00050245 8.05
Tool & Instrument Oil
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals
Especially useful for lubricating and protecting fine instruments, micrometers and
other tools, guns, fishing tackle, light machinery, home appliances and countless
other applications. Special high-refining makes Starrett Tool and Instrument Oil
colorless; ensures thorough lubrication of close-fitting parts at high temperatures and
below zero; and provides a strong, lasting oil film over all areas requiring protection
against rust. This oil has not been adulterated by additives for color and odor.
Size Model # Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
4 oz. 1620 53216 86426756 $7.39

Basics of...Tape Measures

Tape measures are used to measure a variety of objects. Tapes can usually be grouped under four categories: Good-Better-Best-Premium. What makes one Tape better
than another? The type of features found on each Tape Measure.
Features to Consider when Choosing a Tape Measure
Stand-Out: Wider tapes can be bulkier than pocket tapes, but also have the distinct advantage of extending farther (Stand-Out) without support at the other end. (Note:
More economical tapes will not have a Stand-Out rating).
Typically range from 7’ to 11’ Stand-Out
Tape Case: A strong case will protect the blade and internal spring mechanism that controls the recoil. Look for a case that is made of high impact ABS plastic or die-
cast metals. Tapes with molded rubber bumpers or guards provide additional protection against impact and better gripping surface.
Two Types: Metal or Plastic
Blade Durability: Blades are typically made from high carbon steel that are concaved for strength, rigidity, and stand-out. Typically range from ½” and 11⁄4” wide. Look
for blade coatings (NYLON, Mylar®) and blade reinforcement (3M thermoplastic coatings) to extend the life of your tape.
Blade Readability: Color and markings play an important role in determining which tape best fits your needs.
- Look for a blade that has a high visibility background color that is baked onto the metal with markings that are easy to read.
- Wider tapes (11⁄4”) have larger graphics to make it easier and faster to read. Most tape measures have lines or inch marks that go across the entire face of the blade.
End Hook: The tip of the tape is riveted in place with two or three rivets and slides slightly; the length of the slide is the same as the thickness of the tip, to allow the
user to make accurate measurements. With a sliding tip you get the same measurement hooking the end of the tape over a piece of material or butting the tip into a
corner.
Blade Lock: Most tape measures longer than 10’ have blade locks that will secure the blade when taking a measurement. It is important to control retraction speed to
protect the blade for longer life.
Two Types: Forward locking - using the thumb, depress downward
Bottom locking - uses your other digits to engage the lock
Page 1487
Page 51

Value Series Power Tapes Professional Series Tape Measures

• Lightweight, high strength, contour grip case fits comfortably in hand • Impact resistant chrome case
• Hi-Viz orange case - easy to find on the job • Wide base helps keep tape standing upright • Ergonomic design for comfort and strength
• Unique slide lock design allows for easy control of tape blade • Nylon coated blade for maximum durability
• Removable belt clip - tape fits in most pouches • Graduation: 1⁄16w on both sides • Include belt clip
• Graduations: L510/L516: Feet/inches 1⁄16ths top side; L (Ft.) W (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
inches to 1⁄16ths bottom side with first 12w to 1⁄32nds.
L525: 1⁄16ths on both sides 10 5⁄8 410 A40577207 $5.20
16 3⁄4 416 A40577215 8.20
L (Ft.) W (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 25 1 425 A40577223 10.30
10 1⁄2 L510 82697012 $3.17 30 1 430 A40577231 12.60
16 3⁄4 L516 82697038 6.33
25 1 L525 82697053 9.51
4-in-1 Magnetic Tip Screwdriver Set
Slotted & Phillips®
5 Pc. Set Consists of:
Order # Price Ea. • 2 - Phillips: #1, #2
• 2 - Slotted: 3⁄16, 1⁄4w
BU57297178 $9.17 • 1 - Magnetic holder

1487
 VISES TECHNICAL INFORMATION & MACHINE VISES

Basics of...Vises
Vises are devices typically containing two
jaws that may be brought together or
separated via screw, lever, etc; used to
secure an object while it is worked on.
Bench Vise Drill Press Vise Machine Vise Machinist Vise

Types of Vises
Angle: contains marked adjustments which allows for clamping at different angles. Self-centering: facilitates accurate, automatic job centering. It is most handy
Bench: mounted on a table or workbench to secure work between two flat jaws; when applied to work pieces of varying sizes for which the same operation will
most often used in light-duty applications. be performed, as it requires just one machine setting.
Clamp: ideal for portable use; equipped with a combination fixed and portable vise Sine: uses solving triangles and gage blocks to set up high accuracy clamping at
featuring a bottom clamp which attaches easily to tables, sawhorses and desired angles.
workbenches. Toolmaker: useful in tool manufacturing, grinding, milling, engraving and jig
Drill Press: holds work while you are drilling, reaming or tapping on a drill press. boring machines for measurement and inspection, and in manufacturing
Machine: also known as Milling Machine vise-secures a work piece between a processes that requires accurate clamping. They are available in screw and
movable jaw and a stationary jaw; used in conventional machine tool applications screwless models.
such as milling, jig boring, grinding and shaping. Vacuum Base: features a lever-operated suction cup on the bottom that attaches
Machinist: mounted to a workbench and used for general clamping. to a tabletop or similar work surface; used in light-duty applications.
Pipe: made of iron yoke and base with hardened steel jaws; used to hold pipe to Woodworking: features wooden padded jaws used to secure work without
perform pipe fabrication operation. marring the work piece surface.
Types of Vise Jaws
Soft Jaws: plastic, aluminum, leather or lead jaw covers on jaws of a vise or pliers that prevent marking and damage to work.
Smooth Jaws: able to hold material of different shapes and prevent indentation in soft metals; versatile.
Grooved Jaws: vertical/horizontal grooves effectively hold cylindrical pieces parallel or perpendicular to vise.
Serrated Jaws: cross-hatch pattern permits firm gripping of piece in any position.
Safety Tips
Do’s Don’ts
• Wear safety glasses or a face shield when using striking or power tools on a work piece • Do not weld vise base to any metal
held by a vise • Do not repair vise by welding or brazing
• Always attach the vise securely. Place bolts in all holes in the base of the vise. Use lock • Do not try to bend a heavy rod in a light vise
washer under the nuts • Do not cut into the jaws
• Mount a vise so that the stationary jaw projects slightly beyond the edge of the workbench, • Do not apply heavy pressure at vise jaw corners
as this will allow long work to be clamped in the vise free of interference from the edge of • Do not use handle extension (i.e. pipe) for extra clamping pressure
the workbench • Do not hammer the handle to tighten beyond normal hand pressure
• Ensure workbench is firmly secured to its base • Do not use vise jaws as an anvil
• Always check vises for cracks or other damage before clamping a work piece • Do not operate vise with even the slightest crack
• Use a vise large enough to hold work without strain • Do not unscrew or open vise jaws wider than they were designed for use
• Place work piece in vise so that full clamping surface of the jaw supports the work piece
• Keep work piece in vise as close as possible to jaws to avoid vibration while operating
• Support end of extra long work with an adjustable stand, saw horse or box to avoid extra
strain on vise
• Keep all threaded and moving parts clean, oiled and free of chips and dirt
• Use vise jaw liners where work might be marked It is recommended that all users refer to manufacturer’s instructions for Page
• Replace bent handles and worn jaw inserts immediately
Page 52
specific safety guidelines. 1595

Lock-Down Machine Vises Lock-Down Machine Vise

• 6w Vise: bed height matched to size 2.875w ±0.0005w Precision ground for use in horizontal and vertical position.
• 8w Vise: bed height matched to size 3.310w ±0.0005w Accurate to .001w squareness and parallelism.
• Rigid main screw design allows for higher torque loads and • Totally enclosed heat treated 3⁄4w hex screw
clamping force
• Repeatability within 0.001w • Hardened vise bed and jaw plate Vise Jaw Ht. OAL Wt.
• Limited lifetime warranty Size (In.) Open (In.) (In.) (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Vise Jaw Jaw Jaw W Ht. OAL Max. Clamp Wt. 6 529⁄32 41⁄8 171⁄2 80 79215463 $392.89
Size (In.) Width (In.) Ht. (In.) Open (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Force (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
6 6 1.75 9 83⁄4 4.62 17.20 8,200 75 02343960 $469.65
8 8 2.20 11 111⁄2 5.51 21.81 12,000 210 45765518 1307.24

Versatile Lock® Vises

Versatile Lock® offers ultra-precision function for CNC workholding. The design prevents parts from lifting upwards under heavy clamping loads. Jaw stationary deflection is reduced by at least 80%.
• Can be mounted either upright or on either side • .0005” Clamping repeatability
• Matched stationary jaw to keyway, including body height ±.001w
• Short version has a footprint of 13w, ideal for small vertical or horizontal CNC Machining centers
• Reverse version reduces the “reach-over” distance, making it easier for the operator
Vise Jaw OAL Ht. Max. Jaw Max. Clamp. Wt.
Size (In.) Desc. W (In.) (In.) (In.) Open. (In.) Force (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
6 Standard 6 17.00 4.922 6 6356 69 3600V 09219007 $821.46
6 Reverse 6 17.00 4.922 6 6356 68 3610V 09219023 912.90
6 Short Body 6 14.88 4.922 4 6356 64 3620V 09219049 842.97
6 Short Body Reverse 6 14.88 4.922 4 6356 64 3630V 09219064 1014.90

1595
LATHE CHUCKS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & LATHE CHUCKS

Basics of...Lathe Chucks

To determine which type of spindle nose mounting
your lathe requires, consult the diagrams below, then
read the chart beneath the appropriate diagram. Make
the measurement required. This will give you the
exact type of mounting for the lathe spindle nose.
Chuck Types American Standard Camlock Long Taper Key Drive Threaded Size
Self-Centering Chucks are ideal for gripping cylindrical “A” Series Spindle “D” Series Spindle “L” Series Spindle X Dimension refers to
or concentric work because all jaws work in unison and X Dimension refers to X Dimension refers to outside X Dimension refers to major diameter of thread.
automatically center the piece. Independent chucks are largest portion of taper. diameter of spindle nose. largest portion of taper. X = Dia. (In.) x Pitch
suited for gripping irregularly shaped workpieces or for Spindle A5 A6 A8 Spindle D1-3 D1-4 D1-5 Spindle L00 L0 L1 1x8 21⁄4 x 8
eccentric operations because jaws work independently. X= 31⁄4 43⁄16 51⁄2 X= 35⁄8 45⁄8 53⁄4 X= 23⁄4 31⁄4 41⁄8 1 x 10 23⁄8 x 6
Spindle A11 A15 A20 Spindle D1-6 D1-8 D1-11 Spindle L2 L3 11⁄2 x 8 23⁄4 x 8
Adjustable chucks operate like a self-centering chuck but 13⁄4 x 8
X= 73⁄4 111⁄4 161⁄4 X= 71⁄8 87⁄8 113⁄4 X= 51⁄4 61⁄2
are used where extreme accuracy is required. User may
adjust within .0005 T.I.R.
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS: Chuck Mounting Information: Using Intermediate
LATHE MUST BE LEVELED WITH A PRECISION LEVEL Adaptors - For ADJUSTABLE Run-Out Chucks,
Chuck Mounting Information: Using Intermediate Plates - known as: “Adjust-Tru”, “Set-Tru”, “Zero-Set”,
For Standard Flat Back Lathe Chucks- “Set-Rite”, “Hi-Tru”, “Accu-Chuck”.
NOT for “Adjustable Run-Out” models (see separate instructions). This type of chuck is designed so that the chuck
When using a Chuck Adapter Plate to mount a flat back lathe chuck: body can be moved by utilizing adjusting screws.
1. The lathe must be levelled with a precision level, this assures A ground pin is held firmily in the chuck mounted
machining accuracy on the lathe. The pin is trammed with a test
2 Jaw Self-Centering 3 Jaw Self-Centering
2. Adapter plate or chuck plate is to be mounted on lathe spindle indicator and the adjusting screws used to correct
3. A skim facing cut across the full face of the adaptor must be made. This the run-out. The design of the chuck adaptor
assures that the face is at 90° to the centerline of the lathe spindle permits the chuck adjusting screws to contact an
4. The chuck plate has a boss onto which the recess in back of the chuck extended boss on the plate, facilitating
must mount. Turn the boss to fit tightly into the chuck body. The accuracy of adjustment. Each brand chuck requires it’s
this operation is directly relative to best results matching adaptor - same manufacturer or specific
5. Turn the O.D. of the chuck plate to match the chuck --- not always the identification - they are not interchangeable
same size of the chuck body, especially with 4 jaw independent chucks (unless so indicated). These adaptors are to be
4 Jaw Independent 6 Jaw Adjustable
6. In most cases the chuck has threaded holes in the chuck body, to accept “zeroed in” prior to actually mounting the chuck
mounting bolts, or the chuck plate has threaded holes, for chucks having by taking a skim facing cut across the flange. All
Note - Plain Back Chucks Require Adapter other dimensions should be compared to the back
through holes in the body for front insertion. In some instances it may be or Converter Which May Require
necessary to transfer hole locations and drill clearance holes of the specific chuck and machined accordingly, if
Machining to Fit Back of Chuck.
7. “A” type adaptors come in two versions: A-1 has two bolt circles (inner & necessary. Once the mounted chuck has been
outer), A-2 has a single bolt circle (outer) of tapped holes. The chuck adaptor “zeroed-in” in all respects, the chuck must be
is fastened to spindle separately, then the chuck is fastened to the plate “locked” into the adjusted position. Double check Page
8. Lathes having threaded spindle noses follow similar procedures 1 thru 6 Page 53
with ground pin and test indicator. 1618

2 Jaw Plain Back Self-Centering Scroll Lathe Chucks

Gibraltar Bison Semi-Steel Body with Two Piece
Chuck Runout Thru Approx. Runout Thru Approx. Soft Top Reversible Jaws
Dia. (In.) Radial (In.) Axial (In.) Hole (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Radial (In.) Axial (In.) Hole (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Soft top jaws are shaped by user to fit the workpiece.
6 0.0015 0.0015 1.57 18 A93220499 $384.30 0.0012 0.0008 1.65 21.5 08608069 $457.04 Scroll and master jaws hardened and ground.
8 0.0022 0.0024 2.56 38 A93220507 377.10 0.0016 0.0010 2.16 22.2 08608085 494.00 Standard Accessories:
10 0.0022 0.0024 3.15 56 A93220515 424.77 0.0016 0.0010 2.99 67.9 08608200 517.24 • Soft top jaws and hard master jaws
12 0.0020 0.0012 4.05 98.8 08608325 1047.54 • 1 Chuck wrench • 1 Set of mounting screws
1
16 0.0024 0.0012 5.35 191.6 08608366 1484.89 Requires chuck adapter. Refer to Page Nos. 1624-1625.
1
Truck Shipment

3 Jaw 5C Mount 3 Jaw Precision Plain Back

Self-Centering Chucks Self-Centering Scroll Lathe Chucks
When working with diameters that 5C or Standard Accessories: Forged Steel Body
MT spindles don’t readily accommodate, • 1 Chuck key
these precision chucks eliminate the • 2 Sets of hardened steel jaws; one set of Two-Piece Hardened Reversible Jaws
need to tear down a lathe set-up just to internal holding and one set of external • Scroll and jaws hardened and precision ground • Balanced scroll
switch to a 3 or 4 jaw chuck. holding jaws for increased clamping range
1 Standard Accessories: Requires chuck
Chuck T.I.R. Repeat- Wt. Interstate Made in USA
Dia. (In.) ability (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. • Hard top jaws and hard master jaws adapter. Refer to
• 1 Chuck wrench • 1 Set of mounting screws Page Nos. 1624-1625.
3 .003 6.7 09670522 $166.49 67387811 $254.21
4 .003 10.4 09670548 200.56 67387837 286.05 Gibraltar Bison
1
5C Shank Made in USA with Interstate chuck Chuck Thru Approx. Thru Approx.
Dia. Runout (In.) Hole Wt. Hole Wt.
(In.) Radial Axial (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
3 Jaw Plain Back Self-Centering 5 A93220622
0.0012 0.0014 1.260 13.23 $540.00 1.250 11 08546053 $716.25
Adjustable Scroll Lathe Chuck 6 A76784891
0.0012 0.0014 1.575 18.30 594.03 1.650 20 08546061 794.47
8 A76784917
0.0016 0.0018 2.559 31.09 714.47 2.160 37 08546087 960.29
Semi-Steel Body 10 0.0016 0.0018 3.149 50.72 A76784933 923.54 2.990 75 08546103 1085.19
Standard Accessories: 121⁄2 0.0020 0.0022 4.055 103.64 A93220630 1278.90 4.050 146 08546129 1542.17
• American standard 2 piece jaws • 1 set of mounting screws 16 0.0024 0.0025 5.354 176.4 1A93220648 2289.60 5.350 200 1
08546160 2724.97
Chuck Dia. (In.) Thru Hole (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 1
Truck Shipment Freight Class 65
8 2.480 35 08545485 $217.35

1618
CENTERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & LIVE CENTERS

Basics of...Centers
Centers are used to accurately position a workpiece about its point or axis between a lathe chuck or head stock spindle and tail stock spindle. Enables the workpiece to
rotate or revolve and helps to ensure concentric work

Types of Centers

Live Center Full Dead Center

Bull Nose Live Center

Spring Loaded Live Center Half Dead Center

Live Centers
Live (Revolving) Centers: Revolve with their workpiece. They hold ball bearings inside that allow the center to prevent wearing to its ends. Live centers allow more force,
higher turning speeds (without separate lubrication) and tighter gripping on work than plain centers, further reducing sideways movement during turning operations.

Live Centers are available with Standard Points or Extended Points:

Standard Point Live Centers: Offer increased rigidity over extended points, although tool clearance may not be as strong.
Extended Point Live Centers: Are recommended for operations whereby exceptional tool clearance is your top priority.
Bull Nose and Spring Loaded Live Centers:
Bull Nose Live Centers: Feature a shallower end than do plain centers, enabling the center to hold tubing, pipe or hollow shafts.
Spring Loaded Live Centers: Expands lengthwise to compensate for thermal distortion during the cutting operation.

Live Center Applications

CNC Heavy Duty: CNC lathes Triple Bearing: Medium-duty work

Super Accurate: Grinding Double Bearing: Light-duty work
Spring Type: Light/medium-duty work Quad-Bearing: Heavy loads
Heavy Duty/ Extra Heavy Duty: Large parts Bull Nose: Parts with large center holes

Dead (Plain) Centers

Dead (Plain) Centers: Do not rotate and provide workpiece support at either the fixed or rotating end of a machine. Within the fixed position, dead centers create friction
between the workpiece and the center, requiring lubrication to prevent friction welding.

Dead Centers can be Half Centers or Full Centers:

Half Dead Centers: Are used specifically for facing, as they allow a cutting tool to face the end of the work without bumping into the center. They are best used for
additional wheel clearance when grinding small parts with diameters smaller than that of the dead center. Half dead centers come either with a full carbon steel
construction or with carbide tips.
Full Dead Centers: Are ideal for grinding and sometimes in turning applications requiring a high degree of precision.
Center Tapers
Center Tapers: A taper that provides a connection between a tool, arbor, or center and its mating part to ensure and maintain accurate alignment between the parts;
permits easy separation of parts.
There are three primary center taper families:
Morse Tapers: Are self-holding standard tapers largely used on small cutting tools such as end mills, drills and reamers and, sometimes, machine spindles. Morse
Tapers come in eight standard sizes identified by a number between 0 and 7. The taper itself is roughly 5/8” per foot.
Jarno Tapers: Are standard tapers with 0.600-inch taper per foot used on some machine tools Jarno Tapers range from 2 to 20. The diameter of the big end in
inches is always the taper size divided by 8, the small end is always the taper size divided by 10 and the length is the taper size divided by 2. A Jarno #7, for
example, measures 0.875” (7/8) across the big end. The small end measures 0.700” (7/10) and the length is 3.5” (7/2).
Brown & Sharpe (B&S) Tapers: Brown & Sharpe tapers are alternatives to the more-commonly seen Morse tapers. Like the Morse, these have a series of sizes, from Page
1 to 18, with 7, 9 and 11 being the most common. Actual taper on these is within a close range of .500” per foot. 1646
Page 54

Econo-Triple Bearing Live Centers

• Accuracy guaranteed to ±0.00005w • Three rows of bearings • Points are through-hardened to 61-63 Rc
• Sealed bearings lubricated for life, protected against contaminants and coolant
Morse Point Dia. Point Length Outside Case Length Clearance Max. Max. Workpiece
Taper A (In.) B (In.) Dia. C (In.) D (In.) E (In.) RPM Wt. (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Standard Point
2 9⁄16 13⁄16 15⁄8 15⁄8 1⁄4 2500 300 44102 00090001 $169.88
3 13⁄16 1 2 115⁄16 1⁄4 2500 500 44103 00090019 176.87
4 1 11⁄4 23⁄8 21⁄4 1⁄4 2500 1100 44104 00090027 239.69
5 1 11⁄4 23⁄8 21⁄4 1⁄4 2500 1100 44105 00090035 328.12
Tracer Point
2 3⁄8 11⁄4 15⁄8 15⁄8 1⁄4 2500 300 44902 00090050 169.88
3 3⁄8 11⁄2 2 115⁄16 1⁄4 2500 300 44903 00090068 176.87
4 1⁄2 2 23⁄8 21⁄4 1⁄4 2500 900 44904 00090076 239.69
5 1⁄2 2 23⁄8 21⁄2 1⁄4 2500 900 44905 00090084 328.12 Standard Point Tracer Point

1646
 DRILL CHUCKS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Drill Chucks

Drill chucks are devices used to hold a drill or other cutting tools on a spindle.
Types of Drill Chucks
KEYED DRILL CHUCKS
1. Super Ball Bearing Keyed Chucks: Require a key for tightening or loosening
and permit clockwise and counterclockwise turning. The Super Ball Bearing
Chucks are equipped with ball bearings to reduce friction in the tightening
mechanism and provide a better grip on the drill. Used for industrial
applications that include the toughest machining conditions where high
accuracy drilling is not a must (max. run-out .003w approx.).
2. Plain Bearing Keyed Chucks: Equipped with one-piece gearing and sleeve
that reduces the possibility of teeth breaking. Used for stationary drilling,
turning, milling and wood working machines. For medium duty industrial use.
Available with threaded mount for hand held drilling machines and with tapered
mounts for stationary drilling machines where run-out is not a problem or
factor (max. .004w approx.).
3. Light Duty Keyed Chucks: Equipped in most power tools for DIY’s for
decades, this is a good, inexpensive chuck for light duty applications.
Nowadays they are replaced by keyless chucks more and more. For electric
hand held drilling machines, reversible or non-reversible.
4. Stainless Steel Keyed Chucks: Manufactured out of stainless steel. For use in
the food, medical and dental industries where tools must be sterilized. Same
design as a Plain Bearing chuck, but in stainless steel.
5. CNC Precision Keyed Chucks w/integrated shank. Ideal for CNC machines.
Short design, maximum concentricity, max. run-out .0012w or better. High
clamping forces, over 75 ft/lbs, and optional through coolant. Permits
clockwise and counterclockwise turning. For use in high speed CNC equipment
for milling, drilling, reaming and tapping.
Parts of a Drill Chuck
KEYLESS DRILL CHUCKS
6. Keyless Chucks for High Precision / High Torque applications: Do not require
a key for tightening or loosening. Incorporate a self-tightening feature that
causes them to grip tighter as more torque is applied. Permit clockwise turning
only. Automatic fitting for efficient, fast change tools. Minimum run-out for
accurate hole sizing, (max. TIR .0016w or better). For high accuracy drill
presses, jig borers, milling machines and production drilling equipment, CNC’s
included.
7. Keyless Chucks for medium duty applications: Same self-tightening feature as
High Precision or High Torque chucks but with wider run-outs (about .006w).
Automatic fitting for efficient, fast change tools. For medium duty industrial use,
available with threaded mount for hand held drilling machines and with tapered
mounts for stationary drilling machines. Clockwise turning only.
8. Keyless Chucks in Stainless Steel: Manufactured out of stainless steel. High
precision and self-tightening design. For use in the food, medical and dental
industries where tools must be sterilized. Clockwise turning only.
9. Keyless Drill Chuck for portable drilling machines: These are the latest
generation chucks for power tools. Does not require a key for tightening or
loosening. Some are equipped with a locking mechanism for hammer drilling
and also screwdriver operations (clockwise and counterclockwise). Ergonomic
design, offered with plastic or metal sleeves. For hand held drills, reversible or
non-reversible.
10. CNC Precision Keyless Chucks w/integrated shank: Same as type No.5, but
keyless. Ideal for CNC machines but for applications requiring clockwise
turning only as it has a self-tightening feature. Compact construction,
maximum connection rigidity, higher precision (TIR .0016w or better, certified
by some producers only). For use on CNC machine centers, milling and turning
machines, or other stationary equipment.

Mounting & Removing Chucks

On Threaded Spindle Portable Tools A B C
Unplug drill or disconnect battery pack. Open jaws of existing chuck
completely. Remove left-hand thread screw, if any, from inside chuck and save
for re-use (illus. A). Insert hex-type wrench into chuck body and tighten jaws
on wrench. Strike wrench counterclockwise with mallet to free and unscrew
chuck (illus. B). Screw new chuck onto spindle (clockwise). Insert hex-type
wrench in jaws and tighten jaws on wrench. Strike wrench clockwise with
mallet several times (illus. C).

On Tapered Shank Arbors

To mount chucks: D E F
Clean both tapers of all grease and grit. With the jaws retracted into the chuck and
with the chuck nose resting on a wooden bench, strike the tang of the arbor lightly
to seal it into the chuck.
To remove chucks:
Insert wedge between the back of the chuck and the shoulder of the arbor (illus. D
& E). In case the mounting taper of the arbor does not provide a shoulder, a cross
hole should be drilled through the neck of the arbor (illus. F) and a cross pin
inserted. Then the wedge can be used between the chuck back and the cross pin to
free the chuck from the arbor.

1697
Page 55
 BAR PULLERS & VIBRATION MOUNTS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Grippex Bar Pullers - Coolant Actuated Omni & Mini Omni Bar Pullers
MADE IN SWEDEN
• Clamping mechanism is activated by the machine’s
coolant system; opening and closing of jaws is
M-function controlled; coolant on/coolant off
• Grips from 1⁄8w to 3w diameter without any adjustment;
this not only eliminates time required to adjust bar
puller for different setups but also eliminates
adjustments required for variations in bar diameter
during run
• Directly fits any turret with through-tool coolant The Omni Puller is either coolant or air activated. The special adapter can be easily removed for
Here, the same Grippex unit grips a
systems; easily adapts to turrets with external 1⁄8w bar with no adjustment needed internally activated applications. The Omni Puller is mounted in two basic ways.
coolant nozzles Internally activated - Applications are very common and very easy to mount. Internally activated
• Will clamp very close to chuck, allowing for short applications require you to remove the coolant/air adapter. You must have a minimum of 15 P.S.I.
overhang of workpiece to activate the unit (maximum 80 P.S.I.).
• Compact - takes up very little room on machine turret; Externally activated - Applications are commonly used with a CNC Turret boring bar holder
adjacent turret tool position need not be vacated attachment, or with another style tool holder. These holders must have coolant access ports.
• Can perform a second clamp on a different diameter These ports can be connected with an external line to the threaded hole of the coolant/ air adaptor
• Gives accurate part length control since it positions bar (thread size 1⁄8w - 27 NPT). Your external outside coolant system must have a minimum of 15
stock using the machine’s NC control P.S.I. to actuated the Puller (15 P.S.I.= 107 lbs. clamping force).
• Will clamp hexagon bars without need for Desc. Shank Dia. (In.) Capacity (In.) OD (In.) L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
spindle orientation
• Offers three ranges of gripping fingers to match Mini Omni .625 3⁄16-11⁄8 2.25 4 MP-001 04259842 $427.84
machine’s spindle capacity; fingers are easily changed Omni 1.0 3⁄16-3 3.750 6 OP-1000 04259859 561.66
• Eliminates possibility of a crash. If last piece of bar
stock is too short and is pulled completely out of chuck Fingers & Finger Sets For Mfr’s #MP-001 & OP-1000
or collet, a spring-powered puller or collet system will The Mini Omni Puller MP-001 & OP-1000 include a four piece set of hardened steel fingers to 50
retain bar end and at beginning of next cycle will try to RC coolant/air adapter with 1w diameter mounting shank, operating instructions and parts list.
load bar end back into collet or chuck
For MP-001 For OP-1000
GRIPPEX BAR PULLER - Fingers Included. Desc. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Individual Hardened Steel 50 RC Finger 04259867 $22.50 04259941 $22.50
Typical spring-type puller about to Individual Soft Steel Finger (each) 04259875 19.21 04259958 19.21
Grippex with 1w Shank 00101527 $653.00 load bar end back into collet. If bar Individual Soft Aluminum Finger 04259883 19.21 04259966 19.21
Grippex with 11⁄4w Shank 00101543 653.00 end doesn’t line up, there is always Individual Soft Brass Finger (each) 04259891 19.21 04259974 19.21
Grippex with 11⁄2w Shank 00101568 653.00 a possibility of an expensive crash Hardened Steel 50 RC Fingers (4 pc. Set) 04259909 71.67 04259982 71.67
Soft Steel Fingers (4 Pc. Set) 04259917 62.77 04259990 62.77
Soft Aluminum Fingers (4 Pc. Set) 04259925 58.24 04260006 58.24
Soft Brass Fingers (4 Pc. Set) 04259933 58.24 04260014 58.24

Basics of...Vibration Pads, Mounts & Hangers

Deflection
The More the Better
Deflection is the change in an isolator’s
unloaded to loaded height. The deflection
determines how well the isolator works. More
deflection means less vibration transmission. A
soft, yielding support is better than a stiff one.
There are three classes of vibration isolators
based on deflection:
1. Pads act mostly as noise breaks. They
interrupt hard surface-to-surface contact and
reduce high frequency vibration.
2. Neoprene mounts and hangers deflect more
and are the first step in true vibration control.
3. Spring isolators have the greatest deflection
for maximum vibration reduction.
Location
Sensitive Structural Supports Require Greater Deflections
The location of your equipment in the building is the main deciding factor in selecting neoprene
mounts or springs. Neoprene mountings are satisfactory under equipment on a very stiff
support structure such as a ground supported concrete slab. On upper building levels where the
structure can be very susceptible to vibration, springs are necessary.
The key to proper isolator selection in upper levels is to make sure isolator deflection is much
greater than floor deflection.
If equipment is running below 1200 RPM, springs are recommended regardless of location. (The
importance of location is the same for isolating suspended equipment.)

Neoprene Used Near Neoprene Used on

Rigid Support Springs on Flexible Wide Span Rigid Narrow Span

Selection
To select the proper isolation for mechanical equipment you need to ask:
1. Is slowest equipment SPEED ABOVE 1200 RPM?
If NO, use spring mountings. If YES, see 2.
2. Is equipment LOCATED on a RIGID concrete building structure or a FLEXIBLE VIBRATION SENSITIVE structure?
If RIGID, use “double deflection” neoprene or springs. If FLEXIBLE, use springs only.
The key is to select isolators that are “softer” than the supporting building structure. Ideally isolator deflection should be more than three times greater than the deflection or “sag” of the support.

3. What is the equipment’s “corner weight” or weight at each mounting point?

The load rating of each spring or rubber mounting must be matched with the portion of the equipment’s weight at the corners or mounting points. Equipment
corner weights usually differ and require the use of mountings with different load capacities. Oversized mountings may be used, but can reduce vibration
control. Select mountings with load capacities equal to or slightly greater than the portion of the equipment weight they are to support.
Regardless of the above, your experience in isolating a particular piece of equipment is more important than all the theory. If you used a class of product where you got good results before, use it
again. In many cases, pads provide enough relief to satisfy a problem just because they are a cushion between a steel leg and a concrete floor. Pad performance can always be improved by
stacking them with 16 gage plates between layers.

1745
Page 56
KNURLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Knurls
A knurling die is used to create a pattern on a cylindrical blank (metal or hard plastic). These dies have V-shaped teeth that deform, displace or push the material rather
than cut it. The embossed patterns can be decorative, but more often act as hand grips and are commonly seen on handles, knobs or rollers. Diagonal, diamond and
straight are the three most common patterns generated by knurling dies.

Types of Knurls

Straight Tooth 30° Diagonal R.H. 30° Diagonal L.H. 30° Diamond Male 30° Diamond Female

• Straight tooth knurls will produce the straight knurl pattern

• 30° RH diagonal knurls will produce a LH diagonal knurl pattern or a male diamond pattern if used along with a LH diagonal knurl in a double knurl holder
• 30° LH diagonal knurls will produce a RH diagonal knurl pattern or a male diamond pattern if used along with a RH diagonal knurl in a double knurl holder
• 30° male diamond will produce a female diamond knurl pattern
• 30° female diamond will produce a male diamond knurl pattern. This is only recommended if a double knurl holder is unavailable. The knurled blank should be
close to the collet and large enough in diameter to prevent deflection
Traversing is not recommended when using diamond knurls (if a longer knurl pattern is required, left and right hand diagonal knurls should be used).
Determining Blank Diameter and the Number of Teeth that will be Rolled
For Circular pitch knurls: For Diametral pitch knurls:
Blank Dia. = (# Teeth [part] / # Teeth [die]) x (Knurl Dia. + C.F.*) Blank Dia. = # Teeth [part] / D.P. of Knurl
or or
# Teeth [part] = (Blank Dia. x # Teeth [die]) / (Knurl Dia. + C.F.*) # Teeth [part] = Blank Dia. x D.P. of Knurl
TPI *Approximate Value of C.F. (In.)
12-19 0.010 Diametral pitch knurls are designed to permit accurate tracking on
20-29 0.007 standard fractional sized blanks. This makes choosing a blank
30-39 0.005 diameter easier. Due to the Tracking Correction Factor (C.F.), choosing
40-49 0.003 a blank diameter for circular pitch knurls is a bit more difficult and
50-80 0.002 usually involves experimentation.
*This value is affected by feed rates,
blank hardness and diameters of knurl &
blank.
• C.F. = Tracking Correction Factor. This correction factor takes into account the fact that the tips of the knurl’s teeth will penetrate below the blank’s diameter by the
end of the 1st revolution.
Tips on Choosing the Shape of Knurls
Knurling dies with a full form convex radius on each edge produce the best finishes and increase tool life when axial feeding.

GOOD: Sharp corners on leading BETTER: Beveled edge spreads out load, but BEST: Convex full form relief gives a “spread out”
edge of tool sees heavy loading, now the leading edge is a blunt surface loading on a sharp leading edge resulting in a
wear rapidly and can break off in requiring higher forces on tool and holder to smoother precision finish, longer tool life and lower
extreme conditions. deform material. forces on the holder and spindle bearings.

Basic Tips
• Make sure the knurl’s axis is parallel to the blank’s axis • Increase the feed rate in the 1st revolution. Forming a deeper, wider
• Use lots of lubricant impression the 1st time around helps to assure that the teeth will track Page
• Never over roll. Try to limit the pattern to only about 90% full Page 57 into the initial grooves for all subsequent revolutions 1762

Consumer Soldering Station F-Style Welding Maintenance Clamps

The WLC100 is a low cost consumer soldering station • All steel industrial clamps
that features 40 watts of continuous power. • Rail, fixed jaws and pressure plate heat-formed in one piece from cold drawn profiled steel
• Heat treated high carbon Acme screw is spatter resistant; no need for copper coated screws
• On-off switch with “power-on” indicator light • Ergonomic Tommy bar for comfort and safety
• Quality lightweight pencil iron
• Cushioned foam grip with replaceable Clamping Cap. Throat Rail
heating element Mfr’s # Press. (Lbs.) (In.) Depth (In.) L (In.) Order # Price Ea.
• Synthetic guard iron holder SQ-4 1330 6 4.75 6 BU06997118 $36.18
• Natural sponge tip cleaning pad SQ-8 2660 8 5.50 8 BU06997225 65.38
• Includes ST3 iron plated copper tip SQ-12 2660 12 5.50 12 BU06997241 90.47
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
SQ-20 2660 20 5.50 20 BU06997266 113.25
WLC100 BU97985428 $71.99

1762
 FLAT STOCK & DRILL ROD TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Flat Stock & Drill Rod

The data presented herein are typical values, and do not warrant suitability for any application or use of these materials. Normal variations in the chemical composition, the size of the product,
and heat treatment parameters may result in different values for the various physical and mechanical properties.
Type Hardening Method Machinability Decarb Free Spheroidized Abrasion Resistant Wear Resistant Work Type Uses
O-1 Oil High X X Cold A general purpose oil hardening tool steel suitable for back up and punch holder plates. Features of this grade include a
good combination of high surface hardness and toughness after hardening and tempering
D-2 Air Low X X X X Cold Suitable for medium run tooling for applications where abrasive wear is dominant and the risk of chipping or cracking is not
so high, e.g. for blanking and forming of thinner, harder work materials
A-2 Air Medium X X X X Cold Suitable for medium run tooling. This grade features good machinability, high stability after hardening and good
wear resistance.
M2 Air, Oil or Salt Medium X X X X Cold Dies; Shear Blades; Cutting Tools; Drill Bits; Broaches; Taps; End Mills
S-7 Air or Oil High X X X Hot and Cold A versatile S7 grade recommended for applications demanding a high degree of toughness and moderate wear resistance.
Successfully used for heavy-duty punching and shearing tools
4142 Pre-Hardened Medium X Tooling; Dies; Arbors; Axles; Spindles
410SS Oil Medium X X Hot This grade can be heat treated to range of hardness and toughness levels for use in a variety of applications
440C Oil Medium X X X X Hot Specialty, industrial and surgical knives, scissors, for corrosion and wear resistance applications or edge retention
W-1 Water High X X X Cold Chisels; Punches; Tooling; Knives; Shears; Razors
Chemical Composition
Type Carbon (C) Magnesium (Mn) Silicon (Si) Chromium (Cr) Molybdenum (Mo) Cobalt (Co) Tungsten (W) Vanadium (V) Phosphorus (P) Sulfur (S)
O-1 0.85 - 1.00 1.00 - 1.40 0.50 Max 0.40 - 0.60 0.40 - 0.60 0.30 Max 0.020 Max 0.020 Max
D-2 1.40 - 1.60 0.60 Max 11.00 - 13.00 0.70 - 1.20 100 Max 1.10 Max 0.025 Max 0.025 Max
A-2 0.95 - 1.25 1.00 Max 4.75 - 5.50 0.90 - 1.40 0.15 - 0.50 0.025 Max 0.025 Max
M2 0.85 0.30 0.30 4.00 5.00 6.00 2.00
S-7 0.45 - 0.55 0.20 - 0.80 0.20 - 1.00 3.0 - 3.5 1.30 - 1.80 0.20 - 0.30 0.030 Max 0.030 Max
4142 0.40 1.00 0.25 1.00 0.20 0.035 0.030
410SS 0.13 0.50 0.40 12.00
440C 1.05 0.40 0.40 17.00 0.40
W-1 0.95 - 1.05 0.30 - 0.40 0.10 - 0.25 0.025 Max 0.025 Max
Tempering Data
O-1 D-2 A-2 M2 S-7 4142 410SS 440C W-1
Rockwell C Rockwell C Rockwell C Rockwell C Hardness Rockwell C Rockwell C Rockwell C Rockwell C Rockwell C
Temp (°F) Hardness Hardness Hardness Oil Quenched Air Quenched Hardness Hardness Hardness Hardness Hardness
200 59 61
300 63-65 62-65 65 65 42 64-65
400 61-64 60-60 59-62 64 63 56-58 57 57 62-64
500 60-63 59-62 58-61 63 62.5 54-56 42 58-59
600 57-60 58-60 57-60 62.5 62.5 53-55 50 55 54-56
700 57-59 63 62.5 52-54 39 50-51
800 48-51 57-59 56-59 63.5 63.5 52-54 43 56 46-47
900 58-60 55-58 65 64 51-53 39
950 66 65
1000 44-48 56-59 66 65.5 50-52 34 51
1050 66 63.5
1100 64.5 61.5 46-48 23 41
1150 62 60
1200 53.5 53 40-42 27
1300 43 39.5 33-35 16
1400 33.5 34
Heat Treatment
O-1 Sections smaller than 1⁄4w heat to 1450-1475°F and hold until heated through. For larger sections, preheat to 1200°F, then raise to 1450-1500°F hardening temperature, hold one
half hour per inch of cross section. Quench in oil at 125-150°F and temper immediately.
D-2 Preheat thoroughly to 1450-1500°F, then raise temperature to 1800-1850°F and hold until uniformly heated through. Soak at temperature 45-60 minutes per inch of thickness.
To minimize surface decarburization use salt bath, controlled atmosphere furnace or pack harden. Use high side of hardness for thicker sections.
A-2 Preheat thoroughly at 1450°F, then raise to hardening temperature 1725-1800°F and soak uniformly. For larger sections, use high side; for thin or smaller sections, use low side.
Quench in still air or dry air blast at 125-175°, then temper immediately.
M2 Warm slightly before charging into furnace, which should be operating at 1350-1500°F. After thorough preheating, transfer to hardening furnace at 2175-2225°F, depending on
the tool size and degree of hardening required for application. Cool in air, oil or a molten salt bath operating at 1000-1100°F. In case of oil quenching, it is usually good practice
to interrupt the quench by removing the tool after it has reached about 1000°F, and allow the cooling to continue in still air. Tools should be allowed to cool to 150°F, or when
they can be held by the bare hand and then tempered immediately. The tempering temperature may be varied according to the desired hardness, but it is usually in the range of
1000-1100°F. Double tempering is always recommended.
S-7 Preheat thoroughly at 1200-1300°F and raise to hardening temperature of 1725°F. Hold for one hour and quench in still air. Upon reaching 150°F steel should be tempered
without delay.
4142 Preheat at a rate not exceeding 400°F per hour to 1250°F and equalize, then raise to hardening temperature 1500-1600°F. Soak for 30 minutes per inch of thickness.
410SS To minimize distortion in complex tools use a double preheat. Heat at a rate not exceeding 400°F per hour to 1000-1050°F, equalize, then raise to 1400-1450°F and equalize. For
normal tools, use only the second temperature range as a single preheating treatment. Raise temperature on the furnace or salt to 1700-1850°F. Use high side of range for
maximum corrosion resistance and strength. Use low side of the range when tempering above 1050°F for increased ductility and impact resistance. Soak at temperature for a
minimum of 60 minutes for sections up to 1w thickness. Add an additional 60 minutes of soak time for each additional inch of thickness.
440C To minimize distortion in complex tools use a double preheat. Heat at a rate not exceeding 400°F per hour to 1000-1050°F, equalize, then raise to 1400-1450°F and equalize. For
normal tools, use only the second temperature range as a single preheating treatment. Rapidly raise temperature to 1850-1950°F and soak for 30 minutes per inch of thickness,
30 minutes minimum.
W-1 Heat thoroughly at 1425-1500°F. Hold one half hour per inch of section, quench in water (brine). Sizes below 9⁄32w round may be quenched in oil.

1815
Page 58
 KEY STOCK & ALUMINUM ALLOYS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Key & Mill Stock
12w Lengths - Available in Square or Rectangle Low Carbon Steel Key Stock
Mill Stock (Undersized Key Stock) • Provides driving torque between shafts and pulleys, gears, sprockets, etc. Additional uses
• Used in many key stock applications include new machinery, general maintenance and shop repairs
• For closer or undersized dimension tolerances • A necessity in all applications where rotating power devices are used
• Sizes larger than 1⁄8w are made from 12L14 low carbon steel • Sizes are clearly marked on each piece • Material is high quality, cold drawn, low carbon steel
• Size 1⁄8w made from 1018 low carbon steel • Most tolerances on dimensions are oversized to assure tight fits in keyways for positive, zero
• Meets ASTM A-108 backlash power transmission
• Rockwell Hardness: RB 80-90 • Meets ASTM A-108 • Rockwell Hardness: B80/100
Stainless Steel Key Stock High Carbon Steel Key Stock-Metric Sizes
• Excellent alternative to steel key • Conforms to metric keyway specification Tolerances:
stock when corrosion resistance • Material is high quality, cold drawn steel, C1020 to C1045 Type Size Tolerance
is a concern • Gold dichromate plating on most sizes makes product identification easy
• Made from 303/304 stainless steel • Sizes are clearly stamped on each piece Mill Stock
• Rockwell Hardness: RB 80-95 • All sizes meet ISO R773, and BS 423504964664 1018 Carbon Steel 1⁄8w +0.002/-0.0
Low Carbon Steel Zinc-Plated Square Key Stock Square 3⁄16-1w +0.0/-0.002
Low Carbon Steel Plain Mill Stock
Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Key Stock
(In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. 1018 Carbon Steel 1⁄8-3⁄4w +0.004/-0.0
1⁄8 1⁄8 A04965026 $0.69 1⁄2 1⁄2 A04965083 $6.41 3⁄32 3⁄32 A84780022 $5.25 1⁄2 1⁄2 A04472403 $5.35 Rectangular
3⁄16 3⁄16 A04965034 1.35 5⁄8 5⁄8 A04965091 9.47 1⁄8 1⁄8 A36970754 1.53 5⁄8 5⁄8 A04472460 8.53 1018 Carbon Steel Up to 3⁄4w +0.003/-0.0
1⁄4 1⁄4 A04965042 1.96 3⁄4 3⁄4 A04965109 13.77 3⁄16 3⁄16 A36971075 1.63 3⁄4 3⁄4 A74122128 11.13 Square 7⁄8-1w +0.004/-0.0
5⁄16 5⁄16 A04965059 2.98 7⁄8 7⁄8 A04965117 23.26 1⁄4 1⁄4 A03691102 2.01 7⁄8 7⁄8 A04964649 14.85 Stainless Steel 1⁄8-3⁄16w ±0.003
3⁄8 3⁄8 A04965067 4.29 1 1 A04965125 24.32 5⁄16 5⁄16 A36971091 2.67 1 1 A04964656 18.10 Square 1⁄4w +0.0/-0.002
7⁄16 7⁄16 A04965075 7.27 3⁄8 3⁄8 A37024874 3.27 5⁄16-7⁄16w +0.0w-0.003
7⁄16 7⁄16 A36971208 4.22 1⁄2-1w +0.0/-0.004
Low Carbon Steel Zinc-Plated Rectangular Key Stock
Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W
(In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea.
3⁄16 1⁄8 A04964672 $2.06 5⁄16 1⁄4 A88434915 $3.85 3⁄8 5⁄16 A04964763 $5.09 1⁄2 3⁄8 A83684126 $7.19 3⁄4 3⁄8 A04964805 $10.21 1 3⁄4 A04964847 $28.09
1⁄4 1⁄8 A04964680 2.49 3⁄8 1⁄8 A04964698 3.17 1⁄2 3⁄16 A04964730 4.72 5⁄8 5⁄16 A04964789 7.29 3⁄4 5⁄8 A04964821 16.32
1⁄4 3⁄16 A04964706 3.17 3⁄8 3⁄16 A04964722 3.85 1⁄2 1⁄4 A04964755 5.17 5⁄8 3⁄8 A04964797 9.21 3⁄4 1⁄2 A81406381 11.91
5⁄16 3⁄16 A04964714 3.39 3⁄8 1⁄4 A04964748 4.25 1⁄2 5⁄16 A04964771 6.20 5⁄8 1⁄2 A04964813 10.69 1 5⁄8 A04964839 26.94
Stainless Steel Plain Square Key Stock High Carbon Steel Gold Dichromate Plated Square Key Stock Assortments
Ht. W Ht. W Order #04965133 Order #04964664
(In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. • Mill Stock - made from 12L14 low • Square Stock - made from 1018 low carbon
1⁄8 1⁄8 A09556416 $3.80 2 2 1
A04964573 $7.21 carbon steel steel, zinc plated
3⁄16 3⁄16 A09556424 4.72 3 3 A05865829 5.15 • Includes: 6 ea. of sizes 3⁄16w, 1⁄4w, • Includes: 6 ea. of sizes 3⁄16w, 1⁄4w, 5⁄16w, 3⁄8w; 4
5⁄16w, 3⁄8w; 4 ea. of sizes 7⁄16w and 1⁄2w ea. of sizes 7⁄16w and 1⁄2w
1⁄4 1⁄4 A09556432 6.76 4 4 A04964581 2.93
5⁄16 5⁄16 A09556457 9.90 5 5 A04964599 3.09
Order #04964854 Low Carbon Steel Assortments
3⁄8 3⁄8 A09556473 15.39 6 6 A04964607 3.43 • Rectangular Stock - made from 12L14 No. of
A70372586 Plain Zinc-Plated
7⁄16 7⁄16 A04965141 21.47 7 7 8.57 low carbon steel, zinc plated Pcs. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 1⁄2 A09556481 28.19 8 8 A04964615 4.98 • Includes: 2 ea. of sizes 1⁄4w x 3⁄8w, 1⁄4w x
5⁄8 5⁄8 A04965158 45.26 10 10 A04964623 7.21 1⁄2w, 5⁄16w x 3⁄8w, 5⁄16w x 1⁄2w, ½ x 5⁄8”, 1⁄2w x 16 A04964854 $106.50
12 12 A04964631 10.97 3⁄4w and 5⁄8w x 3⁄4w 32 A04965133 $118.16 A04964664 95.36
1
Plain Finish

Basics of...Aluminum Alloys

Alloys Aluminum alloys are developed by combining pure aluminum with other
Alloy Type Desc. metals such as iron, copper, magnesium, silicon, manganese and zinc.
This mix creates alloys which are stronger than pure aluminum while
2024 Excellent for making fasteners, fittings, wheels and parts. This high strength alloy is heat
treatable, and has fair formability and workability. May be spot welded. remaining lightweight and malleable. Aluminum alloys are electrically
3003 A general purpose alloy with moderate strength and good workability. This non heat and thermally conductive as well as corrosion resistant.
treatable alloy is easy to weld and has a high degree of corrosion resistance. Properties
5052 Excellent salt water corrosion resistance and higher strength than alloy 3003. This non
heat treatable alloy has excellent finishing characteristics. Excellent weldability and UltimateTensile Ultimate Shearing Brinell Hardness Melting
workability. Good for chemical and marine applications. Alloy Type Strength (ksi) Strength (ksi) 200 kg load/10mm ball Range °F
6061 Extremely versatile alloy. Has good formability and high corrosion resistance. This heat 2024 26 18 47 935 - 1180
treatable alloy is excellent for making parts, fittings, chemical equipment, marine 3003 16 11 28 1190 - 1210
equipment and scaffolding. 5052 28 18 47 1125 - 1205
6063 This heat treatable alloy has superior corrosion resistance and is good for outdoor 6061 18 12 30 1080 - 1205
applications such as awning supports, architectural trim and window frames. 6063 13 10 25 1140 - 1210 Page
Page 59 1841

Alloy 2024 Aluminum Sheets

Thick. (In.) W (In.) L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Thick. (In.) W (In.) L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Thick. (In.) W (In.) L (In.) Order # Price Ea.
0.032 12 12 09425570 $17.51 0.050 24 48 09425729 $148.42 0.090 24 24 09425893 $125.34
0.032 12 24 09425588 35.29 0.063 12 12 09425752 30.99 0.090 24 48 09425901 251.68
0.032 24 24 09425596 62.22 0.063 12 24 09425760 50.96 0.125 12 12 09425935 51.98
0.032 24 48 09425604 99.64 0.063 24 24 09425778 89.14 0.125 12 24 09425943 86.25
0.040 12 12 09425638 21.30 0.063 24 48 09425786 176.05 0.125 24 24 09425950 174.64
0.040 12 24 09425646 42.75 0.080 12 12 09425810 39.37 0.125 24 48 09425968 344.84
0.040 24 24 09425653 74.77 0.080 12 24 09425828 68.10 0.190 12 12 09425992 92.13
0.040 24 48 09425661 119.09 0.080 24 24 09425836 122.19 0.190 12 24 09426008 148.15
0.050 12 12 09425695 26.27 0.080 24 48 09425844 247.45 0.190 24 24 09426016 296.80
0.050 12 24 09425703 52.50 0.090 12 12 09425877 45.32 0.190 24 48 09426024 590.69
0.050 24 24 09425711 82.52 0.090 12 24 09425885 69.97

1841
 BRASS & METALS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Brass, Bronze, Copper, Nickel & Iron

Brass and Bronze - Many forms available. Copper alloys developed to exhibit some Cast Iron - Also known as “gray iron”. Has moderate strength and good
of the characteristics of copper, with added strength, machinability and formability. machinability. Responds well to fast heat treating. Commonly used for valve bodies,
Copper - Exhibits a unique combination of properties, including high electrical and bushings and a variety of moderate strength parts and fittings.
thermal conductivity and good resistance to corrosion. Ductile Iron - Stronger and more pliable than cast iron. Strength is similar to steel.
Nickel - Good corrosion resistance, easy to weld. Excellent for marine and Excellent hardenability makes ductile iron a good choice for gears, bearings, cams
chemical processing applications. and other high strength parts.
Alloy Type Description Alloy Type Description
Brass Copper
260 Basic copper zinc alloy that combines good fabrication and electrical 102 High purity, high conductivity with virtually no oxygen content. Malleable
characteristics and easy to weld.
353 The addition of lead to this alloy makes it easier to machine, saw and mill 110 High conductivity, good corrosion resistance and excellent ductility. More
360 A commonly used brass that is excellent for machining than 99.3% pure copper. For a variety of general purpose applications.
464 Excellent corrosion resistance and strength. Commonly used in contact 122 Excellent for heating systems, oil burners and liquid transfer applications
springs, fuse clips, terminals and connectors. 172 Non-sparking and the highest strength copper alloy. Frequently used in
Bronze aircraft bearings, drilling equipment, springs and terminals.
220 Excellent machinability, strength and hardness. Also known as 182 High conductivity and excellent strength are combined in this chromium
“commercial” bronze copper alloy. Primary uses are resistance welding, electrodes, welding tips
316 Commonly used for cable clamps and many screw machine products and holders.
510 Spring tempered to resist fatigue. Used for springs, hardware and 1751 Highest electrical and thermal conductivity of all copper alloys.
thrust bearings. Nickel (Monel)
655 Often used in marine environments because of its good corrosion resistance 400 Composition is 65% nickel, 32% copper and 3% iron. Also known as Monel.
from salts, acids and alkalais. Resists hydrofluoric and hydrochloric acids.
660 Excellent impact and wear resistance. Excellent for bearings and bushings. Cast Iron
954 A popular aluminum bronze that has excellent strength and hardness. Good Dense grain, consistent density and hardness, heat treatable and wear
for use in pressure bearing surfaces. resistant, similar to ASTM A48, Class 83 iron, tensile strength is 40,000 psi,
SAE 841 Oil impregnated alloy that can be machined for close tolerances, used for oversized to permit finishing.
self lubricating bearings and bushings
Ductile Iron
Fine grain, high strength, homogenous structure, tensile strength is 65,000
psi, oversized to permit finishing

Page 1845
Page 60

Alloy 260 Brass Convenience Packs

Milled to tight tolerances
Excellent machine capability
Easy to bend • Very workable
12w Long Strips 12w Long Round Tubes/Wall Thick.: 0.014w
Thick. (In.) W (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. OD (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
0.016 1⁄4 20 78800794 $17.90 1⁄16 15 79790143 $14.89
0.016 1⁄2 15 78800802 14.89 Rods Square Tubes Sheets and Strips Round Tubes
3⁄32 15 79790176 17.90
0.016 3⁄4 10 78800828 11.92 1⁄8 15 79790291 19.37
0.016 1 10 78800810 15.40 5⁄32 12 79790358 16.68
12w Long Square Tubes/Wall Thick.: 0.014w
0.016 2 5 78800836 13.23 3⁄16 12 79790374 18.47
0.025 1⁄4 15 78800844 16.38 W (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. 7⁄32 10 79790382 16.87
0.025 1⁄2 10 78800851 12.07 1⁄16 10 78203866 $17.90 1⁄4 8 79790424 15.11
0.025 3⁄4 6 78800877 10.28 3⁄32 10 78203874 19.85 12w Long Solid Rods 9⁄32 8 79790473 17.46
1⁄8 12 78203882 25.02 Dia. (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
0.025 1 6 78800869 12.83 5⁄32
5⁄16 6 79790531 14.89
0.025 2 3 78800885 12.26 10 78203890 23.84 0.020 25 78203932 $9.92 11⁄32 6 79800025 16.68
0.032 1⁄4 15 78800893 17.90 3⁄16 6 78203908 16.68 1⁄32 25 78203940 9.92 3⁄8 6 79800033 17.90
0.032 1⁄2 10 78800901 14.29 7⁄32 6 78203916 17.90 3⁄64 20 78203957 9.92 13⁄32 4 79800108 12.74
1⁄4 6 78203924 20.24 1⁄16 15 78203965 10.40
0.032 3⁄4 6 78800927 12.56 7⁄16 4 79800116 13.49
0.032 1 5 78800919 13.23 0.072 15 78800687 13.37 15⁄32 4 79800132 14.71
0.032 2 3 78800935 15.92 12w Rectangular Tubes/Wall Thick.: 0.014w 0.081 15 78800679 17.90 1⁄2 4 79800140 15.87
0.064 1⁄4 8 78800943 13.49 W (In.) Ht. (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. 3⁄32 16 78203973 15.87 17⁄32 3 79800934 12.82
0.064 1⁄2 4 78800950 11.02 3⁄16 3⁄32 4 78803699 $15.87 0.114 10 78800661 14.89 9⁄16 3 79807061 13.70
0.064 3⁄4 3 78800968 11.93 1⁄4 1⁄8 4 78803707 17.05 1⁄8 10 78203981 13.91 19⁄32 2 79814190 9.71
0.064 1 2 78800976 10.83 5⁄16 5⁄32 4 78803715 17.90 5⁄32 8 78203999 15.11 5⁄8 2 79861092 10.30
0.064 2 3 54055306 29.87 3⁄8 3⁄16 4 78803723 18.65 3⁄16 5 78800653 11.57 21⁄32 2 79870499 11.11

Alloy 353 Engravers Brass Sheets

Thick. W L Thick. W L Thick. W L Thick. W L • This Leaded Brass (1.8%) is a
(In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. hard strong brass with
excellent machinability
0.0625 12 12 32005894 $64.47 0.1250 12 24 32005985 $189.13 0.2500 12 24 32006108 $363.47 0.5000 12 24 32006223 $660.67 • Applications include the
0.0625 12 24 32005902 103.99 0.1250 12 48 32005993 349.20 0.2500 12 48 32006116 673.59 0.5000 12 48 32006231 1290.77 fabricating of butts and
0.0625 12 48 32005910 185.24 0.1500 12 12 32006017 132.30 0.3120 12 12 32006132 279.12 0.7500 12 12 32006256 510.81 hinges, gears, wheels, key
0.0625 24 48 32005928 337.68 0.1500 12 24 32006025 233.28 0.3120 12 24 32006140 517.60 0.7500 12 24 32006264 946.83 blanks, plaques and general
0.0900 12 12 32005936 85.50 0.1500 12 48 32006033 420.63 0.3120 12 48 32006157 939.28 0.7500 12 48 32006272 1874.15 engravings
0.0900 12 24 32005944 148.79 0.1870 12 12 32006058 162.94 0.3750 12 12 32006173 285.78 1.0000 12 12 32006298 681.11
0.0900 12 48 32005951 278.79 0.1870 12 24 32006066 306.85 0.3750 12 24 32006181 510.07 1.0000 12 24 32006306 1242.68
0.0900 24 48 32005969 533.28 0.1870 12 48 32006074 583.81 0.3750 12 48 32006199 1027.17 1.0000 12 48 32006314 2594.89
0.1250 12 12 32005977 108.93 0.2500 12 12 32006090 199.41 0.5000 12 12 32006215 346.03

1845
 STAINLESS STEEL

Basics of...Stainless Steel

Chromium is the key ingredient in the iron-alloy class known as Stainless Steel. The addition of more than 12% chromium, by weight, results in the formation of a non-
corrosive oxide or “passive film,” which serves as the protective barrier between the steel and the damage it can sustain from its environment. The passive film is what
keeps the metal shiny, and can also re-form in the presence of oxygen if the metal is scratched or damaged. Because Stainless Steel is a family of alloys rather than a
single metal, the inclusion of different elements yields varying properties: nickel is added for better corrosion resistance, ductility and weldability; molybdenum is added
for resistance to pitting, carbon for higher strength and hardness, aluminum and silicon to improve oxidation resistance.
Basic Stainless Steel Groups Drawing
Type Description Stamping Welding
Austenitic (non heat treatable) – The grades of stainless steel are grouped by Austenitic (non heat treatable)
metallurgical type. The Austenitic grades, also known as the “300 series” are 303 Free machining version of type 304 stainless steel because of the Fair 1
Very
iron-nickel-chromium composites, non-magnetic in the annealed state addition of sulfur. Excellent for making heavier cuts in automatic Good
(condition A) and non-heat treatable (they can be hardened by cold-working machining operations.
only). They are usually considered the most weldable of their category, and 304/304L Most widely used stainless steel alloy. Low carbon content for Very Very
increased weldability. 18-8 (18% chromium, 8% nickel) Good Good
retain their austenitic atomic structure at all temperatures. composition makes this alloy corrosion resistant and easy to form.
Martensitic (heat treatable) – The Martensitic grades are fully heat-treatable 316/316L This alloy has a higher nickel and molybdenum content to give it Good Very
and magnetic, though not particularly corrosion-resistant, and they are increased corrosion resistance and resistance to pitting. Excellent Good
extremely strong and highly machinable, containing significant amounts of for chemical processing applications.
carbon and chromium. Martensitic stainless steels are commonly used in 321 Titanium stabilized, corrosion & oxidation resistant, used for Good Very
primary parts fabrication Good
bearings, cutlery and mildly corrosive chemical applications. 347 Columbium/tantalum stabilized, corrosion & oxidation resistant. Good Very
Used in aircraft, automotive and chemical processing equipment. Good
Martensitic (heat treatable)
410 General purpose alloy with mild corrosion resistance. Heat treating Fair Fair
this alloy creates an extremely hard surface
2
416 Similar to type 410 with greater machinability Fair Poor
440C Excellent abrasion and wear resistance, good in bearing and Poor Poor
bushing applications. Corrosion resistant only if heat treated.
17-4 Low temperature hardening, minimum scaling or distortion, readily Very Very
weldable, corrosion resistant Good Good Page
1
Fusion welding not recommended. 2Welding not recommended.
Page 61 1855

303 Stainless Steel Discs

1⁄2w Thick 3⁄4w Thick 1w Thick 11⁄2w Thick 2w Thick 3w Thick
Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
3 75275222 $16.52 75275230 $19.61 75275248 $25.82 75275255 $35.10 75275263 $44.40 75275271 $67.12
31⁄2 75275289 20.64 75275297 26.85 75275305 35.10 75275313 46.46 75275321 61.95 75275339 90.87
4 75275347 30.99 75275354 41.30 75275362 51.64 75275370 72.29 75275388 92.94 75275396 134.25
5 75275404 45.42 75275412 60.92 75275420 77.45 75275438 108.43 75275446 134.25 75275453 196.20 • A higher sulfur content makes this material
6 75275461 67.12 75275479 87.77 75275487 103.25 75275495 149.73 75275503 185.88 75275511 268.48 easier to machine than type 304
8 75275529 103.25 75275537 134.25 75275545 170.39 75275552 237.49 75275560 299.45 75275578 433.68 • Condition A

303 Stainless Steel Rods - Ground & Polished

• Tolerance: ± .0005w 72w Length 72w Length Similar to Type 304 with an increased amount of sulfur and
12w Length 36w Length Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. phosphorus that makes this material easier to machine.
Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. 1⁄8 32004244 $16.68 5⁄8 32004301 $81.52
3⁄16 32004251 20.07 3⁄4 32004319 103.60
1 62319694 $40.21 62319702 $93.27 1⁄4
11⁄8 62319710 47.78 62319728 110.83 32004269 25.79 7⁄8 32004327 142.05
11⁄4 62319736 54.04 62319744 125.34 5⁄16 32004277 31.21 1 32004335 160.81
13⁄8 62319751 62.41 62319769 144.78 3⁄8 32004285 38.61 11⁄4 32004343 216.12
11⁄2 62319777 68.42 62319785 158.72 1⁄2 32004293 56.27 11⁄2 32004350 273.66

303 Stainless Steel Hex Bars

Hex 12w 36w 72w Hex 12w 36w 72w
Size (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Size (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
3⁄16 75285445 $17.41 15⁄16 75285627 $32.54 75285635 $83.30 75285643 $152.15
1⁄4 75285452 18.93 1 75285650 35.56 75285668 94.63 75285676 166.54
5⁄16 75285460 28.75 11⁄16 75285684 39.36 75285692 105.98 75285700 187.74
3⁄8 75285478 34.07 11⁄8 75285718 42.40 75285726 117.33 75285734 210.44 • Condition A
7⁄16
• Chemical composition per ASTM-A-582
75285486 46.94 11⁄4 75285742 52.99 75285759 146.85 75285767 261.17
1⁄2 75285494 51.48 15⁄16 75285775 58.30 75285783 158.97 75285791 283.86
9⁄16 75285502 62.84 13⁄8 75285809 62.84 75285817 174.10 75285825 314.15 Dimensional Tolerances:
5⁄8 75285510 $40.13 75285528 71.16 11⁄2 75285833 74.18 75285841 208.17 75285858 374.70 Hex Size Tolerance
11⁄16 75285536 49.21 75285544 87.04 15⁄8 75285866 87.04 75285874 246.02 75285882 442.83 3⁄16w, 1⁄4w +0/-.002w
3⁄4 75285551 56.01 75285569 96.89 13⁄4 75285890 93.86 75285908 266.46 75285916 479.93 5⁄16w - 7⁄16w +0/-.003w
13⁄16 75285577 65.10 75285585 114.31 2 75285924 138.53 75285932 393.63 75285940 712.31 1⁄2w - 1w +0/-.004w
7⁄8 75285593 $28.00 75285601 74.94 75285619 132.46 11⁄16w - 2w +0/-.006w

1855
CERAMICS & POLYURETHANE TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Grade L/LE Linen Laminate
Rods - 48w Lengths
Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea.
0.250 63413843 $10.64 0.500 63413884 $23.82 0.875 63413926 $59.90 1.375 63413967 $131.97 3.000 63414007 $584.39
0.312 63413850 12.44 0.562 63413892 26.50 1.000 63413934 78.63 1.500 63413975 148.71 3.500 63414015 745.71
0.375 63413868 15.12 0.625 63413900 33.40 1.125 63413942 90.00 2.000 63413983 280.52 4.000 63414023 1034.60
0.437 63413876 19.16 0.750 63413918 43.89 1.250 63413959 109.21 2.500 63413991 423.99
Tubes - 30-48w Random Lengths
Wall Approx. Wall Approx. Wall Approx. Wall Approx. Grade LE Cotton Fabric Reinforced
Thickness Wt. Thickness Wt. Thickness Wt. Thickness Wt. Phenolic-natural (light tan to brown).
(In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. This grade is composed of a continuous
0.187w ID 0.312w ID 0.500w ID 0.750w ID cotton woven cloth impregnated with a
0.031 0.03 63414031 $28.84 0.031 0.05 63414155 $30.08 0.031 0.09 63414270 $30.36 0.031 0.13 63414395 $36.92 phenolic resin binder. Grade LE contains
0.062 0.07 63414049 29.69 0.062 0.12 63414163 34.21 0.062 0.22 63414288 23.62 0.062 0.34 63414403 31.24 a fine weave linen and, like the canvas
0.093 0.10 63414056 33.86 0.093 0.18 63414171 40.55 0.093 0.34 63414296 28.28 0.093 0.50 63414411 37.40 phenolic, is known for its mechanical
0.125 0.13 63414064 39.47 0.125 0.24 63414189 47.60 0.125 0.45 63414304 33.54 0.125 0.68 63414429 43.51 properties. The finer weave allows for
0.187 0.20 63414072 49.65 0.187 0.36 63414197 56.04 0.187 0.68 63414312 44.95 0.187 1.01 63414437 57.87 machining more intricate details than
0.250 0.26 63414080 62.48 0.250 0.48 63414205 65.88 0.250 0.90 63414320 58.08 0.250 1.35 63414445 73.30 CE, like gear teeth. This grade is not
recommended for primary insulation.
0.250w ID 0.375w ID 0.625w ID 1.000w ID
0.031 0.04 63414098 29.69 0.031 0.07 63414213 31.83 0.031 0.11 63414338 33.04 0.031 0.18 63414452 42.76
0.062 0.09 63414106 31.38 0.062 0.14 63414221 35.94 0.062 0.28 63414346 31.86 0.062 0.45 63414460 38.02
0.093 0.14 63414114 36.39 0.093 0.21 63414239 43.03 0.093 0.42 63414353 24.81 0.093 0.67 63414478 44.73
0.125 0.19 63414122 42.45 0.125 0.29 63414247 50.84 0.125 0.56 63414361 35.53 0.125 0.90 63414486 52.27
0.187 0.29 63414130 44.73 0.187 0.43 63414254 60.10 0.187 0.84 63414379 47.54 0.187 1.35 63414494 67.05
0.250 0.38 63414148 46.95 0.250 0.57 63414262 71.03 0.250 1.13 63414387 62.01 0.250 1.81 63414502 88.06
Sheets (+0/.500w Tolerance)
12 x 12w 12 x 24w 24 x 24w 24 x 36w 36 x 48w
Thickness (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
0.031 63413199 $5.31 63413322 $9.23 63413454 $18.70 63413587 $21.32 63413710 $37.77
0.062 63413207 5.52 63413330 10.56 63413462 20.65 63413595 28.64 63413728 59.82
0.125 63413215 10.23 63413348 20.00 63413470 40.27 63413603 55.76 63413736 120.61
0.187 63413223 15.26 63413355 29.85 63413488 60.21 63413611 83.37 63413744 180.42
0.250 63413231 20.29 63413363 39.82 63413496 80.42 63413629 111.36 63413751 241.21
0.312 63413249 25.35 63413371 49.67 63413504 100.37 63413637 138.98 63413769 301.02
0.375 63413256 30.46 63413389 59.71 63413512 120.63 63413645 167.04 63413777 361.81
0.500 63413264 40.60 63413397 79.62 63413520 160.84 63413652 222.71 63413785 482.42
0.625 63413272 50.77 63413405 99.52 63413538 201.05 63413660 278.42 63413793 603.04
0.750 63413280 60.90 63413413 119.45 63413546 241.26 63413678 334.11 63413801 723.63
1.000 63413298 81.21 63413421 159.27 63413553 321.69 63413686 445.46 63413819 964.83
1.250 63413306 101.51 63413439 199.06 63413561 402.11 63413694 556.80 63413827 1206.04
1.500 63413314 121.83 63413447 238.88 63413579 482.52 63413702 668.16 63413835 1447.25

Ultra-High Temperature Machinable Glass Ceramics

Bars • Max. continuous temp.: 80°F • Density: .091 lbs./Cu. In. • Compressive strength: 50,000 psi
• Max. intermittent temp.: 1000°F • Color: White • Flexural strength: 13,600 psi
Ht. (In.) W (In.) L (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Rods • Dielectric strength: 1,000 v/mil
1⁄4 1⁄4 3 0.10 31959901 $23.42 1 1
1⁄4 1⁄4
Dia. L Dia. L
6 0.10 31959919 43.63 (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄4 1⁄4 12 0.10 31959927 78.09
3⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄8 3 31959547 $23.81 5⁄8 3 31959729 $54.59 Sheets
3 0.10 31959935 32.07
1⁄8 6 31959554 45.68 5⁄8 6 31959737 103.78 Thick. W L Thick. W L
3⁄8 3⁄8 6 0.10 31959943 60.22 1⁄8 12 31959562 79.26 5⁄8 12 31959745 181.13 (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea.
3⁄8 3⁄8 12 0.10 31959950 106.92 3⁄16 3 31959570 24.48 3⁄4 3 31959752 82.99
1⁄2 1⁄2 1⁄16 3 3 31960115 $74.17 3⁄8 3 3 31960263 $128.06
3 0.10 31959968 47.88
1⁄2 1⁄2 3⁄16 6 31959588 47.36 3⁄4 6 31959760 142.29 1⁄16 6 6 31960123 218.26 3⁄8 6 6 31960271 386.98
6 0.30 31959976 90.30
3⁄16 12 31959596 81.56 3⁄4 12 31959778 243.23 1⁄16 6 12 31960131 396.82 3⁄8 6 12 31960289 703.60
1⁄2 1⁄2 12 0.50 31959984 159.62 1⁄4 3 31959604 22.05 7⁄8 3 31959786 89.84 1⁄8 3 3 31960149 83.98 1⁄2 3 3 31960297 140.48
3⁄4 3⁄4 3 0.20 31959992 65.98 1⁄4 6 31959612 43.63 7⁄8 6 31959794 174.37
3⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄8 6 6 31960156 247.43 1⁄2 6 6 31960305 455.08
6 0.40 31960008 131.79
3⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 12 31959620 84.60 7⁄8 12 31959802 306.86 1⁄8 6 12 31960164 449.88 1⁄2 6 12 31960313 808.75
12 0.70 31960016 239.06
5⁄16 3 31959638 23.08 1 3 31959810 127.93 3⁄16 3 3 31960172 93.69 5⁄8 3 3 31960321 186.64
1 1 3 0.20 31960024 127.80 5⁄16 6 31959646 44.31 1 6 31959828 217.81 3⁄16 6 6 31960180 274.70 5⁄8 6 6 31960339 542.28
1 1 6 0.50 31960032 238.58 5⁄16 12 31959653 85.30 1 12 31959836 372.34 3⁄16 6 12 31960198 499.08 5⁄8 6 12 31960347 985.97
1 1 12 0.75 31960040 426.05
3⁄8 3 31959661 34.23 11⁄2 3 31959844 198.28 1⁄4 3 3 31960206 104.62 3⁄4 3 3 31960354 210.95
2 2 3 1.50 31960057 312.99
3⁄8 6 31959679 57.41 11⁄2 6 31959851 377.39 1⁄4 6 6 31960214 316.49 3⁄4 6 6 31960362 608.71
2 2 6 3.00 31960065 573.08 3⁄8 12 31959687 98.16 11⁄2 12 31959869 663.13 1⁄4 6 12 31960222 575.45 3⁄4 6 12 31960370 1106.75
2 2 12 6.00 31960073 1074.81 1⁄2 3 31959695 48.91 2 3 31959877 309.39 5⁄16 3 3 31960230 117.20 1 3 3 31960388 239.91
2 6 3 6.00 31960081 851.23
1⁄2 6 31959703 78.47 2 6 31959885 534.25 5⁄16 6 6 31960248 354.55 1 6 6 31960396 761.67
2 6 6 12.00 31960099 1825.35
1⁄2 12 31959711 134.14 2 12 31959893 971.35 5⁄16 6 12 31960255 644.66 1 6 12 31960404 1393.96
2 6 12 24.00 31960107 3775.73
1
Sizes are nominal

Basics of...Polyurethane
Thermoset cast urethane products are well known for their extraordinary toughness and durability in most demanding applications. They usually outlast conventional
rubbers and plastics by a factor of 20 to 1. When impingement abrasion is involved, they will usually outlast
carbon steel. Cast from thermoset urethane resins, solid urethane products are produced to very close
tolerances and typically require a minimum of machining to adapt to their end uses. Precision cast products are
available in several standard size sheets, bars, rods, and tube stocks. All standard forms can be shipped off-the-
shelf. Some typical applications for urethanes are wear pads, metal-forming pads, machinery mounts, cutting
surfaces, sound dampening pads, gaskets, seals, rollers, roller covers and sandblast curtains.
• Color: black • Temperature range: -40 to +180°F

1880
Page 62
 POLYURETHANE & RUBBER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Continued from previous page

Polyurethane (Urethane) Bars & Rods

30A 40A 50A 60A 80A 90A 95A 75D
Dia. L Black Natural Black Natural Black Natural Black Natural Black Black Black Black
(In.) (In.) Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Order # Price Ea.
13⁄4 48 02228781 02226256 02229425 02226892 02230050 02227536 02230696 02228161 $148.69
2 12 02228856 02226322 02229490 02226967 02230126 02227601 02230761 02228229 31997570 31998735 31999899 31996416 63.61
2 24 02228849 02226314 02229482 02226959 02230118 02227593 02230753 02228211 31997562 31998727 31999881 31996408 111.34
2 36 02228831 02226306 02229474 02226942 02230100 02227585 02230746 31997554 31998719 31999873 31996390 156.24
2 48 02228823 02226298 02229466 02226934 02230092 02227577 02230738 02228203 31997547 31998701 31999865 31996382 179.94
21⁄4 12 02228898 02226363 02229532 02227007 02230167 02227643 02230803 02228260 80.44
21⁄4 24 02228880 02226355 02229524 02226991 02230159 02227635 02230795 02228252 138.37
21⁄4 36 02228872 02226348 02229516 02226983 02230142 02227627 02230787 02228245 184.34
21⁄4 48 02228864 02226330 02229508 02226975 02230134 02227619 02230779 02228237 245.72
21⁄2 12 02228930 02226405 02229573 02227049 02230209 02227684 02230845 02228302 99.55
21⁄2 24 02228922 02226397 02229565 02227031 02230191 02227676 02230837 02228294 166.55
21⁄2 36 02228914 02226389 02229557 02227023 02230183 02227668 02230829 02228286 224.37
21⁄2 48 02228906 02226371 02229540 02227015 02230175 02227650 02230811 02228278 294.75
23⁄4 12 02228971 02226447 02229615 02227080 02230241 02227726 02230886 02228344 102.42
23⁄4 24 02228963 02226439 02229607 02227072 02230233 02227718 02230878 02228336 175.47
23⁄4 36 02228955 02226421 02229599 02227064 02230225 02227700 02230860 02228328 234.05
23⁄4 48 02228948 02226413 02229581 02227056 02230217 02227692 02230852 02228310 312.19
3 12 02229011 02226488 02229656 02227122 02230282 02227767 02230928 02228377 31997612 31998776 31999931 31996457 121.68
3 24 02229003 02226470 02229649 02227114 02230274 02227759 02230910 02228369 31997604 31998768 31999923 31996440 209.06
3 36 02228997 02226462 02229631 02227106 02230266 02227742 02230902 31997596 31998750 31999915 31996432 278.75
3 48 02228989 02226454 02229623 02227098 02230258 02227734 02230894 02228351 31997588 31998743 31999907 31996424 341.98

Basics of...Rubber Sheeting

Resistance To:
Elastomer Oil Electric Flame Impact Abrasion Tear Weather Oxidation Ozone Characteristics
NR = Not Recommended
FR = Fair
Natural Rubber (Latex) NR EX NR EX EX EX FR GD NR Resists abrasion and low temperatures
BUNA-N (Nitrile) EX NR NR FR GD GD GD GD FR Resists mineral and vegetable oils GD = Good
Butyl NR EX NR GD GD GD EX EX EX Resists air permeation. Good electrical properties EX = Excellent
EPDM NR EX NR GD GD GD EX EX EX General Purpose Rubber. Resists weather
Hypalon GD GD GD GD GD GD EX EX EX Resists weather and acids
Neoprene GD FR GD GD EX GD GD EX GD General Purpose Rubber. Resists abrasion and oil
Polyurethane EX GD NR GD EX EX EX EX EX Resists abrasion, tearing and cold. High load bearing capacity
Silicone FR GD EX FR FR NR EX EX EX Chemical resistant. Resists high and low temperatures
Vinyl EX EX NR NR GD GD GD GD GD Excellent abrasion and damping resistance
SBR NR EX NR EX EX FR FR GD NR Resists abrasion and impact Page
Viton EX GD EX GD GD GD EX EX EX Resists oil and chemicals at high and low temperatures 1883
Page 63

Natural Thin Gage Latex Rubber Sheets Natural High Strength Latex Rubber Sheets
Tear resistant with durable holding structure under high Thick. (In.) Order # Price/Ft. High natural rubber content (98%) gives this sheeting exceptional abrasion resistance, cut/tear
pressure. Not used with petroleum products but good resistance and resiliency. Very good sound and vibration damping qualities.
resistance to alkalies and fair resistance to acids. 0.006 31934748 $5.06
0.008 31934755 5.42 Specifications:
Applications: • Temp. Range: -40° to 170° • Color: pink • Size: 48w wide roll
• Release sheeting • Gasketing 0.010 31934763 6.31
0.012 31934771 7.34 • Tensile Strength: 3000 psi • Durometer (Shore A): 35-45
• Environmental seals • Design shop models
• Medical disposables 0.014 31934789 7.65 Thick. (In.) Order # Price Per Foot
Applications:
0.020 31934797 8.52 1⁄16 31934847 $51.71 • Tank and pipe lining; conveyor
Specifications: 0.025 31934805 9.47 1⁄8 31934854 84.98 belt cover; shot blast tables
• Temperature Range: -65° to 180°F 0.030 31934813 10.98 3⁄16 31934862 106.84 • Impact pads; vibrating feeder
• Tensile Strength: 4000 psi 1⁄4 31934870 139.98 pans; conveyors
• Durometer (Shore A): 35-45 (plied) 0.040 31934821 19.18
• Color: amber • Size: 42w wide roll 0.050 31934839 29.78

SBR Rubber Sheets

General purpose rubber primarily used for gaskets and washers in low pressure air and water
Natural Gum Rubber Sheets applications. Good abrasion resistance. Not resistant to oil.
Unreinforced black and red - suitable for steam up to 100 psi
Use where abrasion resistance or elongation is required and petroleum Reinforced black - Polyester fabric is inserted between SBR plies for increased strength.
products are not present. Floating stock, highly resilient rubber, resistant to Excellent for low pressure steam and saturated steam.
water, moderate chemicals, alcohols, ketones and certain acids. Good • Tensile Strength: Black 800 psi; Red 400 psi; reinforced 800 psi
where a soft rubber seal is necessary and pressures are not high. Conforms • ASTM Spec.: Black - ASTM D2000 Type AA; Red - ASTD D1330 Grade II
to irregular flanges with bolt loads. ASTM Spec.: D-2000-86E, Type AA. Thick. Black Red Reinforced Black
Thick. 12w x 12w 12w x 24w 36w Wide Roll • Temp. Range: -20° to 140°F (In.) Order # Price/Ft. Order # Price/Ft. Order # Price/Ft.
(In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price/Ft. • Tensile Strength: 3000 psi 1⁄16 31939630 $5.43 31939721 $5.82 31939770 $11.18
1⁄16 31934508 $3.73 31934581 $6.50 31934664 $9.41 • Durometer (Shore A): 35-45 3⁄32 31939648 6.81 31939739 8.39
1⁄8 31934516 6.39 31934599 11.07 31934672 16.04 • Color: tan 1⁄8 31939655 9.55 31939747 11.32 31939788 18.49
3⁄16 31934524 8.17 31934607 14.72 31934680 20.85 Applications: 3⁄16 31939663 14.33 31939754 15.74 31939796 28.28
1⁄4 31934532 10.81 31934615 19.44 31934698 27.33 • Gasketing; sealing; 1⁄4 31939671 19.13 31939762 20.85 31939804 37.69
3⁄8
floating stock • Temp. Rge.: -20° to 170°F
31934540 15.26 31934623 26.56 31934706 35.96 3⁄8 31939689 28.68
1⁄2 31934557 19.94 31934631 35.34 31934714 46.93 1⁄2 31939697 35.99 • Durometer (Shore A):
3⁄4 31934565 28.43 31934649 49.45 31934722 65.78 3⁄4 31939705 53.00 75 ±5
1 31934573 38.30 31934656 69.03 31934730 90.17 1 31939713 74.42 • 36w wide roll

1883
WIRE & WIRE CLOTH TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Cut & Straightened Music Wire Black Oil-Tempered Spring Wire
Wire Gage Pkg. High Carbon Steel Stainless Steel • Pre-cut 12w lengths can • Uses include wire forming and springs, where a high carbon oil tempered steel is required
Dia. (In.) No. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Order # Price/Pkg. be used in tooling or • Furnished in 6 foot lengths
0.0200 8 100 31981236 $3.68 31981426 $10.02 for making pins Wire Gage Pkg. Wire Gage Pkg.
0.0220 9 100 31981244 4.79 31981434 11.88 • The music wire meets Dia. (In.) Number Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Dia. (In.) Number Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
0.0240 10 100 31981251 5.14 31981442 12.13 ASTM A228
• The stainless steel wire 0.0630 16 83 31983323 $66.79 0.1480 9 14 31983372 $66.79
0.0260 11 100 31981269 5.99 31981459 12.17 0.0920 13 38 31983331 66.79 0.1620 8 12 31983380 66.79
meets ASTM A580
0.0290 12 100 31981277 6.45 31981467 13.58 0.1050 12 28 31983349 66.79 0.1770 7 10 31983398 66.79
0.0310 13 100 31981285 6.85 31981475 15.94 0.1200 11 21 31983356 66.79 0.1870 — 9 31983406 66.79
0.0330 14 100 31981293 7.63 31981483 16.13 0.1250 — 17 31983364 66.79
0.0350 15 100 31981301 8.92 31981491 16.32
0.0370 16 100 31981319 9.64 31981509 16.53
0.0390 17 100 31981327 10.68 31981517 17.04
0.0410 18 100 31981335 11.45 31981525 17.04
0.0430 19 100 31981343 11.79 31981533 17.34
0.0450 20 100 31981350 11.86 31981541 17.73
0.0470 21 100 31981368 12.12 31981558 17.73
0.0490 22 100 31981376 12.78 31981566 17.98
0.0510 23 100 31981384 13.75 31981574 18.02
0.0550 24 100 31981392 15.56 31981582 18.30
0.0590 25 100 31981400 17.70 31981590 19.02
0.0630 26 100 31981418 17.52 31981608 19.02

Nickel-Chromium Wire
1⁄8 Lb. Spools 1⁄4 Lb. Spools 1 Lb. Spools
Wire Gage Approx. Resistance @ 68° F Approx. Resistance @ 68° F Approx. Resistance @ 68° F • This solid bare resistance wire is
Dia. (In.) Number (Ft./Spool) OHMS/Ft. Order # Price Ea. (Ft./Spool) OHMS/Ft. Order # Price Ea. (Ft./Spool) OHMS/Ft. Order # Price Ea. 80% nickel, 20% chrome
• Furnished in 1⁄8, 1⁄4, and 1 Lb.
0.0030 40 4175 70.24 73226177 $36.07 8352 70.24 73226201 $68.97 33400 70.24 73226367 $209.31 spools
0.0040 38 2400 42.19 73226169 35.02 4800 42.19 73226193 59.26 19200 42.19 73226359 164.32
0.0050 36 1600 27.00 73226151 34.65 3200 27.00 73226185 49.13 12800 27.00 73226342 149.31
0.0063 34 1015 17.00 73226136 31.85 1965 17.00 31981806 41.93 8120 17.00 73226334 145.65
0.0080 32 983 10.55 73226128 27.67 1285 10.55 31981814 38.35 7860 10.55 73226326 140.47
0.0100 30 393 6.75 73226110 20.76 785 6.75 31981822 30.79 3140 6.75 73226318 123.70
0.0126 28 498 4.251 73226102 16.40 498 4.25 31981830 29.21 1990 4.251 73226300 84.84
0.0159 26 158 3.348 73226094 13.75 315 2.67 31981848 28.36 1260 3.348 73226292 87.57
0.0201 24 99 2.107 73226086 12.22 198 1.67 31981855 25.47 793 2.107 73226284 77.83
0.0253 22 63 1.322 73226078 11.62 125 1.06 31981863 23.15 501 1.322 73226276 76.84
0.0320 20 39 0.8301 73226060 11.15 79 0.66 31981871 22.16 315 0.8301 73226268 76.00
0.0359 19 32 0.675 73226052 11.11 64 0.52 31981889 21.84 257 0.6755 73226250 73.14
0.0403 18 25 0.5208 73226045 10.29 50 0.5208 31981897 21.82 199 0.5208 73226243 69.95
0.0453 17 20 0.212 73226037 10.01 40 0.33 31981905 21.03 163 0.3902 73226235 77.04
0.0508 16 16 0.2595 73226029 9.89 32 0.26 31981913 20.31 126 0.2595 73226227 66.11
0.0641 14 10 0.1648 73226011 9.77 20 0.16 31981921 20.64 80 0.1648 73226219 65.24

Basics of...Wire Cloth

Wire Cloth- The material produced from the weaving or welding of metallic wire. This process results in various
openings used to indicate mesh count. The wire used comes in various thickness and is referred to as the wire
diameter. The mesh count and wire diameter are the two most critical specifications needed for ordering wire cloth.
Mesh- Number of openings per linear inch, measured from center to center of parallel wires horizontally and vertically.
Mesh Count- The numeral which proceeds the word “mesh” indicates the number of openings in one linear inch. Thus: Mesh Wire Space Cloth
4 mesh means that the cloth has 4 openings per linear inch, each measuring 1⁄4 inch from center to center of adjacent
parallel wires. (See illustration)
Wire- The diameter of the wire in woven or welded cloth. It can be specified in decimal parts of an inch or by gauge. The Washburn and Moen gauge is the
recognized standard for gauging steel wire.
Space Cloth- Wire cloth specified on the basis of its clear openings, i.e. the distance between the inside surfaces of adjacent parallel wires. Thus: cloth or screen Page
of 1⁄2 inch space allows material 1⁄2 inch in diameter to pass through it, regardless of wire
Page 64 size. 1896

Plain Steel Space Cloth

Space Wire 48w Wide Cut to Length
Size Dia. Wire 12 x 48w Sheets 24 x 48w Sheets 36 x 48w Sheets 48 x 48w Sheets Price per Linear Ft.
(In.) (In.) Gage Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # 1-9 10-24 25-45
3⁄16 0.1050 12 64175052 $65.00 64175060 $129.96 64175078 $194.97 64175086 $259.95 64135718 $59.45 $53.50 $50.53
1⁄4 0.0920 12 64175094 47.76 64175102 95.51 64175110 143.26 64175128 191.01 64135726 42.21 37.99 35.88
1⁄4 0.1050 12 64175136 68.87 64175144 137.72 64175151 206.59 64175169 275.47 64135742 63.33 57.00 53.83
1⁄4 0.1350 10 64175177 86.08 64175185 172.18 64175193 258.29 64175201 344.39 64135759 80.55 72.49 68.47 • Plain steel space cloth is woven from low
carbon steel
3⁄8 0.1200 11 64175219 85.66 64175227 171.34 64175235 256.99 64175243 342.65 64135767 80.13 72.12 68.11 • The actual clear opening or space between
1⁄2 0.0630 16 64175250 19.75 64175268 39.51 64175276 59.27 64175284 79.01 64135775 14.21 12.79 12.08 parallel wires is differentiated from the term
1⁄2 0.0800 14 64175292 40.01 64175300 79.99 64175318 120.00 64175326 160.00 64135783 34.46 31.01 29.29 mesh, the distance from the center of one
1⁄2 0.1200 11 64175334 55.08 64175342 110.15 64175359 165.24 64175367 220.33 64135791 49.54 44.59 42.11 parallel wire to the center of another
1⁄2
• The space size is stated in a fraction of an inch
0.1350 10 64175375 61.53 64175383 123.09 64175391 184.62 64175409 246.17 64135809 56.00 50.40 47.60 or a whole number
3⁄4 0.1050 12 64175417 30.52 64175425 61.05 64175433 91.58 64175441 122.10 64135817 25.00 22.50 21.25 • The precise tolerance requirement of this cloth
3⁄4 0.1200 11 64175458 34.83 64175466 69.66 64175474 104.49 64175482 139.34 64135825 29.29 26.36 24.90 makes it excellent for vibrating screens, general
3⁄4 0.1350 10 64175490 39.58 64175508 79.14 64175516 118.74 64175524 158.29 64135833 34.03 30.63 28.93 sizing and sorting applications where corrosion
1 0.1200 11 64175532 38.69 64175540 77.41 64175557 116.12 64175565 154.84 64135841 33.16 29.84 28.19 is not an issue
1 0.1350 10 64175573 40.44 64175581 80.87 64175599 121.29 64175607 161.73 64135858 34.91 31.42 29.67 • To order cut-to-length sheeting - specify
ordering number and length in linear feet;
11⁄2 0.1200 11 64175615 31.82 64175623 63.63 64175631 95.45 64175649 127.27 64135866 26.27 23.64 22.33 minimum length required is 5v; pricing
11⁄2 0.1770 7 64175656 39.58 64175664 79.14 64175672 118.74 64175680 158.29 64135874 34.03 30.63 28.93 calculated to the next whole foot increment

1896
SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS
All Socket screws meet AISI, IFI,
Basics of...Socket Head Fasteners ANSI, ASME and ASTM standards
and specifications.
Socket screws include several types of high strength fasteners, all using an internal hex drive for installation. Socket head, low head, flat head and button head cap
screws are all tensile fasteners. Their clamping strength is derived from stretching the screws and creating “preload” to combat the external forces seen in the clamped
parts. Socket shoulder screws have both tensile and shear applications. Socket set screws are compression fasteners. Socket screws are used in a wide variety of
applications where both strength and cosmetics are important. They are found in tooling, metal stamping dies, plastic injection molds, machinery, power transmission,
hand and power tools and even furniture.
Socket Head Cap Screws
Socket head cap screws are not grade designated as are hex head cap screws. A standard inch series socket head cap screw is 20% stronger than a
Grade 8 hex head cap screw and 50% stronger than a Grade 5 hex cap screw. The tensile strength is a minimum 180,000 psi for sizes ½" diameter
and smaller and 170,000 psi for 5⁄8w diameter and above (Tensile strength may vary according to heat treatment and manufacturer.) Low head, flat
head and button head cap screws are rated 10,000 psi lower due to the head configuration and are seen more in lighter duty applications.
As an alternative drive, Torx Plus (Star Head) screws offer more contact points allowing for a higher level of torque transfer and extended tool life. Additional benefits
include faster tool engagement and reduced camout and end load.
Socket Shoulder Screws
Socket shoulder screws have tensile and shear components. The shoulder is precision ground and heat treated and often
supports shear loads such as brake pedals, stamping die rails and stripper plates on printing presses. It is that application that
helped coin the name “stripper bolts”. Shoulder screws are called out by shoulder diameter and length and each shoulder
diameter has a default thread diameter and length. The default thread diameter for any shoulder is one standard size smaller
than the shoulder. For example, a 5⁄8” shoulder screw has a ½-13 threaded portion at its end.
Socket Set Screws
Socket set screws derive their holding power from compression of the point into the mating application. The more it is tightened, the greater the
axial holding power of the screw. Common applications are shaft collars, crash bars on exit doors and knobs of many types. Set screws are
hardened beyond socket cap screws to RC 45-53.
Common Set Screw Point Styles:
Cup: most commonly used style; the thin edge design allows for high holding power for applications requiring quick, permanent and semi-permanent part assemblies.
Cone: highest holding power due to the sharp cone shaped point which allows for deep penetration of the part; commonly used in the permanent setting of parts.
Flat: due to the flat point design, this style is used in applications where frequent adjustments are required and minimal surface damage is desired.
Half Dog: also known as Extended Point or Pilot Point; it features a round nub that protrudes from the bottom of the set screw, thus extended or pilot point. The point
is designed to align or mate with a slot.
Oval: like the flat point design, this style is also used in applications where frequent adjustments are required and minimal surface damage is desired
Knurled: the grooves on the cup- point are designed to improve grip and prevent backing out or loosening. Internal and external knurled styled points are available Page
depending on manufacturer.
Page 65 1902

Socket Head Cap Screws - Alloy Steel

• Thread class sizes #0 - 1w: Class 3A; over 1w diameter: Class 2A • Meet ASTM A574/ANSI B18.3
• Tensile strength - 0 through 1⁄2w diameters: 180,000 psi minimum; 5⁄8w diameter and larger: 170,000 psi minimum
• Hardness - 0 through 1⁄2w diameters: Rockwell C39 - C45; 5⁄8w diameter and larger: Rockwell C37 - C45
• Complete product traceability. Conform to the Fastener Quality Act - Public Law 101-592
Holo-Krome Unbrako
• Holo-Code “Lot Code” head markings on the side of the head • Tensile strength 180,000-190,000 psi. (190,000 sizes: #0 - 1⁄2w diameter; 180,000: 9⁄16w - 3w diameter)
• Pitch and diameter markings on the side of the head as well, to easily identify fasteners • E-Code “Lot Code” head markings - the ultimate in fastener traceability
Thread length is as follows - under 6w long, TWICE THE DIAMETER PLUS 1⁄4w. 6w long or longer, TWICE THE DIAMETER PLUS 1⁄2w. Sizes too short for this formula are fully threaded. All fasteners offered in full
box quantities only - not sold in broken packages.
Price/100
L Import Made in USA Holo-Krome Unbrako L Import Made in USA Holo-Krome Unbrako
Under Under
Head Pkg. Price/ Price/ Price/ Price/ Head Pkg. Price/ Price/ Price/ Price/
(In.) Qty. Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100 (In.) Qty. Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100
0-80 UNF 0.050w Key 1⁄4 100 05491022 $11.19 85560233 $16.38 75491027 $21.09
1⁄8 100 05490008 $10.57 85327070 $14.74 75490003 $18.95 3⁄8 100 05491048 11.97 85560241 16.51 75491043 21.27 67800169 $140.62
3⁄16 100 05490016 11.07 75490011 19.31 67800003 $42.71 1⁄2 100 96738158 30.92
1⁄4 100 05490024 11.55 75490029 19.66 67800045 46.43 5⁄8 100 76587757 36.48
5⁄16 100 03575396 26.18 3⁄4 100 04261350 37.10
3⁄8 100 05490040 12.14 75490045 19.51 67800086 77.02 1 100 90849589 38.64
1⁄2 100 03575404 29.26 2-56 UNC 5⁄64w Key
5⁄8 100 03575412 39.38 3⁄32 100 04084885 19.29
3⁄4 100 03575420 48.08 1⁄8 100 03575495 21.97
1 100 03575438 56.04 5⁄32 100 03575503 30.14
1-64 UNF 5⁄64w Key 3⁄16 100 05502018 7.40 60660024 18.21 75502013 23.42 67800201 49.56
3⁄16 100 03575446 34.21 7⁄32 100 03575511 34.53
1⁄4 100 03575453 38.64 1⁄4 100 05502026 8.02 60660032 18.87 75502021 24.27 67800243 33.12
5⁄16 100 03575461 42.47 5⁄16 100 03575529 19.28
3⁄8 100 03575479 46.68 3⁄8 100 05502042 8.99 60660057 18.96 75502047 24.40 67800284 33.47
1⁄2 100 03575487 48.03 7⁄16 100 03575537 20.33
5⁄8 100 04162962 49.04 1⁄2 100 05502059 9.31 60660065 19.12 75502054 24.61 67800326 33.36
3⁄4 100 76587732 50.68 5⁄8 100 03575545 23.10
1 100 76587740 53.98 3⁄4 100 03575552 26.95
1-72 UNF 1⁄16w Key 7⁄8 100 03575560 29.96
1⁄8 100 05491006 10.75 85560217 15.50 1 100 03575578 47.04
3⁄16 100 05491014 11.19 90832619 15.60 67800128 137.61
1 2 33 4
100/Box 50/Box ⁄8w Key 25/Box *Limited Supply Unbrako order numbers in bold are hard to find semi-standard sizes.
Continued on next page

1902 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
WOOD SCREWS & NYLON FASTENERS
Wood Screws - Oval Head Slotted
Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Brass Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Brass Oval Head Slotted
L (In.) Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 L (In.) Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
100 Per Package
#4 #8
1⁄2 67368407 $2.79 67546283 $21.52 67586008 $5.63 3⁄4 67368688 $3.71 67546481 $31.34 67586164 $15.89
3⁄4 67368449 3.01 67546325 21.91 67586040 7.12 1 67368720 4.59 67546523 33.78 67586206 19.08
#5 11⁄4 67546564 39.39
3⁄4 67368480 3.22 11⁄2 67604488 43.89
#6 #10
1⁄2 67546366 24.03 67586081 7.53 3⁄4 67604520 41.50
5⁄8 67368522 3.01 1 67368761 6.59 67604561 41.45 67586248 26.51
3⁄4 67368563 3.07 67546408 28.44 67586123 9.90 11⁄4 67368803 10.85 67604603 46.99 67586289 37.06
1 67368605 4.59 67546440 31.69 11⁄2 67368845 9.13 67604645 51.47 67586321 36.89
11⁄2 67368647 9.68

Drive Screws
L Pkg. Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Steel L Pkg. Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Steel L Pkg. Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Steel
(In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
#00 (.058w Dia.) #4 (.114w Dia.) #8 (.164w Dia.)
1⁄8 1000 67383364 $6.03 67316927 $4.22 3⁄16 1000 67383844 $3.85 67317289 $2.94 1⁄4 1000 67317529 $5.41
3⁄16 1000 67383406 5.73 67316968 4.22 1⁄4 1000 67383885 3.85 67317321 3.22 3⁄8 1000 67384248 $6.03 67317560 6.12 Sold in Full Box
1⁄4 1000 67383448 6.20 67317008 4.22 5⁄16 1000 67383927 3.94 1⁄2 1000 67384289 6.32 67317602 8.38 Quantities Only
#0 (.073w Dia.) 3⁄8 1000 67383968 5.85 67317362 6.24 5⁄8 1000 67384321 7.76
1⁄8 1000 67383489 4.93 67317040 4.18 #6 (.138w Dia.) #10 (.179w Dia.)
3⁄16 1000 67383521 5.05 67317081 4.04 1⁄4 1000 67384008 4.42 67317404 4.24 3⁄8 1000 67384362 6.75 67317644 6.12
1⁄4 1000 67383562 5.08 67317123 4.18 5⁄16 1000 67384040 4.52 67317446 4.57 1⁄2 1000 67384404 3.62 67317685 7.95 These screws can be used
3⁄8 1000 67383604 5.52 3⁄8 1000 67384081 4.65 67317487 5.01 5⁄8 1000 67384446 5.35 in drilled or punch holes.
#2 (.098w Dia.) #7 (.152w Dia.) #12 (.209w Dia.) Excellent for permanent
1⁄8 1000 67383646 4.81 67317164 3.97 5⁄16 1000 67384123 6.98 1⁄2 1000 67384487 6.08 fastening of castings,
3⁄16 1000 67383687 4.84 67317206 4.14 3⁄8 1000 67384164 6.26 3⁄4 1000 67384529 7.39 sheet metal, plastics and
1⁄4
wood panels.
1000 67383729 4.83 67317248 4.12 1⁄2 1000 67384206 6.28 #14 (.239w Dia.)
5⁄16 1000 67383760 4.93 1⁄2 100 67384560 8.57
3⁄8 1000 67383802 5.07 3⁄4 100 67384602 13.29

Basics of...Nylon Fasteners

Nylon fasteners are used primarily in applications where mild corrosion resistance and electrical non-conductivity are the major requirements. They will not rust or
corrode when exposed to chemicals (except mineral acids). Fasteners possess a certain amount of “give,” conforming to irregular surfaces as well as dampening
vibrations and preventing loosening due to vibration. Frequently used in electrical work to ensure good connections. Light in weight, inexpensive, a good alternative to
expensive metal parts. Intended for temperatures from 0° to 300°F. Nylon fasteners will absorb moisture from the environment over time; this affects their strength
and dimensional properties, and they should be replaced when wear becomes apparent. Page
Page 66 2014

Nylon Socket Head Cap Screws Nylon Knurled Head Thumb Screws with Shoulder
Thread Head Head Key Size Hex L. Under L. Under
Size Dia. A (In.) Ht. H (In.) J (In.) Depth (In.) Head Pkg. Head Pkg.
(In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100
4 .180 .110 3⁄32 .051
6 .222 .136 7⁄64 .064 #6-32 1 100 67342006 $16.42
1⁄2 100 67341768 $15.19 11⁄2 100 67342048 17.12
8 .265 .162 9⁄64 .077
10 .310 .188 5⁄32 .090 3⁄4 100 67341800 15.26 1⁄4-20 ALL FASTENERS
1⁄4w
ALL FASTENERS OFFERED IN FULL 1 100 67341842 15.36 1⁄2 100 67342089 16.78 OFFERED IN FULL BOX
.370 .248 3⁄16 .120 BOX QUANTITIES ONLY - NOT SOLD QUANTITIES ONLY -
3⁄8 .560 .370 5⁄16 .180 IN BROKEN PACKAGES. #8-32 3⁄4 100 67342121 17.09 NOT SOLD IN BROKEN
3⁄4 100 67341883 15.80 1 100 67342162 17.19 PACKAGES
Molded threads approximate UNC/UNF 2A and 2B. 1 100 67341925 15.90 11⁄4 100 67342204 17.37
L. Under Head (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/100 L. Under Head (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/100 #10-32 11⁄2 100 67342246 17.17
4-40 10-32 (Cont’d) 3⁄4 100 67341966 15.71
3⁄8 100 67343327 $6.73 1⁄2 100 67343848 $7.80
1⁄2 100 67343368 8.01 5⁄8 100 67343889 9.24
3⁄4 100 67343400 8.10 3⁄4 100 67343921 7.86
1 100 67343442 6.93 1 100 67343962 7.94
6-32 1⁄4-20 Nylon Slotted Set Screws
1⁄4 100 67343483 6.86 3⁄8 100 67344002 11.08
1⁄2 100 67343525 8.30 1⁄2 100 67344044 8.82 Molded threads
3⁄4 100 67343566 8.40 3⁄4 100 67344085 8.91 approximate UNC/
8-32 1 100 67344127 8.91 UNF 2A and 2B.
1⁄2 100 67343608 7.23 11⁄4 100 67344168 9.07
3⁄4 100 67343640 7.27 11⁄2 100 67344200 9.22 Thread OAL Pkg. Thread OAL Pkg.
1 100 67343681 7.35 1⁄4-28 Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100
10-24 1 100 67344242 8.91 4-40 1⁄8 100 67342840 $7.67 10-32 1⁄2 100 67343087 $9.28
3⁄4 4-40 1 100 67342881 8.88 10-32 1 100 67343129 9.50
100 67343723 9.26 3⁄8-16
6-32 1⁄4 100 67342923 8.19 1⁄4-20 1⁄4 100 67343160 10.34
1 100 67343764 9.34 1 100 67344283 25.56
8-32 1⁄8 100 67342964 9.00 1⁄4-20 1⁄2 100 67343202 10.50
10-32 11⁄4 100 67344325 31.26
3⁄8 100 67343806 7.80 11⁄2 100 67344366 32.37 8-32 1⁄4
100 67343004 8.55 1⁄4-20 3⁄4 100 67343244 11.36
10-32 1⁄4 100 67343046 9.13 1⁄4-20 1 100 67343285 11.51
ALL FASTENERS OFFERED IN FULL BOX QUANTITIES ONLY - NOT SOLD IN BROKEN PACKAGES

2014 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 ELECTRONIC HARDWARE
Tamper Resistant Sheet Metal Screws
• Length is overall for flat head, under head for all other types
Refer to Page No. 2048 for Drivers.
18-8 Stainless Steel Pan Head Spanner Flat Head Spanner Button Head Torx Round Head One Way
L Pkg. Pan Head Spanner Flat Head Spanner Button Head Torx Round Head One Way L Pkg. Pan Head Spanner Flat Head Spanner Button Head Torx Round Head One Way
(In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
#6 #10
1⁄2 100 67750000 $43.48 67754127 $41.06 2 3
67750729 $19.71 1⁄2 100 67750240 $50.59 67754325 $56.02 67750562 $76.25 67751008 $27.74
3⁄4 100 67750042 2 3
43.48 67754168 41.38 67750760 23.92 3⁄4 100 67750281 50.59 67754366 58.45 67750604 76.25 67751040 29.66
2 3
1 100 67750802 27.74 1 100 67750323 50.59 67754408 57.56 67750646 76.25 67751081 33.24
2
#8 11⁄4 100 67750687 97.87
1⁄2 100 67750083 1 3
44.72 67754200 45.58 67750406 $62.03 67750844 27.74 11⁄2 100 67751123 44.95
3⁄4 1
100 67750125 44.72 67754242 45.58 67750448 62.03 67750885 27.74 #14
1 3
1 100 67750166 44.72 67754283 46.48 67750489 62.03 67750927 27.74 1⁄2 100 67751164 41.12
1 3
1 ⁄4 100
1 67750521 83.08 3⁄4 100 67750364 87.86 67751206 46.15
3
11⁄2 100 67750968 35.04 1 100 67751248 50.27
3
2 100 67750208 65.18 11⁄2 100 67751289 84.45
1
T15 tamper resistant Torx driver 2T25 tamper resistant Torx drive 3One-way extraction tool - Order #79906558

Basics of...Electronic Hardware

Electronic hardware typically consists of spacers, standoffs, male-female standoffs, captive screws, jack screws, handles and ferrules. These hardware components are
used in a variety of industry sectors including computer, telecommunication, medical, entertainment and military/aerospace.
Spacers and standoffs: characteristically used to separate devices, guide components within an assembly, and locate components within an assembly. Spacers are
unthreaded while standoffs are threaded.
Captive Screws: allow a screw to be attached to a panel, instrument case, cabinet or enclosure by means of a retaining washer or ferrule. This provides for easy access
to an enclosure which requires frequent accessibility without the fear of losing the screw.
Electronic hardware is manufactured out of aluminum, brass, nylon, steel and stainless steel which may be finished with various platings or left unplated.
RoHS Compliant: indicates that as of July 2006, new electrical and electronic equipment is not to contain more than the agreed levels of cadmium, lead, mercury, Page
hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyl(PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl Pageether(PBDE)
67 flame retardants. 2049

Phillips Pan Head Captive Panel Screws

Thd. L Under Thd. Head Head Thd. L Under Thd. Head Head Package Quantity: 10
Size Head (In.) L (In.) Dia. (In.) Ht. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Size Head (In.) L (In.) Dia. (In.) Ht. (In.) Order # Price Ea.
2-56 1⁄4 1⁄8 0.155 - 0.181 0.053 - 0.062 41851247 $1.65 8-32 5⁄8 3⁄16 0.306 - 0.347 0.105 - 0.115 41851486 $3.00
2-56 3⁄8 1⁄8 0.155 - 0.181 0.053 - 0.062 41851254 1.67 8-32 3⁄4 3⁄16 0.306 - 0.347 0.105 - 0.115 41851494 3.19
2-56 1⁄2 1⁄8 0.155 - 0.181 0.053 - 0.062 41851262 2.28 8-32 1 3⁄16 0.306 - 0.347 0.105 - 0.115 41851502 3.25
4-40 1⁄4 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851312 2.28 8-32 11⁄4 3⁄16 0.306 - 0.347 0.105 - 0.115 41851510 4.23
4-40 5⁄16 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851320 2.45 10-24 5⁄8 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851601 2.95
4-40 3⁄8 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851338 2.61 10-24 3⁄4 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851619 3.25
4-40 7⁄16 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851346 2.78 10-24 1 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851627 3.58
4-40 1⁄2 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851353 2.80 10-24 11⁄4 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851635 3.91
4-40 3⁄4 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851361 2.95 10-32 3⁄8 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851528 2.61 • For captive panel screw assemblies
4-40 1 5⁄32 0.205 - 0.238 0.070 - 0.080 41851379 3.10 10-32 7⁄16 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851536 2.62 • Phillips drive is used for automated insertion
6-32 3⁄8 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851387 2.61 10-32 1⁄2 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851544 2.95 and offers excellent torque control
6-32 7⁄16 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851395 2.78 10-32 5⁄8 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851551 2.97 • 18-8 Stainless steel
• Rockwell hardness B95-B100
6-32 1⁄2 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851403 2.95 10-32 3⁄4 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851569 3.25
• Minimum tensile is 116,000 psi
6-32 9⁄16 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851411 2.95 10-32 1 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851577 3.58
6-32 5⁄8 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851429 2.97 10-32 11⁄4 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851585 3.91
6-32 3⁄4 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851437 3.25 10-32 11⁄2 1⁄4 0.357 - 0.403 0.122 - 0.133 41851593 4.23
6-32 1 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851445 3.58 1⁄4-20 3⁄4 1⁄4 0.473 - 0.517 0.162 - 0.175 41851270 3.91
6-32 11⁄4 3⁄16 0.256 - 0.294 0.087 - 0.097 41851452 4.23 1⁄4-20 1 1⁄4 0.473 - 0.517 0.162 - 0.175 41851288 4.23
8-32 3⁄8 3⁄16 0.306 - 0.347 0.105 - 0.115 41851460 2.95 1⁄4-20 11⁄2 1⁄4 0.473 - 0.517 0.162 - 0.175 41851296 4.91
8-32 1⁄2 3⁄16 0.306 - 0.347 0.105 - 0.115 41851478 2.97 1⁄4-20 2 1⁄4 0.473 - 0.517 0.162 - 0.175 41851304 5.54

Captive Large Diameter Hex Socket Flush Captive Nuts -

Head Panel Screws 18-8 Stainless Steel
18-8 Stainless Steel Passivated • Captive large diameter socket • Flush captive nuts are used where space is limited, loads are light, panel
is too thin for an adequate number of threads in a plain tapped hole
Package Quantity: 5 • Lengths measured from under head
• Installation: use an arbor press or similar pressure tool
Thread Thread Head Head L Under Key • Passivated and treated with nitric acid for extra corrosion
Size L (In.) Dia. (In.) Ht. (In.) Head (In.) Size Order # Price Ea. resistance • Class 2B thread fit
4-40 3⁄16 1⁄4 1⁄8 15⁄32 3⁄64 41852633 $3.24 Thread Panel Mounting Head Head Body Pkg.
4-40 3⁄16 1⁄4 1⁄8 17⁄32 3⁄64 41852658 3.33 Size Thickness (In.) Hole (In.) Dia. (In.) Ht. (In.) Dia. (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
6-32 7⁄32 9⁄32 1⁄8 17⁄32 3⁄64 41852666 3.25
6-32 7⁄32 9⁄32 1⁄8 19⁄32 3⁄64 41852674 3.55 4-40 0.040 0.161 0.1875 0.014 0.159 50 82141219 $10.04
4-40 0.062 0.161 0.1875 0.018 0.159 50 82141227 10.83
6-32 7⁄32 9⁄32 1⁄8 21⁄32 3⁄64 41852682 3.82 6-32 0.062 0.203 0.2500 0.018 0.201 50 82141235 10.88
8-32 1⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄32 21⁄32 1⁄16 41852690 4.44 6-32 0.125 0.203 0.2500 0.029 0.201 50 82141243 11.84
8-32 1⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄32 23⁄32 1⁄16 41852708 4.69
8-32 1⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 25⁄32 1⁄16 41852716 4.80 8-32 0.062 0.265 0.3125 0.018 0.263 50 82141250 11.84
10-32 0.093 0.265 0.3125 0.029 0.263 25 82141169 7.12
10-32 5⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄16 29⁄32 1⁄16 41852641 5.11 10-32 0.125 0.265 0.3125 0.029 0.263 25 82141177 7.37
10-32 5⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄16 27⁄32 1⁄16 41852724 5.07 1⁄4-20 0.125 0.386 0.4375 0.029 0.384 25 82141185 12.13
1⁄4-20 0.187 0.386 0.4375 0.029 0.384 10 82141193 7.74
1⁄4-20 0.375 0.386 0.4375 0.029 0.384 10 82141201 8.13

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2049

DOWEL PINS

Basics of...Dowel Pins

Dowel pins are a shear fastener most often associated and used in conjunction with socket screws. They are used to absorb shear loads, allowing the socket screw to
take up the tensile loads in the application. Most dowel pins, particularly those used in high strength applications, are made from heat treated alloy steel, have a higher
case hardness than core hardness and have a ground finish.
In accordance with ASME B 18.8.2, hardened ground machine dowel pins have a core hardness of RC 50-58 and a case hardness of RC 60 minimum. Surface finish is
8 microns. Dowel pins are made 0.0002” over a standard diameter and are fit into a reamed hole. Dowel pins for special applications where lower loads are present
may also have carbon steel as a base material. Corrosive and other special environments requiring dowels may require that the pins be formed or machined from brass
or stainless steel. Special oversize dowel pins, also called “repair” dowel pins are made 0.0010” oversized, so the damaged hole may be further opened up to
accommodate the new pin.
Pull -out dowel pins are internally threaded to allow for removal and reuse with a standard screw or pull-out tool. Pull-out dowels are not referenced by any standard of
ASTM or ASME but by custom have the same hardness as hardened ground machine dowel pins. There are two types of pull-out dowel pins:
• Standard round (not vented): have a smooth finish and are used in applications featuring a through- hole
• Vented: are designed to relieve trapped air and are used in blind-hole applications. Spiral vent pins feature a groove cut from end to end, while flat vent pins have a
ground flat chamfer along one side
Because of the high hardness on the surface of a dowel pin, it is necessary they be pressed into the reamed hole with a ball peen hammer made of a softer material,
rather than hammered or driven. This prevents the pin from shattering and causing injury. Page
Safety goggles must always be worn when installing dowel pins. Page 68 2066

Precision Ground Dowel Pins - Alloy Steel

Import & Made in USA Holo-Krome Unbrako
• Heat treated • .0002w Standard oversize • Black Lustre Finish rust resistant • 150,000 psi Shear strength
• Surface hardness: Rockwell C 60-64 • Meets ASME/ANSI B18.3 specifications • Rockwell 60C minimum surface For Pin Punches Refer
• Surface hardness: Rockwell C 60 Min. hardness, 50-58C core hardness to Hand Tool Section.
ALL FASTENERS OFFERED IN FULL BOX QUANTITIES ONLY - NOT SOLD IN BROKEN PACKAGES
Import Made in USA Holo-Krome Unbrako Import Made in USA Holo-Krome Unbrako
Bright Finish Bright Finish Black Lustre Finish Bright Finish Bright Finish Bright Finish Black Lustre Finish Bright Finish
Dia. OAL Pkg. Price/ Price/ Price/ Price/ Dia. OAL Pkg. Price/ Price/ Price/ Price/
(In.) (In.) Qty. Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100 (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100 Order # 100
1⁄16 3⁄16 1
100 06020002 $7.80 60630019 $13.84 1⁄4 11⁄2 100 06024152 $21.90 60634151 $28.35 76024157 $36.80 67876961 $50.84
1⁄16 1⁄4 1
100 06020010 7.83 60630027 14.02 1⁄4 13⁄4 100 06024178 25.01 60634185 31.61 76024173 41.06 67877001 58.44
1⁄16 5⁄16 1
100 06020028 7.86 1⁄4 2 100 06024202 30.04 60634201 35.57 76024207 46.19 67877043 64.63
1⁄16 3⁄8 1
100 06020036 7.87 60630043 14.30 1⁄4 21⁄4 100 06024228 31.34 60634227 44.29 76024223 58.72 67877084 78.69
1⁄16 7⁄16 1
100 03835873 8.77 1⁄4 21⁄2 100 06024251 35.54 60634250 43.87 76024256 56.96 67877126 80.23
1⁄16 1⁄2 1
100 06020051 7.99 60630068 14.91 5⁄16 1⁄2 100 06025050 20.46 60635059 24.47 76025055 32.41 67877167 42.83
1⁄16 5⁄8 1
100 06020069 8.46 60630076 16.19 5⁄16 5⁄8 100 06025068 20.86 60635075 25.09 76025063 33.66 67877209 44.76
1⁄16 3⁄4 1
100 06020077 9.24 60630084 15.27 5⁄16 3⁄4 100 06025076 22.06 60635083 26.95 76025071 31.08 67877241 43.09
1⁄16 7⁄8 100 03835881 12.48 *,167875609 $108.66 5⁄16 7⁄8 100 06025084 22.78 60635091 27.76 76025089 37.58 1
67877282 48.89
1⁄16 1
1 100 06020101 9.90 5⁄16 1 100 06025100 23.66 60635109 28.76 76025105 34.77 67877324 47.48
3⁄32 3⁄16 1
100 06021000 7.77 60631017 15.04 5⁄16 11⁄4 100 06025126 26.65 60635125 32.45 76025121 39.53 67877365 54.05
3⁄32 1⁄4 1
100 06021018 7.90 60631025 14.14 5⁄16 11⁄2 100 06025159 30.50 60635158 36.87 76025154 42.67 67877407 60.63
3⁄32 5⁄16 1
100 06021026 8.06 60631033 14.19 5⁄16 13⁄4 100 06025175 35.36 60635182 41.16 76025170 48.29 67877449 73.41
3⁄32 3⁄8 1
100 06021034 9.05 60631041 14.30 5⁄16 2 100 06025209 38.27 60635208 44.70 76025204 55.47 67877480 78.05
3⁄32 7⁄16 1
100 03835899 10.27 60631058 14.81 5⁄16 21⁄4 100 06025225 45.14 76025220 66.36 67877522 86.70
3⁄32 1⁄2 1
100 06021059 9.61 60631066 15.12 5⁄16 21⁄2 100 06025258 51.48 76025253 68.52 67877563 96.49
3⁄32 5⁄8 1
100 06021067 11.44 60631074 15.27 5⁄16 3 100 06025308 66.91 76025303 112.65 67877605 116.10
3⁄32 3⁄4 2 1
100 06021075 11.61 60631082 15.46 3⁄8 1⁄2 100 06026058 24.20 60636057 28.76 76026053 34.77 67877647 52.11
3⁄32 7⁄8 2 1
100 03835907 13.35 3⁄8 5⁄8 100 06026066 24.96 60636073 29.64 76026061 40.03 67877688 54.05
3⁄32 2 1
1 100 06021109 13.44 60631108 16.65 3⁄8 3⁄4 100 06026074 29.86 60636081 35.43 76026079 38.24 67877720 53.41
1⁄8 3⁄8 1 2 1
100 06022032 9.34 60632049 16.37 76022037 $21.27 67875963 29.42 3⁄8 7⁄8 100 06026082 27.00 60636099 32.72 76026087 42.52 67877761 57.16
1⁄8 1⁄2 1 2 1
100 06022057 9.68 60632056 16.32 76022052 21.19 67876003 29.54 3⁄8 1 100 06026108 30.42 60636107 36.03 76026103 40.30 67877803 57.02
1⁄8 5⁄8 1 2 1
100 06022065 9.68 60632072 16.56 76022060 22.50 67876045 29.54 3⁄8 11⁄4 100 06026124 32.95 60636123 38.15 76026129 45.66 67877845 63.47
1⁄8 3⁄4 1 2 1
100 06022073 10.02 60632080 16.98 76022078 22.47 67876086 30.82 3⁄8 11⁄2 100 06026157 37.96 60636156 44.84 76026152 51.74 67877886 72.89
1⁄8 7⁄8 1 2 1 1
100 06022081 11.02 60632098 19.43 76022086 26.26 67876128 33.68 3⁄8 13⁄4 100 06026173 43.05 60636180 49.47 76026178 62.37 67877928 83.59
1⁄8 1 2 1 1
1 100 06022107 10.80 60632106 20.36 76022102 26.43 67876169 36.25 3⁄8 2 100 06026207 45.98 60636206 53.98 76026202 66.34 67877969 88.88
1⁄8 1 1 1
11⁄4 100 06022123 12.68 60632122 20.94 76022128 27.18 67876201 39.60 3⁄8 21⁄4 100 06026223 54.48 00840082 66.24 76026228 72.50 67878009 102.05
1⁄8 1 1 1
11⁄2 100 06022156 14.02 60632155 22.89 76022151 29.71 67876243 42.70 3⁄8 21⁄2 100 06026256 61.33 00840090 71.72 76026251 86.35 67878041 116.75
1⁄8 1 1 1
13⁄4 100 06022172 15.34 60632189 25.25 67876284 48.89 3⁄8 3 100 06026306 74.34 00840108 89.02 76026301 106.29 67878082 140.74
1⁄8 1 2 1 2
2 100 06022206 16.71 60632205 28.35 76022201 36.80 67876326 53.29 7⁄16 1 100 06027106 48.85 00840116 55.89 76027101 75.91 67878124 108.24
3⁄16 1⁄2 1 2 1 2
100 06023055 9.92 60633054 17.08 76023050 22.15 67876367 31.09 7⁄16 11⁄4 100 06027122 59.84 00840124 68.62 76027127 86.85 67878165 115.46
3⁄16 5⁄8 1 2 1 2
100 06023063 10.03 60633070 17.87 76023068 23.23 67876409 32.26 7⁄16 11⁄2 100 06027155 61.08 00840132 69.29 76027150 88.47 67878207 125.91
3⁄16 3⁄4 1 2 2
100 06023071 10.89 60633088 19.23 76023076 24.99 67876441 34.05 7⁄16 13⁄4 100 06027171 77.22 00840140 88.73 67878249 132.62
3⁄16 7⁄8 1 2 1 2
100 06023089 11.15 60633096 21.22 76023084 28.61 67876482 36.63 7⁄16 2 100 06027205 81.05 00840157 93.09 76027200 104.91 67878280 146.15
3⁄16 1 2 1 2
1 100 06023105 12.11 60633104 21.25 76023100 27.62 67876524 37.53 7⁄16 21⁄2 50 06027254 90.24 00840165 104.15 76027259 130.13 67878322 177.37
3⁄16 1 2 1 2
11⁄4 100 06023121 13.60 60633120 23.11 76023126 30.02 67876565 41.80 7⁄16 3 50 06027304 108.68 00840173 128.87 76027309 156.61 67878363 213.11
3⁄16 1 2 1 2
11⁄2 100 06023154 15.16 60633153 25.67 76023159 33.31 67876607 46.18 1⁄2 3⁄4 100 06028070 52.79 00840280 60.62 76028075 76.57 67878405 115.96
3⁄16 1 2 1 2
13⁄4 100 06023170 17.64 60633187 31.08 76023175 41.21 67876649 53.29 1⁄2 1 100 06028104 58.43 00840181 67.12 76028109 84.71 67878488 122.42
3⁄16 1 2 1 2
2 100 06023204 19.63 60633203 31.44 76023209 40.82 67876680 57.16 1⁄2 11⁄4 100 06028120 63.80 00840199 74.19 76028125 90.79 67878520 132.62
1⁄4 3⁄8 2 1 2
100 60533809 19.33 1⁄2 11⁄2 100 06028153 68.37 00840207 78.99 76028158 99.18 67878561 139.58
1⁄4 1⁄2 1 2 1 2
100 06024053 14.90 60634052 19.49 76024058 25.29 67876722 34.83 1⁄2 13⁄4 50 06028179 76.10 00840215 90.71 76028174 107.37 67878603 153.13
1⁄4 5⁄8 1 2 1 2
100 06024061 15.35 60634078 19.31 76024066 25.09 67876763 36.38 1⁄2 2 50 06028203 81.46 00840223 93.65 76028208 119.16 67878645 165.77
1⁄4 3⁄4 1 2 2 2
100 06024079 15.67 60634086 20.50 76024074 26.63 67876805 37.03 1⁄2 21⁄4 50 06028229 95.59 00840231 121.09 76028224 135.99 67878686 192.08
1⁄4 7⁄8 1 2 2 2
100 06024087 16.86 60634094 23.12 76024082 31.37 67876847 40.25 1⁄2 21⁄2 50 06028252 104.02 00840249 129.85 76028257 147.88 67878728 208.85
1⁄4 1 2 2 2
1 100 06024103 18.14 60634102 22.26 76024108 28.92 67876888 41.29 1⁄2 3 50 06028302 107.31 00840256 140.89 76028307 170.37 67878769 250.39
1⁄4 1 2 2 2
11⁄4 100 06024129 19.30 60634128 24.79 76024124 32.21 67876920 45.41 1⁄2 31⁄2 25 06028351 143.62 00840264 169.83 76028356 227.82 67878801 322.90
1 2 3
40/Pkg. 20/Pkg. 10/Pkg. *Limited Supply
Continued on next page

2066 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
RIVETS
Copper Belt Rivets with Burrs Semi-Tubular Brake Lining Rivets
Hole Dia. (In.) Head L Under Body Box Price/ Zinc Yellow Plated Steel,
Min. Max. Dia. (In.) Head (In.) Dia. (In.) Qty. Order # Box
Perfect for fastening leather, conveyor belts and other 150° Countersunk
0.100 0.107 0.312 1⁄4 9⁄64 100 77432672 $7.92
copper assemblies. With a countersunk head and tapered
0.100 0.107 0.312 5⁄16 9⁄64 100 77432680 7.92
shank and each supplied with an equal number of burrs.
0.100 0.107 0.312 3⁄8 9⁄64 100 77432698 9.77
Sold in 1 Lb. packages.
0.100 0.107 0.312 7⁄16 9⁄64 100 77432706 9.77
0.100 0.107 0.375 1⁄4 9⁄64 100 77432714 7.92
Body Body Approx. Body Body Approx. 0.100 0.107 0.375 5⁄16 9⁄64 100 77432722 7.92
Size L (In.) Pcs./Lb. Order # Price/Lb. Size L (In.) Pcs./Lb. Order # Price/Lb. 0.100 0.107 0.375 3⁄8 9⁄64 100 79454161 8.63
#5 1 39 67137323 $20.53 #9 7⁄8 143 67138206 $20.53 0.100 0.107 0.375 1⁄2 9⁄64 100 79454179 9.11 • Used when a flush head
0.134 0.141 0.375 1⁄4 3⁄16 100 79454187 9.11 semi-tubular rivet is desired
#6 1 57 67137406 20.53 #9 1 129 67138248 20.53 as in “brake or clutch”
#7 1⁄2 143 67137448 20.53 #9 11⁄4 108 67138289 20.53 0.134 0.141 0.375 5⁄16 3⁄16 100 79454195 9.11
assemblies
#7 5⁄8 127 67137489 20.53 #9 11⁄2 93 67138321 20.53 0.134 0.141 0.375 3⁄8 3⁄16 100 79454203 9.77 • How to clinch: same as oval
#7 3⁄4 112 67137521 20.53 #10 3⁄8 302 67138362 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.375 7⁄16 3⁄16 100 79454211 10.69 head tubular rivet
#7 7⁄8 99 67137562 20.53 #10 1⁄2 256 67138404 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.375 1⁄2 3⁄16 100 79454229 11.18 • Low silhouette head
#7 11⁄4 74 67137646 20.53 #10 5⁄8 216 67138446 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.375 5⁄8 3⁄16 100 79454237 14.53 combines the advantages of
#7 11⁄2 62 67137687 20.53 #10 3⁄4 192 67138487 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.500 5⁄8 3⁄16 100 79454245 17.20 oval head with countersunk
#8 3⁄8 206 67137729 20.53 #10 7⁄8 165 67138529 22.15 0.176 0.184 0.500 7⁄16 1⁄4 100 79454252 20.51 150° head
#8 1⁄2 180 67137760 20.53 #10 1 147 67138560 22.15 0.176 0.184 0.500 1⁄2 1⁄4 100 79454260 23.34
#8 5⁄8 150 67137802 20.53 #10 11⁄4 121 67138602 22.15 0.176 0.184 0.500 5⁄8 1⁄4 100 79454278 26.16
#8 3⁄4 133 67137844 20.53 #10 11⁄2 104 67138644 22.15
#8 7⁄8 120 67137885 20.53 #12 3⁄8 412 67138685 20.74
#8 1 105 67137927 20.53 #12 1⁄2 330 67138727 20.74
#8 11⁄4 86 67137968 20.53 #12 5⁄8 287 67138768 20.74
#8 11⁄2 75 67138008 20.53 #12 3⁄4 244 67138800 20.74
#9 3⁄8 260 67138040 20.53 #12 1 191 67138842 20.74 Semi-Tubular Oval Head Rivets
#9 1⁄2 208 67138081 20.53 #12 11⁄4 160 67138883 20.74
#9 5⁄8 183 67138123 20.53 #12 11⁄2 136 67138925 20.74 • Tubular rivets can be used to economically join two or more
#9 3⁄4 160 67138164 20.53 pre-drilled or pre-punched holes permanently and easily
• High shear strength with ease of clinching on automatic,
pneumatic, and manually operated rivet setting machines
• Head type: dome • Material: zinc plated steel
Body L Under Head Body L Under Head
Nickel Plated Steel Split Rivets Dia. Head Dia. Box. Dia. Head Dia. Box.
(In.) (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Box (In.) (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Box
• Used when permanently joining soft material such as leather, fiber, rubber, 1⁄8 1⁄8 0.218 100 79454971 $11.56 3⁄16 1⁄4 0.375 100 79455101 $11.94
wood, canvas and some plastics 1⁄8 3⁄16 0.218 100 79454989 11.56 3⁄16 5⁄16 0.375 100 79455119 11.94
• Clinches with anvils that spread the prongs flush with material or turned into the material 1⁄8 1⁄4 0.218 100 79454997 11.56 3⁄16 3⁄8 0.375 100 79455127 12.75
• Can be used with caps or against washers to prevent clinch from tearing loose 1⁄8 5⁄16 0.218 100 79455002 11.56 3⁄16 1⁄2 0.375 100 67659490 13.28
• Eliminate cost of pre-punching or pre-drilling of holes in material without weakening the
1⁄8 3⁄8 0.218 100 79455010 11.56 3⁄16 3⁄4 0.375 100 79455135 13.85
assembly by removing of material
1⁄8 1⁄2 0.218 100 79455028 11.56 3⁄16 1 0.375 100 79455143 15.46
L Under Head (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Box 1⁄8 5⁄8 0.218 100 79455036 11.94 1⁄4 3⁄8 0.437 100 79455150 15.46
5⁄16 100 77432607 $8.85 1⁄8 3⁄4 0.218 100 79455044 11.94 1⁄4 1⁄2 0.437 100 79455168 16.01
• Head type: dome
3⁄8 100 77432615 8.85 • Hole dia. range: 1⁄8 1 0.218 100 79455051 13.28 1⁄4 3⁄4 0.437 100 79455176 17.63
7⁄16 100 77432623 8.85 0.100 - 0.107w 9⁄64 1⁄4 0.312 100 79455069 11.56 1⁄4 1 0.437 100 79455184 19.80
1⁄2 100 77432631 8.85 • Head dia.: 5⁄16w 9⁄64 5⁄16 0.312 100 79455077 11.94 1⁄4 11⁄4 0.437 100 79455192 22.79
5⁄8 100 77432649 10.69 • Body dia.: 9⁄64w 9⁄64 3⁄8 0.312 100 79455085 11.94 1⁄4 11⁄2 0.437 100 79455200 24.96
3⁄4 100 77432656 12.05 9⁄64 1⁄2 0.312 100 79455093 11.94

Basics of...Blind Rivets

Guide to Selecting Blind Rivets
• Strength : It is important to determine the shear and tensile strengths required for your application and then select the rivet to best meet that requirement. Style,
material, diameter and fastener spacing all can be a factor in the ability of a rivet to hold the material properly
• Rivet Material: You must select a rivet that is made of a similar or compatible metal to the material you are joining. Other things to consider is the environment in
which the finished product will be placed, the level of moisture, high temperatures or a corrosive atmosphere
• Hole Size: Rivets are available in diameters: 3/32w, 1/8w, 5/32w, 3/16w and 1/4w. It is very important the hole size is correct in order to assure the rivets perform properly
• Work Thickness: Always measure the total thickness of the material to be fastened in order to determine the required grip of the rivet. Make sure to select a sufficient
grip range to allow the secondary head of the rivet to properly form
• Rivet Style: Blind rivets are available in several styles. Blind rivets can be used as an alternative to spot welding. The open-end blind rivet produces a neat, low-profile
finished assembly. The large flange open-end blind rivet would be recommended where soft materials are fastened to a hard backing material. Closed-end rivets
should be used where a watertight seal is required. Closed-end rivets prevent the passage of fluid around or through the rivet when set. In addition, closed-end rivets
offer the benefit of greater shear and tensile strengths as well as better mandrel protection
Material Composition
• Aluminum Alloy 5052 Rivet, Aluminum Mandrel: Hi-shear quality aluminum/aluminum blind rivets are best where high grip and pull-up strengths are required. They
are strong, reliable fasteners which meet or exceed IFI 114, Grade 11 specifications. The aluminum body and mandrel have a polished finish to prevent discoloration
• Aluminum Alloy 5056 Rivet, Coated Steel Mandrel: Aluminum/steel blind rivets meet or exceed IFI 114, Grade 19 specifications. The aluminum body is polished to
prevent discoloration. The carbon steel mandrel is zinc plated with a clear chromate coating.
• 300 Series Stainless Steel Rivet, 300 Series Stainless Steel Mandrel: Hi-shear stainless steel/stainless steel blind rivets provide the strongest and most pure fastening
power. They improve the quality of the finished product with a neat surface. Both the rivet body and mandrel are stainless steel and meet or exceed IFI 114,
Grade 51 specifications
• Plated Steel Rivet, Coated Steel Mandrel: Hi-shear steel/steel blind rivets are tough and reliable, and can handle vibration without loosening or falling out. The rivet body
and mandrel are steel and are zinc plated with a clear chromate coating. These rivets meet or exceed IFI 114, Grade 30 specifications
• 300 Series Stainless Steel Rivet, Coated Steel Mandrel: Stainless steel/steel blind rivets are an economical alternative to all stainless steel rivets offering the same shear
and tensile strengths. These rivets meet or exceed IFI 114, Grade 50 specifications. The rivet body is stainless steel alloy and the mandrel is steel and zinc plated with a
clear chromate coating

2080 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 69
 THREADED INSERTS
Threaded Inserts for Plastic & Wood
Flush Press Inserts for Plastic
Brass 303 Stainless Steel • Diamond knurled press inserts are designed to
replace molded-in inserts and threads in plastic
Internal Insert Start. Hole Drill Pkg. Pkg. • Cut reject waste caused by misaligned inserts
Thread Dia. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. • Install cold
0-80 0.104 0.125 0.094 3⁄32 25 93442010 $7.57 • Install properly without a precise hole depth
2-56 0.135 0.156 0.125 1⁄8 50 93442028 8.19 25 09141979 $9.58
4-40 0.166 0.188 0.156 5⁄32 50 93442036 8.65 10 09141987 3.87 Flush Press Inserts for Plastic - Metric
6-32 0.199 0.250 0.188 3⁄16 50 85595262 8.97 10 09141995 3.94 Internal Insert Start. Hole Pkg. Brass
8-32 0.230 0.313 0.219 7⁄32 50 85595270 9.18 10 09142001 6.07 Thread Dia. (In.) L (In.) Sz. (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
10-24 0.262 0.375 0.250 1⁄4 25 93442044 4.94 M3x0.5 0.166 0.188 0.156 50 85595197 $9.96
10-32 0.262 0.375 0.250 1⁄4 25 93442051 5.41 5 93442069 5.49 M3.5x0.6 0.199 0.250 0.188 50 85595189 9.96
1⁄4-20 0.326 0.500 0.313 5⁄16 25 85595304 7.98 5 93442077 6.41 M4x0.7 0.230 0.313 0.219 25 93441988 5.15
5⁄16-18 0.389 0.563 0.375 3⁄8 10 85595312 4.95 5 93442085 7.46 M5x0.8 0.262 0.375 0.250 25 93441996 6.56
3⁄8-16 0.451 0.625 0.438 7⁄16 10 85595320 5.61 5 93442093 9.38 M6x1.0 0.326 0.500 0.313 25 93442002 7.89

Flanged Press Inserts for Plastic

Internal Insert Start. Hole Head Pkg. Brass Pkg. 303 Stainless Steel Internal Insert Start. Hole Head Pkg. Brass Pkg. 303 Stainless Steel
Thread Dia. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Dia. (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Thread Dia. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Dia. (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
2-56 0.135 0.156 0.125 0.187 50 93442101 $8.54 10 93442135 $5.28 10-32 0.262 0.375 0.250 0.312 25 93442127 $5.88 5 93442143 $6.20
4-40 0.166 0.188 0.156 0.218 50 93442119 8.54 10 85595429 6.47 1⁄4-20 0.326 0.500 0.313 0.375 25 85595387 4.60 5 93442150 8.90
6-32 0.199 0.250 0.188 0.249 50 85595353 12.86 10 85595437 7.24 5⁄16-18 0.389 0.563 0.375 0.437 10 85595395 6.61
8-32 0.230 0.313 0.219 0.280 50 85595361 14.54 10 85595445 9.52 3⁄8-16 0.451 0.625 0.438 0.500 10 85595403 7.40

Flanged Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood

Hole Hole
Internal L Size Hex Pkg. Price/ Internal L Size Hex Pkg. Price/
Thread (In.) (In.) Size Qty. Order # Pkg. Thread (In.) (In.) Size Qty. Order # Pkg.
8-32 0.375 0.234 M4 100 09142415 $12.42 1⁄4-20 0.789 0.359 M6 50 93442408 $5.45
10-24 0.375 0.277 M5 50 09142423 6.93 1⁄4-20 1.000 0.363 M6 50 09142498 9.90
10-24 0.750 0.277 M5 50 09142431 10.17 5⁄16-18 0.500 0.430 M8 50 09142548 10.75
10-32 0.375 0.277 M5 50 09142449 5.94 5⁄16-18 1.000 0.430 M8 25 09142555 7.40 • Cost effective solution for reinforcing threads in soft
wood, composition board, MDF, and plywood
10-32 0.500 0.277 M5 50 09142456 8.19 3⁄8-16 0.512 0.516 M10 25 93442416 4.65 • Easy hex drive installation
10-32 0.750 0.277 M5 25 09142464 6.93 3⁄8-16 1.000 0.468 M10 25 09142514 11.89 • Positive locking resistance against pull out
1⁄4-20 0.500 0.363 M6 100 09142472 11.63

Flush Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood Flanged Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood - Metric Flush Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood - Metric
Internal L Hole Hex Pkg. Internal L Hole Hex Pkg. Price/ Internal L Hole Hex Pkg. Price/
Thread (In.) Size (In.) Size Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Thread (mm) Sz. (mm) Size Qty. Order # Pkg. Thread (mm) Sz. (mm) Size Qty. Order # Pkg.
8-32 0.400 .250 M4 100 09142290 $11.48 M6x1.0 13 9 M6 50 93442374 $4.26 M6x1.0 13 9 M6 50 93442317 $4.12
10-24 0.500 0.277 M5 50 09142308 7.84 M6x1.0 20 9 M6 50 09142407 7.52 M6x1.0 20 9 M6 50 09142282 7.91
10-32 0.500 0.277 M5 50 09142316 7.91 M8x1.25 13 11 M8 25 93442382 3.47 M8x1.25 13 11 M8 25 93442325 3.39
1⁄4-20 0.500 0.363 M6 100 09142324 10.88 M8x1.25 20 11 M8 25 93442390 4.56 M8x1.25 20 11 M8 25 93442333 4.56
1⁄4-20 0.789 0.359 M6 50 93442341 5.15
5⁄16-18 0.789 0.453 M8 50 93442358 9.13 • Superior holding power in hard woods
5⁄16-18 0.984 0.453 M8 25 93442366 4.85 • Use wherever field assembly could cause thread erosion or stripping
• Long pilot ensures straight driving
Knife Thread Insert for Wood • Install with screwdriver, bolt and nut or drive tool
Internal Major Dia. Hole Pkg. Internal Major Dia. Hole Pkg.
Thread Ext. Thd. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Thread Ext. Thd. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Knife Thread Insert for Wood - Metric
Brass 5⁄16-18 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442275 $5.47 Major Hole
4-40 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 25 93442218 $6.52 5⁄16-24 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442283 5.47 Internal Dia. Ext. Size Pkg. Brass
6-32 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 25 88695762 6.52 3⁄8-16 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442291 6.12 Thread Thd. (In.) L (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
8-32 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 25 93442226 6.52 3⁄8-24 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442309 6.12 M3x0.5 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 10 93442168 $2.72
10-24 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442234 8.20 303 Stainless Steel M4x0.7 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 10 93442176 2.72
10-32 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442242 8.20 8-32 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 10 09142217 23.77 M5x0.8 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 10 93442184 3.41
1⁄4-20 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442259 8.99 10-24 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 10 09142225 32.68 M6x1.0 0.453 0.500 ⁄8 10 3 93442192 3.73
1⁄4-28 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442267 8.99 1⁄4-20 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 10 09142233 35.65 M8x1.25 0.600 0.625 ⁄2 10 1 93442200 5.68

Basics of...Concrete Anchoring

Types of Concrete Anchoring

Expansion Type (Wedge Anchor, Sleeve Anchor and

Friction Type (Hammer-Sets, Nail Drive and Forming Spikes):
Drop-in): tension loads are transferred to the base
load capacity is created by driving a fastener into a pre-
material (concrete or block) through a portion of the
drilled hole (in concrete, block or brick) that is slightly
anchor that is expanded inside the drill hole.
smaller than the fastener itself.
Adhesive Type: resistance to tension loads is provided Mechanical Interlocking Type (Screw Type Anchors):
by the presence of an adhesive between the threaded tension loads are resisted by threads on the fastener
rod (or rebar) and the inside walls of the drill hole. engaging with threads cut into the base material
(concrete, block or brick).
Keying Type (Umbrellas, Inserts and Screens): holding strength comes from a portion of an anchor that is expanded into a hollow space
in a base material that contains voids such as concrete block or brick.
Anchor drill holes are typically produced in concrete by using carbide tipped drill bits and rotary hammer drills. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for the correct drill-
hole diameter and depth of each type of anchoring system.
Careful cleaning of the anchor drill hole is important in order to obtain the best possible functioning of the anchor system. Carefully read each product’s
installation instructions.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2093

Page 70
PADLOCKS

Basics of...Padlock Keying Options

Keyed Different (KD) - Each padlock has its own unique key. All products are made keyed different unless
requested otherwise
Keyed Alike (KA) - Keyed alike is a term used to describe a set of padlocks which can be opened with the same key.
Keyed alike offers convenience to customers who use numerous padlocks by eliminating multiple keys. Many
domestically produced products are available keyed alike.
Master Key (MK) - In a master key system, one key operates all the keyed differently master keyed padlocks or
cylinders in a group.
Grand Master Keyed (GMK) - In a grand master keyed system, one key can access two or more separate groups of
padlocks or cylinders which are each operated by a different master key.
Restricted (R) - American Lock Company offers restricted key systems with factory controlled keyways. This feature
offers added security by restricting unauthorized key duplication.
Key Retaining or Deadlocking - The key retaining or deadlocking option prevents the key from being removed from the
padlock while the padlock is open.
Rekeyable - Rekeying is the process of removing a padlock’s cylinder and either rearranging the cylinder pins to
different locations in the cylinder chamber or completely replacing the pins. Finished replacement cylinders are
available from American Lock for a quick and easy rekeying process. The advantage of a padlock with a rekeyable
cylinder is that when there is employee turnover or when a key is lost or stolen, the padlocks can be easily serviced
rather than replaced. Many American Lock padlocks are available with this feature. A locksmith can remove the Page
cylinder and re-pin or replace it entirely. 2124
Page 71

Wide Clearance Padlocks for Tough Applications

Shackle Body Body Shackle Price Ea. Solid Steel Body Padlock w/Extra Wide Clearance-Rekeyable 6 Pin Cylinder
Dia. (In.) W. (In.) Thick. (In.) Clear. (in) Keyed Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ When a little extra clearance is needed with door hasps or gate.
7⁄16 • Ideal for heavy chains, freezer doors and other heavy-duty applications
21⁄2 1 11⁄4 Different A780 02671212 $51.93 $46.74 • Case hardened, triple chrome plated to resist cutting, sawing and corrosion
7⁄16 21⁄2 1 11⁄4 Alike A780KA 02671220 52.96 47.66
1⁄2
• Cut resistant boron alloy steel shackle
3 1 11⁄2 Different A790 02671238 67.65 60.88 • Key retaining function means you cannot remove the key unless the lock is locked
1⁄2 3 1 1 ⁄2
1 Alike A790KA 02671246 68.68 61.81 • Can be master-keyed or grand master keyed

Lock Express Hidden Shackle Padlocks

In a Jam? Need Locks Fast? We Ship in 48 to 72 Hours. Pry-Resistant No Shackle - Rekeyable 6 Pin Cylinder
Need padlocks in a hurry? We can deliver with American Lock’s exclusive Lock • Unique design padlocks for maximum security
Express quick response program. Within 48 to 72 hours of ordering, American • Die cast steel • Chrome plated to resist corrosion
Lock’s padlocks will arrive at your door, keyed to your exact specifications and • Round body deflects hammer blows • No shackle to cut or pry
in the styles and colors you select from the Lock Express model list. Or, when • Superior pick resistant cylinder • When field rekeying is important
time is less crucial, choose a more economical shipping method and get fast • Can be master-keyed and grand master keyed A2010
3 - 5 day delivery on your Lock Express order. Either option will deliver
custom-made, top quality padlocks quicker than anyone else in the industry. Keyed Different Keyed Alike
You can specify keyed alike, keyed different, master keyed, grand master Body Body Body Price Ea. Price Ea.
keyed or restricted key options. Refer to the following chart for available Material W (In.) Thick. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Order # 1-5 6+
models and configurations. Steel 27⁄8 11⁄2 A2010 82943564 $46.07 $41.46 91878504 $47.02 $42.32
Please state all information when ordering, including key option, color, and model number. Die-Cast 27⁄8 11⁄2 A2000 32819005 43.04 38.74 32819013 43.85 39.46
1
Minimum order of 6 locks is required. Additional costs apply for this program. Die-Cast 27⁄8 11⁄2 A2000 32819021 43.85 39.46
Original Body Style Body Shackle 1
Lock is same as above, but sold with a different key
Model # Model # Description Size (In.) Pins (In.) Colors Rekeyable?
A10 10 Solid Aluminum 13⁄4 5 11⁄8 — No
A30 30 Solid Aluminum 11⁄2 5 1 — No
A1105 1105 Solid Aluminum 1 ⁄2
1 5 1 1
Specify Color Yes Tubular Cylinder Maximum
1
A1106 1106 Solid Aluminum 11⁄2 5 11⁄2 Specify Color Yes
1
Security Steel Padlocks
A1107 1107 Solid Aluminum 11⁄2 5 3 Specify Color Yes
1
A1205 1205 Solid Aluminum 13⁄4 5 11⁄8 Specify Color Yes Solid Steel Bolt Padlocks- Rekeyable 7 Pin Cylinder
1
A1305 1305 Solid Aluminum 2 5 1 ⁄8
1 Specify Color Yes High security, 7 pin cylinder makes these locks extremely pick resistant. Coupled with
A20 20 Solid Brass 1 ⁄4
3 6 1 ⁄8
1 — No solid steel construction, this lock gives the user maximum security.
A40 40 Solid Brass 11⁄2 6 1 — No • Cut resistant boron alloy steel shackle • Cannot be master keyed and grand master keyed
A2000 2000 Diecast Steel 27⁄8 Dia. 5 Shackleless — Yes Dia. Body Shackle Price Ea. • Case hardened, triple
A2010 2010 Solid Steel 27⁄8 Dia. 5 Shackleless — Yes (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.) Keyed Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ chrome plated to
A50 50 Solid Steel 2 5 1 ⁄8
1 — No 5⁄16
resist cutting, sawing,
13⁄4 11⁄8 Different A7200 98386303 $22.76 $20.48 and corrosion
A700 700 Solid Steel 21⁄2 5 11⁄16 — Yes 5⁄16 13⁄4 11⁄8 Alike A7200KA 02671311 23.27 20.94 • Body Thickness: 7⁄8w
A701 701 Solid Steel 21⁄2 5 2 — Yes 5⁄16 13⁄4 2 Different A7201 02671329 24.51 22.06 • Clearance: 3⁄4w
5⁄16 13⁄4 2 Alike A7201KA 02671337 25.53 22.98
1
COLOR CODE: BLU = BLUE; BRN = BROWN; GRN = GREEN; YLW = YELLOW (GOLD); BLK = BLACK;
5⁄16 13⁄4 3 Different A7202 02671345 24.79 22.31
ORJ = ORANGE; CLR = CLEAR (PLAIN); RED = RED; PRP = PURPLE 5⁄16 13⁄4 3 Alike A7202KA 02671352 25.80 23.22
3⁄8 2 1 ⁄8 Different A7260
1 98298607 25.80 23.22
3⁄8 2 11⁄8 Alike A7260KA 02671360 26.48 23.83
3⁄8 2 2 Different A7261 02671378 27.69 24.92
3⁄8 2 2 Alike A7261KA 02671386 28.72 25.85
3⁄8 2 3 Different A7262 02671394 27.89 25.10
3⁄8 2 3 Alike A7262KA 02671402 28.93 26.04
7⁄16 2 ⁄4 1 ⁄8 Different A7300
1 1 90218041 29.39 26.45
7⁄16 21⁄4 11⁄8 Alike A7300KA 02671410 29.15 26.23

2124 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SOCKETS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Sockets
Quality hand sockets are made from alloy steel with tight tolerances that permit a high strength, thin wall design for use on fasteners that are very close to
obstructions. Choosing the correct socket will maximize productivity when it comes to turning the nut or bolt.
There are several factors that must be considered when choosing the correct socket:
Inch (SAE) or Metric:
The SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) established standards based on fractional sizes. Choosing the correct size or fit will cause less damage to fasteners and
apply the correct torque to your project.
Drive Size:
Should be determined by the amount of force that needs to be applied in the application and the accessibility of the fastener. For example, smaller fasteners and limited
space typically call for smaller drive sizes (1⁄4, 3⁄8”) whereas larger drive sizes (1⁄2, ¾ and 1”) are for larger fasteners where more leverage is required.
Point Size:
Represents the amount of points or corners on a fastener. The most common are 6 and 12 Point.
4 and 8 Point: primarily used on square fasteners.
6 Point: designed for use on 6 Point hex head fasteners and stubborn or worn bolts. They allow for a thinner wall thickness, giving the socket a
reduced overall diameter and making it easier to access recessed or tightly confined fasteners. Reduces fastener stripping since the area of
contact with the fastener is larger.
12 Point: easiest to position for rapid seating on 6 Point hex head fasteners, however 12 Point sockets can lead to rounding-off of seized or low
strength fasteners, making removal extremely difficult.
Overall Length: Sockets come in short, standard and deep lengths.
Types

Short sockets when there is a problem accessing the bolt head

or the space is tight. Approximately 20% shorter than Standard
sockets. Available in 6 Point.
Standard depth sockets are the most common and can be used
where access to the fastener is typically not an issue. Available
in 4, 6, 8 and 12 Point
Impact sockets are designed to turn fasteners under power,
applying greater torque to an application. They have thicker
walls and are designed to absorb the strikes and vibrations
caused by power tools. Made with through holes to accept a
retaining ring and pin to secure the socket to the power tool
and matte black in color.

Deep sockets are primarily used to reach into deep spaces or Power sockets are for use with power drivers such as nut
when a large portion of the bolt protrudes. They reduce the runners, multiple spindle machines and the like. Most have
need to use extensions. Available in 6 and 12 Point. magnetic properties. They are not for use with impact tools.

Universal sockets are made from two-piece construction—

Spark Plug sockets are designed for installation and removal of sockets attached to a flexible coupling with a drive end. Used
spark plugs. Their unique design prevents damage to the spark where obstructions prevent a “straight in” application, they are
plugs ceramic tip. Available in 6 Point. designed to permit turning at angles up to 65°. Available in
standard and deep lengths, 6 and 12 Point.
Spline sockets are used on spline fasteners as well as on 4, 6
& 12 point fasteners. A spline socket and fastener system
offers higher strength in a more compact profile than
conventional fasteners. Spline is commonly used on military Bit sockets are sockets with fastening tips attached such as
equipment and commercial aircraft. This allows the user to slotted or Phillips® screwdrivers, hex or torx bits. Available in
apply more torque without damaging the tool, machinery or ¼, 3⁄8 & ½” drive.
fastener head. Spline sockets are available in standard and
deep lengths.
Socket & Ratchet Accessories

Universal Joints are flexible joints that fit in between a ratchet
and socket and allow the socket to access hard-to-reach
places. The female and male drive sizes on a U-Joint are the
same. Available in ¼ to 1” drive sizes.
Drive Adapters are used to convert from one drive size to
another. For example, if the ratchet is a 3⁄8” drive (male) and
the socket is a ¼” drive (female), an adaptor from 3⁄8” female to
¼” male would be needed in order to use the ratchet and the
socket. Preferably for use going from a smaller to a larger
drive, not from larger to smaller.

Extensions Bars are used for extending a socket down into awkward
recesses. Typical lengths are: 3, 6 and 9". Locking Extensions,
which provide socket retention so the socket cannot be accidentally
disengaged, are also available. Locking extensions have a quick
release feature.
Wobble Bars are an alternative to Extension Bars with a diamond shaped
head so sockets can be positioned at inconvenient angles. The diamond
shape allows the socket to wobble slightly.

NEVER USE A HAND SOCKET WITH A POWER TOOL; IMPACT SOCKETS ARE DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY FOR USE WITH POWER TOOLS.

2190 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 72
 ADAPTERS, UNIVERSAL JOINTS & HEX KEY SETS
Ratcheting Drive Adapters 1⁄4, 3⁄8 & 1⁄2w Drive Locking Adapters
Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty Inch
• Convert standard handles to ratcheting handles • Permit sockets to be securely locked to the
• Size for male and female ends are the same drive tool square
• Include hex key for easy locking into drive tool
Drive Female Male OAL • Knurl locking ring
Size (In.) Size (In.) Size (In.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Black oxide finish 87027892
3⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄8 15⁄16 J5247 A95872537 $52.26 Drive Size (In.) OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 1⁄2 1⁄2 221⁄32 J5447 A96019856 60.98
3⁄4 3⁄4 3⁄4 33⁄4 J5647 84967645 142.12 1⁄4 111⁄16 J4759BLS A87027892 $25.36
3⁄8 21⁄8 J5260-02BLS A87027918 27.90
1⁄2 3 J5460-02BLS A87027926 30.69

1⁄4w, 3⁄8w, 1⁄2w & 3⁄4w Drive Universal Joints

3⁄8w, 1⁄2w, 3⁄4w, 1w & 11⁄2w Drive Impact Universal Joints

Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty

Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• ASME Spec B107.10M
• Connecting a universal joint • Black Oxide • ASME Spec.: B107.2
between the socket and handle • Fed’l Spec.: GGG-W-660A
allows the socket to be used in • Connecting the universal joint between the socket and the
hard to reach places handle allows the use of sockets in hard to reach spaces
05615562
05615554
Drive Blackhawk Proto Drive Blackhawk Proto
Size (In.) OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Size (In.) OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄4 1
11⁄4 GW-9578A 74232117 $13.75 111⁄32 J4770A 74232125 $18.26 3⁄8 211⁄32 J7270P 84987098 $26.41
3⁄8 129⁄32 34993A 74232158 14.86 2 J5270A 74232133 20.43 1⁄2 3 49976 05615554 $29.35 215⁄16 J7470P 85036176 30.24
1⁄2 245⁄64 49978A 05615562 17.25 23⁄4 J5470A 74232141 25.89 3⁄4 41⁄64 J07570 96018973 57.75
3⁄4 4 J5670 84967637 70.38 1 53⁄8 J10670 85039253 109.84
1
Chrome 11⁄2 713⁄32 J15670 97745608 457.57

Basics of...Hex, Ball End Hex & Torx® Tools

Hex, Ball-End Hex and Torx keys are used to drive hexagon and Torx recess cap screws, including socket head cap screws, countersunk (or flathead) cap screws,
buttonhead cap screws, set screws and shoulder screws.
Hex Keys: give you get more contact between the tool and the L-Shaped: supplied individually and in sets they are the most
fastener compared to traditional slotted and Phillips® drive common style, available in the widest range of sizes. Insert the
systems. This allows for greater torque. The fastener is also short arm tip into the fastener to get maximum leverage. Insert
less likely to strip when the screw needs to be tightened and the long arm tip into the fastener to get the maximum reach.
loosened repeatedly during maintenance or when making L-shaped keys are available in short, stubby or long reach.
adjustments.

Ball-End Hex Keys: allow you to turn a fastener at an angle. Fold-up Tool Sets: gives the user convenient access to the
This will get into hard to reach places, and allows you to most commonly used hex sizes, and helps keep you from
remove or tighten a fastener quicker than with a conventional losing individual sizes. Ergonomic handle hex tools provide
hex key. extra comfort and slip resistance, without sacrificing strength.
Steel Fold-ups have the most compact handle.

Torx Keys: have star shaped tips, which fit into the
Torx fastener star shaped recess. The Torx drive T-Handle: supplied individually and in sets, they
system provides even greater surface contact provide greater leverage and greater reach and are
between the tool and the fastener, which provides also stackable. The bar style grip fits comfortably in
greater torque and less rounding of fasteners or tools. the hand and provides the greatest torque. The loop
style grip is most compact.
Tamper Resistant Torx Keys: used in applications where you
want to limit access to a fastener. The tamper resistant
fastener has a pin in the center of the socket, which keeps a Screwdriver Handle: supplied individually and in sets,
conventional key from getting in. The tamper resistant key has they are comfortable and turn easily. Often used in Page
a matching hole in the center of its tip. low torque applications such as electronics assembly.
Page 73 2231

Short & Long Hex Key Sets

Inch & Metric
• Sizes clearly marked alongside storage holes • Tough, durable holder • Compact, light design for easy storage in tool box or on work bench
No. of Set Caddy Only
Desc. Pcs. Set Consists of (In./mm): Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
Short Arm
Inch Set 13 .050, 1⁄16, 5⁄64, 3⁄32, 7⁄64, 1⁄8, 9⁄64, 5⁄32, 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8w 05049309 $12.36 05049341 $4.16
Metric Set 11 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10mm 05049366 13.10 05049408 3.75
Long Arm
Inch Set 13 .050, 1⁄16, 5⁄64, 3⁄32, 7⁄64, 1⁄8, 9⁄64, 5⁄32, 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8w 05049325 15.10 05049341 4.16
Metric Set 11 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10mm 05049382 17.14 05049408 3.75 05049309

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2231

 TORX KEYS, SETS & TORQUE CONVERSION TECH INFO
Wing & Flag Style Torx® & Torx Plus® Keys & Sets
• Designed for indexable carbide tooling Made in Germany: Wiha
• Torx Plus configurations virtually eliminate tool “camout” and slippage
• Torx Plus offers improvement in drive bit fatigue and torsional strength
Wera 59352187
• Black laser design with multi-component handle
Wera - Individual Wing Style Keys Wiha Individual Wing & Flag Style Keys
Torx Size OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. Torx Size OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. • Precision machined exact fit tips
Torx Torx Plus • Through hardened durability
T6 21⁄2 A59352187 $3.00 IP6 21⁄2 A59352237 $3.75 Torx Wing Style Flag Style
T7 21⁄2 A59352195 3.00 IP7 23⁄4 A59352245 3.75 Size OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea.
T8 23⁄4 A59352203 3.05 IP8 23⁄4 A59352252 3.88
T9 23⁄4 A59352211 3.10 IP9 23⁄4 A59352260 4.00 Torx
T5 25⁄8 05059829 $3.53
T10 23⁄4 A59352229 3.10 IP10 23⁄4 A59352278 4.00 T6 33⁄8 05059753 $3.79 25⁄8 05059837 3.53
IP15 31⁄2 A59352286 4.38 T7 33⁄8 05059761 3.79 25⁄8 05059845 3.53
IP20 31⁄2 A59352294 4.51 T8 33⁄8 05059779 3.79 27⁄8 05059852 3.53
Wiha Wing & Flag Style Sets T9 33⁄8 05059787 3.79 27⁄8 05059860 3.53
T10 33⁄8 05059795 3.79 27⁄8 05059878 3.53
No. of Set Consists Supplied T15 33⁄8 05059803 3.79 31⁄8 05059886 3.53
Pcs. of (Torx): with: Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. T20 33⁄8 05059811 3.79 31⁄8 05059894 3.53
Torx Wing Style Set 05059753
Torx Plus
7 T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, Metal Stand 36590 01186980 $25.20 IP5 23⁄4 A48648182 3.80
T15, T20 IP6 23⁄4 A43714609 3.80
Torx Flag Style Set IP7 23⁄4 A43714617 3.80
7 T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, Metal Stand 37090 01186998 23.47 IP8 229⁄32 A80027246 3.80
T15, T20 05059829
IP9 229⁄32 A43714625 4.28
Torx Plus Wing Handle Set IP10 229⁄32 A05254966 4.28
7 IP6, IP7, IP8, IP9, Metal Stand 36592 86360930 40.38 86360930 IP15 37⁄64 A43714633 4.55
IP10, IP15, IP20 IP20 37⁄64 A09361924 4.92

Basics of...Torque Conversions

Torque Conversion — In./Lbs. (Nm) Torque Conversion — Ft./Lbs. (Nm) Torque Conversion Factors
In./Lbs. Nm In./Lbs. Nm In./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm To Convert Into Multiply By
5 0.6 60 6.8 130 14.7 1 1.4 26 35.3 51 69.2 76 103.1 110 149.2 Inch Pounds Foot Pounds 0.0835
10 1.1 65 7.4 140 15.8 2 2.7 27 36.6 52 70.5 77 104.4 115 156.0 Inch Pounds Newton meters 0.113
15 1.7 70 7.9 150 17.0 3 4.1 28 38.0 53 71.9 78 105.8 120 163.0 Inch Pounds Kg-meters 0.0115
20 2.3 75 8.5 160 18.1 4 5.4 29 39.3 54 73.2 79 107.1 125 170.0 Inch Pounds Kg-Cm 1.1519
25 2.8 80 9.0 170 19.2 5 6.8 30 40.7 55 74.6 80 108.5 130 176.3 Foot Pounds Inch Pounds 12
30 3.4 85 9.6 180 20.3 6 8.1 31 42.0 56 75.9 81 110.0 135 183.1 Foot Pounds Newton meters 1.356
35 4.0 90 10.2 190 21.5 7 9.5 32 43.4 57 77.3 82 111.2 140 190.0 Foot Pounds Kg-meters 0.1382
40 4.5 95 10.7 200 22.6 8 10.9 33 44.8 58 78.7 83 112.6 145 197.0 Foot Pounds Kg-Cm 13.824
45 5.1 100 11.3 9 12.2 34 46.1 59 80.0 84 114.0 150 203.4 Newton meters Inch Pounds 8.844
50 5.7 110 12.4 10 13.6 35 47.5 60 81.4 85 115.3 155 210.2 Newton meters Foot Pounds 0.737
55 6.2 120 13.6 11 14.9 36 48.8 61 82.7 86 117.0 160 217.1 Newton meters Kg-meters 0.102
12 16.3 37 50.2 62 84.1 87 118.0 165 224.0 Newton meters Kg-Cm 10.2
13 17.6 38 52.0 63 85.4 88 119.3 170 231.0 Kg-meters Inch Pounds 86.81
14 19.0 39 52.9 64 86.8 89 121.0 175 237.3 Kg-meters Foot Pounds 7.234
15 20.3 40 54.2 65 88.1 90 122.0 180 244.1 Kg-meters Newton meters 9.804
16 21.7 41 55.6 66 90.0 91 123.4 185 251.0 Kg-Cm Inch Pounds 0.8681
Miscellaneous Conversion Factors 17 23.1 42 57.0 67 90.9 92 125.0 190 258.0 Kg-Cm Foot Pounds 0.0723
18 24.4 43 58.3 68 92.2 93 126.1 195 264.4 Kg-Cm Newton meters 0.092
To Convert Into Multiply By 19 25.8 44 60.0 69 93.6 94 127.5 200 271.2
Inches Millimeters 25.4 20 27.1 45 61.0 70 94.9 95 129.0 225 305.1
Millimeters Inches 0.0394 21 28.5 46 62.4 71 96.3 96 130.2 250 339.0
Pounds Kilograms 0.4536 Standard Conversion Equations
22 29.8 47 63.7 72 97.6 97 131.5 275 373.0
Kilograms Pounds 2.205 23 31.2 48 65.1 73 99.0 98 133.0 300 407.0 Ft./Lbs. X 1.3556 = Nm
psi bar 0.069 24 32.5 49 66.4 74 100.3 99 134.2 350 475.0 In./Lbs. X .1130 = Nm
bar psi 14.5 25 33.9 50 67.8 75 102.0 100 135.6 400 542.4 In./Oz. X .00706 = Nm

Page 2241
Page 74

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2241

TORQUE WRENCH TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Torque Wrenches

Torque wrenches are generally calibrated from 20% of the maximum capacity to Torque applying wrenches should never be used to remove tightened fasteners.
100% of capacity. Calibration can be upset and/or irreparable damage may result.
Types

DIRECT READING TYPE APPLICATION TYPE

Flat Beam Wrench
• Easy to operate
• When force is applied to the handle, the needle moves to the right or left,
indicating the amount of (torque) pressure applied. Once the reading is taken the
needle automatically returns to zero.
• Measures in both English or Metric
• Pivoted handle concentrates load at precise point on the lever to
assure torque accuracy
• Wrench can be used in both left and right hand directions
• Memory is achieved by fingers that follow the track of the scale and remain in
place to indicate the maximum torque applied.
• Meets or exceeds ASME B107.14M and ISO 6789
• Accuracy of all flat beams is +/- 2% of indicated value from 20% to 100% of
capacity, in both directions
Dial Wrench
• Named for it’s easy to read torque measurement dial, allows the operator to
quickly identify the (torque) pressure applied
• Measures torque by way of a needle that moves inside the dial with graduations
in both English or Metric
• Wrench can be used in both left and right hand directions
• Memory is achieved by a second needle that indicates the maximum
torque applied
• Accuracy of +/- 3% meets or exceeds ASME B107.14M and ISO 6789
Digital Wrench
• Can store multiple torque values in memory
• Torque value remains on display until saved or erased
• High and low percentage tolerances may be pre-set
• Can operate in multiple units of measure
• Wrench can be used in both the left and right hand directions
• Some have data collection capabilities
• +/- 1% accuracy (+/- 2% for Import brand)
Common Uses of Direct Reading Type Torque Tools
• New product design
• Inspection of installed fasteners
• Installation of prevailing torque nuts
Use of Adapters
Use of adapters that change the leverage or length of a torque wrench will alter the •
tools accuracy. When using Drive Torque Adapters consult Machinery’s Handbook •
to calculate torque offset.
Refer to Page No. 2241 for Torque Conversions
Micrometer Adjustable
• The desired torque is determined before the wrench is used, by turning the ring
above the handle to the desired setting on the shaft of the torque wrench
• Once set torque value is achieved a click can be felt and heard
• Remove the set torque by pulling the handle away from the end of the wrench
until it clicks
• Scales of measurement available include, foot pounds, inch pounds and
Newton Meter
• Most are designed for use in only one direction (either clockwise or counter
clockwise). These should not be used to loosen tightened fasteners
• Accuracy of +/- 4%)(+/- 3% for Import brand) meets or exceeds ASME
B107.14M and ISO 6789
Micrometer Pre-set
• Designed specifically for use on production lines where many fasteners are to be
tightened to the same torque
• Works the same as above but is not adjustable
• A tester must be used to set torque value so most wrenches are drop shipped
from the factory with the users requirements pre-set.
• Accuracy of +/- 4% (+/- 3% for Import brand) meets or exceeds ASME B107.14M
and ISO 6789
Common Uses of Application Type Torque Tools
• Maintenance
• Installation
• Production
Choosing the Right Tool for the Job
Determine answers to three basic questions:
1. Do I need to measure torque (see Direct Reading type) or apply it (see
Application type)?
2. Do I want the operator to change the settings?
3. What are the most common ranges for which the tool will be used?
When Using a Torque Wrench Always:
• Apply load to center of grip
• Avoid use of cheater bars unless supplied by the manufacturer
• Apply load at a constant, steady speed
Use the wrench in the middle range for accuracy and ergonomic considerations
Wear safety glasses when using any hand tools

Page 2242
Page 75

Micrometer Type Ratchet

Head Torque Wrenches
NuLine Ft./Lbs. Torque Wrenches
Drive Torque Range (Ft./Lbs.) Graduations
Size (In.) Min. Max. (Ft./Lbs.) OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. NuLine
3⁄8 4 20 0.25 10 63722342 $94.59 • Adjustable torque wrench
3⁄8 10 40 0.5 12 63722359 119.79 • Accuracy throughout entire torque range: ±3%
1⁄2 20 80 1 16 63722367 134.08 • Audible click is heard when the torque is reached
1⁄2 35 140 2 21 63722375 151.15 • Meets or exceeds ISO 6789
1⁄2 60 180 2 26 63722383 170.12 • Packaged in custom storage case
3⁄4 90 300 2 31 63722391 290.01
3⁄4 150 500 2.5 43 63722409 484.16
1 300 900 5 60 63722417 593.36
1 500 1500 7.5 73 63722425 667.39 63722342
1 660 2200 11 60 63722433 751.12
Continued on next page

2242 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 WRENCHES TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Wrenches
Adjustable
Open-ended wrench with an adjusting screw. Fits a wide range of nuts and bolts. Adjustable wrenches are one of the most
versatile types of tools, since the size can be changed by opening or closing the movable jaw using an adjustable toothed bar
system. Force should be applied by pulling (not pushing) so the load is always on the fixed jaw of the wrench. Adjustable
wrenches are commonly referred to as Crescent® wrenches.

Auto
Sometimes referred to as a “Monkey Wrench”. Adjustable Wrench with sliding jaw designed for flat service work.

Box
Closed-ended wrench completely surrounds the fastener for better torque. The 15° & 45° angle is designed for use when there
is some kind of an obstruction around the fastener. The angle allows the user to maintain a solid grip on wrench. Available in 6
& 12 point.

Combination
Features both open and closed ends for a variety of needs. This combination offers the advantage of having a box end for
applying more force and an open end for working more quickly. The box end’s 15° angle provides more handling space.
Available in 6 & 12 point.

Crowfoot
A Ratchet driven open-ended wrench best used to reach hard-to-access fasteners in tight spaces. Available
in standard or flare nut.

Engineers
Large open-ended wrench with head diameters measuring anywhere from 1w to 10w+, often used in such places
as trains and boiler rooms for very large fasteners.

Flare Nut
Flare-nut ends are straight, not angled and often used to work on pipe and tube fittings. The design makes them suitable for
fasteners and accessories that are made of soft metals, (i.e., brass and copper), whose structure could be damaged by a
regular open end wrench and where access with a box wrench is not possible. Available in 6 & 12 point.

Flex Head
Combination open-end (unless otherwise stated) and pivoting socket-end wrench to access hard-to-reach fasteners
Ignition
Open-end wrench for use in auto assembly, construction, fabrication, manufacturing, maintenance and engine repair. Thin
narrow jaws for better access in limited space. Offset 15° & 60°.

Open-End
Single or double ended wrench with an offset opening to allow access to fasteners in limited spaces. Necessary when there is
an obstruction directly above the fastener or on pipe joints where a pipe does not permit the use of a box end wrench.

Pipe
For loosening and tightening pipe fittings or gripping and turning threaded pipe. Wrenches have hook jaws with or without
serrated jaws (teeth) depending on grip requirements. (Pipe Wrenches can be found in the Plumbing Section – Refer to
Section 17 of Big Book)
Pump
Features a short handle and thin head section designed for close quarter work on pumps and valves (also referred to as a
service wrench)

Ratcheting
Any wrench with a ratcheting feature built into it. Available in Flat or Offset versions. These wrenches are not designed
for high torque but to move a fastener quickly. Available in 6 & 12 point.

Spanner
A wrench with a hook or pin at the end for adjusting collars, locknuts or rings, commonly used in material
handling and for specific machinery. Available in adjustable or fixed styles.

Spline
Spline wrenches offer the flexibility to turn 6 & 12 point as well as spline, square, E-Torx™ and slightly
worn/rounded fasteners.

Striking & Slugging

Designed to loosen or set large fasteners with extreme force by striking with a hammer. Unlike other wrenches this tool is
meant to be struck. It is used primarily in manufacturing and maintenance involving heavy machinery and highly corrosive
environments that affect fastener threads. Available in straight and offset patterns.
Structural or Spud
Feature long tapered handles for aligning bolt holes. Can be open or box-ended. Commonly used for flanged
equipment with various hole configurations that need to be aligned.
Torque
Refer to Page No. 2242 for Basics of...Torque Wrenches

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2249

Page 76
 SCREWDRIVER & BITS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Screwdrivers & Bits

Slotted Blade Cushion-Grip
Screwdrivers are among the most basic hand tools whose sole purpose is to drive screws. Standard screwdrivers are composed of three major parts: tip, shank
(together they are the blade) and handle. There are a variety of handles including the traditional plastic handle, ergonomically designed handles and ESD (Electrostatic
Dissipative) safe handles. Insulated, anti-spark and electronics screwdrivers are also available. Screwdrivers are classified according to tip type, blade width and length.
Types
Clutch: used for fasteners in the manufacture of mobile homes and Tamper-Proof/Resistant Torx: similar to Torx, but the drive socket has a
truck trailers. Also referred to as a butterfly bit. projection to prevent a standard Torx driver from being inserted.
Hex: tip designed to turn socket head fasteners
Tamper-Resistant Driver: for tamperproof screws, used to restrict
access. Also referred to as a security tip or Snake Eyes® Spanner.
Phillips®: cross point tip designed to minimize slippage. The operator
can apply more torque and hold tighter than a slotted tip. Torq-set®: special cross tip design. Widespread use in the aviation
Pozidriv®: similar to Phillips® but ground at a different angle to allow for industry.
a greater application of pressure. Pozidriv® has four "grip" lines pointing
out from the center. They are not designed to be used on Phillips® head Torx Plus: profile delivers more torque and longer tool life than
screws, as they will damage the head or the tip. conventional Torx profiles. Torx tools can drive Torx Plus fasteners, but
not vice versa.
Square Drive (also known as Robertson®): a square-tip screwdriver,
designed for maximum torque. Generally used for recessed screws in
Tri-Wing®: the asymmetrical arrangement of the profile flanks prevents
practical production projects such as recreational decks and furniture.
the use of any incorrect tools. Mostly found in household appliances
Slotted: blade usually tapers to a flattened tip. The slotted design cannot and aviation engineering.
maintain a consistent grip under power and may often slip or cause
damage (1⁄8 - 7⁄32w diameter are commonly referred to as Cabinet Tip). Caution: Insert and power bits are not to be used with impact power tools.
Selecting the Proper Screwdriver
• Always select the screwdriver that best fits the screw head; the tip must fit the slot securely with no overhang on either side. If the fit is wrong, the screwdriver could
slip and damage itself, the screw and/or the work as well as cause injury to the user.
• How the handle fits your hand determines the amount of torque and pressure that can be applied. Handles are generally made of plastic and should be shaped to
provide a comfortable grip. As another safety tip, always make sure the handle is clean and not greased to prevent slipping and injury.
All too often screwdrivers are misused for prying, scraping, chiseling and punching (among other things) which frequently results in chewed up screw heads, damaged Page
screwdrivers and injured hands.
Page 77 2267

Cushion Grip Handle Screwdriver Sets

Slotted & Phillips® Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Paramount
Made in Germany: Wiha
A. Wera - 6 Pc. Stainless Steel Set E. Wera - 7 Pc. Set
• Stainless steel eliminates third party corrosion • Ergonomic Handle
• Cushion Grip Handle • Display Box • Display Box
Set #032060 Consists of: Set #346278 Consists of:
• 4 - Slotted: 1⁄8, 5⁄32, 7⁄32, 1⁄4w • 5 - Slotted Round: 1⁄4 x 5w, 7⁄32 x 6w,
• 2 - Phillips®: #1, #2 1⁄8 x 31⁄8w, 5⁄16 x 4w, 1⁄4 x 6w

• 2 - Phillips® Round: #1 x 31⁄8w, #2 x 4w

B. Paramount - 7 Pc. Set F. Klein - 7 Pc. Set
• Cushion Grip Handle • Cushion Grip Handle
• Vinyl Roll Set #85076 Consists of:
Set #PAR-K5007 Consists of: • 4 - Slotted Round: 3⁄16 x 3w, 3⁄16 x 6w, 02798627
• 4 - Slotted Round: 3⁄16 x 3w, 3⁄16 x 6w, 1⁄4 x 4w, 5⁄16 x 6w 1⁄4 x 4w, 5⁄16 x 6w 84122431
• 1 - Slotted Square: 1⁄4 x 4w • 1 - Slotted Square: 1⁄4 x 4w
• 2 - Phillips® Round: #1 x 3w, #2 x 4w • 2 - Phillips® Round: #1 x 3w, #2 x 4w I. Klein - 8 Pc. Set
• Cushion Grip Handle 73954513
G. Paramount - 8 Pc. Set Set #85078 Consists of:
C. Wera - 7 Pc. Set • Cushion Grip Handle • 3 - Slotted Round: 1⁄4 x 11⁄2w,
3⁄16 x 3w, 5⁄16 x 6w
• Cushion Grip Handle • Vinyl Roll
Set #5345246001 Consists of: Set #PAR-K5008 Consists of: • 1 - Slotted Square: 1⁄4 x 4w
• 5 - Slotted Round: 9⁄32 x 4w, 5⁄16 x 6w, 3⁄16 x 3w, • 4 - Slotted Round: 3⁄16 x 3w, 1⁄4 x 4w, • 4 - Phillips® Round: #1 x 3w, #2 x 11⁄2w, #2 x 4w, #3 x 6w
3⁄16 x 6w, 1⁄4 x 4w 5⁄16 x 6w, 3⁄8 x 8w
Key No. of Pcs. Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 2 - Phillips® Round: #1 x 3w, #2 x 4w • 1 - Slotted Square: 1⁄4 x 4w
A 6 Wera 032060 05774195 $63.10
• 3 - Phillips®: #1 x 3w, #2 x 4w, #3 x 6w
B 7 Paramount PAR-K5007 A02798627 38.20
C 7 Wera 5345246001 84122431 48.26
D. Wiha - 7 Pc. Set H. Crescent Series 2000 - 8 Pc. Set D 7 Wiha 30276 73954513 51.89
• Cushion Grip Handle • Cushion Grip Handle • Plastic Pouch E 7 Wera 346278 60595709 64.25
Set #30276 Consists of: Set #2008MR Consists of: F 7 Klein 85076 67213793 58.77
• 5 - Slotted Round: 9⁄32 x 4w, 5⁄16 x 6w, 3⁄16 x 3w, • 5 - Mechanic’s Round: 1⁄4 x 11⁄4w, 1⁄4 x 3w, G 8 Paramount PAR-K5008 A02798643 55.37
3⁄16 x 6w, 1⁄4 x 4w 1⁄4 x 4w, 5⁄16 x 6w, 3⁄8 x 8w
H 8 Crescent 2008MR 66098393 72.09
• 2 - Phillips® Round: #1 x 3w, #2 x 4w • 3 - Phillips® Round: #1, #2, #3 I 8 Klein Tools 85078 A06515407 85.19

Stanley® FatMax® Xtreme™ Screwdriver Set

• Bi-material acetate/rubber handle

Set #67-546 Consists of: Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Thru-tang bar transfers strike-force from strike cap to tip
• 1 - Standard Slotted Tip Screwdriver: 5⁄16w x 51⁄4w
• Cold-formed steel strike cap allows for striking and 67-546 89494561 $14.73
• 1 - Phillips® Tip Screwdriver: #2 Pt. x 51⁄4w
prying of heavy loads

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2267

OFFSET SCREWDRIVERS, NUT DRIVERS & TECHNICAL INFO
Internal Screwholder/Starters Key Ring Screwdriver
® Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
Phillips Standard Tip
OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 06526776 • Turns screws, makes adjustments and repairs, prys off lids
5 (Pocket Clip) K-14 06526776 $10.54 Holds, starts, retrieves any cross slot screw. • Fits standard key rings • Chrome finish
7 K-16 06526784 10.74 Not designed for driving. Phillips® screw • Heat treated, precision ground tip Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
9 K-19 06526792 12.06 holding drivers fit all sizes of Phillips® screws. • Blade width: 3⁄16w • OAL: 21⁄4w J100 85214955 $2.84

Offset Screwdrivers & Sets

Standard, Slotted & Phillips® Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Stanley & Proto
General Ratcheting
• For reaching hard-to-get-at screws, especially where
leverage is desired
• Ratchet sets instantly for forward or reverse position Proto 06527865 06527873 00273888
• Blades are tool steel, machined, ground and hardened • Black oxide finish
General- 5 Pc. Set Consists of:
• 2 - Slotted Blades: 1⁄4, 3⁄8w
Individual Screwdrivers • 2 - Phillips® Blades: #1, #2 • 1 - Handle
Desc. OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 19 Pc. Set Consists of:
General - Ratcheting • 1 - Reversible Ratchet Handle
1⁄4w and 3⁄8w Slotted Blades 37⁄8 807 06527857 $8.67 • 1 - Extension Shaft: 31⁄4w
#1 and #2 Phillips® Blades 37⁄8 807X 06527865 11.42 • 1 - Spinner Screwdriver Handle 81761777
1⁄4w Slotted and #2 Phillips® Blades 37⁄8 807SX 06527873 10.88 • 1 - Square Driver Adapter: 1⁄4w
• 2 - Phillips® Crosspoint: #1, #2
Stanley - Nonratcheting • 2 - Straight: 1⁄4, 3⁄8w
1⁄4w Slotted and #2 Phillips® Blades 315⁄16 65-033 00273888 5.38 • 11 - Hex: .050, 1⁄16, 5⁄64, 3⁄32, 7⁄64, 1⁄8, 9⁄64, 5⁄32, 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4w
Proto - Nonratcheting General Screwdriver Set
1⁄4w and 3⁄8w Slotted Blades 45⁄8 J361/4 74362229 7.97
5⁄16w and 5⁄16w Slotted Blades 47⁄8 J365/16 A87844411 8.44 No. of
3⁄8w and 3⁄8w Slotted Blades 61⁄8 J363/8 A87844437 8.51 Pcs. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
#1 and #2 Phillips® Blades 43⁄4 J341/4 85022788 7.38 5 8071 81761777 $14.16
#3 and #4 Phillips® Blades 61⁄8 J343/8 A87844361 9.70 19 8078 04461984 38.91 04461984

Basics of...Nut Drivers

Nut drivers are used with hex head bolts, screws and nuts. They are designed to fit where horizontal space limitations prevent the use of some wrenches and
ratchets. Nut drivers are available in various styles depending on the type of application.
Types
Standard (solid shaft): Features a solid shaft; when clearance is not required
Hollow (hollow shaft): Features a hollow shaft which allows for fit over extended bolts
Magnetic: Provides a strong hold during use
Stubby/Midget: For use with tighter vertical spaces
Precision: For use with precision instrumentation and HVAC work
Insulated: Insulated handle for use with electrical work
Ratchet: A gear mechanism in the handle locks the force motion in one direction Page
Page 78 2282

14 Pc. Nut Driver & Screwdriver Set 7 Pc. Magnetic Tip Screwdriver Set
®
Slotted & Phillips Slotted & Phillips® Made in Germany
All blades are high quality steel, hardened and tempered Set Consists of:
for optimum performance. Plastic handles have • 1 - Insulated Magnetic Holder with 1⁄4w Hex Drive
patented spring device that holds blades firmly, yet • 3 - Slotted: 7⁄32w (5.5mm) x 1w, 1⁄4w (6.5mm) x 1w,
permits quick, easy insertion and removal. Regular 5⁄16w (8.0mm) x 1w
handles accommodate all blades, single and reversible. • 3 - Phillips®: #1 x 1w, #2 x 1w, #3 x 1w
• Supplied with tool wrap
Set Consists of: Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 1 - Regular Handle 38006 06649602 $19.68
• 9 - Nut Drivers: 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 9⁄32, 5⁄16, 11⁄32, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2w Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 2 - Slotted Screwdrivers: 3⁄16, 1⁄4w
• 2 - Phillip® Screwdrivers: #1, #2 99-PR 88537014 $92.73
Zipper-Style Tool Cases
Heavy-duty zipper cases made from abrasion-, puncture-,
and tear-resistant Dupont Cordura® material. All models
have three exterior pockets or compartments and leather
wrapped handles. Black.
Cordura® is a registered trademark of the Dupont Corp.
All items ship from MSC stock except where noted.
W. Depth Ht. No. of Interior
(In.) (In.) (In.) Tool Pockets Order # Price Ea.
13.0 10 2 29 BU88537766 $123.53
14.0 13 2 27 BU88537774 156.35
15.0 11 3 47 BU88537782 172.25
18.0 13 3 22 BU88537790 194.58 Tools Not Included

2282 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
PLIERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Pliers
Pliers come in a wide variety of configurations but most can be classified into the following categories: diagonal, lineman’s, long nose, slip joint, groove joint,
end cutting, locking and specialty.

Diagonal: Only used for cutting. There are several different types but are typically classified into single and lap joint styles.

Single Joint Lap Joint

Single joint diagonals are often smaller in size and used for precision work such as electronics or cutting fine wire. The joint is designed in such a way that
one of the plier halves has a pocket machined into it. The other half has a protrusive feature that fits in the pocket. Such a joint is very ridged and helps keep
the cutting edges perfectly aligned.
Lap joint diagonals are typically larger in size and used for heavy duty cutting applications. Due to the joint design these pliers often have a high leverage pivot
or one that is located close to the cutting edges. A high leverage pivot allows the user to make the cut with less force applied to the handles than a traditional
pivot.
Diagonal Plier Cut Styles - Diagonal Pliers are available in various cut styles depending on their application.
Standard Cut can be used when the application is not sensitive to either the amount of the shock transmitted through the wire to the component or to the
amount of “pinch” left on the wire tip after cutting.
Flush Cut should be used for delicate applications, which require minimal shock transmittal and wire tip “pinch”. Flush cutters produce a clean cut, which
facilitates soldering and increases connection reliability.
Semi-Flush Cut can be used for most applications. They reduce shock transmittal and wire tip “pinch”
Diagonal Plier Head Shapes - Different head shapes are available for easier access in difficult areas.
Oval Head are the most versatile because they have the most material behind the cutting edges and last longer.
Tapered Head should be used when access to the cutting area is limited. These cutters have less head mass and provide proportionally fewer cuts.

Lineman’s: (also known as side cutting pliers) are
general use pliers used for cutting, gripping, twisting
and crimping.
Combination: perform the same functions as
lineman’s pliers but are thinner and have two different
types of gripping jaws in the head.
Slip Joint: are used for grasping and turning. These
types of pliers have a two position joint which allows
the use to adjust the jaw opening.
Hose Clamp: utilize the design of Slip Joint Pliers with
recesses in the jaws to install and remove wire spring
tension clamps.
Tongue & Groove Joint: used for grasping and turning.
Commonly referred to as Channellock®, these pliers
have a series of grooves in the joint which allows the
user to adjust the width of the jaw opening.
Commonly used in the plumbing and automotive
trades, these pliers are made with a wide variety of
different jaw configurations. Some types have
V-notch jaws which can grab and turn fasteners like a
wrench. The European market uses a similar type of
pliers called water pump pliers.
Water Pump: perform the same functions but typically
have thinner and shorter jaws. These pliers also have
multiple jaw positions but do not use interlocking
grooves like groove joint pliers. Instead, they typically
have a series of serrated teeth or scallops in the joint
that intersect with a pin or gear.

Long Nose: used for grasping and bending small
objects. Many styles also have cutting jaws or
stripper holes for removing insulation from small
diameter wire. As the name implies they have a long
tapered nose which can be used to reach into areas
where space is limited. The jaws can be serrated or
smooth depending on the intended application. Some
also have a bent nose at 45 or 90 ° to help reach
around objects in limited space applications.
Chain Nose: commonly referred to as long nose pliers
that are typically shorter and thicker for increased
strength.
Needle Nose: have longer and thinner heads for finer
work.
End Cutting Pliers: also known as pincer pliers or
nippers are used for cutting and prying. These pliers
have “C” shaped cutting jaws that allow for flush
cutting. In addition, these pliers have a rounded head
which allows the user to grasp and pry out nails or
tacks much like one would use a claw hammer.
Locking: used for grasping and holding objects with
an adjustable amount of force. There are several
varieties but most use a simple toggle link
mechanism with an adjustable pivot to set the
clamping force. These types of pliers are commonly
referred to as ViseGrip®. They are made with a wide
variety of different jaw configurations for specialty
uses such as welding, plumbing and wood working.

Specialty: are often application specific. Some examples include those used for installing or removing snap rings, cutting fiber optic cable, removing springs or
stripping wire insulation. There are many types of such pliers used in all industries and trades. A few are shown below:

Wire Stripper Cable Cutter

Snap Ring Pliers

2298 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 79
CHISELS & PUNCHES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Hand Operated Bolt Cutters
General Purpose Cutters • Series 2000 bolt cutters - general purpose
• Drop-forged jaws with center-cut blades • Heat treated for wear resistance/long cutting life
OAL Replacement Cutterheads
• Lock plate keeps jaws from loosening
(In.) Cap. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Cuts soft, medium/hard materials • Lightweight precision handles
14 1⁄4 Hard, 5⁄16 Medium 1490AC 06644033 $54.00 1413AC 06644009 $35.14 • Soft and medium-hard metals up to Brinell 200/Rockwell C15
18 1⁄4 Hard, 3⁄8 Medium 0090FC 05645734 158.22 0013C 06642458 80.32 • Medium-hard and hard metals up to Brinell 300/Rockwell C31
18 5⁄16 Hard, 3⁄8 Medium 0090AC 06644041 67.23 0013AC 06644017 38.64
24 5⁄16 Hard, 7⁄16 Medium 0190FC 05645866 201.01 0013C 06642458 80.32
24 3⁄8 Hard, 7⁄16 Medium 0190AC 06644058 94.19 0113AC 06644025 39.49
30 3⁄8 Hard, 1⁄2 Medium 0290FC 03083300 234.96 0213C 06642474 120.32
36 7⁄16 Hard, 9⁄16 Medium 0390FC 67816694 282.50 0313C 06642482 140.77 06644058 End View

Basics of...Chisels & Punches

Chisels

MASONRY METAL
Cape: for cutting or grooving keyholes or slots
Masonry: for cutting, scoring and shaping
cinder block, cement, brick and stone Cold: for cutting, shaping and removing metal
softer than the cutting edge of the chisel
Diamond Point: for weld cleaning and making
Hexagon-Joint: for clearing and cutting block V-shaped grooves in metal
joints and brick
Half Round Nose (Gouge): for weld cleaning
and cutting grooves in metal
Rivet: for making V-Shaped grooves in metal
Brick Set: for scoring and trimming masonry and removing bolts and rivet heads
bricks and concrete blocks
WOOD & WALLBOARD
Floor: thin cutting blade for rough cutting and
Bull Point: for breaking up concrete or wood trim. Can be used as a pry bar for
masonry tongue and groove floors.
Ripping: for rough cutting or removing hard
and soft wood
Flat Utility: all-around utility chisel for cutting,
scraping and sizing masonry Electricians: wide blade for rough cutting
wallboard and wood

Punches
Aligning: for aligning holes in two or more Pin: for driving out and removing already
pieces through which rivets or bolts can be loosened pins and keys after the initial
inserted movement by a solid punch
Automatic Center: eliminates the need for a Prick: for scribing lines into metal before
hammer cutting or riveting
Center Punch: for piercing and marking or for Starting (Solid): for loosening frozen or tight
starting drills in metal and other materials pins and knocking out rivets
Drift: for installing and removing pins and shafts. Also used to align holes in two or more pieces. Brass drift punches are designed
to prevent damage to the object being struck. Page
Page 80 2324

Wood Chisels & Sets

Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Stanley
Individual Wood Chisels
Blade Import Marples Stanley Stanley FatMax® Import
W (In.) OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea.
• High carbon steel alloy blade • Plastic formed handle
1⁄8 103⁄4 62318092 $11.49
1⁄4 7 06790794 $7.48 103⁄4 62318100 9.80 9 91793679 $7.87 9 91793794 $12.33 Marples
3⁄8 7 06790802 7.48 103⁄4 62318118 10.35 9 04568002 12.45 • High-quality, heat-treated tool steel
1⁄2 7 06790810 7.48 103⁄4 62318126 10.37 9 91793687 8.84 9 91793802 12.33 • Bevel edged cutting blades are full length and
5⁄8 7 06790828 7.59 103⁄4 62318134 11.27 9 04568010 12.90 can be resharpened
3⁄4 7 06790836 7.76 103⁄4 62318142 10.52 9 91793695 9.81 9 91793810 14.39
7⁄8
Stanley
7 06790844 8.16
• Ergonomically designed handle of impact resistant
1 7 06790851 8.68 103⁄4 62318159 12.04 9 91793703 10.82 9 91793828 15.70
bi-material, made from polypropylene and TPR
11⁄8 7 06790869 9.03
• Lacquered coating for corrosion protection
11⁄4 7 06790877 9.03 103⁄4 62318167 14.11 9 91793711 11.80 9 91793836 17.02
• FatMax® chisels feature a large, steel striking cap
13⁄8 7 06790885 11.18
for use with steel headed hammer
11⁄2 7 06790893 11.24 9 83283945 12.78 9 91793844 18.35
2 103⁄4 62318183 22.53 9 91793851 22.30 91793679
Continued on next page

2324 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 HAMMERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Hammers
Always choose the proper tool for the job. Hammers, mallets and other striking tools are among the most common hand tools around; they come in many types and
sizes (hammers are sized by weight) depending on the specific design of their use. Some important things to consider when selecting a hammer:
Selection Criteria
Bevel: a bevel allows hammer claws to easily slip under nail heads that are either embedded or just close to the surface. A bevel or chamfer on the striking face will
reduce the chance of chipping or damaging the face, making the hammer safer to use.
Handles & Grips: higher quality wooden handles are hickory and ergonomically shaped. Fiberglass and tubular steel hammers should include a vinyl or plastic grip
molded to the handle to prevent slipping. Solid steel handles should feature an air-cushioned grip for shock absorption.
Hardness: forged steel heads are best for strength, while heat-treated heads ensure a hammer’s durability and wear resistance.
Head Components
Claw: may appear curved or straight depending on the type of hammer selected. A curved-claw hammer will provide greater leverage for removing nails, while a rip or
straight claw design is better suited for demolition work.
Eye: should provide a secure head to handle assembly when manufactured separately. Today however, many hammers are forged from one-piece of steel, eliminating
any chance for the head to separate from the handle.
Face: typically considered the business end of the tool. Quality hammers will provide a larger striking surface (a.k.a. “face-space”) than hammers of equivalent weight
for surer strikes and easier, quicker nail driving.
Poll & Neck: absorbs the impact of each strike. Quality hammers incorporate a hot forge, heat treating process to insure exact tempering of the steel to produce a
durable, high performance tool.
Contractor & Machinist Hammers
Claw Replaceable Face
• Used for general woodworking • Faces are made of a variety of materials including tough
• Curved claw provides better leverage when removing nails plastic, nylon, urethane, copper and rawhide
• Straight or rip claw are primarily used in heavy or professional carpentry for • These different materials are used in applications that
ripping and framing work require a non-marring effect on various surfaces
• In many quality hammers, the plastic faces are
Nailing replaceable
• 20 oz. or less • Applications that require non-marring blows, such as
• Less than 13 ½” in length automotive, jewelry work or furniture assembly, soft
• Curved, Straight or Rip Claw faced hammers should be used
• Fiberglass / Wood / or Graphite Handle or
one-piece Forged Steel
Standard Soft Faced
Framing
• Steel shot in head for dead blow feature
• More than 16” in length
• Non-sparking, non-marring
• 10 oz. or more
• Commonly refered to as Stanley® Compo-Cast®
• Plain or Checkered Face
• Rip Claw
• One-piece Forged Steel or Wood
Handle

Ball & Cross Pein

• Ball Pein: used in metalworking for riveting, center punching and soft metal shaping or with cold chisels Wood Handle
for cutting and chipping work
• Supplied with a wood, fiberglass or steel handle
• Some variations may include steel shot in the hammer head to reduce bounce back
• Heavy-duty Cross Pein hammers are for use with unhardened metals. Pein is designed for shaping and
bending metals Compo-Cast Handle

Demolition Hammers

Blacksmith Engineer
• Designed specifically for metal work, but work well for most • Similar to drilling hammers, in as much as they are designed for
HARD-HITTING applications HARD-HITTING applications. However, these hammers are slightly
• The key difference between Blacksmith Hammers and other Demolition heavier; ranging from 2.5 to 4 lbs.
hammers is the unique shape of the head • Longer handle for extended striking applications in open areas

Drilling
• Intended for HARD-HITTING in confined spaces Sledge
• Compact and extremely durable • Large, heavy hammers designed for jobs where great force is required,
• Drilling hammers are forged with hardened & tempered steel heads i.e. driving stakes, fence posts, cement demolition
• Typically available in 2 to 3 lbs. • Octagonal head with flat face

Page 81 Page 2343

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2343

 INSULATED TOOLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Insulated Hand Tools

Types of Insulated Hand Tools
Insulated hand tools are used for operations performed under live voltage and are available in many product types, such as Hex Keys, Nut Drivers, Pliers, Ratchets &
Accessories, Screwdrivers, Sockets, Tool Sets and Wrenches.
Applications
Application fields include, but are not limited to, Electrical Installation, Power Plants, Electrical Stations & Substations, High Voltage Networks, Low Voltage Networks,
Telecommunications, Chemical Industry, Fire-Fighters and Lighting Installation and Repair.
Standards
All insulated hand tools are required to meet International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60900 1000 volt rating system and American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM International) i.e., F1505-01 standards. For tracking purposes, approval markings such as, manufacturer name, part number and date, and voltage,
are included on every tool. Manufacturers are responsible for testing and certifying each tool individually to ensure that they are suitable for specific working
conditions. Generally, the maximum rated voltage for insulated tools is 1000 volts AC and 1500 volts DC. Operators must have current certification from an official
organization and use insulated accessories such as gloves, mats and safety glasses.
Since operations performed under live voltage are becoming more common, so too are industry requirements and on-the job safety precautions. In an effort to reduce
the number of fatalities and injuries, new regulations have been published by OSHA (29 CFR 1910.335(a) (2) (i)) requiring the use of insulated tools when working
near energized circuits.
Safety Tips
• Wear insulated gloves, eye protection and other personal protective • Don’t modify insulation
equipment if necessary • Don’t let others use your insulated tools
• Keep tools clean and dry • Always use the correct tool
• Check insulation is sound before using a tool • Check standards and approval markings
• Never use a tool with insulation that is cracked, cut, perforated or damaged in • Have a qualified person inspect and re-certify tools annually for safe use
any way Page
This list is not all inclusive. Reference and read manufacturer’s safety recommendations and keep the instructions.
Page 82 2359

& 1⁄2w Drive 12 Point

1⁄4, 3⁄8
Hot Boxes - Insulated Tool Sets
Insulated Socket Sets
Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Facom
Combination Tool Sets
Inch/Metric Supplied in Tool Box
Facom
• Two color warning: orange means 1000V protected; 56 Pc. 1⁄2w Drive Set
yellow means stop and change tool Set #16051 Consists of:
• 1 - Slotted Composite Screwdriver: 1⁄8 x 3w
A. Facom 9 Pc. Set • 4 - Slotted Composite Screwdrivers
• Supplied in Case w/Cushion Grip: 3⁄16 x 41⁄2, 3⁄16 x 6, 1⁄4 x 6,
Set #FC-J.400AVSE Consists of: 5⁄16 x 6w
• 6 - Sockets: 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14mm • 2 - Phillips® Composite Screwdrivers
• 1 - 3⁄8w Dr. Ratchet 04571378 w/Cushion Grip: #2 x 4w, #2 x 8w
• 2 - Extensions: 150, 260mm E. Cipro 17 Pc. Set • 1 - Linesman’s Pliers: 9w
• Supplied in Insulated Soft Fabric Backing Pouch • 1 - Needle Nose Pliers: 8w
B. Facom 10 Pc. Set Set #01138 Consists of: • 1 - Diagonal Cutting Pliers: 71⁄2w
• Supplied in Case • 8 - Sockets: 3⁄16 - 9⁄16w
Set #FC-R.400AVSE Consists of: • 1 - Cable Cutter: 91⁄2w
• 7 - Hex: 1⁄8 - 5⁄16w • 1 - Water Pump Pliers: 10w
• 5 - Sockets: 6, 7, 8, 10, 12mm • 1 - 1⁄4w Dr. Ratchet
• 3 - Hex: 4, 5, 6mm • 1 - Combination Stripper/Crimper
• 1 - Extension: 2w • 14 - Allen Hex Wrenches: 1⁄16 – 1⁄2w
• 1 - Ratchet: 125mm 62297148
• 1 - Extension: 116mm F. Facom 17 Pc. Set • 10 - 3⁄8w Dr. Hex Sockets: 5⁄16 – 7⁄8w
• Supplied in Case • 11 - Box End Wrenches: 1⁄4 - 7⁄8w 58 Pc. 1⁄2w Drive Set
C. Cipro 12 Pc. Set Set # FC-J.401AVSE Consists of: • 7 - Composite Nut Drivers w/Cushion Set #16052 Consists of:
• Supplied in Insulated Soft • 9 - Sockets: 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 19mm Grip: 3⁄16 x 6, 1⁄4 x 6, • 1 - 56 Pc. Set #16051
Fabric Backing Pouch • 5 - Hex: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8mm
5⁄16 x 6, 11⁄32 x 6, 3⁄8 x 6, 7⁄16 x 6, 1⁄2 x 6w • 1 - 1⁄2w Dr. Torque Wrench
Set #01132 Consists of: • 1 - Ratchet: 180mm • 1 - 1⁄2w Dr. Ratchet • 1 - Torque Wrench: 150 - 750 In./Lbs.
• 10 - Sockets: 3⁄16 - 9⁄16w • 1 - T-Handle 58 Pc. 3⁄8w Drive Set
• 1 - 1⁄4w Dr. Ratchet • 1 - Extension: 150mm Set #16027 Consists of:
• 1 - Extension: 2w • 1 - Slotted Composite Screwdriver: 1⁄8 x 3w
G. Facom 17 Pc. Set • 4 - Slotted Composite Screwdrivers w/Cushion Grip: 3⁄16 x 41⁄2, 3⁄16 x 6, 1⁄4 x 6, 5⁄16 x 6w
D. Facom 12 Pc. Set • Supplied in Case • 2 - Phillips® Composite Screwdrivers w/Cushion Grip: #2 x 4w, #2 x 8w
• Supplied in Case Set #FC-S.401AVSE Consists of: • 1 - Linesman’s Pliers: 9w
Set #FC-S.400AVSE Consists of: • 9 - Sockets: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 19mm • 1 - Needle Nose Pliers: 8w
• 9 - Sockets: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, • 5 - Hex: 8, 10, 12, 14, 17mm 59 Pc. 3⁄8w Drive Set
• 1 - Diagonal Cutting Pliers: 71⁄2w Set #16029 Consists of:
14, 17, 19mm • 1 - Ratchet: 266mm • 1 - Cable Cutters: 9 ⁄2w 1
• 1 - Ratchet: 265mm • 1 - T-Handle • 1 - 58 Pc. Set #16027
• 1 - Water Pump Pliers: 10w • 1 - Torque Wrench: 30 - 150 In./Lbs.
• 2 - Extensions: 145, 265mm • 1 - Extension: 145mm • 1 - Combination Stripper/Crimper
Key No. of Pcs. Drive Size (In.) Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • 14 - Allen Hex Wrenches: 1⁄16 – 1⁄2w
A 9 3⁄8 Facom FC-J.400AVSE 04571378 $257.81 • 10 - 3⁄8w Dr. Hex Sockets: 5⁄16 – 7⁄8w Drive No. Wt.
B 10 1⁄4 Facom FC-R.400AVSE 04571394 246.12 • 11 - Box End Wrenches: 1⁄4 - 7⁄8w Size (In.) of Pcs. (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
C 12 1⁄4 CiPro 01132 09118001 405.73 • 7 - Composite Nut Drivers 1⁄2
w/Cushion Grip: ⁄16 x 6, ⁄4 x 6,
3 1 56 31 16051 62297163 $1981.43
D 12 1⁄2 Facom FC-S.400AVSE 04571402 399.63 5⁄16 x 6, 11⁄32 x 6, 3⁄8 x 6, 7⁄16 x 6, 1⁄2 x 6w
1⁄2 58 33 16052 62297171 2358.84
3⁄8 58 29 16027 62297148 1887.07
E 17 1⁄4 CiPro 01138 09118019 523.68 • 1 - 3⁄8w Dr. Reversible Ratchet 3⁄8 59 31 16029 62297155 2264.48
F 17 3⁄8 Facom FC-J.401AVSE 04571386 465.92 • 2 - 3⁄8w Dr. Extensions: 3 and 6w
G 17 1⁄2 Facom FC-S.401AVSE 04571410 614.84

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2359

 NONSPARKING TOOLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Insulated Cable Cutters Insulated Ratcheting Cable Cutters
Knipex 1000V Protection Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• High grade special tool steel, oil hardened and tempered
• One-handed operation • No cable core distortion
• Shearing action gives smooth comfortable cut
• Forged and hardened steel blade
• Insulated dual component handles are designed for
comfort and leverage 2 Color Warning Handle Insulation:
• Orange: 1000V protection 04571188
OAL (In.) Type Capacity Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Yellow (insulation integrity compromised): Stop and change tool
61⁄2 Dual Component Handle 1 AWG KN9518-612 02252385 $47.48
8 Dual Component Handle 2/0 AWG KN9518-8 02252393 75.15 OAL (In.) Cap. (In.) Grips Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
12 13⁄4 Cushion FA-414.45AVSE 04571188 $817.74
Klein 13.187 2 Cushion FA-414.52AVSE 04571196 871.33
• Two layers of insulation provide protection
against electric shock
• Special, high-leverage design for exceptional
cutting capability
OAL (In.) Capacity Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Fixed Blade Insulated Knife
95⁄8 4/0 Aluminium, 2/0 Soft Copper, 63050-INS A93221737 $86.38
100-Pair 24 AWG Communications Wire • Thick, angled blade with flat tip
• Soft bi-material handle
• Includes sheath
Blade
L (In.) OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Nonconductive Bolt Cutters 23⁄8 71⁄2 FT-1820.AVSE 82642489 $53.15

Safety Orange
• Bolt cutters certified nonconductive to 1000 Volts
• 100% Tested to 10,000 volts
• Individually serial numbered for traceability 1000V Insulated Hacksaw Frame
• Handles made of continuous strand 71307250
fiberglass with ergonomic grips
• Jaws are forged compound hinge • 2 Blade positions
• Meet or exceed ASTM F1505 and IEC 60900 standards • Butterfly tensioner
• Bi-metal blade (included)
OAL (In.) Capacity Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Frame for 300mm blade
18 3⁄8w (8.3mm) Medium-hard Bolt 76701 A71307250 $197.13
24 7⁄16w (11mm) Medium-hard Bolt 76702 A71307276 254.60 Blade L (In.) Handle Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
30 1⁄2w (13mm) Medium-hard Bolt 76703 A71307284 335.35 12 Ergonomically Designed D-Style FT-602.AVSE 82642497 $143.42

Basics of...Nonsparking Tools

Nonsparking tools are recommended for use in hazardous environments where flammable or combustible vapors, liquids, dusts or residues are present. Ordinary hand
tools are usually made of steel, which can cause sparks if struck, scraped, or dropped. This can be disastrous in an explosive atmosphere. Tools used in a hazardous
material applications MUST be constructed of nonsparking, nonferrous, nonmagnetic corrosion resistant metals. Caution: these tools are not classified as anti-static
because they DO conduct electricity. Certain chemicals such as amatol and similar liquid gases may react with copper alloys to form metalloids which would negate the
nonsparking properties of the alloys. Do not use high copper content tools in direct contact with acetylene due to the possible formation of explosive acetylides,
especially in the presence of moisture.
In general, Nonsparking Tools should be used in any environment where ignition sources are a concern. Applications include, but not limited to:
• Maintenance and Repair Operations (MRO) • Hot Work (all heat, spark or flame producing operations)
• Collection, Holding and Transfer (CHT) • Transportation (airports, railroads, tanker trucks, shipyards), Chemical, Petrochemical and Gas Operations
• Military • City, state and Federal Governments (utilities, waste management, Hazmat, WMD)
• Work in Confined Space • General Dust Environments (grain, mining, paper/pulp mills)
Nonsparking tools are made from aluminum bronze, beryllium copper and other copperbased alloys. Aluminum bronze has high strength for torque and impact
situations. The Brinell hardness is 200 to 350 with a tensile strength of 95,000 to 150,000 psi. In most cases, tools are beryllium free. Beryllium copper has maximum
strength for torque and impact situations. It contains 2% beryllium and is suitable for tools with gripping teeth or cutting edges. The Brinell hardness is 332 to 430
with a tensile strength of 200,000 psi.

Page 83 Page 2367

Nonsparking 1⁄2w Drive 6 Point 12 Point Nonsparking

Standard Socket Sets Combination Wrenches & Set
• Nonsparking, nonmagnetic, corrosion resistant Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty Inch Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty
• Factory mutual approved • Beryllium-free Individual Wrenches
9 Pc. Set Size (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Plastic Case
1⁄2 W-621 33010588 $49.09
Set #W-290 Consists of:
9⁄16 W-631 33010596 52.10
• 5 - Std.: 1⁄2, 11⁄16, 7⁄8, 11⁄16, 11⁄4w
5⁄8 W-641 33010703 58.62
• 1 - 1⁄2w Dr. Ratchet: 10w
3⁄4 W-661 33010711 70.33
• 1 - 1⁄2w Dr. Extension Bar: 10w
• 1 - Sliding Bar: 11w 7⁄8 W-671 33010778 81.45
• 1 - Hinged Handle Wrench: 12w 1 W-671A 33010786 99.60 67996660
21 Pc. Set 88723499 1 ⁄8 W-673
1 33010794 115.97 • Made with aluminum bronze for use with
• Plastic Case 11⁄4 W-674 88792122 148.56 flammable materials
Set #W-260 Consists of: • Nonsparking, nonmagnetic, corrosion resistant
No. of
• 17 - Std.: 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2, 9⁄16, 19⁄32, 5⁄8, 11⁄16, 3⁄4, 25⁄32, 13⁄16, Set • Factory Mutual Approved
7⁄8, 15⁄16, 1, 11⁄16, 11⁄8, 11⁄4w
Pcs. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
No. of Pcs. Set Consists of (In.): Supplied with Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 1 - 1⁄2w Dr. Ratchet: 10w • 1 - 1⁄2w Dr. Extension Bar: 10w 9 W-290 65253205 $803.10
• 1 - Sliding Bar: 11w • 1 - Hinged Handle Wrench: 12w 21 W-260 88723499 1514.91 7 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2, 9⁄16, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8 Roll-Up Pouch M-41 67996660 $448.15

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2367

UTILITY KNIVES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Nonsparking Sledge Hammers Nonsparking Heavy-Duty Scrapers
Head Wt. OAL Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty • Made with aluminum bronze for use with Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty
(oz.) (Lbs.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Nonmagnetic and corrosion resistant flammable materials
• Factory mutual approved • Nonsparking, nonmagnetic, corrosion-resistant
48 3 15 H-69FG 02731784 $126.46 • Heavy cast construction for long life
• Beryllium-free
80 5 33 H-70FG 05992995 175.04 • Can be resharpened
• Fiberglass handle
120 71⁄2 33 H-71FG 05993019 239.44
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
160 10 33 H-72FG 88157417 327.99
240 15 33 H-73FG 06588784 419.89 Deck Scraper 2w x 12w S-10G 33010414 $39.25 33010414
388 18 33 H-74FG 63668750 605.60 02731784 Spray Booth Scraper S-40 33010422 39.64
Floor Scraper 6w Blade S-71S 33010430 75.01
Floor Scraper 60w Handle 301-177 33010448 37.17
Nonsparking Double Face
Engineer’s Hammers
• Made with aluminum bronze for use with flammable materials
Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty Assorted Nonsparking Tools
• Nonsparking, nonmagnetic, corrosion-resistant • Fiberglass handles Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty
Made with aluminum bronze for use with
Head Wt. flammable materials. Nonsparking,
(oz.) (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. nonmagnetic, corrosion-resistant.
20 11⁄4 H-14FG 32996035 $76.43 Brushes have hardwood handles. 33010612
36 21⁄4 H-15FG 63668743 90.23 Type Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
44 23⁄4 H-16FG 32996043 97.27 32996035 1⁄2wH x 1wW x 6wL Wedge W-3 33010612 $16.67
48 3 H-17FG 00539296 109.56
1wH x 11⁄2wW x 8wL Wedge W-8 33010620 39.15 33010638
41⁄2 - 63⁄8w Hook Wrench WP-7-ST 33010638 85.07
11⁄8w Shoe Wire Brush B-399 33010679 30.93
Nonsparking Flange Wedges 11⁄8w Wire Brush B-400 33010687 25.26
Toothbrush Style TB-10 33010695 4.65 33010679
• Nonsparking, nonmagnetic, corrosion resistant Mfr’s Limited Lifetime Warranty
• Factory mutual approved
• Beryllium-free
Ht. (In.) W (In.) OAL (in.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 3⁄4 4 W-2 73559312 $12.14
3⁄4 11⁄2 6 W-4 94487212 26.07
3⁄4 2 7 W-6 62295274 39.17
11⁄4 2 81⁄2 W-10 48607824 57.28
15⁄8 11⁄2 8 W-7 62295134 53.89

Basics of...Utility Knives

Utility knives are used to cut and trim a variety of building materials including: drywall, felt paper, wallpaper, rope & twine, plastic sheet material, fiberglass insulation
and more. They can be divided into 3 general categories, Retractable Blade, Fixed Blade and Snap-off Blade.
Knives

Retractable: a good choice for general use; offer the convenience of being able to quickly adjust the cutting depth of the blade. Plus
they offer the safety of allowing the blade to be retracted completely into the handle when not in use.

Fixed: blades lock into a fixed, non-retractable position between the halves of the knife handle. This improves blade stability in severe
cutting applications and allows the knife to accept special-purpose blades that are too large to retract into the handle.

Snap-off: built around a blade designed to snap off or break away in sections, providing a fresh, sharp cutting point without having to
open the knife. These knives are a good choice for light- and medium-duty applications, or when adhesive materials like packing tape
leave a residue on the blade.

Blades for Utility Knives

Regular Duty: designed to cut thin materials that require precision cutting. They are suited for thin paper cutting, marking/scoring wood, opening
cartons, slicing plastic film, cutting string or twine.
Heavy Duty: designed to cut materials that require more force to cut. They have enhanced durability vs Regular Duty blades. Ideal for
roofing materials, wallboard, floor covering, fabrics, vinyl, tubing, rubber, plastics, leather and more.
Extra Heavy Duty: recommended for use in fixed blade knives only and used for cutting thick dense sheet materials. These blades are ideal for
papermill slabbing and wallboard.
Snap-off: designed for quick replacement of sharp edge. They typically come in 7, 8 or 13 edges. Page
Special Purpose: designed to cut specific materials. 2370
Page 84

Hooker Cutters Glass Cutter

Multipurpose Knives • Cuts plate glass from 1⁄8w to 1⁄4w thick
• Perfect knives for cutting filmwrap, strapping, tape, • Ball end handle for snapping of scored glass
twine or foam • Steel wheel with honed 120° angle for cutting single and double strength glass
06526107 • Tooth design to remove rough edges
• Easy blade changes Cap. (In.) L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Made in USA: plastic handle, corrosion-resistant 1⁄4 5 8501 06637383 $3.14
steel head
• Spectrum: impact-resistant handle with blade storage 67552059
Description No. of Blades Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Handy Hooker 1 PHC — 06526107 $7.34
Snappy Hooker 3 Spectrum SH-701 67552059 8.28

2370 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
POCKET KNIVES

Basics of...Pocket Knives

Folding: most have stainless steel blades and Fixed: usually selected for convenience purposes
come in fine or partially serrated edges. Knives in one-handed operations. Blade lengths vary and
with a locking mechanism are recommended. are in fine or partially serrated
Page
2376
Page 85

Pocket Knives

01000017 63009419 00999946 00999995 63009328 01000009

00999961 48614630 63009435 63009336 63009393

01760040 48614465 74334798 74334772 01760024

01760032 63009385 00999920 00999888 63009369

®
A. Gerber Ultralight LST Folding Knife or E. & F. Gerber E-Z-Out™ Jr. Folding Knives L. & M. Gerber Descent Knives
I. Gerber LST® Drop Point Folding Knife • Partially serrated or fine blade • Fine edge or partially serrated blade • Lightweight
• Lightweight • High-carbon stainless steel blade • Opens easily with one hand • Textured handle • Open frame design • Low rise pocket clip
B. or T. or U. Timberline Workhorse Pocket Knife • Stainless steel blade • Carabiner clip to hook onto belt loops, back packs
• Fine edge or partially serrated blade and nylon cords
• A strong feature-packed folding knife • Reversible pocket clip G. & K. Winchester Jigged Bone Knives - Locked Back & Stockman N. & O. Gerber Remix
• G-10 handle provides strong construction with minimal weight • Strong, corrosion resistant, stainless steel blades • Fine edge or partially serrated blade
• Razor sharp stainless steel blade • Genuine jigged bone handles for a mix of tradition and durability • Lightweight but strong • One-hand opening
• Ambidextrous thumb studs ensure smooth one-handed open • Anodized aluminum handle • Corrosion resistant
and close operation H. Gerber Magnum LST® Jr. Folding Knife P. & AA. Winchester Shaped Wood Folder Knives
C. & D. Gerber Mini Remix • Lightweight • High-carbon stainless steel blade • Pocket clip for easy carrying
• Fine edge or partially serrated blade • Surgical stainless steel blade for strength and
• Unique pivot design • Pocket clip J. Winchester Yellow Boy Double Bolster Knife - 2.5w corrosion resistance
• Thumstuds for easy opening • Open frame design • Features surgical stainless steel blades and bolsters Q. & Z. Winchester Checkered Wood Folding Knives
Blade Closed OAL • Pocket clip for easy carrying
Key Desc. Blade Type L (In.) L (In.) (In.) Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Partially serrated blade • Liner lock
A Ultralight LST® Folding Knife Fine Edge 2 25⁄8 43⁄4 Gerber 6050 01000017 $18.63 • Surgical stainless steel blade for strength and
B Workhorse Pocket Knife Fine Edge 2 3 5 Timberline 4300 74334780 28.64 corrosion resistance
C Mini Remix Fine Edge 2 335⁄64 519⁄32 Gerber 30-000163 A63009419 25.31 R. Gerber Gator-Mate®
D Mini Remix Partially Serrated 2 335⁄64 519⁄32 Gerber 30-000164 A63009427 30.40 Smaller Version of the Gator®
E E-Z Out™ Jr. Serrated Folding Knife Partly Serrated 21⁄4 21⁄8 51⁄2 Gerber 6551 00999946 36.15 • Kraton covered handle
F E-Z Out™ Jr. Folding Knife Fine Edge 21⁄4 21⁄8 51⁄2 Gerber 6501 00999995 37.96 • Stainless steel blade • Fine edge
G Locked Back Jigged Bone Knife Fine Edge 21⁄2 3 51⁄2 Winchester 22-01777 A63009328 20.09 • Ballistic cloth sheath included
H Magnum LST® Jr. Folding Knife Fine Edge 25⁄8 31⁄2 61⁄4 Gerber 6058 01000009 27.20 S. Winchester Brass Folding Knives - 3.25w
I LST® Drop Point Folding Knife Fine Edge 25⁄8 31⁄2 61⁄8 Gerber 6009 00999961 26.64 • Comes with leather sheath
J Yellow Boy Double Bolster Knife Fine Edge 25⁄8 33⁄4 6 Winchester 22-09444 48614630 17.24 • Features surgical stainless steel blade
K Stockman Jigged Bone Knife Fine Edge 25⁄8 37⁄8 613⁄32 Winchester 22-01775 A63009310 22.62 • Wood handle inlays • Brass bolsters
L Descent Folding Knife Fine Edge 25⁄8 4 6 ⁄32
11 Gerber 30-000165 A63009435 31.64 V. & W. Timberline Kickstart Pocket Knives
• Partially serrated or fine blade
M Descent Folding Knife Partially Serrated 25⁄8 4 611⁄32 Gerber 30-000179 A63009443 31.64
• Utilizes rugged construction and sure comfort grip
N Remix Fine Edge 27⁄8 429⁄64 723⁄64 Gerber 22-01968 A63009336 30.40
• Fast Vallotton™ designed assisted opening folder
O Remix Partially Serrated 27⁄8 4 ⁄64
29 723⁄64 Gerber 22-01969 A63009344 30.40
that rapidly deploys the blade
P Shaped Wood Folder Knife Fine Edge 3 37⁄8 651⁄64 Winchester 30-000153 A63009377 19.00
X. & Y. Gerber Easy-Out™ Knives
Q Checkered Wood Folding Knife Fine Edge 3 37⁄8 613⁄16 Winchester 30-000155 A63009393 19.00
• Partially serrated or fine blade
R Gator-Mate® Fine Edge 31⁄8 41⁄8 71⁄4 Gerber 06149 01760040 40.99
• Opens easily with one hand
S Brass Folding Knife Fine Edge 31⁄8 41⁄4 71⁄4 Winchester 22-01323 48614465 15.38
• Textured handle for solid grip
T Workhorse Pocket Knife Partially Serrrated 31⁄4 41⁄2 73⁄4 Timberline 4301 74334798 38.18
• High carbon stainless steel blade
U Workhorse Pocket Knife Fine Edge 31⁄4 41⁄2 73⁄4 Timberline 4303 74334806 38.18
BB. & CC. Gerber Gator® Folding Knives
V Kickstart Pocket Knife Partially Serrated 31⁄4 45⁄8 8 Timberline 1141 74334764 66.82
• Partially serrated or fine blade
W Kickstart Pocket Knife Fine Edge 31⁄4 45⁄8 8 Timberline 1143 74334772 66.82
• Kraton™ covered handle
X E-Z Out™ Serrated Knife Partly Serrated 31⁄2 41⁄2 8 Gerber 06751 01760024 45.02
• Stainless steel blade
Y E-Z Out™ Knife Fine Edge 31⁄2 41⁄2 8 Gerber 06701 01760032 42.85 • Ballistic cloth sheath included
Z Checkered Wood Folding Knife Partially Serrated 31⁄2 413⁄32 71⁄2 Winchester 30-000156 A63009401 19.00
DD. & EE. Gerber Icon Folding Knives
AA Shaped Wood Folder Knife Fine Edge 3 ⁄2 4 ⁄16 8 ⁄64
1 11 13 Winchester 30-000154 A63009385 19.00
• Partially serrated or fine edge blade
BB Gator® Serrated Folding Knife Partly Serrated 33⁄4 47⁄8 83⁄4 Gerber 6079 00999920 50.87
• Aluminum handle with textured inlay for extra grip
CC Gator® Folding Knife Fine Edge 33⁄4 47⁄8 83⁄4 Gerber 6069 00999888 53.44 • Liner lock mechanism
DD Icon Folding Knife Partially Serrated 45⁄32 51⁄4 923⁄64 Gerber 30-000067 A63009351 38.95 • Dual thumbstuds for one-handed opening
EE Icon Folding Knife Fine Edge 45⁄32 51⁄4 923⁄64 Gerber 30-000068 A63009369 38.95

2376 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SCISSORS & SHEARS

Basics of...Titanium Bonded Scissors & Snips

Titanium Bonding is not a paint or a coating, but a process for applying a blend of titanium and other space-age materials to the surface of cutting blades in a way that
permanently bonds them together. It is an engineered metal treatment that has been documented to be better performing than the individual components by
themselves. It is one of the hardest materials in existence.
An application of the "Titanium Bonded" formula creates a super-hard outer shell on a cutting blade that is tough and long-lasting – 3 times harder than stainless steel.
The advantages are many: blades are sharper; blades stay sharper longer; and they better resist corrosion and adhesives. It’s perfect for cutting all types of material.

Page 86 Page 2382

Titanium Lightweight Scissors & Shears

• Titanium Nitride coating resists wear, scratches, and corrosion
• All models except 12-75817097 feature Softgrip contoured handles for superior grip and comfort
• Multi-purpose cutting
• Precision ground, hardened stainless steel blades 73532814
OAL LOC Handle 73530776
(In.) (In.) Desc. Type Handle Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
5 11⁄2 Detail Scissors Contoured Gray 01-005034 A73532806 $6.32
7 21⁄2 Office Scissors Contoured Gray 01-005038 A73532814 6.75
8 31⁄2 Shop Shears Straight Orange 12-71756984 74720459 14.38 74720459
81⁄2 31⁄2 All Purpose Scissors Softgrip Gray 01-004244 A73530677 13.93
81⁄2 31⁄2 Fabric Scissors Bent Orange 12-75817097 A73530776 14.56
81⁄2 31⁄2 Office Scissors Contoured Gray 01-004709 A73532772 7.18 79457560
91⁄2 4 Shop Shears Bent Orange 12-96536984 74720483 21.28
91⁄2 41⁄8 Shears Big Loop Orange & Black 12-71726984 79457560 26.05 73530677

Lightweight Scissors
Fiskars
• Ergonomic and lightweight
• Stainless steel blades
• Used for a wide variety of applications
• Ambidextrous handles 73531378 73530693
00144303
• TiN coating helps resist scratches, wear and corrosion
OAL LOC Handle Handle Fiskars
(In.) (In.) Desc. Type Material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
4 1 Mini Craft Straight Plastic 95077097 00144303 $11.96
79457602
51⁄2 11⁄2 Detail Cutting Straight Contoured Plastic 01-004681 A73531378 4.64 73530701
5 15⁄8 Micro-Tip® Straight Softtouch® 99216984 00144402 13.90
5 13⁄4 Micro-Tip® Straight Plastic 94817096 00144295 11.96
5 13⁄4 Nonstick Straight Plastic 99947097 04324521 12.47
8 13⁄4 Micro-Tip Scissor Straight Plastic/Softgrip 98887097 79457602 14.52
51⁄4 2 Compact Straight Plastic 01-005042 A73530057 2.54 73530768
5 2 Blunt Tip Double Thumb Loop Plastic 94917097 07430465 6.53 73530057
61⁄2 23⁄8 All Purpose Straight Plastic 94597797 A73531287 10.13
8 23⁄8 Micro-Tip Scissor Straight Plastic/Softgrip 94767097 79457594 16.54
7 21⁄2 All Purpose Straight Contoured Plastic 01-005037 A73531386 5.06
63⁄4 23⁄4 All Purpose Straight Double Thumb 94597097 08567042 12.06
81⁄2 3 Softgrip Scissors Straight Contoured Plastic 01-004761 A73532798 6.32 07430465 77209815
10 31⁄8 Multi-Purpose Shear Straight Softtouch® 99117097 00144386 18.72
8 31⁄2 All Purpose Offset Plastic 10007097 08097263 7.19
81⁄4 31⁄2 All Purpose Bent Plastic 01-004250 A73530685 5.49
81⁄8 31⁄2 All Purpose Straight Plastic 01-004253 A73530693 3.38
81⁄2 31⁄2 All Purpose Bent Plastic 01-004254 A73530701 3.38 73531287 08567000
81⁄2 31⁄2 Razor Edge Bent Plastic 12-75807097 A73530768 20.84
81⁄4 31⁄2 All Purpose Bent Ergonomic Plastic 94517397 A77209815 13.59
8 31⁄2 Multi-Purpose Straight Contoured Plastic 34527797 08567000 11.32
81⁄2 31⁄2 Razor Edged™ Straight Ergonomic 94547097 08567034 21.94
81⁄2 35⁄8 Nonstick General Purpose Bent Plastic 99977097 04324513 16.33
8 33⁄4 Softgrip Scissors Straight Plastic/Softgrip 12-98807797 79457586 16.33 79457594 08567034
12 41⁄8 Shop Shears Straight Softtouch® 79296984 00144378 26.40
93⁄4 41⁄2 All Purpose Bent Ergonomic Reinforced Plastic 94417097 A76510510 20.68
9 41⁄2 Razor Edged™ Shear Straight Ergonomic 94466984 00144253 26.16
91⁄2 41⁄2 Serrated w/Cutting Notch Bent Plastic 96526984 00144246 20.17 79457586
93⁄4 41⁄2 Bent Bent HD Contoured 94416297 08567018 21.13 73531386

Heritage
General Purpose 84385319
• Stainless steel blades precision ground and heat treated
• Ambidextrous handles 08567042 76510510
• Soft to the touch blue handles
OAL LOC Handle Handle Heritage
(In.) (In.) Desc. Type Material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 43⁄4 Heavy-Duty Bent Large Loop Plastic 7310 84385319 $16.03 73532798 08567018
12 51⁄2 Heavy-Duty Big Loop Plastic 7312 84385327 16.15

2382 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SNIPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & SNIPS

Basics of...Snips
Snips are available in a wide variety of models and versions for numerous industrial cutting and do-it-yourself applications. Snips are indispensable to maintenance
specialists and industrial workers in the sheetmetal, appliance, aircraft, automotive, electrical and construction industries.
Compound Action Snips
Allows a margin of strength far above the limit of hand power that can be exerted. Originally developed for cutting the extremely tough alloys used in the aircraft
industry (hence the nickname aviation snips), they are the favorite of most craftsmen who work with metal. Compound Action Snips are available in various versions:
• Bulldog: feature a shorter jaw design that withstands the strain of cutting heavy stock and tight curves
• Left Cutting: cutting left from tight curves to straight
• Right Cutting: cutting right from tight curves to straight
• Offset Jaw: help keep the users hand up and clear of the material being cut
• Pipe and Duct: for cutting any shape ducts, seams, sheet metal stock, vinyl tiles and plastic laminates
• Straight Cutting: for cutting left or right and straight into light stock Straight Offset
• Special Series: feature specially hardened jaws for cutting exotic metals
Tinners Snips
For cutting straight lines as well as curves, generally when cutting resistance is low. Traditional tools of the sheet metal, plumbing, heating, air conditioning and roofing
trades. These snips are available in various versions:
• Duckbill Pattern: for cutting tighter curves as well as straight
• Offset/Bent Pattern: feature offset blades that help keep the users hand up and clear of the material
being cut
• Straight Pattern: for cutting straight and wide curves as the flat face of the jaws guide the tool along a Duckbill Straight
straight line

Compound Action Snips Technical Information

Snips Selection Chart Metalmaster M1R, M2R, M6R & Tinner’s Snips Metalmaster Metalmaster Special Series Industrial Snips
Snips are widely used by home craftsman and M3R & M300 M7R M41R A & V Series MPC3 BXN M5R M1RS1 & M2RS1 W Series
professional metalworkers in gutter and flashing work, Do-It-Yourselfer ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
fabrication of heating and cooling ducts and for Roofer ✓ ✓ ✓
aluminum siding installation. These snips cut with half Mechanic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
the effort required of conventional snips. Autobody Worker ✓ ✓ ✓
Plumber ✓ ✓ ✓
The jaws of Wiss® Metalmaster® snips are made of extra Heating & Coolant Specialist ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tough and wear-resistant special molybdenum steel to Electrician ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
provide the extra service demanded by the compound Vocational Teacher ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
lever action and to withstand the severe strain of cutting Maintenance Worker ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
heavy stock or tight curves.
Wiss Snips for Special Jobs
To find the proper snips for your requirements, simply Notching & Nibbling Heavy Stock ✓ ✓
find your requirements in the listing. The applicable Cutting Curves ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Page
snips are indicated in the chart. Double Cut-Snips ✓
Page 87
Cutting Titanium Inconel, Inconel X & Stainless Steel ✓ 2388

Aviation Snips
NuLine Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Clauss
Wiss
• Drop forged chrome molybdenum alloy steel • Blades have serrated edges
• Cuts up to .050w cold rolled steel or .028w stainless steel • Metalmaster® Compound Action Snips have nonslip serrated
jaws made of extra tough wear resistant molybdenum steel
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. • Withstands severe strain of cutting heavy stock and tight curves
10 13⁄8 Left Red 09959818 $15.30 • Self-opening action for fast, effortless feed
06642508
10 13⁄8 Right Green 09959826 15.30 • Handle of high tensile strength alloy
10 13⁄8 Straight Yellow 09959834 15.30 steel exceeds hand power limit
09959818 • Nonslip textured grips for superior control, safety
Set and comfort
No. of Pcs. OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. OAL LOC Grip
(In.) (In.) Cuts Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 06642557
3 10 13⁄8 Left, Right and Straight Red, Green and Yellow 53463055 $37.91
93⁄4 13⁄8 Left Red M1R 06642508 $20.06
Offset 93⁄4 13⁄8 Right Green M2R 06642557 20.06
• Offset blades for safety 93⁄4 13⁄8 Straight Yellow M3R 06642607 20.06
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea.
General Purpose 06642607
93⁄4 11⁄4 Left Red 09959883 $15.58 09959883 • Spring-loaded blades for reduced fatigue on repeated cuts
93⁄4 11⁄4 Right Green 09959891 15.58 • Soft-touch co-molded handles for maximum comfort
• 420 Stainless blades provide maximum corrosion resistance
• Wire cutter notch for easy cutting of light-gauge wire
• Gauge Capacity (Steel): 0.0376 91874909
Long-Cut • Heavy-duty design is perfect for shop, garden and craft cutting jobs
• Cuts up to .0376w cold rolled steel or .0212w stainless steel OAL LOC
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Cuts Grip Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 3 Straight Yellow 09959842 $18.40 09959842 9 21⁄2 Straight Red & Black WEZSNIP 91874909 $10.95

Heavy-Duty Offset
• Cuts up to .024w stainless steel • Offset design keeps hands clear of metal
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. OAL LOC Grip
(In.) (In.) Cuts Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 11⁄2 Left Black 09959859 $17.84
10 11⁄2 Right Black 09959867 17.84 91⁄4 11⁄4 Left Red M-6R 06642946 $26.16
10 11⁄2 Straight Black 09959875 17.84 09959875 91⁄4 11⁄4 Right Green M-7R 06642953 26.16 06642946
Continued on next page

2388 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
HANDSAWS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & HANDSAWS

Basics of...Handsaws
Handsaws are generally for woodcutting, while Hacksaws are generally for cutting metal.
Hacksaws: handles are a D handle or pistol grip,
frames are available in different types:
Handsaws: available in different blade lengths for
• Fixed: single piece metal bridge uses only one size specific needs. Handles are generally made of wood
blade or composite materials, typically with a D handle grip.
• Adjustable: adjustable metal bridge accepts different Pistol Grip
size blades
Jeweler’s Saws: adjustable steel framed saw used to
• High Tension: features an adjustable frame that
make cuts in harder materials such as precious
prevents the twisting and binding of the blade when
metals. Lever pins in the frame turn to change the
bearing down
D Handle position of the blade.

Page 88 Page 2390

Handsaws
Irwin Marathon Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Stanley
Stanley
Standard Panel Saws
• M2™ Tooth Technology: advanced tooth geometry and Tri-Ground™ teeth provide a fast, efficient cut • Mfr’s #20-222 & 20-526: Saw blade
• Deep Gullets™ provide rapid removal of chips • Thick-Body™ Blade: delivers rigidity and control made of steel with induction-hardened
• Tapered-Pitch™ nose improves clearance and stability teeth for long lasting sharpness
• Mfr’s #15-335, 15-775, 15-726: Saw
ProTouch™ blade made of steel with resharpenable, 06565188
• Same features as above plus ergonomic handle design provides durability and comfort machined set teeth
Blade • Mfr’s #20-222, 15-335, 20-526: SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an aggressive
L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. three-sided tooth design that gives three cutting surfaces to cut 50% faster than
Standard conventional Stanley® handsaws
15 9 Wood 2011102 88427398 $16.67 • Mfr’s #20-222 & 20-526: Ergonomically designed handle is made out of high-impact
20 9 Wood 2011104 88427406 20.21 88427406 polypropylene and a textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and a slip
resistant grip
ProTouch • Mfr’s #20-222, 15-335, 15-775, 15-726: Handle design allows for the back of the saw
15 9 Wood 2011201 88427422 22.59 blade to be used for making 45° and 90° angles
15 12 Wood 2011200 88427414 21.41
20 9 Wood 2011204 88427455 26.16 Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
24 9 Wood 2011203 88427448 28.52 Heavy-Duty Saws w/Wood Handle
24 12 Wood 2011202 88427430 27.36 15 9 Wood/Drywall Cutting 15-085 07119886 $18.83
88427422 20 9 Wood/Plasterboard/MDF 15-087 74353699 26.20
15 9 Wood/Drywall 20-222 A84257377 17.30
Heavy-Duty Saws w/Wood Handle - Resharpenable
Nicholson 15 9 Wood/PVC/ABS Pipe 15-334 06565188 22.27
Economy Quik-Cut 20 9 Wood/Drywall 15-335 A09099664 31.11
• Precision set teeth for smooth cuts
• Hardened and tempered polished steel blades with resharpenable teeth for long life Fine Finish Saw w/Wood Handle
• Impact resistant plastic handle has mitre features for marking angles 26 12 Wood/PVC/ABS Pipe 20-065 01260611 35.33
Fine Finish Saws w/Cushion Grip
Blade 15 12 Wood, Plastic, Wood Flooring, Finish 20-526 A80377807 14.44
L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Work, Crown Molding
15 8 Wood/Plastic NS503 07070543 $8.17 20 12 Wood/Plastic 20-527 73038440 26.58
General Purpose Saw w/Plastic Handle
15 9 Wood/Plastic 15-579 07119894 11.92
General Purpose Saws w/ Plastic Handle - Resharpenable
Professional Handsaw 20 8 General Purpose - Wood, Drywall, 15-775 A84224468 8.25
• Precision set teeth for smooth cuts Framing, and Roofing
• Hardened and tempered polished steel blades 26 8 Wood/Drywall 15-726 A04381091 7.75
with resharpenable teeth for long life
• Hardwood handle
FatMax™ Panel Saws
Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Saw blade is 15% thicker than
conventional saws for straighter cuts
24 8 Wood/Plastic NS1501 07070519 $19.20 and less binding
• SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an 79753943
aggressive three-sided tooth design that gives three cutting surfaces to cut 50%
®
faster than conventional Stanley handsaws
Stanley • Ergonomically designed handle made out of wood
• Textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and slip resistant grip
FatMax™ Flooring Saw • Handle design allows for back of saw blade to be used for making 45° and 90° angles
• Lacquered blade for corrosion protection • BladeArmor™ composite coating helps to protect the blade with 2x more rust
• Ground teeth on nose for plunge cuts protection, 6x more abrasion protection and 50% less friction when compared to
• Ergonomically designed handle made out Stanley lacquered saws
of high-impact polypropylene
• Textured rubber grip over mold to Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
41853102
provide comfort and slip resistant grip 15 9 Wood/Plastic 20-045 67379479 $26.48
Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. w/Bladearmor™ Coating
12 14 Wood 17-204 41853102 $19.28 15 9 Wood/Drywall 20-046 09447103 25.85
20 9 Wood/Drywall 20-047 79753943 28.98
SharpTooth™ Drywall Saw FatMax™ Back/Miter Box Saws
• Lacquered blade for corrosion protection • Lacquered blade for corrosion protection
• SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an aggressive three-sided tooth design that gives • SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an aggressive three-sided tooth design that gives
three cutting surfaces to cut 50% faster than conventional Stanley® handsaws three cutting surfaces to cut 50% faster than conventional Stanley® handsaws
• Unique tooth design reduces burring • Saw stop prevents base damage to miter box
• Ergonomically designed handle made out of high-impact polypropylene • Ergonomically designed handle made out of high-impact polypropylene
• Textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and slip resistant grip • Textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and slip resistant grip
Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
15 9 Abrasive Drywall 15-025 04209623 $18.86 14 14 Wood/Plastic 17-202 41853094 $17.03

2390 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
CORDLESS FLASHLIGHTS & WORK LIGHTS
36V Cordless Flashlight Heavy-Duty Cordless/
Corded Work Light
• Flex-neck design allows for hands-free use and versatility to stand or • 38W Fluorescent worklight runs on 12-18V NiCd, NiMH or Li-Ion DeWalt
hang the light batteries or AC power source
• Wide angle beam of light is brighter than conventional flashlights • Provides area lighting without the extreme heat of halogen lighting
• Runs on 36V high performance batteries for long run-time and battery life • Power outlets offer jobsite versatility
• Xenon bulbs provide an extra bright beam of light • Spring loaded battery receptacle keeps batteries in place during transport
• 8 Hours run-time on 1 charge • Compact design for quick and easy fold-up, transport and storage
• Battery and charger not included • Lumens: 2700 • Run time: 1 hour on 18V DC9096 battery
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
DC509 76145127 $73.77 DC020 08162901 $118.34

Work Light with GFCI & Charger M12™ & M18™ Cordless Work Lights
• 2D 38W fluorescent light and GFCI protection with • M12 Work light equipped with 90° pivoting head and integrated magnet
dual port power tool battery charger • Run time: 1.5 hours for both
• Compact, fold-up design features durable base • For 12V replacement battery, Order #09351420
and is easy to hang for wall use • M12 equipped with 135° rotating head and foldaway utility back
• Built-in cord wrap • 3 GFCI outlets • For 18V replacement battery, Order 89868822
• Convenient 3 tools in 1: corded/cordless light,
GFCI outlet and charger for cordless batteries Volts Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Charger Input Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 12 49-24-0145 71863864 $28.32 49-24-0145 49-24-0171
18 49-24-0171 71863872 57.52
Dual Port DC022 09233388 $211.89

V28® Cordless Work Light M12™ Cordless LED Work Light

• 160 Lumen LED provides a 2x brighter and whiter beam than
• Faceted reflector offers bright uniform beam incandescent bulbs
• Swivel head • 50,000 hour LED runs longer and cooler than incandescent bulbs
• Compatible with Clip-Lok™ belt attachment • Sealed, aluminum head is impact and weather resistant
• Run time: 5 hours • Magnetic back and rotating head for convenient, hands-free use
• Battery not included • 12 Volts
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
49-24-0185 82065392 $36.18
49-24-0146 A63191613 $82.00

18V Cordless Fluorescent Area Light

M18™ Cordless LED Work Light
• Built-in telescoping and 360° rotating hook for ease of hanging
• Over-molded lens for durability • 4x Run-time LED’s run longer and cooler than incandescent bulbs
• 13 Watt fluorescent bulb provides bright area lighting • Provides 50,000+ hours of a brighter and whiter light beam
• Twist and lock tool-free lens cover for easy bulb change • Sealed, aluminum head is impact and weather resistant
• Pre-heat circuit helps eliminate blackening at bulb base • Integrated hook and rotating head for convenient hands-free use
• Runs on 18V battery system for longer run-time • Battery and charger not included • 18 Volts • 160 Lumens
• Requires DC9096 battery, sold seperately • 3.5 Hours run time
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
DC527 53466090 $69.48 2735-20 A87133039 $72.49

Basics of...Battery Packs for Cordless Power Tools

Types of Power Tool Batteries
NiCd (Nickel Cadmium): are primarily used in cordless power tools. Key advantages include fast & simple charging, good shelf-life, good job-site performance and
economical pricing. NiCd batteries have a low energy density and hence are used in 2.4V-18V power tools. Keep in mind that although a voltage higher than 18V might
provide more power, the result will be a more cumbersome tool due to the extra weight. NiCd batteries last between 500-800 cycles when properly maintained. NiCd
batteries contain toxic materials and recycling is mandatory. Some countries, such as the European Union, even restrict usage.
NiMh (Nickel-Metal Hydride): higher energy density, more environmentally friendly and can be used in higher voltage tools to include 19.2V, 24V & 36V. However, they
are bulkier, heavier, have less cycle time (lasting 200-300 cycles) and a shorter shelf-life than the NiCd batteries. Performance in extreme weather can be
compromised, thus their usage in power tools is limited.
Li-ion (Lithium-ion): pack more energy in a single cell than all other batteries. This allows cordless power tools to be more compact with a lighter weight and a longer
run-time while still offering the same or more power. For instance, a 28V battery offers up to 2 times the run-time of an 18V battery but at a lighter weight. Other
advantages include longer life cycle, more consistent power performance, no self-discharge, environmentally “green” and performs well in extreme weather conditions.
Li-ion batteries require circuit protection to maintain safe voltage and current levels, so be sure to check for this type of protection. Some power tool manufacturers
use this circuit protection to provide additional battery features such as a fuel gauge and over-load protection. Use only manufacturer’s suggested battery and/or
specified charger.
Maintaining & Charging a Battery
Do’s: Don’ts:
• Keep battery pack in a cool, dry location when not in use • Do not charge in wet conditions
• For NiCd and NiMh batteries, recharge packs every 3 months if not used • Do not tape the tool trigger or place in a flashlight to drain the battery down
regularly. The longer shelf-life of Li-Ion does not require frequent recharging (Li-ion and most Ni-Cd/NiMh do not have a memory effect thus there is no
• Keep battery packs cool while in use. If pack feels hot during heavy use, need to drain the battery to fully discharge)
allowing it to cool before proceeding will extend the life, especially with NiCd • Do not leave the pack on a charger that is not plugged in as the charger
and NiMh circuitry may cause a small drain on the pack causing it to discharge faster
• Choose a charger with a maintenance mode for NiCd and NiMh batteries than if the pack was removed from the charger
• Adhere to the charging and optimal operating temperatures noted in the
instruction manuals
The above are general guidelines. For specific information, always refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2468 NOTE: DO NOT USE HAND TOOL ACCESSORIES IN POWER DRIVEN PRODUCTS. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
Page 89
ELECTRIC RECIPROCATING SAWS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Magnetic Socket Drivers Driver Sets
• Hardened core for extra strength • Quickly change among 6 drivers to increase speed
OAL Insert • Store all 6 drivers in 1 holder • Include most common geometries
(In.) Size (In.) Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. DW2330 Consists of: DW2336 Consists of:
17⁄8 1⁄4 Socket Driver DW2218B 80485543 $3.69 • Phillips® #2/slotted #8 • (2) Intermediate tubes
17⁄8 5⁄16 Socket Driver DW2219B 80485568 3.78 Socket Driver • Square #2/square #1 • Phillips® #1/Phillips® square
29⁄16 1⁄4 Socket Driver DW2221B 80485626 3.48 • 1⁄4w Nutsetter • Torx #15/Torx #20 • Square #1/square #2
29⁄16 5⁄16 Socket Driver DW2222B 80485634 3.59 • 5⁄16w Nutsetter • Phillips® #2/slotted #8 • Holder
29⁄16 3⁄8 Socket Driver DW2223B 80485642 3.70 Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
29⁄16 — Acoustic Eyelag DW2225 02764520 7.20 Acoustic Eyelag
6-In-1 Driver 4 Pc. Set DW2330 06762876 $16.19
6-In-1 Driver 7 Pc. Set DW2336 06762884 21.06 DW2336

Basics of...Power Saws

Chop: Used to make a quick, accurate crosscut in a workpiece. Abrasive chop
saws, for cutting extremely hard or thin material, use an abrasive wheel that
wears away slowly during the cutting process. Dry cut chop saws, specifically
used for cutting metal, utilize a carbide toothed blade that makes a clean, fast
cut requiring no prep work after cutting. Both saws are typically used in metal-
cutting applications.
Circular: Portable saws for fast, straight cuts. Wood-cutting circular saws are
designated by blade diameter with larger diameters providing deeper cuts.
Metal-cutting circular saws are designed with gearing needed to cut metal while
still incorporating necessary safety features. There are two types of circular
saws: top handle saws, which have a more conventional design and application
and worm saws, which are commonly used for framing applications as they
provide a higher torque than the conventional top handle models.
Hack: Powered by an electric motor or connected to a stationary engine. Most
hacksaws are immovable saws, although some portable models exist.
Stationary models usually have a mechanism to lift up the saw blade on the
return stroke and might have a coolant pump to prevent blade overheating.
Jig: Utilizes a reciprocating motion to cut (based on the blade selection) a
variety of soft or hard materials. Ideal for cutting radius curves such as
stenciled designs or custom shapes into wood, metal or other material allowing
for a more artistic use than saws that cut in straight lines.
Miter: Used for woodworking projects where accuracy of cuts are required.
Common uses include framing operations and the cutting of molding. Miter
saws are designed to complete multiple cuts, such as cross, miter, bevel or
compound cuts in wood, based on application. Some saws feature larger blades
and sliding rails for increased material cutting capacity in applications such as
cutting stair risers and larger crown moldings. A miter saw makes cuts by
pulling a spinning circular saw blade down onto a workpiece in a short
controlled motion.
Page 90
Panel: Ideal for cutting large sheets into sized parts. Panel saws typically fall
into two categories, vertical, which use less space, and horizontal. They are
typically used to cut plywood, melamine, aluminum or plastic sheets.
Portable Band: For cutting metal accurately and quickly. The saw blades
constantly engage the material and leave a clean, burr-free cut. Band saws can
be used for metalworking or for cutting a variety of other materials and are
particularly useful for cutting irregular or curved shapes while still producing
straight cuts.
Reciprocating: A type of saw in which the cutting action is achieved through a
push/pull reciprocating motion of the blade and is able to cut a wide variety of
materials based on blade selection. Ideal for construction/demolition, metal
cutting or nail-embedded wood cutting. Versatility is based on the many
accessory options available. Features include variable speed controls and the
inclusion of an orbital action which allows the blade to move in an oval pattern
which increases speed in wood cutting applications.
Scroll: Designed to create tight and intricate radius cuts in wood. The saw
utilizes a reciprocating action, along with thin blades, to create curves with
edges. A large, flat base allows for precise curves and provides a secure work
surface to turn the material. An advantage is that the blade can be removed and
placed into a pre-drilled starting point, allowing for cuts within surface
boundaries.
Spiral: Uses a rotary-spinning motion to make precise cuts in a wide variety of
difficult-to-cut material, from drywall to ceramic tiles. Originally designed for
making precise, clean cut-outs in drywall, it was discovered that a myriad of
materials could easily be cut with this saw.
Note: Please utilize all safety considerations when operating these types of tools.
Page
2484

VS Dual Action Quik-Change™ Electric Variable Speed

Tiger Saw® Kit Tiger Saw
• Heavy-duty 120 volt, 11.5 amp motor • Front gear housing scrolls 360° with 12 positive
provides maximum power for all stop locations
cutting applications • Blade can be installed upside down to allow for better reach
• Electronic variable speed, 0-2600 SPM, in tight fitting applications
maintains speed under load for • Maximum stroke length: 11⁄4w
smooth, consistent cutting • Maximum strokes per minute: 0 to 2900 • Amperage: 11.5
• Full 11⁄8w cutting stroke length cuts more stock in less time than shorter stroke saws
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Quik-Change™ blade clamp for keyless blade changes in seconds
• Quik-Change™ front shoe can be extended to utilize 9750 86701562 $283.51
more of the blade’s teeth in the cutting action
• Allows for orbital cutting in wood and reciprocating
cutting in metal for increased versatility
• Blade can be installed upside down to allow for Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 Amp Electric Reciprocating Saw Kit
better reach in tight fitting applications
9748 A02925246 $330.12
• Includes: heavy-duty case and operating manual • 4 Position blade clamp allows for flush cutting and
increased versatility
• Powerful 10.0 Amp motor for heavy-duty applications
• Lever-action keyless blade clamp for easy blade changing
• 0-2800 strokes per minute and 11⁄8w stroke length
deliver fast cutting
• Variable speed trigger provides improved control Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 2 Piece set includes: saw and heavy-duty kit box DW304PK 09250762 $130.67

2484 NOTE: DO NOT USE HAND TOOL ACCESSORIES IN POWER DRIVEN PRODUCTS. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
STAPLERS, STAPLES, NAILS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Upholstery Stapler & Staples 1w & 11⁄2w Narrow Crown
Stapler Kits & Staples
US58 - 22 Ga., 3⁄8w Upholstery Stapler Kit
• Drives 18 gauge staples with 1⁄4w crown
• Uses SENCO “C” type, 22 gauge, 3⁄8 crown staples for 1⁄4w to 5⁄8w long • Split nose design for easy removal of jammed staples
• 3⁄4w Nose extension for limited clearance fastening
• Long life, maintenance-free motor prevents work surface staining
• Steel cap for durability • Holds 185 staples • Internal piston catch for consistent power on every shot
• Operating pressure: 70 - 120 psi • Weight: 13⁄4 Lbs. • Rear exhaust keeps contaminants away from work
Upholstery Stapler • Selectable trigger has restrictive or contact activation mode
• Integrated rubber grip for improved comfort
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Special hardened driver blade and strong, lightweight die-cast
US58 01916600 $114.50 aluminum body
• Capacity: 100 staples • Fastener size: 18 Gauge
Staples • Operating pressure: 70-120 psi 84546282
L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg. Fastener L (In.)
Min. Max. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Kits Include:
1⁄2 PUS12G A81149692 $8.04 • Stapler • 1000 #18g 1w staples
5⁄8 PUS58G A81149718 9.02 1⁄2 1 NS100B 84546282 $118.16 • 1⁄4w fitting • Safety glasses
3⁄8 PUS38G A81149700 7.71 • 10,000 Per box • 22 Gauge
1⁄2 11⁄2 NS150B 84546308 140.64 • Carrying case
Narrow Crown Staples
• 18 Gauge • Galvanized steel • 1⁄4w Crown width 74964255
L Pkg. L Pkg.
(In.) Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg. (In.) Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg.
1⁄2 5000 PNS18050 A74964255 $9.93 1 5000 PNS18100 A74964297 $12.37
5⁄8 5000 PNS18063 A74964263 13.97 11⁄4 5000 PNS18125 A74963539 14.72
3⁄4 5000 PNS18075 A74963521 14.72 11⁄2 5000 PNS18150 A74964339 15.15
7⁄8 5000 PNS18088 A74964271 16.05

Finish & Framing Nails

Size Pkg. Size Pkg.
(In.) Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg. (In.) Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg.
Angled Finish Nails 11⁄4 5000 PBN18125 74962747 $14.70
1 4000 PDA15100 A81149601 $27.59 11⁄2 5000 PBN18150 74962754 16.86
11⁄4 4000 PDA15125 A81149619 29.12 13⁄4 5000 PBN18175 A74963620 15.42 16 Ga. Straight 18 Ga. Brad Nails
11⁄2 4000 PDA15150 A81149627 31.90 2 5000 PBN18200 74962762 20.41 Finish Nails
13⁄4 4000 PDA15175 A81149635 38.81 Round Head Decking - Smooth Shank
2 4000 PDA15200 62509534 38.91 2 6000 FR13200 62509617 64.72
2 4000 PDA15200G A81149643 48.51 23⁄8 5000 FR13238 62509633 75.23
21⁄2 4000 PDA15250 A81149650 49.92 23⁄8 5000 FR13238G 62509641 85.81
21⁄2 4000 PDA15250G A74962614 76.26 3 4000 FR20300 62509658 82.83
Straight Finish Nails Round Head Framing - Smooth Shank Angled Finish Nails:
1 2500 PFN16100 74963943 7.81 31⁄4 4000 FR31325 62509625 92.33 • 15 Gauge, bright, basic steel, chisel point type, 34° strip angle
11⁄4 2500 PFN16125 A81149668 10.51 Clipped Head Decking - Smooth Shank Straight Finish Nails:
• 15 Gauge galvanized steel, chisel type point
11⁄2 2500 PFN16150 74963984 11.97 2 5000 FC13200 62509559 70.33
Brad Nails:
13⁄4 2500 PFN16175 A74964008 12.09 23⁄8 5000 FC13238 62509567 73.14
• 18 Gauge galvanized steel with chisel point type
2 2500 PFN16200 74962721 15.51 3 2500 FC20300G 62509583 59.77 Round Head Nails:
21⁄2 2500 PFN16250 74964032 17.87 Clipped Head Decking - Ring Shank • Round head, smooth shank, coated steel, 22° strip angle which fits
both 20 and 22° strip nailers
Brad Nails 23⁄8 5000 FCR13238 62509575 98.60
Framing Nails:
5⁄8 5000 PBN18063 A81149593 8.08 Clipped Head Framing - Smooth Shank • 18 Gauge galvanized steel, chisel type point
3⁄4
5000 PBN18075 A88470885 8.47 3 2500 FC31300 62509591 70.96 Clipped Head Nails:
1 5000 PBN18100 74962739 11.69 • Clipped head, smooth shank, coated steel, 34° strip angle

When Using Grinders…

Basics of...Pneumatic Grinder Safety
• Do not use tools if actual free speed exceeds the nameplate RPM
• Before mounting a wheel, after all tool repairs and whenever a grinder is issued for use, check the free speed of the grinder with a tachometer to make certain its
actual speed at 90 psig (6.2 bar/620 kPa) does not exceed the rpm stamped or printed on the nameplate. Grinders in use on the job must be similarly checked at least
once each shift
• Always use the wheel guard furnished with the grinder. Failure to do so could result in injury
• Do not use any wheel for which the operating speed listed on the blotter is lower than the actual free speed of the grinder
• Inspect all grinding wheels for chips or cracks prior to mounting. Do not use a wheel that is chipped or cracked or otherwise damaged. Do not use a wheel that has
been soaked in water or any other liquid
• Make certain the grinding wheel properly fits the arbor. The wheel should not fit too snugly or too loosely. Plain hole wheels should have about 0.007w (0.17mm)
maximum diametrical clearance. Do not use reducing bushings to adapt a wheel to any arbor unless such bushings are supplied by or recommended by
the wheel manufacturer
• After mounting a new wheel, hold the grinder under a steel workbench or inside a casting and run it for at least 60 seconds. Make certain no one is within the
operating plane of the grinding wheel. If the wheel is defective, improperly mounted or the wrong size and speed, this is the time it will usually fail
• When starting a cold wheel, apply it to the work slowly until the wheel gradually warms up. Make smooth contact with the work, and avoid any bumping action or
excessive pressure
• Always replace a damaged, bent or severely worn wheel guard. Do not use a wheel guard that has been subjected to a wheel failure
• Make certain the wheel flanges are at least 1/3 the diameter of the grinding wheel, free of nicks, burrs and sharp edges. Always use the wheel flanges furnished by the
manufacturer; never use a makeshift flange or a plain washer
• Guard opening must face away from operator. Bottom of wheel must not project beyond guard
• Always use a wheel blotter between each wheel flange and the wheel. The blotters must be at least as large in diameter as the wheel flanges
• Do not attempt to disassemble the controller. The controller is available only as a unit and is guaranteed for the life of the tool if it is not abused

2532 NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
Page 91
 TECHNICAL INFORMATION & PNEUMATIC GRINDERS

Basics of...Pneumatic Tool Conversion Tables

Torque Conversion — In./Lbs. (Nm) Torque Conversion — Ft./Lbs. (Nm) Torque Conversion Factors
In./Lbs. Nm In./Lbs. Nm In./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm Ft./Lbs. Nm To Convert Into Multiply By
5 0.6 50 5.7 140 15.8 1 1.4 26 35.3 51 69.2 76 103.1 110 149.2 Inch Pounds Foot Pounds 0.0835
10 1.1 60 6.8 150 17.0 2 2.7 27 36.6 52 70.5 77 104.4 115 156.0 Inch Pounds Newton meters 0.113
15 1.7 70 7.9 160 18.1 3 4.1 28 38.0 53 71.9 78 105.8 120 163.0 Inch Pounds Kg-meters 0.0115
20 2.3 80 9.0 170 19.2 4 5.4 29 39.3 54 73.2 79 107.1 125 170.0 Inch Pounds Kg-Cm 1.1519
25 2.8 90 10.2 180 20.3 5 6.8 30 40.7 55 74.6 80 108.5 130 176.3 Foot Pounds Inch Pounds 12
30 3.4 100 11.3 190 21.5 6 8.1 31 42.0 56 75.9 81 110.0 135 183.1 Foot Pounds Newton meters 1.356
35 4.0 110 12.4 200 22.6 7 9.5 32 43.4 57 77.3 82 111.2 140 190.0 Foot Pounds Kg-meters 0.1382
40 4.5 120 13.6 8 10.9 33 44.8 58 78.7 83 112.6 145 197.0 Foot Pounds Kg-Cm 13.824
45 5.1 130 14.7 9 12.2 34 46.1 59 80.0 84 114.0 150 203.4 Newton meters Inch Pounds 8.844
10 13.6 35 47.5 60 81.4 85 115.3 155 210.2 Newton meters Foot Pounds 0.737
11 14.9 36 48.8 61 82.7 86 117.0 160 217.1 Newton meters Kg-meters 0.102
Air Pressure Conversion 12 16.3 37 50.2 62 84.1 87 118.0 165 224.0 Newton meters Kg-Cm 10.2
psi 1
kPa 2
bar 13 17.6 38 52.0 63 85.4 88 119.3 170 231.0 Kg-meters Inch Pounds 86.81
14 19.0 39 52.9 64 86.8 89 121.0 175 237.3 Kg-meters Foot Pounds 7.234
85 586 5.9 15 20.3 40 54.2 65 88.1 90 122.0 180 244.1 Kg-meters Newton meters 9.804
90 620 6.2 16 21.7 41 55.6 66 90.0 91 123.4 185 251.0
95 655 6.6 Kg-Cm Inch Pounds 0.8681
100 690 6.9 17 23.1 42 57.0 67 90.9 92 125.0 190 258.0 Kg-Cm Foot Pounds 0.0723
125 860 8.6 18 24.4 43 58.3 68 92.2 93 126.1 195 264.4 Kg-Cm Newton meters 0.092
19 25.8 44 60.0 69 93.6 94 127.5 200 271.2
1
Preferred: Approximate to the nearest 5 kPa 20 27.1 45 61.0 70 94.9 95 129.0 225 305.1 Miscellaneous Conversion Factors
2
Approximate to the nearest 0.5 Bar 21 28.5 46 62.4 71 96.3 96 130.2 250 339.0 To Convert Into Multiply By
22 29.8 47 63.7 72 97.6 97 131.5 275 373.0 Inches Millimeters 25.4
23 31.2 48 65.1 73 99.0 98 133.0 300 407.0 Millimeters Inches 0.0394
24 32.5 49 66.4 74 100.3 99 134.2 350 475.0 Pounds Kilograms 0.4536
25 33.9 50 67.8 75 102.0 100 135.6 400 542.4
Kilograms Pounds 2.205 Page
psi bar 0.069
Page 92 bar psi 14.5 2533

Pneumatic Right Angle Grinders Pneumatic 1⁄4w In-Line Grinder

Series 12 for Carbide Burs & Mounted Wheels • Free speed: 25,000 RPM
• Nominal motor power of 0.6 or 0.9 HP • Operate on 90 psi • Front exhaust • Horsepower: 0.60
• Safety lever standard • Collet size: 1⁄4w • Collet size: 1⁄4w • Air inlet size: 1⁄4w
L Head Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Mfr’s # HP Exhaust RPM (In.) Ht. (In.) Order # Price Ea. 60311651 116GLFB-250-C4 60312501 $457.47
12L2218-36 0.6 Rear 18000 7.5 2.7 60311651 $683.78
12L2718-36 0.9 Rear 18000 8.0 2.9 60311669 787.77
Extended Straight Die Grinder
• Lock off throttle • Low dBA • Variable speed regulator • Length: 13w • Collet capacity: 1⁄4w
Die Grinders • HP: 0.46 • Rear exhaust • CFM: 25 • RPM: 22000
• .9 Horsepower for extra stall resistance Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Safety lock-off throttle RP9112Q-B 79027280 $301.59
• Ergonomic SoftTouch™ coating provides ultimate
comfort and reduced vibration
• Best for continuous heavy-duty grinding • Rear exhaust
• RPM: 22,000 • Air inlet size: 1⁄4w Pneumatic In-Line Grinders
• CFM: 22 • Spindle thread: 3⁄8-24 • Collet capacity: 1⁄4w 67096842
L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. With Extension - For Carbide Burs or Mounted Wheels
6 UT8728 67096842 $208.19 • HP: 0.3 • psi: 90
12 UT8728E 167096859 364.34 • Collet size: 1⁄4w • Front or rear exhaust
1
67096859 12L1181-36
Extended
Mfr’s # Desc. Exhaust RPM L (In.) Order # Price Ea.
10L1100-36 3w Extension Front 28000 7.63 60312378 $615.12
1⁄4w 10L1101-36 5w Extension Front 28000 9.63 60312386 635.39
Straight Die Grinders 12L1181-36 5w Extension Rear 28000 10.9 60312360 601.62
1
12L1101-36 5w Extension Front 28000 10.9 60312410 581.33
• Adjustable power regulator • Lock off throttle prevents accidental start ups 1
• Excellent for blending, smoothing, and deburring • 1⁄4-28 Spindle thread Safety lock off lever
Style RPM HP CFM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Standard-Duty 22000 0.50 26 CP872 04989869 $64.64 Pneumatic In-Line Grinders
Heavy-Duty 24000 0.50 14 CP860 94127230 121.77 CP872
Mfr’s # HP Exhaust RPM L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Series 12 for Carbide Burs &
12L1003-36 0.3 Front 25000 6.0 60312063 $352.82 Mounted Wheels
1⁄4w Pneumatic In-Line Die Grinders 12L1000-36 0.3 Front 30000 6.0 60312048 352.82
1
12L1001-36 0.3 Front 34000 6.0 60312055 352.82
12L1082-36 0.3 Rear 25000 6.0 60312097 374.50
• Compact, lightweight for operator comfort • Ergonomic safety lever: no accidental starts 12L1080-36 0.3 Rear 30000 6.0 60312071 374.50
• Great for die and mold work, deburring • Air Inlet: 1⁄4w • Collet Size: 1⁄4w
• Aluminum housing for harsh environments • Includes: 1⁄4w collet and wrench 12L1081-36 0.3 Rear 34000 6.0 60312089 374.50
1
12L2002-01 0.6 Front 18000 6.9 60312147 419.09 • Operate on 90 psi
Exhaust L 12L2001-01 0.6 Front 20000 6.9 1
60312139 419.09
HP RPM Location (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • All grinders equipped with
12L2000-01 0.6 Front 25000 6.9 60312113 419.09 1⁄4w collets
Standard-Duty Straight Die Grinder 12L2000-36 0.6 Front 25000 7.5 60312121 439.38
0.3 30000 Rear 4.6 10L1080-36 71088116 $386.01 12L2081-01 0.6 Rear 20000 6.9 60312162 442.07
0.3 30000 Front 4.6 10L1000-36 95156840 363.11 12L2080-01 0.6 Rear 25000 6.9 60312154 442.07
Straight 12L2502-01 0.9 Front 18000 7.3 60312212 519.14
0.9 23000 Front 6.3 10L2500-01 03687175 532.13 10L1080-36 12L2500-36 0.9 Front 23000 8.0 60312204 540.76
0.9 23000 Front 6.9 12L2500-01 60312196 444.65 12L2580-01 0.9 Rear 23000 7.3 60312238 544.81 1
Lever throttle

NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270 2533
 PNEUMATIC RATCHETS, NUTRUNNERS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Pneumatic 3⁄8w & 1⁄2w High Speed Pneumatic Pulse Tools
Quiet Ratchets
• 3x Increase between oil changes to minimize maintenance
• Quiet operation at 84 dBa • 3 Chamber air motor increases torque and lowers cycle time
• New TriSpring™ anti-slip head design • Inertial shut-off system simplifies pulse unit and removes
which virtually eliminates slippage variability due to pulse fluid
• Ergonomic grip • Easy setup • 90 psi • Inlet size: 1⁄4w
• 360° Adjustable exhaust Drive Max. Max.Torque 02135549
• Easy touch variable speed trigger for speed Size (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. RPM CFM (Ft./Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
control on all types of work
3⁄8 CP7828 02978773 $171.69 6000 23 40 55PTHD603 02135598 $2524.72
• RPM: 240 • Max. torque: 60 Ft./Lbs. 1⁄2
• CFM: 4 • Inlet size: 1⁄4w CP7828H 02978781 175.77 6500 19 25 35PTHD653 02135549 2277.61

Pneumatic 1⁄4w In-line

Impact Nutrunner 1⁄2w Drive Pneumatic Ratchet
• 100% Ball bearing design • High power to weight ratio • Built-in speed control/regulator
• Reversible • Max. RPM: 10000 • Max. torque: 10 to 65 Ft./Lbs. 1⁄2w Ratchet with 75 Ft./Lbs. of torque for demanding applications.

• 1700 IPM • 90 psi • Comes with detachable belt clip • Reversible • Front exhaust directs air away from operator
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Lever throttle • Steel housing for long life
• Extended tool length provides increased leverage
MP2266 81779258 $429.72
Mfr’s # OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea.
UT2010 141⁄2 09840901 $191.15
3⁄8w Pneumatic Production Nutrunners

Pneumatic 1⁄4w Pistol Grip Nutrunners

7RLL2C6 5RLN2C6
• Mfr’s #14RAA04AM2 supplied with stall
Max. Torque CFM @ Max. • Mfr’s #14RAA11AH3 has a precision Clecomatic clutch shut-off
(In./Lbs.) CFM Load RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Industrial grade • Ergonomic handle • Slide button reverse
100 6 27 1400 7RLL2C6 44208056 $1421.05 • Ergonomic design • 1⁄4w Quick-change chuck
1
110 4 17 600 5RLN2D6 05019591 1027.97 • Lightweight • 90 psi • Accurate and durable high performance tool 14RAA04AM2
110 4 17 600 5RLN2C6 80455629 1325.00 • Handle type: straight line • Inlet size: 1⁄8w • 90 psi • 14 CFM
130 9 31 600 41AA6LTS6 65000432 1746.00 • Inlet size: 1⁄4w Drive Torque
265 6 27 500 7RLN3D6 05023635 1216.36 Desc. Size (In.) (In./Lbs.) RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1
Reversible Right Angle Lever Handle 1⁄4 4-43 950 14RAA04AM2 65037780 $1304.11
Right Angle Level Handle 3⁄8 10-100 340 14RAA11AH3 78812021 1529.15
1⁄4w & 3⁄8w Drive Pneumatic Ratchets
1⁄4w and 3⁄8w ratchets provide quick rundown. Supported
ring socket retainer for quick socket changes. Lever
Pneumatic 1⁄2w Pistol
throttle provides convenient throttle access. Grip Impact Nutrunners
• Ball bearings for durability • Reversible 63240949
12 Pc. Kit Includes: Speed of a Screwdriver, Power of an Impact Wrench
7 Pc. Standard Socket Set: • 100% Ball bearing design • High power to weight ratio
• 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 9⁄16, 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 11⁄16, 3⁄4w • Built in speed control/regulator • Reversible
• 1 Slotted, 2 Phillips Screwdriver bits 63240956 • Comes with detachable belt clip • Max. free RPM: 10,000
• 3⁄8w Universal joint • Female to male drive extension bar • Blows per min.: 1,700 • Maximum torque: 10-65 Ft./Lbs.
• Blow mold case • Mfr’s # MP2264 is 1⁄4w drive quick change
Size (In.) CFM OAL (In.) RPM Max. Torque (Ft./Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • Mfr’s # MP2265 is 3⁄8w drive square
1⁄4 3 65⁄16 200 18 63240949 $52.62 Bolt Cap. (In.) Drive Size (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
3⁄8 4 10 150 50 63240956 57.78 1⁄2 1⁄4 MP2264 05452172 $429.73
3⁄8 4 10 150 50 63241913 76.72 1⁄2 3⁄8 MP2265 05449129 429.73
63241913

Basics of...Pneumatic Impact Wrenches

Impact wrenches feature a high RPM rotary-vane air motor coupled to a hammering
mechanism. Energy from the motor is converted into a series of high intensity rotary
blows used for assembly and removal of various fasteners. Impact wrenches provide
fast-free speed rundown before impacting and have the ability to remove stubborn
fasteners with their rapid hammering action. Impact wrenches weighing only 21⁄2 Lbs.
can provide over 280 Ft/Lbs of torque.

Impact Wrench Selection Criteria

Bolt or Fastener Size: the size and type of bolt or fastener used in the application, as well as the required torque, will effect the selection of the best impact wrench.
Consulting an "Impact Wrench Bolt Selection Chart" will help you determine the drive size and torque output of your impact wrench.
Torque Requirement: the torque required is usually obtained by a combination of the fastener size, joint type and accessory being used. If an extension bar and/or a
universal joint are used, then a higher torque impact wrench is selected to compensate for the torque lost, usually 15-20% when using these types of accessories.
Joint Type: joints are divided into either hard joints or soft joints. Hard joints are characterized by a metal to metal make up and are also referred to as hard slam joints.
Once the fastener is seated there is less than 30 ° of fastener rotation to reach full torque. Often, soft joints must draw the mating pieces together or compress
additional materials in the joint such as a gasket. Once the fastener is seated there is at least 720° of fastener rotation.
Handle Configuration: the most popular style of impact wrench is the pistol grip. The grip style handle is most common on larger impact wrenches of 1" and 11⁄2" drives.
Straight “inline” impact wrenches and impact drivers are most commonly found in the 3⁄8" and 1⁄4" hex drive sizes.
Socket Retainer: the socket retainer is the mechanism used to retain a socket or accessory. The most common types and applications follow:
• Ring: found in automotive applications where sockets are changed frequently
• Pin: used in industrial assembly applications where the user assembles the same size fastener in an assembly line setting
• Combination ring/thru-hole: most popular style found on heavy duty automotive and industrial impact wrenches with drive sizes 3⁄4" and above
• Quick Change: commonly found on small impact drivers that use the 1⁄4" hex quick change retainer for driver bit retention
• Spline Drive: commonly found on larger impact wrenches used for off-road vehicle service, steel erection and high torque requirements

NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270 2551
Page 93
PNEUMATIC SCREWDRIVERS & TORQUE GUIDE

Basics of...Screw Torque Guide

Screw Low Carbon Steel Stainless 18-8 Brass Silicon Bronze Aluminumn 2024-T4 Stainless 316 Monel
Size (In./Lb.) Nm (In./Lb.) Nm (In./Lb.) Nm (In./Lb.) Nm (In./Lb.) Nm (In./Lb.) Nm (In./Lb.) Nm Maximum Torque for Screws
2-56 2.2 0.25 2.5 0.28 2.0 0.23 2.3 0.26 1.4 0.16 2.6 0.29 2.5 0.28 Torquing values for screws are offered
2-64 2.7 0.31 3.0 0.34 2.5 0.28 2.8 0.32 1.7 0.19 3.2 0.36 3.1 0.35 as a guide. Tests were conducted on
3-48 3.5 0.40 3.9 0.44 3.2 0.36 3.6 0.41 2.1 0.24 4.0 0.45 4.0 0.45 dry, or near dry, product. Fastener
3-56 4.0 0.45 4.4 0.50 3.6 0.41 4.1 0.46 2.4 0.27 4.6 0.52 4.5 0.51 tension is held at a factor somewhat
4-40 4.7 0.53 5.2 0.59 4.3 0.49 4.8 0.54 2.9 0.33 5.5 0.62 5.3 0.60 less than yield point.
4-48 5.9 0.67 6.6 0.75 5.4 0.61 6.1 0.69 3.6 0.41 6.9 0.78 6.7 0.76
5-40 6.9 0.78 7.7 0.87 6.3 0.71 7.1 0.80 4.2 0.48 8.1 0.92 7.8 0.88
5-44 8.5 0.96 9.4 1.06 7.7 0.87 8.7 0.98 5.1 0.58 9.8 1.11 9.6 1.09
6-32 8.7 0.98 9.6 1.09 7.9 0.89 8.9 1.01 5.3 0.60 10.1 1.14 9.8 1.11
6-40 10.9 1.23 12.1 1.37 9.9 1.12 11.2 1.27 6.6 0.75 12.7 1.44 12.3 1.39
8-32 17.8 2.01 19.8 2.24 16.2 1.83 18.4 2.08 10.8 1.22 20.7 2.34 20.2 2.28
8-36 19.8 2.24 22.0 2.49 18.2 2.01 20.4 2.31 12.0 1.36 23.0 2.60 22.4 2.53
10-24 20.8 2.35 22.8 2.58 18.6 2.10 21.2 2.40 13.8 1.59 23.8 2.69 25.9 2.93
10-32 29.7 3.36 31.7 3.58 25.9 2.93 29.3 3.31 19.2 2.17 33.1 3.74 34.9 3.94
1⁄4-20 65.0 7.35 75.2 8.50 61.5 6.95 68.8 7.77 45.6 5.15 78.8 8.90 85.3 9.64
1⁄4-28 90.0 10.20 90.0 10.20 77.0 8.70 87.0 9.83 57.0 6.44 99.0 11.20 106.0 12.00
5⁄16-18 129.0 14.60 132.0 14.90 107.0 12.10 123.0 13.90 80.0 9.04 138.0 15.60 149.0 16.80
5⁄16-24 139.0 15.70 142.0 16.10 116.0 13.10 131.0 14.80 86.0 9.72 147.0 16.60 160.0 18.10
Page 2562
Page 94

1⁄4w Pneumatic Screwdrivers Pneumatic Screwdrivers

Auto Shut-Off
• Ergonomic handles with SoftTouch™ coating
• Tools shut off when set torque is reached
CP780 RP2755 • Through handle exhaust w/silencing
RP2041 • Best for high volume assembly • Drive size: 1⁄4w 67096982
RPM Torque (In./Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Built in quick-change 1⁄4w hex chuck • Easy forward reverse valve Straight
• Air inlet: 1⁄4w • Air regulator on in-line screwdrivers CP782 1100 45 UT8962-11 67096982 $676.62
Type Clutch Type Torque (In./Lbs.) RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 1700 30 UT8962-17 08211732 676.62
In-line Rocking Dog 142 10000 RP2041 79027199 $351.02 Pistol Grip
In-line Rocking Dog 248 10000 RP2037 79027207 351.02 1100 45 UT8963-11AT 67096990 723.45
Pistol Cushion Clutch 31 - 44 1800 CP780 80510522 352.71 1700 30 UT8963-17AT 67097006 723.45 67096990
Pistol Direct Drive 124 2200 RP2755 79027231 282.59
Pistol Direct Drive 230 900 RP2765 79027249 357.55
Pistol 6 Position Adj 363 5600 RP2042 79027223 351.02 Pneumatic 1⁄4w Screwdrivers
Pistol Rocking Dog 372 15000 RP2041 79027215 351.02
Straight Cushion Clutch 31 - 44 1800 CP782 80510530 352.71 All-Purpose Screwdrivers for Industrial Applications

Pneumatic Production Screwdrivers

MP2477 MP2453 MP2436

SA054C • Well suited for production line assemblies • Convenient one-handed operation
• Full ranges of speed, torque and clutch for a variety of applications
• Balanced design offers easy handling and control to reduce operator fatigue
• Maximum parts interchangeability • Pistol grip handles • Air inlet: 1⁄4w
• Direct drive: rotates fastener until resistance overcomes motor power and motor stalls, torque
is set by adjusting air pressure
• Versa Clutch™ allows operator to externally adjust clutch plates providing full range of torque
Clutch Type RPM Torque (In./Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
SG052B-17-Q SG053B-17-Q Adjustable 1100 17 - 140 MP2478 79026407 $364.19
SG051B-10-Q
Adjustable 1800 30-100 MP2477 08806663 353.80
Positive Clutch: For soft draw applications. Allows motor to run without bit turning until Adjustable 2800 12 - 75 MP2476 79026399 367.41
pressure is applied. Torque pressure is determined by the force applied by the operator Direct Drive 1100 52 - 70 MP2454 79026365 270.73
and the ratchet time.
Direct Drive 1800 75 MP2453 74118746 242.33
• All are reversible • Use 5⁄16w hose size • Air Inlet NPTF 1⁄4w Direct Drive 2800 30 - 65 MP2452 00711929 266.42
Style Type L (In.) RPM Torque CFM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Positive 1100 85 - 140 MP2466 79026381 293.28
Positive 1800 54 - 120 MP2465SR 79026373 295.44
Pistol Woodworking 6.6 1800 6.2 27 7672-A18 05956560 $307.14
Inline Shut Off 10.25 1000 15-80 25 SA054C-10-Q 05956578 1041.29 Positive 2800 75 MP2464 79465985 261.83
Inline Shut Off 10.25 800 15-100 25 SA054C-8-Q 05956586 1041.29 Versa Clutch™ 1100 5-140 MP2437 03896123 391.06
Versa Clutch™ 1800 17-100 MP2436 05073317 323.37
Pistol Stall 8.9 1000 90 25 SG051B-10-Q 05956594 566.35
Pistol Positive Clutch 8.9 1700 65 25 SG052B-17-Q 05956602 611.41
Pistol Adj. Clutch 8.9 1700 10-60 25 SG053B-17-Q 05956610 720.82
Pneumatic Positive
Clutch Screwdriver
1⁄4w Pneumatic Pistol Grip Screwdriver • Balanced design offers easy handling
and control to reduce operator fatigue
Accepts all 1⁄4w hex screwdriver bits. • Rugged aluminum housing with
• Reversible • Adjustable clutch heat treated for durability comfort grip
• Accepts up to 3⁄16w machine screws • Outstanding power
• Torque range: 45-100 In./Lbs. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Air Inlet (In.) RPM CFM Torque (In./Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • Reversible • 1⁄4w Hex quick change
1⁄4 1800 4 45-115 63240998 $104.29 • Side to center: 13⁄16w • RPM: 1800 MP2465 63253322 $236.01

2562 NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
PAINT SPRAYERS & FOAM ADHESIVES/SEALANT TECH INFO
Rechargeable 1 Quart Sprayer 21⁄2 Gallon
Portable Sprayers Production Paint Tank
OZONE FRIENDLY - No CFC’s or Hazardous Propellants One-piece seamless steel tank is coated to resist corrosion. Heavy-duty
Provide high quality uniform coverage of virtually any liquid. These atomizer sprayers offer an aluminum cover. Combination carrying handle and ladder hanger. Includes
economical alternative to aerosols. For use with bulk lubricants, solvents, coatings, pesticides, pressure regulator with gage, 10v air and paint hoses and disposable liner.
etc. All three models are equipped with a palm lever trigger, removable cap and a standard tire Full sized opening accepts a gallon paint can. Weight 15 Lbs.
valve stem for fast, convenient air pressurization of up to 200 psi. Height: 9w. Diameter: 41⁄4w. Desc. Order # Price Ea. (May be used with Order
Steel Canister with Enamel Finish for use with oil base and Paint Tank 09225251 $273.46 #09225319, 09225301 or
noncorrosive materials. Includes an adjustable plastic nozzle Disposable Liners 109225269 38.63 09225202 sprayer guns.)
which provides for an extra fine to pin stream spray.
1
Chrome-Plated Brass Canister (lightweight liquids) for use with corrosive Disposable liners make clean up easier and quicker - comes in
caustic materials as well as with oil or water based materials. Includes an package of 5. Resistant to most common solvents.
adjustable plastic nozzle which provides for an extra fine to pin stream spray.
Chrome-Plated Brass Canister (heavier type liquids) for use with corrosive
caustic water and oil based materials as well as some heavier liquids and some paints.
Includes an all-brass nozzle which provides for a solid cone shaped extra fine mist pattern.
Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Enameled-Steel w/Adjustable Plastic Nozzle 09225459 $44.45
Chrome-Plated Brass w/Adjustable Plastic Nozzle (Lightweight Liquids) 09225467 71.01
Air Hose with Fittings
Chrome-Plated Brass w/Brass Nozzle (Heavier Weight Liquids) 09225509 73.53
602 Replacement Nozzle A98142805 8.11 Length (Ft.) Price Ea. •
Order # Designed to fit directly on paint sprayers
Filler Valve Assembly A03741378 5.02 • Hose is pliable to work with the application
5.0 09135054 $18.66 • Industrial grade rubber hose
15 09225418 28.29 • Comes with 1⁄4w NPT female ball seat swivel
25 09225426 38.68 fittings

Sprayers
1 Quart Refillable & Rechargeable Sprayers
Each includes 2 interchangeable nozzles; 1 general purpose mist and 1 pin stream
• Environmentally safe • Completely portable
• Use bulk liquids and save
Spray Booth Accessories
• Eliminates aerosol disposal problems
Peelable Spray Booth Coatings
Material Use with Order # Price Ea. Protect spray booth walls from dangerous, flammable overspray
Chrome-Plated Brass Water Soluble 00684043 $63.32 build-up. Easy-on, easy-off. These coatings will also provide corrosion
Steel Non-Water Soluble 00684050 46.21 resistant protection during storage and shipping; protect or mask
glass, acrylics or plastic surfaces; protect work surfaces and laboratory
tables from spills and radiation build-up. Coverage: 150 Sq.Ft./Gal.
Solvent base; 250 Sq.Ft./Gal. Waterbase. Waterbase meets California
VOC requirements Coatings meet OSHA and EPA requirements.
Size Price Ea.
Atomizer Model “B” Sprayers (Gal.) Base Sprayable Brushable Color Order # 1-3 4+
1
5 Solvent x White 00240002 $152.03 $136.83
The Sensible Alternative to Aerosols 5 Solvent x x Clear 1
00240028 132.90 119.61
1
• Designed to spray virtually any light liquid, ounce for ounce, 5 Waterbase x x White 00240044 209.36 188.42
bulk chemicals are far more economical than aerosols 5 Waterbase x x Clear 00240069 199.14 179.23
• Pressurize with standard air chuck to 80-150 psi
¹DOT REGULATED. May require special handling.
• Spray a full container of liquid with a single charge of air
Spray Booth Floor Protector W (In.) Order # Price Ea.
Pressure Sprayers A high grade, absorbent, flame-retardant floor
protector that reduces fire hazard and complies 36 00240085 $96.73
Capacity Material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
with OSHA and NFPA maintenance regulations. 42 00240101 112.65
7 oz. Aluminum 8200PL A05419411 $26.62 60 00240127 152.56
Rolls are 100 Lbs., white, 300v long.
16 oz. Aluminum 8000PL A95966347 34.83
16 oz. Nickel Plated Aluminum 8100PL A01356096 42.35 Spray Booth Filters
05419411 95966347 01356096
Minimum purchase case quantity.
Accessory for use w/Pressure Sprayers 8200PL, 8000PL & 8100PL
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. W (In.) L (In.) Ht. (In.) Material Case Qty. Order # Price/Case
16 oz. Aluminum Complete Valve Assembly B51 A95966354 $6.94 20 20 2 DuoPad 100 00240143 $83.47

Basics of...Foam Adhesives/Sealants/Void Fill

Foam Sealants: insulate and deliver an air-tight seal for HVAC related applications, providing cost savings. Cured product is completely inert and can easily be cut,
sanded and shaped in 1 hour. Foam sealants also have a superior yield compared to caulk sealants.
Disposable Spray Foam Kits: come in user friendly dispensing systems which contain all materials needed to spray. Foam spray kits provide superior insulation
performance and deliver an air-seal at merely ½” depth. Kits use a non-flammable, non-ozone depleting propellant.
Void Fill Foam Kits: can be poured into voids before curing. Longer cure times allow the product to fill any cracks and voids completely. Void fill foam can be used to
add structural support, deaden sound, prevent vibration and provide buoyancy.
Polyurethane Foam Adhesives: are moisture cured products that create an extremely strong bond between various materials. These foam adhesives will expand to fill all
uneven surfaces and voids without the use of solvents that degrade polystyrene. Polyurethane foam adhesives provide between 10-30 times the yield of caulk-based
adhesives, with up to 5 times the bond strength.

Foam Adhesives/Sealants/Void Fill - Advantages & Disadvantages

Advantages Disadvantages
Adheres to most surfaces Product may bubble in high heat >200°F
Superior yield compared to caulk sealants Cures with an uneven surface
Enhances structural rigidity UV will deteriorate cured foam
Foams are cuttable in 1 hour Foam should be painted with a basic latex to prevent deterioration
UL Class 1-rated

2604 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 95
CAULKS, SEALANTS & VULCANIZING SILICONE TECH INFO
Industrial Grade Fast Set Urethane Sealant Latex Caulk
Bostik 1100FS sealant is a one-component fast curing architectural grade urethane sealant Speed load caulk designed for interior and exterior applications. Ideal for gap filling
capable of dynamic joint movement totaling 50% of original joint geometry. Cures to a tough, and repairing cracks. Adheres well to wood, brick, aluminum, vinyl, fiberglass, and
flexible rubber when exposed to moisture present in the atmosphere. other common building materials. Cleans up with water.
• Dries tack-free in 100 minutes • White available in 10.1 oz. cartridge • Approximate tooling time: 5-10 min.
• Tenacious adhesions to metal, aluminum, glass and wood • Paintable • Approximate cure time: 48 hrs.
• Federal Specification TT-S-00230C Type II, Class A • Temperature range: 0°F to 180°F • Low odor
• ASTM C920-87 Type s, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A and M • Resistant to cleansers
• Canadian Standard CAN/CGSB-19.13 Unit Size Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Container Case Price Ea. 10.1 oz. White GE14563 06904981 $4.53
Color Size Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Less than Case Case Qty.
White 10.3 oz. 24 1100FS-WH 03353851 $9.47 $9.00
Gray 10.3 oz. 24 1100FS-GY 03353869 9.47 9.00
Black 10.3 oz. 24 1100FS-BK 03353877 9.47 9.00 Professional Grade
Construction Adhesives
Construction Polyurethane Sealant CONTECH PL - Premium: A polyurethane adhesive that provides
superior results. Cures three times faster. For interior and exterior
use. Exceeds AFG-01, ASTM C 557, ASTM 3498, FHA-UM60.
One Component Architectural Grade Polyurethane Sealant - Bostik Chem-Calk® 915 is designed for PL - Polyurethane Roof/Flashing Sealant: Seals between wood
sealing expansion and control joints in precast concrete panels and metal curtain walls, perimeter and metal or flashing around chimney bases, wells. Water and
sealing of door and window framing and other building components. Cures to form a durable, weatherproof, maintains its flexibility in extreme temperatures.
flexible, water-tight bond with most building materials. Paintable. Complies with TT-S-00230C Type II Class A.
Works with: PL - Polyurethane Door/Window/Siding Sealant: Ideal for
• Stone • Masonry • Ceramics • Marble • Wood • Steel • Aluminum • Many plastics installing or repairing, remains flexible, and is paintable,
Work Price Ea. stainable and sandable. Bonds metal, wood, vinyl and other
Container Temp. (°F) Case Less Case materials. It offers the end-user a 50 year life. Complies with
Color Size Min. Max. Mfr’s # Qty. Order # than Case Qty. TT-S-00230C Type II Class A.
White 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-WH 24 03353943 $6.70 $6.36 PL - Polyurethane Concrete/Masonry Sealant: Seals gaps in concrete and masonry structures.
Stone 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-ST 24 03353950 6.70 6.36 Remains flexible during temperature fluctuations, paintable, stainable, sandable. Seals out Radon
Aluminum 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-AL 24 03353968 6.70 6.36 Migration. Complies with TT-S-00230C Type II Class A.
Limestone 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-LS 24 03353976 6.70 6.36 Case Price Ea.
Bronze 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-BZ 24 03353984 6.70 6.36 Desc. Size Qty. Order # Less than Case Case Qty.
Tan 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-TAN 24 03353992 6.70 6.36 PL - Premium 10.2 oz. 12 00233528 $4.55 $4.09
PL - Premium 28 oz. 12 00233544 9.77 8.79
PL - Roof/Flashing Caulk 10.2 oz. 12 00233643 6.88 6.19
Marine Grade Urethane Sealants PL - Door/Window/Siding - White
PL - Concrete/Masonry Sealant
10.2 oz. 12
10.2 oz. 12
00233668
00233684
6.88
6.88
6.19
6.19
920 Urethane & 920FS Fast Set Urethane - One-part, gun grade sealant/adhesives that moisture
cure to an extremely tough, resilient seal exhibiting excellent tear and abrasion resistance, while
retaining permanent elastomeric properties. Offers tenacious adhesion to most common marine
substrates, including virtually all woods, metal, FRP and most plastics. Can be used as either an
Urethane Sealant
adhesive or as a sealant. Recommended for above and below the water line.
Single-component, gun-grade caulk. Urethane sealant has outstanding
920 920FS adhesion properties to concrete, masonry, glass, plastic, wood,
• Extended open time • Fast setting (tack-free in 90 minutes) aluminum and most other metals.
• Outstanding weatherability and adhesion to • Similar weatherability as 920
various materials • Bonds, seals and waterproofs • Temp. resistance up to 180°F
• Max. working temperature: 180°F
Container Case Price Ea.
Color Size Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Less than Case Case Qty. Size Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
White 10.3 oz. 24 920-WH 03353885 $9.97 $8.97 10.2 oz. Cartridge Gray 39916 05969357 $14.52
Black 10.3 oz. 24 920-BK 03353893 9.97 8.97 Note: Customers must have a DUNS or Federal Tax ID (FIN) number
White 10.3 oz. 24 920FS-WH 03353901 10.61 9.55 in order to purchase these products, since these items are
Black 10.3 oz. 24 920FS-BK 03353919 10.61 9.55 RESTRICTED FOR SALE TO CONSUMER USERS DUE TO VOC LAWS.

Basics of...Room Temperature Vulcanizing Silicones

RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanizing) Silicones can aggressively adhere to and readily release from most surfaces. They are also good for sealing, filling spaces
between surfaces and gasketing. They adhere to rigid and flexible substrates including metal, glass, fiberglass (fiberglass reinforced panels), cement, canvas, rubber,
plastic, ceramics and wood. Since they don’t run, they’re good for vertical and overhead applications.
One-Component RTV’s require no mixing and vary in viscosity. They have high fuel and oil resistance, high tensile strength, excellent electrical insulation and low
volatility. Acetoxy Cure Silicone Sealants are excellent for use in construction and industrial applications due to their high and low temperature stability. They cure by
reaction to moisture in the atmosphere. Alkoxy Neutral Cure Silicones offer exceptional adhesion and are non-corrosive to most metals. They are typically used on
substrates in contact with fuel, solvents and chemicals. Use the chart below to help make a product selection.
By Product Corrosive Best Adhesive Substrate Odor Tack-Free Time Cure Rate Optimum Temperature Range
ACETOXY CURE Acetic Acid Yes Glass, Plastics, Most Metals Yes Fast Fast - 65°F - 400°F
ALKOXY NEUTRAL CURE Alcohol No Glass, Plastics, Most Metals Low Moderate Slow - 75°F - 400°F
Page
Page 96 2608

High Temperature Sealants Solvent Resistant Sealant

RTV106 Acetoxy Cure FRV1106
• High temperature red paste adhesive with FDA, USDA, NSF, MIL-A-46106B Red Fluorosilicone paste adhesive with excellent resistance to fuel,
and UL compliance oil, moisture, UV light, ozone and chemicals. Typical applications
• Typical applications include sealing heating elements, gasketing, electrical include formed-in-place gasketing, sealing seams, fuel handling
insulation, sealing and bonding systems, sealing, bonding and valve manufacture. Offers
• Offers primerless adhesion to a variety of substrates • Fast tack-free time primerless adhesion to a variety of substrates. Fast tack-free time.
Container Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
2.8 oz. Tube RTV106 3TG 06904734 $14.55 Color Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10.1 oz. Cartridge RTV106 12C 06904742 35.79 Red 5.4 oz. FRV1106 06S 06904726 $228.27

2608 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
FIRESTOP SEALANTS & BARRIERS & ADHESIVES TECH INFO
Fire Related Sealants
• Withstands temperatures up to 2000°F High Heat Mortar Patch
• Sets rock hard when fired • Can also be used for patching and sealing around fireplaces and wood-burning stoves
• Easy water clean-up • Withstands temperatures up to 2000°F • Sets rock hard when fired • Easy water clean-up
• Fire rated • Draft stop • Meets ASTM E136
Fire Stop Silicone Sealant Polyurethane Fireblock Foam Sealant
• Classified for sealing fire-rated, noncombustible service • Quickly fill and seal large gaps around vents, pipes, ducts and wires; and at wall-to-floor
penetrations and construction joints in horizontal and or ceiling-to-floor joints
vertical fire separations • For use in Type V residential construction, the foam is bright orange for easy code
• Elastomeric - capable of ±25% dynamic joint movement identification and expands 21⁄2 to 3 times its dispensed size
• Meets ASTM E 814/UL 1479 and UL 2079 specifications • Just one can of this expanding foam yields up to fifteen large caulk tubes
Desc. Color Container Size Max. Temp. (°) Order # Price Ea.
Fire Stop Silicone Sealant Limestone 10.1 oz. 160 A02572618 $14.96
High Heat Mortar Patch Black 10.1 oz. 2000 A02571503 3.76 High Heat Polyurethane Fireblock
Polyurethane Fireblock Foam Sealant Orange 12 oz. 240 A02572675 12.07 Mortar Patch Foam Sealant

Intumescent Firestop Putty Intumescent Firestop Pillows

Fast acting two stage expansion for combustible or SpecSeal® Series SSB
noncombustible penetrants. Soft and pliable for easy hand Lightweight easy to install pillows are particularly well suited for fire stopping medium to large
moldable application. Nonhardening for easy removal and openings utilizing data, communications, power or control cables, interduct and cable trays.
retrofit. UL classified, FM approved. 36 Cu. In. tube. When exposed to fire, pillows expand in all directions to form a tight seal. Each pillow is
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. encapsulated in a heat-sealed poly bag for clean, easy installation. SSB pillows are easily
removed and reinstalled for retrofitting of cables. UL classified, FM approved.
SSP100 06652358 $35.68 Series SSP Thick. (In.) W (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1 4 SSB14 07215767 $28.23 • Maximum in-service
Fire Rated Mortar 2
2
4
6
SSB24
SSB26
07215775 28.76 temperature: 130°F
07215783 33.59 • Firestop pillow length: 9w
3 6 SSB36 07215791 36.58
An economical, lightweight nonshrinking, noncracking
Portland cement-based firestop product. Yields approximately
1250-1425 Cu. In. UL classified, FM approved. 6 Gallon pail.
FLAME Buster®
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
SSM106 06652366 $108.06 Intumescent & High Heat Sealants
• Single-component sealants and caulks
• Resists spread of fire, smoke and toxic gases
Intumescent Firestop Sealant • Meets several ASTM construction specifications
• Easy application and cleanup • 10 oz. container
Fast acting two stage expansion for combustible or Mfr’s #WL8801010 Mfr’s #WL8802020
noncombustible penetrants. Water-based for easy installation • Intumescent high performance • Heat resistant silicone caulk
and cleanup. Stops flame and smoke from spreading through silicone based caulk • High temperature resistant
walls, floors and other construction openings. Remains • Use with most construction materials
flexible and will not re-emulsify after curing. Sandable and • Interior and exterior use
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
paintable when dry. UL classified, FM approved. Mfr’s #WL8803030
• Acrylic latex caulk WL8801010 65139404 $8.05
Container WL8802020 65139412 7.13
Mfr’s # Size Type Order # Price Ea. • Use with all common
building materials WL8803030 65139420 3.11
SSS100 10.50 oz. Tube 06652333 $15.28

Basics of...Adhesives
Use this chart as a handy reference to determine the proper adhesive for your application. As it was compiled from various manufacturer’s recommendations, this chart contains only the names of
the types of adhesives and no specific brand names.
Which Adhesive Is Best?
Type Advantages
Anaerobics • Moderately priced • High strength on some substrates • Flexibility to form tough bonds • Limited gap cure • Not advised for some plastics or rubber substrates
• Rapid cure at room temperature • Good solvent and temperature resistance
• Versatile • Various Viscosities • Non-toxic • Single component • Infinite pot life
• No mixing required • Dispenses easily from package • Easily automated
Cyanoacrylates • Rapid cure at room temperature • Excellent adhesion to rubber or plastics
• Good adhesion to metal • High tensile strength • No mixing required
• Infinite pot life • Dispenses easily
Epoxies • Usually low priced • Good gap filling capabilities • High strength • Versatile
• Good temperature resistance • Easily dispensed
• Wide range of formulations
Hot Melts • Low price • Good gap filling capabilities
• Rigid to flexible bonds available
• Fast setting
Methacrylates • Usually low to moderately priced • Good gap cure
• Good impact resistance and flexibility • Good peel and shear strength
• Medium to fast cure • Wide range of formulations • Tolerant of dirty surfaces
Silicones • Moderately priced • Good gap filling capabilities
• Good for bonding glass to most other substrates • Easily applied from package
• Flexible • Good water resistance • Various viscosities and colors
• Excellent temperature resistance, 400° to 500°F
• Excellent sealant for low stress applications
Urethanes • Moderately priced • Excellent toughness and flexibility
• Good flexibility at low temperatures • Excellent adhesion to a wide range of materials
• Varying cure time • One or two component, room or oven cure available
Disadvantages
• Will not cure where air contacts adhesive (wet fillets)
• Requires primer for many materials • 300° to 400°F Temperature limitation
• Higher priced • Limited gap cure • Poor durability on some surfaces
• Low solvent resistance • Low temperature resistance • Bonds to skin • Toxicity
• Exothermic reaction creates thinning of adhesive during cycles
• Two components, mixing required
• Exact proportions needed for optimal strength • Toxicity • Low pot life
• Waste • Single component usually requires refrigeration and heat cure
• Usually low strength • Poor wetting • Low heat resistance, degrades as heat rises
• Usually low solvent resistance • Stringy and messy
• Parts must be mated before adhesive cools • Poor on part life
• Requires special dispensing equipment • Difficult to automate
• Usually requires dispensing equipment • Low heat tolerance, 180° to 250°F
• Limited pot life • Two component products require mixing
• Some odor problems • Flammable
• Low strength • Limited solvent resistance • Too flexible for structural loads
• Expensive to automate • Most need moisture to cure • Corrosivity
• Some odor when curing • Hard to clean • Slow curing
• One component, short shelf life
• Poor temperature resistance • Sensitive to moisture in cured and uncured state
• May undergo reversion with heat and moisture
• Two component mixing or one component toxicity
• Short pot life • Requires special equipment to mix and dispense

2612 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 97
INDUSTRIAL MARKERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Layout Fluid Removers Fountain Brush In Bottle
Remover specially formulated to remove layout fluids quickly. May also be Consists of soft hair brush with hollow handle attached to squeezable
used to remove light oils, greases, many other types of paint and other translucent bulb. 5 oz. polyethylene bottle. One charging of bulb can
markings on metal or glass items. (Note: May harm certain plastics.) be brushed on approx. 350 sq. in. surface area.
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals Case Price Ea.
Container Net Case Price Ea. Size (oz.) Qty. Order # Less than Case Case Qty.
Size Type Fill Brand Qty. Order # Less than Case Case Qty. 5 36 00264317 $13.61 $12.25
16 oz. Aerosol Can 123⁄4 oz. Sprayon 12 00264655 $5.09 $4.58
16 oz. Aerosol Can 12 oz. Dykem 12 00264143 9.99 8.99
1
32 oz. Bottle 32 oz. Dykem 12 00264127 10.22 9.20
1 Gal. Can Dykem 4 1
00264135 27.20 24.48 Spill Master™
1
DOT REGULATED. May require special handling. Perfect container for cutting fluids, layout Avoid Messy & Costly Spills
fluid and lubricants. Its unique design
prevents spills - even when turned Color Order # Price Ea.
completely upside down. Molded from Red 09520057 $7.51
durable polyethylene for years of use. White 09520065 7.51
Comes complete with an applicator brush. Blue 09520073 7.51

Basics of...Industrial Markers

Although there are no formalized regulations regarding process or quality control identification, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) has set many
guidelines for in-going or out-going identification of component parts and finished goods within a manufacturing facility. These requirements dictate accurate
identification of parts for both manufacturing and quality control needs.
Industrial hand-held markers are used for wide variety of industrial applications. From quality control identification to marking lines on steel for cutting with a torch,
each application has different requirements for the hand-held marker.
The substrate used to mark could be liquid or solid, paint, ink, wax-based crayon, or pencil lead. The container used to hold the marking substrate could be metal,
plastic or a simple paper wrap. The tip (or nib) used to transfer the substrate to the surface being marked could be polyester, felt, synthetic fiber, metal ball-bearing, or,
in the case of solid markers, a direct transfer from the marker to the surface.
Finally, the surface temperature of the marking surface can dictate the marker substrate formula, as in marking newly formed hot steel. Nearly every industrial
application for marking requires a different type of marker.
Marker manufacturers have developed markers that are appropriate for the marking surface and type of mark required for the application.
Considerations when Selecting an Industrial Marker
• Marking Surface Type: what is the marking surface (i.e. steel, aluminum, wood, plastics, etc.)? Does the substrate have any special characteristics (i.e. oily, rusty,
frozen, etc.)? Paint markers mark through oil and water and are good for use on surfaces that are dirty, rusty or rough. Ink markers work best on clean, dry surfaces
and dry much quicker than paint markers.
• Temperature of Marking Surface: is the surface at ambient (room) temperature or very hot (i.e. newly formed steel)? Page
• Application: what are the characteristics of the desired mark (i.e. permanent, easily removable, temporary, width of mark etc.)? 2628
Page 98

Valve Action® Paint Markers Bleed Thru™ Paint Marker

Valve Action® Paint Markers A fast drying, valve action ink marker that remains visible after the mark has been painted over. It
• New and improved specially formulated is ideal when used for fabricating metal or plastic where marks are required to bleed through a
paint for industrial applications primer coat covering the marks.
• Xylene-free paint meets or exceeds major safety regulations such as California Proposition 65, • Makes permanent marks on plastic, metal, glass and most nonporous surfaces
EPA HAPS and SARA 313 • Can be used to permanently identify inventory, assemblies, machines or finished products
• Bright, bold marks dry in 30-45 seconds while resisting most work-related abuses or compounds
• Valve Action® delivery system releases paint on-demand for smooth, continuous use • Marks bleed through most solvent based paints and primers and powder coating
• Ideal for use on all surfaces: metal, wood, glass, plastic, rubber and cardboard • Heavy-duty aluminum body with large ink capacity
• Long-lasting, weather-resistant, water-resistant and UV-resistant marks with better, brighter • Chisel and bullet tips are replaceable to assure complete use of paint in each marker
coverage compared to ink markers • Valve action mechanism prevents ink in barrel from drying when cap is left off
• Durable, 1⁄8w thick nib permits fine line marking or bold, thick marks visible from long
distances; fiber nibs are replaceable to increase marker life Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Color: Black
• Sturdy metal barrel features strong crimped design that prevents leakage while withstanding 44541 89868434 $3.24
heavy industrial use
• Vapor-lock cap seals nib to prevent tip dry-out • Marking range: -50°F to 150°F
Price Ea. Price Ea.
Color Order # 1 - 47 48+ Color Order # 1 - 47 48+
White 06471239 $4.65 $4.18 Green 00124487 $4.65 $4.18
Yellow 06471221 4.65 4.18 Aluminum 00124495 4.65 4.18 Pro-Line™ Paint Markers
Red 06471247 4.65 4.18 Lt. Blue 00124503 4.65 4.18
Black 00124453 4.65 4.18 Light Green 06900559 4.65 4.18 Price Ea.
Orange 00124461 4.65 4.18 Pink 06900567 4.65 4.18 Color Mfr’s # Order # 1-47 48+
Blue 00124479 4.65 4.18 2mm Fine Tip Micro-Point Tip
2mm Fine Tip
Black 96873 62060470 $4.14 $3.73
Blue 96875 06900575 4.14 3.73
Pro-Max® Broad Tip Paint Markers Green 96876
Light Green 96879
06900583 4.14 3.73
06900617 4.14 3.73 • Available in fine (2mm) and micro (1mm)
Orange 96877 06900591 4.14 3.73 tip sizes for ultimate precision
• Super sized 1⁄2w nib for highly visible marks Pink 96878 06900609 4.14 3.73 • Durable, high-strength, lightweight barrel
• High strength, lightweight barrel for industrial use Red 96874 62060488 4.14 3.73 for industrial use
• Xylene-free for less odor • Available in six ultra visible colors White 96871 62060504 4.14 3.73 • Xylene free for less odor
• Ideal for identification, fill in marking, signage, safety marking on Yellow 96872 62060462 4.14 3.73 • Ideal for metal, wood, glass, plastic,
any surface rubber and more
1mm Micro Tip • Ergonomic design for comfortable
Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Black 96890 65031981 4.14 3.73 extended use
Black 90903 84259316 $8.66 Red 90902 84259308 $8.66 Red 96891 62060579 4.14 3.73 • Self-storing cap with integrated
Blue 90905 84259332 8.66 White 90900 84259282 8.66 White 96888 65031726 4.14 3.73 pocket clip
Orange 90904 84259324 8.66 Yellow 90901 84259290 8.66 Yellow 96889 62060546 4.14 3.73 • Material: liquid enamel based paint

2628 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
STEEL HAND STAMPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Steel Hand Stamps

Mark everything you own, whether for personal or business use. This is a great way to identify your property especially if stolen. Once the impression is marked, it will
last a life time and can’t be altered. Mark wood, steel, metal, plastic, leather.
Each hand stamp is made of carbon tool steel. It has a special heat treatment so it won’t shatter under stress. The stamp will mark materials up to 50 on the Rockwell
C scale. Remember, when working with steel stamps, wear safety glasses to prevent flying particles from damaging your eye. Each steel letter and number hand stamp
are furnished in gothic-style characters, level on the face and square with the shank, with crowned hammer ends.
It is not unusual to overestimate the size of stamp needed. A stamp is measured from cutting edge to cutting edge. Impression size may vary with the depth of
penetration. The easiest way to determine what size letter or number hand stamp you need is to determine what size mark you want made once the impression is
made. If you already have a hand stamp and don’t know what size it is, just make an impression of the stamp on a piece of paper and then measure that impression
with a ruler.
The following are 4 easy steps on how to use your hand stamp.
Step 1: Draw guidelines on the item to be marked. Position item on a flat, solid surface.
Step 2: Firmly grasp the stamp halfway down the shank.
Step 3: Position the stamp straight up and down between the guidelines. Rest hand firmly on the item to be marked.
Step 4: With one moderate but solid blow of a hammer, mark the item.

Page 99 Page 2634

Heavy-Duty Steel Stamps - Number Sets, Letter Sets, Combination Sets, Individual Stamps
Sets • Made to meet the demands of rigid service
• Extra heavy, extra long shank
Character Number Sets Letter Sets Letter & Number Sets Character Number Sets Letter Sets Letter & Number Sets • Character identification and size on side of shank
Size (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Size (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. • Three thumb grooves on the shank for easy
1⁄32 97199400 $29.82 97198691 $89.18 1⁄4 52779923 $32.29 95263786 $96.44 04038295 $134.47 handling and positioning of character
1⁄16 95254124 23.49 95254116 70.14 08249781 $97.84 5⁄16 52779931 40.02 94381845 119.79 08249799 177.40 • Number Sets include 0-8. No. 6 is inverted to
3⁄32 98459167 23.49 98459159 70.14 84362623 97.84 3⁄8 00294678 44.40 36962074 131.93 08249807 204.65 make No. 9
1⁄8 97250252 23.49 97250260 70.14 85143378 97.84 1⁄2 98282973 73.08 98282965 217.57 05052311 324.51 • Letter Sets include A-Z and period
5⁄32 99581936 26.44 99172512 79.01 40458028 121.56 5⁄8 99334971 86.43 95301115 257.37 • Letter & Number Sets include 0-8, A-Z and period
3⁄16 96768718 27.98 96768700 83.63 62133988 125.63 • & (ampersand) replaces period in letter sets 5⁄16w
or larger
Individual Stamps - Sizes 1⁄32w to 3⁄8w
1⁄32w 1⁄16w 3⁄32w 1⁄8w 5⁄32w 3⁄16w 1⁄4w 5⁄16w 3⁄8w

Character Order # Price Ea. Order # Order # Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1 52779949 $5.00 52780301 52780665 52781028 $3.94 52781382 $4.31 52781747 $4.83 52782109 $4.88 52782448 $6.09 52782802 $6.98
2 52779956 5.00 52780319 52780673 52781036 3.94 52781390 4.31 52781754 4.83 52782117 4.88 52782455 6.09 52782810 6.98
3 52779964 5.00 52780327 52780681 52781044 3.94 52781408 4.31 52781762 4.83 52782125 4.88 52782463 6.09 52782828 6.98
4 52779972 5.00 52780335 52780699 52781051 3.94 52781416 4.31 52781770 4.83 52782133 4.88 52782471 6.09 52782836 6.98
5 52779980 5.00 52780343 52780707 52781069 3.94 52781424 4.31 52781788 4.83 52782141 4.88 52782489 6.09 52782844 6.98
6 52779998 5.00 52780350 52780715 52781077 3.94 52781432 4.31 52781796 4.83 52782158 4.88 52782497 6.09 52782851 6.98
7 52780004 5.00 52780368 52780723 52781085 3.94 52781440 4.31 52781804 4.83 52782166 4.88 52782505 6.09 52782869 6.98
8 52780012 5.00 52780376 52780731 52781093 3.94 52781457 4.31 52781812 4.83 52782174 4.88 52782513 6.09 52782877 6.98
9 52780020 5.00 52780384 52780749 52781101 3.94 52781465 4.31 52781820 4.83 52782182 4.88 52782521 6.09 52782885 6.98
0 52780038 5.00 52780392 52780756 52781119 3.94 52781473 4.31 52781838 4.83 52782190 4.88 52782539 6.09 52782893 6.98
A 52780046 5.00 52780400 52780764 52781127 3.94 52781481 4.31 52781846 4.83 90915646 4.88 52782547 6.09 52782901 6.98
B 52780053 5.00 52780418 52780772 52781135 3.94 52781499 4.31 52781853 4.83 90915653 4.88 52782554 6.09 52782919 6.98
C 52780061 5.00 52780426 52780780 52781143 3.94 52781507 4.31 52781861 4.83 52782208 4.88 52782562 6.09 52782927 6.98
D 52780079 5.00 52780434 52780798 52781150 3.94 52781515 4.31 52781879 4.83 52782216 4.88 52782570 6.09 52782935 6.98
E 52780087 5.00 52780442 52780806 52781168 3.94 52781523 4.31 52781887 4.83 52782224 4.88 52782588 6.09 52782943 6.98
F 52780095 5.00 52780459 52780814 52781176 3.94 52781531 4.31 52781895 4.83 52782232 4.88 52782596 6.09 52782950 6.98
G 52780103 5.00 52780467 52780822 52781184 3.94 52781549 4.31 52781903 4.83 52782240 4.88 52782604 6.09 52782968 6.98
H 52780111 5.00 52780475 52780830 52781192 3.94 52781556 4.31 52781911 4.83 52782257 4.88 52782612 6.09 52782976 6.98
I 52780129 5.00 52780483 52780848 52781200 3.94 52781564 4.31 52781929 4.83 52782265 4.88 52782620 6.09 52782984 6.98
J 52780137 5.00 52780491 52780855 52781218 3.94 52781572 4.31 52781937 4.83 52782273 4.88 52782638 6.09 52782992 6.98
K 52780145 5.00 52780509 52780863 52781226 3.94 52781580 4.31 52781945 4.83 52782281 4.88 52782646 6.09 52783008 6.98
L 52780152 5.00 52780517 52780871 52781234 3.94 52781598 4.31 52781952 4.83 52782299 4.88 52782653 6.09 52783016 6.98
M 52780160 5.00 52780525 52780889 52781242 3.94 52781606 4.31 52781960 4.83 52782307 4.88 52782661 6.09 52783024 6.98
N 52780178 5.00 52780533 52780897 52781259 3.94 52781614 4.31 52781978 4.83 52782315 4.88 52782679 6.09 52783032 6.98
O 52780186 5.00 52780541 52780905 52781267 3.94 52781622 4.31 52781986 4.83 52782323 4.88 52782687 6.09 52783040 6.98
P 52780194 5.00 52780558 52780913 52781275 3.94 52781630 4.31 52781994 4.83 52782331 4.88 52782695 6.09 52783057 6.98
Q 52780202 5.00 52780566 52780921 52781283 3.94 52781648 4.31 52782000 4.83 52782349 4.88 52782703 6.09 52783065 6.98
R 52780210 5.00 52780574 52780939 52781291 3.94 52781655 4.31 52782018 4.83 52782356 4.88 52782711 6.09 52783073 6.98
S 52780228 5.00 52780582 52780947 52781309 3.94 52781663 4.31 52782026 4.83 52782364 4.88 52782729 6.09 52783081 6.98
T 52780236 5.00 52780590 52780954 52781317 3.94 52781671 4.31 52782034 4.83 52782372 4.88 52782737 6.09 52783099 6.98
U 52780244 5.00 52780608 52780962 52781325 3.94 52781689 4.31 52782042 4.83 52782380 4.88 52782745 6.09 52783107 6.98
V 52780251 5.00 52780616 52780970 52781333 3.94 52781697 4.31 52782059 4.83 52782398 4.88 52782752 6.09 52783115 6.98
W 52780269 5.00 52780624 52780988 52781341 3.94 52781705 4.31 52782067 4.83 52782406 4.88 52782760 6.09 52783123 6.98
X 52780277 5.00 52780632 52780996 52781358 3.94 52781713 4.31 52782075 4.83 52782414 4.88 52782778 6.09 52783131 6.98
Y 52780285 5.00 52780640 52781002 52781366 3.94 52781721 4.31 52782083 4.83 52782422 4.88 52782786 6.09 52783149 6.98
Z 52780293 5.00 52780657 52781010 52781374 3.94 52781739 4.31 52782091 4.83 52782430 4.88 52782794 6.09 52783156 6.98
Individual Stamps - Sizes 1⁄2w, 5⁄8w
1⁄2w 5⁄8w 1⁄2w 5⁄8w 1⁄2w 5⁄8w 1⁄2w 5⁄8w

Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1 52783164 $11.03 52783529 $12.18 0 52783255 $11.03 52783610 $12.18 I 52783347 $11.03 52783701 $12.18 R 52783438 $11.03 52783792 $12.18
2 52783172 11.03 52783537 12.18 A 52783263 11.03 52783628 12.18 J 52783354 11.03 52783719 12.18 S 52783446 11.03 52783800 12.18
3 52783180 11.03 52783545 12.18 B 52783271 11.03 52783636 12.18 K 52783362 11.03 52783727 12.18 T 52783453 11.03 52783818 12.18
4 52783198 11.03 52783552 12.18 C 52783289 11.03 52783644 12.18 L 52783370 11.03 52783735 12.18 U 52783461 11.03 52783826 12.18
5 52783206 11.03 52783560 12.18 D 52783297 11.03 52783651 12.18 M 52783388 11.03 52783743 12.18 V 52783479 11.03 52783834 12.18
6 52783214 11.03 52783578 12.18 E 52783305 11.03 52783669 12.18 N 52783396 11.03 52783750 12.18 W 52783487 11.03 52783842 12.18
7 52783222 11.03 52783586 12.18 F 52783313 11.03 52783677 12.18 O 52783404 11.03 52783768 12.18 X 52783495 11.03 52783859 12.18
8 52783230 11.03 52783594 12.18 G 52783321 11.03 52783685 12.18 P 52783412 11.03 52783776 12.18 Y 52783503 11.03 52783867 12.18
9 52783248 11.03 52783602 12.18 H 52783339 11.03 52783693 12.18 Q 52783420 11.03 52783784 12.18 Z 52783511 11.03 52783875 12.18

2634 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 LABELING TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Labeling
Proper identification is a vital part of any job. Whether it’s electrical cables, security or HVAC control wire, the labeling of an
industrial machine, warehouse racks, storage bins, etc., labeling is an important, yet often overlooked, key element of the
project. Properly labeling can increase safety, decrease time for service and repair, eliminate costly errors and overall, make
work areas look and operate more professionally.
Choosing the Right Labeling Tool
An important consideration of proper labeling is matching the application with the right labeling tool. For example, using an office labeler to label wire, cables or
machinery will not yield satisfactory results. They possess neither the functionality nor the features to do the job properly. While office labelers are good for their
intended purpose (i.e., file folders, etc.) they will not withstand the rigors of a professional environment like a shop floor or an electrical room.
There are many industrial applications that require labeling solutions. The first step is to choose the right labeling tool: Manual (often pen and tape), Portable (as in
with a portable handheld printer) or Desktop (features a more fixed printer on a bench or table).
Manual Labeling: this basic labeling technique combines a permanent writing instrument with a label to provide text or picture descriptions to be attached or adhered to
a desired object or location. This style of labeling is typically used when a professional grade label is not necessary like roughing in electrical wire to a new jobsite. If
choosing this method, be sure to choose a high quality, permanent marker and a tape that resists smearing and fading. Don’t forget to write NEATLY.
Portable Labeling: an electronic, on demand, portable labeling system that enables a user to print permanent, easy to read, clear text on an adhesive label which will
then be applied to the desired object or location. Portable label makers are ideal when you need to make professional grade labels on the jobsite, in a warehouse, or in
a telecommunications room. If choosing this method, select a model that offers convenient, easy-to-use features designed to save the user valuable time. Some
portable printers even print on Heat Shrink Tubing, for the ultimate in wire and cable labeling.
Desktop Labeling: these printers are larger, not as portable, and are designed for higher volume and higher speed. Often, these printers offer PC connectivity that
enable users to download labels to the printer (and bring the printer with them on the job) or print the labels on the desktop prior to the job. This is referred to as
“kitting” labels - the person who is to apply the labels receives a “label kit” prior to starting the project. If choosing this method, select one that is also portable so that,
if needed, a user may also take it on the job.
Choosing the Right Label for the Job
The chart below outlines some typical industrial applications and the correct label for that application. A good rule of thumb, when in doubt, use Flexible Nylon as this
is the stickiest and most flexible medium.
Wire & Outdoor Curved Smooth Flat Rough Plastic Office
Labels Cable Surfaces Surfaces Surfaces Surfaces Holder (Inserts) Application
Flex Nylon X X X X
Vinyl X X
Heat Shrink X
Permanent Polyester X
Metalized Permanent Polyester X
Non-Adhesive Tags X
Self-Laminating X X X X
Paper X

Page 100 Page 2641

Label Making Machine & Accessories

Print Your Own Labels Heavy-Duty Continuous Vinyl Rolls Reflective Continuous Vinyl Rolls
• UV stable, waterproof, oil and grease resistant and • Available in 4w x 33v rolls
UDO LP 400 Label Professional Printer Includes: • 2 Reflective colors: silver and yellow
• Multi-user software package scratch and rub resistant
• Ultra smooth finish ideal for adhering to pipes, walls, • Offer 5+ years outdoor durability
• USB and parallel cables
• Power supply equipment, windows and most clean, dry surfaces
• Thermal cleaning pen • Available in 3 width sizes Tamper Destructible Asset Marking Roll
• One year warranty - parts and labor • 15 Vibrant colors • Available in silver/gray 2w x 82v roll
Starter Kit Includes: • Offer 5+ years outdoor durability
• 6 Rolls - 4w x 15v high gloss heavy-duty vinyl rolls (assorted colors)
• 2 Rolls - ink ribbons (black and white)
Label Making Machine Premium Resin Ink Ribbons - 41⁄3w x 298v
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Color Order # Price Ea.
UDO LP 400 Label Professional (incl. starter kit) 08516262 $2691.66 Black 05198601 $70.42
Heavy-Duty Continuous Vinyl Rolls Ultra White 05198619 70.42 UDO LP 400 Label Making Machine
Red 05198627 70.42
11⁄8w x 82v Roll 2w x 82v Roll 4w x 82v Roll Blue 05198635 70.42
Color Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Green 05198643 70.42
White 05196860 $111.96 05197975 $144.41 05197025 $193.09
Ink Ribbon
Yellow 05196878 111.96 05197983 144.41 05197033 193.09
41⁄3w x 298v
Green 05196886 111.96 05197991 144.41 05197041 193.09
Red 05196894 111.96 05198007 144.41 05197058 193.09
11⁄8w x 82v HD Vinyl Tape
Blue 05196902 111.96 05198015 144.41 05197066 193.09
Light Blue 05196993 111.96 05198106 144.41 05197157 193.09 Reflective Continuous Vinyl Rolls - 4w x 33v 2w x 82v HD Vinyl Tape
Orange 05196910 111.96 05198023 144.41 05197074 193.09 Color Order # Price Ea.
Black 05196928 111.96 05198031 144.41 05197082 193.09
Reflective Silver 05198668 $257.99
Silver/Gray 05196936 111.96 05198049 144.41 05197090 193.09 Reflective Yellow 05198676 257.99
Dark Brown 05196944 111.96 05198056 144.41 05197108 193.09
Ochre 05197009 111.96 05198114 144.41 05197165 193.09
Beige 05196951 111.96 05198064 144.41 05197116 193.09
Tamper Destructible Asset Marking Roll - 2w x 82v
Purple 05196969 111.96 05198072 144.41 05197124 193.09
Color Order # Price Ea.
Violet 05196985 111.96 05198098 144.41 05197140 193.09 4w x 33v Reflective Vinyl Tape
Clear 05196977 111.96 05198080 144.41 05197132 193.09 Silver / Gray 08516221 $368.78

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2641

 METALWORKING FLUIDS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Metalworking Fluids

Functions of a Metalworking Fluid
• Control heat • Increase tool life • Protect against rust and corrosion
• Reduce friction • Remove chips • Improve surface integrity/finish
Choosing the Best Fluid for the Job
1. What metal(s) are you machining? Different types of metal have different machining requirements and limitations that are important to keep in mind.
2. What is your water’s chemistry? Cutting fluids are 90-98% water when diluted so the chemistry of the water plays a major role in a product’s effectiveness.
3. What are you currently using? Analyze the strengths and weaknesses of your current product to help identify what you are looking for in a cutting fluid.
4. What are your options? There are three basic types of metalworking fluids: Water-Soluble Oils (Emulsions), Semi-Synthetic Fluids, and Synthetic Fluids.
5. What are your preferences? Personal opinions and price considerations are often the deciding factors when choosing a new coolant.
Options
Water-Soluble Oils (WSO) (Emulsions): are mineral or vegetable oils that are held in solution with water by emulsifiers. They are generally suitable for moderate- to
heavy-duty applications with ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Water-Soluble Oils provide great corrosion protection and lubricity but may require additional
maintenance. They occasionally foam in high-pressure/high-volume systems.
Semi-Synthetic Fluids (SSF): combine oil and water with synthetic additives that improve lubricity with emulsifiers. They typically work well with non-ferrous metals,
especially those like aluminum and titanium that have a tendency to stain. Semi-Synthetic Fluids are usually low foaming and easy to maintain.
Synthetic Fluids (SF): contain no oil and are comprised of lubricating polymers with organic and inorganic materials dissolved in water. They are the most biostable of
the metalworking fluids because they contain no oil or emulsifiers. Synthetic Fluids are ideal for grinding and moderate-duty machining.
Water-Soluble Oil Semi-Synthetic Fluids Synthetic Fluids
Oil content provides excellent lubrication Lower oil content decreases maintenance High levels of cooling & quick wetting
Increased cooling ability over straight oils Relatively non-staining Relatively low working concentrations
Pros Maximum corrosion protection Low foaming Increased bio-stability for maximum sump life
Lowest start-up cost Meets industry standards for sump life Highest level of performance additives
Ideal for straightforward applications Additional performance additives Best tool life and surface finish
Requires additional maintenance Less lubricity than Water Soluble Oil Low levels of mechanical lubricity
Limited protection from bacteria & fungus May cause sticking May leave hard residue
May foam in high-pressure/-volume systems Less corrosion protection High chemical oxygen demand
Cons Requires additional maintenance May require additional maintenance Highest start-up cost
Limited protection from bacteria & fungus Performance additives may increase pH Performance additives may increase pH
Fewer performance additives

Special Properties
Extreme Pressure (EP) Additives: have active chemicals that react with freshly cut metal, forming a stable, non-reactive surface. This function is typically used to help
control built-up edge and chip welding. Chlorine, sulfur, or phosphorous are often used in Extreme Pressure Additives.
Boundary Lubricants: contain highly polar molecules that attach themselves to the metal surfaces and work to reduce friction by repelling each other.
Hydrodynamic Lubricants (Full Fluid Lubricants): form a continuous barrier of film between the two surfaces. The non-compressible nature of the film separates the
surfaces to prevent metal to metal contact completely.
Maintenance: Steps to Getting the Most from a Metalworking Fluid
1. Run a cleaning detergent through the sump during change-out every 6 to 12 months. TIP: Use an industrial sump cleaner and circulate through for one hour.
2. Use an antimicrobial additive once a month to prevent bacteria/fungus. TIP: Adding the antimicrobial on Friday morning will reduce “Monday-morning smell”.
3. Swarf like dirt, filings and chips should be cleaned from the sump regularly. TIP: A coalescer cleans cutting fluid by removing swarf and tramp oil.
4. Tramp oil should be removed from the sump every day. TIP: A wheel skimmer is ideal for removing tramp oil but they are most effective when the machine is off.
5. Let the machine run for an hour or more a day to aerate the sump. TIP: An aerating pump can be used if it isn’t possible to run the machine every day.
6. Increase performance by mixing cutting fluid before adding it to the sump. TIP: A drum mixer or proportioner ensures the right concentration every time.
7. Check the sump concentration every week. TIP: A hand-held refractometer is the perfect tool for this job.
8. Keep up the sump level by adding make-up frequently. TIP: Never add straight water or coolant concentrate to the sump and always add coolant concentrate to water
when mixing.
*Tramp Oil: is a by-product of using Metalworking Fluids in a Metalworking process(usually cutting, drilling or grinding). It usually manifests itself as a thin layer of Page
film over the Metalworking Fluid and should be removed on a regular basis to avoid contaminating the Metalworking Fluid.
Page 101 2709

Non-Silicone Defoamer OAKFLO® DSS T-TECH Metalworking Fluid

• A semi-synthetic fluid recommended for machining and grinding aluminum, iron and steel
• Provides efficient defoaming for water soluble oils, semi- • Economical fluid that has the performance capabilities of soluble oils
synthetics and synthetic coolants • Excellent lubricity, rancidity and mold control
• Will not adversely affect adhesion of paint to machined parts
• Safe for all metals Container • Duty range: moderate
Type Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. to heavy-duty
Container operations
Type Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Pail 5 Gal. OKFL T-TECH5 37016987 $119.27 • Recommended
Drum 55 Gal. OKFL T-TECH55 137016995 1311.90 starting dilution of 5%
Jug 1 Gal 78640 97571954 $70.00
1
FOB Factory

®
OAKFLO® DSO 650 Soluble Oil
OAKFLO DSY 910 Metalworking Fluid Cutting & Grinding Fluid
• Ideal for machining and grinding operations in central systems applications • Recommended for a wide variety of heavy-duty machining and grinding operations
• Clear, water-based synthetic product • Recommeded starting dilution of 5% • Capable for all operations in metalworking plants
• Excellent lubricity, cleanliness and rancidity control • Ideal for ferrrous metals • Excellent lubricity, corrosion and biological control • Works extremely
well on metals
Container • Duty range: Container • Recommended
Type Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. moderate to Type Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. starting dilution of 5%
Pail 5 Gal. OKFL DSY-9105 37016961 $121.81 heavy-duty Pail 5 Gal. OKFL DSO-6505 35446939 $132.21 • Duty range: moderate
1 1
Drum 55 Gal. OKFL DSY-91055 37016979 1339.86 operations Drum 55 Gal. OKFL DSO-65055 35446947 1454.29 to heavy-duty
1 1 operations
FOB Factory FOB Factory

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 2709

EYE PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Eye Protection

Safety Glasses Splash Goggle Face Shield

According to OSHA 1910.133 – Employers shall ensure that each employee uses appropriate eye or face protection (including side protection) when exposed to eye or
face hazards which include flying particles, molten metal, liquid chemicals, acids or caustic liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or potentially injurious light radiation.

This includes employees who wear prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards. The user must wear eye protection that incorporates the
prescription in the design, or wear eye protection that can be worn over the prescription lenses without disturbing the proper position of the prescription or the
protective lenses.

Protective eye and face devices shall comply with ANSI Z87.1 “American National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection”.
Anyone working in or passing through areas that pose eye hazards should also wear appropriate protective eyewear.

Safety Glasses

Many styles of protective safety glasses are available. Look for safety glasses that offer full coverage of the entire orbital eye area. Some safety glasses are available in
an OTG(over-the-glass) version where the user needs to wear protection over their own personal prescription glasses. Many safety glasses have custom fitting
features, like adjustable nose bridges and temples, which provide added comfort and enhanced fitting. Eyewear compliance is greatly improved when the right
combination of style, comfort and fitting is achieved.

Safety glasses can be easily identified. Look for ANSI Z87.1 markings on the frame or temples, the manufacturer’s mark (e.g., 3M is the mark used by 3M) and a (+)
sign to identify protective eyewear that meets the high impact standards set forth in ANSI Z87.1-2003.

Base Curve: back curvature of the lens. The higher the base curve, the more curvature there is in a lens. To maintain good optics, the thickness of the lens material
varies from location to location on the curve of the lens. As a result, the light that passes through the lens does not have prismatic imbalance.
As an example: a traditional "basic" safety glass has a base curve of 4, which is fairly flat; hence the need for the sharp curves on the temple ends to meet ANSI side
shield requirements. Newer designs incorporate higher base curves, creating better optics and reduced distortion. Due to the increased curvature of the lens it wraps
more around the face, eliminating the need for sideshields. Glasses with a higher base curve have a tendency to look sportier and more stylish, therefore have an
increased acceptance by the wearer.
Aspheric Lenses
• Helps reduce distortion out to edges of lens
• Thinner thus lighter
• Flatter curves reduces bulging

Most safety glasses are available with either a hard coating to protect the surfaces of the lens and to help prevent premature scratching, or other coatings that may
have anti-fog, anti-scratch, anti-static and anti-UV properties.

Safety lenses are available in a variety of tints for specific workplace applications:
• Clear: for use in general purpose applications
• Yellow (Contrast Amber): use when sharpness, acuity and contrast are needed and to block high intensity blue lighting such as UV. Good for working outdoors at dawn
and dusk. Good for hazy and overcast days
• Red (Vermillion): absorbs green light. Sharpens visual acuity and provides a contrast similar to the contrast amber lens. Some people prefer vermillion to amber, when
choosing a lens to sharpen visual acuity. Good for inspection work, i.e. circuit boards, miniature components, assembly items, etc. because defects can be seen better
• Green/IR Shade: blocks red/infrared (IR) light. Can be used any place where there is heat. Good for metal working, furnace work etc.
• Gray/Silver Mirror/Blue Mirror: reduces glare and bright light. Good for outdoor applications where a task specific lens is not required
• Indoor/Outdoor Mirror: tones everything down and provides excellent vision in both indoor and outdoor lighting. Allows a person to wear the same pair of safety
glasses both indoors and outdoors
• Polarized: designed for outdoor use where reflective glare from water, snow, cement and other hard surfaces exist

In certain applications the use of a full-face shield is required to protect the entire face and eyes. Always wear safety glasses underneath a face shield.

Goggles

There are work environments that require the use of goggles. Goggles are available for protection from impact and particulates and for chemical and non-hazadarous
splash.
Styles:
• Direct Vent: protects your eyes from impact and particulates. They offer excellent circulation around the eyes to prevent goggle from fogging. They are not to be used
where the chance of chemical splash can occur
• Indirect Vent: protects your eyes from airborne particulates and chemical splash. The vents are designed to allow for adequate ventilation yet designed to protect the
wearer from liquids entering the eye area
• Ventless: allows the wearer to be protected from impacts, airborne particulates and chemical splash and fumes. Since there are no vents to allow for adequate air
circulation, this form of protection discourages the wearing of them for long periods of time

2718 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270

Page 102
HEAD PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Welding Plates
Lens Window Size (In.) Price Ea. Select the right filter plate for the application. Each plate provides
Shade Ht. W Order # 1 - 11 12+ superb protection and meets American safety standards.
Hardened Glass Filter Plates
5 2 41⁄4 62269311 $2.14 $1.93
9 2 41⁄4 62269246 2.14 1.93 Hardened Glass Filter Plates
9 41⁄2 51⁄4 62269279 5.10 4.59 • 2w x 41⁄4w for use in both welding helmets and goggles
10 2 41⁄4 62269253 2.14 1.93 • 41⁄2w x 51⁄4w for use in large window welding helmets
10 41⁄2 51⁄4 62269329 5.10 4.59 • Pencil edging eliminates stress flaws
11 2 41⁄4 62269303 2.14 1.93 • Compliance: ANSI Z87.1+
11 41⁄2 51⁄4 72474174 3.05 2.74
12 2 41⁄4 72474190 1.21 1.09
12 41⁄2 51⁄4 72474182 3.05 2.74 • Safety Plates
Safety Plates • Polycarbonate construction
— 2 41⁄4 06386403 1.16 1.04 • For use in large window welding helmets
— 41⁄2 51⁄4 06386437 2.33 2.10 • Compliance: ANSI Z87.1+

Basics of...Head Protection

Hard Hat Bump Cap Full Brim Hard Hat Short Bill Hard Hat

OSHA standards require the use of industrial head protection in any work environment that presents a risk of injury to the head. Industrial head protectors worn to
reduce the force of impact must meet the specifications established in ANSI Requirements for Industrial Head Protection, Z89.1-2003.
In the latest revision of the standard, Z89.1-2003, ANSI specifies requirements for two Types and three Classes of head protection: the Type categories define the area
of impact and penetration protection, while the Classes define levels of protection from electrical hazards.
Type I caps and hats provide protection from objects falling directly onto the top of the helmet, but not from objects that may strike from the side, front, or rear. These
are the familiar “hardhats” of conventional design, and constitute the majority of industrial safety helmets.
Type II caps and hats provide the same degree of protection as Type I to the top of the head. In addition, Type II helmets provide a degree of protection against blows
to the side, front and rear. This new category of protection may be useful for workers who are not always in an upright position when working.
Both Type I and Type II helmets may be available in any of the three classes of electrical protection.
• Class C (Conductive) caps and hats offer no electrical protection and are for use where there is no possibility of exposure to electric shock or burn
• Class E (Electrical application) caps and hats protect against contact with higher voltage conductors. Tested at 20,000 volts AC for three minutes (This Class was
formerly designated Class B)
• Class G (General application) caps and hats protect against limited electrical shock and burn. Tested at 2000 volts AC for one minute (This Class was formerly
designated Class A)
Note: The voltages listed above are not intended to be an indication of the voltage at which headgear protects the wearer, but only the level at which they are tested.

Choosing Head Protection

Unless otherwise noted, all safety caps and hats featured meet or exceed applicable requirements of ANSI Z89.1-2003 for Type I helmets for impact, penetration
resistance and dielectric performance.
Shells are water-resistant, slow-burning and non-irritating to the wearer’s skin. They are molded from tough materials, such as high-density polyethylene, which
provides good chemical resistance and impact resistance.
Most protectors have crown straps that form a cradle suspension, adjustable headbands and brow pads that cradle the forehead and absorb perspiration. Type II
protectors have, in addition, a layer of shock-absorbing material in the sides, front and rear.
Some caps and hats are designed for mounting accessories such as faceshields, hearing protectors and others accessories. Care should be taken that these additions
do not adversely affect the product’s original degree of head protection. In particular, the use of accessories with metal parts may affect the voltage protection
capabilities of Class G and Class E head protectors.
Suspension Types
Pinlock Suspensions - work by inserting a strip with pre-distanced pins into a strip with pre-distanced holes.
Ratchet Style Suspensions - adjust by simply turning a knob on the back end of the suspension system. Replacement suspensions should only be from the original
manufacturer of the hat or cap.

The Use, Care and Replacement of Safety Hats and Caps

Hats and caps have a limited life. While proper use and care will extend this life, all hats and caps should be replaced periodically. Some suppliers recommend
replacing suspensions every 12 months and the complete unit every five years. Hats and caps should be visually inspected daily for signs of wear, dents, cracks or
other damage.
The entire cap or hat should be replaced when the shell shows signs of damage or wear or has been subjected to an impact that would lessen the integrity of the
helmet. Suspensions and brow pads should be replaced when damage or excessive wear is detected.
Two precautions are particularly important in caring for safety hats and caps:
• Avoid the use of adhesives, paints or cleaning solvents. These may attack and damage the shell, reducing its level of protection. Only a mild detergent and warm
water should be used to clean the shell
• Avoid exposure to extreme heat or cold and excessive sunlight, such as in the rear window of a car

2750 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270

Page 103
HEARING PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Hearing Protection

Disposable Ear Plugs Reusable Corded Plugs Hearing Band Earmuff

Hearing Conservation
• First, measure the noise level; noise levels above 85 dBA (decibel) are considered hazardous
• If you must raise your voice to be heard at normal conversation distance (3 feet), noise levels are above 85 dBA and hearing protection should be worn
• Engineer the noise out or down when possible-this can be done primarily with sound barriers or enclosures. Secondly, look to administrate whereby the employee’s
exposure is limited to the amount of time they are exposed to hazardous noise levels. Lastly, provide adequate hearing protectors after the first two methods have
been successfully applied
• Train employees on the hazards of noise and the proper steps they need to take, including proper selection and fitting of hearing protectors, to keep their hearing safe
• Employees who are in hazardous noise levels as a frequent part of their job should have their hearing tested annually to assure their hearing is being properly
protected. The initial test is known as the baseline
• Appropriate hearing protectors should be provided to those who are working in noise hazardous areas. According to Federal law, employers must provide a “variety of
suitable hearing protectors” from which the employees may choose. A minimum of three different styles of hearing protectors needs to be offered to the affected
employees. Records of the elements of the hearing conservation program should be kept, particularly the annual hearing tests of each person
Hearing Protectors
Foam earplugs: made of slow-recovery foams allowing the wearer to roll-down the earplug and insert it into the ear canal where it re-expands to create a seal against noise. Capable of providing very
high levels of protection when properly fitted; low cost and comfortable. Probably the most difficult style of hearing protection to fit properly – fit training is essential. Usually available with and without a
neck cord for convenient storage when not in use. Some are available in sizes
Premolded earplugs: molded out of plastic or other elastic materials and often incorporate flanges to create an airtight seal in the ear canal. Usually a longer lasting hearing protector, which can be
cleaned and reused for a longer period of time. Generally provide lower levels of protection and comfort. Available with neck cords and often with carrying cases for storage and to promote reuse.
Push-In style foam: a hybrid of the foam and premolded earplugs consisting of a foam-sealing pod at the end of an insertion stem. Provides the benefits of comfort and high attenuation common to foam
earplugs along with the hygiene and ease of use advantages of push-in fitting without having to roll-down the earplug. Available with and without neck cords
Metal Detectable style: this form of hearing protection is required for use in the food industry
Hearing bands: consist of earplugs at the ends of a U-shaped band. Earplugs are held in the ear by the tension of the band. Great for intermittent use since fitting is quick and the band provides
convenient storage around the neck when not in use. Using replacement tips can minimize cost. Typically provide lower levels of noise protection than other devices
Earmuffs: cups, worn over the ears, which are held against the side of the head by a band or hardhat attachment. Easiest device to use and capable of providing a wide range of protection levels,
depending upon which model is selected. Effective where impact noise occurs and is transmitted through the bones connected to the ear (i.e. mastoid). Headbands are available which provide for band
positioning over-the-head, behind-the-head, attached to a hard hat or multi-band positions. Should last for a long time, but muff cushions should be replaced at least every six months
Electronic and other specialized protectors: many hearing protectors are modified to allow for radio communications, personal entertainment system connections, improved voice communications in noise
and even integrated AM/FM radio. Check with MSC if you have a unique requirement

Application of NRR Rating for a Labeled NRR of 25 dB

NRR for Use with dBC measurements NRR for Use with dBA measurements
Without OSHA Derating 25 25 – 7 = 18
With OSHA Recommended Derating 25 / 2 = 12.5 (25 – 7) / 2 = 9

All products sold as hearing protectors in the U.S. must have their noise reducing abilities
evaluated under the test method described in ANSI S3.19-1974. The data from this testing is used
to calculate the Noise Reduction Rating or NRR. To determine adequacy of a hearing protector
based on the NRR, use the procedure in the Table above and subtract the result from the noise
level. The result should be lower than 90 to be adequate; below 85 is desirable.
Page 104
For Example:
For a noise level of 93 dBA and a hearing protector with an NRR of 25 dB: Because the
noise level is measured in dBA, use the last column in the Table. Subtract 7 from the NRR
of the hearing protector (25 – 7 = 18); Divide the result by 2 (18 / 2 = 9)
Subtract the result from the measured noise level: 93 dBA – 9 dB = 84 dBA.
In this case population exposure is about 84 dBA. Page
2756

Laser-Lite™ Disposable Max® Disposable Foam Earplugs

Foam Earplugs
Max® Earplug is Easier to Insert
Bright Idea
The improved bell shape of
These multi-color, low-pressure foam these earplugs delivers
earplugs offer long-term comfort. The maximum protection. The plug
nonirritating, nonallergic material material is soil-resistant.
conforms to fit any ear canal.
• Polyurethane earplug with soil resistant skin
• Contoured T-shape for easy insertion and wear • Bell shape delivers maximum in-ear comfort
• Self-adjusting foam expands to fit virtually every wearer • Improved design easier to insert, resists
• Compliance: ANSI S3.19-1974 tendency to back out of ear canal
Plug Qty. Price per Box • Compliance: ANSI S3.19-1974
Style NRR Rating Size Color per Box Mfr’s # Order # 1-11 12+ ®
Uncorded 32 dB Universal Red/Yellow 200 Pairs LL-1 09798042 $28.62 $25.76
Max Lite for Ear Canal Comfort
Corded 32 dB Universal Red/Yellow 100 Pairs LL-30 09798059 27.44 24.70 The low-pressure foam in this
earplug expands to fit.
Contoured “T” shape for easy
handling and wear.
MultiMax® Disposable Foam Earplugs • Expands gently for comfortable long-term wear
• Compliance: ANSI S3.19-1974
Two-in-One Plug Qty. Price per Box
Pill-shaped foam with soil-resistant skin. Style NRR Rating Size Color per Box Mfr’s # Order # 1-11 12+
Max®
• Two-sizes-in-one design improves individual fit Uncorded 33 dB Universal Orange 200 Pairs MAX-1 06527899 $36.49 $32.84
• Compliance: ANSI S3.19-1974 Corded 33 dB Universal Orange 100 Pairs MAX-30 09798018 35.35 31.81
Plug Qty. Price per Box Max Lite®
Style NRR Rating Size Color per Box Mfr’s # Order # 1-11 12+ Uncorded 30 dB Universal Green 200 Pairs LPF-1 09798026 33.35 30.01
Uncorded 31 dB Universal Orange/Yellow 200 Pairs MM-1 00066241 $37.05 $33.34 Corded 30 dB Universal Green 100 Pairs LPF-30 09798034 32.42 29.18

2756 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270

 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Respiratory Protection

Respirators are designed to help reduce exposure to certain airborne contaminants. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standard for respiratory
protection (29 CFR 1910.134) lists the minimum requirements for a respirator program. For more information log on to www.osha.gov
Identify Hazards in the Workplace
Examine your workplace to see if there are any of the following airborne hazards:
Dusts – solid particles created by sanding, grinding, etc.
Mists – liquid particles created by spraying, mixing, etc.
Fumes – small metal particles created by welding, smelting, or pouring molten metal
Gases – examples include chlorine, ammonia, sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide
Vapors – produced when liquids evaporate, e.g. solvent vapors
Oxygen Deficient Atmospheres – defined by OSHA as air with less than 19.5% oxygen; may be found in certain confined spaces and/or if oxygen displaced by other gases
or vapors, e.g. silos, degreasing tanks
OSHA and other groups publish occupational exposure limits for many contaminants. Industrial hygienists are trained to measure the contaminant levels and compare their
results to the exposure limits. If the contaminant concentration in the air is above the exposure limit, the best choice is to use a safer material, enclose the process, install
local exhaust ventilation or limit the amount of time employees are in the area. According to OHA, respirators are only to be used while these different control measures are
being implemented, or if they are not feasible. Some people may also choose to voluntarily wear a respirator, even if they are not exposed above the exposure limit.
Understand the Health Effects
Certain airborne contaminants are not only dangerous to the lungs, but they may also be inhaled and distributed throughout the rest of the body. Some effects may be
noticed immediately, while others may not produce health effects until years later. Please see the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for the contaminant or consult your
supervisor, safety officer or human resources for more information.
Respirator Selection

PAPR Head Cover

Filtering Facepiece Half Mask
Supplied Air
Following are some of the types of respirators approved by
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Full Facepiece
Air Purifying – filter, cartridge or canister filters for specific contaminants
Filtering Facepiece (dust mask) – the filter is an integral part of the facepiece
Full Facepiece – respirator designed to seal around the entire face
Half Mask – respirator covering the mouth and nose SCBA
Powered Air Purifying Respirator (PAPR) – a fan is used to deliver filtered air into wearer’s hood or helmet
Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) – atmosphere supplying respirator; wearer carries source of breathable air
Supplied Air Respirator – atmosphere supplying respirator; air can be supplied from a high pressure compressor, low-
pressure pumps, or cylinders (bottled air) and is delivered to wearer’s hood or helmet
The choice of one type of respirator over another depends on a number factors:
If there is less than 19.5% oxygen, or if the contaminant concentrations are immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH), a self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or
combination supplied air respirator/SCBA must be used.
• Compare the contaminant exposure level in the air to the exposure limit. For example, if the exposure is 100 parts per million (ppm) in air and the exposure limit is 25
ppm, then you are 4 times over the exposure limit. This is called the hazard ratio
• Choose a class of respirator that has an assigned protection factor (APF) greater than the hazard ratio. Assigned protection factors are published by OSHA, NIOSH and
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). For example, half mask respirators with cartridges or filters are usually given an APF of 10. This means that when
properly maintained and worn, they may reduce exposure by a factor of 10 (or 90%). Therefore, if the workplace concentration is 100 ppm, exposure would be
reduced to 10 ppm. If a higher level of exposure reduction is needed, then a full facepiece, powered air purifying respirator, or supplied air respirator may be necessary
• For air purifying respirators, choose an appropriate cartridge or filter for the contaminant
• For a supplied air respirator, ensure that the correct pressure and flow of air is available from a compressor or bottled air, and that the air meets the specifications for
“Grade D” breathable air
• Consider other factors such as weight and comfort of the respirator, workplace environmental conditions, compatibility with other personal protective equipment
(PPE), ability of the wearer to breathe through a cartridge or filter, desire for PAPRs or supplied air respirators to blow air across head and face for cooling, mobility
requirements (vs. dragging an airline), service life of a chemical cartridge (vs. supplied air), no facial hair, glasses, etc. between the face and the sealing surface of the
respirator
Particle Filters
Particle filters are designed to filter various types of particles. Filtering facepiece respirators and filters for negative pressure respirators are rated by NIOSH both
according to their filtration efficiency and whether or not they are designed to filter oily mists. The following classification is used:
N – Not for oily mists (e.g. cutting fluids, grinding fluids)
R – Oil Resistant (use up to 8 hours against oily mists)
P – Oil Proof (see time limitations from manufacturer)
95, 99 or 100 are assigned for minimum filtration efficiencies of 95%, 99% or 99.97% respectively. Therefore, a filter or filtering facepiece may be rated as N95, P100, etc.
OSHA requires 100 level filters for lead, cadmium, asbestos, arsenic and 4,4’-Methylenedianiline (MDA).
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters are available for powered air purifying respirators (PAPRs).
Chemical Cartridges Other OSHA Respirator Requirements
Chemical cartridges are available to help filter organic vapors (e.g. solvent • Written program with site specific procedures
vapors), acid gases (e.g. chlorine), ammonia, methylamine, formaldehyde, etc. • Medical evaluations (not required for voluntary use of
OSHA requires a cartridge change schedule based on either an “end of service filtering facepieces)
life indicator” (ESLI) or an estimate of the cartridge service life calculated from • Annual fit testing of tight-fitting respirators (not required for
the use conditions.. Most manufacturers and OSHA have tools to help calculate voluntary use of respirators)
cartridge service life. Sometimes a gas/vapor cartridge and particulate filter need • User seal checks of tight fitting respirators prior to each use
to be worn together if both types of contaminants are present. Some particle • Procedures for use in routine and emergency situations
filters include a small amount of carbon or treated carbon to filter nuisance levels • Cleaning, maintenance, inspection, and storage
of gas and vapors. (Nuisance levels are levels below what is considered • Training of employees (“Appendix D” to 29 CFR 1910.134 is
User Seal Checks
hazardous.) available for voluntary use of respirators)
• Evaluation of respirator program effectiveness

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2769
Page 105
 HAND PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Gloves
There are a variety of factors that influence proper glove selection. Follow this general guideline to assist in the process.
• Analyze and evaluate the conditions to which you will subject the glove and thoroughly analyze any chemicals handled.
• Determine the types of physical contact, such as:
*Sharp objects *Abrasion *Cuts and slashes
• Temperature: If high heat or cold conditions are a factor in your work environment, three questions need to be considered to choose the proper hand protection:
What is the size and weight of the object you are in contact with?
What is the duration of contact you will have with the object?
What is the potential temperature range for the application?
• Choose the glove with the highest rating for chemical and physical conditions.
• Determine application needs and glove requirements:
Breakthrough Detection Time (BDT): time it takes for a chemical to pass through the glove material measured in minutes.
Dexterity: select unsupported (unlined) gloves for extra dexterity and sense of touch. If cut, snag, puncture, or abrasion-resistance is important, match the
application’s critical factors to the glove’s physical characteristics – whether supported or unsupported.
Grip: select a grip pattern that provides grip needed for the job. Common patterns are diamond embossed, pebble, patterned, dipped or smooth.
Length: choose glove length by the depth to which the arm will be immersed or exposed to chemical splash.
Size: correct size will ensure optimum wear comfort, dexterity and employee satisfaction.
• Glove colors could be a factor in work areas for identifying product exposure.
Glove Styles

Clute Pattern Gunn Pattern Reversible Pattern

• Clute Pattern – sewn with seams on the back of the glove at every finger and straight thumb.
• Gunn Pattern – features fully wrapped leather index fingers and thumbs, leather fingertips, leather knuckle straps, wing thumb design, shirred elastic back and
continuous pull. Open cuff design allows the wearer easy on/off. Usually very generously sized.
• Reversible (Ambidextrous) – allows the glove to be worn on either hand, thus doubling the wear surface. Available in a variety of materials. All disposable gloves (vinyl,
latex, nitrile, polyethylene) are reversible. Reversible gloves are also available in machine knit, cotton lisle inspectors, natural jersey, Kevlar knit and most of the
reinforced cut-resistant gloves.

Thumb Patterns
• Keystone Thumb – an inset thumb on full leather glove patterns. Keystone thumbs provide additional wear and greater comfort.
• Straight Thumb – a glove thumb that normally lies straight with the index finger. They are common in most fabric gloves and drivers’ gloves.
• Wing Thumb – glove construction that angles the thumb diagonally across the palm. Frequently found in leather palm gloves, wing thumbs improve comfort similar to
inset thumb designs.

Cuff Styles

• Knit Wrist – machine knit cuff material using elasticized fabrics to close around the wrist similar to that of a sweatshirt. Minimizes soil that can get inside of gloves.
• Band Top – 1 ½ to 2” cuff which enables easy on and off while protecting the wrist.
• Safety Cuff – 2 ½” cuff that allows for protection of the wrist and easy, fast removal.
• Gauntlet Cuff – 4 ½ to 5” cuff that protects both wrists and forearms.
• Slip-On Cuff – Open-end gloves that make on/off easy. This style is usually found in drivers’ gloves.
Leathers
There are a variety of leathers used in the manufacture of industrial gloves. The types of leathers used include:
• Cowhide: strong and supple leather that is slit to obtain both top grain (smooth) and split (suede) cuts. Once it is tanned, cowhide is used in drivers, leather-palmed,
welders and specialized heat gloves.
• Pigskin: tanned for ruggedness and flexibility. Large pores characterize top grain pigskin where the coarse hairs of the animal have been removed. Perform well in wet
applications because they remain supple even after drying.
• Goatskin: used to make leather gloves where dexterity in a leather glove is the most important aspect of the glove. Goatskin has high lanolin content, which keeps the
leather very flexible and durable. The lanolin makes goatskin gloves feel the best of any leather glove a wearer can use.
Chemical Resistance
Both unlined and coated gloves intended for chemical protection come in a variety of materials. Depending on what you are protecting the wearers hands from, the
application will dictate which form of hand protection is best suited.
• Unsupported – gloves are either unlined or flock lined. Flock lining makes it easier for wearer to put on or take off.
• Coated – linings are typically made of knit or jersey materials. Both absorb perspiration and insulate, however, jersey is thicker than knit offering better protection in
hot or cold applications.

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2787
Page 106
 CUT PROTECTION GLOVES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Butyl Gloves
Flexible & Sensitive
These gloves are formulated for the highest chemical-resistance barrier to ketones and esters.
The gloves provide the right combination of protection and dexterity.
Best Butyl II® North Butyl Rubber
• Synthetic rubber • Offers the highest impermeability to water vapors, gases and
• Provides the highest permeation toxic chemicals
resistance to gases and water vapors • Resistant to oxygenated solvents and most oxidizing chemicals Best North
Smooth Grip Rough Grip
Best North Best North
Thick. Price per Pair Price per Pair Price per Pair Price per Pair
Size (mil) Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+
11w Length
Medium 13 B131-8 01904044 $18.02 $17.12 B131R-8 01904077 $22.37 $21.25
Medium 16 B161-8 01904101 21.97 20.87 B161R-8 01904135 27.06 25.71
Large 13 B131-9 01904051 18.02 17.12 B131R-9 01904085 22.37 21.25
Large 16 B161-9 01904119 21.97 20.87 B161R-9 01904143 27.06 25.71
X-Large 13 B131-10 01904069 18.02 17.12 B131R-10 01904093 22.37 21.25
X-Large 16 B161-10 01904127 21.97 20.87 B161R-10 01904150 27.06 25.71
14w Length
Small 14 874-07 66004359 $25.08 $23.83 874R-07 66004409 $28.94 $27.49
Small 25 878R-07 69300267 57.92 55.02
Medium 14 874-08 66004367 25.08 23.83 874R-08 66004417 28.94 27.49
Medium 25 878-08 69300234 53.01 50.36 878R-08 69300275 57.92 55.02
Medium 32 B324-8 01904168 43.43 41.26 B324R-8 01904192 54.08 51.38
Large 14 874-09 66004375 25.08 23.83 874R-09 66004425 28.94 27.49
Large 25 878-09 05945753 53.01 50.36 878R-09 69300283 57.92 55.02 878-09 05945753 53.01 50.36
Large 32 B324-9 01904176 43.43 41.26 B324R-9 01904200 54.08 51.38
X-Large 14 874-10 66004383 25.08 23.83 874R-10 66004433 28.94 27.49
X-Large 25 878-10 99837171 53.01 50.36 878R-10 69300291 57.92 55.02
X-Large 32 B324-10 01904184 43.43 41.26 B324R-10 01904218 54.08 51.38
XX-Large 14 874-11 66004391 25.08 23.83 874R-11 66004441 28.94 27.49
XX-Large 25 878-11 69300259 53.01 50.36 878R-11 69300309 57.92 55.02

Basics of...Cut Protection Gloves

There are multiple cut protection performance levels and it is important to use ANSI Performance Level CPPT Range (grams) Note: The cut level has been
the right cut protection for your application. The Cut Protection Performance 0 <200 added to the glove description to
Test (CPPT) is an ASTM F 1790 standard cut test. The cut performance rating 1 >200 help identify which glove is best
measures the amount of force (in grams) applied for failure to occur at a 25mm 2 >500
suited for your application.
distance of travel for a standard cutting blade. The higher the value, the better 3 >1000
4 >1500
the cut performance. The performance rating is classified by ANSI/ISEA 105- 5 >3500 Page
2005 from a 0-5 level based on the outcome of the CPPT test. 2805
Page 107

Puncture Resistant Gloves

Highest Level of Protection
These gloves protect against sharp objects such as metal, wire and glass with SuperFabric®
brand technology. As a sharp hazard enters the fabric, it is arrested by one or more layers of
fabric as it strikes the guard plates. The gloves are cut and puncture resistant, not cut and
puncture proof. Always conduct a safe test with your application to determine if the product
is suited for your needs. Gloves exceed ISEA and CE level 5 cut resistance.
Hi Visibility Applications:
• Features 3 layers of SuperFabric® for maximum against • Commercial and Mfr’s #7090 Mfr’s #HX9680
Mfr’s #7082
needles on the palm and palm side of fingers residential recycling
• Puncture protection from wire, metal and glass Level Six
• Medical waste handling • Puncture protection from wires, metal and glass
• Abrasion resistance, increases durability • City/municipality
• Cotton blend glove with 3⁄4 dip Hydropellent™ PVC coating • Enhanced dexterity for comfort
trash removal • Machine washable
• Machine washable
• Color: High visibility green with black palm HX9680
TenX™ ThreeSixty • Seamless knit shell with an enhanced layer of cut
• Cotton shell has the highest cut and puncture resistance and 360° coverage on the hand and puncture protection on the palm and fingers
• Puncture protection from wires, metal, and glass • Wrinkle rubber palm for enhanced grip
• Color: Blue with black palm Mfr’s #9010
• Particle nitrile finish for enhanced grip, chemical and abrasion protection
• Liquid resistant finish 9010
• 31⁄2w Safety cuff Applications: • Cut-resistant HDPE shell with an enhanced layer of
• Durable and long lasting • General work cut and puncture protection on the palm and fingers
• Machine washable • Chemical protection • Nitrile palm coating for great oily or dry grip
• Color: Blue • Metal, steel and glass handling • Color: Gray with black palm
Hi Visibility TenX™ ThreeSixty Level Six HX9680 Level Six 9010
Size Mfr’s # Order # Price per Pair Mfr’s # Order # Price per Pair Mfr’s # Order # Price per Pair Mfr’s # Order # Price per Pair
Small 7082-S A43239896 $57.54 HX9680S 72052764 $29.81
Medium 7082-M A43239888 57.54 7090-M 72052723 $38.25 HX9680M 72052756 29.81 9010-M A07050529 $39.33
Large 7082-L A43239870 57.54 7090-L 72052715 38.25 HX9680L 72052749 29.81 9010-L A07050537 39.33
X-Large 7082-XL A43239904 57.54 7090-XL 72052731 38.25 HX9680XL 72052772 29.81 9010-XL A07050560 39.33

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2805
 LINEMAN’S GLOVES TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Lineman’s Gloves

Lineman’s gloves are made of highly dielectric, strong, insulated rubber and must be worn with leather protectors.
Standards
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Material) has established strict guidelines that must be followed to ensure this product is performing within standards:
• Gloves have a twelve month shelf life from the initial certification date stamped on the glove or case and can be used for six months. After six months of use,
the gloves must be removed from service and recertified at an authorized safety equipment testing facility. Any glove not put in service within the 12 month
shelf life must be recertified before it can be placed in service. After recertification, the twelve month shelf life starts again.
• OSHA 1910.137 – Must be electrically tested before put in service and removed from service after 6 months use and recertified before being put back in use.
• OSHA 1910.268 (Telecom) – Natural rubber insulated gloves must be electrically tested before first issue, twelve months after first issue and every nine
months thereafter.
Inspection
When Lineman’s gloves are put into service, usage must be recorded; and before each use a visual inspection is required by the user. Visual inspection consists of
looking for any defects in the glove which would compromise the gloves integrity (ability to provide the electrical insulation properties designed for the glove) such
as but not limited to cuts, tears, abrasions (thin spots) as well as inflating the gloves to check for holes and rolling the gloves between fingers to check for ozone or
UV cracking. Leather protectors must also be inspected for damage or defects.
Wear and Care
• Clean hands before use • Wash in warm water with mild detergent
• Do not wear rings or bracelets or other metallic objects which could conduct • Disinfect with a small amount of chlorine bleach
electricity • Air or tumble dry at low heat
• Wear leather protectors that fit properly over the rubber insulating gloves • Must be stored in a cool dry place, away from ozone and UV light
• Thin liners may be worn under rubber gloves to absorb perspiration or provide • Gloves and leather protectors must be stored separately in protective bags, Page
warmth in cold weather fingers up, hung, not laid flat
Page 108 2819

Lineman’s Gloves & Protectors

Rubber Gloves
Novax™ Salisbury
Test Max. L Orange Black Price per Pair Price per Pair Classed Compliance
Class # Size Volt. (V) Volt. (AC) (In.) Order # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+
00 8 2500 500 11 02448439 A59797811 $47.69 $42.92
00 9 2500 500 11 02448447 A66677790 47.69 42.92
00 10 2500 500 11 02448413 A08151474 47.69 42.92
00 11 2500 500 11 02448421 A08151607 47.69 42.92
0 8 5000 1000 11 02448397 A84150291 54.33 48.90
0 9 5000 1000 11 02448405 A93411593 54.33 48.90 E011B-9 00040915 $65.65 $59.08
0 10 5000 1000 11 02448371 A93412518 54.33 48.90 E011B-10 00040923 65.65 59.08
0 11 5000 1000 11 02448389 A59797803 54.33 48.90 E011B-11 00040931 65.65 59.08
1 8 10000 7500 14 02448470 A59797845 93.11 83.80
1 9 10000 7500 14 02448488 A59797852 93.11 83.80 E114RB-9 00040949 103.79 93.41
1 10 10000 7500 14 02448454 A59797829 93.11 83.80 E114RB-10 00040956 103.79 93.41 Salisbury Salisbury ILP10
1 11 10000 7500 14 02448462 A59797837 93.11 83.80 E114RB-11 00040964 103.79 93.41 Novax™ Rubber Glove Rubber Glove
2 8 20000 17000 14 02448512 A59797886 131.04 117.94
2 9 20000 17000 14 02448520 A59797894 131.04 117.94 E214RB-9 00040972 145.39 130.85
2 10 20000 17000 14 02448496 A59797860 131.04 117.94 E214RB-10 00040980 145.39 130.85
2 11 20000 17000 14 02448504 A59797878 131.04 117.94 E214RB-11 00040998 145.39 130.85
3 9 30000 26500 18 A59797928 185.25 166.72 E318RB/9 00041004 186.67 168.00
3 10 30000 26500 18 A59797902 185.25 166.72 E318RB-10 00041012 186.67 168.00
3 11 30000 26500 18 A59797910 185.25 166.72 E318RB-11 00041020 186.67 168.00

Top Grain Cowhide Leather Protectors Top Grain Goatskin Leather Protectors
Novax™ Salisbury Novax™
Price per Pair Price per Pair Price per Pair
L (In.) Size Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ L (In.) Size Order # 1-5 6+
10 9 ILP10/9-9H 00041038 $50.81 $45.73 10 8 84491844 $16.05 $14.44 Salisbury Glove Dust Novax™ Glove Bag Salisbury Glove Bag
10 10 ILP10/10-10H 00041046 50.81 45.73 10 9 40631681 16.05 14.44
10 11 ILP10/11-11H 00041053 50.81 45.73 10 10 40110777 16.05 14.44
12 8 A70881669 $23.75 $21.37 10 11 40631673 16.05 14.44
12 9 A63008437 23.75 21.37 ILP3S/9-9H 00041061 56.77 51.09 14 9 A59797795 25.63 23.07
Choose from a variety of approved rubber
12 10 A81156499 23.75 21.37 ILP3S/10-10H 00041079 56.77 51.09 14 10 A59797779 25.63 23.07
12 11 A81932287 23.75 21.37 ILP3S/11-11H 00041087 56.77 51.09 14 11 A59797787 25.63 23.07 gloves according to hand size, class, voltage
ratings, length and styles. Extend the gloves’
14 9 ILP5S/9-9H 00041095 61.39 55.25
14 10 ILP5S/10-10H 00041103 61.39 55.25
lives with separately available leather
14 11 ILP5S/11-11H 00041111 61.39 55.25 Salisbury Glove Dust protectors and glove bags.
16 9 ILP7C/9-9H 00041129 64.40 57.96 Price Ea. • Gloves made of highly dielectric, strong and
16 10 ILP7C/10-10H 00041137 64.40 57.96 Size Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ flexible insulated rubber
16 11 ILP7C/11-11H 00041145 64.40 57.96 6 oz. 10-4 77206928 $11.71 $10.54 • Class 1, 2 and 3 gloves have red interior to alert
wearer to large cuts and snags
Glove Bags • Allow for additional room when selecting
Novax™ Salisbury leather protectors
Price Ea. Price Ea. • Bags in three sizes fit unfolded gloves, and
L (In.) Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ each bag comes with a belt clip
11 93880045 $19.20 $18.24 • Glove dust absorbs moisture and perspiration
12 GB112 00041152 $37.45 $33.70 and provides extra comfort
14 93880052 20.41 19.39 GB114 00041160 42.54 38.29 • Compliance: ASTM D120 and IEC 903 (rubber
18 GB118 00041178 46.56 41.90 gloves only)

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2819
 RAINWEAR & HI-VIS CLOTHING
2 Pc. Sandnes Rain Suit Hi-Vis Bomber Jackets
& Sweatshirts
The collection consists of 100% waterproof PVC and
polyurethane coated clothes providing superior Meets ANSI Specs
protection and durability. PVC-coated garments have Bomber Jacket
extremely hard-wearing coatings and are resistant to • Outer jacket is made of fluorescent yellow PVC
water as well as most chemicals, acids and oils. coated polyester plus 3M™ Scotchlite reflective tape
Polyurethane coated clothes are lighter, softer and • Features include a snap on hideaway hood, flip up
more resistant to the cold. collar for wind blocking, zipper and snap front, a
• Extra lightweight radio pocket, two outside hand pockets, and dark
• Oil and cold resistant • 2 Front pockets cuffs, collar and waistband to hide dirt
• Zip closure in front • Snap adjustment at ankle • When it is not quite so cold outside, zip out the inner
• Polyurethane coated knitted polyamide material Sandnes Set - Navy polar fleece jacket and wear the bomber jacket as a
Navy Black two layer jacket, still Class 3
Size Mfr’s # Order # Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Zip off bomber jackets’ yellow sleeves and wear as a
Medium 70625-590-M 86048576 70625-990-M 86048626 $100.42
Class 2 vest. When wearing the jacket without yellow
Large 70625-590-L 86048568 70625-990-L 86048618 100.42 sleeves, as a Class 2 vest, the inner fleece jacket with
X-Large 70625-590-XL 86048584 70625-990-XL 86048634 100.42 fleece sleeves can remain in place
XX-Large 70625-590-2XL 86048592 70625-990-2XL 86048642 100.42 • Remove the inner polar fleece jacket lining with
XXX-Large 70625-590-3XL 86048600 70625-990-3XL 86048659 115.50 sleeves, leaving a Class 2 sleeveless yellow outer vest
with reflective striping
• Lastly, the blue, noncompliant, inner polar fleece
jacket can be worn alone on cool days
Workwear Socks
Lightweight Crewneck Sweatshirt
• 50% Polyester/50% cotton fabric provides
These socks are made from breathable materials and feature a
breathability and comfort
reinforced toe design for durability.
• One 360° horizontal stripe and two vertical shoulder
• Coolmax® material insulates and transports stripes to increase visibility
moisture through point structures
Bomber Jackets - Orange Crew Neck Sweatshirts - Yellow
• Steel toe Cordura material provides added Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
protection at the toe and heel
• Wool, lycra and polyamide fibers provide warmth, Medium LUX-TJBJ-OM 64304264 $112.72 LUX-SWTL-YM 64304702 $35.03
Large LUX-TJBJ-OL 64304256 112.72 LUX-SWTL-YL 64304694 35.03
elasticity and strength X-Large LUX-TJBJ-OXL 88579131 112.72 LUX-SWTL-YXL 64304710 35.03
Size Mfr’s # Order # Price per Pair XX-Large LUX-TJBJ-O2X 64304272 123.99 LUX-SWTL-Y2X 64304728 38.19
Small 75724-990-S 81736134 $16.54 XXX-Large LUX-TJBJ-O3X 64304280 135.25 LUX-SWTL-Y3X 64304736 38.25
Medium 75724-990-M 81736126 16.54
Large 75724-990 L 81736100 16.54 • Style: Cold weather/outdoor
X-Large 75724-990-XL 81736142 16.54 • Color: Black

Basics of...ANSI 107-2010 High Visibility Safety Apparel

When your work involves exposure to the hazards of low visibility, the ANSI standard 107-2010 should be your first point of reference for safeguarding yourself and
others. It is the intention of these Performance Class Guidelines and Scenarios to serve as an assessment tool only. Certain specific conditions such as atmospherics,
sight/stop-distances, training regulations etc., must be taken into account in any final hazard/safety assessment.
Scenario A Scenario B Scenario C
Suggested Performance Class 1 typically, or class 2 under Suggested Performance Class 2 typically or class 3 under certain Suggested Performance Class 3 typically for occupational
certain conditions for occupational activities where: conditions for occupational activities where: activities where:
1) Permit full and undivided attention to approaching traffic. 1) Greater visibility is required due to inclement weather conditions. 1) Workers are exposed to significantly higher vehicle speeds
2) Provide ample separation on pedestrian workers. 2) A complex background distracts from the worker’s visibility. and/or reduced sight distances.
3) Permit great degree of visibility of the worker. 3) The worker is performing a task that distracts attention away from 2) The worker and vehicle operator have high task loads, clearly
4) Speed of vehicle not in excess of 25 mph. oncoming traffic. placing the worker in danger.
For parking service attendants, warehouse workers 4) Speeds exceed those in Scenario A. 3) The wearer must be conspicuous through the full range of
w/equipment traffic, shopping cart retrievers and sidewalk 5) Work activities take place in closer proximity to vehicle traffic. body motions at a minimum of 390m (1,280 feet), and must be
maintenance workers. For railway workers, school crossing guards, parking and toll gate identifiable as a person.
personnel, airport ground crew and law enforcement personnel. Primarily for (but not limited to) roadway construction workers,
Page
emergency teams and firefighters and survey crews.
Page 109 2833

ANSI Level 2 Ball Caps Hi-Vis Reversible Jackets

Be Seen Dual Use Protection
High visibility jackets are made with a flexible, lightweight PVC
Lightweight, breathable mesh coating on a knitted polyester backing. When worn orange side
caps with reflective tape for a out, the reflective 3M Scotchlite material helps assure on-job
higher level of visibility. recognition. Reverse to solid black for off job use.
• 100% Nylon oxford shell with light insulation
• Resistant to chemicals, cold, water and wind
• 1w fluorescent contrasting trim with 1⁄2w twin trim tape • High visibility stripes on chest and arms
• High wicking CoolDry sweatband moves sweat away from forehead • Full hook and loop closure and storm flap for extra protection
• Ball cap style hat protects face against harmful UV rays • Elastic adjustment at
• Hook and loop strap makes possible one size fits all hem for personal fit Orange Yellow
Price Ea. • Hook and loop closure Size Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
Color Mfr’s # Order # 1-9 10+ on wrists Small 81735987 $138.54 81736035 $138.54
Lime with Orange and Silver Stripe 3013114 81376022 $8.54 $7.69 • Zippered hand pockets for Medium 81735979 138.54 81736027 138.54
Orange with Lime and Silver Stripe 3013113 81376014 8.54 7.69 securing items Large 81735953 138.54 81736019 138.54
• Compliance: ANSI/SEA 107 X-Large 81735995 138.54 81736043 138.54
CLASS 3; ENV 343 XX-Large 81736001 138.54 81736050 138.54

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2833
 CLEANROOM TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Cleanrooms
Cleanrooms are classified according to the number and size of particles permitted per volume of air. ISO 14644 Standards were first formed from the US Federal
Standard 209E Airborne Particulate Cleanliness Classes in Cleanrooms and Clean Zones. ISO 14644-1 Standards specify the decimal logarithm of the number of
particles 0.1 μm or larger permitted per cubic meter of air.
ISO 14644-1 Cleanroom Standards
Maximum Particles/m³
FED STD 209E
CLASS *0.1 μm *0.2 μm *0.3 μm *0.5 μm *1 μm *5 μm Equivalent
ISO 1 10 2
ISO 2 100 24 10 4
ISO 3 1,000 237 102 35 8 Class 1
ISO 4 10,000 2,370 1,020 352 83 Class 10
ISO 5 100,000 23,700 10,200 3,520 832 29 Class 100
ISO 6 1,000,000 237,000 102,000 35,200 8,320 293 Class 1000
ISO 7 352,000 83,200 2,930 Class 10,000
ISO 8 3,520,000 832,000 29,300 Class 100,000
ISO 9 35,200,000 8,320,000 293,000 Room Air

Minimum Protective Apparel Guide

ISO Class 8 ISO Class 7 ISO Class 6 ISO Class 5 ISO Class 4
APPLICATION (Class 100,000) (Class 10,000) (Class 1,000) (Class 100) (Class 10)
Hair Cover X X X X X
Face Mask X X X X
Coveralls X X X
Shoe Covers X X X X X
Gloves X X X

Page 110 Page 2843

Cleanroom Paper KimTech® Pure Cleanroom

Face Masks
For All Controlled Environments
For Critical Environments
This paper features antistatic properties that reduce
attraction of airborne particles and enhance its KimTech Pure cleanroom face masks provide good
performance in photocopies and converting processes. filtration of particles and bacteria, while maintaining
good breathability.
• Chemical and moisture resistant KimTech® Pure M6 Masks - 62477
• 250 Sheets per pack • Two-layer design, pleat-style with earloops
• Size: 8.5w x 11w and available in white, light blue, • BICOSOF™ fabric inner facing provides comfort
yellow, green and pink • Color: White • Cleanroom Class: ISO 6
Price per Pack
Color Order # 1-11 12+ KimTech® Pure M5 Masks - 62692 & 62742
• Three-layer design, pleat-style: 62692 has
White 76000645 $22.78 $20.50
Light Blue 76000611 22.78 20.50 earloops, 62742 has soft tie closure
Yellow 76000652 22.78 20.50 • Polyester/cellulose inner/outer facing 62477
Green 76000629 22.78 20.50 • 99% filtration efficiency for particulates
Pink 76000637 22.78 20.50 • Color: Blue • Cleanroom Class: ISO 5
Pkg. Price per Pack
Desc. Qty. Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+
M6 with Earloops 50 62477 84457795 $13.29 $11.96
M5 with Earloops 50 62692 87360715 13.18 11.86
Inspection Gloves M5 with Soft Tie Closure 50 62742 87360723 14.55 13.09

When Cleanliness Counts

These gloves minimize hand
contamination, while providing
longer wear and comfort. They
ESD Nylon Seamless
are ambidextrous and are fully Knit Gloves
launderable. Seamless Woven
Knit Nylon Tricot Nylon
Reduce Static
Seamless Knit Nylon These gloves are constructed with electrostatic dissipative (ESD)
• Lint-free knit from nylon Woven Tricot Nylon fiber yarns blended with low lint nylon which reduces static
filament yarns • Lint-free 40 denier nylon build-up on the glove surface for improved performance in
• Seamless construction provides • Two-piece pattern without electronics assembly.
comfort and reduces hand fatigue set-in thumb • Launderable and reusable without losing ESD properties
• Rolled hem and 13 gauge cut • Rolled hem and 9w in length • Uncoated, seamless knit gloves provide great dexterity
Seamless Knit Nylon Woven Tricot Nylon Price per Dozen
Price per Dozen Price per Dozen Size Order # 1-11 12+
Size Order # 1-11 12+ Size Order # 1-11 12+ Small 76000892 $44.14 $41.93
Small 01245810 $13.88 $13.19 Small 70493796 $8.96 $8.51 Medium 76000884 44.14 41.93
Medium 01245828 13.88 13.19 Medium 76551944 8.96 8.51 Large 76000876 44.14 41.93
Large 01245836 13.88 13.19 Large 76551951 8.96 8.51 X-Large 76000900 44.14 41.93
X-Large 01245844 13.88 13.19 X-Large 76551969 8.96 8.51 XX-Large 76000918 44.14 41.93

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2843
EMERGENCY EYEWASH TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Emergency Eyewash Stations & Drench Showers

Wall Mounted Eye/Face Wash

Drench Shower Portable Self-Contained Eyewash Single Bottle Eyewash Station

Combination Eyewash/Shower
The Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1910.151) states, “where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities
for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate emergency use.”
This regulation is enforced by OSHA, who typically relies on uniform National Standards for guidance, when conducting facility inspections. The National Standard for
Emergency Eyewashes and Drench Showers is ANSI Z358.1-2009 and it establishes uniform minimum performance and use requirements for Emergency Eyewash
and Drench Shower Equipment and supplemental products.
The main criteria specified in the ANSI Standard that is most useful to Facility Maintenance Managers, Safety Directors, Purchasing Agents or others at a company
location is as follows: Emergency Eyewash Stations & Drench Showers…
• Should be within 10 seconds from a hazard exposure area. This equates to approximately 50 - 100 feet from each hazard
• Should be placed at the same level as the hazard with a clear unobstructed pathway to the equipment
• Should have a highly visible sign on or near the equipment to designate location and have adequate lighting in the area so equipment is easy to find
• Requiring a plumbed water supply should be tested weekly to ensure proper operation and to clear the supply line of sediment build-up and minimize microbial
contamination. Weekly testing should be documented on an inspection tag that is affixed to the equipment
• Is intended to be used for 15 minutes when exposure has occurred. The water supplied to the unit should be “tepid” or lukewarm to avoid risk of scalding or
hypothermic shock. Any equipment that does not have the ability to provide drenching relief for 15 minutes is considered supplemental only

Selecting the Right Emergency Drench Shower & Eyewash Station for Areas with Hazard Exposure Potential Present:
Areas with highly caustic chemicals that could affect the eyes, face and body should install a Combination Drench Shower with Eyewash. Such areas include:
• Battery Charging Stations • Transportation Areas that involve Hazardous Materials or Waste
• Chemical Processing and Storage Areas • Decontamination Applications such as Bio-Terrorism
Areas with a high level of airborne particulates and/or chemicals present that could affect the eyes only should install an Eyewash Station. If minimal exposure to
chemicals is present that could affect other parts of the body, a supplemental drench hose can be added to the Eyewash Station. Such areas include:
• Machine Shops (welding/grinding applications) • Parts Washer locations
• Janitors Closet (where cleaning chemicals are used and stored) • Laboratory that has limited space and drainage capabilities
Areas where freezing conditions exist should install Heat Traced or Frost Proof Emergency Eyewash and Drench Shower Equipment. This will eliminate the risk of pipes
freezing and equipment malfunctioning in the Eyewash or Drench Shower Station. Areas include:
• Chemical Tank Farms – located outside • Chemical Processing/Storage – located outside
• Waste Treatment Ponds • Transportation of Hazardous Materials (railroads, trucks, aviation)
Areas that are remote and do not have a plumbed water supply available should install Portable Self-Contained Eyewashes to include Gravity Fed or Pressurized Units.
Such areas include:
• Construction Sites • Law Enforcement
• Agriculture Operations (pesticide spraying, etc) • Jet Fueling applications
Areas that have limited space available, are at a level that is not conducive to installation of Emergency Drench Shower or Eyewash Equipment, or require minimal
removal of hazardous materials, can use supplemental eyewash products such as Drench Hoses, Personal Bottle Eyewashes or Sprays, prior to reaching equipment
that drenches for 15 minutes.

Page 111 Page 2868

Mounted Single Head Drench Showers

Pro-Safe Bradley
• The space saving single head drench shower allows you to connect • Features SpinTec™ shower head which improves
directly to existing pipes for economical installation water distribution and includes built-in flow
• The instant action, chrome plated brass ball valve stays open until controls resulting in water conservation • Horizontal Mount:
manually closed • 1w NPT chrome plated stay open ball valve with mounts to wall
• Item is activated by a large, easy to find, corrosion resistant triangular pull rod activates units • Vertical Mount:
stainless steel triangular rod • Constructed of galvanized steel protected with mounts to ceiling
• Pre-assembled and factory tested • Made in USA Bradtect™ corrosion-resistant yellow coating
• Units include drench shower sign and inspection tag • Units include drench shower sign and inspection tag
• Meets ANSI Z358.1 requirements • Meets ANSI Z358.1 requirements and is cUPC and SEI Certified
Mount Shower Head Material Shower Flow Rate Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mount Shower Head Material Shower Flow Rate Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Pro-Safe Bradley
Horizontal Plastic 20 GPM @ 30 psi — 86205374 $192.17 Horizontal Plastic 20 GPM at 30psi S19-120 01953496 $209.74
Horizontal Stainless Steel 20 GPM @ 30 psi — 86205382 243.99 Horizontal Stainless Steel 20 GPM at 30psi S19-120A 01953504 256.80
Vertical Plastic 20 GPM @ 30 psi — 86205358 187.95 Vertical Plastic 20 GPM at 30psi S19-130 85605822 224.05
Vertical Stainless Steel 20 GPM @ 30 psi — 86205366 256.59 Vertical Stainless Steel 20 GPM at 30psi S19-130A 81226490 292.82

2868 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270

 FIRE EXTINGUISHER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Welding Blankets
Beat the Heat Glass Web
These welding blankets protect material and equipment in welding areas from costly damage • White 35 oz. uncoated fiberglass that takes
caused by sparks and welding spatter. They can be draped over material or equipment to be continuous exposure to 1000°F
protected, or they can be hung from overhead to protect an area. • Very flexible choice
Price Ea. Price Ea. Goldenglass
W (Ft.) Ht. (Ft.) Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ W (Ft.) Ht. (Ft.) Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ • Gold 28 oz. fiberglass with neoprene coating on one side
Glass Web Uncoated Fiberglass - White Blackflex Neoprene Double Coated - Black and acrylic on the other for added strength and durability
• Withstands continuous exposure up to 400°F and
4.0 5.0 36754 04187654 $53.98 $51.28 4.0 6.0 37646 04187829 $89.08 $84.63
4.0 6.0 36746 04187688 64.78 61.54 6.0 6.0 37666 04187837 133.63 126.95 excursions up to 1000°F
5.0 8.0 36785 04187662 126.74 120.40 6.0 8.0 37686 04187845 169.22 160.76 • Medium flexibility
6.0 6.0 36766 04187696 92.28 87.67 6.0 10.0 37606 04187852 211.47 200.90 Blackflex
6.0 8.0 36786 04187704 123.06 116.91 Velvet Shield® Carbon Fiber - Black • Fiberglass coated on both sides with
6.0 10.0 36706 04187712 161.90 153.80 1.5 1.5 31618 09474198 12.82 12.18
special neoprene based coating that
8.0 8.0 36788 04187720 172.51 163.88 4.0 5.0 31654 04416699 70.86 67.32 strengthens the blanket
8.0 10.0 36708 04187738 215.91 205.11 4.0 6.0 31646 04416681 80.85 76.81 • Withstands continuous exposure up to
10.0 10.0 36701 04187746 262.83 249.69 6.0 8.0 31686 04416707 161.75 153.66
400°F, intermittent heat up to 750°F and sheds
12.0 12.0 36712 04187753 387.23 367.87 8.0 10.0 31608 04416673 269.35 255.88 molten metal up to 3000°F when on a 15° incline
Goldenglass Neoprene/Acrylic Coated 10.0 10.0 31601 74227505 296.21 281.40 Velvet Shield® & Velvet Shield® HD
Fiberglass - Gold • Soft, lightweight black carbon fiber fabric
• Continuous operating temperature of 1800°F and
4.0 6.0 37446 04187761 70.40 66.88 Velvet Shield® HD Carbon Fiber - Black
withstands temperatures up to 3000°F
6.0 6.0 37466 04187779 100.92 95.87 4.0 6 31746 A93215846 112.00 106.40 • Exceeds NFPA 701 standards
6.0 8.0 37486 04187787 136.11 129.30 6.0 8.0 31786 A93215853 209.78 199.29 • Grommets not included
10.0 10.0 37401 04187811 281.62 267.54 • Thickness: Velvet Shield - 1⁄4w; Velvet Shield HD - 1⁄2w

Basics of...Fire Extinguishers

Halotron Extinguisher Water Extinguisher Dry Chemical Extinguisher Wheeled Fire Extinguisher
UL Fire Extinguisher Rating - Extinguisher ratings indicate fire-fighting capabilities as tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The ratings can be seen on each
extinguisher with a labeled number, followed by a letter. For example, “3-A”, the number (3) indicates the relative power against a certain class (A) of fire (for class
information please see below). The 3-A has triple the power against a common combustible fire compared to one rated 1-A. Class C fire extinguishers are not labeled
with a relative power rating because these fires are a combination of a Class A and Class B with live electrical equipment.
Some chemical extinguishing agents can be used on more than one type of fire, and some have very specialized characteristics that make them particularly suitable for
a specific type of fire situation. Refer to the descriptions below to help you determine what is right for your needs.
Agent Key:
Class A: Common combustibles (wood, paper, cloth, etc.) - fires involve common combustibles such as wood, paper, cloth, rubber, trash and plastics. These fires are
common in a typical home or commercial settings, and can occur anywhere these types of materials are found.
Class B: Flammable liquids and gases (Gasoline, propane and solvents) - fires involve flammable liquids, gases, solvents, oil, gasoline, paint, lacquers, tars and other
synthetic or oil-based products. Class B fires often spread rapidly and can even reflash after the flames are extinguished.
Class C: Live electrical equipment (computers, fax machines, etc.) - fires involve energized electrical equipment, such as wiring, controls, motors, data processing
panels or appliances. They can be caused by a spark, power surge or short circuit.
Class D: Combustible metals (magnesium, lithium, titanium, etc.) - fires involve combustible metals such as magnesium and sodium. Combustible metal fires, which are
unique to industrial hazards, require special dry powder agents.
Class K: Cooking media (cooking oils and fats) - fires involve combustible cooking media such as oils and grease commonly found in commercial kitchens. The new
cooking media formulations used to form commercial food preparations require a special wet chemical extinguishing agent that is specially suited for extinguishing Page
and suppressing these extremely hot fires that have the ability to reflash.
Page 112 2875

13v Fire Escape Ladder Surface Mounted Extinguisher Cabinets

• 13v Steel escape ladder • Fully assembled • Tempered safety glass - far safer than standard plate glass
• Unique tangle-free design during emergencies, and in case of accidental breakage
• Attaches quickly to window for easy escape • Patented Break Rite™ non-removable handle - eliminates
• Compact for easy storage and access the need for hammer or breaker-bar
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Electrostatically-applied, thermally-fused, recoatable finish
• Galvanized steel vandal-resistant, unitized assembly with
468035 67317834 $74.75 provision for optional padlock
Inside Dimensions Use with
Fire Extinguisher Covers W (In.) Ht. (In.) D (In.) Extinguisher (Max. Size) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
9 18 6 6 Lb. Dry Chemical 468041 03564952 $56.49
• High visibility • Protect extinguisher from dust 9 24 6 10 Lb. Dry Chemical 468042 03564960 70.77
• See-through cover • Color: Red/Black
Capacity Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
5-10 Lbs. XT5W 09702978 $14.20
15-30 Lbs. XT8W 09897620 15.26

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2875
 FALL PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Fall Protection

The Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA) requires that each employee on a walking/working surface 4 feet or more above lower levels (6 feet for
construction) shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system. A personal fall arrest system consists of an
anchor point, connectors and a full body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combination of these. These systems, when
stopping a fall, shall limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1800 lbs. They shall be rigged such that employees can neither free fall more than 6 feet or
contact any lower level. The system shall bring an employee to a complete stop and limit the deceleration distance traveled to 3.5 feet. The system shall have sufficient
strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee falling the distance permitted by the system.
In addition to the OSHA standards, voluntary standards published by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) establish performance criteria for systems and
provides guidelines and recommendations for their use and inspection. In some cases, these guidelines and recommendations may exceed OSHA requirements; for
example, ANSI A10.32 recommends that the maximum arresting force imposed on the user’s body shall not exceed 1,000 lbs. (versus 1800 lbs. in the OSHA
standard). It is important to consult regulations from agencies governing your industry as well as any general standards. Many of these can be found at websites such
as www.osha.gov and www.ansi.org.
There are a number of factors to consider when selecting the proper personal fall arrest equipment:
1. Identify fall hazard locations, the number of workers exposed, and the type of work being performed.
2. Consider the presence of any hazards in addition to falls which may impact equipment selection, including but not limited to salt air or spray, chemicals, electrical
hazards, flammable or toxic gases, high heat or open flame, welding spark and extreme cold.
3. Establish a suitable anchor point for connection of personal fall arrest systems. Even if the proper equipment is selected, workers will be at risk if not tied off
correctly. Some examples of unsuitable anchor points include electrical conduit, most water pipes, many wooden supports such at 2 x 4’s, most wooden or metal
railings and any open-ended connection point from which a connecting device can slide or become dislodged. (See section on Anchorage Connectors for suitable
anchor points)
4. Maintain a written fall protection plan, which addresses hazards for each site covered by the plan and training for all workers exposed to those hazards. The plan
should include provisions for rescue, including training requirements for rescuers. Training logs for personnel and inspection logs for equipment should be kept.

Belts and Harnesses

Belts are only to be used for positioning or restraint, not fall arrest. All full body harnesses have a connection point for fall arrest in the back,
between the shoulder blades. Harnesses can be purchased with additional connection points, including in the front at chest level for
repelling or connection to ladder safety systems, on the hips for positioning or restraint and on the shoulders for retrieval, typically from
confined spaces. Additional features may be added based on worker comfort, preference and task to be performed. These include belts,
back pads, shoulder pads, seat slings, etc.
Different buckle styles are available on harnesses. If a harness is to be worn by multiple workers, such as for a day
shift and night shift, the friction style may be preferable as it adjusts quickly over the full length of the strap. When a
harness is issued to one worker, the quick connect style may be preferable as it will retain its adjustment between each
use. Finally, the tongue buckle style may be preferable in either application, as it can be readily adjusted for multiple
workers, but an individual worker may return the buckles to the same grommets each time the harness is worn. D-Ring Belt Full Body Harness

Lanyards and Lifelines

Lanyards and lifelines are used to connect a worker to an anchor point. Systems should be selected to
ensure that workers are never impacted with more than 1800 pounds of arresting force. For this reason,
rope and web lanyards without energy absorbers should only be used for positioning or restraint. Workers
who are close to their anchor point may require a single energy (shock) absorbing lanyard, while workers
moving from one anchor point to another may require a twin-leg energy (shock) absorbing lanyard to
maintain 100% tie off. If additional mobility is required, self-retracting lifelines or rope or cable lifelines with
grabs may be used. Care should be taken to assess the available clearance below a worker and select
equipment, which will prevent the worker from striking an obstruction or lower level.

Energy Absorbing Harness Self-Retracting Lifeline

Anchorage Connectors
Anchor connectors are used to connect lanyards, lifelines or self-retracting lifelines to a suitable anchor point.
Anchor points must conform to applicable fall protection standards, namely, 5000 lbs. strength or twice the
expected load. Possible anchor points may include I-beams, H-beams, concrete walls, pillars and forms, and other
structures. Anchorage connectors may be quite basic, such as snap hooks or carabineers. They are available in
different sizes based on the size of the connection point. For example, a gate opening of 1 inch or less may be Carabineer Anchor D-Ring
sufficient for connection to a D-ring, while a larger opening will be needed to connect to a larger support such as
bracing or angle iron. Anchor D-rings are commonly used on I-beams and H-beams with holes. When holes are not
available, fixed or sliding beam anchors may be appropriate. Anchor straps can be used in applications where there
is structure to wrap around, and can be provided in any length. Rope and cable grabs are used to connect a lanyard
to a rope or cable lifeline. Anchor Sling

Horizontal Lifelines

Horizontal lifelines allow increased mobility while protecting workers from falls. Some systems are designed
for permanent installation, while others are designed to be removed from one work area and installed in
another. Prior to selecting a system, it is important to determine the distance the system must cover (length
of system), the available clearance below the worker, the number of workers who will use the system at the
same time and the strength requirements for anchor points.

FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2881
Page 113
 RECHARGEABLE LANTERNS & BATTERY TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Rechargeable Lanterns
Search & Rescue Superstars
When prolonged search and rescue operations are necessary, lanterns that can withstand inclement weather, hold charges
for extended periods and have highly visible beams should prove helpful. These searchlights have all of those characteristics.
Vulcan® Series
• High-intensity halogen 8 watt spot plus xenon dual filament for instant backup beam
• Up to 31⁄4 hours continuous run-time per charge w/included AC/DC chargers and rack
• Red and green LEDs for charge status • Battery is rechargeable up to 500 times
• Compliance: FM (Class I, II & III, Div. 2), CSA (Class I & II, Div. 2, Class III) NFPA, CE, EX
Fire Vulcan® Standard & Vehicle Mount
• High impact ABS thermoplastic waterproof housing Mfr’s #44400
• 3-Position toggle switch designed for easy use w/gloves
• Run-times up to 3 hours w/steady halogen and 2 bright blue LED
bulbs, 6 hours w/blinking bulbs, or 60 hours w/blinking LEDs only
• All include quick-release strap and applicable charging rack w/cords
• Compliance: FM (Class I, II & III, Div. 2), CSA (Class I & II, Div. 2,
Class III) NFPA, CE, EX
Fire Vulcan® LED Standard & Vehicle Mount
• Features a C4 LED that is impervious to shock with a 50,000 hour lifetime and produces
up to 80,000 Candela (Peak Beam Intensity)
• Deep dish parabolic reflector produces a tight beam with optimum peripheral illumination
• The 2 ultra-bright blue taillight LEDs can be seen through thick smoke Mfr’s #44200 Mfr’s #44450
• Run-Times: Steady LED and Taillights - Up to 3 hours to the 10% output level (High) and
up to 6 hours (Low)
• IPX rated design - waterproof to 1 meter for 30 minutes
• Super lightweight lithium ion battery recharges in 5 hours
• 8 total programmable functions - 4 functions when toggle switch in “left” position
and 4 functions when toggle switch is in “right” position.
• Raised handle and toggle “on-off” switch ensure ease of use with a gloved hand
• Fits existing Streamlight Vulcan chargers
• Serialized for positive identification
• Compliance: FM (Class I, Div 2, Class II Div 2, Class III), NFPA, CE
LiteBox® Dual Filament Mfr’s #45109 Mfr’s #45601
• High impact ABS thermoplastic housing w/swivel neck and H.I.D. LiteBox®
rubberized bumper, lens ring and grip handle • Deep-dish parabolic reflector produces a long range high intensity focused, one million
• 8 Watt spot dual filament bulb for instant backup candlepower beam that can illuminate objects up to a mile away
• Up to 8 hours of continuous run-time between charges • Optimum peripheral illumination for scene lighting
• Includes AC/DC charge cords, mounting rack and shoulder strap • Fully articulating head can be aimed precisely at target
• Compliance: CE, NFPA • 35 Watt H.I.D Xenon lamp: 3350 Lumens, 2000 Hr. min. lifetime
Accessory • White 5mm LED (x2): 9 Lumens (each), Impervious to shock with a 100,000 Hr. lifetime
• Runtime: H.I.D. lamp: up to 1.75 Hrs., LEDs: 100 Hrs.+
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • High-impact ABS thermoplastic housing and weatherproof construction
Dual Filament Replacement Bulb (Vulcan) 45921 04799607 $20.04 • Fits existing LiteBox® mounting racks
8 Watt Bi-pin Replacement Bulb (Vulcan) 45901 07137540 11.89 • Battery rechargeable up to 500 times • Serialized for positive identification
Lead Acid Replacement Battery 44007 60557493 51.94 • Includes AC and DC charge cords and rack
Lanterns
Desc. Battery Type No. of Batteries Peak Candlepower Bulb Type Bulb # Color L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Vulcan w/AC/DC Charger (Standard) 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen & Xenon Backup 45901 Yellow 71⁄2 44000 B76161835 $183.36
Vulcan Dual Filament 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen 45921 Yellow 71⁄2 44200 B04799573 180.72
Fire Vulcan w/AC/DC Charger (Standard) 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen & 2 LEDs (Taillight) 45901 Orange 71⁄2 44400 B09679580 208.36
Fire Vulcan w/DC Charger (Vehicle Mount) 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen & 2 LEDs (Taillight) 45901 Orange 71⁄2 44401 B09679598 195.35
Fire Vulcan LED w/AC/DC Charger (Standard) Lithium-Ion 1 80000 C4 LED/2 Blue Taillight LEDs — Orange 71⁄2 44450 B66745555 315.37
Fire Vulcan LED w/DC Charger (Vehicle Mount) Lithium-Ion 1 80000 C4 LED/2 Blue Taillight LEDs — Orange 71⁄2 44451 B72053937 303.24
LiteBox Standard System 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 105000 Halogen 45913 Yellow 111⁄2 45109 B54126230 201.10
LiteBox Dual Filament w/AC/DC Charger 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 70000 Xenon Dual Watt Spot 45921 Yellow 111⁄2 45705 B04799599 229.87
H.I.D. LiteBox w/AC/DC 12V Sealed Lead Acid 1 1000000 1 Xenon & 2 LEDs 45637 Orange 15 45601 B83219444 857.34

Basics of...Batteries
Types of Batteries
Carbon Zinc: Provide economical power in devices requiring light to moderate drain such as remote controls, flashlights, smoke detectors and radios.
Alkaline: Designed for broadest category of heavy current and continuous use devices and have a longer shelf life and higher energy density than carbon zinc batteries.
Lithium: Designed for optimum performance in high drain / high tech devices including electronic medical devices, portable electronic devices, calculators and
watches. Lithium batteries can be used in place of alkaline batteries in most instances to provide a longer life for a device and superior performance in extreme
temperatures.
Silver Oxide: Miniature battery product primarily used in small electronic devices such as watches and car alarm remotes.
Zinc Air: Primarily used in hearing aids and can be used in place of silver oxide batteries in most instances to provide a longer life for the device.
NiCd (Nickel Cadmium): Rechargeable battery used primarily for cordless and wireless phones, power tools and emergency lighting.
NiMH (Nickel-Metal Hydride): Rechargeable battery with a higher energy density and can provide up to 4 times the capacity of the equivalent NiCd battery.
Lead Acid: Wet-cell rechargeable battery with a large power to weight ratio. Commonly used in large back-up power supplies.
Note: For rechargeable battery recycling and disposal information visit the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation at www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-8-battery.

= Eco Friendly Item FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2907
Page 114
IDENTIFICATION TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Identification

It’s the law… ANSI Z535 and OSHA 1910.145 - Safety signs are required to indicate and define specific hazards that, without identification, may lead to injury or death.
Select your sign with the header that indicates the degree of hazard in your application.

Use DANGER to indicate an immediate hazard that has a high probability to severe injury or death.
Use WARNING to indicate a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided can result in serious injury or death.
Use CAUTION to indicate a potentially hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate injury, but not death.
Use NOTICE to provide general information needed to avoid confusion.
SAFETY FIRST, THINK, and EMERGENCY and other similar headings are used with information about housekeeping, first aid, health, medical equipment, sanitation and
general safety.
OSHA Guidelines
©
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.15 (1) & NFPA 101 Life Safety Code – the location of fire extinguishers, sprinklers, hoses and alarms are to be clearly marked
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.37 & NFPA 101 Life Safety Code – all exits are to be clearly marked
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.37(q)(1)(3)(4)(6)(8) – an exit sign with an arrow showing the direction is to be placed in every location where the path of travel to the nearest exit is
not apparent. Also all doors, passages and stairways which are not exits and/or may be mistaken as an exit, are to be identified as not an exit or by its property, i.e.
“PROPERTY ROOM”, “CLOSET”, etc.
OSHA 28 CFR & Section 4.1.2(7) of the Americans With Disabilities Act – toilet/bathing facilities that are accessible shall be identified by the International Symbol of
Accessibility
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 – every container of hazardous chemicals must be labeled with chemical name and appropriate hazard warnings so employees are aware of
potential exposure
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.305(b)(3) – covers for boxes are to be permanently marked with “HIGH VOLTAGE” on the outside of the box cover
NEC 430.102 – Disconnecting means for motor, motor circuits and controllers. “The provisions for locking or adding a lock to the disconnecting means shall be
permanently installed “ON” or “AT” the switch or circuit breaker used as the disconnecting means.”
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145 – where a hazardous situation could result in death or severe injury, signs are to be posted indicating immediate danger and which special
precautions are necessary. Where a hazardous situation is capable of severe injury, signs are to be posted to caution against unsafe practices.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145©(2) – caution signs are to be used to warn against potential hazards
OSHA 29 CFR.147 – all energy sources are required to be turned off and locked out while machines are being serviced or maintained. Any energy sources that cannot
be locked out are to use a tag out system.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1450(h)(l) and .1200(g)(10) – right to know material safety data sheets must be readily accessible to employees.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145 – location signs for eyewash stations and safety showers are recommended.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146©(2) – signs are to be posted near permit spaces to notify employees of what hazards may be present with messages such as “PERMIT
REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE.”
NFPA Life Safety Code 5-2.2.5.4 - “Stairs serving five or more stories shall be provided with signage within the enclosure at each floor landing.
The signage shall indicate the story, the terminus of the top and bottom of the stair enclosure, and the identification of the stair. The signage also shall state the story
of, and the direction to, exit discharge.”
Fire Signs
Flammable: Keep Fire Away 1910.106(d)(3)(ii) – Storage cabinets in which flammable liquids are kept must be labeled in a
conspicuous manner “Flammable – Keep Fire Away”
Fire Hose 1910.158 ©(1) - Where reels or cabinets are used to contain a fire hose, the employer must be sure that they are
conspicuously identified and used only for fire equipment.
Fire Extinguisher Marking 1910.157 ©(1) – When portable fire extinguishers are provided, they must be located, mounted, and
identified so that they are readily accessible.

Hazardous Waste Labels

D.O.T. (49CFR part 172) and EPA (40 CFR part 262) – require labeling substance containers for hazardous waste. Labels must be durable, in
contrasting colors and in English. In placement, the label may not be obscured by other labels, attachments or markings.

Safety Marking Tapes Electrical Hazards

Safety code designations for tape colors as recommended per OSHA 29 CFR ANSI required color ANSI ZG3.22 – Orange will be used as the basic color for
1910-144(a): indicating hazardous parts of machines or energized equipment, which may
Red –Danger, fire protection apparatus and containers of flammable liquids shock or otherwise injure.
Orange – Dangerous parts of machinery or energized equipment
Yellow – Caution and physical hazards (interchangeable with black and
yellow stripes)
Blue – Warning against starting equipment under repair
Green – For safety and first aid equipment locations
Black & Yellow – Caution and physical hazards
Magenta & Yellow – Radiation hazards
Red & White – Danger and fire protection equipment

2932 FOR A MORE COMPLETE OFFERING OF IDENTIFICATION, PLEASE VISIT mscdirect.com

Page 115
 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Lockout/Tagout
The OSHA standard for The Control of Hazardous Energy, 29 CFR 1910.147 addresses the practices and procedures necessary
to disable machinery or equipment, thereby preventing the release of hazardous energy while employees perform servicing
and maintenance activities. The standard outlines measures for controlling hazardous energies – electrical, mechanical,
hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal and other energy sources.

In addition, 29 CFR 1910.333 sets forth requirements to protect employees working on electrical circuits and equipment. This
section requires workers to use safe work practices, including lockout and tagging procedures. These provisions apply when
employees are exposed to electrical hazards while working on, near, or with conductors or systems that use electrical energy.
Page
Page 116 2965

Lockout System Tags & Accessories

Lockout Tags
• Standard lockout tags with universal backs
• 3⁄8w Grommets
Jumbo Lockout Tags
• These larger tags stand out and are easier to
read from a distance than standard lockout tags
• 3⁄8w Grommets
Round Lockout Tag
• Unique round shape stands out amongst
typical lockout tags Do Not Remove Danger Equipment Do Not Operate Round Lockout Tag
Lock Holding Lockout Tag
• Rigid plastic tag accommodates up to ten locks Markers & Fasteners
• 5⁄8w Grommets Type Color Pk. Qty. Order # Price per Pk.
Markers Permanent Marker Black 1 63376164 $2.59
• Permanent marker for high water resistance Self-Locking Nylon Cable Tie Black 25 63376180 2.91 Permanent Marker
Lockout Tags
Ht. W Dia. Pk. Price/
Brand Type (In.) (In.) (In.) Legend Front Legend Back Color Material Qty. Order # Pk.
NMC Tag 6 31⁄2 — Danger - Do Not Open. This Tag & Lock To Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Red & Black Vinyl 10 60759016 $31.15
Be Removed Only By The Person Shown on White
On Back
NMC Tag 6 31⁄2 — Danger - Do Not Operate. Equipment Lock- Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Red & Black Vinyl 10 60759024 31.15
Out. This Tag & Lock To Be Removed Only on White
By The Person Shown On Back
Master Lock Tag 53⁄4 31⁄8 — Danger - Do Not Operate. This lock/tag may This energy source has been locked out! Red & Black Durable 12 A79339396 16.34
only be removed by: Only the individual who signed the reverse on White Polyester
side may remove this lock/tag. Laminate
NMC Tag 6 31⁄2 — Danger - Do Not Start. This Tag & Lock To Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Red & Black Vinyl 10 60759032 31.15
Be Removed Only By The Person Shown on White
On Back
NMC Tag 6 31⁄2 — Danger - Equipment Locked Out. This Tag Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Red & Black Vinyl 10 60759040 31.15
& Lock To Be Removed Only By The Person on White
Shown On Back
NMC Tag 6 31⁄2 — Danger - This Tag & Lock To Be Removed Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Red & Black Vinyl 10 63376131 31.15
Only By The Person Shown On Back on White
NMC Tag (Bilingual) 6 31⁄2 — Danger - This Tag & Lock To Be Removed Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Red & Black Vinyl 10 63376149 31.15
Only By The Person Shown On Back on White
NMC Jumbo Tag 73⁄8 4 — Danger - Equipment Locked Out By Danger - This Tag & Lock To Be Removed Red & Black Laminated 10 63376115 18.58
Only By The Person Shown On Front on White Vinyl
NMC Jumbo Tag 73⁄8 4 — Danger - Do Not Operate. Do Not Remove Danger - This Tag & Lock To Be Removed Red & Black Laminated 10 63376123 18.58
This Lock It Is Here To Protect My Life Only By The Person Shown On Front on White Vinyl
Place Photo Here
NMC Round Tag — — 7 Danger - Tag Placed By Danger - Do Not Remove This Tag. Red, Black & Tyvek 1 63376156 10.25
Employees Working On Equipment. Central White on Blue
Tagout Located At:
NMC Lock Holding Tag 14 10 — Danger - Employees Working On Danger - Do Not Remove This Tag. Red & Black Rigid 1 60759008 10.44
Equipment Central Tagout Location Employees Working On Equipment. List All on White Plastic
Lockout Locations Below

Zenon Z12 Safety Glasses

Workplace Favorite Lens Lens Temple Price Ea.
Color Coating Color Order # 1 - 11 12+
These sporty glasses are a workplace favorite. Clear Scratch Resistant Black BU76564640 $2.12 $1.95
The lightweight design affords superb Clear Scratch Resistant Clear BU93884351 2.12 1.95
peripheral vision safety. Clear Anti-Fog, Scratch Resistant Clear BU93884377 2.37 2.18
Clear Anti-Fog, Scratch Resistant Black BU93884336 2.37 2.18
• Wraparound lens resists impact damage Gray Scratch Resistant Black BU76564657 2.59 2.38
• Frameless design Gray w/Silver Mirror Scratch Resistant Black BU93884328 2.16 1.99
• Lens is hardcoated and offers Indoor/Outdoor SIilver Mirror Scratch Resistant Black BU93884310 2.16 1.99
99.9% UV protection Indoor/Outdoor SIilver Mirror Scratch Resistant Clear BU93884369 2.16 1.99
• Compliance: ANSI Z87.1+ Blue Scratch Resistant Blue BU93884393 2.16 1.99

CUSTOM ORDERS AVAILABLE, REFER TO PAGES 2950–2957 2965

 MATTING TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Matting

Anti-fatigue Mat Drainage Mat Static Dissipative Mat Entrance Mats

Types of Anti-Fatigue Mats

Anti-fatigue Mats are designed by nature to provide comfort and increase the productivity of standing workers. However, all mats are not alike. They are designed with
different functionality, comfort levels and life expectancy.
Anti-Fatigue Mats w/Wear Surface Bonded to Sponge: these are the most popular anti-fatigue mats on the market. Designed for dry areas, they have an abrasion-
resistant surface bonded to a sponge base.
The surface can have a design molded in like diamond-plate, corrugations and circles, or be smooth. Surfaces with designs tend to be more slip resistant. Smooth
mats are easier to clean, especially in the presence of fine dirt or dust particles.
The sponge base is generally between 3⁄8” to ¾” thick. In general, the thicker the base, the softer the mat. The type of sponge is also important. 100% PVC sponge is
usually found in economy products. 100% PVC sponge is stiffer and bounces back slower than blended sponge based material. A blend of PVC with Nitrile rubber
sponge is over 50% softer than PVC alone and a better choice when the worker is to stand on the mat for extended periods of time. Anti-Fatigue mats with blended
sponge bases can last 3-5 years of round the clock use. Mats with 100% PVC sponge will last about half as long.
PVC Sponge without a Wear Surface: another popular mat because of its low cost. This is the most basic and economical anti-fatigue product on the market. Designed
for dry areas, this material can be easily cut to size and is commonly purchased in rolls. Average life expectancy is 6 to 12 months. After this period of time the mat
does not fall apart but the sponge looses is resiliency (ability to bounce back) and flattens out. The more traffic the mat sees the quicker this will happen.
Molded Rubber: also very popular and available in many compounds and configurations. It is generally used in wet areas (water), oily/greasy areas (animal or mineral
oils) or near machinery where cutting fluids are present. Each of these conditions requires a different rubber compound if the mat is to perform satisfactorily.
Molded Rubber Compounds:
Natural Rubber – Best in dry areas or around water. Most detergents will not adversely affect the mat.
50% Nitrile Rubber Blend – Same applications as above plus salt water, animal fats, mineral & vegetable oils, brake-fluid, hydraulic oils, & mineral based cutting oils.
Cutting Fluid Resistant (CFR) Rubber Blend – Same applications as above plus semi-synthetic cutting oils, and high concentrations of mineral, hydraulic or vegetable oils.
Molded Rubber Configurations: Most molded rubber mats are between ½” and 7⁄8” thick and are available in a great range of sizes. Keep in mind that thinner and smaller
sized products are lighter in weight and generally easier to clean. The thicker mats are suitable when there is a need to get the worker as far off the floor as possible,
such as a wash down area. Molded rubber mats are often perforated with drainage holes but some mats are solid which facilitates the cleaning of dry debris by simply
sweeping the mat.
1. Molded Rubber with Holes and Grit – the best in non-slip matting where floors are both wet and slippery.
2. Molded Rubber with Holes – for wet areas where maximum slip resistance is not required.
3. Molded Rubber with a Solid Surface and Grit – ideal for use in areas where slick substances like power, graphite, Teflon or other slippery dry compounds are
present.
4. Molded Rubber with a Solid Surface – the solid surface is easy to sweep clean, particularly if debris like metal shavings or wood chips are present.
Molded rubber mats have a life expectancy from 1 to 3 years depending on the harshness of the environment and the scheduled cleanings.
Modular Tiles - these modular interlocking tiles are designed to snap together quickly to cover large sections of the floor and are available in many different sizes and
thicknesses. The thinner versions are generally designed for lighter duty such as locker rooms or shower areas. The thicker and larger tiles are designed to create a
floor above a floor, and some can withstand heavy cart traffic and extreme use. Interlocking tiles are available with or without drainage holes, with or without grit and
have ramp edging available to reduce trip hazards and to facilitate cart access.
Molded Urethane – this is a premium compound that’s just starting to show up in the form of Anti-Fatigue mats. It certainly is the “best of the best” in terms of
comfort, crush and chemical resistance. A 5⁄8” thick Urethane mat offers more comfort than 1” thick Anti-Fatigue mats made from other materials. Great for dry areas
and around many chemical spills, Urethane has a life expectancy of over 5 years.
Runner Mats - made of vinyl or rubber and do not have any sponge backing. They are designed to protect floors and also to provide additional traction in highly
trafficked areas. Solid runners are designed for use in dry areas. The thicker the material, the more traffic it will withstand. Slotted runners are designed for extra
traction and slip resistance in wet areas.

Types of Entrance Mats

Carpet Mats are designed for indoor applications. They scrape dirt and water from shoes. The design of the surface, including fiber type and weight, dramatically
affects the mat’s functionality.
Polypropylene - These fibers trap and hold more water than most other fibers.
Nylon – These fibers dry more quickly than polypropylene.
The higher the fiber content, the more water the mat will hold. Carpet mats have three types of surface designs:
1. Tightly woven, closed-loop shows less traffic patterns and holds up longer.
2. A “High-low” or ribbed surface scrapes as well as collects large volumes of dirt between cleanings.
3. A plush pile holds the most water but shows footprints.
Molded Rubber entrance mats are designed for outdoor use. They function as scraper mats keeping dirt, snow and water outside. For best results in keeping your
building clean and dry, place a molded rubber mat outside your entrance and a carpet mat inside the doors.

Specialty Mats
Electrically Conductive: designed to quickly drain static electricity from workers before it can be passed onto sensitive equipment. The lower the ohm reading, (i.e. 104
ohm is lower than 105 ohm) the faster the static electricity is drawn off the worker. Mats with lower ohm readings should be used in very sensitive areas. A ground
cord and heel grounders are mandatory accessories.
Non-conductive or Switchboard: designed for use in dry areas around high voltage equipment. These mats ground the worker and protect them from deadly voltage.
Clean Room: trap impurities in areas that require dirt control. The tacky surface pulls dirt from shoe soles before they contaminate a “Clean Room”. Each mat consists
of 30 layers of tacky film that can be peeled away and discarded as they become dirty.
Emergency Shower Station: for use under Emergency Showers and Eyewash Stations. These color coded mats draw attention to the emergency equipment and keep
accident victims from slipping.
Welding Anti-Fatigue Mats: sponge-backed mats that are highly resistant to weld sparks and hot metal shards. Their thick durable surface is bonded to a resilient and
comfortable sponge base.
Absorbent Matting: a disposable product that absorbs leaks, drips, over-sprays and small spills. Can be used alone or placed under other perforated matting. Simply
dispose of these mats when they become saturated and replace with a clean dry piece. This matting comes in rolls and is easily cut to size.

CUSTOM ORDERS AVAILABLE, CONTACT PRO-SAFE™ @ 877-PRO-SAF1 2975

Page 117
SORBENTS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Sorbents

Sorbents are used to absorb spilled liquids. Depending on the product selected, they can be used to absorb routine leaks and drips in basic maintenance applications,
or they can be used in emergency response situations.

Regulations to Consider

• OSHA 29 CFR 1910.22(a) requires clean, dry, slip free floors in the workplace
• EPA 40 CFR 112.7 (c) refers to the use of sorbents as one method of preventing oil spills from reaching waterways and groundwater

Sorbents are generally classified as:

Oil Only: will only absorb oils, fuels or any petroleum based liquids. Will not absorb water or water based fluids. These products will float and are commonly used
outdoors to pick up oil accumulated on water. They can also be used on land and indoors on petroleum based liquids. Generally these sorbents are made of synthetic
materials, e.g. white polypropylene.
Universal: will absorb both oil and petroleum based liquids. These are to be used only on land-based applications where you want to absorb all liquids. Note that
synthetic sorbents (polypropylene) are gray in color and can be used on virtually any liquid, water-based or oil-based.
Chemical: like Universal sorbents, Chemical sorbents can be used on any liquid, but are typically reserved for hazardous chemicals, acids and caustics. Chemical
sorbents are color coded green, although sometimes yellow, to identify them as being suitable for use on aggressive fluids. Note that when using Chemical sorbents
on hazardous liquids, proper personal protective equipment is recommended.

CAUTION: some sorbents, sold as Universal, are made with organic materials (cellulose, peat moss, corn cob, etc.) and cannot be used on “aggressive fluids” (acids
and caustics) without danger of chemical reaction.

Product Selection Parameters

1. What liquids are you absorbing? Do you need an oil only product? Or a Universal sorbent? Or do you need a sorbent specifically designed for chemicals?
2. How much liquid will you typically be absorbing? This will help you determine if you need a heavy, medium or light weight product. It will also help determine if you
want a pad or a roll and how big it should be.
3. How will you use the sorbent? How strong does it need to be? Sorbent pads and rolls that are going to be walked on or used to wipe down equipment need to be
stronger and tougher than sorbents which are only being used on puddled liquids.

Typical Applications
Pads – under machines and workstations to catch leaks and drips, used also to “wipe down” parts and equipment
Rolls – for larger areas, under conveyors, alongside equipment. Perfed rolls can also be used as pads.
Socks – wrap around the base of machines and equipment to catch liquids at the source
Pillows - under machines for heavier volume, in hard to access locations
Rugs and Matting – in medium to high traffic areas to walk and drive on

Emergency Response Spill Kits

Selection parameters here are similar to those in the use of maintenance sorbents:
1. Type of liquids to be spilled will determine if you need an Oil Only, Universal or Chemical spill kit.
2. Can your kit or kits effectively absorb your “worst case discharge”? This will determine how large a kit you need.
3. Do you want a kit that is portable (can be carried)? Mobile (wheeled)? Or found in a pre-determined location in the workplace?

Notes on Disposal Options

Using sorbents does not change the nature of a spilled liquid. Proper disposal of used sorbents is determined by state and local regulations. Refer to MSDS on liquids
in use. Page
Page 118 2990

Mercury Spill Kit Clean Crete

• All natural, environmentally friendly
• For use with mercury only • Powder based product lifts oil,
grease and other petroleum based
Kit Contents Mercury Spill Kit stains from concrete
Hg Absorb Jar 1 • Adheres to many of the EPA laws
Hg Absorb Sponge 2 pertaining to nonsource pollution
500g Absorb Powder 1
Spill Type Universal
Features:
Order # 75331215 Container Size (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
• No water or clean-up required
Price Ea. $223.06 • Reduces oil tracking into location 5 B77209260 $103.99
• Increases longevity of treated concrete 20 B77209252 210.77

2990 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270 = Eco Friendly Item
SAFETY CANS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Chemical Sorbents
These are specially developed chemical sorbents with properties that make them ideal for hazardous liquid cleanup. A surfactant-treated polypropylene, they absorb 16 times
their weight in chemicals, water or oil. Versatile and cost-effective, they can be used on a wide range of chemicals, including hydrofluoric acid. Their fast wicking actions
minimize the problems of hazmat spills. They are chemically inert, so they will not react with aggressive fluids. They are certified by GTS Duratek and leaves on 0.20% ash.
The product’s green color - the universal symbol for safety - indicates that it is intended for use on hazardous materials.
Pro-Safe SPC
Size Box Price Ea. Price Ea.
Type W L Qty. Capacity Order # 1-4 5+ Capacity Mfr’s # Order # 1-4 5+
Pads 12w 12w 200 20 Gal. UN1113 00922344 $110.09 $104.59
Pads 15w 18w 100 29 Gal. B04019782 $88.83 $84.39 24 Gal. UN1719 1
00260885 111.54 105.96
Pads 15w 19w 200 44 Gal. 04019790 86.98 82.63
Roll 15w 150v 2 58 Gal. B04019816 141.81 134.72 39 Gal. UN1019 90987868 167.39 159.02
Roll 30w 150v 1 58 Gal. B04019808 153.93 146.23 39 Gal. UN3800 00922351 181.70 172.61
1
Size: 15w x 19w

Universal X-TRA Tough Sorbents

Desc. W L Vol. Cap. Pkg. Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • 3-Ply construction of a double-sided, low-linting cover stock
Pads and meltblown core
Lightweight 15w 19w 31.5 Gal. 200 UXT200 B75535914 $96.56 • High-performance, all-purpose sorbent made to handle virtually
Heavyweight 15w 19w 19 Gal. 100 UXT100 B80688534 84.15 any liquid
Rolls • Equally effective against oils, acids, solvents, bases, chemicals,
Heavyweight 15w 150v 17 Gal. 1 UXT15P B80688526 96.19 coolants and antifreeze
Heavyweight 30w 150v 35 Gal. 1 UXT30-DP B75535922 171.55 • Wringable and reusable for further economy

Basics of...Safety Cans

Type I Safety Can Type II Safety Can Lab Can Oily Waste Can
The handling of hazardous liquids is subject to both safety and health regulations requiring protection for employees who work with flammable, combustible and
explosive liquids. Approved safety cans are considered the first line of defense to guard against fire by safely containing these hazardous liquids and liquid soaked
materials, while controlling vapor release and by meeting federal, state and local fire codes and complying with federal OSHA regulations.
Compliance and Regulatory Requirements
Approved safety cans are required by OSHA in commercial and industrial operations where flammable liquids are used or stored. Construction, performance, safety
and quality standards are established by NFPA Code 30 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106 (Flammable & Combustible Liquids Codes) and are evaluated by Factory Mutual
Research (FM) Approval Standard 6051 and 6052, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 30 or UL-Canada for approval.
NFPA 30 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106 (a)(29) define a safety can as an approved container, of not more than 5 gallons capacity, having a spring-closing lid and spout
cover and so designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire exposure.
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.152 (Construction Standard Code) states “Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used for storage and handling of flammable and
combustible liquids. Approved safety cans shall be used for the handling and use of flammable liquids in quantities greater than one gallon. For quantities of one gallon
or less, only the original container or approved safety cans shall be used for storage, use and handling of flammable liquids.”
Features and Optional Styles
Safety cans are available in various styles, sizes and construction materials to meet most storage and handling requirements. Type I and II Safety Cans feature leak-
tight spring-closing lids with gaskets designed to effectively relieve pressure buildup in the can and feature a fixed or free-swinging handle design, warning labels in 3
languages and flame arresters in all spout openings. Safety cans are also available in styles for handling and disposal of flammable liquids in the workplace, such as
Oily Waste Cans, Bench Cans and Plunger Cans.
Styles
Type I Safety Cans feature one spout that serves for both filling and dispensing. Type II Safety Cans feature two spouts, one for filling, and one with an actuated pour
valve with a flexible metal spout for safer controlled dispensing. Type I cans are also available in Lab Cans, Disposal Cans and Faucet Can styles. Oily Waste Cans are
for disposal of solvent laden rags and have a self-closing lid to prevent spontaneous combustion. Bench and Plunger Cans are designed to control vapor release and
free liquids in cleaning operations.
Safety Can Colors
Safety cans are available in a variety of colors in order to help separate, organize and identify the chemicals inside, as well as to assist first responders in the case of an
emergency. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.144 states “Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable liquids having a flash point at or below 80° F, shall be painted red
with some additional clearly visible identification either in the form of a yellow band around the can or the name of the contents conspicuously marked on the can in
yellow.” Industry accepted can colors are as follows:
Red – Gasoline or other flammable liquids Yellow - Diesel fuel Blue - Kerosene
Construction Materials
Safety cans are available in coated steel (galvanized or terne) with baked-on powder-coat finish for use with gasoline, kerosene, diesel and other flammables, Non-
metallic (HDPE) with stainless steel or coated fittings for use with solvents, fuels and corrosive chemicals and stainless steel with stainless steel fittings for use with
alcohols, ethers, toluene and xylene, but not for use with strong acids, hydroxides or other corrosive solvents.

2998 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270 = Eco Friendly Item
Page 119
SAFETY CABINETS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Safety Cabinets

Improper storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids is the leading cause of industrial fires in the workplace. Storage of these hazardous chemicals in
safety storage cabinets can help: eliminate facility damage, protect personnel, improve workplace efficiencies, meet federal, state and local fire codes and comply with
federal OSHA regulations.
Compliance and Regulatory Requirements
Approved cabinets are required by OSHA and UFC (Uniform Fire Code) codes in commercial and industrial facilities where flammable liquids are used or stored. The
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) establishes construction, performance, safety and quality standards. The NFPA Code 30 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106
(Flammable & Combustible Liquids Codes) are evaluated by either Factory Mutual Research (FM) Approval Standard 6050 or Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard
1275 for approval. The following is a brief description of the minimum criteria required to meet these standards:
• Maximum total storage capacity - 120 gallons (455 L) • If self-closing doors, fusible link required (212 degrees F)
• Minimum steel thickness of 18 gauge (0.048”) • Markings: Mfg name, address, model #, maximum capacity
• Double wall construction with 1 ½” (38 mm) airspace • “Flammables-Keep Fire Away” label with 2” letters
• All joints welded, riveted, brazed or equal • Instruction sheet, legible markings, factory I.D.
• Doors with 3-point, non-sparking, locking mechanism • Load testing-72 hours at maximum capacity
• 2” leak-tight spill sump of at least 2” deep (51 mm) • Fire exposure test-10 minutes at 1300 degrees F
• 2 – 2” vents with flame arrester baffle and plugs • Continuous piano hinges
• Grounding wire connection on lower outside • Shelf capacity rating of at least 350 lbs.
Door Styles

Safety cabinets are available in one or two doors and in 3 different door-closing
styles: Manual, Self-Closing and Sliding Door-Self-Closing. OSHA codes accept any
of these styles, however, States that have adopted the Uniform Fire Code require
self-closing doors, which provide an extra measure of protection.

Manual Close Self-Closing Sliding Door Self-Closing

Cabinet Capacity
Safety cabinets are available in sizes/capacities ranging from 2 gallons up to 120 gallons. Stated sizes and capacities are based upon the type of container being stored,
such as 12-ounce aerosol cans, 1-gallon paint cans, 5-gallon gas cans, 30-gallon drums or 55-gallon drums. For example, a 45-gallon flammable storage cabinet will
hold 9-5 gal containers. Cabinets are available in several styles such as floor, counter-top, under-counter, wall-mount, space saver, stackable, drum storage and with
legs. All styles have adjustable shelves to accommodate various container sizes.
Chemical Storage/Cabinet Colors
Colors help separate, organize and identify the chemicals inside. This organization will assist first responders in the case of an emergency. Regulatory codes do not
specify safety cabinet colors. However, industry has accepted the following standards:
Yellow - Flammable Liquids Red - Combustible Liquids Blue - Acid & Corrosive Liquids
Construction Materials
Safety cabinets are available in baked-on powder coated steel with steel shelves for flammable/combustibles, acids/corrosives and pesticides/insecticides and also in
polyethylene for aggressive acids such as nitric, sulfuric and hydrochloric. There are also many accessories available for safety cabinets such as poly shelf liners,
shelves, bonding/grounding wires, dolly carts, ramps, self-closing kits, roller conveyors, etc. Page
3002
Page 120

Drum Storage Units

For Indoor Use
These cabinets are designed to house one or two 30- to 55-gallon drums containing flammable liquids or hazardous waste. Cabinets for vertically positioned drums are
available for single or double drum storage, while horizontally positioned drums accommodate a single drum with a drum cradle.
• Heavy 18-gauge steel, double-wall construction provides • Dual vents with integral metal flash arresters prevent
strength, rigidity and fire protection with 11⁄2w air space ignition when mechanically vented
• Adjustable leveling feet provide a wobble-free base on all • Liquid-tight 2w bottom well prevents leakage from accidental spills
floor conditions • Continuous door hinges and 3-point closure with lock and keys
• Built-in grounding connector allows for a secure ground provide reliable opening and closing of doors
wire connection • Color: Yellow • Compliance: NFPA 30 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106
Door No. of No. of Dimensions (In.) Wt.
Desc. Type Drums Shelves W L Ht. (Lbs.) Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Drum Storage
Vertical Manual-Closing 1 1 31.25 31.25 65 334 Eagle 1926 06545503 $1325.33
Vertical Manual-Closing 2 1 58.00 31.50 65 575 Eagle 1955 06545511 2340.76
Vertical Self-Closing 1 1 31.25 31.25 65 344 Eagle 2610 06545537 1408.41
Vertical Self-Closing 2 1 58.00 31.50 65 575 Eagle 5510 60275419 2514.95
Horizontal Manual-Closing 1 0 31.25 48.25 50 385 Eagle 1928 06545529 1332.38
Hazardous Waste
Vertical Manual-Closing 1 1 31.25 31.25 65 350 Eagle HAZ1926 06545479 1369.36
Vertical Manual-Closing 2 1 58.00 31.50 65 575 Eagle HAZ1955 06545487 2513.55
Vertical Self-Closing 1 1 31.25 31.25 65 360 Eagle HAZ2610 06545495 1486.58
Vertical Self-Closing 2 1 58.00 31.50 65 575 Eagle HAZ5510 60275427 2622.29
Accessories
2w Roller for Vertical Cabinets 24.00 24.00 2 50 Eagle 1920 06545545 240.20 Eagle Horizontal Drum Storage Eagle Hazardous Waste
Dolly for Horizontal Cabinets 31 Eagle 1918 06545552 265.19 Shown w/2w Dolly

3002 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270

SECONDARY SPILL CONTAINMENT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Secondary Spill Containment

Spill Pallet with Optional Ramp Spill Platform with Optional Ramp
Containment of hazardous materials is required for the protection of the environment from contamination, the facility from potential fire hazards and for the protection
of employees who work in areas where hazardous materials are stored or used.
Compliance and Regulatory Requirements
The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) addresses the need for facilities that store, use, transfer or dispose of hazardous materials to store containers in some
kind of containment system. Stationary containers (tanks), as well as portable storage containers (55-gallon drums), are required to have a system that will protect the
environment from contamination if a leak were to occur. Facilities required to meet the Uniform Fire Code (UFC) are also required to provide for containment of
hazardous materials. Portable container containment is addressed in EPA 40 CFR 264.175, Subpart I, Use and Management of Containers and in UFC, Section 80,
Division III, Hazardous Materials Storage Requirements.
In EPA 40 CFR 264.175, a containment system must be designed and operated as follows: “The containment system must have sufficient capacity to contain 10% of
the volume of containers or the volume of the largest container, whichever is greater. The containers must also be elevated or otherwise protected from contact with
accumulated liquid.” Please review the EPA and UFC codes for a complete detail of requirements.
In UFC, Section 80, Div. IV, 80.402(b)(2)(F), Dispensing and Use, “Rooms or areas where hazardous materials liquids are dispensed into containers exceeding 1-gallon
capacity or used in open containers or systems exceeding a 5-gallon capacity shall be provided with a means to control spills. Secondary containment shall be
provided when the capacity of an individual container exceeds 55 gallons or the aggregate capacity of multiple containers exceeds 100 gallons.”
Selection Criteria for Portable Containment Systems
Portable containment systems are much less expensive than are stationary systems and will be the focus of this product review. When selecting a portable
containment system for your facility, you should consider the following:
• Chemical Compatibility: portable systems are constructed of either high density polyethylene (HDPE) or painted steel. HDPE systems are resistant to a wider range of
corrosive chemicals and are typically easier to inspect and to clean
• Volume & Weight: a wide variety of system configurations are available to accommodate container sizes from 1-gallon bottles, 55 gallon drums or IBC tanks, with
weight and capacity ratings based upon static loaded conditions. Refer to listed capacity and weight ratings of the products to make sure they meet both your
requirements and all state and federal regulations
• Mobility/Stack-ability: portable systems are designed to be moved without containers on them. Pallet systems have fork pockets, whereas platform units do not.
Portable systems should not be stacked unless noted otherwise by the manufacture’s specifications
• Loading: portable systems have evolved to a low-profile design to accommodate the use of loading ramps, which are readily available. Higher profile designs continue
to require mechanical loading
• Flammable Chemicals: require special consideration when stored on portable systems. Check your local fire codes for these additional specifications (bonding/
grounding, quantity limitations, etc.)
• Spill Cleanup: determine how the system will be monitored and cleaned. Many of the portable units come with drains, however, a spill cleanup kit may be necessary to
have available in case of spills
• Compliance: in addition to the above noted regulations, state and local codes may vary significantly. Check with local authorities, such as the Fire Marshall, for
additional spill containment requirements
• Indoor/Outdoor: portable systems are available for both indoor and outdoor use. Outdoor units are configured mainly as weather resistant buildings, available in both
HDPE and metal. Mobile units are also available to transport smaller quantities of chemicals between workstations

Page 3006
Page 121

Spill & Containment Trays

Spill Trays
• Countertop spill collection tray safely stores bottles, beakers,
and other labware
• Make decanting of small quantity liquids safer, cleaner, and
more manageable
• Feature built-in pouring spout to conveniently remove spills
• Material: Polyethylene
Containment Trays
Spill Tray
• These low profile sumps are perfect for containment of 5 gallon pails,
Containment Tray
batteries, safety cans, dry cleaning waste drums and leaky machine parts without Grating
• 2v x 4v Grating elevates containers from spilled liquid
• Meet EPA container storage regulations for small packages with grating in place
Sump Dimensions (In.) Wt.
Description Color Cap. (Gal.) Ht. L W (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Spill Tray White/Black 1.25 3.0 17 12.00 4 60216587 $64.76
Spill Tray White/Black 2.50 3.0 21 17.00 7 60216595 90.09
Containment Tray without Grating Black 21.50 5.0 45 35.00 17 A70283510 222.73
Containment Tray without Grating Black 35.00 5.0 51 47.00 20 A70283528 266.85
Containment Tray with Grating Yellow/Black 16.50 3.5 54 29.75 34 60216561 312.51
Containment Tray with Grating Black/Black 16.50 3.5 54 29.75 34 60216579 295.64 Containment Tray w/Grating

3006 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270

 COMPACTORS & CAN LINER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
I.D. Step-On Receptacles Aerosol Can Deflator
Choose: Bio-Hazard, Infectious Waste, Soiled Linen or Trash Depressurizes and drains aerosol cans quickly and safely. Allows used aerosol cans to be thrown
• Large capacity square I.D. step-ons hold large amounts of infectious or regular medical waste away as is, crushed or recycled.
• Color: White • All receptacles are labeled • Includes base unit, support stand, carbon filter and antistatic cable
• Threads on to any standard 55 or 30 gallon drum
Without Wheels & Handle • Hand operated lever seals lid, keeping operator safe from fumes,
Size (In.) and punctures up to 3 cans at once
Type & Label Capacity L W H Order # Price Ea. • Spark safe materials and antistatic cable for safety
• Cans drain completely in approximately 5 minutes
Bio-Hazard 13 Gal. 14 14 22 63749683 $165.94 • Activated carbon filter minimizes any harmful
Infectious Waste 21 Gal. 151⁄2 151⁄2 30 63749709 196.49 vapors from leaving the waste drum FOB Factory
Soiled Linen 21 Gal. 151⁄2 151⁄2 30 63749741 196.49 Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Trash 21 Gal. 151⁄2 151⁄2 30 63749782 196.49
Aerosol Can Deflator 02678308 $994.62
Infectious Waste 36 Gal. 191⁄2 191⁄2 30 63749865 314.47 Replacement Carbon Filter (2) 02678316 207.43
Soiled Linen 36 Gal. 191⁄2 191⁄2 30 63749907 338.87
Trash 36 Gal. 191⁄2 191⁄2 30 63749949 417.49

Expanded Steel Mesh Outdoor Waste Container Manually Operated Trash Compactor
Easy, safe method of compacting trash. Operate by placing a drum of refuse on the
• Constructed of hot-dipped galvanized base and compact by working the ram lever like an auto jack.
expanded metal mesh Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • Delivers 7000 Lbs. of compacting force
• Six vertical supporting ribs • For all types of refuse - plastic containers, disposable clothing,
• Galvanized steel mesh 31 09338062 $284.00
paper and cardboard, filters, aluminum cans and more
• 48 gal. 33H x 235⁄8w Dia.
Order # Price Ea. • 29wW x 27wD x 88wH
02678266 $875.19 • Weight: 170 Lbs. FOB Factory
Air Operated Container Crusher
Crush waste pails, paint cans, metal filters. Standard 100 psi
shop air generates crushing force of 13000 Lbs. Air Operated Trash Compactor
• Safety feature makes unit impossible to
engage unless door is closed Designed for compacting needs where speed is important. Connect to air supply up
• Recessed bottom to drain remaining fluids to a maximum of 250 psi. Complete compacting cycle takes only a few seconds.
into a drum or pail FOB Factory
• Crushes metal, plastic or fiber cans and pails up to 15wH x 12wD • For all types of refuse, including paper, cardboard,
• 22wW x 20wD x 43wH • Weight: 240 Lbs. cloth, filters and aluminum cans
• 90 psi shop air will generate 2500 Lbs. of force
Desc. Order # Price Ea.
W (In.) D (In.) Ht. (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Can Crusher 02678282 $3956.42 Shown w/Optional Floor Stand 29 27 75 210 02678274 $4893.39 FOB Factory
37wH Floor Stand for Can Crusher 02678290 173.63 Safety Note: Do not use on glass

Basics of...Can Liners

Can liners have proven to be an efficient way to help to keep containers clean. All can liners are made from polyethylene (plastic) resin pellets which are a derivative of
either oil or natural gas.
Types of Polyethylene Resin
Linear Low Density (LLDPE): This is the primary type of resin used in can liner manufacturing technology. Can liners made from LLDPE film provide an excellent
combination of film strength, puncture and tear resistance. LLDPE film is soft and stretchy. Maximum gauge is 2 mil.
High Molecular Weight-High Density (HMW-HDPE): Can liners made from HMW-HDPE resin provide excellent film strength and puncture resistance, but less tear
resistance than LLDPE. High density film is thinner and crinkly. Maximum gauge is 1 mil.
Reclaim: Reclaim refers to resin that has been used at least once before. Reclaim can be post-industrial (scrap) or post-consumer (recycled). Property of resin is
decreased each time it is reused. This type of resin is generally used in the manufacture of true-gauge (heavy) black can liners
Possible Can Liners Configurations
Gusseted Seal: Several manufacturers of can liners market bags with gusseted bottom seals. Simply creating a pleat down each side of the liner makes this bottom
seal. This configuration creates a built-in weak spot due to an insufficient seal at the point where the layers meet. A gusseted liner will have three dimensions i.e.; 16 x
14 x 36” (16 is the width of the liner excluding the gussets; 14” is the dimension of the gussets (7 and 7”); 36” is the length of the liner. Add the width and length of
the gussets to determine the diameter of the liner.
Star Seal: All high-density liners and many low-density liners are star bottom sealed. The liner is first deep gusseted (so that the gussets touch), then folded in half
lengthwise, and then heat-sealed. This method of sealing was invented because of the thinness of high-density liners. These liners are manufactured so thin that the
downstream liner equipment would not be able to handle the sealing and folding of the liners if there were only two layers. By star sealing first, the downstream
equipment is actually handling eight layers of plastic. A star bottom liner is superior to a gusseted liner in that the seal is an even eight layers and the sealing process is
not building in any weak spots.
Star bottom sealing takes up much of the capacity of the liner, therefore, the liner needs to be longer than its flat bottom counterpart in order to avoid falling into the
receptacle.
Flat Seal: Few institutional can liners are manufactured with a flat bottom seal. A flat bottom seal is superior to the aforementioned seals. It is a two-layered seal that is
virtually leak proof. An additional benefit of a flat bottom liner is it holds up to 30% more than a star bottom liner of the same dimension.
All LLDPE liners found in the MSC Big Book™ are manufactured with flat bottom seals.
Measuring for the Correct Can Liner Size
Determining the correct can liner size is quite easy whether your waste receptacle is round, square, or rectangular.
Liner Width: determined by taking ½ the length of the outer circumference of the waste receptacle.
For example: Outer circumference is equal to 32”. The correct liner to use would have a width of 16”.
Liner Length: determined by taking the height of the container, plus ½ of the diameter of the container bottom, plus an additional three (3) inches for overhang.
For example:Height of container = 30” Diameter of container bottom = 12” (therefore add 6”) Additional for overhang = 3”
In this example, Bag length= 39” (minimum)
For square or rectangular containers, use the diagonal of the container bottom.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3075

Page 122
 MOP TECHNICAL INFORMATION & MOPS

Basics of...Wet Mops

There is more to know about a mop than you may think. Using the right mop can help lower maintenance costs. There are a wide range of mop yarns, constructions and colors that are designed
for specific floor surfaces and tasks. We put together this quick reference guide to help you select the best wet mop for your job.

Styles Yarn Types Yarn Ply

Cut-End:
These mops are the economical choice, and are
generally lowest in initial cost. Over time, cut-end
mops fray and unravel, creating lint and leaving loose
strands behind. In addition, cut-end mops leave gaps
between yarn strands and have limited “spread”, thus
covering less area per pass. Some models have
tailbands, which reduce these shortcomings. Since
cut-end mops should not be laundered, their useful
life is limited.
Lay-Rite Cut-End:
Same characteristics as cut-end, but with a thread
that is part of the mop head which connects to a
unique handle (sold separately). The mop head
screws into the handle, allowing the mop to lay flat
against the surface for wider, more even coverage
than traditional cut-end mops.
Looped-End:
These mops deliver longer life, with superior on-the-
floor performance and greater productivity. The mop
will not fray or unravel. A special tailband assures
wide, gap-free “spread” for maximum productivity.
Tailband also eliminates yarn tangling and snagging.
Looped-end mop heads can be laundered and reused
over and over, so they last far longer than cut-end
mops.
Certain yarns are better suited to a specified cleaning task than The number of individual strands twisted together
others. To get maximum efficiency and value from a wet mop, to form the yarn is equal to the number of plys.
it’s important to select the right yarn for the job.
Best value is generally determined by the quality
Cotton: of the yarn in conjunction with the number of
plys, rather than the number of plys alone.
• Recommended for general and rough surface use
• High tensile strength/durability
• Requires break-in period to remove oils Mop Capacity (oz.) & Size
• Excellent absorption and retention
• Will lint on initial usage or until thoroughly broken-in Sizes range from Extra Small/#12 to Extra Large/#32.
Mop size should be matched to cleaning task, mop
Rayon: wringer and user size. In larger more open areas,
• Recommended for applying floor finish larger size mops are generally more efficient. In
and disinfectant confined or obstructed spaces, smaller mops may be
• Good tensile strength more maneuverable and easier to use.
• No break-in period
#12 = Extra Small
• Highly absorbent
#16 = Light or Small
• Minimal linting
#20 = Medium
• Fast release promotes fast drying after use
#24 = Heavy or Large
(mildew resistant)
#32 = Extra Large
Blend - Cotton & Synthetic Yarns:
• All purpose mop head Headbands
• Good tensile strength
• No break-in period 1-1/4w Headbands:
• Great absorbency Designed for use with slide-on or thread-through style
• Will lint on initial usage, or until thoroughly broken-in handles. They are well suited for laying finish or
• High loft yarn promotes excellent floor drying applying disinfectants.
5w Headbands:
Synthetic: Suited to clamp-style handles. The synthetic mesh
• Recommended on rough surfaces material permits non-abrasive scrubbing to help
• Long stable fiber dislodge dirt.
• Superior tensile strength
• No lint Color
• No break-in required
• Great absorbency Wherever mops and handles must be differentiated by
cleaning area or function, color-coding helps assure
Antimicrobial that mops used in one area will not be used in others,
helping prevent cross contamination. Color coding of
Certain wet mops contain an antimicrobial agent, mops is mandatory for HACCP compliance in
which provides protection by inhibiting the growth of
restaurants, commissaries, food processing plants
bacteria. This antimicrobial agent is inherent to the and other food industry operations. In any industry, it
mop construction, so it’s locked-in to withstand
is an ideal way to insure “at a glance” that the right
repeated launderings for long lasting performance. equipment is being used for the job.
Page
Page 123 3079

Microfiber Bucket & Wringer Steel Roller

Sponge Mops
• Ergonomic, no bending or pulling with pedal wring bucket
• “Washboard Surface” effectively removes dirt and debris from Front pull lever on the handle
mop pedals before wringing operates solid steel rollers
• Twist-valve empties contents without lifting allowing user to squeeze liquids
• Disinfecting bucket boosts productivity in cleaning from the mop without using a
• Nonpourous bucket surfaces help prevent bacterial growth and wringer. When used with double
clean easily pail, you can separate cleaning 12w Steel Roller Mop comes with Cellulose Head
• Buckets fit onto janitorial cart Mfr’s #6173 and accommodate pads solution and rinse water.
up to 18w in length PRO-SOURCE Rubbermaid
• 10 Gallon volume capacity 74138801
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Desc. L (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.) Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 10w Roller Sponge Mop 09316308 $21.09
Press Wring Bucket 14.50 26.20 16.10 Yellow Q90088 YEL 00296509 $104.64 10w Roller Mop Refill 09316316 8.67
Pedal Wring Bucket 20.00 26.20 22.60 Yellow Q92000 YEL 74138801 182.51 12w Roller Sponge Mop 09245952 21.72 6435 09308321 $26.68
Pedal Wring Mini-Cart 20.00 26.20 37.80 Yellow Q92500 YEL 74138744 267.69 12w Roller Mop Refill 09245945 8.67 6436 09308339 13.26
Finish Bucket 14.70 26.20 16.20 Blue Q93000 BLUE 74138819 109.50 19 Qt. Double Pail, Gray 2628 09306770 25.24
Disinfecting Bucket 8.80 25.10 12.20 Yellow Q95000 YEL 74138827 44.71

Deck Mops
Twist N Mop
Capacity Order # Price Ea.
Desc. Case Qty. Order # Price Ea. 16 oz. 09310160 $7.73 • Permanent wood handle,
Twist N Mop (Self- 4 09316258 $26.33 20 oz. 09310178 9.15 one piece
wringing deck mop) 24 oz. 09310186 11.95 • Quality poly blend, at an
• Premium cotton blend, loop end inexpensive price
Twist N Mop Refill 6 09316266 14.19 32 oz. 09310194 13.23

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3079

SHELVING TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Shelving
For storage of items that are handled manually. Our wide versatility of shelving offers a range of multi-purpose and economical storage solutions. Steel shelving should
comply with federal, local, state, building and fire codes.
Wire Shelving
Open wire design allows light and air to flow through. Dust and dirt is minimized. Efficiency of sprinkler systems is enhanced and may be mandated by fire codes.
Posts are furnished with adjustable levelers to compensate for uneven surfaces. Recommended for restaurants, hospitals, retail businesses, product displays, freezers
and coolers.
Types of Material/Finishes:
Chrome Finish: Widely used in electronics production. Bright nickel plating followed by chrome plating for a deep, chrome finish. NSF
Listed.
Epoxy Finish: Multi-layered finish of zinc chloride and clear chromate, topped with an epoxy sealer for high corrosion resistance. NSF listed.
Microban®: Antimicrobial protection material. Inhibits the growth of mold, bacteria, mildew and fungi that cause odors, stains and
degradation of products. Microban® and the Microban® symbol are registered trademarks of Microban® Products Co..
Polymer: High strength and maximum corrosion resistance. Perfect for humid and damp conditions or where frequent cleaning is needed.
Stainless Steel: When the very best is in demand. 304 Stainless is highly resistant to corrosion, rust, dirt and moisture and looks great even
with years of continued use. Ideal for use in hospitals, food service, electronics and clean room applications. Use where high corrosion
resistance is needed. NSF listed for all environments.
Zinc Brite: Best for general use applications. Zinc plating has a clear epoxy coating with a chrome look and helps safeguard against rust.
NSF Listed. Wire Shelf
Steel Shelving Types
U.S. Std. Gg. Metric
Nominal Conversion
Gauge Thickness (In.) (mm)

Commercial Steel Shelving: Designed for light to medium-duty storage. Sturdy,

freestanding shelving recommended for offices, shops, stores, garages and
storerooms. Shelve clips, instead of bolts, enables individual shelves to be easily
arranged without disassembly. Create storage systems by connecting multiple
units.
Industrial Steel Shelving: Designed for medium to heavy-duty storage. Heavy-
duty shelving is ideal for weighty, bulky loads. Shelve clips, instead of bolts,
enables individual shelves to be easily arranged without disassembly. Ideal for
stock rooms, factories, or office.

Shelving Styles
Open Shelving: The low cost, open air shelving design gives high visibility and fast accessibilty in finding stored items.
Back and side braces are easy to install for stability. Ideal for movable and “high-rise” storerooms and used when less
protection is needed.
Closed Shelving: Designed to protect stored materials on all sides and prevents them from falling off the shelf. Closed
shelving has a cleaner finished look and offers more protection than the open shelf unit because of the side and back
panels. Ideal for most offices and perfect when you need key control.

Boltless Shelving:
Very versatile for many shelving applications and easy to assemble at a low
cost. No nuts and bolts needed, just a hammer. Shelf units are ideal for 2-sided
entry because there is no cross braces required. Recommended for storage of
Open Closed
larger items such as boxes, parts, cartons, inventory in warehouses, tool cribs
and maintenance departments.
Bin Unit Shelving: Space efficient storage
Single Rivet: Industrial strength, economical and shelves are fully enclosed units. Great
provides maximum vertical distance between shelves for inventory control and can be used to
for easy access build partitions or storage walls. Fast
Double Rivet: Rugged, high capacity shelving is used set-up and easy assembly to fit any
for heavy applications and where greater stability is warehouse or shop layout.
needed

Double Rivet Bin Page

Page 124 3102

Wire Rack Label Holders

A New Solution to Organize Wire Shelving
W (In.) L (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
Snap-on label holders easily identify and mark contents. Flexible holders fit new or existing wire
shelving with 11⁄4w face. Include white inserts. Clear only. Custom cut sizes available on special order. 15⁄16 3 .5 25 48729370 $24.73
15⁄16 6 1.0 25 48729388 42.67
• Retro fits major brands of shelving • Snap-on design • Clear window protects label 15⁄16 12 .9 12 48729396 38.11
• Accommodates easy label changes • Bar code compatible finish 15⁄16 24 .7 6 48729404 37.98

3102 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 STORAGE RACKS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Storage Racks

Racks are used for storage of large and heavy unit loads in a container, on a pallet or loose. Seismic requirements, building codes and local ordinances should be
checked before your order is placed.

The table & map below show zones 1 (least risk) to 4

(extreme risk). The requirements are stricter for structures
with higher numbers. It is highly recommended to use the
seismic requirements when building rack systems because it
will help protect against catastrophic loss and is essential in
high earthquake risk areas. Taller rack systems, as well as
higher density, narrow aisle systems will only magnify the
risks in the event of a collapse especially in seismic zones 3 &
4. For any new construction or renovation in seismic zones 3
& 4 it is recommended that your local building department be
consulted for any up-to-date code restrictions in your area.

Seismic rated racks are constructed differently than

conventional racking. They feature more ability to resist
seismic pressures because of engineering and
construction differences.

Types of Racks

Pallet Racks: Designed to store hundreds of

pallets of varied load characteristics and
containers or any heavy bulk loads handled
by mechanical equipment. Expands useable
storage space both horizontally & vertically
without building expansion.
Cantilever Racks: Designed for heavy-duty
storage of long, heavy materials such as flat
sheets, bars, pipe, tubing or lumber; loaded by
hand or mechanical equipment.

Pallet

Cantilever

Bulk Storage Racks: Designed for

intermediate weight bulk items that are hand
loaded. Very versatile in applications such as
display racks in factories and warehouses or
storage of medical supplies in hospitals.
Welded Bulk Storage Racks: Designed to
provide greater capacity for the ideal bulk
storage that are hand loaded. For items that
require spacious heavy duty shelving other
than pallet racks or conventional industrial
shelving.
Bulk
Modular Portable Bar Stacking Racks: Designed
for very large bulky items that can be stacked
one on top of the other without the worry of
damage from compression. Removal of
materials is fast and convenient. This low cost
storage system is space efficient, low in
maintenance and easy to install.

Stacking
Boltless Storage Racks: Designed for light
weight bulk items that are hand loaded. One
of the most versatile and economic storage
methods available. Quick and easy assembly, Horizontal/Vertical Bar Racks: Designed for light-
no bolts or clips required. Shelves are duty storage of long items. Recommended for
accessible on all four sides. Ideal for record maintenance departments, storage areas, tool
storage, large and bulky items, warehouses rooms and machine centers.
and shipping areas.

Boltless Vertical Racks: Frees up floor space because it

Decking Type:
Wire Decking: Easy to install, designed to handle heavy-duty bulk
storage. Provides a clean and safe storage platform. Reduces fire
hazards because stored items are easy to see. The efficiency of sprinkler
systems is enhanced and may be mandated by fire codes.
Steel Decking: Easy to install. Designed to handle your heavy-duty
storage needs. Items that are bulky and heavy, slide on and off the shelf
much easier.
efficiently holds and displays long stock as well
as short parts or boxes. Dividers are created by
the rack arms that extend beyond the shelf.
Horizontal Racks: This rack can be used in a
continuous row or as a storage island. The angled
arms prevent items from rolling off and the
pyramid shape adds stability. For longer items
Horizontal
order more than one unit to provide support.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3111

Page 125
 STORAGE BINS, BOXES, CONTAINERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Storage Bins, Boxes, Containers,

Hoppers, Totes & Tubs
Types
Hanging / Stacking Bins {also known as open hopper stack/hang bins}
• Generally the most common type of containers known for their rigidity and long term durabilty. Bins offer a stacking ledge allowing secure stackability
onto one another. In addition, bins incorporate a hanging ledge on the backside allowing bins to hang from steel louvered panels or rails.
• Designed to accept dividers that typically run lengthwise from back to front
• Offered in a many heights and widths as well as many colors
• Ideal for storage in any environment with small to medium sized parts
• Manufactured from polypropylene
Shelf Bins
• A step up from corrugated bins. These bins are the most economical of the plastic bins.
• For use with popular shelving 12”, 18” and 24” D with varying widths as well as colors. Designed to accept dividers that typically fit across for smaller parts.
• Has a built in shelf lip allowing bins to tilt for complete access when horizontal shelves are placed 4w & 6w apart
• Also known as “nesting bins” as they can be nested into one another saving valuable space when not in use
• Ideal for storage in any environment where high density and/or lower capacity storage is required. The 4w or 6w H limits storage of taller or bulkier items.
• Manufactured from polypropylene or polystyrene
Corrugated / Cardboard Bins
• Initial cost is the most economical type of bin however do not provide the same durability of plastic
• May need to be replaced more often than other types of bins
• Built in shelf lip allows bins to tilt for complete access when horizontal shelves are placed 4” apart
• Ideal for usage for non-oily items and within dry areas where high density and/or lower capacity storage is required.
The 4” H limits storage of taller or bulkier items
Dividable Grid Containers Offers the unique ability of accommodating both length and cross dividers allowing grid or compartment storage
• Available with clear lids and identification card holders
• Ideal for the storage of small parts that need to be individually separated within a manufacturing or transport setting
• Manufactured of high density polyethylene
4 Sided Containers/Totes
• Manufactured of high density polyethylene
180° stack and nest containers Attached lid containers “ALC” have Stacking containers are straight
which allow containers to stack in hinged lids allowing secure storage. walled stack only containers
one direction and then be turned Nest when empty to save space available with both solid sides and
180° to nest when empty, available bottoms along with vented sides
with or without lids and bottoms

Conductive Bins
• Specialty containers are manufactured from a carbon filled polypropylene that dissipates the build up of a static charge
• Also known as conductive, ESD (Electro Static Dissipative), or static safe bins
• Conductive material is available in black color only
• Ideal for manufacturing or storage environments where static safe storage is required
Fiberglass Bins Steel Bins
• Next to steel, the strongest type of bins available • The strongest bins available but also the most expensive
• Ideal for storage in extreme temperature environments or where heavy and • Ideal for usage in extreme temperature settings and where large and/or heavy
or rugged parts need storage or transport parts are being stored
• Manufactured of high strength fiberglass reinforced polyester resin • Manufactured of channel reinforced steel
Types of Plastic
• Polypropylene (PP): a high impact plastic resin known for its stiffness and durability providing a good combination of rigidity as well as toughness. Considered
virtually unbreakable. Provides good chemical and abrasion resistance. Typically are autoclavable and may be steam sterilized up to 250°F.
• Polyethylene (HDPE): very similar to polypropylene, known to be a little more flexible and highly crack resistant.
• Polystyrene or Styrene: resists moisture, oil and many chemicals. While tough, they are not as resistant to breakage as either polypropylene or polyethylene.
• Fiberglass: a reinforced polyester resin known for superb strength. Many of the containers can hold up to 3000 lbs, much more than others in the industry. Withstands
extreme temperature range as well as many chemicals and solvents. Perfect for handling items from -40 to +240° F. Autoclavable and may be steam sterilized.
• Carbon Filled Polypropylene: black colored resin used in the manufacturing of conductive or ESD applications. Resin prevents the buildup of a static charge thus
protecting electronic components or parts that are stored within these types of containers. Offers the same properties as mentioned above for polypropylene Page
Page 126 3123

White Corrugated Shelf Bin Boxes Self-Adhesive Container Label Holders

These 200 lb. test white finish corrugated • Universal plastic label holders feature a self-adhesive
12w Deep Bin Boxes 18w Deep Bin Boxes bins are tough enough to take plenty of use back which offers a low cost solution for labeling your
Price Ea. Price Ea. and last for years. Shipped flat for easy plastic or metal storage bin containers
W. (In.) Order # 1 - 49 Order # 1 - 49 storage. The convenient hanging feature • Designed to stick to nearly all clean dry surfaces
allows bin to be suspended from shelf lip. • Slide a paper insert into the clear, glare-free plastic
2 89795223 $0.83 89795421 $1.22 holder to easily and quickly label or relabel containers 1w x 3w Label Holders
3 89795231 0.99 • Easily change labels each time contents change
4 89795249 1.01 89795447 1.36 • Includes printer compatible paper label inserts
All Bin Boxes Are 4w High
6 89795264 1.22 89795462 1.52
SAVE 15% Sold in Packs of 25
8 89795280 1.39 89795488 1.68
On 50 or More W (In.) L (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. • Bar code
9 89795298 1.69
of the Same Item compatible
10 89795306 1.76 89795504 2.07 1 3 .75 25 30112023 $15.48
12 89795322 1.83 89795520 2.17 3 5 1.00 25 60619400 18.58 3w x 5w Label Holder

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3123

BULK TRANSPORT CONTAINERS & TOOL STORAGE TECHNICAL INFO
Welded Wire Containers Bulk Storage & Transport Containers
Round Corner Corrugated Steel Container, Workingtainer & Hold ’N Fold Container

Construction of 2 gauge cold-

drawn steel rod electro-welded A B C
See-Thru to View Inventory
at each intersection to form a
2w x 2w pattern. The sturdy All containers have a 4,000 pound capacity and are painted
W L Usable Gate Cap. Wt. Vista Green inside and out. 11 gauge ribbed steel bottom,
(In.) (In.) Ht. (In.) Location (In.) (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. steel base gives 9 point
suspension and distributes 12 gauge ribbed steel sides, heavy 1⁄4w thick gusseted
1
20 32 16 32w Side 1000 43 04835260 $159.23 stacking legs, double thick edges contribute to a container
2 loads evenly over the entire
20 32 16 32w Side 1000 55 09132234 176.50 for heavy industrial applications.
understructure. The unit folds
32 40 28 40w Side 4000 146 89828016 276.27 Workingtainers
flat on its own base perimeter
40 48 24 48w Side 4000 176 89828073 305.11 to reduce shipping and storage Have a hopper front door that is fully adjustable. Securely contains
40 48 30 48w Side 4000 194 89828099 324.62 costs. Finished with a zinc parts during shipping with chute in closed position, while
40 48 30 40w Side 4000 194 04835278 311.90 electroplated finish. adjustable chute allows easy access to contents at work stations. D
40 48 36 48w Side 4000 216 89828123 334.47 Add 6w to usable height for Hold ’N Fold Container
1 21 overall height. Fold down design saves space on the factory floor and in shipping. Stacks securely when empty,
1w x 1w wire mesh ⁄2w x 1⁄2w wire mesh eliminating the need to use banding for return shipments. Half drop gates on both sides for easy
access to contents. Product ready to ship within 48 hours.
• Containers handle up to 4,000 pounds • Durable corner post allow safe stacking of
• Containers ship fully assembled and multiple containers
ready to use • 4-way entry accepts forklifts and pallet trucks
Universal Adjustable Mobile • All-welded construction
Base & Extension Rails Ref. Desc. L (In.) W (In.) H (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
A Round Corner Corrugated Steel 32 40 24 196 02453041 $519.82
• Fits a wide variety of machine sizes • 4-18w Extension rails available A Round Corner Corrugated Steel 40 48 24 250 02453058 592.76
• Assembles easily • Machine size is no longer an issue B Hold ’N Fold Container-Corrugated Steel 45 48 42 420 02453116 1186.30
Expands Cap. C Workingtainer w/Adjustable Chute 30 36 24 160 02453066 504.31
Desc. from (In.) Mfr’s # (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. C Workingtainer w/Adjustable Chute 32 40 24 175 02453074 530.69
Mobile Base 12 - 52 HTC2000 500 BU89672828 $89.89 C Workingtainer w/Adjustable Chute 36 44 24 190 02453082 581.90
Mobile Base 14 - 43 PM1000 400 BU85636116 79.79 C Workingtainer w/Adjustable Chute 40 48 24 213 02453090 620.70
Extension Rail Kit K2749 BU70351978 19.00 D Hold ’N Fold Container - Wire Mesh 45 48 42 360 02453108 1253.80

Basics of...Tool Roller Cabinets, Workstations & Chests

Drawers & Storage
A tool storage cabinet or chest with more drawers does not necessarily mean you are able to store more items than one with a fewer number of drawers. Cabinets
having one or more drawers with a higher height or a larger storage compartment will allow storage of larger and bulkier items that may not fit in drawers with a lower
height. For all cabinets it is recommended that heavier tools are stored in the bottom drawers to add stability when opening drawers or moving the cabinet.
Drawer Slides
Friction (conventional): Most are basically metal-to-metal sliding bars that move across each other as you open the drawers. This works well for light tool/drawer loads
or for infrequent access needs.
Roller/Ball Bearing: Most professional tool cabinet users prefer and use roller/ball-bearing slides. The difference is hardly noticeable when the drawers are empty.
However when there is a heavy tool load or need for frequent opening and closing of the drawers, ball/roller-bearing slides are much easier to use and handle the loads
better. Roller/ball-bearing slides have metal channels with steel ball bearings between them so instead of metal sliding on metal, you have metal slides rolling bearings
in between the other metal slide. The difference in opening a drawer is like night and day when the tool drawers are full or loaded with heavy items.
Full Extension Drawers: These may be either friction or ball/roller bearing construction, sometimes found on some high-end professional cabinets and chests. They
allow for easy access to items stored at the rear of the drawer. Some are designed for higher load capacity as compared to other type of slides.
Casters
• Small Diameter Casters - 3" & 4": Typically they’re easier to move when pushing a small light cabinet on a smooth floor over a short distance
• Larger Diameter Casters - 5" and larger: Are better for heavier loads. They can absorb more shock and impact from rough floors or uneven pavement, which means
less stress on the tool cabinet and box internals. They usually last proportionally longer and wear better due to the larger diameter as compared to smaller casters.
They allow easier movement over rough floors, floor heaves or transitions, bumps or obstacles
6 Wheeled or Castered Workstations and Maintenance Carts: Several larger units come standard with either oversized wheels or additional casters that are centered
providing maximum stability and maneuverability when they are pushed to the work area.

Locking Systems
• External Lock Bars: Lower end priced cabinets and chests usually have an external lock bar that requires the use of a purchased lock
by the user. The lock bar is typically mounted in a way to deter most common thieves. Lock bars are functional, inexpensive and
obvious. These are usually found on homeowner or hobbyist tool carts or project centers.
• Conventional Keyed Locks: The most common on professional units. They are found on retail, industrial
and automotive professional tool cabinets and chests. They are cost effective and usually very secure.
• Round/Tubular High Security Keyed Locks: Usually found on high-end professional cabinets and Conventional
chests when security is very critical. The keys and lock openings are shaped round and the key has Keyed Lock
slightly different notches or pins around its surface that engage with the locking mechanism.
Typically they are constructed of heavier gauge steel than conventional locks and considered to
provide a higher degree of security and be more difficult to pick with common tooling.
• Groove Cut Keyed Locks: This type of lock is usually associated with expensive sports Groove Cut
cars. A slightly wider key engages the lock on multiple levels providing additional High Security External Lock Bars
security. The technology behind this locking method is much more difficult to defeat Keyed Lock Round/Tubular
with common tools. High Security Keyed Lock

3148 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 127
CASTER & WHEEL TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Casters

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3205

Page 128
CASTER & WHEEL TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Caster Mounting Options & Terms

3206 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 129
 CASTER & WHEEL TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Caster Load Capacity by Duties & Definitions

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3207

Page 130
CONVEYOR ROLLERS & HYDRAULIC PUMPS TECHNICAL INFO
Replacement Conveyor Rollers
Dia. (In.) Finish Gauge Bearings Axle (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Finish Gauge Bearings Axle (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Replacement Rollers for 10w Between Frame Replacement Rollers for 22w Between Frame
For Round Axle For Round Axle
1 1
1.4 Steel 18 CA 1⁄4 5 66064890 $5.85 1.4 Steel 18 CA 1⁄4 5 66065053 $8.07
For Hex Axle Installed For Hex Axle Installed
1.9 Steel 16 SR 7⁄16 7 66064932 12.54 1.9 Steel 16 SR 7⁄16 5 66065095 17.58 Constructed of galvanized steel tubing and plain
1.9 Steel 14 SR 7⁄16 6 66064940 13.11 1.9 Steel 14 SR 7⁄16 5 66065103 17.58 steel shaft with plated bearing shells and steel
1.9 Steel 14 HQ 7⁄16 6 66065129 23.02 balls, and are unsealed and oiled.
Replacement Rollers for 16w Between Frame
Replacement Rollers - 28w Between Frame for Hex Axle Installed 1.9w diameter includes hex axle as shown. Other
For Round Axle sizes are to be used with customer’s existing axle.
1.4 Steel 18 CA 1⁄4 5 66064973 11.93 1.9 Steel 16 SR 7⁄16 6 66065137 20.54
1.9 Steel 14 SR 7⁄16 6 66065145 20.00 SR=Standard Steel Ball Bearing, 7⁄16w
For Hex Axle Installed
1.9 Steel 16 SR 7⁄16 6 66065012 14.01 1.9 Steel 14 HQ 7⁄16 6 66065160 25.70 Hex ID/250 fpm at 125 lbs.
1.9 Steel 14 SR 7⁄16 6 66065020 15.04 Replacement Rollers - 34w Between Frame for Hex Axle Installed CA/FA=Standard Steel Ball Bearing, 1⁄4w
1.9 Steel 14 HQ 7⁄16 6 66065046 22.34 1.9 Steel 16 HQ 7⁄16 6 66065194 27.78 Round ID Plated/250 fpm at 125 lbs.
1
Axle not supplied 1.9 Steel 14 HQ 7⁄16 6 66065202 27.82 EA=Standard Steel Ball Bearing, 1⁄4w
1 Round ID Plain/250 fpm at 125 lbs.
Axle not supplied

Slick Surface Tapes

3M #5423 & #5425 3M #5480, #5481, #5490, #5491, #5451 and #5453
• Abrasion resistant to protect chutes, guide rails and containers • Self lubricating with low coefficient of friction
from wear • Resists up to 400°F for long performance on heat sealing machines
• Anti-stick for ready release of many inks and adhesives • Anti-stick for easy cleanup of hot plastic
• #5423 features rubber adhesive • #5425 features acrylic adhesive • Chemical resistant barrier • Silicone adhesive
Tape # Color W (In.) L (Yds.) Thick. (mil) Order # Price Ea. Tape # Color W (In.) L (Yds.) Thick. (mil) Order # Price Ea.
UHMW Slick Surface Tapes
5423 Transparent 21⁄2 36 11.7 03000049 $417.90 5490 Gray 1 36 3.5 71887277 $139.94 3M #5481
5423 Transparent 4 18 11.7 04629333 334.32 5490 Gray 2 36 3.5 02999803 274.47
5423 Transparent 5 18 11.7 02999977 417.90 5490 Gray 3 36 3.5 02999795 330.37
5423 Transparent 6 18 11.7 03000023 501.48 5491 Gray 1 36 6.5 84778620 199.49
5423 Transparent 8 18 11.7 02999951 668.64 5491 Gray 2 36 6.5 04582508 398.97
5425 Transparent 2 36 4.5 04583712 331.38 5491 Gray 3 36 6.5 04582516 598.45
PTFE Slick Surface Tapes PTFE Glass Cloth Slick Surface Tapes
5480 Gray 1 36 3.8 03000072 96.27 5451 Brown 6 36 5.3 04582383 821.96
5480 Gray 2 36 3.8 03000080 192.54 5453 Brown 1⁄4 36 8.3 04582359 72.73
5480 Gray 3 36 3.8 03000098 288.81 5453 Brown 3⁄4 36 8.3 03000130 145.46 3M #5490
5481 Gray 1 36 6.8 03000056 186.52 5453 Brown 1 36 8.3 03000148 211.31
5481 Gray 2 36 6.8 03000064 373.03 5453 Brown 2 36 8.3 04582250 399.96

Basics of...Hydraulic Pumps, Cylinders & Fittings

Low-pressure: Below 3,000 psi, High flow rates, 10 GPM+, more dynamic, constantly in motion, fast-moving
High-pressure: 3,000 psi and above, low flow rates, less than 5 GPM, static, work done in shorter strokes, slower speeds
Pump / Cylinder Combination
1. Hydraulic cylinder – Applies hydraulic force.
3. Hand Pump – Provides hydraulic force.
4. Hydraulic hose – Transports hydraulic fluid.
5. Male coupler – For quick connection of the hose to system components.
6. Female coupler – For quick connection of the hose end to the system components.
7. Gauge – To monitor pressure of hydraulic circuit.
8. Gauge adaptor – For quick and easy gauge installation.
9. Swivel connector –Allows proper alignment of values and /or gauges. Used when units
being connected cannot be rotated.

Basic Terms Used in Hydraulics

Force - Pounds, tons, or Newtons Volume - Cubic inches or cubic centimeters Time - Seconds or minutes
Area - Square inches or square centimeters Distance/Height (Stroke) - Inches or centimeters Flow - Cubic inches per minute (in3/min) or gallons per
Pressure - psi or bar. 1 bar = 14.5038 psi minute (gpm)
Safety with High Pressure Hydraulics

• Don’t override the factory setting of relief valves. Always operate

hydraulic systems with a pressure gauge. This provides a “window”
into the system
• Provide a solid support for the entire cylinder base area. Use a
cylinder base attachment for greater stability

3272 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 131
 CABLE PULLERS & HOIST TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Mechanical Hand Lever Pullers/Hoists

Lever operated hoists, sometimes referred to as a “come-a-long” or “pullers”, are used for stretching, pulling, tightening or positioning loads. Typically
these are used are in a horizontal position but also have the ability to be used as a hoist in some applications.
The lever hoist design is similar to that of a hand chain operated hoist. Instead of using hand chain to move the load, the hand wheel is replaced with a
lever or handle. Reciprocating operator input through the lever moves the load in small Increments. Speed is not a characteristic of a lever tool. They are
usually lighter in weight than other types, which allow them to be more portable than hoists and winches.
Hoist Types
Coil Chain: The most popular, since the chain is flexible in all directions and it is easy to inspect for wear
Roller Chain: Normally more expensive than coil chain but is more difficult to inspect and will not tolerate side pulls (side pulling – not pulling in a straight line from
hook to hook). Unlike link chain, roller chain can be spliced together if additional length or repairs are required
Wire Rope: Less expensive than chain units, but typically are capable of lower lifting capacity. Wire rope is more susceptible to wear and abuse and is more difficult to
inspect. Rope strands can fray or break from inside making it almost impossible to detect
Strap: Used in the utility industry due to their non-conductive nature
Selection Criteria
Load Capacity (lbs. or tons): The weight of the load to be lifted. A hoist’s rated capacity is the maximum load for which the hoist is designed by the manufacturer to lift.
Carefully consider the load weight including attachments such as slings, grabs, spreader beams etc., and the capacity of the hoist
Lift (ft.): The maximum length of travel required for raising and lowering the load. Standard lifts are generally 8, 10, 15, and 20 foot lifts.
Lifting Medium: Chain (link or roller), wire rope or strap
Lever Length: Length becomes a consideration for use in close quarter application
Lever Pull Value: The effort exerted by the hoist operator on the end of the handle to pull or lift the load
Frame and Lever Construction: Aluminum, steel or cast iron (customer preference).
Brake Type: Friction type or ratchet and pawl. The friction type brake is used for more precise positioning requirements through it’s inherent characteristic of lifting or
pulling in small increments. The ratchet and pawl unit is usually less expensive and is used in applications where accurate positioning is not a requirement.
Applications
Lever operated hoists have several in-plant uses and are heavily used in the construction, utilities, lumber, railroad and mining industries. General consumer and use at
home, on the farm, also comprise a large number of the lever-operated hoists sold. Some typical applications would be for positioning machinery, installing fences,
holding loads together, opening railroad car doors, pulling pipe, stretching wires, straightening poles and many others types of uses.
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people. Page
Page 132 3283

Cable Pullers Portable Pullers

Single Drive & Double Drive • Durable plastic carrying case • Folding handle • 1⁄4w Safety hooks
• Safety hook 1⁄4w on single drive; 5⁄16w on double drive WARNING: The equipment shown is intended for industrial use only and should not be used to lift,
• Double drive hoists provide a better balanced pull and are designed for industrial use support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
• 4000 Lb. capacity units have 2 lines with pulley on safety hook WARNING: The weight capacities listed are for pulling only. Lifting cuts the capacities in half.
• 1000 & 2000 Lb. capacity units have single line without pulley on safety hook Please consider this before operating the equipment.
WARNING: The equipment shown is intended for industrial use only and should not be Cap. Cable Wt.
used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people. (Lbs.) L Type (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
WARNING: The weight capacities listed are for pulling only. Lifting cuts the Pack Mule
capacities in half. Please consider this before operating the equipment. 1000 105⁄32w Single Drive 6 89810881 $41.55
Cap. Cable Wt. Mini-Mule Import
(Lbs.) Drive L (Ft.) Dia. (In.) (Lbs.) Brand Order # Price Ea. 4000 Lb. Cap., 2000-4000 12v Single Drive 9.5 1
74385139 31.85
Double Drive 2000-4000 12v Double Drive 9.5 1
74385147 30.37
1000 Single 14 5⁄32 6 Mini-Mule 89810816 $46.35 Pack Mule Single Drive Type
1000 Single 14 3⁄16 4 Import 74385071 36.70 1
Case not supplied
2000 Single 12 3⁄16 8.5 Mini-Mule 89810824 57.93
2000 Single 12 3⁄16 4.2 Import 74385089 45.87
4000 Single 6 3⁄16 9 Mini-Mule 89810832 68.96 Convertible Lever Cable Hoists
4000 Single 6 3⁄16 6.6 Import 74385097 53.44
2000 Double 12 3⁄16 8.5 Mini-Mule 89810840 65.64 Single & Double Line in One Hoist
2000 Double 12 3⁄16 7.33 Import 74385113 51.77
• Provide high quality and durability, with a wide variety of rigging options
4000 Double 6 3⁄16 9 Mini-Mule 89810857 79.17 • Designed for safety and have many features that provide easy operation
4000 Double 6 3⁄16 7.33 Import 74385121 62.71 • Ideal for construction and commercial applications
• Capacities: 1,000 Lbs. to 2,000 Lbs. • Lift range: 17 Ft. - 23 Ft.
• Handle bends to warn of hazardous condition and prevents dangerous overload
Convertible Cable Pullers • Positive load holding in all environments: double, interlocking pawl mechanism
assures one pawl is engaged at all times
• Fast cable take-up: winding wheel provided for quick take-up or
• Converts easily from 2000 Lb. to 4000 Lb. capacity Single Drive positioning of cable
• Safety hooks 5⁄16w • 6/12v, 3⁄16w cable Shown • 360° Swiveling hooks equipped with latches for positive load engagement
WARNING: The equipment shown is intended for industrial use only and should not be used • Corrosion-resistant, all stainless steel springs and shafts
to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people. • Winding wheel provides quick take-up or positioning of cable
WARNING: The weight capacities listed are for pulling only. Lifting cuts the capacities • Meets or exceeds: minimum 4:1 design factor and all requirements of
ASME/ANSI Standard B-30.21 Double
in half. Please consider this before operating the equipment. Line
Desc. Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Single Line Double Line
Cap. Lift Min. Head Cap. Lift Min. Head Wt.
Single Drive 9.5 89810865 $81.73 (Lbs.) (Ft.) Room (In.) (Lbs.) (Ft.) Room (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Double Drive 9.5 89810873 92.84 1
1000 23 20 — — 20 11 66035510 $183.08
1000 23 20 2000 111⁄2 27 14 66035528 208.33
1
1500 17 20 — — 20 111⁄2 66035536 205.35
1500 17 20 3000 9 27 14 66035544 243.73
1500 22 20 3000 11 27 151⁄4 66035551 265.15
2000 17 20 4000 81⁄2 27 161⁄2 66035577 273.37
1
Single Line

WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270 3283
LEVER HOISTS, PULLERS & HAND CHAIN HOISTS TECH INFO
Aluminum Heavy-Duty Short Short Handle Pullers
Handle Ratchet Lever Hoists Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Ideal for tight quarters and confined spaces, the short handle puller
Series PA Ideal for Construction & Commercial Applications Mfr’s Lifetime features provides superior durability in a rugged lifting, positioning
Warranty and pulling tool
• Provides high quality and durability
• Extremely low handle effort and 360° rotating handle make it easy to operate, and the one- • Capacities: 1500 Lbs. to 6000 Lbs. • Lift range: 5v
handed free chaining mechanism provides easy rigging • Easy one-hand operation
• Capacities: 1,500 Lbs. to 6,000 Lbs. • Lift range: 5v to 20v • Handle rotates 360°, making it easy to operate in any position and
• Unit and handle made from high strength ductile aluminum alloy in small spaces
• Compact design increases portability and rigging efficiency • Tough, yet lightweight, aluminum construction and powder coat finish
• Double reduction gearing and short handle provide low handle effort • Hoistaloy™ hardened steel load chain for strength, long wear
• 360° Rotating handle: Provides versatile rigging options when used in confined spaces life and flexibility
• State-of-the-art free wheeling mechanism allows quick and easy one-handed take-up and • Free chaining for fast, easy attachment to load
positioning of slack chain • Forged upper and lower hooks with latches
• Enclosed self-adjusting screw and disc type load brake stays clean and dry, eliminating drift • Simple construction with fewer parts for ease of maintenance
and backlash for safe, secure holding • Meets or exceeds ASME/ANSI B30.21 • Metric Rated
• Screw-and-disc brake lowering allows “micro-inching” load positioning Cap. (Lbs.) Std. Lift (Ft.) Avg. Handle Effort (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Cap. Lift No. of Min. Head Handle Avg. Handle Wt. 1500 5 45 02404457 $434.55
(Lbs.) (Ft.) Load Chains Room (In.) L (In.) Effort (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 3000 5 55 02404432 593.42
1500 5 1 12 12 37 16 66035346 $353.91 6000 5 62 02404440 758.53
1500 10 1 12 12 37 18 66035353 383.66
1500 15 1 12 12 37 20 66035361 454.61
1500 20 1 12 12 37 22 66035379 488.67
2000 5
2000 10
1
1
13
13
12
12
49
49
16
18
66035387
66035395
422.22
436.32
Puller Lever Hoists
2000 15 1 13 12 49 20 66035403 512.37
2000 20 1 13 12 49 22 66035411 533.77 • Capacities: 1500 Lbs. to 12000 Lbs. • Standard lift: 5v Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Designed for heavy-duty construction and industrial applications
3000 5 1 141⁄2 12 41 26 66035429 546.80
• Use to pull, lift, drag or stretch
3000 10 1 141⁄2 12 41 30 66035437 593.05
3000 15 1 141⁄2 12 41 34 66035445 639.39 • Tough aluminum alloy constuction; powder coat finish
3000 20 1 141⁄2 12 41 38 66035452 685.68 • Weatherproof for outdoor service
• Simple construction with fewer parts for ease of maintenance and
6000 5 2 171⁄2 12 61 43 66035460 703.37 lower inventories
6000 10 2 171⁄2 12 61 50 66035478 796.68 • Hoistaloy™ hardened steel link type load chain for strength, long
6000 15 2 171⁄2 12 61 57 66035486 888.49 wear life and flexibility
6000 20 2 171⁄2 12 61 64 66035494 983.27 • Weatherized Weston-type automatic braking system for positive
load control
• Easy, one-hand operation and control - only 58 Lbs. of pull
required for 3⁄4 ton model capacity
Ratchet Lever Hoists • Forged upper and lower hooks with latches standard
• Free wheeling for fast and easy attachment to load
Series RA Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty • Meet or exceed ASME/ANSI B30.21 • Metric Rated
• Aluminum ratchet hoist that utilizes a ratchet and pawl design for lifting, pulling and binding Cap. Avg. Handle Wt. Min. Dist.
• Capacities: 1,500 Lbs. to 12,000 Lbs. (Lbs.) Effort (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Btwn. Hooks (In.) Order # Price Ea.
• Rugged unit and handle made from malleable iron
• Riveted construction makes the unit tamper-resistant 1500 58 14 103⁄4 89788863 $448.79
• Free chaining mechanism allows quick and easy take-up and positioning of slack 3000 83 24 141⁄4 89788871 620.06
chain. Hoist will not free chain when under load 6000 95 34 17 89788889 807.94
• Handle stop prevents handle from spinning if the operator accidentally releases it 12000 96 65 213⁄8 89788897 1528.26
• Multiple rigging option: Hoist can lift, pull or bind. Unit can be operated from
either side and will work in any position with equal efficiency
Cap Lift No. of Min. Head Handle Avg. Handle Wt.
(Lbs.) (In.) Load Chains Room (In.) L (In.) Effort (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
1500 561⁄2 1 13 183⁄4 56 18 03533056 $496.60
3000 57 2 15 183⁄4 60 22 03533064 711.80
6000 57 2 175⁄8 275⁄8 120 39 03533072 893.90
12000 53 4 25 335⁄8 124 68 03533080 1820.88

Basics of...Mechanical/Hand Chain Hoists

Hand hoists are intended for horizontal lifting only. They are considered a force multiplier, giving the ability to lift very large loads with ease by using mechanical
advantage. Most hand hoists are used for infrequent maintenance applications where speed is not a requirement. They have 2 sets of chain, one is for lifting and the
other is used to pull or lower the load. They are considerably less expensive than powered hoists, but require physical effort (pulling on the hand chain) to lift the load.
They are not fast and should not be specified for continuous lifting applications, especially when long lifts are required. Several are light and small enough and
considered more portable and allow them to be taken to the job site.
Selection Criteria
Load Capacity (lbs. or tons): The weight of the load to be lifted. A hoist’s rated capacity is the maximum load for which the hoist is designed by the
manufacturer to lift. Carefully consider the load weight including attachments such as slings, grabs, spreader beams etc. and the capacity of the hoist.
Lift (ft.): The maximum length of travel required for raising and lowering the load. Standard lifts are generally 8,10,15 and 20 ft. lifts.
Hand Chain Drop: The length of chain required for the hoist’s hand chain. The drop is normally 2 ft. less than the length of lift, which prevents the chain
from contacting the floor. The actual length of hand chain required is approximately 2 x lift minus 2 ft., since the chain is in a continuous loop when it
travels around the hoist’s hand chin wheel.
Suspension: How or where will the hoist be attached? Most hand chain hoists are sold with a top hook used for single point suspending. They can also be
hooked on to a trolley, or built special with a top lug or eyebolt. This allows attachment to a low headroom style trolley for more permanent installations.
Accessories: Are there any other special requirements? Many hoist manufacturers offer special options such as chain containers to hold the excess load
chain, plated chain for corrosion resistance and special spark resistant features for hooks and chain.

Applications
Hand chain hoists are most often used as an in-plant tool for periodic maintenance applications. A typical use might be for lifting pumps, generators, or other heavy
equipment in water treatment facilities. Whether used in construction, machine shops, automotive garages, farms, or in the private home, hundreds of applications
exist for a hand chain hoist.
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.

3286 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270
Page 133
ELECTRIC HOISTS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Mini-Electric Cable Hoists
For Use with Single or Double Hook 880 Lb. Capacity Mini-Electric Hoist
Mini-size power driven electric hoist suitable for small volume and assembly. Can be used to • Capacity: 440 Lbs. for single hook
lift and unload goods in light industrial settings and other applications such as restaurants. • Capacity: 880 Lbs. for double hook
440 Lb. Capacity Mini-Electric Hoist • Line speed: 33 feet/minute, 16w double cable
• Capacity: 220 Lbs. for single hook • Capacity: 440 Lbs. for double hook • Lifting height: 38v single lift, 19v double lift
• Line Speed: 33 feet/minute, 16w double cable • Cable: 9⁄64w diameter steel strands
• Lifting Height: 38v single lift, 19v double lift • Motor: 11⁄8 HP, 3400 RPM
• Cable: 1⁄8w diameter steel strands • Motor: 5⁄8 HP, 1725 RPM • Power supply: 110V AC, 850 watts, 8 amp, 1 phase, 60Hz
• Power supply: 110V AC, 460 watts, 4.5 amp, 1 phase, 60Hz • Power cord: UL approved, 3 pronggrounded,
• Power cord: UL approved, 3 prong grounded, double insulated 60348448 double insulated
• Remote switch: 5.5v cable length • Mounting clamps: 15⁄8w dia. • Remote switch: 5.5v cable length
Accessories Included: Mounting clamps for attaching hoist to Cable Hoist • Mounting clamps: 15⁄8w diameter
Cable Hoist 60348455
fixed overhead or rotating support. Remote switch with water Lifting Wt.
sealed power switch, for safe operation. 38v steel wire cable Cap. (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Lifting Cap. (Lbs.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
with sheaved pulley lift hook and weighted lift hook.
Stabilizing weight on primary lift hook. Built-in cable guide. 220/440 24.2 60348448 $290.45 440/880 36.3 60348455 $461.31

Basics of...Electric Hoists

An electric overhead hoist is often specified when the application calls for frequent and faster lifting, such as on a factory production line.
They are very similar in design to a hand chain hoist however the operator does not need to exert physical input force to raise or lower the
load. The controls are needed to start and stop the hoist motor and reverse its direction. A push button pendant station is normally used to
control the hoist and/or trolley motions. Electric hoists are quieter than air hoists and require only the proper power source to operate. Many
electric powered hoists come with a hook or lug and some are available with some type of a trolley such as push type, hand geared or
motorized. An electric hoist with a motorized trolley is ideal for repetitive lifts that are required to travel long distances. A wide range of
capacities and speeds are available for both hoists and motorized trolleys.
The electric hoists lifting medium can be either chain (coil or roller type) or wire rope. Wire rope hoists are generally used for higher
capacities, faster speeds, smoother and higher lift. However, chain hoists with the same capabilities as wire rope hoist have become
increasingly popular in recent years. Coil and roller chain hoists are the most popular in the 3-ton and smaller sizes because these hoists are
generally smaller in size, lighter and less expensive.
All chain hoists provide true vertical lift (load does not vary from the hoist centerline during hoisting or lowering). Many have features such as overload protection
keeping the hoist from operating above intended lifting capacity and or limit switches that prevents damage to the hoist body if you go to far upwards or may regulate
the downward travel as well. These could be mechanical stops or electronic switches.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is of the most important considerations when choosing an electric hoist for a particular application. Duty cycle can be most easily defined as “a specified
number of operations at stated intervals”. For an electric hoist duty cycle is how much work the hoist must perform in a given period. The weight of the load, lifting
distance and frequency of operation, all play an important role in determining the duty cycle capability of an electric hoist.
The Hoist Manufacturer’s Institute has classified duty cycle requirements by hoist class. The ratings would include from infrequent/standby use to severe duty classes
ranging from: H1, H2, H3, H4, or H5. See the chart below for further details and specific typical applications. Most hoist manufacturers classify their hoist by these
criteria and reference this standard for customer use and comparison between brands.
Duty Service Classification
Hoist Class Service Classification Typical Areas of Application
H1 Infrequent or Powerhouses and utilities, infrequent handling. Hoists are used primarily to install and service heavy equipment where loads frequently approach hoist
Standby capacity, with periods of utilization infrequently approaching hoist capacity and with periods of utilization being infrequent and widely scattered. (max. on
time 10 min./hr., and typically no more than 2 lifts /month near max. load capacity)
H2 Light Duty Light machine shop, fabrication and service and maintenance work. Loads and use are randomly distributed, with capacity loads handled infrequently. Total
running time does not exceed 10-15% of the work period. (max. on time 10 min./hr., 75-starts/hr. max. ; running time max. 10-15% of work period)
H3 Standard Duty General machine shop, fabrication assembly, storage and warehousing. Loads and use are randomly distributed. Total running time does not exceed
15-25% of the work period. (Max. on time 15 min./hr., 150- starts /hr. max.; running time max. 15-25% of work period)
H4 Heavy Duty High volume handling in steel warehouses, machine shops, fabricating plants, mills and foundries. Common applications include heat-treating and plating
operations. Total running time normally approaches 50% of the work period. (max. on time 30 min./hr., 300-starts/hr. max. ; running time max. 25-50% of
work period)
H5 Severe Duty Bulk handling in combination with buckets, magnets or other heavy attachments. Equipment is often cab operated. Duty cycle approaches continuous
operation. User must specify exact details of operation, including weight of attachments. (Max. on time up to continuous, 600- starts/hr. max. ; running time
max. 60-100% of work period)

Selection Criteria
Load Capacity (lbs. or tons): The weight of the load to be lifted. A hoists rated capacity is the maximum load for which the hoist is designed by the manufacturer to lift.
Carefully consider the load weight including attachments such as slings, grabs, spreader beams etc. and the capacity of the hoist..
Lift (ft.): The maximum length of travel required for raising and lowering the load. Standard lifts are generally 8, 10, 15, and 20 foot lifts.
Lifting Medium: Chain or wire rope. Is true vertical lift required? Power Supply Voltage such as 115V single phase, 230V 3-phase or 460V 3-phase.
Control Voltage: A reduced control circuit voltage (24 or 115 volts) accomplished by the use of a transformer in the hoist. This prevents the higher power supply
voltage from reaching the operator through the hoist’s push button station.
Push Button Cord length: Standard length is approximately 4 ft. less than lift.
Power Cord Length: Standard lengths vary by manufacturer and/or hoist model.
Abnormal Operating Conditions: Will the hoist function properly in its environment? (Corrosive, outdoor, dusty/dirty, extreme temp. ranges, hazardous locations, etc.).
Duty Cycle Requirements: Does the specific hoist you select meet the application duty requirement? Using a lower Service Classification Duty rating than your need will
result in shorter hoist life that may not be covered by manufacturer’s limited warranty.
Type of Suspension: Hook (swivel or rigid), lug, trolley (push, hand geared, or motorized).
Headroom Requirements: The distance between the bearing surfaces of the upper and lower hook at the high hook position (or the minimum distance between hooks).
Trolley Hand Chain Drop (ft.): For hand-geared trolleys. For those with trolleys.
Trolley Speed Feet Per Minute (fpm): For those with a motorized trolley.
Beam Size: The type of beam that the trolley will operate on.
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.

3288 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270 Page
Page 134 3288
ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS & AIR HOISTS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Heavy-Duty Electric Chain Hoists
High performance hoists engineered for heavy-duty industrial service. Designed for safety, these hoists incorporate mechanical load brake, motor brake and overload H4 Heavy-Duty
clutch as standard. Available with top hook or with a plain trolley. Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Capacities and lifts: Rated loads from ⁄4 to 2 tons, with 10, 15, and 20v lifts. Standard push
1
Hoist with Plain Trolley
button drop is 4v less than lift, CSA approved Includes Hoist and a Trolley with these Features:
• Voltage and motor options: 115/230-single phase; 230/460-three phase, 60 Hz • Parallel mounting standard
• Mechanical load brake: Weston type, controls load lowering and prevents load drift. Holds • Trolley adjustable: For 6w to 8w American Standard I-beams with
rated load independent of multiple disc motor brake recommended 4v minimum radius
• Multiple disc motor brake: Heavy-duty, direct acting design for positive load spotting and holding • Wraparound side plates: Act as safety lugs and as bumpers to protect wheels
• 5-pocket load sheave: Increases chain and sheave engagement 25% over hoists with conventional • Precision trolley wheels: Machined, cast iron wheels with sealed, lifetime
4-pocket sheaves. Provides smoother lifting and reduces chain wear over 4-pocket sheaves lubricated ball bearings for extended trolley life
• Limit switches: Adjustable to regulate upper and lower load travel. Brass nuts standard for improved
switch setting and repeatability. Stainless steel limit switch shaft standard
• Solid state starting switch: Standard on single phase unit. Provides greater reliability and starting WARNING: The equipment shown is intended for industrial
consistency than centrifugal switches - fewer components to wear out or fail use only and should not be used to lift, support, or otherwise
• Overload clutch: Protects hoist, operator and supporting structures from damaging overloads, chain transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
jamming, and reverse phasing
• Meets or exceeds ASME/ANSI B30.21
Hoist w/Rigid Top Hook - EC Models Hoist w/Plain Trolley Models - ECT
Lift 1 Ph. 115/230V 3 Ph. 230/460V 1 Ph. 115/230V 3 Ph. 230/460V
Cap. Lift Motor Speed No. of Min. Hd. Wt. 1 Ph. Wt. 3 Ph. Min. Hd. Wt. 1 Ph. Wt. 3 Ph.
(Tons) (Ft.) (HP) (FPM) Chains Rm. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Rm. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄4 10 1⁄4 16 1 167⁄8 100 66033002 106 66033366 $2185.73 1711⁄32 145 66033812 151 66034174 $2539.65
1⁄4 10 1⁄2 32 1 167⁄8 108 66033010 112 66033374 2307.15 1711⁄32 153 66033820 157 66034182 2661.07
1⁄4 15 1⁄4 16 1 167⁄8 104 66033036 110 66033390 2270.15 1711⁄32 149 66033846 155 66034208 2624.08
1⁄4 15 1⁄2 32 1 167⁄8 110 66033044 114 66033408 2391.56 1711⁄32 156 66033853 160 66034216 2745.42
1⁄4 15 1 64 1 167⁄8 120 66033051 119 66033416 2708.45 1711⁄32 165 66033861 164 66034224 3062.38
1⁄4 20 1⁄4 16 1 167⁄8 108 66033069 114 66033424 2354.53 1711⁄32 153 66033879 159 66034232 2708.45
1⁄4 20 1⁄2 32 1 167⁄8 114 66033077 118 66033432 2475.95 1711⁄32 159 66033887 163 66034240 2829.89
1⁄2 10 1⁄4 9 1 167⁄8 104 66033093 110 66033457 2430.07 1711⁄32 149 66033903 155 66034265 2783.97
1⁄2 10 1⁄2 16 1 167⁄8 106 66033101 110 66033465 2512.98 1711⁄32 151 66033911 155 66034273 2866.92
1⁄2 10 1 32 1 167⁄8 118 66033119 117 66033473 2686.82 1711⁄32 163 66033929 162 66034281 3152.69
1⁄2 15 1⁄4 9 1 167⁄8 120 66033127 114 66033481 2514.44 1711⁄32 153 66033937 159 66034299 2868.40
1⁄2 15 1⁄2 16 1 167⁄8 118 66033135 114 66033499 2597.39 1711⁄32 155 66033945 159 66034307 2951.32 Hoist with Rigid Hook - Hoist with Plain Trolley -
1⁄2 15 1 32 1 167⁄8 122 66033143 121 66033507 2883.21 1711⁄32 167 66033952 166 66034315 3237.09 EC Series (Shown with ECT Series (Shown with
1⁄2 20 1⁄2 16 1 167⁄8 114 66033168 118 66033523 2681.82 1711⁄32 159 66033978 163 66034331 3035.73 Optional Chain Container) Optional Chain Container)
1⁄2 20 1 32 1 167⁄8 126 66033176 125 66033531 2967.64 1711⁄32 171 66033986 170 66034349 3321.54
1 10 1⁄4 4 2 181⁄4 116 66033184 114 66033549 2661.07 1811⁄16 165 66033994 163 66034356 3015.00
1 10 1⁄2 8 2 181⁄4 116 66033192 120 66033556 2697.95 1811⁄16 161 66034000 165 66034364 3015.00
1 10 3⁄4 12 1 167⁄8 114 66033200 118 66033564 2730.67 1711⁄32 159 66034018 163 66034372 3084.59
1 10 1 16 1 167⁄8 118 66033218 121 66033572 2758.53 1711⁄32 163 66034026 166 66034380 3152.69
1 15 1⁄2 8 2 181⁄4 121 66033234 125 66033606 2804.75 1811⁄16 166 66034042 170 66034414 3158.65 FOB Factory
1 15 3⁄4 12 1 167⁄8 121 66033242 123 66033614 2828.46 1711⁄32 166 66034059 168 66034422 3182.38
1 15 1 16 1 167⁄8 125 66033259 126 66033622 2896.55 1711⁄32 170 66034067 171 66034430 3250.48
1 20 3⁄4 12 1 167⁄8 126 66033283 128 66033663 2926.17 1711⁄32 171 66034091 173 66034471 3280.09
1 20 1 16 1 167⁄8 130 66033291 131 66033671 2994.28 1711⁄32 175 66034109 176 66034489 3348.19 Chain Containers for EC & ECT Series
2 10 1 8 2 1815⁄16 133 66033317 132 66033705 3425.21 193⁄8 178 66034125 177 66034513 3922.75 1-Chain 2-Chain 3-Chain
2 15 3⁄4 6 2 1815⁄16 136 66033325 137 66033739 3437.01 193⁄8 181 66034133 182 66034547 3934.60 Single (Ft.) Double (Ft.) Triple (Ft.) Order # Price Ea.
2 15 1 8 2 1815⁄16 142 66033333 141 66033747 3595.50 193⁄8 187 66034141 186 66034554 4093.04 20 10 66035775 $72.11
2 15 3 24 1 23 325 66033762 5234.80 219⁄16 370 66034570 5732.36 25 12.5 66035783 78.50
2 20 3⁄4 6 2 1815⁄16 145 66033341 146 66033770 3607.33 193⁄8 190 66034158 191 66034588 4104.90 15 66035791 209.80
2 20 1 8 2 1815⁄16 151 66033358 150 66033788 3765.79 193⁄8 196 66034166 195 66034596 4263.35 30 15 10 66035809 212.42
2 20 3 24 1 23 334 66033804 5376.95 219⁄16 379 66034612 5874.55 50 25 16.5 66035817 227.84

Basics of...Air Hoists

Air Hoists offer the advantages of an electric hoist and are uniquely suitable for heavy usage allowing them to be run more continuously and in environments that make
electrical hoists impractical. This is because an air hoist utilizes an air motor and there is no electrical arching making them excellent in chemical and petrochemical
industries with hazardous environments. Air hoists also run cooler than electric hoists due to their self-cooling motor design. Air hoist with pendant throttle control
offer a true variable speed control that offers precise spotting of the load and smooth acceleration in the lifting motion. Many have features such as overload protection
keeping the hoist from operating above indented lifting capacity and/or limit switches that prevents damage to the hoist body if you go to far upwards or may regulate
the downward travel as well.
Selection Criteria
Load Capacity (lbs. or tons): The weight of the load to be lifted. A hoists rated capacity is the maximum load for which the hoist is designed by the
manufacturer to lift. Carefully consider the load weight including attachments such as slings, grabs, spreader beams etc. and the capacity of the hoist.
Lift (ft.): The maximum length of travel required for raising and lowering the load. Standard lifts are generally 8, 10, 15, and 20 foot lifts.
Lifting Medium: Chain or wire rope. Is true vertical lift required?
Power Supply: Must be clean, dry air supply and exceed or meet minimum CFM requirement.
Push Button Cord length: Standard length is approximately 4 ft. less than lift.
Abnormal Operating Conditions: Will the hoist function properly in its environment? Such as will it be used in a corrosive environment, outdoors,
dusty/dirty condition, where an extreme temperature range exists, in a hazardous location, etc.).
Duty Cycle Requirements: Does the specific hoist you select meet the application duty requirement? Using a lower Service Classification Duty rating
than your need will result in shorter hoist life that may not be covered by manufactures limited warranty.
Type of Suspension: Hook (swivel or rigid), lug, trolley (push, hand geared, or air motorized).
Headroom Requirements: The distance between the bearing surfaces of the upper and lower hook at the high hook position (or the minimum distance
between hooks).
Trolley Hand Chain Drop (ft.): For hand-geared trolleys. CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and
Trolley Speed Feet Per Minute (fpm): For those with a motorized trolley. should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport
Beam Size: The type of beam that the trolley will operate on. people, or to suspend loads over people.

3292 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270
Page 135
AIR HOISTS, BALANCERS & HOIST BEAM TROLLEYS TECH INFO
Air Chain Hoists Max Air Balancers
• Air hoists can be operated continuously, 100% duty cycle, as rotary vane Provides precise positioning or repetitive transferring of loads as heavy as 120 Lbs. With up to 8w
air motors don’t heat up with proper lubrication of float, the operator can position the load easily and precisely by hand.
• Dust, dirt, moisture and corrosive gases are kept out of the air motor by the • Limitless start/stop cycles for reliable performance and productivity
air pressure that runs it • Exclusive lost load protection system
• No electrical hazard • Pilot pendent control • Exhaust air chain lubrication • Extra safety with exclusive lock out, tag out device that makes the balancer
• Simple speed and directional controls provide precise spotting control inoperable in the event of damage or required maintenance
• Continuous duty cycle capability makes air hoists the first choice for the • Unique pressure compensated flow control maintains lifting speed regardless
most extreme applications like foundries, electroplating shops, heavy of fluctuations in plant air pressure.
industry, petrochemical • Operates on 90 psi plant air which is less than many others that require 100 psi
• Dependable non-asbestos, self-adjusting brakes • Chain lift eliminates spinning or fraying plus delivers long wear life
Hoists • 18 pocket lift wheel for smooth balancer operation
• True vertical chain travel (80w max.)
Cap. Max. Lift Lifting No. of Wt.
• Pendant control station offers ergonomic one-hand control for ease of use and
(Lbs.) Distance (Ft.) Speed (FPM) Chains (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
comes standard with 9v-6w drop
550 10 101 1 48 05877154 $3872.95 • Forged steel latch type lower hook with bearing for free rotation
1100 10 55 1 48 05877162 4225.93 • Supplied complete with chain container for loose end chain
2200 10 28 2 61 05877170 4337.03 05877154
Cap. (Lbs.) Working Range (In.) Order # Price Ea.
4400 10 13 2 125 05877196 6333.18
Pendant Control
Chain Containers 120 80 02698264 $3129.34
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Balance Control
For use with order #’s 05877154, 05877162 & 05877170 05877212 $121.66 120 80 02698298 3129.42
For use with order # 05877196 05877220 243.15

Basics of...Hoist Beam Trolleys

Trolleys are available in several different configurations in Push Type and Motorized versions.
The most common push type beam trolleys are the hand powered versions, often referred to as plain or push type.
Push Type Trolley: Is normally used for moving lighter loads and if load-spotting accuracy is not critical. The trolley is moved
along the beam by pulling the hoists load chain, usually the lower hook block area.
Motorized Types (electric or air powered): Offer more accurate and speed over push types trolleys and are often used for heavy
loads, longer distances, repetitive applications, or where faster speeds are required.
To insure the Trolley wheels fit the intended beam you should measure and verify the height and flange width you are planning to mount it on.

Selection Criteria
Suspension (Hook type or Rigid mounted): Hook mounted may be used with any hoist hook mounted hoist. Rigid mounted are used with lug-mounted hoist (hand hoist,
electric or air hoist) to conserve headroom they are mounted directly to the hoist.
Types of Beam: The two most popular styles are American Standard & Wide Flange types which use the standard universal ball tread wheel
Beam Size: Must be considered for the trolley adjustment based on the beam size
Type of Trolley: Push pull, hand geared, or motorized
Minimum Curve Radius: The trolley wheel tread (which rests on the beam) must be able to run smoothly and negotiate along the tightest curve of the beam
Headroom: Measured from the bottom of the treads on the wheels to the mount point where you intend to hang the trolley from
Trolley Speed: Motorized trolleys are offered in standard and special speed configurations and are rated in feet per minute (fpm) of travel. Increases versatility of hoist
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
Page
Page 136 3294

Plain Trolleys Plain & Geared Trolleys

• Feature steel wraparound side plates, dual tread wheels and Model CBT
lubricated shielded ball bearing, which combined ensure that
• Plain models are the economical choice for
trolleys will provide smooth rolling, long life
most applications
and low maintenance
• Both plain and geared trolleys feature steel wrap Plain
• Excellent attachment point for manual powered hoists
around side plates, dual tread wheels and lifetime
• Lugs provide additional security to increase operator safety
lubricated shielded ball bearing. These combined
and act as bumpers to protect wheels
features ensure it will provide smooth rolling, long life
Load Std. Beam Min. Radius Wheel Tread Wt. and low maintenance
Cap. (Tons) Ht. (In.) Curve (In.) Dia. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • Geared models allow for precise load positioning and
1⁄4 4-10 27 223⁄64 19 79487500 $104.01 • Wheels include feature a 6v hand chain drop
1⁄2 4-10 27 223⁄64 19 79487518 116.02 • Capacities: 1⁄4 tons to 5 tons
permanently lubricated,
1 5-12 36 223⁄64 26 79487526 149.62 • Excellent attachment point for manual powered hoists
shielded ball bearings
2 6-18 45 35⁄32 46 79487534 229.25 • Easily adjusts to fit any beam flange within range of
adjustment, up to an 8.7w flange width
• Lugs provide additional security to increase operator
safety and act as bumpers to protect wheels
• Will fit either tapered or flat beam flange within range
Plain Bearing Trolleys of adjustment
• Wheels include permanently lubricated,
• Easily adjustable to fit a wide range of beams shielded ball bearings Geared
• Wheels with ball bearings for ease of use and smooth operation
• Efficient operation with very little push/pull force required Cap. Std. Beam I-Beam Min. Radius Wheel Tread Wt. Plain Trolley Geared Trolley
WARNING: The equipment shown is intended for industrial use only and should not be (Tons) Ht. (In.) W. (In.) Curve (In.) Dia. (In.) Lbs. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people. 1⁄4 4-24 2.0-8.7 27 2.36 19 66035239 $131.29
1⁄2 4-24 2.0-8.7 27 2.36 19 66035247 146.46
Cap. I-beam Min. Radius Flange W Wt.
(Tons) Ht. (In.) (In.) (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 1 5-24 2.3-8.7 36 2.36 26 66035254 188.92 41836057 $589.34
1⁄2
11⁄2 6-24 2.3-8.7 45 3.15 46 66035262 252.51
4-19 35 21⁄2-6 17 09450370 $92.88
1⁄2 5-12 36 21⁄2-51⁄2 17 89817514 113.98 2 6-24 2.3-8.7 45 3.15 46 66035270 289.43 41836065 783.28
1 4-19 39 21⁄2-8 30 09450388 116.92 3 8-24 3.0-8.7 55 4.41 86 66035288 474.99 92106418 1065.08
1 5-12 40 21⁄2-51⁄2 30 89817522 123.90 5 10-24 3.5-8.7 70 4.92 30 66035296 708.10 41836073 1493.68
2 4-19 43 37⁄16-8 49 09450404 185.20

3294 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270
 SLINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Slings
Use this information below to help you determine the most appropriate type sling for your application
Sling Type vs. Issue Chain Polyester Roundsling Polyester Webbing Nylon Webbing Wire Mesh Wire Rope Comments
Abrasion Resistance - Internal 9 8 6 6 8 8 Dirt accelerates internal abrasion of synthetic slings
Abrasion Resistance - External 10 5 4 4 9 7 Use wear pads for improved sling life
Fatigue Resistance 9 9 8 8 6 6 Wire Rope is susceptible to side bending fatigue
UV Resistance 10 7 3 3 10 10 Rate of web degradation will vary with sling type
Kink Resistance 8 10 10 10 5 1 Sharp bends will permanently damage wire rope
Crush Resistance 9 7 6 6 5 4 Block loads to protect slings from damage
Pulling at Side Angle 8 9 8 8 1 9 Wire Mesh must not be pulled at a side angle
Load Damage @ Contact Points 2 10 10 10 6 2 Loads can always be padded
Water Corrosion 3 10 10 10 4 2 Metal slings can be lubed to reduce corrosion
Ease of Inspection 7 10 6 10 6 5
Ease of Storage 6 10 8 10 4 2
The above values are based on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 being the best.
CAUTION
• The above information is simply provided to assist customers in determining which sling types tend to perform better when they are subjected to the listed issue
• This information was established based on the judgement of a number of experienced Lift-All personnel. However, it is not based on any studies or scientific data, and
is therefore not to be used in any way to determine the expected life of any sling type.
Basic Hitches Used in Rigging
Most slings will have tags showing capacity ratings for the following three most common types of hitches.
Basket Hitch - Puts both sling ends on the crane or hoist hook(s) while the sling body cradles the load. This hitch must only be
used on loads that are easily balanced and where both sling and load will not shift during lift.
Choker Hitch - Frequently used to lift bundles of materials (tubes, rods, etc.). One end connects to a crane or hoist hook while
the other end goes around the load and connects to the body of the sling. This allows the sling to tighten around the load as
itis lifted, providing greater load control. This hitch should be used when turning a load.
Vertical Hitch - Uses one connection point on the crane or hoist hook and one connection point on the load. Most appropriate
when the load has designated lift points such as hoist rings, eye bolts or hooks. A "Vertical" hitch may be used at an angle if
mulitple slings are used for the lift.
Sling Type vs. Issue Chain Polyester Roundsling Polyester Webbing and Nylon Webbing Wire Mesh Wire Rope Comments
Weight Reference 1 (Lbs.)1 2.2 0.50 0.46 5.3 0.93 Sling Weight per foot of length for a 5 Ton V Sling Capacity
Weight Reference 2 (Lbs.)1 10.4 2.4 2.6 27.1 5.1 Sling Weight per foot of length for a 25 Ton V Sling Capacity
Temperature Limit (°F) 600 200 200 550 400 Stainless Steel varieties available /w higher limits.
Elongation (%) 1 3 10 1 1 When loaded to the full Rated Capacity
Cut Resistant Yes No No Yes Yes Synthetic slings must be protected from sharp edges
Length Adjustment Yes No No No No
Rotation of wear points No Yes Yes No No Based on endless style for the synthetic slings
Repairable Yes No No Yes No
1
These values do not include the weight of the end hardware

Effect of Angle:
Did you know that when slings are used at an angle of less than 90° from horizontal, the sling’s capacity rating must be reduced? How much it is reduced depends on
the degree of the angle. You can determine whether a sling will be rated high enough if you know the angle between the sling leg and the horizontal. Once you know
this angle, multiply the sling’s rating by the appropriate factor in the table below. This will give you the sling’s reduced rating.

Angle from Sling Angle

Horizontal (degrees) Factor
90 1.000
85 0.996
80 0.985
75 0.966
70 0.940
65 0.906
60 0.866
55 0.819
50 0.766 Determining the lifting capacity of a sling
45 0.707 - Determine the angle of lift
40 0.643 - Determine the angle factor for the angle of lift from the list shown
35 0.574 - Multiply the sling’s rated capacity value by the angle factor
2
30 0.500 - This will yield the sling’s effective lifting capacity for the angle of lift
2
Angles of less than 30° from the horizontal are not
recommended and must be avoided wherever practicable Contact MSC today to arrange for an inspection at your facility by a trained sling representative

Do you know the OSHA requirements governing sling inspections?

The first basic requirement for sling inspections is that they need to be visually inspected before each use. Aside from this requirement, more thorough inspections
should be made periodically, with the interval determined by you, based on how hard the slings are used, and the environment in which they will be used. Written
records of inspections for alloy chain slings are required to be kept, at intervals determined, once again, based on their use, but not to exceed a period of one year.
You can access the current Federal Inspection requirements for all slings (Regulation - OSHA, Labor, Code of Federal Regulation, Industrial Slings, Part 1910.184) via
the internet, by going to:http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=9834
Caution: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.

WARNING! NEVER EXCEED WORKLOAD LIMITS. NEVER USE SLINGS ON THIS PAGE TO LIFT PEOPLE OR ITEMS OVER PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270 3301
Page 137
SNAPS, HOOKS, U-BOLT GRIPS & WIRE ROPE TECHNICAL INFO
Malleable Iron Bull Snaps Stainless Steel Wire Rope Grips - U-Bolt Type
For connecting of rope, chain or webbing to a variety of materials and fittings. • 18-8 SS U-Bolt and Nuts • 316 SS Saddle
Size Pkg. Snap Swivel Eye Fixed Eye • Reusable, no special tools required for assembly
Note: Snaps • Numerous industrial and marine applications
(In.) Qty. Open. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. are not for
• Superior corrosion resistance
7⁄8 10 9⁄16 67791483 $4.05 67791467 $3.47 lifting people • 316 Stainless Steel Grade kit
1 10 9⁄16 67791509 7.31 or objects • Kit Form - Qty. of clips included is appropriate for wire diameter
1 10 5⁄8 67791525 7.83 over people. Swivel Eye Fixed Eye Wire Rope Clip, U-Bolts and Nuts
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Brass Snap Hooks For 5⁄64w Wire 67685008 $3.62 For 1⁄2w Wire 67685123 $17.18
For 5⁄32w Wire 67685024 4.41 For 9⁄16w Wire 02066132 19.45
Designed for the connecting of rope, chain or webbing to a variety of
For 3⁄16w Wire 67685040 4.93 For 5⁄8w Wire 02066140 22.31
materials and fittings. Available in different materials depending upon usage.
For 1⁄4w Wire 67685065 4.93 For 3⁄4w Wire 02066157 28.83
Size (In.) Snap Opening (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price Ea. Note: Snaps are not for For 5⁄16w Wire 67685081 8.08 For 7⁄8w Wire 02066165 35.74
3⁄4 5⁄8 10 67791723 $5.25 lifting people or objects For 3⁄8w Wire 67685107 10.61 For 1w Wire 02066173 42.28
11⁄8 3⁄4 10 67791749 7.68 over people.
Wire Rope Clip & Thimble Kit - 316 Stainless Steel
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Open Eye Type Snaps 3⁄32w Wire (Qty 2) A73525552 $7.81 5⁄16wWire (Qty 3) A73525602 $26.46
For connecting of rope, chain or webbing to
1⁄8w Wire (Qty 2) A73525560 8.37 3⁄8w Wire (Qty 3) A73525495 41.02
Malleable Iron 5⁄32w Wire (Qty 2) A73525578 10.83 1⁄2w Wire (Qty 3) A73525511 91.71
a variety of materials and fittings. Available in
Size Pkg. Snap different materials depending upon usage.
3⁄16w Wire (Qty 2) A73525586 11.92 5⁄8w Wire (Qty 3) A73525529 118.03
(In.) Qty. Opening (In.) Order # Price Ea. 1⁄4w Wire (Qty 2) A73525594 17.22 3⁄4w Wire (Qty 4) A73525545 135.74
3⁄8 10 5⁄16 67791244 $1.75 Zinc Plated Malleable Iron
3⁄8 10 5⁄16 67791269 1.88 Size Pkg. Snap
1⁄2 10 5⁄16 67791285 2.76 (In.) Qty. Opening (In.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 10 1⁄2 67791301 3.69 3⁄8 10 5⁄16 67791400 $2.63
1⁄2 10 9⁄16 67791327 5.65 1⁄2 10 7⁄16 67791426 3.51
5⁄8 10 9⁄16 67791343 8.46 5⁄8 10 9⁄16 67791442 5.51
Note: Snaps are not for lifting people or objects over people.

Basics of...Wire Rope

Wire Rope: Is composed of wire twisted into strands around a core. The basic unit is the wire. Strands consist of a number of individual wires laid about a central wire.
Wire rope consists of a group of strands laid helically around a core, or center.
Classifications
In a numerical classification of wire rope construction, the first number is the number of strands; the second number is the number of wires per strand. Thus, 6 x 7
means six strands of seven wires per strand.
The standard construction of wire rope falls into the following five general classifications: 6 x 7, 6 x 19, 6 x 37, 7 x 19 and 8 x 19:
7 x 19 Class Wire Rope: 7 Strands, Nominally 19 Wires Per Strand: 6 x 19 Class Wire Rope: 6 Strands, Nominally 19 Wires Per Strand:
Use when flexibility and fatigue are concerns. Common applications Widely used and found in many variations throughout nearly all
include running rigging on sailboats, exercise equipment, winches industries. With its combination of flexibility and wear resistance,
and garage doors. rope in this class can be suited to the specific needs of diverse kinds
7 x 19 of machinery and equipment. The designation 6 x 19 is only nominal
as the number of wires per strand ranges from 15 to 26. 6 x 19
8 x 19 Class Wire Rope: 8 Strands, Nominally 19 Wires Per Strand:
Use where a minimum rotation or spinning is highly desirable.
Common applications include lifting or lowering of free loads with a
single line.
8 x 19 6 x 37 Class Wire Rope: 6 Strands, Nominally 37 Wires Per Strand:
Characterized by the relatively large number of wires used in each
6 x 7 Class Wire Rope: 6 Strands, 7 Wires Per Strand: strand. Ropes of this class are among the most flexible available, but
Use where ropes are dragged over the ground or over rollers and their resistance to abrasion is less than the 6 x 19 class. The
resistance to wear and abrasion are important factors. The wires are designation of the 6 x 37 is again only nominal as in the 6 x 19 class.
quite large and stand a great deal of wear. The 6 x 7 is a stiff rope and 6 x 37
needs sheaves and drums of large size. It will not stand bending
stresses as well as ropes with a large number of wires. 6x7

Types
Fiber Core: Wire rope with a synthetic or natural fiber cord of rope as a core to hold or position other strands. Fiber core adds flexibility without adding strength to the
wire rope. If the operating environment exceeds 180°F, a steel-cored rope should be used.
IWRC (Independent Wire Rope Core): A wire rope used as the axial member of a larger wire rope. IWRC has a higher strength than fiber core or strand core. It is not as
flexible as fiber core, but more flexible than strand core. Provides better crush resistance than fiber core. Page
Strand Core: Wire rope with a wire strand core used as the core of the wire rope. Page 138
It has higher strength than fiber core and less flexibility than fiber core or IWRC. 3320

Galvanized Steel Wire Rope Galvanized Wire Rope - Extra Flex

1 x 7 Single - Wire Strand 7 x 19 Strand
For straight load applications in smaller diameters used as fishing leaders and line. Breaking Core Price
In larger diameters itvs used for guy wire and messenger strand applications. Dia. (In.) Strength (Lbs.) Order # Per Foot
Dia. (In.) Breaking Strength (Lbs.) L (Ft.) Order # Price/Roll Safety Note: Do Not Exceed 3⁄32 1000 67677369 $0.55 Used when flexibility and
1⁄4 6650 500 67677500 $166.08 20% of the Break Strength 1⁄8 2000 67677385 0.56 fatigue are concerns.
3⁄8 15400 500 67677542 281.04 For Working Load. 5⁄32 2800 67677401 0.60 Running rigging on sailboats,
3⁄16 4200 67677427 0.72 exercise equipment, winches
and garage doors are all 7 x 19 Extra-Flex
1⁄4 7000 67677443 0.91 common applications.
5⁄16 9800 67677468 0.99 Safety Note: Do Not Exceed 20% of the
3⁄8 14400 67677484 1.20 Break Strength For Working Load.

3320 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 BLOCKS, PULLEYS, SLEEVES & FIBROUS ROPE TECH INFO
Upright-Mount & Side Mount Guidance Pulleys 316 Stainless Steel Snatch Blocks
These light-duty deck pulleys allow a wide Drop Side, Swivel Head
variety of uses with open and closed • Low friction rope pulley systems
housings. The galvanized malleable iron is • Superior corrosion resistance
suitable for most corrosive applications. • Quick release snap shackle head • Swivel head
• Material: Iron • Self-locking, releasable under load swiveling
Never exceed work load limits. Never use Single Open Single Closed snap shackle head
to lift people or suspend items over people. Upright Mount Upright Mount • Impact resistant rubberized cheeks do not
damage surrounding finish
Wire Rope OD Mounting Hole Dia. (In.) Upright Mount Side Mount • Corrosion resistant 316 stainless steel
Desc. Dia. (In.) (In.) Min. Max. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. • Marine grade 13⁄4w Block 3w Block 31⁄8w Block
Single Sheave-Open 3⁄16 21⁄2 0.144 0.155 67327882 $17.03 67327940 $23.95 Desc. Load Cap. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
1
Single Sheave-Open 1⁄4 31⁄4 0.209 0.220 67327908 23.07 67327965 26.68
Single Sheave-Open 3⁄8 41⁄2 0.235 0.246 67327924 45.23 2
67327981 49.34 13⁄4w Alloy Sheave 3310 A73524977 $182.00
Single Sheave-Closed 1⁄4 2 0.209 0.220 67328005 17.52 67328088 19.17 3w Acetal Sheave 2200 A73524969 151.12
Single Sheave-Closed 3⁄8 3 0.235 0.246 67328021 34.28 67328104 37.25 31⁄8w 316 Stainless Steel Sheave 6610 A73524985 544.14
41⁄4w 316 Stainless Steel Sheave 8270 A73524993 791.06
1 2
0.1875w Mounting Holes 0.216w Mounting Holes

Side Release Snatch Blocks Wire Rope Sleeve Swaging Tools

These steel blocks for wire rope or manila
rope feature steel sheaves and forged Desc. Order # Price Ea.
For use with oval and stop
steel swivel hooks and shackles. The side Tail-Board Multi-Groove compression sleeves. Cold forms
With
release design permits insertion of rope With
Shackle Block 3⁄32, 1⁄8, 5⁄32, 3⁄16w Oval & Stop, 67898007 $223.87 the sleeve to the wire rope
while block is suspended from gin-pole. Hook 1⁄16 & 5⁄64w Oval Only resulting in maximum strength.
Feature bolt retaining spring to ensure no 3⁄64 & 1⁄16w Oval & Stop 67898049 78.09
lost bolts. Single Groove
Never exceed work load limits. Never use to lift people or suspend loads over people. 3⁄32w Oval, 3⁄32 & 1⁄8w Stop 67898080 362.32
1⁄8w Oval, 3⁄32, 5⁄32, 3⁄16, 7⁄32w Stop 67898122 362.32
Wire Work Sheave
5⁄32w Oval 67898163 362.32
Rope Load OD w/ Hook w/ Shackle Tail-Board Block
3⁄16w Oval 67898205 362.32
Dia. (In.) Limit (Lbs.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1⁄4w
Multi-Groove
Painted Steel Blocks Oval & Stop 67898247 508.85
5⁄16w Oval & Stop 67898288 508.85
5⁄16, 3⁄8 4400 3 67326967 $217.50 167327023 $213.19 67327080 $119.94
3⁄8, 1⁄2 8800 41⁄2 67327049 333.26 67327106 230.93
5⁄8, 17600 6 67327007 576.37 67327064 623.74 67327122 404.01
3.4
1
Round Stop & Oval Compression Sleeves
Has swivel eye instead of shackle
Round Stop - Add a round stop to wire rope to prevent
Side Release Snatch Blocks pulling through a guide. Can support approximately 1⁄3
of the working load strength of the corresponding wire
rope when properly swaged to the rope.
• Steel blocks for wire or manila rope Oval - Use an oval sleeve to construct an eye to the end of a wire
• Steel sheaves, forged steel swivel hooks and shackles rope. Can support equal working load strength as corresponding
Wire Rope Dia. Sheave Load wire rope size when properly swaged to the rope.
Min. (In.) Max. (In.) OD (In.) Cap. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Wire Rope Pkg. Round Stop Aluminum Round Stop Copper Oval Aluminum Oval Copper
Snatch Block w/Hook Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
3⁄8 1⁄2 41⁄2 8800 09431701 $116.28 1⁄16 100 67897405 $17.38 67897686 $28.05 67896761 $17.21 67897082 $22.94
5⁄8 3⁄4 6 17600 09431719 261.38 3⁄32 100 67897447 23.07 67897728 53.51 67896803 21.11 67897124 30.56
Snatch Block w/Shackle 1⁄8 100 67897488 23.07 67897769 53.51 67896845 55.93 67897165 85.92
5⁄16 3⁄8 3 4400 09431727 94.36 With Hook 5⁄32 50 67897520 28.81 67897801 68.84 67896886 52.77 67897207 108.01
3⁄8 1⁄2 41⁄2 8800 09431735 160.66 3⁄16 50 67897561 28.81 67897843 68.84 67896928 76.36 67897249 234.57
5⁄8 3⁄4 6 17600 09431743 283.14 1⁄4 50 67897603 79.85 67897884 344.78 67896969 100.43 67897280 289.41
With Shackle
Tail Board Block 5⁄16 25 67897645 88.77 67897926 431.68 67897009 158.81 67897322 539.91
3⁄8 1⁄2 41⁄2 8800 09431768 100.56 3⁄8 25 67897967 510.72 67897363 656.63
Tail Board Block

Basics of...Fibrous Rope

Qualities Manila Sisal Cotton Nylon Polyester Polypropylene Kevlar Spectra
Strength
Overall Fair Fair Poor Excellent Excellent Very Good Excellent Excellent
Shock Load Absorption Poor Poor Very Poor Excellent Good Very Good Poor Fair
Weight
Specific Gravity 1.38 1.38 1.54 1.14 1.38 0.91 1.44 0.97
Floats No No No No No Yes No Yes
Elongation % Break 10-12% 10-12% 5-12% 18-25% 12-15% 15-25% 1.5-3.6% 3.5
Extension Under Constant Load Very Low Very Low Very Low Moderate Low High Very Low Moderate
Effects of Moisture
Water Absorption of Fibers Up to 100% Up to 100% Up to 100% 2-8% 1% None 3.5-7.0% None
Dielectric Properties Very Poor Very Poor Very Poor Poor Good Excellent Poor Excellent
Degradation
Resistance to Sunlight Good Good Good Good Excellent Poor Fair Fair
Resistance to Rot and Mildew Poor Poor Poor Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
Storage Requirements Dry Only Dry Only Dry Only Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry
Thermal Properties Melting Point Does not melt Does not melt Does not melt 420-480° 490-500° 330° 800° begins 297
Resistance
Acids Poor Poor Poor Fair Good Excellent Fair Excellent
Alkalis Poor Poor Fair Very Good Fair Excellent Fair Excellent
Oil and Gas Poor Fair Poor Very Good Very Good Very Good Very Good Very Good
Surface (Abrasion Resistance) Good Fair Poor Very Good Excellent Good Fair Very Good
Internal (Abrasion Resistance) Fair Fair Fair Excellent Excellent Good Fair Excellent
Solid Braided Cord: Strands pass under, then over the others while rotating in the same direction for a smooth, uniform surface.
Double Braided Cord: A hollow single braided shell around a braided core Diamond Braided: Tightly woven braided shell around a braided core Caution-Never Exceed 20% Of The
Twisted Rope: Two or more parallel strands rotate around an axis in one direction for added strength and smoothness. Breaking Strength For Working Load.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3323

Page 139
 LADDER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Choosing the Correct Ladder

Assess the Project

STEPLADDERS PLATFORM LADDERS

The most popular style of ladder. They are used at Combine stepladder and warehouse ladder
medium to low heights. Pail shelves and tops can be technology. The non-pinch platform provides a large
utilized to hold tools for the job. standing area for working on tasks that may take a
long period of time.

MECHANICS LADDERS EXTENSION LADDERS

Provide the ability for two people to work on the The most versatile and found in a variety of sizes.
same ladder in order to easily accomplish tasks that They are most commonly used for higher elevations.
would be more difficult for a single person. They are the most popular long ladder.

Choose the Material

ALUMINUM FIBERGLASS
• Light weight • Non-conductive (when clean and dry)
• Long lasting construction • Strong
• Resists corrosion • Weather resistant
• Ideal for painting, roofing and siding • Ideal for working around electricity

Choose the Duty Rating

TYPE 1AA: Professional use. TYPE 1A: Professional use. TYPE I: Industrial use. TYPE II: Commercial use. TYPE III: Household use.
Extra heavy duty capable of Extra heavy duty capable Heavy duty capable of Medium duty capable of Light duty capable of
supporting 375 lbs. of supporting 300 lbs. supporting 250 lbs. supporting 225 lbs. supporting 200 lbs.
USES: MRO and industrial USES: Roofing, building USES: Building USES: Light commercial USES: Light cleaning and
construction. maintenance, general maintenance, general and general repair, painting.
contracting and industrial contracting and sheet rock. painting and cleaning.
construction.
* All Load Capacities Include the User Plus the Materials Used on the Ladder
Determine the Height

STEPLADDERS
Maximum Ladder Approx. Highest
Reach* Size Standing Level
7v 5w 4v 1v 11w
8v 4w 5v 2v 10w
9v 3w 6v 3v 9w
11v 2w 8v 5v 8w
13v 1w 10v 7v 7w
15v 6w 12v 9v 6w

EXTENSION LADDERS
Maximum Ladder Approx. Highest
Reach* Size Standing Level
15v 6w 16v 9v 6w
18v 11w 20v 13v 5w
22v 9w 24v 17v 3w
26v 8w 28v 21v 2w
30v 6w 32v 25v
33v 5w 36v 27v 11w
36v 4w 40v 30v 10w

* Assumes a 5v 6w person with 12w vertical reach

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3333

Page 140
 ROLLING LADDER TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Choosing a Rolling Ladder

Size Considerations

• Select Platform Height, also known as Top Step, based on operations being performed
• Platform Height is where the user generally stands. Make sure you have minimum clearance
of 6 to 7 feet from the ceiling or any object suspended from the ceiling to insure the user has
room to stand safely
• Maximum convenient working height is 5 feet to 6 feet above the platform height
• Bear in mind that for bulkier or larger packages you should consider using a wider ladder
• Consider limitations on ladder dimensions imposed by doorways, isle width and corners the
ladder needs to turn. For tight spaces, select a narrow or directional ladder for maximum
maneuverability
Note: Load capacity (lbs.) is the combined weight of the user and materials

Climbing Position

The typical incline of a rolling ladder is designed for the user to ascend and descend facing the
steps. However, “Stairway Slope” a.k.a. “Walk Down” ladders have a more moderate incline,
approximately 50 degrees enabling the user to ascend and descend facing forward which is
safer and more stable while carrying heavier and bulky objects.

Material Type

Steel: For all around general purpose

Stainless: For corrosive environment as well as outdoor use
Aluminum: If you prefer a lighter weight. Like Stainless, they are corrosion resistant making
them ideal for both indoor and outdoor use.

Locking Mechanisms

• Spring-loaded Caster: Ideal for shorter ladders 5 steps and below. On this style ladder, the wheels retract under the user’s
weight securing the ladder to the floor.

• Lock Safe Step and Lock Safe Handle: Ideal for ladders over 5 steps. These ladders are raised into the rolling position when
the lock step or handle is actuated. Releasing the lock safe drops the ladder into the climbing position with the feet firmly on
the floor.
• Tilt-N-Roll, Folding and Wheelbarrow Style Ladders: Do not require a locking mechanism just tilt the ladder on its wheels to
move into working position
Tread Selection Guide

Expanded Metal Tread: This aggressive tread is ideal for the shop or retail floor. This design is self-cleaning allowing dirt to fall
through the tread. This helps keep footwear clean improving slip resistance. This is the most popular tread for rolling ladders.

Perforated Tread: Provides excellent slip resistance. This tread design is used extensively in retail and storeroom applications.

Serrated Tread: The most aggressive. This tread design is ideal for the shop floor or any application where maximum slip
resistance is required such as a wet and slippery environments

Abrasive Mat: Provides excellent slip resistance. This tread design is the best for the office, retail or the stock room as well as
areas with less dirt.

Page 141 Page 3341

Lock-N-Stock Portable Folding Safety Ladders

58° slope and 7w deep steps make this ladder ideal for many applications. Use the ladder in the shop,
office or retail floor and when finished, fold it and put it away. Tough and built to last.
• Heavy-duty 350 Lb. capacity • 4w Wheels allow ladder to be moved quickly and easily in any environment
• All welded steel construction • Safety handle prevents unintentional folding
• Lightweight • Manufactured using rigid 1w OD tubing
• Perforated tread • Built to OSHA and ANSI standards
• Folds without hinges and locks in climbing position • Blue powder coat
• Easy to maneuver into open and closed positions • Ships in a box and ready to use
No. of Steps Platform Ht. (In.) Overall Ht. (In.) Base W (In.) Base Depth (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
2 20 41 24 17 34 80591217 $228.70 Folds to approx.
3 30 52 24 23 42 02124527 294.87 10w depth for
4 40 65 24 30 53 62317524 356.73 easy storage

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3341

 PACKAGING TAPE TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Ring Binders
All Binders are 81⁄2 x 11w Leatherette 2-Pocket Portfolio - 25/Pk.
Deluxe Round Ring View Binders: Color Order # Price/Pk.
• Suede grain vinyl over heavyweight board • Clear glossy finish overlay, concealed rivets Red 75513382 $19.93
• Inside pockets on front and back covers • Sheet lifters 11⁄2w capacity and larger
Economy View Binders: White 75513374 19.93
• Clear matte finish overlay • Inside pockets and concealed rivets Dark Blue 75513416 19.93
Round Ring Binders: Light Blue 75513366 19.93
• Pockets inside front and back • 3w Capacity binders include sheet lifters Black 75513408 19.93
• Suede finish vinyl cover Assorted Colors 75513390 19.93
Ring Binders
Color Capacity (In.) Order # Price Ea. Color Capacity (In.) Order # Price Ea. Color Capacity (In.) Order # Price Ea. Color Capacity (In.) Order # Price Ea.
Deluxe Round Ring View Binder Round Ring Economy View Binder Round RIng Binder w/Label Holder Round Ring Binder w/o Label Holder
Black 1 70381959 $8.96 Black 1 70540430 $6.41 Black 1 70540752 $4.35 Royal Blue 1 70540737 $3.76
Black 11⁄2 70381975 10.89 Black 11⁄2 70540455 7.98 Black 11⁄2 70540794 7.97 Black 1 70540729 3.76
Black 2 70381991 11.63 Black 2 70540471 10.04 Black 2 70540836 8.54 Black 11⁄2 70540760 6.59
Black 3 70382015 17.69 Black 3 70540497 14.86 Black 3 71773154 11.75 Black 2 70540802 6.60
White 1 70381967 8.96 White 1 70540448 6.41 Red 3 71773170 11.75 Red 1 70540745 3.76
White 11⁄2 70381983 10.89 White 11⁄2 70540463 7.98 Royal Blue 3 71773162 11.75 Red 11⁄2 70540786 6.59
White 2 70382007 11.63 White 2 70540489 10.04 Red 2 70540828 6.60
White 3 70382023 17.69 White 3 70540505 14.86 Royal Blue 11⁄2 70540778 6.59
Royal Blue 2 70540810 6.60

Basics of ...Carton & Water Activated Box Sealing Tapes

& Filament/Strapping Tapes
Carton Sealing Tape

Hot Melt Carton Sealing Tapes Acrylic Carton Sealing Tapes

• Most popular carton sealing tape for general applications • Recommended for cold temperature, lower humidity
• Provides the widest range of application flexibility applications
• Highest holding power at room temperature • Ages well even if exposed to fluorescent or UV light
• Excellent performance in both automated and manual applications • Tape will not yellow over time; works well for storage
• Good initial adhesion, but requires 24 to 48 hours to
achieve maximum bond

Adhesive Type Hot Melt (Synthetic) Acrylic Water Activated Vegetable Based Adhesive
Water-Activated Tapes
Backing Options Polypropylene, Polyester Polypropylene, Polyester Paper
Dispensing Options Hand or Machine Hand or Machine Dispenser & Water Source Required • Requires water to
Popular Colors Clear, Tan Clear, Tan Natural or White activate adhesive
Temperature Range • Instantly bonds to virgin
or recycled corrugate
Application Conditions +45°F to +140°F +32°F to +120°F +33°F to +120°F
resulting in a tamper-
Post Application Conditions -10°F to +140°F -30°F to +200°F 0°F to +120°F evident package
Adhesion to Surfaces
• Reinforced tapes provide extra strength for
Rough or Recycled Corrugated Fair Good Excellent heavier cartons and are designed for
Printed Cartons Good Good Excellent applications where durability, extra strength and
Over- stuffed Cartons Excellent Good Excellent reliability are required.
Under- stuffed Cartons Good Good Excellent • Paper Tapes (non-reinforced) are best suited for
Performance Properties sealing lightweight or standard sized packages or
cartons and are the most environmentally
Resistance to Moisture Fair Poor Excellent
preferred method of sealing a box
Resistance to Aging Good Excellent Excellent
Clarity Good Excellent Not Applicable
Resistance to UV Light Good Excellent Excellent

Filament/Strapping Tape
• Filament tapes are available with Uni- or Bi-directional filament reinforcements Adhesive Type Hot Melt (Synthetic) or Natural Rubber
for added strength. Strapping tapes do not contain filament reinforcements Backing Options Polyester, Polypropylene, Paper
• Used for box closure, splicing and sealing. It’s high strength, excellent quick-stick Filament Options Fiberglass, Nylon, Polyester
and adhesion properties make it ideal for use on a variety of surfaces and perfect
Dispensing Options Hand
for use on difficult long or short-term bundling applications
• Moisture and abrasion resistant Colors Clear, White
Page
Page 142 3367

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3367

FLUORESCENT LAMPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of…Fluorescent Lamps

How to Choose the Right Fluorescent Lamp

Choose a Lamp Size Depending on Your Fixture:

a. Choose the right shape b. Choose the right width c. Choose the right length: 18w, 24w,
36w, 48w or 96w (measure from pin
to pin)

U-Bent Linear
Circular

Choose the Light Effect Desired: color temperature describes the appearance, atmosphere, ambiance or mood created by the light. It is usually desirable to
maintain a consistent color temperature throughout a space. Color temperature is measured in Kelvins (K). Standard light sources range from 2700K
(incandescent) to 6500K (daylight).
LIGHT EFFECT Warm Soft White Cool White Bright White Arctic White
COLOR TEMPERATURE 3000K 4000K 5000K 6500K
MOOD Comfortable & Relaxing Basic & Efficient Bright & Lively Cool & Refreshing

Color Rendering Index (CRI): the CRI is the ability of a light source to produce natural colors in Shapes
objects. CRI is measured on a scale from 0-100 where 100 is best. The higher the CRI the
more natural people and objects will appear when lighted. Incandescent and Halogen lamps as Fluorescent Lamp Shapes: the letter indicates the shape of
well as natural daylight have a 100 CRI. the lamp and the number designates the diameter in eighths
of an inch.
Example: a T8 Lamp is a tubular shape that is 8 eighths or
one inch in diameter.

Types
Slimline (Instant Start) Lamps Rapid Start Lamps
• Ballast starts these lamps instantly • Most popular type
• Single Pin Base • Smooth, fast starting (1 second) without a starter
• Available with Bipin and Recessed Double Contact Bases

Bases

On fluorescent lamps, the base is cemented to each end of the lamp to connect the bulb to the
electrical circuit.

A green color base indicates the lamp is a low mercury ALTO lamp.
ALTO II™ Fluorescent Lamps: all fluorescent lamps need a small amount of mercury to operate
efficiently, but Philips has developed Fluorescent T8 lamps with only 1.7mg of mercury. There is no
sacrifice in lamp life, light quality or energy. To further reduce environmental impact, Philips only uses
recycled mercury in these lamps.

3390 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 143
 HALOGEN LAMPS TECHNICAL INFO & INCANDESCENT LAMPS

Basics of...Incandescent and Halogen Lamps

Incandescent Operation
In an incandescent lamp, a tungsten filament is heated by an electric current until the filament becomes incandescent or gives off light. The life of a lamp
depends on the thickness of the tungsten filament; a thick filament will last longer than a thin one. But a thick filament does not get as hot so it produces
less light. That’s the trade-off – if you want more life, you get less light and vice-versa.

Halogen Operation
Halogen lamps are technically incandescent lamps, but they have three features that make them superior to standard incandescents: they are brighter,
whiter and last longer. A Halogen lamp has a thin filament. A thin filament produces more light than a thick one. This makes it brighter and whiter. But
how does it last longer despite having a thin filament? The Halogen Cycle: in a Halogen lamp the filament is contained within a glass capsule inside the
lamp itself. The Halogen gas inside the glass capsule transports the broken down tungsten back to the filament before it has a chance to deposit on the
lamp wall, thus replenishing it and keeping the lamp clean and bright. The halogen gas actually regenerates the filament.

Incandescent/Halogen Bulb Shapes

• Letters designate the shape of the
glass lamp
• Numbers indicate the diameter of the
lamp in eighths of an inch
• For example, “G-40” indicates a globe
shaped lamp having a diameter of 40
eighths or 5 inches

Incandescent/Halogen Bases
Screw bases are made of Aluminum,
Brass or Nickel-Plated Brass. Aluminum
is the most economical material. Brass
and Nickel-Plated Brass bases are
corrosion resistant and are used on
lamps designed for outdoor use, very
long life or in corrosive environments
that might cause a lamp to seize in the
socket and make replacement difficult

Incandescent Lamps

A15 A19 A23 A25, PS25 BA9 BA91⁄2 BR30 BR40 C7 ER30, ER40 F10 F15

G161⁄2 G25 G30 G40 PAR38 PAR56 PAR64 PS30 PS40 R14

• Offer warmth, dimmability, sparkle

and familiarity in a myriad of
intimate settings
• Complete line of superior long life
sources from soft white to
decorative to three-way types in a
wide variety of sizes and shapes
• Sold in package qty.
R20 R40 S6 S11 S14 T41⁄2 T6 T61⁄2 T7, T8 T10
Continued on next page

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3397

Page 144
 LAMP CONVERSION & COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

Basics of...Conversion of Incandescent Lamps to

Compact Fluorescent Lamps
Compact Fluorescent lamps use up to 75% less energy than standard incandescent lamps and last up to 10 times longer. For
conversion from Incandescent lamps to Compact Fluorescent lamps, start with the current wattage of your Incandescent lamp and
divide it by 4 to determine the wattage equivalent of the Compact Fluorescent lamp you will need. Choose a Compact Fluorescent lamp
with the wattage nearest to that number.
For example: You are currently using a 100 watt Incandescent lamp in your fixture
100 Incandescent Watts ÷ 4 = 25 Compact Fluorescent Watts

You can use a 25 or 27 watt Compact Fluorescent and it will produce the same light output as a 100 watt Incandescent, while saving you 75 watts.
The other factor you want to consider is lamp color or color temp. If you are replacing an Incandescent lamp with “Soft White” color then you would want to look
at a Compact Fluorescent with a color temp. of 2700-3500K. See chart below for color temp. guidance
LIGHT EFFECT Warm Soft White Cool White Bright White Arctic White
COLOR TEMPERATURE 3000K 4000K 5000K 6500K
MOOD Comfortable & Relaxing Basic & Efficient Bright & Lively Cool & Refreshing

Compact Fluorescent Lamps

2700K, 3000K - Warm

3500K - Neutral
4100K - Cool
5000 - Daylight
6500 - Bright

Twister EL/MDT Twister - El/3- Twister-EL/MDT Twister - Twister - EL/MDT Candle EL/A G25 EL/A PAR38 EL/A R30
Mini Dec. Way Helix GU24 Mini-Dec. EL/DT Dec. Mini-Dec. Dimmable

EL/A R40 EL/A - SWP PL-C 2 Pin PL-C 4 Pin PL-L PL-S PL-T PL-T 4 Pin
Page
SLS
• Save up to 75% on energy costs compared to incandescents • Lasts up to 13 times longerPage 145 incandescents • Stable light output over broad range of temperatures
than standard 3403
• Extensive array of color temperatures, lumen packages and wattages • ALTO technology lamps that are safer for the environment • Coloring rendering index: 82
Base Fluorescent Color Interchange Guide Price
Shape Watts Type Type Mfr’s # L (In.) Life Lumens Temp. GE Sylvania Order # Ea.
Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 5 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 5W — 8000 250 2700K — CF7EL/MINITWIST/BL/1 B07917818 $6.65
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 9 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 9W — 8000 550 2700K — CF7EL/MINITWIST/2700K B07917859 6.65
TWISTER-EL/3 WAY HELIX 11/23/34 Medium 3-Way Screw-in Fluorescent HELIX TWISTER EL/3W 11-23-64 — 10000 700/1500/ 2700K — — B83976647 18.08
Lamp 2200
TWISTER-EL/3 WAY HELIX 11/23/34 E26 Compact Fluorescent Energy 214866 7 10000 1500 2700K — — 1
A62476734 20.80
Saver Three-Way Twister
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 11 Medium EL/MDT EL/MDT11 49⁄16 8000 700 2700K — — B04577920 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT GU24 MINI DEC 13 GU24 Energy Saver GU24 Twister 222851 43⁄16 10000 900 2700K — — A88453519 5.99
TWISTER EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 224923 43⁄16 10000 900 3500K — 29052 A91685057 5.49
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 138057 41⁄4 12000 900 4000K — — A84155670 5.75
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 E26 Compact Fluorescent Energy 217596 5 12000 900 5000K — 29588 A55183198 5.75
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 224964 43⁄16 10000 900 6500K — — A91685065 5.75
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 13W — 30000 900 2700K — CF13EL/MINITWIST/2700K B07917875 6.42
TWISTER-EL/DT DEC 14 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 210468 33⁄4 10000 825 3000K — — A91685024 6.35
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC-DIMMABLE 15 E26 Energy Saver Dimmable 407379 513⁄32 10000 900 2700K 89619 — A91685131 21.99
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
TWISTER-EL/MDT GU24 MINI DEC 18 GU24 Energy Saver GU24 Twister 222869 41⁄2 10000 1200 2700K — — A89888036 6.99
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 18 Medium Screw-in Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 18W 51⁄2 10000 1250 2700K — — B07917883 8.73
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC-DIMMABLE 20 E26 Energy Saver Dimmable 405837 51⁄8 10000 1150 2700K — — A91685115 22.50
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
TWISTER-EL/MDT GU24 MINI DEC 23 GU24 Energy Saver GU24 Twister 222877 43⁄16 10000 1600 2700K — — A91685040 7.49
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 23 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 23W 5 10000 1600 2700K FLE23HT3/2/XL827 — B82895327 8.99
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 27 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 27W 57⁄16 10000 1750 2700K — CF27EL/TWIST B74082579 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 27 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 27W 1850LM 5 ⁄32
23 8000 1850 4100K — — B74082751 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 27 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 27W 1850LM 5K 523⁄32 10000 1800 5000K — CF27EL/TWIST/5000K B74082769 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 32 E26 Compact Fluorescent Energy 156398 51⁄2 10000 2200 2700K 24743 29578 A07917917 17.49
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC-DIMMABLE 32 E26 Energy Saver Dimmable 407155 613⁄32 10000 2000 2700K — — A91685123 25.40
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
Regular Compact Fluorescents
Candle 5 Candelabra Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MCAN 5W MIN CAN BASE 419⁄32 6000 200 2700K FLE5/2/CAC/827 CF4EL/DECO/CANDELABRA/1/BL B74082785 10.56
Candle 5 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MCAN 5W CANDLE MED BASE 41⁄2 6000 200 2700K FLE5/2/CAM/827 — B74082777 10.56
1
Blister Card
Continued on next page

= Eco Friendly Item READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3403

COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS/HID TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Continued from previous page

Compact Fluorescent Lamps

Base Base Bulb Color Temp. Bulb
Shape Wattage Style Code Style L (In.) Life Lumens Color Rating Dia. (In.) Lamp Code Order # Price Ea.
Single Lamp Compact Fluorescents (Cont’d)
R20 11 Medium E26 Reflector 41⁄2 10000 330 Warm White 2700K 21⁄2 11W R20 E26 27K CFL A79297362 $10.20
R30 15 Medium E26 Reflector 53⁄8 10000 700 Warm White 2700K 33⁄4 15W R30 E26 27K CFL A79297354 11.35
R40 23 Medium E26 Reflector 61⁄2 10000 1090 Warm White 2700K 5 23W R40 E26 27K CFL A79297347 13.95
T2/Twister 9 Medium E26 Spiral 4 12000 550 Warm White 2700K 11⁄2 9W/T2/SPIRAL/27K A79297255 4.55
T2/Twister 9 Medium E26 Spiral 4 12000 550 Cool White 4100K 11⁄2 9W/T2/SPIRAL/41K A79297263 4.55
T2/Twister 13 Medium E26 Spiral 41⁄8 12000 880 Cool White 4100K 13⁄4 13W/T2/SPIRAL/41K A79297297 4.70
T2/Twister 13 Medium E26 Spiral 41⁄8 12000 900 Warm White 2700K 13⁄4 13W/T2/SPIRAL/27K A79297271 4.70
T2/Twister 18 Medium E26 Spiral 41⁄2 10000 1200 Cool White 4100K 21⁄8 18W/T2/SPIRAL/41K A79297313 4.85 R30 R40
T2/Twister 18 Medium E26 Spiral 41⁄2 12000 1140 Warm White 2700K 21⁄8 18W/T2/SPIRAL/27K A79297305 4.85
T2/Twister 23 Medium E26 Spiral 47⁄8 10000 1600 Warm White 4100K 21⁄8 23W/T2/SPIRAL/41K A79297339 5.00
T2/Twister 23 Medium E26 Spiral 47⁄8 12000 1600 Warm White 2700K 21⁄8 23W/T2/SPIRAL/27K A79297321 5.00
T4/Twister 32 Medium E26 Spiral 63⁄4 8000 2000 Warm White 2700K 25⁄8 32W/T4/SPIRAL/27K A79297438 9.99
T4/Twister 32 Medium E26 Spiral 63⁄4 10000 2000 Cool White 4100K 25⁄8 32W/T4/SPIRAL/41K A79297446 9.99
T4/Twister 40 Medium E26 Spiral 71⁄4 10000 2600 Warm White 2700K 25⁄8 40W/T4/SPIRAL/27K A79297453 10.99
T4/Twister 40 Medium E26 Spiral 71⁄4 10000 2600 Cool White 4100K 25⁄8 40W/T4/SPIRAL/41K A79297461 10.99
T5/Twister 55 Medium E26 Spiral 95⁄8 10000 3700 Warm White 2700K 31⁄8 55W/T5/SPIRAL/27K A79297479 15.50
T2/Twister T4/Twister
T5/Twister 55 Medium E26 Spiral 95⁄8 10000 3700 Cool White 4100K 31⁄8 55W/T5/SPIRAL/41K A79297487 15.50
T5/Twister 65 Medium E26 Spiral 91⁄2 10000 4300 Warm White 2700K 31⁄2 65W/T5/SPIRAL/27K A79297495 16.50
T5/Twister 65 Medium E26 Spiral 91⁄2 10000 4300 Cool White 4100K 31⁄2 65W/T5/SPIRAL/41K A79297503 16.50
T5/Twister 65 Mogul E39 Spiral 97⁄8 10000 4300 Warm White 2700K 31⁄2 65W/T5/SPIRAL/27K/MOG A79297511 16.50
T5/Twister 65 Mogul E39 Spiral 97⁄8 10000 4300 Cool White 4100K 31⁄2 65W/T5/SPIRAL/41K/MOG A79297529 16.50 T5/Twister

Basics of...High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps

Mercury Vapor, Metal Halide and High Pressure Sodium comprise the family of High Intensity Discharge lamps (HID). In HID lamps, light is produced by passing an
electric current through a gas or vapor at high pressure. The current produces a high intensity arc or discharge of light that is very efficient and has a longer life than a
standard incandescent lamp.
Common Characteristics of HID Lamps
• All HID lamps have a warm-up period that lasts from 3-10 minutes (depending on the type and wattage) before it produces full light output
• It is important that an HID lamp have the correct ballast to operate properly (compare ANSI code on ballast and lamp package)
• HID lamps have a restrike time (the time it takes for a lamp to re-light after a power interruption) which ranges from 1-15 minutes depending on type and wattage
• Applications include: landscape lighting, dusk to dawn fixtures, roadways, parking lots, floodlights & security, shopping malls, retail/commercial buildings, sports
lighting and airports
Types of HID Lamps
Mercury Vapor
• Lower initial cost, but higher operating costs
compared to HPS (High Pressure Sodium) or Metal
Halide lamps due to lower efficiency
• Bluish green appearance
• Higher color rendering
• Gets dim over time and rarely burns out (wise to
replace them to restore light levels)
High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
• Most efficient HID lamps available
• If color rendering is not critical and energy saving is
important, HPS is an excellent choice
• Attracts less insects than other light sources
Metal Halide
• Crisp white light
• High efficiency
• Good color rendering

Page
3406
Page 146

3406 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
ELECTRONIC BALLASTS TECHNICAL INFO & CAN CHART

Basics of...Electronic Ballasts

Purpose of Electronic Ballasts

Ballasts start lamps and provide the proper voltage to establish an arc between the lamp’s two electrodes. There are two types of starting methods.
Instant Start: the least expensive method, starting lamps without delay Program Rapid Start: allows more starts per lamp, therefore maximizing lamp life
(<0.1 seconds) or flicker • Designed to provide maximum lamp life in frequent lamp starting applications
• Best suited for applications with limited switches (the number of on/off such as areas where occupancy sensor controls are used
cycles ) each day • Start lamps quickly (1.0 – 1.5 seconds) without flicker
• Ballasts provide a starting voltage sufficiently high enough to start a • Lamps operated by programmed start ballasts typically operate 50,000 switch
discharge through the lamps without the need for heating lamp electrodes cycles before failure
• Elimination of electrode heating maximizes energy savings – typically
saving 2 watts per lamp compared to rapid start ballasts
• Lamps operated by instant start ballasts typically operate 10,000 to 15,000 switch cycles before failure

Considerations for Choosing the Right Ballast

Determining Light Output
• Ballasts regulate the electric current flowing through the lamp to stabilize light output • Ballast Factor (BF) is a measurement of light output
• Multiplying the BF times the rated lamp lumens will determine actual light output of a given system operated on commercial ballasts.
Rated lamp lumens x Ballast Factor (BF) = Light
Ballast Factors Low: .71 to .78 BF Normal: ¾.88 BF High: 1.15 – 1.25 BF
• A lower than normal BF can save energy but reduces lamplight output to below normal Feature Comparison
• A higher than normal BF is used when maximum light from the lamp being used is desired Feature Standard Elect Centium Optanium
Determining Lamp Energy Usage Voltage 120 or 277 120/277 Intellivolt 120/277 Intellivolt
• The amount of energy the lamp is going to use changes depending on Efficiency Better Good Best
the type of ballast being used Safety Type CC Rating No No Yes
Cold Start 0° 0° -20°
• System wattage is determined by lamp and ballast combo Anti-Striation* No No Yes
Page
Page 147
*Striation is the spiraling or swirling of fluorescent lamps at initial turn on 3412

Ballast Can Dimensional Chart

Code Letter L (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.) Code Letter L (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.) Code Letter L (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.)
A 9.500 2.375 1.500 G 19.188 3.188 2.688 M 6.500 2.375 1.500
B 9.500 3.109 1.781 H 2.375 1.375 1.375 N 9.500 2.375 1.500
C 11.750 3.109 1.781 I 3.063 1.375 1.813 O 17.000 2.375 1.500
D 11.750 3.188 2.625 J 3.063 1.594 1.813 P 14.313 3.188 2.625
E 11.750 3.188 2.625 K 3.063 1.438 1.813 Q 9.500 1.700 1.180
F 14.313 3.188 2.625 L 6.500 1.938 1.375 R 11.750 2.875 1.781

High Frequency Electronic Ballasts

Optanium®: Centium®:
• For T5 and T8 lighting systems • High efficiency, highest lumens per watt • For T5 and T8 lighting systems
• Applications: Broad range of commercial, industrial and institutional lighting systems • Energy efficient, extended life and small can size options
• Available in Instant Start option for long burn hours or Programmed Start option for for enhanced flexibility and versatility
frequent switching, occupancy sensors and/or frequent on/off areas • Applications: Ideal for general lighting, conference,
• Anti-striation circuitry reduces lamp striation typically seen in energy saving lamps meeting and board room applications, indirect and
(striation = spiraling or swirling of fluorescent lamps at initial turn on) decorative lighting and new fixture designs requiring smaller ballasts
• IntelliVolt® multiple voltage technology enabling operation from 120 to 277 volts and • Available in Instant Start, Programmed Start and Rapid Start
therefore enhancing accuracy or ordering and reducing inventory requirements • IntelliVolt® multiple voltage technology enabling operation from 120 to 277 volts and
• Multi Lamp Options enable one ballast to operate 1 or 2 lamps/2 or 3 lamps/3 or 4 lamps therefore enhancing accuracy or ordering and reducing inventory requirements
(depending on which ballast you choose) and therefore reduce inventory requirements • Multi Lamp Options enable one ballast to operate 1 or 2 lamps/2 or 3 lamps/3 or 4 lamps
AmbiStar™: (depending on which ballast you choose) and therefore reduce inventory requirements
• For T12 Linear Fluorescent Rapid Start and Instant Start lighting systems Standard Electronic:
• Compact and lightweight, provide quick starting and save users significant energy cost • For T8 and T12 Fluorescent Rapid Start and Instant Start lighting systems
relative to alternative lighting sources (i.e., incandescent and fluorescent magnetic) • Up to 40% energy savings relative to standard magnetic ballasts
• Applications: Designed for popular fluorescent applications in homes and other • Applications: Broad range of commercial retrofit and new construction applications.
noncommercial environments, bringing all of the energy-efficient benefits of fluorescent Ideal for general office use, as well as conference, meeting and board rooms
lighting to residential and hospitality applications • Operates up to 75% quieter than conventional magnetic ballasts
• Class B FCC EMI Rating meets Energy Star and consumer EMI requirements • Fits the exact footprint of the magnetic ballasts they replace
No. of Ballast Lamp Starting Ballast Ballast Can Size
Lamps Lamp Type Voltage Method Family Name Watts Factor Code (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1 or 2 F17T8,F25T8,F32T8(25,28,30 and 32 Wattages),F40T8 120/277 Instant Start Optanium 17, 25, 28, 30, 32, 40 0.87 — IOPA2P32SC35I AB83259481 $39.49
1 or 2 F17T8,F25T8,F32T8(25,28,30 and 32 Wattages),F40T8 120/277 Instant Start Optanium 17, 25, 28, 30, 32, 40 1.18 — IOPA2P32HLSC35I AB74320870 54.85
1 or 2 F17T8,F25T8,F32T8(25,28,30 and 32 Wattages),F40T8 120/277 Instant Start Optanium 17, 25, 28, 30, 32, 40 0.90 — IOPA2P32LWSC35I AB74320888 40.50
1 or 2 F72T8, F96T8 120/277 Instant Start Optanium 46, 51, 57, 59 0.87 — IOP2P59SC35I AB64357510 59.99
1 or 2 F72T12 or F96T12 120/277 Instant Start Centium 57, 60, 75 0.90 — ICN2P60SC35I B59671263 66.86
1 or 2 CFQ/CFTR13W 120/277 Programmed Start Centium 13 1.00 — ICF2S13H1LDK 1
B73054835 42.15
1 or 2 CFQ/CFTR18W 120/277 Programmed Start Centium 18 1.00 — ICF2S18H1LDK 1
B05794433 42.15
1 or 2 CFQ/CFT26W/CFTR32W/42W/57W/70W 120/277 Programmed Start Centium 70 — — ICF2S42M2LDK 1
B04675567 79.74
1 or 2 F24T5/HO 120/277 Programmed Start Centium 24 1.02 — ICN2S2435I 2
B64314917 55.92
1 or 2 F14/F21/F28/F35T5 120/277 Programmed Start Centium 35 1.03 — ICN2S2835I 2
B88140280 57.04
1 or 2 F39T5/HO 120/277 Programmed Start Centium 39 1.12 — ICN2S3935I 2
B64314925 55.00
1
Can dimensions: 4.80wL x 2.40wW x 0.98wH 2Can dimensions: 16.70wL x 1.70wW x 1.20wH 3Lt. Output: Low
Continued on next page

3412 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS = Eco Friendly Item
 PLUGS & RECEPTACLES TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...NEMA Configurations

Page
Page 148 3447

Electrical Industry Associations

ANCE – National Association of Normalization and Certification of the Electrical Sector IFMA – International Facilities Management Association
BSI – British Standards Institute NAED – National Association of Electrical Distributors
CEMRA – Canadian Electrical Manufacturers Representatives Association NECA – National Electrical Contractors Association
CSA – Canadian Standards Association NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association
ECOC – Electrical Contractors of Canada NEMRA – National Electrical Manufacturers Representatives Association
EIA/TIA – Electronics Industry Association/Telecommunications Industry Association NMDA – National Marine Distributor Association
FCC – Federal Communications Commission OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration
IAEI – International Association of Electrical Inspectors TUV – TUV Rheinland of N. A., Inc.
IECA – Independent Electrical Contractors Association UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3447

 WALL SWITCH PLATES & ELECTRICAL BOXES
Plastic Wall Plates
• Made of a virtually unbreakable
tough nylon thermoplastic
• Larger than standard wall plates
and fit all standard openings

A B C D E F

G H I J K L M N O P
No. of Wall Plate No. of Wall Plate No. of Wall Plate
Key Gangs Service Color Order # Price Ea. Key Gangs Service Color Order # Price Ea. Key Gangs Service Color Order # Price Ea.
A 1 Duplex Brown 01189307 $0.48 C 1 Blank Gray 01189562 $0.48 E 2 Switch Duplex Light Almond 01189794 $0.95
A 1 Duplex Gray 01189315 0.48 C 1 Blank Ivory 01189570 0.48 E 2 Switch Duplex White 01189802 0.95
A 1 Duplex Ivory 01189323 0.48 C 1 Blank Light Almond 01189588 0.48 F 2 Switch Decor Ivory 01189810 1.73
A 1 Duplex Light Almond 01189331 0.48 C 1 Blank White 01189596 0.48 F 2 Switch Decor White 01189828 1.73
A 1 Duplex White 01189349 0.48 C 2 Blank Brown 01189604 0.95 G 1 End Blank White 01189836 2.33
A 2 Duplex Brown 01189356 0.95 C 2 Blank Gray 01189612 0.95 G 1 End Blank Ivory 01189935 2.33
A 2 Duplex Ivory 01189364 0.95 C 2 Blank Ivory 01189620 0.95 H 1 End Toggle White 01189844 2.33
A 2 Duplex Light Almond 01189372 0.95 C 2 Blank White 01189638 0.95 H 1 End Toggle Ivory 01189943 2.33
A 2 Duplex White 01189380 0.95 D 1 Toggle Switch Brown 01189646 0.48 I 1 End Duplex White 01189851 2.33
B 1 Deco Brown 01189398 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch Gray 01189653 0.48 I 1 End Duplex Ivory 01189950 2.33
B 1 Deco Gray 01189406 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch Ivory 01189661 0.48 J 1 End Single White 01189869 2.33
B 1 Deco Ivory 01189414 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch Light Almond 01189679 0.48 J 1 End Single Ivory 01189968 2.33
B 1 Deco Light Almond 01189422 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch White 01189687 0.48 K 1 End Deco White 01189877 2.33
B 1 Deco White 01189430 0.48 D 2 Toggle Switch Brown 01189695 0.95 K 1 End Deco Ivory 01189976 2.33
B 2 Deco Brown 01189448 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch Gray 01189703 0.95 L 1 Center Blank White 01189885 2.33
B 2 Deco Gray 01189455 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch Ivory 01189711 0.95 L 1 Center Blank Ivory 01189984 2.33
B 2 Deco Ivory 01189463 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch Light Almond 01189729 0.95 M 1 Center Toggle White 01189893 2.33
B 2 Deco Light Almond 01189471 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch White 01189737 0.95 M 1 Center Toggle Ivory 01189992 2.33
B 2 Deco White 01189489 0.95 D 3 Toggle Switch Brown 01189745 1.41 N 1 Center Duplex White 01189901 2.33
B 3 Deco Ivory 01189497 1.41 D 3 Toggle Switch Ivory 01189752 1.41 N 1 Center Duplex Ivory 01190008 2.33
B 3 Deco Light Almond 01189505 1.41 D 3 Toggle Switch Light Almond 01189760 1.41 O 1 Center Single White 01189919 2.33
B 3 Deco White 01189513 1.41 D 3 Toggle Switch White 01189778 1.41 O 1 Center Single Ivory 01190016 2.33
B 4 Deco Ivory 01189521 2.36 D 4 Toggle Brown 01189273 4.80 P 1 Center Deco White 01189927 2.33
B 4 Deco Light Almond 01189539 2.36 D 4 Toggle Ivory 01189281 4.80 P 1 Center Deco Ivory 01190024 2.33
B 4 Deco White 01189547 2.36 D 4 Toggle White 01189299 4.80
C 1 Blank Brown 01189554 0.48 E 2 Switch Duplex Ivory 01189786 0.95

Basics of...Steel Box Bracket Designations

C Bracket S Bracket VS Bracket
Ceiling box bracket Side mount bracket with set up Plain flat mounted bracket for
for wood studs. hook and guide tabs for use on wood or metal studs.
automatic positioning. No set back.
Standard bracket set back is
C Bracket 5⁄8w. For wood and metal studs. VM Bracket
F Bracket S Bracket Flat side bracket with guide
Mounts on face of stud. tabs for metal studs. Standard
VS & VM
See catalog number for set Brackets
bracket set back is 1⁄8w. For
back. For wood studs. wood or metal studs.

F Bracket VMS Bracket

D Bracket Side bracket to use with wood or VP Bracket
Side mount bracket with set up metal studs. Provides set up tabs Side bracket with set up hooks
hook for wood or metal studs. to position on face of stud. for wood studs.
Standard bracket set back is 5⁄8w.
VMS
Bracket VP Bracket
Page
D Bracket Page 149 3459

Non-Metallic Boxes
For Electrical Switches & Receptacles
• Available in two basic types: phenolic or hard box, and thermoplastic or soft style box • Knockouts are easily removed • UL firewall R9140
No. of Dimensions (In.) Volume Cap. • Phenolic boxes are rated for 150°C and feature a plaster seal that
Key Type Shape Gangs W Ht. D. (Cu. In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. prevents debris from entering receptacle holes
Phenolic • Thermoplastic boxes feature molded threads that assure high torque
C Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 2 ⁄4 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄8
1 11 1 18.0 2000 71461800 $0.52 and prevent the screw hold from stripping
E Bracket Box Rectangle 1 23⁄16 31⁄4 211⁄16 12.5 7010-8 71461875 2.28 • Thermoplastic boxes are heat rated at 80°C and are permissible for
use with 90°C insulated conductors
Thermoplastic
A Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 23⁄32 31⁄2 27⁄8 14.0 E-14-4 71461719 2.82
B Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 25⁄16 321⁄32 215⁄16 18.0 MB18 71461735 1.89
C Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 25⁄16 321⁄32 3 18.0 RN-18 71461685 0.61
C Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 2 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 3 ⁄8
5 21 3 20.5 RN-21 71461693 0.60
D Nail On Bracket Box Round 1 4 4 2 ⁄2
1 22.5 N-423-C-V 71461743 1.78 A B C D E

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3459

 WIREWAYS & NEMA ENCLOSURE TECHNICAL INFORMATION
NEMA Type 1 Wireways
Protect electrical wiring but keep access easy. Combination hinge/screw cover makes laying-in wire quick. Available with or without
knockouts. ANSI 61 powder coat finish. A full complement of NEMA Type 1 wireway fittings is offered to complete the job.
Interchange With Knockouts Interchange Without Knockouts
Ht. W Depth Guide Approx. B-Line Hubbell Wiegmann Guide B-Line Hubbell Wiegmann
(In.) (In.) (In.) Hoffman Wt. (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Hoffman Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
4 4 12 F44G12WK 3.50 4412G 60614443 $15.77 HS441 54077649 $18.97 F44G12 4412FNK 64073588 $15.77 HS441NK 54077508 $18.97
4 4 24 F44G24WK 7.00 4424G 60614468 24.97 HS442 54077656 30.02 F44G24 4424FNK 64073604 24.97 HS442NK 54077516 30.02
4 4 36 F44G36WK 10.25 4436G 60614476 38.13 HS443 54077664 45.84 F44G36 4436FNK 64073612 36.85 HS443NK 54077524 44.31
4 4 48 F44G48WK 14.50 4448G 60614484 49.42 HS444 54077672 59.42 F44G48 4448FNK 64073638 50.94 HS444NK 54077532 61.26
4 4 60 F44G60WK 18.25 4460G 60614492 54.04 HS445 54077680 64.97 F44G60 4460FNK 64073646 54.04 HS445NK 54077540 64.97
1
4 4 120 F44G120WK 34.50 44120G 60614450 110.23 HS4410 54077698 132.54 F44G120 44120FNK 64073596 110.23 HS4410NK 54077557 132.54
6 6 12 F66G12WK 5.50 6612G 60614500 31.57 HS661 54077706 37.96 F66G12 6612FNK 64073711 31.57 HS661NK 54077565 37.96
6 6 24 F66G24WK 11.00 6624G 60614526 40.32 HS662 54077714 48.49 F66G24 6624FNK 64073737 40.32 HS662NK 54077573 48.49
6 6 36 F66G36WK 15.50 6636G 60614534 54.37 HS663 54077722 65.38 F66G36 6636FNK 64073745 54.37 HS663NK 54077581 65.38
6 6 48 F66G48WK 21.00 6648G 60614542 74.13 HS664 54077730 89.13 F66G48 6648FNK 64073752 74.13 HS664NK 54077599 89.13
6 6 60 F66G60WK 25.50 6660G 60614559 80.99 HS665 54077748 97.38 F66G60 6660FNK 64073760 80.99 HS665NK 54077607 97.38
1
6 6 120 F66G120WK 50.00 66120G 60614518 188.93 HS6610 54077755 227.17 F66G120 66120FNK 64073729 188.93 HS6610NK 54077615 227.17 • 16 Gauge box
¹Truck Shipment Freight Class 70
Fittings All items are shipped UPS unless otherwise noted.
FID Wireway Interchange Guide B-Line Hubbell Wiegmann FID Wireway Interchange Guide B-Line Hubbell Wiegmann
Desc. Size (In.) Hoffman Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Desc. Size (In.) Hoffman Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Hanger 4x4 F44GDB 44FH 64073554 $12.79 BH0404 54077433 $15.37 Hanger 6x6 F66GDB 66FH 64073687 $20.00 BH0606 54077441 $24.05
Connector 4x4 F44GUC 44C 64073539 5.15 C0404 54077391 6.20 Connector 6x6 F66GUC 66C 64073661 7.56 C0606 54077409 9.08
End Cap 4x4 F44GCP 44E 64073547 5.10 EO404 54077359 6.14 End Cap 6x6 F66GCP 66E 64073679 7.47 E0606 54077367 9.00
45° Elbow 4x4 F44G45E 4445LCOMBO 64073620 41.17 L040445 54077474 49.51 45° Elbow 6x6 F66G90E 6645LCOMBO 64073885 47.73 L060645 54077482 57.39
90° Elbow 7x4 F44G90E 44 L COMBO 64073653 41.55 L040490 54077458 49.96 90° Elbow 14 x 6 F66G90E 66 L COMBO 64073778 47.73 L060690 54077466 57.39
Panel Adapter 4x4 F44GPA 44GF 64073562 15.61 PA0404 54077417 18.77 Panel Adapter 6x6 F66GPA 66GF 64073695 21.92 PA0606 54077425 26.36
Tee 10 x 4 F44G90TX 44T 64073570 42.12 T0404 54077375 48.53 Tee 14 x 6 F66G90TX 66T 64073703 51.27 T0606 54077383 62.26

Basics of...NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers

Association) Enclosure Types
In Non-Hazardous Locations, the specific enclosure types, their applications, and the environmental conditions they are designed to protect against, when completely
and properly installed, are as follows:

Type 1: Enclosures constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts and to provide a degree of
protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt).
Type 3: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with
respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow); and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the
enclosure.
Type 3R: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow); and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 4: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with
respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water); and that will be undamaged by
the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 4X: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water); that provides an additional level of protection against
corrosion; and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 6P: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (hose directed water and the entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth); that provides an
additional level of protection against corrosion and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 12: Enclosures constructed (without knockouts) for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a
degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings); and to
provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (dripping and light splashing).
Type 13: Enclosures constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of protection of
the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings); to provide a degree of protection
with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (dripping and light splashing); and to provide a degree of protection against the spraying,
splashing, and seepage of oil and non-corrosive coolants.

Note: Additional enclosure types available: 2, 3S, 3X, 3RX, 3SX, 5, 6, 12K. To order call Sales or visit mscdirect.com.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3477

Page 150
NEC TECHNICAL INFORMATION, CONDUIT BOXES & WIREWAYS

Basics of...National Electrical Code (NEC) Ratings

Hazardous Classifications
CLASS I CLASS II
Areas made hazardous by the presence of combustible dust.
Areas in which flammable gases or vapors may be present in the air in sufficient
quantities to be explosive. Group E: Atmospheres containing combustible:
1 – metal dusts, regardless of resistivity
Group A: Atmospheres containing acetylene 2 – dusts with similarly hazardous characteristics having a resistivity of less than
Group B: Atmospheres such as butadiene, ethylene oxide, acrolein or hydrogen (or 100 k1-cm
gases or vapors equivalent in hazard to hydrogen, such as manufactured gas) 3 – electrically conductive dusts
Group C: Atmospheres such as cyclopropane, ethyl ether, ethylene or gases or
vapors of equivalent hazard Group F: Atmospheres containing combustible:
Group D: Atmospheres such as acetone, alcohol, ammonia, benzene, benzol, 1 – carbon black, charcoal or coke dusts having more than 8% total volatile material
butane, gasoline, hexane, lacquer solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas, propane or 2 – dusts so sensitized that they present an explosion hazard, and8 having a
gases or vapors of equivalent hazard resistivity greater than 100 1-cm but less than or equal to 1 x 10 1-cm
Group G: Atmospheres containing combustible:
1 – dust having resistivity equal to or greater than 100 k1-cm
2 – electrically non-conductive dusts Page
Page 151 3502

Hazardous Location Conduit Outlet Boxes Outlet Boxes for Rigid Conduit & IMC
For Rigid
Conduit & IMC
OEC
Compact design allows use in OET OELB
areas with limited space. Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang
Provides future access for A B C
maintenance and wiring changes. • Tapered threaded hubs • Ground screw provided • Type FS - shallow / Type FD - deep
Accommodates wiring devices and provides opening to splice, tap or pull conductors.
Gray Iron/Zinc Plated/Aluminum Enamel OELL OELR Trade Image Interchange Guide • Constructed of cast iron
Body Hub Interchange Guide Size (In.) Ref. Crouse-Hinds Order # Price Ea.
Type Size (In.) Crouse-Hinds Appleton Order # Price Ea.
• Precision ground flange 1⁄2 A FSCC1 54119599 $30.40
OEC 1⁄2 OEC1 ERC50 54117783 $58.09 • Blind drilled and tapped 3⁄4 A FSCC2 54119607 40.32
OEC 3⁄4 OEC2 ERC75 54117833 66.08 screw holes 1⁄2 A FDCC1 54119334 37.05
OET 1⁄2 OET1 ERT50 54117825 56.71 • Smooth integral hubs 3⁄4 A FDCC2 54119342 42.28
OET 3⁄4 OET2 ERT75 54117874 69.45 • UL Listed for: 1⁄2
Class I, Groups C, D B FSS1 54119680 24.88
OELB 1⁄2 OELB1 ERLB50 54117791 56.71 Class II, Groups E, F, G 3⁄4 B FSS2 54119698 27.38 Single-Gang
OELB 3⁄4 OELB2 ERLB75 54117841 66.06 • CSA Certified 1⁄2 C FSCT1 54119623 31.54 D
OELL 1⁄2 OELL1 ERLL50 54117809 59.23 3⁄4 C FSCT2 54119631 39.47
OELL 3⁄4 OELL2 ERLL75 54117858 71.13
1 C FSCT3 54119615 45.21
OELR 1⁄2 OELR1 ERLR50 54117817 59.23 1⁄2 C FDCT1 54119367 35.27
OELR 3⁄4 OELR2 ERLR75 54117866 71.13 3⁄4 C FDCT2 54119375 42.42
1 C FDCT3 54119359 47.05
1⁄2 D FSX1 54119706 36.46
3⁄4 D FSX2 54119714 44.67 Two-Gang
1⁄2 D FDX1 54119425 41.09 E
3⁄4 D FDX2 54119433 48.18
1⁄2 E FS12 54119482 31.27
3⁄4 E FS22 54119490 29.73
Outlet Boxes for Rigid Conduit & IMC 1 E FS32 54119474 33.76
1⁄2 E FD12 54119235 36.43
3⁄4 E FD22 54119243 36.16 Two-Gang
1 E FD32 54119227 37.39 F
1⁄2 F FSC12 54119573 33.12
3⁄4 F FSC222 54119581 34.62
1 F FSC32 54119565 38.27
1⁄2 C FDC12 54119318 37.04
Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang
3⁄4 C FDC222 54119326 38.27
Type FS & FD Type FSC & FDC Type FSL & FDL Type FSR & FDR Type FSA & FDA G
1 C FDC32 54119300 46.94
Accommodates wiring devices and provides opening to splice, tap or pull conductors. 3⁄4 G FS27 54119508 50.45 Tandem
• Tapered threaded hubs (NPT) • Type FD - deep
• Type FS - shallow • Ground Screw provided
Cast Iron Outlet Boxes
Trade Interchange Guide
Size (In.) Crouse-Hinds Order # Price Ea.
Trade
Size (In.)
Interchange Guide
Crouse-Hinds Order # Price Ea.
PVC Lay-In Wireways
1⁄2 FS1 54119458 $14.86 1⁄2 FSL1 54119649 $24.29
3⁄4 FS2 54119466 16.95 3⁄4 FSL2 54119656 26.57 These nonconductive, noncorrosive and all-PVC
1 FS3 54119441 19.39 1⁄2 FDL1 54119383 37.53 construction wireway and cover are easy to install.
1⁄2 FD1 54119201 17.37 3⁄4 FDL2 54119391 40.49 • UV stabilized • Lightweight
3⁄4 FD2 54119219 18.89 1⁄2 FSR1 54119664 24.29 • Easy field fabrication • Sold in 10v lengths
1 FD3 54119193 22.93 3⁄4 FSR2 54119672 33.10 • “Clip-on” cover design for easy access
1⁄2 FSC1 54119540 17.81 1⁄2 FDR1 54119409 31.55 Nominal Dimensions Actual Dimensions Wt. per Price per
3⁄4 FSC2 54119557 19.43 3⁄4 FDR2 54119417 34.89 Width (In.) Depth (In.) Width (In.) Depth (In.) 10v (Lbs.) Order # 10v
1 FSC3 54119532 25.56 1⁄2 FSA1 54119516 21.92 2 2 1.97 1.97 5 54091079 $129.71
1⁄2 FDC1 54119284 21.09 3⁄4 FSA2 54119524 25.18 3 3 2.96 2.96 8 54091087 136.43
3⁄4 FDC2 54119292 21.21 1⁄2 FDA1 54119250 28.37 4 4 3.94 3.94 11 54091095 165.29
1 FDC3 54119276 28.66 3⁄4 FDA2 54119268 30.68 6 6 5.91 5.91 21 54091525 247.37

3502 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 SURGE SUPPRESSION TECH INFO/OUTLET UNITS/PLUGMOLDS

Basics of...Surge Suppression

Terminology Types of Temporary Surges
Suppressed Voltage – The amount of voltage allowed to pass through a surge Category A
suppression device to the equipment connected to the device. Long Branch Circuits: more than 10 meters (30 feet) from a Category B location.
Suppressed Voltage Rating – Determined by UL when specific current and voltage Category B
is applied to a surge suppression device. For permanent devices UL tests at Major Feeders and Short Branch Circuits: distribution panels, industrial bus and
3000A, 6000V while portable devices are tested at 500A, 600V. feeder systems, heavy appliance circuits, and switches less than 10 meters from a
Category B location.
Joule Rating – The short duration peak energy rating of a surge suppression
device. The higher the joule rating the longer the expected life of the device. Category C
Outside and Service Entrance: the main service panel and any overhead lines to
Peak Current – The short duration peak current rating of a surge suppression
separate structures. Page
device.
Page 152
Source: IEEE 587 3505

Industrial Plug-In Outlet Center Units Rack Mount Plug-In Outlet

Center Units
19w rack mountable power strips in steel housing fit and provide
# of Outlets Cord L (Ft.) Switch/Pilot Light Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. power supply to all standard 19w cabinets, carts and racks.
8 6 Yes UL401BC 00220483 $70.11 • Sturdy aluminum Numerous configurations provide convenient power supply to
8 15 Yes UL401BD 00220491 75.87 construction electronic equipment. For use with telecommunications and
16 6 Yes UL402BC 00220509 84.62 housing color gray test equipment.
16 15 Yes UL402BD 00220517 90.42 • Can be mounted • Matte black anodized finish
8 6 No UL403BC 00220525 63.23 vertically or horizontally # Outlets Configuration Cord L (Ft.) Switch/Pilot Light Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
8 15 No UL403BD 00220533 69.01 15 Amp, 120 Volts,14/3 SJT Cord
16 6 No UL404BC 00220541 84.62 6 6 Front 6 Yes J60BOB 00220608 $64.03
16 15 No UL404BD 00220558 90.42 6 6 Front 15 Yes J60B2B 00220616 70.55
12 6 Yes UL2064BC 00220566 72.24 6 6 Back 6 Yes JO6BOB 00220624 64.03
12 15 Yes UL2064BD 00220574 77.99 6 6 Back 15 Yes JO6B2B 00220632 70.55
24 6 Yes UL2065BC 00220582 101.85 6 2 Front - 4 Rear 6 Yes J24BOB 00220640 64.03
24 15 Yes UL2065BD 00220590 107.63 6 2 Front - 4 Rear 15 Yes J24B2B 00220657 70.55
20 Amp, 120 Volts, 12/3 SJT Cord
6 6 Back 6 Yes J06B0B20 08185522 67.91
6 6 Back 15 Yes J06B2B20 08185530 74.97
6 6 Front 6 Yes J60B0B20 08185548 67.91
6 6 Front 15 Yes J60B2B20 08185555 74.97
Floor-to-Ceiling Service Poles
Distribute power/telecommunications wiring from ceiling to workstations below.
• Available with two duplex receptacles, isolated Metallic Plugmolds & Accessories
ground and surge suppression receptacles Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Material: Aluminum
Adj T Bar ATB 03770476 $64.40 Metallic Plugmolds
• Provided with Hubbell Style Line® devices
• Both power and telecom devices mount to same L No. of No. of V20GB306 - V20GB606
side of pole (Ft.) Circuits Outlets Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
NEMA 3 1 6 V20GB306 09847153 $39.86 • Hardwired for permanent installation
Type Config. Amperage Voltage Poles Wires Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 5 1 10 V20GB506 09847161 60.07
10 Ft. Gray 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP10A 03770351 $183.21 5 1 5 V20GB512 09847179 43.32 Specifications
10 Ft. Ivory 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP10AI 03770369 183.21 5 1 5 V20IG512 09847187 53.30 • Width: 1.28w • Depth: 0.75w
• Color: Ivory • Material: Steel
12 Ft. Gray 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP12A 03770377 233.87 6 1 12 V20GB606 09847195 68.48
• 120V-15A
12 Ft. Ivory 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP12AI 03770385 223.69 6 1 6 V20GB612 09847203 51.48
15 Ft. Gray 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP15A 03770393 346.52 6 2 8 V20GBA609 09847211 68.29
15 Ft. Ivory 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP15AI 03770401 346.52 6 2 6 V20GBA612 09847229 64.89
Isolated Ground Accessories
10 Ft. Gray 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP10IGA 03770419 235.60 Type L D (In.) W (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 Ft. Ivy 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP10IGAI 03770427 246.72
Raceway Base/Cover 5.00v 0.75 1.28 V2000BC 09847245 $13.26
Two Isolated Grounds Entrance End Fitting 2.60w 1.88 2.13 V2010A3 09847237 14.73
10 Ft. Gray Surge 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP10SA 03770435 439.26 Cover Clip 0.75w 0.75 1.28 V2006 09847252 1.13
10 Ft. Ivy Surge 5-20R 20 125 2 3 PP10SAI 03770443 439.26 Blank End Fitting 0.75w 0.75 0.75 V2010B 09847260 0.83
Blank Pole, No Divider or Data Knockouts Flat Elbow 2.50w 1.28 2.50 V2011 09847278 5.13
10 Ft. 1 Service PPOA 03770450 158.77 Tee 6.00w 0.75 1.28 V2015 09847286 13.47
Blank Pole w/ Divider, Four Knockouts Internal Corner 1.50w 0.75 1.50 2017TC 09847294 1.91
10 Ft. 3 Service PPOAI 03770468 152.07 External Corner 1.80w 0.75 1.87 V2018C 09847302 4.07

Nonmetallic Plugmold & Accessories

Nonmetallic Plugmold provides multiple outlet convenience for electrically busy areas.
• 120 V - 15 A • Hardwired for permanent installation • 4, 5 or 6v lengths available

Nonmetallic Plugmold Accessories

L No. of No. of Type L D (In.) W (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
(Ft.) Ciruits Outlets Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Raceway Base/Cover 5.0 FT 1.00 1.75 NM2000BC 09847070 $11.94
4 1 4 NM20GB412 09846999 $42.57 Cover Clip 1.5 IN 1.00 1.50 NM2006 09847088 1.08 • Width: 1.75w
5 1 5 NM20GB512 09847005 49.42 Entrance End Fitting 3.8 IN 1.00 1.75 NM2010A 09847096 6.70 • Depth: 1.00w
5 1 4 NM20GB515 09847013 49.17 Blank End Fitting 1.9 IN 1.00 1.93 NM2010B 09847104 1.37 • Color: Ivory
• Material: Plastic
5 2 5 NM20GBA512 09847021 59.44 Flat Elbow 2.7 IN 1.00 3.18 NM2011 09847112 2.98
6 1 4 NM20GB618 09847047 46.90 Tee 3.7 IN 1.00 4.50 NM2015 09847120 3.43
6 2 6 NM20GBA612 09847054 66.86 Internal Elbow 1.6 IN 1.00 2.00 NM2017 09847138 2.98
6 2 4 NM20GBA618 09847062 60.35 External Elbow 2.4 IN 1.00 1.37 NM2018 09847146 2.98

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3505

CORD & CABLE TECHNICAL INFORMATION, FESTOONS & CABLE

Basics of...Cord & Cable

AWG - American Wire Gauge: Is a system used for the designation of wire diameter; the Cord Type Jacket Voltage Rating Duty
higher the number, the thinner the wire. AWG also stands for the number of electrical SVO Neoprene 300 Light
conductors in a multi-conductor cable or cord. For example, 14/2 represents a cord with SVT Thermoplastic 300 Light
two 14-gauge conductors. SPT Thermoplastic 300 Light
SJOOW-A Neoprene 300 Medium
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act. Specifically the Williams-Steiger Law SJEO Thermoplastic Elastomer 300 Medium
passed in 1970 covering all factors relating to safety in places of employment. SJEOOW Elastomer 300 Medium
PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride. Compound used in thermoplastic (SJTW-A, STW-A) cords. SJEOW-A Thermoplastic Elastomer 300 Medium
SJT Thermoplastic 300 Medium
SPT-1 - Thermoplastic constructed, parallel jacketed. 300 Volt, 2 or 3 conductor, 18 gauge. SJTO Thermoplastic 300 Medium
SPT-2 - Same as SPT-1 but heavier construction. 18-16 gauge. SJTW-A Thermoplastic 300 Medium
SJO Neoprene 300 Medium
SPT-3 - Same as SPT-2 but heavier construction. 18-10 gauge. SJOW-A Neoprene 300 Medium
SRDT - Range and dryer cord, 3 conductor parallel or 4 conductors insulated SO Neoprene 600 Heavy
thermoplastic construction. SOW-A Neoprene 600 Heavy
SOOW-A Neoprene 600 Heavy
Cord Types SEOOW Elastomer 600 Heavy
SEOW-A Thermoplastic Elastomer 600 Heavy
T-Prene = Thermoplastic elastomer compound used in Polar/Solar cords (SEOW-A, SJEOW-A) ST Thermoplastic 600 Heavy
S = Standard; rated at 600 VAC. W-A = UL, CSA certified for T = Thermoplastic. STO Thermoplastic 600 Heavy
J = Junior; rated at 300 VAC. outdoor use. O = Oil resistant outer jacket. STW-A Thermoplastic 600 Heavy
E = Elastomer. V = Lightweight, round ribbed OO = Oil resistant insulation
P = Parallel construction. vacuum cleaner cord. and outer jacket. Page
Page 153 3520

Wire Rope Festoons for Flat or Round Cable

Wire rope festoon systems are designed for limited travel distance and speed applications and are used with lighter weight cables than steel track systems. These wire rope systems feature easily
installed fiberglass reinforced nylon trolleys and zinc plated steel cable or hose saddles. Each kit includes 2 tension brackets, 1 tow arm, 1 tow trolley, 1 end clamp, and intermediate trolleys per kit
chosen. In addition, kits include sufficient 1⁄4w wire rope for system length and all hardware required for hanging and tensioning. Provision must be made to support system at each end. Recommended
loop depth is 36w.
Kits (do not include electrical cable or connectors.)
Length Working Storage Min. Cable Wt.
Mfr’s # (Ft.) Travel Space (In.) Required (Ft.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Flat Electrical Cable
WRF-08-03 23 20v 25 24 21 09085390 $362.80
WRF-08-04 27 24v 28 29 22 09085408 395.02
WRF-08-05 33 29v 32 35 23 09085416 430.34
WRF-08-06 38 34v 35 41 24 09085424 464.31
WRF-08-07 43 39v 39 47 25 09085432 498.26
WRF-08-08 49 44v 42 52 26 09085440 533.58
WRF-08-09 54 49v 45 58 27 09085457 567.55
WRF-08-10 59 54v 51 60 28 09085465 601.55
0.60w - 0.94w OD Round Cable
WRR-05-03 20 17v 25 26 21 09085473 405.02
WRR-05-04 25 22v 28 32 22 09085481 443.49
WRR-05-05 30 26v 32 38 23 09085499 481.90
WRR-05-06 35 31v 35 45 24 09085507 520.34
WRR-05-07 39 35v 39 51 25 09085515 557.48 Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
WRR-05-08 44 39v 42 60 26 09085523 595.93
Int Trolley For Flat Wire Rope Festoon FFT-08 09085630 $25.77
WRR-05-10 56 50v 51 72 28 09085531 678.11
Int Trolley For .60"-.95 Od Wire Rope Festoon FRT-05 09085648 22.35
WRR-05-13 72 65v 66 88 30 09085549 796.12
Int Trolley For .95-1.25 Od Wire Rope Festoon FRT-06 09085655 24.06
0.95w - 1.25w OD Round Cable
End Clamp For Flat Cable Wire Rope Festoon W25-FE-02 09085663 20.60
WRR-06-03 20 17v 25 26 21 09085556 419.29
WRR-06-04 25 22v 28 32 22 09085564 462.49 End Clamp For .60" - .94 Od Wire Rope Festoon W25-RE-12 09085671 20.60
WRR-06-05 30 26v 32 38 23 09085572 505.70 End Clamp For .95" - 1.25 Od Wire Rope Festoon W25-RE-13 09085689 25.77
WRR-06-06 35 31v 35 45 24 09085580 548.88 Tow Clamp For Flat Cable Wire Rope Festoon W25-FT-02 09085697 54.90
WRR-06-07 39 35v 39 51 25 09085598 590.79 Tow Clamp For .60" - .94 Od Wire Rope Festoon W25-RT-12 09085705 25.77
WRR-06-08 44 39v 42 60 26 09085606 634.01 Tow Clamp For .95" - 1.25 Od Wire Rope Festoon W25-RT-13 09085713 29.23
WRR-06-10 56 50v 51 72 28 09085614 725.69 Tension Bracket For Wire Rope Festoon W25-BR-01 09085721 58.34
WRR-06-13 72 65v 66 88 30 09085622 857.97 Tow Arm For Wire Rope Festoon W25-TA-01 09085739 32.65

High Flex Power Cable NM-B Non-Metallic Cable

Wire Gauge Order # Price/Ft. Shielded & Unshielded 600V Power Cable Type NM-B cable with a PVC (polyvinylchloride) jacket
is designed to provide superior abrasion resistance and
Unshielded low temperature properties. It is also flame-retardant and crush-resistant. The insulation of
14 35399302 $2.91 each conductor meets or exceeds the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories’ type
12 35399310 4.12 THHN building wire.
10 35399328 5.74 Designed for continuous flexing applications
8 35399336 9.91 in cable carriers, robotics, machine tools and • For use as an internal building wire, above ground and in dry locations only
4 35399344 21.88 construction equipment, these cables utilize • Solid bare copper ground wire • UL listed • Sold in coiled or boxed lengths only - not cut
2 35399351 29.09 stranded copper conductors to ensure maximum Wire Coil Wire Coil
14 35399369 5.15 flexibility and service life. The outer jacket material is a Ga. Cond. L (Ft.) Order # Price/Coil Ga. Cond. L (Ft.) Order # Price/Coil
specially formulated, gray PVC compound designed for
Shielded maximum abrasion and wear resistance. Suitable for Coiled Boxed
12 35399377 6.85 periodic exposure to oils and fluids. Temperature range is 14 2 250 73126211 $114.24 14 2 50 78085529 $29.53
10 35399385 9.66 23°F to 158°F. Rated for continuous flexing at 7.5 x OD. 14 3 250 73126229 161.90 14 2 100 78085537 54.71
8 35399393 13.41 Shielded version utilizes a high flexural strength copper 14 4 250 73126237 297.44 14 3 50 78085586 37.32
4 35399401 28.85 braid to help eliminate electromagnetic interference 12 2 250 73126245 153.14 12 2 25 78085545 21.93
2 35399419 39.24 (EMI). 4 conductors. UL and CE certified. 12 3 250 73126252 239.45 12 2 50 78085552 31.24
12 4 250 73126260 317.45 12 2 100 78085560 81.35
8 3 125 73126286 441.75 12 3 50 78085594 63.00
10 2 50 78085578 68.30
10 3 50 78085602 94.37

3520 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 CABLE CONNECTOR TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Cable Connectors

Page
Page 154 3529

Manual Switch AC Power Cords (UL-listed)

• Allows one user to access multiple parallel devices or multiple users to share a parallel device Refer to Page No. 3529, Cable Connector Guide, to Reference Cable Ends Found in “Ref. #” Column.
• Rugged manual switches
Desc. L. (Ft.) Connector Ref. # Order # Price Ea.
Refer to Page No. 3529, Cable Connector Guide, to Reference Cable Ends Found in “Ref. #” Column.
Power Converter Cable -PC Plug to AC Rec 2 IEC-320-C14/NEMA 5-15R 46/50 05910625 $7.68
Desc. Connector Ref. # Order # Price Ea. AC Power Extension Cable - PC Style Plugs 6 IEC-320-C14,-C13 46/47 05910633 6.51
Manual VGA/SVGA 2 Position Switch x3 HDDB15(F) 4 05911870 $63.15 AC Plug/PC Stylerec AC Power Cable 6 NEMA 5-15P/IEC-320-C13 49/47 05910641 4.65
AC Plug/PC Stylerec AC Power Cable 12 NEMA 5-15P/IEC-320-C13 49/47 05910658 7.33
Notebook Power Adapter Cable 6 NEMA 1-16P TO IEC-320-C7 48/51 05910666 5.71

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3529

CABLE TIES/TOOLS/ACCESSORIES & FUSES
Cable Tie Mounting Accessories
Mounting Cradle Mounting Pads
• 3⁄4w and 1w mounts for use with 18# through 50# tensile cable ties • Accepts cable ties to 50# tensile (miniature through standard)
• Supplied “two-up” on rubber based (synthetic polymer) closed cell • Use #8 flat head screw to apply • 6/6 natural nylon
foam adhesive • UL flammability 94 V-2 • Oxygen index: 31
• 6/6 Natural nylon • Non-conductive, non-corrosive; resistant to fuels, lubricants
• UL flammability 94 V-2 (clip) and most chemicals
Slot Slot Mount Interchange Guide
Desc. Ht. (In.) L (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.) W (In.) Method Panduit Tyton Mfr’s # Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
Mounting Cradle 0.285 1.25 1.00 0.09 0.30 Adhesive ABMS-S6-D MB4A-SH MCNY-1250-9-D 500 73125387 $110.23
Mounting Base 0.205 0.75 0.75 0.05 0.14 Synth/Poly ABMM-AT-C MB4-A MPNY-750-9-C 100 73125395 14.84
Mounting Base 0.215 1.00 1.00 0.07 0.20 Synth/Poly ABM2S-A-C - MPNY-1000-9-C 100 73125403 19.95

Hook & Loop Cable Ties Heavy-Duty Cable Tie Gun

• Tension adjustment allows the user to adapt tool to the size of the tie
• Automatic cut-off eliminates sharp edges on ties
• Use for standard and heavy duty ties
• Design allows tie to wrap around bundle or • Made of industrial strength, self-gripping, • All metal construction adds durability to the comfortable feel
object, then onto itself for a secure hold back-to-back, hook and loop material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Insert tip through cinch slot (optional) then • Average shear (psi): 23
around a cable to prevent tie from becoming • Average peel (PIW): 0.5 45300 66094392 $72.32
separated from cable (chuck-key style) • Operating temperature: 0-220°F
• Reusable; can be recycled hundreds of times • 10 per package • Tensile strength: 40 Lbs.
W OAL Max. Bundle Black Blue Green
(In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Order # Price/Pkg. Order # Price/Pkg. Order # Price/Pkg.
0.375 6 1.0 78180585 $6.33 78180593 $6.33 78180601 $6.33
Tensioner Tools
0.500 6 1.0 81786667 7.04 81786675 7.04 81786683 7.04
Apply tension to Multi-Lok® stainless steel cable ties quickly Cable Tie
0.500 8 1.6 81786725 7.72 81786733 7.72 81786741 7.72
0.500 11 2.5 81786600 9.25 81786626 9.25 and easily with these Thomas & Betts tensioner tools. Tensioner
0.750 15 3.5 81786535 17.65 81786543 17.65 81786550 17.65 Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Cable Tie Tensioner WTAE200 54060413 $123.04
W OAL Max. Bundle Orange Red Yellow
Tensioning Hook WTAE201 54060421 29.85 Tensioning Hook
(In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Order # Price/Pkg. Order # Price/Pkg. Order # Price/Pkg.
0.375 6 1.0 78180619 $6.33 78180635 $6.33
0.500 6 1.0 81786691 7.04 81786717 7.04
0.500 8 1.6 81786758 7.72 81786766 $7.72 81786774 7.72
0.500 11
0.750 15
2.5
3.5 81786568 17.65 81786576 17.65
81786659
81786584
9.25
17.65
Cable Tie Tools
QC-100
• A lightweight tool for least critical applications
Stainless Steel Cable • Cinch tie to desired bundle and twist tool to remove excess strap
• Recommended for use with 18-50 pound ties
Tie Hand Tools L-200
• Economy tool for use with 18-50 pound ties
Easy to use hand tool applies tensions and cuts the ties • Automatic cut-off removes excess strap flush against cable tie head
flush. Use only with standard size stainless steel cable ties. • Tool is equipped with adjustable tensioning
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
WTA250 54064852 $288.48 • WTA250 for .25w width ties QC-100 73125437 $18.69
WTA290 89806111 306.30 • WTA290 for .177w width ties L-200 73125445 67.01

Protecting IEC Style Motor Starters

Basics of...Choosing a Fuse Class
UL Classes RK5, RK1 and J are the most popular. The Class RK5 (Fusetron™/Tri-onic®) is the least expensive and is adequate for most applications. The Class RK1
(Low-Peak™/Amp-trap®) is used where a higher degree of current limitation is required for component protection or system coordination. The RK5 and RK1 are
dimensionally interchangeable. Since its introduction in 1983, the Class J time delay fuse has become an increasingly popular choice. The LPJ/AJT provides a
somewhat higher degree of current limitation than the RK1. More importantly, the LPJ/AJT is approximately half the physical size of the Class RK5 and RK1 fuses.
The new IEC European style motor starters and contactors are becoming increasingly popular, but they present new problems in protection. These devices represent
substantial savings in space and cost but they have a much lower withstand capability than their NEMA counterparts.
In order to achieve the same level of protection for IEC style devices that we expect for NEMA devices, the LPJ/AJT Class J Time Delay fuse is the best choice, sized at
1.25 to 1.50 times motor full load amps. Also, the LPJ/AJT has the advantage of being smaller than RK5 fuses and thereby fits the trim IEC package. Page
Page 155 3592

SAMI™ Fuse Covers

• Innovative design covers exposed terminals and contacts of Cooper Bussmann™ fuse blocks • Fits most competitive fuse blocks
• Yellow light on indicating SAMI shows when the fuse is open, helps troubleshoot the system and reduces downtime
• All versions are reusable, no need to pay for indication everytime it opens • Must be purchased in multiples of 3
Min. Max. Interchange Guide Min. Max. Interchange Guide
Amperage Amperage L (In.) Class Volts Ferraz Shawmut Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Amperage Amperage L (In.) Class Volts Ferraz Shawmut Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Non-Indicating Indicating
0 30 3.82 Midget 600 DFC-7 SAMI-7N 74682394 $5.48 0 30 3.82 Midget 600 DFC-7I SAMI-7I 71918999 $6.97
0 30 3.82 R,K,H 250 DFC-9 SAMI-9N 74682410 5.80 0 30 3.82 R,K,H 250 DFC-9I SAMI-9I 71919013 7.73
0 30 5.02 VARIOUS 600 DFC-1 SAMI-1N 74682337 5.74 0 30 7.03 R,K,H 600 DFC-2I SAMI-2I 71918940 7.38
0 30 7.03 R,K,H 600 DFC-2 SAMI-2N 74682345 5.74 0 60 5.02 VARIOUS 600 DFC-1I SAMI-1I 71918932 7.26
35 60 4.98 J 600 DFC-6 SAMI-6N 74682386 5.51 35 60 4.98 J 600 DFC-6I SAMI-6I 71918981 7.26
35 60 8.20 R,K,H 600 DFC-5 SAMI-5N 74682378 6.80 35 60 8.20 R,K,H 600 DFC-5I SAMI-5I 71918973 8.52
65 100 7.03 J 600 DFC-3 SAMI-3N 74682352 6.28 65 100 7.03 J 600 DFC-3I SAMI-3I 71918957 8.38
65 100 8.20 R,K,H 250 DFC-4 SAMI-4N 74682360 7.06 65 100 8.20 R,K,H 250 DFC-4I SAMI-4I 71918965 8.52
65 100 10.38 R,K,H 600 DFC-8 SAMI-8N 74682402 10.59 65 100 10.38 R,K,H 600 DFC-8I SAMI-8I 71919005 12.95

3592 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 FUSES
Class H Renewable Fuses & Links - 250 & 600 Volts
• Designed for easy replacement • Super-lag renewable fuses with longer time-lag than other Class H fuses of this type can better sustain overloads without needlessly opening
• Uses industrial/commercial structures where maximum short-circuit currents are low level (below 10,000 amperes) and frequent outages dictate the economy of the “renewable” type fuse
• 10 K amperage interupting rating • No multiple links to complicate replacement • Ferraz links are not interchangable between manufacturers
Fuses Renewable Links
Interchange Cooper Bussmann™ Ferraz Interchange Cooper Bussmann™ Ferraz
Guide L Dia. Super-Lag™ Dia. Guide Super-Lag™
Amps Littelfuse (In.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Amps Littelfuse Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
250V 250V
1 RLN1 2 9⁄16 RF1 54016506 $13.73 1 — RL1 54017207 $3.07
2 RLN002 2 9⁄16 REN-2 75380584 $15.51 9⁄16 RF2 54016514 14.13 2 — RL2 54017215 2.98
3 RLN003 2 9⁄16 REN-3 75380642 14.88 9⁄16 RF3 54016522 13.53 3 LKN003 LKN-3 75270900 $3.35 RL3 54017223 3.06
5 RLN005 2 9⁄16 REN-5 75380733 14.88 9⁄16 RF5 54016530 13.53 5 LKN005 LKN-5 75270991 3.27 RL5 54017231 2.98
6 RLN006 2 9⁄16 REN-6 75380766 13.06 9⁄16 RF6 54016548 11.87 6 LKN006 LKN-6 75271023 3.27 RL6 54017249 2.98
10 RLN010 2 9⁄16 REN-10 75380519 12.02 9⁄16 RF10 54016555 10.94 10 LKN010 LKN-10 75270777 2.97 RL10 54017256 2.71
15 RLN015 2 9⁄16 REN-15 75380550 12.80 9⁄16 RF15 54016563 11.66 15 LKN015 LKN-15 75270819 1.08 RL15 54017264 0.99
20 RLN020 2 9⁄16 REN-20 75380592 12.80 9⁄16 RF20 54016571 11.66 20 LKN020 LKN-20 75270850 0.79 RL20 54017272 0.72
REN-100
25 RLN25 2 9⁄16 RF25 54016589 12.71 25 LKN025 LKN-25 75270884 1.08 RL25 54017280 0.99
30 RLN030 2 9⁄16 REN-30 75380659 8.46 9⁄16 RF30 54016597 7.71 30 LKN030 LKN-30 75270918 0.74 RL30 54017298 0.68
35 RLN035 3 1 REN-35 75380675 28.00 13⁄16 RF35 54016605 25.47 35 LKN035 LKN-35 75270934 2.07 RL35 54017306 1.88
40 RLN040 3 1 REN-40 75380691 26.85 13⁄16 RF40 54016613 24.42 40 — RL40 54017314 1.87
45 RLN45 3 13⁄16 RF45 54016621 24.84 45 — RL45 54017322 1.82
50 RLN050 3 1 REN-50 75380741 26.85 13⁄16 RF50 54016639 24.42 50 LKN050 LKN-50 75271007 2.07 RL50 54017330 1.88
60 RLN060 3 1 REN-60 75380774 18.57 13⁄16 RF60 54016647 17.00 60 LKN060 LKN-60 75271031 1.55 RL60 54017348 1.41
70 RLN70 57⁄8 19⁄64 RF70 54016654 47.77 70 LKN070 LKN-70 75271056 4.10 RL70 54017355 3.74
1
80 RLN080 5 1 REN-80 75380808 63.02 19⁄64 RF80 54016662 57.36 80 LKN080 LKN-80 75271064 4.10 RL80 54017363 3.74
90 RLN90 57⁄8 19⁄64 RF90 54016670 49.91 90 — RL90 54017371 3.57
1
100 RLN100 5 1 REN-100 75380527 41.99 19⁄64 RF100 54016688 38.20 100 LKN100 LKN-100 75270785 2.70 RL100 54017389 2.44
110 RLN110 71⁄8 137⁄64 RF110 54016696 114.54 110 — RL110 54017397 7.17
125 RLN125 71⁄8 137⁄64 RF125 54016704 114.54 125 LKN125 LKN-125 75270801 8.33 RL125 54017405 7.59 RES-60
150 RLN150 71⁄8 137⁄64 REN-150 75380568 126.28 137⁄64 RF150 54016712 114.91 150 LKN150 LKN-150 75270827 8.33 RL150 54017413 7.59
175 RLN175 71⁄8 137⁄64 RF175 54016720 114.54 175 — RL175 54017421 7.17
200 RLN200 71⁄8 137⁄64 REN-200 75380600 108.92 137⁄64 RF200 54016738 99.12 200 LKN200 LKN-200 75270868 5.51 RL200 54017439 5.02
225 RLN225 85⁄8 27⁄64 RF225 54016746 202.53 225 — RL225 54017447 13.11
250 RLN250 85⁄8 27⁄64 RF250 54016753 202.53 250 LKN250 LKN-250 75270892 15.88 RL250 54017454 14.45
300 RLN300 85⁄8 2.1 REN-300 75380667 213.16 27⁄64 RF300 54016761 193.97 300 LKN300 LKN-300 75270926 15.92 RL300 54017462 14.48
350 RLN350 85⁄8 27⁄64 RF350 54016779 202.53 350 LKN350 LKN-350 75270942 15.92 RL350 54017470 14.48
400 RLN400 85⁄8 21⁄10 REN-400 75380709 170.79 27⁄64 RF400 54016787 155.41 400 LKN400 LKN-400 75270967 14.42 RL400 54017488 13.13
450 RLN450 103⁄8 239⁄64 RF450 54016795 309.35 450 — RL450 54017496 21.73
500 RLN500 103⁄8 239⁄64 RF500 54016803 309.35 500 — RL500 54017504 21.73
600 RLN600 103⁄8 239⁄64 RF600 54016811 296.51 600 LKN600 LKN-600 75271049 24.06 RL600 54017512 21.90
600V 600V
1 RLS1 5 13⁄16 RFS1 54016829 31.00 1 — RLS1 54017520 4.81
2 RLS2 5 13⁄16 RFS2 54016837 31.00 2 — RLS2 54017538 4.24
3 RLS3 5 13⁄16 RFS3 54016845 32.21 3 LKS003 LKS-3 75380329 5.38 RLS3 54017546 4.90
5 RLS005 5 13⁄16 RES-5 75381046 39.16 13⁄16 RFS5 54016852 35.63 5 LKS005 LKS-5 75380410 5.38 RLS5 54017553 4.90
6 RLS006 5 13⁄16 RES-6 75381079 36.14 13⁄16 RFS6 54016860 33.50 6 LKS006 LKS-6 75380444 5.27 RLS6 54017561 4.80
10 RLS010 5 13⁄16 RES-10 75380832 34.91 13⁄16 RFS10 54016878 31.76 10 LKS010 LKS-10 75271098 4.29 RLS10 54017579 3.91
15 RLS015 5 13⁄16 RES-15 75380873 28.45 13⁄16 RFS15 54016886 26.06 15 LKS015 LKS-15 75271130 1.44 RLS15 54017587 1.32 LKN-200
20 RLS020 5 13⁄16 RES-20 75380915 27.34 13⁄16 RFS20 54016894 24.88 20 LKS020 LKS-20 75271171 1.44 RLS20 54017595 1.32
25 RLS025 5 13⁄16 RES-25 75380949 33.98 13⁄16 RFS25 54016902 30.93 25 LKS025 LKS-25 75380303 2.14 RLS25 54017603 1.95
30 RLS030 5 13⁄16 RES-30 75380972 21.17 13⁄16 RFS30 54016910 19.27 30 LKS030 LKS-30 75380337 1.33 RLS30 54017611 1.20
35 RLS035 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-35 75380998 53.38 11⁄16 RFS35 54016928 48.58 35 LKS035 LKS-35 75380352 4.04 RLS35 54017629 3.68
40 RLS040 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-40 75381012 53.38 11⁄16 RFS40 54016936 48.58 40 LKS040 LKS-40 75380378 4.04 RLS40 54017637 3.68
45 RLS45 51⁄2 11⁄16 RFS45 54016944 45.31 45 LKS045 LKS-45 75380394 4.12 RLS45 54017645 3.74
50 RLS050 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-50 75381053 53.38 11⁄16 RFS50 54016951 48.58 50 LKS050 LKS-50 75380428 4.12 RLS50 54017652 3.74
60 RLS060 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-60 75381087 36.24 11⁄16 RFS60 54016969 33.77 60 LKS060 LKS-60 75380451 2.70 RLS60 54017660 2.44
LKS-150
70 RLS70 77⁄8 121⁄64 RFS70 54016977 96.25 70 LKS070 LKS-70 75380477 8.25 RLS70 54017678 7.51
80 RLS080 77⁄8 121⁄64 RES-80 75381111 121.53 121⁄64
RFS80 54016985 110.61 80 LKS080 LKS-80 75380485 8.25 RLS80 54017686 7.51
90 RLS90 77⁄8 121⁄64 RFS90 54016993 100.37 90 — RLS90 54017694 6.66
100 RLS100 77⁄8 121⁄64 RES-100 75380840 84.61 1 ⁄64 RFS100
21 54017009 76.99 100 LKS100 LKS-100 75271106 5.51 RLS100 54017702 5.02
110 RLS110 95⁄8 153⁄64 RFS110 54017017 194.60 110 — RLS110 54017710 11.98
125 RLS125 95⁄8 153⁄64 RFS125 54017025 186.51 125 LKS125 LKS-125 75271122 15.13 RLS125 54017728 13.78
150 RLS150 95⁄8 153⁄64 RES-150 75380881 196.31 153⁄64 RFS150 54017033 178.64 150 LKS150 LKS-150 75271148 15.13 RLS150 54017736 13.78
175 RLS175 95⁄8 153⁄64 RFS175 54017041 194.60 175 — RLS175 54017744 11.98
200 RLS200 95⁄8 153⁄64 RES-200 75380923 164.07 153⁄64 RFS200 54017058 149.32 200 LKS200 LKS-200 75271189 11.67 RLS200 54017751 10.62 RL1
225 RLS225 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS225 54017066 392.35 225 — RLS225 54017769 23.31
250 RLS250 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS250 54017074 378.40 250 — RLS250 54017777 22.63
300 RLS300 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS300 54017082 392.35 300 LKS300 LKS-300 75380345 23.66 RLS300 54017785 21.53
350 RLS350 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS350 54017090 392.35 350 LKS350 LKS-350 75380360 28.55 RLS350 54017793 25.99
400 RLS400 115⁄8 25⁄8 RES-400 75381020 379.16 25⁄8 RFS400 54017108 346.67 400 LKS400 LKS-400 75380386 27.49 RLS400 54017801 25.02
450 RLS450 133⁄8 31⁄8 RFS450 54017116 576.92 450 — RLS450 54017819 31.23
500 RLS500 133⁄8 31⁄8 RFS500 54017124 560.12 500 — RLS500 54017827 31.23
600 RLS600 133⁄8 31⁄8 RES-600 75381095 601.13 31⁄8 RFS600 54017132 547.04 600 LKS600 LKS-600 75380469 39.44 RLS600 54017835 35.91
1
Length: 57⁄8w

Basics of...Time-Delay Fuses

Time-delay fuses are the most popular for motor branch circuit application. A time-delay fuse can be sized closer to motor full load current, providing a degree of
overload protection, better short-circuit protection and allows the possible use of a smaller disconnect switch.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3601

Page 156
SWITCH TECHNICAL INFORMATION & FOOT SWITCHES

Basics of...Automation Switch Terminology

Limit Switch: An information device that senses movement. Through an electrical contact, the limit switch provides information on the movement of an object. It
performs this function by converting the mechanical motion of the object into an electrical signal. The information on object movement provided by the limit switch is
used by machines in determining when to start, stop, reverse, slow down, speed up, or recycle.
Pressure Switch: An information device whose function is to limit pressure in a system so pressure neither exceeds nor drops below a certain limit. This type of switch
opens or closes electrical circuits in response to the pressure of such media as water, air and oil. The pressure causes a piston, bellows or a diaphragm to move
against a set of springs, which then open or close the contacts. If the pressure has dropped below a certain limit, the pressure switch will cause the machine or device
to turn on; if the pressure exceeds a certain limit, the pressure switch causes it to turn off. Pressure switches are used to control such machinery as pumps and
lubrication systems.
Photoelectric Switch: A switch which, when activated, sends out a signal to energize the control coil or solid state circuitry of an industrial or process control device. A
photoelectric switch is activated when a beam of light is interrupted or changes intensity. There are two types of sensing styles: 1) Retroreflective types, the unit
projects a beam of light to a specific target, which reflects the beam back to the unit. When this beam is interrupted, the unit is activated. 2) Diffuse reflection type; this
unit projects a beam of light a given distance. When an object enters this beam and reflects it back to the unit, the unit is activated. Photoelectric switches have definite
sensing ranges that vary with the type of material sensed.
Proximity Switches: A switch which functions like a limit switch. When activated, it sends out a signal which can energize such devices as motor starters, relays,
solenoids, programmable controllers, or other industrial control devices. A proximity switch does not physically touch or move to detect the presence of an object,
rather, it senses a disturbance in a magnetic field which radiates from the sensing face. This disturbance is caused by the presence of an object entering this field.
Proximity switches have definite sensing ranges which vary with the type of material sensed.
Foot Switches: A switch which activates an electrical current, similar to a pushbutton. There are two types of foot switches: momentary and maintained. Momentary
Foot Switch; press and hold, the switch is off when you release. Maintained Foot Switch; press on to activate, press again to deactivate.
Page
Page 157 3618

Heavy-Duty Foot Switches

Ratings @ Hercules
Contact 125-250 VAC Dimensions • Mfr’s #511-BG has antitrip treadle mechanism and gate
Form Action Amps HP L (In.) W (In.) Ht. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. to help prevent unintentional operation
Hercules Foot Switches NEMA Type 2, 4 & 13 • Painted orange • 3⁄4-14 NPT conduit opening
SPDT DB Momentary 15 1⁄2 9 6 41⁄2 536-SWH 54097167 $161.36 • Complies with OSHA for full shielding
DPDT DB Momentary 15 1⁄2 9 6 41⁄2 537-SWH 54097175 190.36 • Heavy pilot duty, 250 VAC maximum
SPDT Momentary 20 1 9 6 41⁄2 511-BG 54097100 237.80 • NEMA Type 2, 4 and 13
SPDT Momentary 20 1 9 6 41⁄2 531-SWH 54097118 129.85
SPDT Maintained 20 1 9 6 41⁄2 571-DWH 54097126 158.76 DB Double Break models must be wired to equal voltage Hercules
DPDT Momentary 20 1 9 6 41⁄2 532-SWH 54097134 154.41 sources and the same polarity. The loads should be on the
DPDT Maintained 20 1 9 6 41⁄2 572-DWH 54097142 185.82 same sides of the line.
2 STAGE
SPDT Momentary 20 1 9 6 41⁄2 534-SWH 54097159 178.41 Classic IV
• Cast aluminum body and treadle, painted black
Classic IV Foot Switches NEMA Type 2, 4 & 13 • Full guard painted alert orange
SPDT Momentary 15 1⁄2 11 7 41⁄2 TWIN 88SH1-5 54097241 320.12 • 3⁄4-14 NPT conduit opening
DPDT Momentary 15 1⁄2 11 7 41⁄2 TWIN 88SH2-5 54097258 398.37 • NEMA Type 2, 4 and 13 Classic IV

Pneumatic Foot Switches

Air Flow Exhaust Operating Dimensions (In.) • Filtered and lubricated air supply is required
Desc. Type @100 psi @100 psi Force (Lbs.) L W Ht. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. for best results
• Ports 1⁄8-27 NPT
Compact Air Val 3-Way 30 CFM 25 CFM 7 27⁄8 21⁄2 11⁄8 3B-30A2-S 54097027 $55.32
Clipper Air Val 3-Way 30 CFM 25 CFM 10 41⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄4 3C-30A2-S 54097001 69.19 WARNING - Compressed air is powerful.
Max. line pressure up to 150 psi. Compact Clipper
Clipper Air Val 4-Way 30 CFM 25 CFM 19 41⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄4 4C-30F2-S 54097019 106.24 AirVal AirVal

Medium-Duty Foot Switches

Ratings @
Contact 125-250 VAC Prewired Dimensions • Cast iron construction,
Desc. Form Action Amps HP Cordset (Ft.) L. (In.) W. (In.) Ht. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. painted black
• Skidproof basepad
Clipper SPST-NO Momentary 15 3⁄4 8-14/3 41⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄4 632-SC3 54097050 $59.22 • Strain relief connector
Clipper SPDT Momentary 20 1 41⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄4 632-S 54097068 37.58
prevents wire fatigue
Clipper DPDT Momentary 15 1⁄2 41⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄4 635-S 54097076 56.19
Clipper SPDT Maintained 20 1 41⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄4 632-D 54097084 64.02 • No. 632-SC3 is prewired with
Clipper Twin SPDT Momentary 20 1 81⁄2 41⁄2 13⁄4 TWIN 632-S 54097092 116.39 3 prong series cord set, SJT Clipper Clipper Twin-Model

Light-Duty Foot Switches

• Rocker action - Executive Model
• Single action - Treadlite II Model • Gray finish
• Switch has two circuits. Mechanical interlock prevents both circuits from operating simultaneously
Ratings @
Contact 125/250 VAC Prewired Dimensions
Desc. Form Action Amps HP Cordset (Ft.) L. (In.) W. (In.) Ht. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Treadlite II
Executive
Treadlite II SPDT Momentary 15 1⁄2 — 31⁄2 25⁄8 1 T-91-S 54097183 $15.76
Treadlite II SPDT-NO Momentary 15 1⁄2 6-14/3 31⁄2 25⁄8 1 T-91-SC3A 54097191 29.85 • Steel housing with black finish • Skidproof basepad
Treadlite II SPDT-NO Momentary 10 1⁄2 6-14/3 31⁄2 25⁄8 1 T-91-SC3 54097209 28.79 • Strain relief connector prevents wire fatigue
Executive SPDT Momentary 10 1⁄2 — 45⁄8 4 11⁄8 72 54097217 55.47 • No. T-91SC3A and T-91-SC3 are prewired with 3 prong series cordset, SJT

3618 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
LIMIT & SNAP ACTION SWITCHES
Heavy-Duty Limit Switches
• Direct drive actuator prevents contact welding • NEMA A600 contact rating (UL/CSA) • Three-conduit switch simplifies wiring • Double sealed diecast construction
• Four-position turret head
1 Form X (1 NO + 1 NC) contact rated 10 A @ 480 VAC, 6 A @ 30 VDC, 0.8 A @ 125 VDC, 0.4 A @ 250 VDC maximum carrying current (non-inductive, resistive load). Single conduit opening body
size: 99.5 x 40 x 43mm (3.92 x 1.58 x 1.69 in.) Triple conduit opening body size: 97.9 x 63 x 38.8mm (3.85 x 2.48 x 1.53 in.)
Max. Min. Interchange Guide
Actuator Operating Release Cutler- MICRO Single-Conduit Triple-Conduit
Type Force (Lbs.) Force (Lbs.) Hammer SWITCH Square D Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Side Rotary, Nylon Roller Lever 2.12 1.76 E49S-11AP1 31ZS1-C XCK-J10511 D4B-3111N 54046701 $122.00 D4B-7111N 54046776 $127.05
Adjustable Rubber Roller Lever 1.63 1.76 E49S11-UP1 XCK-J10541 D4B-3113N 54046719 133.65
Adjustable Nylon Roller Lever 2.12 1.76 E49S11-UP1 XCK-J10541 D4B-3116N 54046727 132.74 D4B-7116N 54046792 134.43
Adjustable Rod Lever 7.62 0.39 E49S11-DP1 XCK-J10559 D4B-3117N 54046735 132.74 D4B-7117N 54046800 137.59
Plain Plunger 4.19 7.05 E49S11-BP1 32ZS1-C XCK-J161 D4B-3170N 54046743 117.73 D4B-7170N 54046818 120.68
Roller Plunger 4.19 7.05 E49S11-CP1 35ZS1-C XCK-J167 D4B-3171N 54046750 122.00 D4B-7171N 54046826 127.05 Adjustable Rubber
Coil Spring 5.3 D4B-3181N 54046768 117.73 D4B-7181N 54046834 119.96 Roller Level

General-Purpose Snap Action Switches

Short Hinge
Pin Plunger Panel Mount Roller Plunger Hinge Lever Hinge Roller Lever Roller Lever
Actuator Max. Operating Min. Release Actuator Interchange Guide
High-precision, 15-amp breaking capacity. Steady state break Type Force (oz.) Force (oz.) L (In.) MICRO SWITCH Unimax Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
current (non-inductive; resistive): 15 A @ 125/250 VAC, Pin Plunger 12.3 4.0 BZ-2R-A2 HBS2K-AAYSPO55C Z15G-B 54045109 $6.50
10 A @ 500 VAC, 0.5 A @ 125 VDC, 0.25 A @ 250 VDC. Panel Mount Roller Plunger 12.3 4.0 BZ-2RQ18-A2 HBS2K-AA45RO55C Z15GQ22-B 54045083 17.68
Body Size: 49.2 x 17.5 x 24.2 mm (1.94 x 0.69 x 0.95 inch). Hinge Lever 2.5 0.5 2.50 BZ-2RW80-A2 HBS2K-AA4STO55C Z15GW-B 54045117 8.29
Screw terminals. Hinge Roller Lever 3.5 0.8 1.91 BZ-2RW82-A2 HBS2K-AA4SAO55C Z15GW2-B 54045125 10.44
Short Hinge Roller Lever 5.6 1.5 1.05 BZ-2RW822-A2 HBS2K-AA4SFO55C Z15GW22-B 54045091 10.02

High-Capacity Snap Action Switches

Large capacity 20-amp; excellent vibration resistance; quick-break contacts. Steady Break Current (non-inductive, resistive); 20 A @ 125/250
VAC, 10 A @ 500 VAC, 5 A @ 600 VAC, 0.4 A @ 125 VDC, 0.2 @ 250 VDC. Screw terminals. Body Size: 49.2 x 17.5 x 24.2 mm (1.94 x 0.69 x
0.95 inch). Screw terminals.
Max. Operating Min. Release Actuator Interchange Guide
Actuator Type Force (oz.) Force (oz.) L (In.) MICRO SWITCH Unimax Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Pin Plunger Panel Mount Plunger Hinge Lever
Pin Plunger 22.0 10.1 BA-2R-A2 HBS2K-CB4SPO55C A-20G-B7-K 54045018 $8.35
Panel Mount Plunger 22.0 10.1 BA-2RQ1-A2 HBS2K-CB4SJO55C A-20GQ-B7-K 54045026 14.30
Short Spring Plunger 22.1 10.1 1.94 — — A20GDB7K 62411442 12.18
Hinge Lever 2.5 0.5 2.50 BA-2RW80-A2 HBS2K-CB4STS55C A-20GV-B7-K 54045034 8.66
Hinge Roller Lever 3.5 0.5 1.91 BA-2RW82-A2 HL2KJ-C3A055C A-20GV2-B7-K 54045042 10.75
Short Hinge Roller Lever 6.3 1.7 1.03 BA-2RW822-A2 HBS2K-CB55NO55C A-20GV22-B7-K 54045000 10.77 Hinge Roller Lever Short Hinge Roller Lever

DC Voltage General-Purpose Snap Action Switches

Direct current switch with built-in magnetic arc suppressor in the contacts, 15-amp breaking capacity.
Steady state break current (non-inductive; resistive): 15 A @ 30 VDC, 10 A @ 125 VDC, 3 A @ 250 VDC. 30 A
max. inrush current. Body Size: 49.2 x 17.5 x 24.2mm (1.94 x 0.69 x 0.95 inch). Screw terminals.
Actuator Max. Operating Min. Release Actuator Interchange Guide
Type Force (oz.) Force (oz.) L (In.) Micro Switch Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Hinge Lever 3.9 0.5 2.50 MT-4RV-A28 X-10GW-B 54045158 $23.45
Short Hinge Roller Lever 7.8 1.2 1.05 — X-10GW22-B 54045174 25.63 Short Roller Hinge Lever Hinge Lever

Basics of...Switches

Terms Pole & Throw Classifications

Pole: Number of sets of switch contacts. Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST): An on-off switch. A simple switch with one set of
Throw: Number of conducting positions, known as single or double. poles and one throw.
Momentary: Temporary contact switch, goes back to rest position when released. Single Pole, Double Throw (SPDT): This switch can be wired on-off or on in both
Open: Switch is not conducting. positions and can power on two different circuits (A or B) in example.
Closed: Switch is conducting. Double Pole, Single Throw (DPST): A pair of single SPST on-off switches which
work together.
Double Pole, Double Throw (DPDT): A pair of SPDT switches which work together.

3626 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 158
RELAYS & ENCLOSED RELAYS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Ice Cube Square-Base General-Purpose Relays
Contact Coil Voltage Power Contact Rating Interchange Guide
Terminal
Form (60Hz) Consumption (Resistive) Type IDEC P&B Aromat Fig. Model # Order # Price Ea.
SPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 15A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL1-H — — A LY1-AC24 54045828 $8.77
SPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 15A@ 24VDC Standard Case HL1-H — — A LY1-AC110/120 54045836 8.77
SPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL1-H — — A LY1-AC220/240 54045844 9.61
SPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL1-H — — A LY1-DC12 54045851 8.52 A B
SPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL1-H — — A LY1-DC24 54045869 8.53
1
SPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 15A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-AC24 54045885 9.18
1
SPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 15A@ 24VDC Upper Mounting Bracket HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-AC110/120 54045877 9.18
1
SPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-AC220/240 54045893 9.67
1
SPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL1-HTM — — LY1F-DC12 54045901 9.07
1
SPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-DC24 54045919 9.07
1
DPDT 12VAC 1.0 to 1.2 VA 10A@110VAC/24VDC Plug-In Solder Terminals — — — B LY2AC12 62411392 9.70
DPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 10A@ 110VAC Standard Case HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-AC24 54045927 10.04
DPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 10A@ 24VDC HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-AC110/120 54045935 10.04 D
C
DPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-AC220/240 54045943 10.04
DPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2DC12 54045950 10.04 • Compact cube-style relays
DPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-DC24 54045968 10.04 • Plug-in/solder terminals
1
DPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-AC24 54045976 10.40 • Arc barrier equipped relay with 2,000 VAC,
1
DPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 10A@ 24VDC Upper Mounting Bracket HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-AC 110/120 54045984 10.27 50/60 Hz dielectric strength
1
DPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-AC 220/240 54045992 11.55 • Long dependable service life: 500,000
1
DPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-DC12 54046008 10.55 operations min. for 2PDT relays; 200,000
1
DPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-DC24 54046016 10.85 operations min. for others
DPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL2-L RH2B-UL K10L11 B LY2N-AC24 54046024 13.58 • Order mounting sockets separately below
DPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case LED Indicator HL2-L RH2B-UL K10L11 B LY2N-AC 110/120 54046032 13.54 • 36.6 H x W x 27.9 D mm (1.4w x W x 1.10w)
2
3PDT 24VAC 1.6 to 2.0VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals — RH3B-U — C LY3-AC24 54046057 14.23
3PDT 120VAC 1.6 to 2.0VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case — RH3B-U — C LY3-AC120 2
54046065 14.23 Contact Ratings
2
3PDT 240VAC 1.6 to 2.0VA 1⁄2HP@ 240VAC — RH3B-U — C LY3-AC240 54046073 14.23 15A @ 110/120 VAC - 1⁄2 HP @ 120 VAC
2
3PDT 12VDC 1.4W — — RH3B-U — C LY3-DC12 54046081 14.23 12A @ 220/277 VAC - 1 HP @ 250 VAC
2
3PDT 24VDC 1.4W — — RH3B-U — C LY3-DC24 54046099 14.23 12A @ 28 VDC - B300 Pilot Duty
4PDT 24VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals — RH4B-U — D LY4-AC24 54046107 16.47
4PDT 120VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case — RH4B-U — D LY4-AC120 54046115 16.47 LED Indicator
4PDT 240VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 1⁄2HP@ 240VAC — RH4B-U — D LY4-AC240 54046172 17.70 Relay Width
4PDT 12VDC 1.5W — — RH4B-U — D LY4-DC12 54046123 16.59 SPDT 21.8mm (0.85w)
4PDT 24VDC 1.5W — — RH4B-U — D LY4-DC24 54046131 16.59 DPDT 21.8mm (0.85w)
4PDT 24VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals — RH4B-UL — D LY4N-AC24 54046149 22.74 3PDT 31.5mm (1.24w)
4PDT 120VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case LED Indicator — RH4B-UL — D LY4N-AC120 54046156 22.76 4PDT 41.4mm (1.63w)
1 2
Figure C Figure B
Track and Surface Mounting Sockets for LY Series Relays
Desc. Pins Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Desc. Pins Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Desc. Pins Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
SPDT/DPDT Power Ice-Cube 8 PTF08A-E 54046164 $6.43 3PDT Power Ice-Cube 11 PTF11A 54045802 $8.81 4PDT Power Ice-Cube 14 PTF14A-E 54045810 $8.62

General Purpose Relays D3

• Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load currents • The contact operation can be easily checked by mechanical indicator and push-to-test button
• Resistive load p.f.=1 • Rated load 250VAC 10A and 28VDC 10A • Max. operating voltage 250VAC 250VDC • Min. permissable load 10 MA @ 1VDC
• 80% max. pickup voltage • 30% min. AC, 15% min. DC dropout voltage • Max. voltage 110% • Mech. life 10,000,000 cycles min.
• Elec. life @ all contact ratings 100,000 min. • UL recognized file #E37317, E65657 • CSA file LR701519, LR701520
Socket
No. of Poles Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
2 D3PA2-A2 03123122 $5.36 Accessories
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Coil Resistance
Standard DPDT with Test Button-10A carrycurrent resistive Coil Voltage Ohms
Hold Down Spring C-H D3 PFC-A1 03123148 $1.89
Coil Voltage Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Coil Voltage Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Gen. Purpose Relay 24VAC 68
24VAC D3PR2T-A2 03123163 $14.40 24VDC D3PR2T1-A2 03123189 $14.40 DIN Rail End Stop C-H D3 PFP-M 03123155 1.89 110/120VAC 1240
120VAC D3PR2A-A2 03123171 13.65 120VAC D3PR3A-A2 103123197 17.06 Gen. Purpose Relay 24VDC 430
1
Unit is 3PDT

Relays, Power PCB

Subminiature “sugar cube” relay. Withstands impulses of up to 4,500V. Two types of seal
available: flux protection and plastic sealed. UL class-B insulation certified. Class F available. Ideal
Basics of...Enclosed Relays
for applications in security equipment, household electrical appliances, garage door openers, and Terminal Identification 1 2 3
audio equipment.
Terminal Chart
• A cubic single pole relay • Contact Rating: 10A @ 120V 4 5 6
Contact Normally
Power Arrangement Common Open Closed Coil
Desc. Consumption (VA) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 1 Pole (SPDT) 7 5 2 A&B 7 8 9
12VDC Semi-Sealed Relay 400mW G5LE-1-DC12 06945380 $2.46 2 Pole (DPDT) 7 4 1 A&B
24VDC Semi-Sealed Relay 400mW G5LE-1-DC24 06945398 2.46 9 6 3
12VDC Sealed Relay 400mW G5LE-14-DC12 06945406 2.70 3 Pole (3PDT) 7 4 1 A&B A B
24VDC Sealed Relay 400mW G5LE-14-DC24 06945414 2.70 8 5 2
9 6 3
Page
Page 159 3634

3634 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
TIMERS & PROXIMITY SENSOR TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Spring-Wound Mechanical Timers 24 Hr. or 7 Day Electronic
Time Switches
These energy-saving timers do not use electricity to operate. Replace any standard switch, and
automatically limit the ON time of fans, lights, motors, heaters and other energy consuming • Make upgrading to an electric time switch easy • Automatic daylight saving time adjustment
loads.“Up front” terminal connection and easy “press on” knob design ensures quick and easy • Multi-volt operation from 120 to 277 VAC
installation. Durable plastic time knob. Include metal wallplate. • Program up to 28 set points or events (14 ON/14 OFF
• Automatic shut-off • Mounts in standard single-gang junction boxes per channel)
• ET1100 Series: set points can be preset to
Timing Interchange Guide automatically repeat on a daily basis
Range M.H. Rhodes Paragon Torx Dayton Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • ET1700 Series: set points can be distributed
5 Min. 90004 SW5M A505M 6X545 FF5M 54025002 $23.75 throughout the days of the week
15 Min. 90005 SW15M A515M 2E269 FF15M 54025010 22.77 • Programs can be overridden at any time ET1105C ET1705CR
1 Hour 90008 SW60M A560M 6X546 FF60M 54025036 23.22 • Field replaceable “AAA” batteries maintain program
6 Hours 90007 SW6H A506H 4A218 FF6H 54025044 29.75 and accurate time keeping for 3 years
12 Hours 90001 SW12H A512H 2E052 FF12H 54025051 28.84 • 2-Circuit models feature 2-second pulse option for
contactor and bell ringing applications
• Clock voltage: 120/208/240/277 • Amp rating: 30
• HP rating: 1HP/2HP • All models: 50 or 60 Hz.
• Knockouts: combination 1⁄2w - 3⁄4w, one on back and
Heavy-Duty Grounded each side of case and two on bottom ET1125C ET1125CR
Plug-In Timers Switch Type of
Circuit Type Enclosure Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
A. Air Conditioner & Appliance Timer
Automatically controls air conditioners, 1 SPST NEMA1 ET1105C 02168326 $189.33
computers, heaters, heavy-duty 1 SPST NEMA3R ET1705CR 02168359 242.57
appliances and lamps. 2 SPST NEMA1 ET1125C 02168334 213.35
2 SPST NEMA3R ET1125CR 02168342 242.03
• 3-prong grounded plug and switch;
2 STST NEMA1 ET1725C 02168367 237.29 ET1725C
plugs into wall
• Manual override On/Off switch
• Order #54024864 switch has 1875W,
120V, 1 HP, 120V max. motor load A. Air Conditioner & B. Random-Pattern C. Programmable
• Order #54024872 switch has Appliance Timer Security Timer Timer
5000W, 250V, 2 HP, 240V max.
motor load C. Programmable Timer 10 Pc. Mini Open End
B. Random-Pattern Security Timer Convenient programmable settings with
Turns lights on and off at slightly nonremovable trippers. Ignition Wrench Set
dfferent times each day. • Manual override • Multi-setting timer Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Manual override • White housing • White housing Set #EW-40NB:
ON Time (Hours) Watts Cap. • Roll-up Pouch
Key Settings Min. Max. Amps Tungsten HP Motor Volts Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Set Consists of:
A. 3 On/3 Off per day 1⁄2 231⁄2 15 Resist., 1750 1 120 TN311C 54024864 $19.81 • 10 - Wrenches: 13⁄64x15⁄64w, 7⁄32x1⁄4w, 15⁄64x13⁄64w, 1⁄4x7⁄32w,
17⁄64x19⁄64w, 9⁄32x5⁄16w, 5⁄16x9⁄32w, 11⁄32x3⁄8w, 3⁄8x11⁄32w, 7⁄16x1⁄2w
8 Induct.
A. 2 On/2 Off per day 1⁄2 231⁄2 — — 2 240 HB114C 54024872 21.77
B. 2 On/2 Off per day 3⁄4 23 ⁄4 15 Resist. 1750
1 1⁄3 120 SB711C 54024815 14.19 Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
C. Up to 24 On/24 Off 1⁄2 231⁄2 15 Resist. 1750 1⁄3 120 SB811C 54024823 15.42 EW-40NB BU05614565 $33.33

Electronic Full Year or Seven-Day & Water Heater Timers

This time switch can be programmed for repeat daily, 5-day work week, weekend or individual day scheduling. It can also be set for operation during low cost utility rates or shut off during peak
demands and can save up to 26% of the cost of heating water.
• To the minute accuracy, 7 day control, up to 6 ON/OFF settings daily
• See thru cover with external override and LED load indicator
• Battery backup protects program and timekeeping for min. of 3 years
Full Year or 7-Day Programmable Timers
Provide simplified to-the-minute programming at a reduced energy cost.
These timers are able to program a weekly or yearly schedule for 1, 2 or 4
circuits. Provide full-year load control with holiday programming, daylight
saving time and automatic leap year adjustments. Order from table below.
• All programmed data can be reviewed easily with the
automatic review feature
• Large display provides easy programming in dimly-lit areas
• Solid state memory gives a minimum of 24-hour program
and timekeeping protection (no battery needed)
• Enclosed in 73⁄4" x 5" x 3" locakable steel for indoor use
1-Pole 2-Pole • Independent time control for 1, 2 or 4 loads

Contact Contact Rating Max. Amperes/ HP@ (VAC) Timer Input Interchange Guide
Form Pole Induct. (I) or Resist. (R) 120 240 Volts (in Hz) EZ Controls Paragon Torx Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Electronic Full Year or Seven-Day Programmable Timers, 1 Circuit
SPDT 15@ 24/120VAC(R), 10@ 240/277VAC(R) 1 2 120 (60 Hz) EZ-731, EC365/C-120 EC71/18S/120, DG-120, DT100 DZS-100 ET70115C 54024567 $341.14
Electronic Full Year or Seven-Day Programmable Timers, 2 Circuit
SPDT 10@24/120/247 (VAC R) 1 2 120/208/240/277(60Hz) EZ-701-P EC72 Series DT200,-2&-3 ET70215CR 54024559 412.42
Electronic Water Heater Timers, 1 Pole
SPST 30@120VAC 120 (50/60 Hz) EH10 EH10 73128159 79.83
Electronic Water Heater Timers, 2 Pole
DPST 30@240VAC 240 (50/60 Hz) EH40 EH40 73128167 115.79

Basics of...Choosing the Right Type of Proximity Sensor

Capacitive Sensor Output Signal
• Detects any material For the DC version, there are two types of sensors:
• Affected by environment: humidity, dust, etc. • Basic sensor - PNP model, switching the positive side to the load (sourcing)
• Best for: bulk materials, liquids, and targets behind a separation wall & NPN model, switching the negative side to the load (sinking)
Inductive Sensor • Programmable, universal sensors
• Identifies only metal targets A single sensor, depending on the wiring connections, can perform any of the
• Predictable sensing technology (few variables) following 4 functions: PNP/NO, PNP/NC, NPN/NO, NPN/NC.
• Reliable industrial technology NOTE: The output can only be wired to a single load.

3640 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 160
 SWITCHES, CONTACTORS & CONTACTOR TECH INFO
Rainproof Pullout Type Disconnects Switched Disconnect Safety Enclosures
for Air Conditioning Application
Non-fused and fused versions available.
Single Phase - 240VAC - with two wire equipment ground to case. NEMA 3R • Nonmetallic enclosure is Type 4X washdown resistant and non-conductive
rainproof, metallic/galvanized steel enclosure. Horsepower ratings apply • Internal frame bonds all grounds automatically
when time delay fuses are used. • Accepts auxiliary contacts to extend the function of the device
Fuse Size (In.) Wt. • Lockable highly visible red handle to meet OSHA lock/tagout regulations
Amps Type HP Width Height Depth (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Amp Voltage Type Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
60 Cartridge 10 Max 57⁄16 813⁄16 33⁄16 4.5 DPF222R 00438655 $81.14 30 600V AC (max) Unfused HBLDS3 54034624 $320.91
60 Non-Fusible 10 Max 57⁄16 813⁄16 33⁄16 4.5 DPU222R 00438648 75.31 60 600V AC (max) Unfused HBLDS6 54034632 440.76
100 600V AC (max) Unfused HBLDS10 54034640 578.08
30 600V AC (max) Fused FDS30 54034657 1075.06
60 600V AC (max) Fused FDS60 54034665 1231.74

Basics of...Contactors
A contactor does not provide overload protection. Contactors are used to electrically turn on or off high current, non-motor loads or in motor circuits where overload
protection is separately provided. The contactor operates by applying a control voltage to the contactor coil. When the coil is energized, the movable contacts are
closed against the stationary contacts, thus completing the circuit. The contactor is therefore used to supply and interrupt power to an electrical load.
NEMA Contactors. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association) establishes product design standards and test specifications for these contactors. These
contactors are capable of general jogging and reversing duty. NEMA contactors can be applied with limit application information.
IEC Contactors. IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) publishes recommendations for certain product design parameters and laboratory test procedures. In
general, IEC standards allow the contactor to have a smaller creepage path and a higher temperature rise than NEMA, which results in a smaller physical size. Also, Page
when sizing an IEC contactor, knowing an application’s duty cycle and jogging and reversing characteristics becomes important. 3665
Page 161

Manual Contactors
Switches Enclosure
• Compact design provides extra wiring room for easy, fast installation • Can be padlocked to conform to OSHA lockout requirements
• Easy-to-read electrical ratings on rugged steel mounting straps ensure accurate identification • Color: Gray
• Highly visible “ON/OFF” markings on large, rugged toggles make the switch easy to operate Switches with Enclosure
and reduce the risk of errors • Totally enclosed body eliminates exposed contacts
• Cam and roll design provides dependable, trouble-free switch action • Enclosures can be padlocked to conform to OSHA lockout requirements
• Distinct wire pockets and thick-wall arc barriers prevent strands from straying • Thick steel 0.060w (1.52mm) construction with gray baked enamel finish
• Switch configuration: two-position switches, maintained contact, single throw • Double-break, silver-alloy, butt-type contacts provide long life
• Single phase • Color: Black • Separate arc-quenching chambers isolate each pole. Front terminals are designed for easy wiring
Switches
NEMA Amperage Horsepower Wiring No. of
Configuration Rating Voltage @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC @ 480 VAC @ 600 VAC Method Poles Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
NEMA 1 20 250, 600 2 3 5 7.5 Back & Side 2 AH6808UDAC A78006764 $35.99
NEMA 1 30 600 2 5 7.5 7.5 Front 2 AH6810U A78006772 64.99
NEMA 1 30 600 3 7.50 15 15 Front 3 AH7810UD 1
A78006780 96.99
NEMA 1 40 600 3 5 15 15 Side Wired 2 AHMC240C 1
A78006707 75.99
NEMA 1 40 600 3 5 15 15 Side Wired 2 AHMC240L 2
A78006715 82.00
NEMA 1 40 600 3 7.50 15 20 Side Wired 3 AHMC340C A78006731 123.00
NEMA 1 40 600 3 7.50 15 20 Side Wired 3 AHMC340L 2
A78006749 136.00
NEMA 1 60 600 3 5 15 15 Side Wired 2 AHMC260L 2
A78006723 134.00 Switches Enclosure Switch w/Enclosure
NEMA 1 60 600 5 10 25 30 Side Wired 3 AHMC360L 2
A78006756 167.00
1
Screw and clamp 2Box lug Switches with Enclosure
NEMA Horsepower No. of Switch
Enclosure Configuration @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC @ 480 VAC @ 600 VAC Poles Configuration Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
NEMA NEMA 1 3 7.50 15 15 3 Three Pole/Single Throw AHN1GD 1
A09143728 $36.00
Configuration Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. NEMA 1 3 7.50 15 15 3 Three Pole/Single Throw AH7810GD A78006616 113.00
NEMA 3R AHN3WD A78006608 $99.00 NEMA 3R 3 7.50 15 15 3 Three Pole/Single Throw AH7810WD A78006624 169.00
1
Single gang

NEMA Rated AC Contactors Freedom® Series NEMA Rated Contactors

Lighting Electrically Held - Type CN35 magnetically held, designed to • Designed specifically for use in applications requiring NEMA ratings. Contactors meet or
handle the switching of tungsten (incandescent filament) or ballast exceed NEMA standards ICS 2-1988
(fluorescent and mercury arc) lamp loads as well as other non-motor • Long life twin break, silver cadmium oxide contacts - provide excellent conductivity and
(resistive) loads. Coil voltage 120/60 or 110/50. superior resistance to welding and arc erosion
LOADS • Designed to 3,000,000 electrical operations at max. hp ratings up through 25 hp at 600 volts
Ballast Lamps = Fluorescent, Mercury Vapor, Sodium Vapor, • Holding circuit contact(s) supplied as standard
Quartz - 600V maximum. Sizes 00-3 have NO auxiliary contact block mounted on right hand side (on size 00,
contact occupies 4th power pole position - no increase in width). Sizes 4 have a NO
Filament Lamps = Incandescent, Infrared, Sodium Iodine, contact block mounted on left side.
Heating - 480V maximum. • Steel mounting plate standard on all open type contactors
Resistance Heating = Radiant and convection heating, • Motor Voltage: 115, 200, 230, 460, 575
furnaces and ovens.
Type CN15 NEMA Rated Contactors - 3 Pole (3 Phase)
Max. Ampere Rating No. of Poles Frame Size (mm) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
NEMA Cont Amp. Max. H.P. Magnet Coil
10A 3 45 CN35AN3AB 00535591 $304.31 Size Rating 1 Phase Voltage (60Hz) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
20A 3 45 CN35BN3AB 00535609 381.21
00 9 1⁄3 120/60 CN15AN3AB 02353134 $278.68
30A 3 45 CN35DN3AB 00535617 443.64
0 18 1 120/60 CN15BN3AB 02353142 347.78
60A 3 65 CN35GN3AB 00535625 810.38
1 27 2 120/60 CN15DN3AB 02353159 405.75
100A 3 90 CN35KN3A 00535633 1383.33
2 45 3 120/60 CN15GN3AB 02353167 751.30
3 90 — 120/60 CN15KN3A 02353175 1211.67
4 135 — 120/60 CN15NN3A 02353183 2860.29

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3665

MOTORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Motors
It is important to select the motor that will help assure optimum performance of the equipment to be driven. To do this, a motor must be selected that is capable of
starting the equipment, bringing it up to operating speed, and driving it at the necessary loading speed as long as required without excessive heating. The following
motor specifications should be considered.
Category/Application

Review the chart below to determine what category of motor is needed.

CATEGORY COMMON APPLICATIONS COMMON MOTOR TYPES

General Purpose • Belt Drive Fans • Split Phase

• Belt Drive Blowers • Capacitor Start
• Pumps • Three Phase
• Conveyors
• Machine Tools
• Compressors
• Material Handling

Definite / • Washdown • Permanent Split

Special Purpose • Hazardous Location
• Farm Duty
• Close Coupled Pump
• Fire Pump
• Pool & Spa Pump
• Elevator Duty
• Gate & Door
• Commercial Jet Pump
HVAC • Condenser Fan
• Direct Drive Blower & Fan
• Belt Drive Blower & Fan
• Unit Heater
• Room AC / Fan Coil
• Evaporative Cooler
• Hot Water Circulator
• Oil Burner
• Unit Bearing
• Cooling Tower
• Refrigeration·
• Air-Circulating
Capacitor (PSC)
• Split Phase
• Capacitor Start
• Three Phase Horsepower (HP)
Measurement of how much work is done in a specific amount of time. This value
indicates the power output of the motor and usually is specified as a fraction or in
a whole number. Small motors can be rated in watts.
Tip: Select a motor with equal or greater horsepower to the existing motor.
Tip: If no HP or Watt rating is available, amp draw (typically available on the
nameplate) provides the next best characteristic to sizing the motor.
• PSC
• Shaded Pole RPM
• Split Phase
• Capacitor Start Revolutions per minute (RPM) indicate how fast the motor shaft will rotate under
• Three Phase the specified load (HP). Multi-speed motors can be rated either with the RPM and
the number of speeds (1075/3-speed) or with the RPM for each speed .
Poles and RPM are used interchangeably. Reference the chart below.
Poles Synchronous RPM Typical Nameplate RPM
2 3600 3000-3450
4 1800 1625-1750
6 1200 1050-1140
8 900 825-850

Tip: Match RPM within 5% of nameplate RPM.

Tip: Remember that the horsepower (HP) rating of the motor only applies to the high
Tip: Some motors can be used for multiple applications speed of a multi-speed motor. As the speed is reduced, the horsepower is reduced.

NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) along with electric motor member companies established a NEMA Premium® energy efficiency motors program
to provide highly energy efficient products that meet the needs and applications of users based on a consensus definition of "premium efficiency" and use of the NEMA
Premium® logo for premium products.

Choosing a motor with the NEMA Premium® logo will identify higher efficient motors that will save money in total energy operating cost and improve system reliability.

For more information about the NEMA Premium® efficiency motor program, go to www.nema.org/premiummotors.com.

Voltage

Voltage is the power rating at which the motor is designed to operate. A motor should operate at plus or minus 10% of nameplate voltage. A 230 volt motor should
operate over a range of 207 volts to 253 volts. A slash (/) between listed voltages indicates there is a different connection for these voltages. A hyphen (-) between
voltages listed usually indicates the same connection is used for these voltages. (No plus or minus 10%.)
Tip: Match to supplied voltage.
Tip: If the supplied voltage is 115, and the replacement motor is 115/230, the motor will work, if connected for 115 volts.

Frequency/Hertz (Hz)

The term hertz or frequency was formally called “cycles” and is nearly always 60 hertz in the USA and Canadian applications. Some foreign countries, especially
Europe use 50 hertz power supplies.
Tip: Match Hz exactly or with a 50/60 capable motor.

3672 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 162
 MOTORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Motors (cont’d)

Type/Phase
Select the motor type based on typical characteristics and uses.

MOTOR TYPE HP RANGE TYPICAL TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS TYPICAL USES

NAMEPLATE RPM
Shaded Pole, Up to 1⁄2 HP Multi-Speed, 1050, • Low efficiency Small Fans and Blowers, Unit Heaters, Space Heaters,
Single Phase 1550, 3000 • Not for belt drive as a rule Humidifiers, Freezer Blowers, Window Fans, Floor
• Air over design usually required Fans, Portable Evaporative Coolers
• Always single voltage
• Non-reversible
• Low starting torque
Permanent Split Up to 1 HP Multi-Speed, 825, • Improved efficiency vs. shaded pole Small Mounted Fans, Air Circulators, Blowers, Room
Capacitor (PSC), 1075, 1625, 3250 • Not for belt drive, as a rule AC and Central AC, Condenser Fans, Evaporator Fans,
Single Phase • Air over design usually required Furnace Blowers, Unit Heaters, Window Fans, Oil
• Typically single voltage Burners, Pool Pump, Door Operators, Animal
• Low starting torque Confinement Fans for: Poultry, Hogs, Cattle
Split Phase, Up to 1 HP 850, 1140, • Moderate efficiency Belted Fans, Blowers, AC Fans, Blowers, Office
Single Phase 1725, 3450 • Typically used in belt drive applications Machines, Small Centrifugal Pumps, Home
• No capacitor needed for start-up Appliances, Door Operators, Oil Burners, Poultry
• Available in single voltage and dual voltage Feeders, Attic Fans, Furnace Blowers, Small Tools,
• Generally reversible rotation Lathes
• Medium starting torque
Capacitor Start, 1⁄6 to 10 HP 850, 1140, • Improved efficiency vs. split phase Compressors, Conveyors, Pumps, Augers, Machine
Single Phase 1725, 3450 • Typically used in belt drive applications Tools, Grain Stirrers, Ventilation Fans, Food
• Capacitor Required Equipment, Barn Cleaners, Vacuum Pumps, Manure
• Available in single voltage and dual voltage Pumps, Milk Coolers, Elevators, Cattle Feeders
• Generally reversible rotation
• High starting torque
Three Phase ¼ HP and Up 850, 1140, • High to Premium efficiency Compressors, Conveyors, Pumps, Augers, Machine
1725, 3450 • Used in belt drive and direct drive Tools, Grain Stirrers, Ventilation Fans, Food
applications Equipment, Barn Cleaners, Vacuum Pumps, Manure
• Three phase power required Pumps, Milk Coolers, Elevators, Cattle Feeders,
• Typically dual voltage Drying Fans, Gear Motors
• Generally reversible rotation
• High starting torque
Tip: In many cases a PSC motor can replace a shaded pole motor, and a capacitor start motor can replace a split phase motor assuming the other key
characteristics are met.

Environment
Select the motor type based on the operating environment.
ENVIRONMENT TYPE TYPICAL DESCRIPTION
Clean, Dry, Indoor, OAO Open Air Over Vent openings in shell and/or end shields must be located in air stream to provide motor cooling.
Non-Hazardous

ODP Open Drip Proof Vent openings that are placed so drops of liquid falling within an angle of 15 degrees from vertical will
not affect performance.

Dirty, Damp, Outdoor, TEFC Totally No vent openings in shell or end shield. Includes an external fan that blows cooling air over the
Non-Hazardous Enclosed Fan Cooled motor frame.

TENV Totally No vent openings in shell or end shield. Depends on convection air for cooling.
Enclosed Non Vented

TEAO Totally No vent openings in shell or end shield. Depends on airflow from driven device for motor cooling. Must
Enclosed Air Over be loaded in air stream.

Hazardous TEFC/TENV No vent openings in shell or end shields. Designed to withstand an internal explosion of specified gases
Explosion-Proof or vapors and not allow the internal flame or explosion to escape.

Tip: A totally enclosed motor can replace an open motor assuming other characteristics meet the application requirements.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3673

Page 163
MOTORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Motors (cont’d)

Select Mounting
Mounting is the way a motor mounts to the application. This is usually determined by the application itself, how the motor is to be used, and where it will be mounted.
Below are some of the typical mounting configurations:

RESILIENT or CRADLE BASE RIGID or FOOTED BASE YOKE MOUNT C-FACE WITHOUT BASE
Motor is isolated from base by Motor base is welded or bolted Tabs are welded to bottom of End shield has holes for mounting
rubber rings on the end shield directly to motor shell motor shell for bolting to a fan
column or bracket

C-FACE WITH BASE RING STUD

End shield has holes for mounting, with base Rubber rings on each end shield. No base Extended thru-bolts (studs) for mounting

Tip: Many times the frame designation helps identify the way the motor is mounted (56C = C-Face)

Thermal Overload/Protector
A temperature-sensing device built into the motor that shuts off the motor if the temperature becomes excessive due to failure-to-start or overloading.
Automatic Reset Thermal Overload Protector (auto) - after motor cools, thermal protector automatically restores power.
Should not be used where unexpected restarting would be hazardous.
Manual Reset Thermal Overload Protector (man) - An external button must be pushed to restore power to motor.
Preferred where unexpected restarting would be hazardous, as on saws, conveyors, compressors, etc.
If the motor does not have thermal protection, then the nameplate will be blank or will show non protected “none”.
Tip: It is important to match the thermal protection to the motor that is being replaced.

Bearing Type
Bearings support the rotating parts of the motor. They are usually either ball or sleeve.
Tip: Sleeve: Used on fractional HP motors with low to moderate loads. Ball: Used where a higher load capacity is required.

Service Factor
A measure of the reserve margin built into a motor. Motors rated over 1.0 SF have more than normal margin, and are used where unusual conditions such as
occasional high or low voltage, momentary overloads, etc., are likely to occur.
Tip: Always match the service factor with the same or higher.
Insulation Class

The insulation class refers to the class of insulation and related components used in the
motor. These are rated by standard NEMA classifications according to the motor’s CLASS TOTAL TEMPERATURE OF SYSTEM
maximum operating temperatures. A 105°C (221°F)
B 130°C (266°F)
F 155°C (311°F)
Tip: Keep in mind, each 10° C rise above the ratings can reduce the life of the motor by half. H 180°C (356°F)
Tip: Under normal conditions a replacement motor should have a class equal to or higher than the
original. If the replacement is a lower rating, it could cause premature failure. (Maximum Allowable Operating Temperature)

3674 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 164
 MOTORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Motors (cont’d)

Frame
Frame size is defined by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association). See NEMA Chart below.
NEMA Frame Suffix Code Chart Tips:
C = Face Mount • If unsure of the frame size, measuring the shaft height is your best indicator to determine the
H = Has 2F dimension larger than same frame without H suffix frame size of the motor
J = Face mount to fit jet pump • Letters in front of the frame size number typically are ignored (manufacturer specific code)
JM, JP = Face mount to fit close-coupled pumps • Letters after the frame size number are important in selecting the correct replacement motor
K = Has hub for sump pump mounting • Motors with frame designation that include Y and Z after the frame size, in most cases can be
M = Flange mount for oil burner (5 1⁄2"rabbet diameter) replaced with a standard motor (Measure shaft and note mounting method to compare with
N = Flange mount for oil burner (6 3⁄8" rabbet diameter) replacement motor)
T, TS = Integral HP motor dimension NEMA standards set in 1964 • A 56HZ motor can be replaced by a 143T or 145T frame motor
U = Integral HP motor dimension NEMA standards set in 1953
Y = Non-standard mounting, see manufacturers drawing
Z = Non-standard shaft extension
Example: 56C - 56(NEMA Frame Designation),
C(NEMA Frame Suffix Code)

JM Shaft JP Shaft
Keyseat Keyseat
Frame AH U EM EL EN AK R S Frame AH U EM EL EN AK R S
143 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 143 75⁄16 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16

145 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 145 75⁄16 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16

182 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 182 75⁄16 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16

184 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 184 75⁄16 11⁄4 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16

213 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 213 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

215 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 215 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

254 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 254 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

256 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 256 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

284 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 284 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

286 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 286 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

324 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 324 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

326 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 326 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4

364 81⁄8 15⁄8 13⁄4 21⁄8 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 113⁄32 3⁄8

365 81⁄8 15⁄8 13⁄4 21⁄8 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 113⁄32 3⁄8

Type C-Face AC Motors, Footed or Footless

BF Hole
Frame Tap Bolt Penetration Keyseat
Designation AJ AK BA BB Min. BC BD Max. Number Size Allowance U AH R S
42C 33⁄4 3 21⁄16 1⁄8 -0.19 5 4 1⁄4-20 - 3⁄8 15⁄16 21⁄64 flat
48C 33⁄4 3 21⁄2 1⁄8 -0.19 55⁄8 4 1⁄4-20 - 1⁄2 111⁄16 29⁄64 flat
56C 57⁄8 41⁄2 23⁄4 1⁄8 -0.19 61⁄2 4 3⁄8-16 - 5⁄8 21⁄16 33⁄64 3⁄16

143TC & 145TC 57⁄8 41⁄2 23⁄4 1⁄8 0.12 61⁄2 4 3⁄8-16 9⁄16 7⁄8 21⁄8 49⁄64 3⁄16

182TC & 184TC 71⁄4 81⁄2 31⁄2 1⁄4 +0.12 9 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 11⁄8 25⁄8 63⁄64 1⁄4

182TCH & 184TCH 57⁄8 81⁄2 31⁄2 1⁄8 +0.12 61⁄2 4 3⁄8-16 9⁄16 11⁄8 25⁄8 63⁄64 1⁄4

213TC & 215TC 71⁄4 41⁄2 41⁄4 1⁄4 +0.12 9 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 13⁄8 31⁄8 113⁄64 5⁄16

254TC & 256TC 71⁄4 81⁄2 43⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 10 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 15⁄8 33⁄4 113⁄32 3⁄8

284TC & 286TC 9 81⁄2 43⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 111⁄4 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 17⁄8 43⁄8 119⁄32 1⁄2

284TSC & 286TSC 9 101⁄2 43⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 111⁄4 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 15⁄8 3 113⁄32 3⁄8

324TC & 326TC 11 101⁄2 51⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 14 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 21⁄8 5 127⁄32 1⁄2

324TSC & 326TSC 11 121⁄2 51⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 14 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 17⁄8 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2

364TC & 365TC 11 121⁄2 57⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 14 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 23⁄8 55⁄8 21⁄64 5⁄8

364TSC & 365TSC 11 121⁄2 57⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 14 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 17⁄8 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2

404TC & 405TC 11 121⁄2 65⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 151⁄2 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 27⁄8 7 229⁄64 3⁄4

404TSC & 405TSC 11 121⁄2 65⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 151⁄2 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 21⁄8 4 127⁄32 1⁄2

444TC & 445TC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 33⁄8 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8

444TSC & 445TSC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 23⁄8 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8

447TC & 449TC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 33⁄8 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8

447TSC & 449TSC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 23⁄8 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8

5000 Frame Series 141⁄2 161⁄2 - 1⁄4 +0.25 18 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 - - - -

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3675

Page 165
GENERAL PURPOSE MOTORS

Basics of...Motors (cont’d)

AC Foot-Mounted Motors with Single Straight Shaft Extension

Frame A Keyseat AA Frame A Keyseat AA
Designation Max. D E 2F BA H U N-W V Min. R S Min. Designation Max. D E 2F BA H U N-W V Min. R S Min.
42 - 2 5⁄8 13⁄4 111⁄16 21⁄16 9⁄32 slot 3⁄8 11⁄8 - 21⁄64 flat - 405U 20 10 8 133⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 2 3⁄8 71⁄8 67⁄8 21⁄64 5⁄8 2
48 - 3 21⁄8 23⁄4 21⁄2 11⁄32 slot 1⁄2 11⁄2 - 29⁄64 flat - 404US 20 10 8 121⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 2 1⁄8 41⁄4 4 17⁄8 1⁄2 2
48H - 3 21⁄8 43⁄4 21⁄2 11⁄32 slot 1⁄2 11⁄2 - 29⁄64 flat - 405US 20 10 8 133⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 2 1⁄8 41⁄4 4 17⁄8 1⁄2 2
56 - 3 1⁄2 27⁄16 3 23⁄4 11⁄32 slot 5⁄8 17⁄8 - 33⁄64 3⁄16 - 404T 20 10 8 133⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 2 7⁄8 71⁄4 7 229⁄64 3⁄4 3
56H - 3 1⁄2 27⁄16 5 23⁄4 11⁄32 slot 5⁄8 17⁄8 - 33⁄64 3⁄16 - 405T 20 10 8 121⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 27⁄8 71⁄4 7 229⁄64 3⁄4 3
143T 7 31⁄2 23⁄4 4 21⁄4 11⁄32 hole 7⁄8 21⁄4 2 49⁄64 3⁄16 3⁄4 404TS 20 10 8 133⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 21⁄8 41⁄4 4 127⁄32 1⁄2 3
145T 7 31⁄2 23⁄4 5 21⁄4 11⁄32 hole 7⁄8 21⁄4 2 49⁄64 3⁄16 3⁄4 405TS 20 10 8 121⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 21⁄8 41⁄4 4 127⁄32 1⁄2 3
182 9 41⁄2 33⁄4 41⁄2 23⁄4 13⁄32 hole 7⁄8 21⁄4 2 49⁄64 3⁄16 3⁄4 444U 22 11 9 133⁄4 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 27⁄8 85⁄8 83⁄8 229⁄64 3⁄4 21⁄2
184 9 41⁄2 33⁄4 51⁄2 23⁄4 13⁄32 hole 7⁄8 21⁄4 2 49⁄64 3⁄16 3⁄4 445U 22 11 9 141⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 27⁄8 85⁄8 83⁄8 229⁄64 3⁄4 21⁄2
182T 9 41⁄2 33⁄4 41⁄2 23⁄4 13⁄32 hole 11⁄8 23⁄4 21⁄2 63⁄64 21⁄2 3⁄4 444US 22 11 9 161⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 21⁄8 41⁄4 4 127⁄32 1⁄2 21⁄2
184T 9 41⁄2 33⁄4 51⁄2 23⁄4 13⁄32 hole 11⁄8 23⁄4 21⁄2 63⁄64 21⁄2 3⁄4 445US 22 11 9 141⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 21⁄8 41⁄4 4 127⁄32 1⁄2 21⁄2
213 101⁄2 51⁄4 41⁄4 51⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄32 hole 11⁄8 3 23⁄4 63⁄64 21⁄2 3⁄4 444T 22 11 9 161⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 33⁄8 81⁄2 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8 3
215 101⁄2 51⁄4 41⁄4 7 31⁄2 13⁄32 hole 11⁄8 3 23⁄4 63⁄64 21⁄2 3⁄4 445T 22 11 9 141⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 33⁄8 81⁄2 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8 3
213T 101⁄2 51⁄4 41⁄4 51⁄2 31⁄2 13⁄32 hole 13⁄8 33⁄8 31⁄8 113⁄64 5⁄16 1 447T 22 11 9 161⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 33⁄8 81⁄2 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8 3
215T 101⁄2 51⁄4 41⁄4 7 31⁄2 13⁄32 hole 13⁄8 33⁄8 31⁄8 113⁄64 5⁄16 1 449T 22 11 9 20 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 33⁄8 81⁄2 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8 3
254U 121⁄2 61⁄4 5 81⁄4 41⁄4 17⁄32 hole 13⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 113⁄64 5⁄16 1 444TS 22 11 9 25 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 3
256U 121⁄2 61⁄4 5 10 41⁄4 17⁄32 hole 13⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 113⁄64 5⁄16 1 445TS 22 11 9 141⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 3
254T 121⁄2 61⁄4 5 81⁄4 41⁄4 17⁄32 hole 15⁄8 4 33⁄4 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄4 447TS 22 11 9 161⁄2 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 3
256T 121⁄2 61⁄4 5 10 41⁄4 17⁄32 hole 15⁄8 4 33⁄4 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄4 449TS 22 11 9 20 71⁄2 26⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 3
284U 14 7 51⁄2 91⁄2 43⁄4 17⁄32 hole 15⁄8 47⁄8 45⁄8 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄4 5004 25 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 37⁄8 115⁄8 111⁄4 35⁄16 1 -
286U 14 7 51⁄2 11 43⁄4 17⁄32 hole 15⁄8 47⁄8 45⁄8 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄4 5004G 25 121⁄2 10 16 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 31⁄2 101⁄2 102⁄8 3 7⁄8 -
284T 14 7 51⁄2 91⁄2 43⁄4 17⁄32 hole 17⁄8 45⁄8 43⁄8 119⁄32 1⁄2 11⁄2 5004S 25 121⁄2 10 16 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 27⁄8 53⁄4 51⁄2 229⁄64 3⁄4 -
286T 14 7 51⁄2 11 43⁄4 17⁄32 hole 17⁄8 45⁄8 43⁄8 119⁄32 1⁄2 11⁄2 5004SS 25 121⁄2 10 16 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 -
284TS 14 7 51⁄2 91⁄2 43⁄4 17⁄32 hole 15⁄8 31⁄4 3 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄2 5006L 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 16 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 47⁄8 145⁄8 143⁄8 411⁄64 11⁄4 -
286TS 14 7 51⁄2 11 43⁄4 17⁄32 hole 15⁄8 31⁄4 3 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄2 5006S 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 20 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 27⁄8 53⁄4 51⁄2 229⁄64 3⁄4 -
324U 16 8 61⁄4 101⁄2 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 17⁄8 55⁄8 53⁄8 119⁄32 1⁄2 11⁄2 5006MS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 20 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 33⁄8 63⁄4 61⁄2 27⁄8 7⁄8 -
326U 16 8 61⁄4 12 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 17⁄8 55⁄8 53⁄8 119⁄32 1⁄2 11⁄2 5008 25 121⁄2 10 20 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 37⁄8 115⁄8 111⁄4 35⁄16 1 -
324US 16 8 61⁄4 101⁄2 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 15⁄8 31⁄4 3 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄2 5008G 25 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 31⁄2 101⁄2 102⁄8 3 7⁄8 -
326US 16 8 61⁄4 12 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 15⁄8 31⁄4 3 113⁄32 3⁄8 11⁄2 5008L 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 47⁄8 145⁄8 143⁄8 411⁄64 11⁄4 -
324T 16 8 61⁄4 101⁄2 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 21⁄8 51⁄4 5 127⁄32 1⁄2 2 5008S 25 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 27⁄8 53⁄4 51⁄2 229⁄64 3⁄4 -
326T 16 8 61⁄4 12 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 21⁄8 51⁄4 5 127⁄32 1⁄2 2 5008S 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 27⁄8 53⁄4 51⁄2 229⁄64 3⁄4 -
324TS 16 8 61⁄4 101⁄2 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 17⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2 2 5008MS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 33⁄8 63⁄4 61⁄2 256⁄64 7⁄8 -
326TS 16 8 61⁄4 12 51⁄4 21⁄32 hole 17⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2 2 5008SS 25 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 -
364U 18 9 7 111⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 21⁄8 63⁄8 61⁄8 127⁄32 1⁄2 2 5008SS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 25 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 -
365U 18 9 7 121⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 21⁄8 63⁄8 61⁄8 127⁄32 1⁄2 2 5010L 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 32 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 47⁄8 145⁄8 143⁄8 411⁄64 11⁄4 -
364US 18 9 7 111⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 17⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2 2 5010S 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 32 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 27⁄8 53⁄4 51⁄2 229⁄64 3⁄4 -
365US 18 9 7 121⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 1 7⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2 2 5010MS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 32 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 33⁄8 63⁄4 61⁄2 27⁄8 7⁄8 -
364T 18 9 7 111⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 2 3⁄8 57⁄8 55⁄8 21⁄64 5⁄8 3 5010SS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 32 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 -
365T 18 9 7 121⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 2 3⁄8 57⁄8 55⁄8 21⁄64 5⁄8 3 5012L 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 40 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 47⁄8 145⁄8 143⁄8 411⁄64 11⁄4 -
364TS 18 9 7 111⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 1 7⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2 3 5012S 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 40 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 27⁄8 53⁄4 51⁄2 229⁄64 3⁄4 -
365TS 18 9 7 121⁄4 57⁄8 21⁄32 hole 1 7⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2 3 5012MS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 40 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 33⁄8 63⁄4 61⁄2 27⁄8 7⁄8 -
404U 20 10 8 121⁄4 65⁄8 26⁄32 hole 2 3⁄8 71⁄8 67⁄8 21⁄64 5⁄8 2 5012SS 281⁄2 121⁄2 10 40 81⁄2 30⁄32 hole 23⁄8 43⁄4 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8 -

General Purpose Motors - Split Phase ODP (Rigid Base)

Shaft Interchange Applications:
Nameplate NEMA Thermal Voltage Full Load Service Ins. Dimensions Wt. Guide For use with belt drive fans and blowers, pumps,
HP RPM Frame Protection 60 Hz Amps Factor Class Bearings Dia. x L (In.) (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Dayton/Other1 Order # Price Ea. conveyors, machine tools and compressors.
Single Speed Features:
1⁄4 1725 48 Auto 110/220 4.7/2.3 & 5.5/2.3 1.00 B Ball 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 15 D14BA2L4 6XJ46 04092078 $137.31 • 40C Ambient • 60Hz
1⁄4 1725 48 Auto 115 5.4 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 14 D14B2N4A 5K911 04092169 115.66 • Reversible Rotation
1⁄4 1725 56Z Auto 115 5.4 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 14 D14B2NZA 5K279 04092136 112.67 • Continuous Duty
1⁄3 3450 48 Auto 115 6.6 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 14 D13B1N4 5K586 04091799 122.85
1⁄3 1725 48 Auto 115 6.8 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 16 D13B2N4A 5K916 04091898 102.64
1⁄3 1725 48 Auto 115 6.0 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 16 D13BA2N4A 5K601 04091781 132.07
1⁄3 1725 48Z Auto 115 5.9 1.15 B Ball 1⁄2 x 21⁄4 14 D13B2N4Z 6XH45 04091914 86.51
1⁄3 1725 56Z Auto 115 6.0 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 15 D13B2NZA 5K281 04091864 111.42
1⁄3 1725 56Z Auto 115 6.0 1.00 B Ball 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 15 D13BA2NZ 5K412 04091773 140.00
1⁄2 3450 48 Auto 115 8.6 1.00 B Sleeve 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 15 D12B1N4A 6K844 04091476 162.39
1⁄2 1725 48 Auto 115 8.8 1.00 B Ball 1⁄2 x 11⁄2 18 D12B2N4 5K984 04091591 157.14
1⁄2 1725 56 None 115 8.6 1.00 B Sleeve 5⁄8 x 17⁄8 20 D12B2NA 5K433 04091542 162.87 Refer to Page Nos. 3675 & 3676 for NEMA
1⁄2 1725 56 Manual 115 8.6 1.00 B Ball 5⁄8 x 17⁄8 21 D12BM2N 5K597 04091468 179.78 motor dimensions & technical information.
1
Product may be different in brand or specifications. Please review product detail to select the correct product for your applications. Other brands include Leeson, GE, A.O. Smith, Reliance, others

3676 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 166
HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS

Basics of...Hazardous Location Motors

Hazardous Location Definitions

HAZARDOUS Location: An area where the possibility of explosion and fire is created by the presence of flammable gases, vapors, dusts, fibers or flying particles
CLASS I: Those areas in which flammable gases or vapors may be present in the air in sufficient quantities to be explosive or ignitable
CLASS II: Those areas made hazardous by the presence of combustible dust
CLASS III: Those areas in which there are easily ignitable fibers or flyings present, due to type of material being handled, stored or processed
DIVISION 1: In the normal situation; the hazard would be expected to be present in everyday production operations or during frequent repair and maintenance activity
DIVISION 2: In the abnormal situation; material is expected to be confined within closed containers or closed systems and will be present only through accidental
rupture, breakage or unusual faulty operation
Operating Temperature Codes
These are simplified definitions - refer to National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 500 for complete definitions.
Maximum Temperature Temperature
Groups °C °F Code
Class Group Hazardous Materials 450 842 T1
Class I 300 572 T2
The gases and vapors of Class I locations are A Acetylene 280 536 T2A
broken into four groups by the codes A, B, C and D. B Hydrogen 260 500 T2B
These materials are grouped according to the C Ethyl-Ether, Ethylene, Cycle Propane 230 446 T2C
ignition temperature of the substance, its D Gasoline, Hexane, Naptha, Benzene, Butane, Propane, Alcohol, 215 419 T2D
explosion pressure and other flammable characteristics. Lacquer Solvent Vapors, Natural Gas 200 392 T3
Class II 180 356 T3A
Class II - dust locations - groups E, F & G. These 165 329 T3B
groups are classified according to the ignition E Metal Dust 160 320 T3C
temperature and the conductivity of the F Carbon Black, Coal, Coke Dust 135 275 T4
hazardous substance. G Flour, Starch, Grain Dust 120 248 T4A
Notes: 100 212 T5
1) We offer Class I and Class II only. We do not offer Group A or B 85 185 T6
2) Group C available on 250 through 400 Frames Notes: 1) T1, T2 & T6 not offered
3) Group E not available on NEMA Frame Motors 2) T1 through T2D not applicable to Class II locations
Tip: When purchasing an Explosionproof Motor you must verify correct Division, Class, Group and Temperature Code 3) T2A through T2D, Class I Group D only

Page 167 Page 3692

Definite Purpose Motors - Single Phase Hazardous Location

Name Plate NEMA Voltage Full Load Service Wt. Interchange Guide Hazardous Location Rigid w/Base & C-Face w/o Base
HP (RPM) Frame 60 Hz Amps Factor Bearings (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Dayton/Other1 Order # Price Ea.
Rigid with Base (Non C-Face)
1⁄4 1725 56 115/208-230 4.6/2.3-2.3 1.00 Ball 19 XS14CA2J 6K034 00643411 $350.32
1⁄3 1725 56 115/208-230 6.8/3.3-3.4 1.00 Ball 28 XS13CA2J 6K036 00643387 308.85
1⁄3 1140 56 115/208-230 7.3/3.7-3.7 1.00 Ball 31 XS13CA3P 4CB90 00643403 664.13
1⁄2 3450 56 115/208-230 8.0/4.0-4.0 1.00 Ball 29 XS12CA1J 6K110 00643346 367.15
1⁄2 1725 56 115/208-230 9.8/4.9-4.9 1.00 Ball 28 XS12CA2J 6K039 00643361 349.75
3⁄4 3450 56 115/208-230 9.8/4.9-4.9 1.00 Ball 31 XS34CA1J 6K111 00643429 488.38
3⁄4
Applications:
1725 56 115/208-230 12.6/6.3-6.3 1.00 Ball 31 XS34CA2J 6K040 00643445 429.59 Designed for air compressors, pumps, conveyors, blowers and general
1 3450 56 115/208-230 12.0/6.0-6.0 1.00 Ball 41 XS1CA1J 6K112 00643304 541.76 industrial equipment located in hazardous areas.
1 1725 56H 115/208-230 13.6/6.8-6.8 1.00 Ball 41 XS1CA2JH 6K041 00643338 474.91 Features:
C-Face without Base • Explosion-proof Class I (Group C and D), Class II (Group E, F and G)
1⁄3 1725 56C 115/208-230 6.8/3.3-3.4 1.00 Ball 28 XS13CA2JCR 6K330 00643395 348.29 • Class B Insulation • 40°C Ambient
1⁄2 3450 56C 115/208-230 8.0/4.0-4.0 1.00 Ball 27 XS12CA1JCR 1K069 00643353 366.65 • Temp code: T3B • Thermal protection: auto
1⁄2 1725 56C 115/208-230 9.8/4.9-4.9 1.00 Ball 28 XS12CA2JCR 6K333 00643379 363.71
3⁄4 3450 56C 115/208-230 9.8/4.9-4.9 1.00 Ball 32 XS34CA1JCR 1K070 00643437 506.01
3⁄4 1725 56C 115/208-230 11.4/5.7-5.7 1.00 Ball 40 XS34CA2JCR 6K728 00643452 457.69 Refer to Page Nos. 3675 & 3676 for NEMA
1 3450 56C 115/208-230 12.0/6.0-6.0 1.00 Ball 41 XS1CA1JCR 1K071 00643312 592.72 motor dimensions & technical information.
1 1725 56C 115/208-230 14.0/6.9-7.0 1.00 Ball 41 XS1CA2JCR 1K072 00643320 581.11
1
Product may be different in brand or specifications. Please review product detail to select the correct product for your applications. Other brands include Leeson, GE, A.O. Smith, Reliance, others

Definite Purpose Motors - Three Phase Hazardous Location

Hazardous Location C-Face
Interchange Applications:
Nameplate NEMA Voltage Full Load Service Wt. Guide Designed for pumps, fans, compressors, conveyors and tools
HP RPM Frame 60 Hz Amps Factor (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Dayton/Other1 Order # Price Ea. located in hazardous locations as defined by class and group.
1⁄3 1725 56C 208-230/460 1.6-1.6/0.8 1.15 30 XS13SA2DCR 3N857 00643197 $606.31 Features:
1⁄2 1725 56C 208-230/460 2.2-2.2/1.1 1.15 30 XS12SA2DCR 3N858 00643189 459.24 • Explosion-proof Class I (Group C and D),
Class II (Group E, F and G)
3⁄4 3450 56C 208-230/460 2.7-2.7/1.35 1.15 36 XS34S1ACR 3GC51 00643247 585.80 • Listed for ambient temperature
3⁄4 1725 56C 208-230/460 2.8-2.9/1.4 1.15 36 XS34SA2ACR 3N859 00643239 479.07 -25°C to +40°C
1 3505 56C 208-230/460 3-3/1.5 1.00 47 Y1S1BCR 3N860 86354669 449.11
1 3480 56C 208-230/460 3.2-3.2/1.6 1.15 36 XS1S1ACR 3GC53 86353844 627.51
1 1745 143TC 208-230/460 3.2-3.2/1.6 1.00 60 X1S2BCR 3CG79 86353281 512.92
11⁄2 1725 143TC 208-230/460 4.8-4.8/2.4 1.15 60 XS32S2ACR 3GC56 00643213 705.00 Refer to Page Nos. 3675 & 3676 for NEMA
motor dimensions & technical information.
2 1725 145TC 208-230/460 5.9-5.9/2.9 1.15 65 XS2S2ACR 3GC58 00643205 725.90
1
Product may be different in brand or specifications. Please review product detail to select the correct product for your applications. Other brands include Leeson, GE, A.O. Smith, Reliance, others

3692 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
C-FACE WORM GEAR REDUCERS

Basics of...Worm Gear Speed Reducers

Enclosed Worm Gear Basics
• Worm gear speed reducers offer economical right angle power transmission
• Quiet operation and good shock load capabilities compared to other gear types
• Standard single reduction ratios available from stock: 5:1, 10:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 40:1, 50:1 and 60:1
• NEMA C-face connection provides ease of assembly/disassembly wth use of standard C-face motors
• Solid output shaft orientation is the most common. (hollow output also available)

Shaft Orientation

Left Output Right Output Left/Right Output

Manufacturer Cross Reference
Base C-Face Unit - (Add NEMA Frame and Ratio to Complete Part Descriptions)
Center Distance Morse Raider Boston 700 Grove Gear Dodge TIGEAR Ohio Gear Winsmith
1.33 133Q F173 BMQ213 Q133 B2133-MQ 913MDN
1.54 154Q F715 BMQ215 Q150 — —
1.75 175Q F718 BMQ218 Q175 B2175-MQ 917MDN
2.06 206Q F721 BMQ220 Q200 B2206-MQ 920MDN
2.37 237Q F724 BMQ224 — B2238-MQ 924MDN
2.62 262Q F726 BMQ226 Q262 B2262-MQ 926MDN Other Centers also
3.00 300Q F730 BMQ230 — B2300-MQ 930MDN available - Contact Page
3.25 325Q F732 BMQ232
Page 168
— B2325-MQ — Sales 3702

C-Face Worm Gear Reducers - 20-88 RPM Output

Raider - For Use with 1750 RPM Motors
• Rugged cast iron housing • Integral worm and shaft; hardened to 58RC
• Factory-filled PAG synthetic lubricant; superior efficiency and less heat • Texturized seal journals allow longer seal life
• Bearing on input enhances seal integrity; reduces leaks • Non-metallic quill liner eases motor installation and removal
• Computerized gear centering allows reduced overall oil temperatures • Interchangeable with many manufacturers
• Manufacturer’s leak-free guarantee for 12 months; any leaks, new unit provided
Solid Horizontal One Piece Bases
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
133-BKS 08433013 $18.44 237-BKS 08434623 $33.38 Horizontal Base 08432742 (Q Style)
154-BKS 08433385 22.50 262-BKS 08435174 35.51
175-BKS 08433757 26.09 300-BKS 08435877 43.42
206-BKS 08434185 29.94 325-BKS 08436602 50.10

Dimensions for Solid Horizontal One Piece Bases

A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Mfr’s # (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Dia. (In.) Single Shaft Left Single Shaft Right Double Shaft Left & Right
133-BKS 0.50 4.38 5.38 0.44 3.31 2.13 3.25 1.63 0.34 2.00 0.53 0.38 0.38
154-BKS 0.60 5.25 6.44 0.57 4.32 5.46 1.13 4.19 1.35 2.75 0.59 0.38 0.44
175-BKS 0.62 5.75 7.00 0.53 4.50 5.56 1.41 4.19 1.40 2.75 0.69 0.38 0.44
206-BKS 0.66 6.38 7.69 0.53 4.69 5.76 1.35 5.00 1.44 2.88 0.72 0.44 0.50
237-BKS 0.72 7.06 8.50 0.66 4.88 6.20 1.75 5.00 1.66 2.88 0.75 0.44 0.50
262-BKS 0.63 8.00 9.25 0.62 5.25 6.50 1.44 6.38 1.56 3.38 0.75 0.44 0.56
300-BKS 0.86 8.44 10.16 0.74 5.88 7.36 1.58 7.00 1.68 4.00 0.88 0.50 0.56
325-BKS 0.82 9.50 11.13 0.81 6.13 7.75 1.82 7.50 1.88 4.00 0.88 0.50 0.56

C-Face Worm Gear Reducers - Dimensions & Base Kits

Raider Plus Input Dimensions Raider Plus Output Shaft Dimensions (In.)
Center T U
Distance AB BB CB DB EB FB HB J KB L MB N PB R Deep Bore Keyway +.000w W Key
(In.) Frame (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Size (In.) (In.) (In.) -0.001w V Sq. Lgth.
1.33 56C 4.00 2.88 3.25 2.00 1.63 1.00 1.72 3.94 4.66 2.12 6.03 4.00 3.05 3.25 5⁄16-18 0.50 0.625 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 0.625 2.00 0.188 1.31
1.54 56C 5.13 3.69 4.19 2.75 2.00 1.38 1.91 4.52 5.38 2.75 6.78 4.31 3.45 3.25 5⁄16-18 0.50 0.625 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 0.750 1.78 0.188 1.25
1.54 143/145TC 5.13 3.69 4.19 2.75 2.00 1.38 1.91 4.52 5.38 2.75 6.78 4.31 3.45 3.25 5⁄16-18 0.50 0.875 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 0.750 1.78 0.188 1.25
1.75 56C 4.81 3.38 4.19 2.75 2.00 1.38 2.06 4.38 5.75 2.75 6.75 4.31 3.81 3.25 5⁄16-18 0.61 0.825 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 0.875 1.88 0.188 1.38
1.75 143/145TC 4.81 3.38 4.19 2.75 2.00 1.38 2.06 4.38 5.75 2.75 6.75 4.31 3.81 3.25 5⁄16-18 0.61 0.875 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 0.875 1.88 0.188 1.38
2.06 56C 5.50 3.75 5.00 2.88 2.50 1.44 2.28 4.75 6.38 3.00 7.25 4.69 4.34 3.25 3⁄8-18 0.61 0.825 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 1.000 2.00 0.250 1.75
2.06 143/145TC 5.50 3.75 5.00 2.88 2.50 1.44 2.28 4.75 6.38 3.00 7.25 4.69 4.34 3.25 3⁄8-18 0.61 0.875 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 1.000 2.00 0.250 1.75
2.37 56C 6.13 4.08 5.00 2.88 2.50 1.44 2.50 5.06 6.94 3.56 7.78 5.08 4.88 3.25 3⁄8-18 0.60 0.825 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 1.125 2.37 0.250 1.75
2.37 143/145TC 6.13 4.08 5.00 2.88 2.50 1.44 2.50 5.06 6.94 3.56 7.78 5.08 4.88 3.25 3⁄8-18 0.60 0.875 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 1.125 2.37 0.250 1.75
2.62 56C 7.12 4.44 6.38 3.38 3.19 1.69 2.94 5.69 8.00 3.69 8.50 5.83 5.57 3.25 3⁄8-18 0.58 0.825 3⁄16 x 3⁄32 1.125 2.50 0.250 2.00
Continued on next page

3702 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 OVERLOAD DEVICES, MECHANICAL CAM CLUTCHES TECH INFO
Torq/Gard® Torque Overload Devices
• Help protect the entire drive train from damage due to excessive torque generated by overloads and jamming • Mfr’s #TGC60 is compatible with type H split taper bushings
• Quickly reacts when torque exceeds preset limits • Mfr’s #TGC200 is compatible with type P1 split taper bushings
• Provide protection far superior to that of torque overload devices employing friction surfaces • Mfr’s #TGC400 and TGC800 are compatible with type Q1 split taper bushings
• Disengage at the torque limit set • Automatically reset by “jogging” the machine For Specific Split Taper Bushing Selection, Refer to Page No. 3715.
Torq/Gard® Precision Cam Follower ±5% Trip Torque Accuracy
Shaft Rge. Max. Shaft Rge. Max.
w/Bushing Bore Hub OAL OD Max. w/Bushing Bore Hub OAL OD Max.
Kits (In.) Dia. (In.) Keyseat (In.) (In.) RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Kits (In.) Dia. (In.) Keyseat (In.) (In.) RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 - 5⁄8 0.75 — 2.76 3.94 1800 TGC20 84809938 $852.42 11⁄4 - 27⁄16 2.43 5⁄8 x 3⁄16 6.19 10.75 350 TGC400 84809912 $2080.23
3⁄4 - 11⁄4 1.25 1⁄4 x 1⁄8 3.50 5.25 900 TGC60 84809896 944.45 11⁄4 - 27⁄16 2.43 5⁄8 x 3⁄16 6.19 10.75 350 TGC800 84809920 2672.09
3⁄4 - 115⁄16 1.93 1⁄2 x 1⁄8 4.31 7.00 680 TGC200 84809904 1172.09

Torq/Gard® Bushing Kits

For Torq/Gard® Shaft For Torq/Gard® Shaft For Torq/Gard® Shaft Torq/Gard® Ever-Flex Coupling
Mfr’s # Dia. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Dia. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Dia. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
TGC20 1⁄2 20BU008 72479157 $126.00 TGC200 1 200BU100 08431892 $98.62 TGC200 11⁄2 200BU108 08431934 $98.62
TGC20 5⁄8 20BU010 72479165 126.00 TGC200 11⁄4 200BU104 08431900 98.62 TGC800 2 800BU200 08431942 216.41
TGC60 3⁄4 60BU012 08431876 59.88 TGC200 13⁄8 200BU106 08431918 98.62
TGC60 1 60BU100 08431884 59.88 TGC200 17⁄16 200BU107 08431926 98.62

Torq/Gard® Ever-Flex Couplings

Overall Length Coupling Half Adapter Plate Overall Length Coupling Half Adapter Plate
Width R (In.) S (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Width R (In.) S (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
5.91 5.25 CHCFR5H 08431785 $142.58 60CAP5 08431827 $116.06 9.22 10.75 CHCFR9Q 08431801 $330.51 400CAP9 08431843 $911.20
7.06 7.88 CHCFR8P 08431793 261.20 200CAP8 08431835 396.17 9.53 10.75 CHCFR10Q 08431819 401.13 800CAP10 08431850 1048.88

Torq/Gard® Single Strand Sprockets for Use with ANSI Standard Roller Chain
For Torq/Gard® Model For Roller Chain # Pitch (In.) No. of Teeth Overall Width P (In.) Length Q (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Torq/Gard 20 40 1⁄2 26 2.88 4.42 20TG40A26K 72479173 $83.68
Torq/Gard 60 40 1⁄2 26 3.5 4.42 TG40A26K 84809979 80.45
Torq/Gard 200 60 3⁄4 26 4.38 6.63 TG60A26K 84809987 144.41
Torq/Gard 400 80 1 28 6.35 9.48 TG80A28K 84809995 211.32 Torq/Gard® Single
Torq/Gard 800 100 11⁄4 28 6.46 11.84 TG100A28K 84810001 274.72 Strand Sprocket

Basics of...Mechanical Cam Clutches

Mechanical Cam Clutches are similar to one-way bearings. During operation, the clutch locks the inner or outer race through the wedging action of cams. The clutch
transmits torque in one direction of rotation while overrunning in the opposite direction of rotation. Clutches perform three basic operations: overrunning,
backstopping or indexing. When selecting the appropriate mechanical cam clutch, it is important to know the torque requirement and speed of the application.
Common Applications
• Induction draft fans • Stand-by power units • Inclined Conveyors • Printing machinery
• Speed reducers • Two-speed grinders • Packaging machinery • Punch presses
• Compressors • Pumps • Textile looms • Washing machines
• Multi-stage conveyors • Dry cleaning machinery • Cranes and hoists • Food processing machinery
• Wire winding machinery
3 Different Operating Modes
Indexing

Overrunning Backstopping

Inner or Outer Race Overrunning Prevents reverse rotation of the drive shaft Page
Page 169
Accomplishes intermittent unidirectional motion 3717

Mechanical Clutches - KK Series

• Unique construction combines a general-duty cam clutch with a 6200 Series metric ball bearing
• For use in applications ranging from exercise equipment to industrial machinery • Compact cam clutch with built-in bearing support
• General purpose clutch intended for backstopping, indexing and overrunning applications • Can be utilized with both oil and grease lubrication

Bore Torque Max. Inner Max. Outer Drag Dynamic Static Width Dia. Bore Housing
Dia. (mm) (Nm) Race (RPM) Race (RPM) Torque (Nm) Load Cap. (N) Load Cap. (N) (mm) (mm) Tolerance (mm) Tolerance (mm) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
15 29 3600 2000 0.01 5950 3230 11 35 +0.023/+0.012 -0.012/-0.028 KK15 75674911 $180.48
17 43 3500 1900 0.01 7000 3700 12 40 +0.023/+0.012 -0.012/-0.028 KK17 75674929 197.06
20 61 3000 1600 0.014 8500 4900 14 47 +0.028/+0.015 -0.012/-0.028 KK20 75674937 204.88
25 78 2500 1400 0.017 10700 6300 15 52 +0.028/+0.015 -0.014/-0.033 KK25 75674945 226.34
30 140 2000 1100 0.03 11900 7900 16 62 +0.033/+0.017 -0.014/-0.033 KK30 75674952 245.85
35 173 1800 1000 0.034 13500 9700 17 72 +0.033/+0.017 -0.014/-0.033 KK35 75674960 308.28
40 260 1800 900 0.04 14500 11700 22 80 +0.033/+0.017 -0.014/-0.033 KK40 75674978 332.93

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3717

SPUR GEARS & RACKS/SLEEVE BEARING TECHNICAL INFO
Spur Gears & Racks
Nylon & Acetal Spur Gears - Acetal Gear Racks
No. of Pitch Face Bore Hub 20° Pressure Angle Thick. L 14.5° Pressure Angle 20° Pressure Angle
Pitch Teeth Dia. (In.) W (In.) Dia. (In.) Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Pitch (In.) (Ft.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
32 26 0.812 3⁄16 3⁄16 9⁄16 00230946 $6.20 20 3⁄8 4 35415009 $135.63 00230995 $129.53
32 28 0.875 3⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄2 00230953 6.53 16 1⁄2 4 35415017 104.85
32 30 0.937 ⁄16 3 3⁄16 9⁄16 00230961 6.88 12 3⁄4 4 35444652 112.92
24 18 0.750 1⁄4 3⁄16 35 ⁄64 00230912 5.84 10 1 4 35444686 157.17
24 26 1.083 1⁄4 1⁄4 5⁄8 00230920 7.47 8 11⁄4 4 35444694 185.88
24 30 1.250 1⁄4 1⁄4 5⁄8 00230938 8.42 8 11⁄4 4 00230987 214.93
20 14 0.700 3⁄8 5⁄16 9⁄16 35444751 4.98 8 3⁄4 4 00230979 171.89
20 18 0.900 3⁄8 5⁄16 43 ⁄64 35444793 5.74 6 11⁄2 4 35444710 228.80
Spur Gears - Nylon 20 30 1.500 3⁄8 3⁄8 47⁄64 35444892 8.21
Pitch Face Bore Hub 14.5° Pressure Angle Pitch Face Bore Hub 14.5° Pressure Angle Pitch Face Bore Hub 14.5° Pressure Angle
No. of Dia. W Dia. Dia. No. of Dia. W Dia. Dia. No. of Dia. W Dia. Dia.
Pitch Teeth (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Pitch Teeth (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. Pitch Teeth (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea.
20 11 0.600 3⁄8 1⁄4 15⁄32 35414754 $15.86 12 16 1.333 3⁄4 1⁄2 11⁄16 35414580 $36.02 10 50 5.000 1 3⁄4 21⁄2 00230615 $99.87
20 55 2.750 ⁄8 ⁄8 3 3 2 35414762 21.01 12 18 1.500 3⁄4 1⁄2 1 ⁄4 35414598 37.80
1 10 54 5.400 1 3⁄4 2 ⁄2 00230623 99.87
1
20 60 3.000 3⁄8 3⁄8 2 35414770 23.62 12 20 1.667 3⁄4 1⁄2 113⁄32 35414606 41.40 10 60 6.000 1 3⁄4 21⁄2 00230631 108.09
20 64 3.200 3⁄8 3⁄8 2 35414788 27.18 12 21 1.750 3⁄4 1⁄2 11⁄2 00230672 31.00 8 12 1.500 11⁄4 1⁄2 11⁄8 35414408 54.77
20 70 3.500 3⁄8 3⁄8 2 35414796 28.27 12 22 1.833 3⁄4 1⁄2 19⁄16 00230680 34.63 8 14 1.750 11⁄4 1⁄2 13⁄8 35414416 63.66
20 75 3.750 3⁄8 3⁄8 21⁄4 35414804 27.64 12 24 2.000 3⁄4 1⁄2 13⁄4 35414614 52.50 8 15 1.875 11⁄4 1⁄2 11⁄2 00230458 49.58
16 11 0.750 1⁄2 1⁄4 9⁄16 00230771 14.30 12 28 2.333 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄16 00230698 38.51 8 16 2.000 11⁄4 3⁄4 15⁄8 35414424 71.36
16 12 0.750 1⁄2 1⁄4 9⁄16 35414655 18.86 12 30 2.500 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄4 35414622 56.64 8 18 2.250 11⁄4 3⁄4 17⁄8 35414432 76.53
16 14 0.875 1⁄2 1⁄4 11⁄16 35414663 22.53 12 32 2.667 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄4 35414630 61.82 8 20 2.500 11⁄4 3⁄4 21⁄8 35414440 85.20
16 15 0.937 1⁄2 1⁄2 3⁄4 00230789 16.67 12 36 3.000 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄2 00230706 45.94 8 22 2.750 11⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄8 00230466 67.51
16 16 1.000 1⁄2 1⁄2 13⁄16 35414671 25.37 12 40 3.333 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄2 00230714 48.27 8 24 3.000 11⁄4 3⁄4 25⁄8 35414457 152.80 Spur gears and racks are
16 18 1.125 1⁄2 1⁄2 15⁄16 35414689 27.18 12 42 3.500 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄2 00230722 49.95 8 28 3.500 11⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄4 00230474 95.71 lighter, less expensive gears
16 20 1.250 1⁄2 1⁄2 11⁄16 35414697 26.34 12 48 4.000 3⁄4 1⁄2 21⁄2 35414648 91.12 8 30 3.750 11⁄4 3⁄4 27⁄8 00230482 104.08 that offer lower noise levels
16 22 1.375 1⁄2 1⁄2 13⁄16 00230797 20.88 12 54 4.500 3⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄4 00230730 68.74 8 32 4.000 11⁄4 3⁄4 3 35414465 157.56 and longer product life than
16 24 1.500 1⁄2 1⁄2 15⁄16 35414705 29.22 12 60 5.000 3⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄4 00230748 77.18 8 36 4.500 11⁄4 3⁄4 3 00230490 116.50 metal spur gears and racks.
16 26 1.625 1⁄2 1⁄2 17⁄16 00230805 26.78 12 64 5.333 3⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄4 00230755 81.21 8 42 5.250 11⁄4 3⁄4 3 00230508 133.11 Dimensionally
16 28 1.750 1⁄2 1⁄2 11⁄2 00230813 29.34 12 72 6.000 3⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄4 00230763 89.46 8 48 6.000 11⁄4 3⁄4 3 00230516 153.93 interchangeable with
16 30 1.875 1⁄2 1⁄2 15⁄8 35414713 43.73 10 11 1.200 1 1⁄4 15⁄16 00230524 25.14 6 14 2.330 11⁄2 3⁄4 113⁄16 35414358 109.72 metallic spur gears, nylon
16 32 2.000 1⁄2 1⁄2 13⁄4 35414721 45.52 10 12 1.200 1 1⁄4 15⁄16 35414473 35.47 6 15 2.500 1 ⁄2 ⁄4
1 3 2 00230383 66.81 gears are resistant to
16 36 2.250 1⁄2 1⁄2 2 00230821 35.58 10 14 1.400 1 1⁄2 11⁄8 35414481 41.40 6 16 2.660 11⁄2 3⁄4 25⁄32 35414366 104.76 chemicals, dirt, dust and
16 40 2.500 1⁄2 1⁄2 2 35414739 52.28 10 15 1.500 1 1⁄2 17⁄32 00230532 31.00 6 18 3.000 11⁄2 3⁄4 21⁄2 35414374 115.00 water. Both spur gears and
16 48 3.000 1⁄2 1⁄2 2 35414747 60.42 10 16 1.600 1 1⁄2 15⁄16 35414499 48.88 6 20 3.333 11⁄2 3⁄4 27⁄32 00230391 87.12 racks have a pressure angle
16 54 3.375 ⁄2 ⁄2 1 1 2 00230839 50.48 10 18 1.800 1 1⁄2 117⁄32 35414507 52.50 6 21 3.500 11⁄2 3⁄4 3 00230409 89.10 of 14.5°. Note: Gear racks
16 56 3.500 ⁄2 ⁄2 1 1 2 00230847 54.18 10 20 2.000 1 1⁄2 123⁄32 35414515 56.64 6 24 4.000 11⁄2 3⁄4 3 35414382 163.90 are sold in 4 Ft. lengths.
16 60 3.750 1⁄2 1⁄2 2 00230854 58.35 10 24 2.400 1 3⁄4 21⁄8 35414523 63.66 6 27 4.500 11⁄2 3⁄4 3 00230417 135.86
16 64 4.000 ⁄2 ⁄2 1 1 2 00230862 62.55 10 25 2.500 1 3⁄4 27⁄32 00230540 49.58 6 30 5.000 11⁄2 3⁄4 3 35414390 201.71
16 72 4.500 1⁄2 1⁄2 21⁄4 00230870 64.60 10 28 2.800 1 3⁄4 21⁄8 00230557 58.35 6 32 5.333 11⁄2 3⁄4 31⁄8 00230425 151.34
16 80 5.000 ⁄2 ⁄2 21⁄4 00230888 70.77
1 1 10 30 3.000 1 3⁄4 21⁄8 35414531 94.20 6 33 5.500 1 ⁄2 ⁄4 31⁄4 00230433 158.15
1 3
16 84 5.250 1⁄2 1⁄2 21⁄4 00230896 77.18 10 32 3.200 1 3⁄4 21⁄8 00230565 70.77 6 36 6.000 11⁄2 3⁄4 4 00230441 173.44
16 96 6.000 1⁄2 1⁄2 21⁄4 00230904 81.21 10 35 3.500 1 3⁄4 21⁄4 00230573 75.00 5 18 3.600 13⁄4 3⁄4 3 00230334 105.92
12 11 1.000 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 00230649 19.57 10 36 3.600 1 3⁄4 21⁄4 00230581 77.18 5 24 4.800 13⁄4 3⁄4 33⁄8 00230342 162.73
12 12 1.000 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 35414564 25.82 10 40 4.000 1 3⁄4 21⁄4 35414549 117.67 5 25 5.000 13⁄4 3⁄4 33⁄8 00230359 180.87
12 13 1.083 3⁄4 1⁄4 13⁄16 00230656 19.96 10 42 4.200 1 3⁄4 21⁄4 00230599 87.49 5 28 5.600 13⁄4 3⁄4 33⁄8 00230367 208.06
12 14 1.167 3⁄4 1⁄4 29⁄32 35414572 31.36 10 45 4.500 1 3⁄4 21⁄2 00230607 91.49 5 30 6.000 13⁄4 3⁄4 33⁄8 00230375 221.65
12 15 1.250 3⁄4 1⁄2 1 00230664 24.56 10 48 4.800 1 3⁄4 21⁄2 35414556 135.23

Basics of...Sleeve Bearing Material

Bearing Material Material Characteristics Temp Range PV1
Cast Bronze SAE-660 Bronze has a nonporous, highly dense grain structure which gives the bearing long life. 10° F to 450° F 75,000
Oil-Impregnated Bronze SAE-841 Bronze is a vacuum impregnated with SAE-30 oil. When in motion oil rises to surface for lubrication, and restores itself 10° F to 220° F 50,000
when at rest.
Babbit A composition of antimony, tin and lead line the bearing, providing strength and corrosion resistance at low cost. 0° F to 130° F 12,000
Molded Nylon Molded nylon 101 bearings provide economical alternative when the strength and performance characteristics of metal bearings -40° F to 200° F 3,500
are not required
MDS-Filled Nylon Nylon bearings with Molybdenum Disulfide have low coefficient of friction, high wear resistance, and are resistant to alkalies and -40° F to 175° F 9,803
most weak organic acids.
UHMW-PE (Ultra High Molecular Weight)-PE offers excellent resistance to chemicals and moisture, are self lubricating and strong. USDA -40° F to 180° F 3,000
and FDA approved.
Rulon Rulon provides low coefficient of friction, broad temperature range and has excellent water resistance. FDA and USDA approved. -400° F to 550° F 10,000
Frelon A compound of Teflon, Frelon provides high strength, low wear, low friction, self lubrication, and a temperature range of -400° F -400° F to 500° F 15,000
to 500° F. Usually bonded to an aluminum housing, frelon lined bearings are corrosion resistant.
Vespel Made from DuPont SP-21 polyimide resins to provide high load, temperature, and speed ranges. -400° F to 550° F 300,000
Teflon®/Fiberglass Lightweight, high strength multilayer epoxy fiberglass shell is lined with Teflon/nomex composite. Self lubricating, chemical and -290° F to 320° F 5,000
Composite temperature resistant.
Nyliner® Thermoplastic Injection-molded thermoplastic has good resistance to chemicals and wear. Needs minimal lubrication. -40° F to 200° F 3,500
1
PV Rating measures a bearing’s performance capabilities. PV is calculated by multiplying the maximum surface pressure (P), by the maximum sliding velocity of surface feet per minute (V).

3740 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 170
BEARINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Bearings
Uses/Selections
The typical functions of a bearing are to allow shaft rotation while minimizing frictional losses and/or supporting the shaft and its associated loads. Bearings are
typically selected based on a required life in hours. Life is directly affected by the load applied to the bearing and the rotational speed of the bearing.

Industries/Applications

HVAC Food and Beverage Unit Material Handling Construction Agricultural Aggregate
• Blowers • Conveyors • Baggage Handling • Off-highway Vehicles • Mowers • Conveyor Pulleys
• Fans • Packaging • Parcel/Package Handling • Pavers • Bailers • Idler Pulleys
• Roof Vents • Mixers • Warehouse Distribution • Highway Stripers • Radial stackers
• Air Curtains • Fillers

Common Terms
Ball: Creates a point contact between the ball and ball path with the rolling element, distributing loads across a small area. Surface contact is minimized and less
friction and heat is generated. This gives ball bearings a higher speed range but lower load capability.
Tapered Roller: Distributes loads across a larger area by creating a line contact between the raceway and rolling element. A double row provides twice as many rolling
elements available to carry bearing loads. This increases bearing radial load capacity but reduces speed capability. Tapered roller bearings can accept heavy loads from
both the radial and thrust directions.
Spherical Roller: Features double row spherical roller bearings that provide modified line contact on the races. This bearing design can accept loads from both the
radial and thrust directions.
Static Misalignment: A fixed misalignment, such as uneven mounting surfaces between two bearings. Both ball and tapered roller bearings have very limited internal
misalignment capabilities. However, some mounted ball and mounted tapered roller bearings have some static self-aligning capability between the housing and bearing
inserts.
Dynamic Misalignment: Occurs due to a constantly changing angle of alignment, such as from a bent shaft. Both ball and tapered roller bearings have very limited
internal misalignment capabilities. However, spherical roller barings have internal misalignment capability and can handle some degree of dynamic misalignment.
Basic Dynamic Rating: The Basic Dynamic Rating as defined by the American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) is the calculated, constant radial load which
90% of a group of apparently identical bearings with stationary outer ring can theoretically endure for a rating of 1 million revolutions (33 1/3 RPM for 500 hours).
Basic Dynamic Rating is not the maximum load that should be applied to the bearing.
Static Radial Rating: The American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) defines Static Radial Load Rating as that load which corresponds to a total permanent
deformation of rolling element and raceway.
Radial Load: Load acting on the bearing that is applied perpendicular to the bearing bore.
Axial Load: Load acting on the bearing that is applied parallel to the bearing bore. This is also known as thrust load.
Speed: Affects both the L10 life and operating temperature. Doubling the speed will reduce the L10 life by one-half and can cause a higher operating temperature.
Speed is indicated in Revolutions per Minute (RPM).

Locking Mechanisms
Single Set Screw: Provides two setscrews on a single side of the bearing inner race to secure the bearing to the shaft.
Eccentric: Provides a collar with an eccentric lip that mates with an eccentric lip on the bearing inner ring. Turning the collar while holding the shaft and inner ring
results in a “cam” action that locks the collar and inner ring to the shaft. (Eccentric lock is not recommended for reversing rotation applications.)
Concentric: Concentric locking mechanisms consist of either concentric collars or tapered adaptor sleeves. Concentric locking mechanisms center the shaft in the
bearing bore and virtually eliminate the lock induced bearing out-of-roundness found with eccentric or setscrew designs. This reduces vibration and shaft run-out
during operation, as well as eliminating shaft marring.

Housings

Pillow Block:The most widely used housed

bearing unit. Available for light, normal, and Two-Bolt Flange: Designed for flush mounting with
medium duty applications. machined bases for light loads and two bolt holes.

Four-Bolt Flange: Designed for flush mounting with

machined bases and four bolt holes.
Flange Bracket: Narrow housing with three bolt
holes on one side of the housing. Best used in
very tight spaces and tail pulleys.
Insert or VER Unit: Designed to mount in customer’s
housing. These bearings offer no self aligning capability.

Stamped Steel: Stamped steel housings typically

consist of two steel halves that mate together and Tapped Base Pillow Block: Pillow Block units well suited
clamp the bearing insert. These are available in for applications where shafts are close together.
both pillow block and flange designs.

3766 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 171
LINEAR RAIL SYSTEMS
Double Horizontal Bases

• Mounting hardware included with each double horizontal base

Dimensions (In.)
Series Size (In.) A B C D E F G H J K L Wt. (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 1.0 3.000 2.25 1.50 1.500 2.0 1.0 .257 Thru 1.062 2.125 .50 1.004 0.575 5910-HW 06036321 $75.93
15 1.0 3.000 2.25 1.50 1.500 2.0 1.5 .328 Thru 1.062 2.125 .50 1.004 0.568 5920-HW 06036339 70.18
15 1.5 3.875 3.00 2.25 1.937 2.5 1.5 .328 Thru 1.125 2.500 .75 1.505 1.210 5930-HW 06036347 77.78 5910-HW

Basics of...Linear Motion Systems

Important Features to Consider For Selection
Multi-Mount Blind Hole
This configuration allows mounting Holes are drilled in the top or bottom of the block, but not through.
of the rail system in any orientation. Holes are tapped for mounting.
Caged Ball
Horizontal Mount Ball bearings are captured in a plastic cage enabling high speed use, low noise
Rails must be mounted in a horizontal configuration. level, and extended life due to non-contact between bearings. Because each ball
Best used in heavy down force applications. contacts the cage over a wider area, the oil film does not break down and
Through-Hole lubrication is not compromised.
Holes are drilled completely through block and allow mounting from above or Conventional
below. Holes are generally unthreaded. Non-caged ball bearing blocks. Balls contact one another and spin different
directions causing resistance. This sliding contact between bearings causes
severe wear and loud noise. Lubrication is reduced due to bearing stress. Page
Page 172 3818

Multi-Mount - Four-Way Equal Load Rated Type SHS with Caged Ball™ Technology
NOTE: Block and Rails Sold Separately • Can be mounted in any direction
• Rolling resistance variation is reduced to 1⁄10 of conventional full ball type for smoother motion
• Self-adjusting capability allows for easy installation • High rigidity
• Low noise • High stability • Heavy load capability • Excellent high speed performance
• Long term maintenance free-operation • Long life
• Polyurethane seals provide additional protection from foreign matter
Blocks
Block Dimensions System Information
Hole Spacing Hole Size Assembly Block Load Rating1
Length Width Ht. Transverse Lateral SxL Ht. Overhang Static Dynamic
Mfr’s # L (mm) W (mm) K (mm) C (mm) B (mm) (H) M (mm) (mm) (kN) (kN) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Through Hole
SHS15CSS BLOCK 64.4 47 21.0 30 38 M5x4.4 24 16.0 24.2 14.2 0.51 00372417 $143.57
SHS20CSS BLOCK 79.0 63 25.4 40 53 M6x5.4 30 21.5 38.4 22.3 1.01 00372441 158.69
SHS25CSS BLOCK 92.0 70 30.2 45 57 M8x6.8 36 23.5 52.4 31.7 1.58 00372482 188.92
SHS30CSS BLOCK 106.0 90 35.0 52 72 M10x8.5 42 31.0 66.6 44.8 2.95 00372524 211.61
SHS35CSS BLOCK 122.0 100 40.5 62 82 M10x8.5 48 33.0 96.6 62.3 4.18 00372565 226.70
Through Hole Heavy Load
SHS20LCSS BLOCK 98.0 63 25.4 40 53 M6x5.4 30 21.5 50.3 28.1 1.34 00372466 196.49
SHS25LCSS BLOCK 109.0 70 30.2 45 57 M8x6.8 36 23.5 64.7 36.8 1.96 00372508 212.65
SHS30LCSS BLOCK 131.0 90 35.0 52 72 M10x8.5 42 31.0 88.8 54.2 3.65 00372540 261.09
SHS35LCSS BLOCK 152.0 100 40.5 62 82 M10x8.5 48 33.0 127.0 72.9 5.59 00372581 282.62
Blind Hole
SHS20VSS BLOCK 79.0 44 25.4 36 32 M5x5 30 12.0 38.4 22.3 0.80 00372458 158.69
SHS25VSS BLOCK 92.0 48 34.2 35 35 M6x8 40 12.5 52.4 31.7 1.20 00372490 188.92
SHS30VSS BLOCK 106.0 60 38.0 40 40 M8x8 45 16.0 66.6 44.8 2.10 00372532 211.61
SHS35VSS BLOCK 122.0 70 47.5 50 50 M8x12 55 18.0 96.6 62.3 1.40 00372573 226.70
Blind Hole Narrow Width
SHS15RSS BLOCK 64.4 34 25.0 26 26 M4x5 28 9.5 24.2 14.2 0.50 00372425 143.57
1
Load rating per block
Rails
Rail Dimensions Rail Dimensions
Hole Hole Hole Hole
Length Width Ht. Spacing Size (mm) Wt. Length Width Ht. Spacing Size (mm) Wt.
Mfr’s # (mm) W1 (mm) (mm) F (mm) d1-d2-h (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # (mm) W1 (mm) (mm) F (mm) d1-d2-h (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
SHS15+160L RAIL 160 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 0.46 85296705 $61.81 SHS25+1000L RAIL 1000 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 7.04 85296762 $479.75
SHS15+280L RAIL 280 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 0.80 85296713 108.21 SHS25+1600L RAIL 1600 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 11.28 00372516 759.72
SHS15+460L RAIL 460 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 1.32 85296721 177.75 SHS30+600L RAIL 600 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 5.94 85296812 303.81
SHS15+820L RAIL 820 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 2.35 00372433 329.45 SHS30+1000L RAIL 1000 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 9.90 85296796 506.39
SHS20+280L RAIL 280 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 1.42 85296739 119.40 SHS30+1640L RAIL 1640 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 16.26 00372557 821.32
SHS20+460L RAIL 460 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 2.33 85296747 196.17 SHS30+2520L RAIL 2520 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 24.95 85296804 1276.11
SHS20+820L RAIL 820 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 4.15 85296754 349.64 SHS35+600L RAIL 600 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 8.18 85296846 319.83
SHS20+1240L RAIL 1240 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 6.28 00372474 549.71 SHS35+1000L RAIL 1000 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 13.64 85296820 533.04
SHS25+340L RAIL 340 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 2.39 85296770 163.12 SHS35+1640L RAIL 1640 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 22.40 00372599 865.27
SHS25+640L RAIL 640 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 4.51 85296788 307.03 SHS35+2520L RAIL 2520 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 34.37 85296838 1343.26

3818 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
AIR COMPRESSORS TECH INFO/PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSORS

Basics of...Air Compressors

At the heart of every air system is the air compressor, which is the device that actually produces the compressed air that powers the tools and processes in your
facility. There are two basic types of air compressor technologies: Reciprocating and Rotary Screw. The most important consideration when purchasing any type of air
compressor is its air delivery, otherwise known as capacity (CFM) to attain the required air pressure, rather than the rated horsepower.
Reciprocating Compressors
Reciprocating Compressors: are available in single-stage (one level of air compression) or two-stage (two levels of air compression) and come
in portable electric/gas models or stationary designs.
Single-Stage Reciprocating Air Compressors: generally used for pressures in the range of 70 to 135 psi (pounds per square inch) and produce
capacity up to18 CFM (cubic feet per minute). Compressor tanks, which are used to store the compressed air, range from 8 to 60 gallons.
Horsepower ranges from 2 to 5. Single-stage models are generally recommended for intermittent-duty applications ranging from garage to
small production facilities where air demand is limited and where a larger, more robust air compressor is not warranted.
Two-Stage Reciprocating Air Compressors: generally used for higher pressures in the range of 100 to 200 psi and produce
capacity up to 50 CFM. Compressor tanks range from 80 to 120 gallons, with vertical or horizontal mounting styles.
Horsepower ranges from 5 to 15. Applications include automotive/truck fleet maintenance, machine shops, production/
manufacturing facilities, general maintenance/repair, farm use or any industrial application that requires more capacity and
more “uptime” than a single-stage air compressor.
Rotary Screw Compressors
Rotary Screw Compressors: are electrical and stationary only. Rotary screw compressors use two counter–rotating helical screws to trap air and
compress it into the receiver tank, ranging from 80 to 120 gallons. Horsepower ranges from 5 to 40 with supply pressure output from 125 to
150 psi and capacity up to 112 CFM. Rotary screws are easy to maintain, more efficient, highly reliable, provide a greater level of air quality and
are very quiet in operation. Rotary Screw compressors incorporate a high-efficiency / reliable, low speed motor that extends the life of the unit
by reducing energy usage, provides a continuous supply of air, runs quietly (as low as 65 dBA), and thus provides a lower total cost of
ownership. They can operate continuously 24/7 and are primarily used in various manufacturing operations as well as in general light industrial
applications including tire and automotive.

Page 173 Page 3838

Portable Horizontal Air Compressors: Electric

Excellent Quality & Affordability Order #52776499
Order #52776473 • 2.0 Running HP 20 gallon
• 1.5 Running HP 4 gallon twin stack compressor portable horizontal compressor
• 3450 RPM • Direct drive oil lubricated • 3450 RPM
• 5.1 CFM @ 90 psi • 125 Max. psi • 13 Amp • Direct drive oil lubricated
• Includes: regulator, quick coupler and chrome-plated pressure gauges • 5.5 CFM @ 90 psi
• Metallic silver powder coat finish • 125 Max. psi
Order #52776515 • 14 Amp
• 1.5 Running HP 6.5 gallon portable • Includes: regulator, quick
horizontal compressor coupler, 8” rubber wheels and a
• 3450 RPM removable handle 52776499
• Direct drive oil lubricated cast iron pump 52776473
• 5.1 CFM @ 90 psi Order #52776523
• 125 Max. psi • 13 amp • 2.5 running HP 20 gallon portable
• Includes: regulator, quick coupler and horizontal compressor
chrome-plated gauges • Oil lubricated belt drive
• Metallic silver powder coat finish 52776515
• 5.8 CFM @ 90 psi for 120V
CFM @ Dimensions (In.) Tank Wt. • 7.0 CFM @ 90 psi for 220-240V
Configuration HP 90 psi L W Ht. Cap. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • V-twin cylinder cast iron pump
• Max. psi : 150 • Amp: 15
Twin Stack 1.5 5.1 19 17 19 4 Gal. 72 52776473 $239.38 • Includes: two ports with quick couplers,
Horizontal 1.5 5.1 23 11 24 6.5 Gal. 67 52776515 253.15 8w pneumatic wheels, tank drain ball
Horizontal 2.0 5.5 16 33 29 20 Gal. 121 52776499 353.89 valve, chrome-plated pressure gauges
Horizontal 2.5 5.8 35 15 38 20 Gal. 150 52776523 525.87 52776523
and oil sight gauge

Portable Vertical Air Compressors: Electric

Excellent Quality & Affordability
Order #52776481 Order #52776465
• 2.0 Running HP, 4 gallon twin stack portable compressor • 2.5 Running HP, 33 gallon vertical tank
• 3450 RPM • Direct drive, oil lubricated • 3600 RPM, 1130 RPM flywheel pump speed
• 5.5 CFM @ 90 psi • Oil lubricated belt drive • V-twin cast iron pump
• Maximum pressure: 125 psi • 13 Amp • 5.8 CFM @ 90 psi for 120V
• Includes: Two ports with quick couplers for easy • 7.0 CFM @ 90 psi for 220-240V
operation, 6w rubber wheel kit and fold down handle • Maximum pressure: 150 psi • 15 Amp
• Metallic silver powder coat finish • Includes: Tank drain ball valve, oil site gauge, chrome
Order #52776457 plated pressure gauges, 10w pneumatic wheels and 2 ports
• 2.0 Running HP, 20 gallon vertical compressor with quick couplers
• 3450 RPM • Direct drive, oil lubricated 52776481
CFM @ Tank L W Ht. Wt.
• 5.5 CFM @ 90 psi • Maximum pressure: 125 psi Configuration HP 90 psi Cap. (In.) (In.) (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
• 14 Amp • Regulator and quick coupler
• Includes: Two ports with quick couplers for easy Twin Stack (Wheeled) 2 5.5 4 Gal. 21 18 22 74 52776481 $335.91
52776457
operation, regulator and 8w rubber wheels Vertical 2 5.5 20 Gal. 16 16 41 130 52776457 353.62
• Metallic silver powder coat finish Vertical 2.5 5.8 33 Gal. 25 24 47 180 52776465 614.45 52776465

3838 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 REGULATORS & AIR SYSTEM COMPONENTS TECHNICAL INFO
Air Pilot Operated Regulators
Pipe Pressure Rating (psig) Ht. W (In.) Ideal for systems requiring pressure
Size (In.) Application Min. Max. (In.) Port to Port Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. regulation or high flow at an
1⁄2 Quick Response 10 400 3.30 3.38 11-008-130 01724715 $139.71 inaccessible location. A pilot
1⁄4 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.07 4.16 11-042-001 01724723 283.56 regulator (ordered separately)
3⁄8 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.07 4.16 11-042-002 01724731 283.56 controls the outlet pressure of the
1⁄2 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.07 4.16 11-042-003 01724749 283.56 pilot operated regulator. Regulators
3⁄4
are relieving type with NPT Female
High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.97 4.16 11-042-007 01724756 296.58 ports. Units designed to provide high
1 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.97 4.16 11-042-008 01724764 296.58 relief flow and quick response.
11⁄4 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.97 4.16 11-042-009 01724772 296.58 Mfr’s #11-008-130 has a constant bleed, providing more rapid response.
1⁄4 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 4.40 2.70 R24-201-RNXA 01724780 107.20 For best performance, inlet pressure should be at least 20 psig higher than
3⁄8 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 4.40 2.70 R24-301-RNXA 01724798 107.20 desired regulated pressure.
1⁄2 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 4.40 2.70 R24-401-RNXA 01724806 107.20
3⁄4 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 5.20 2.70 R24-601-RNXA 01724814 226.70 • Maximum temperature: 175°F • Pressure gauge not included
1 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 5.20 2.70 R24-801-RNXA 01724822 226.70
11⁄4 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 5.20 2.70 R24-A01-RNXA 01724830 250.56
11⁄2 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 450 7.24 5.98 R18-B00-RNXA 01724848 457.01
2 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 450 7.24 5.98 R18-C00-RNXA 01724855 457.01

Precision Instrumentation Filter/Regulator

Incorporating a 25-micron filter into an instrumentation regulator, these units provide an extremely high degree of precision repeatability and regulation accuracy. Should be used
with a grade 1A or better gauge (not included). Relieving feature allows reduction of downstream pressure when the system is dead-ended. Ideal for instrumentation, laboratory,
and other applications requiring precision pressure regulation.

• Fast response to flow changes

• High ratio of diaphragm to valve area for precision regulation Pipe Width (In.) Pressure (psig)
• Constant bleed (0.005 SCFM) helps provide maximum sensitivity to system changes Size (In.) (port to port) Min. Max. Ht. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Offset drain allows mounting at an angle without creating a water trap in bowl 1⁄4
• Max. temperature: 175°F 2.17 1 30 7.88 B38-200-B2CA 01724962 $127.31
1⁄4 2.17 4 100 7.88 B38-200-B2KA 01724970 127.31
• Max. SCFM: 20

Precision/Instrumentation Regulators
Port Size Min. Max. Ht. W Low flow precision air regulators are multi-stage pressure regulators with a
(NPT) psi psi (In.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. high degree of regulation and repeatability, achieved by reacting to
Low Flow downstream pressure fluctuations as small as 0.01 psig above set pressure.
1⁄4 2 25 4.55 2.12 PR4021-300-M 74700402 $167.88
1⁄4
• Control output pressure with an accuracy of 0.1%
2 60 4.55 2.12 PR4021-200-M 74700394 193.06 • Very low sensitivity to changes in supply pressure and flow
1⁄4 2 120 4.55 2.12 PR4021-100-M 74700386 167.88
3⁄8
• Designed to eliminate need for any readjustment of the regulated pressure after downtime
2 25 4.55 2.12 PR4031-300-M 74700659 167.88 • Unit can be installed in any position, panel mounted or by in-line plumbing
3⁄8 2 60 4.55 2.12 PR4031-200-M 74700642 193.06 • Gauge port size: 1⁄4 NPT • Flow capacity: 14 SCFM Low Flow
3⁄8 2 120 4.55 2.12 PR4031-100-M 74700410 167.88 • Exhaust capacity: up to 10 SCFM • Maximum supply pressure: 150 psig
High Flow • Operating temperature range: 20° to 150°F • Body material: zinc die cast
3⁄8 0 30 7.20 3.62 PR4033-300-M 76821859 397.75
3⁄8
High flow precision regulators are designed for applications that
0 60 7.20 3.62 PR4033-200-M 74700428 397.75 require large flow capability and accurate pressure control.
1⁄2 0 30 7.20 3.62 PR4044-300-M 74700444 419.71
1⁄2 0 60 7.20 3.62 PR4044-200-M 74700436 419.71 • Direct acting, diaphragm-operated
3⁄40 30 7.20 3.62 PR4055-300-M 74700469 397.75 • Once set to a desired output pressure, the regulator maintains the setting permanently
3⁄40 60 7.20 3.62 PR4055-200-M 74700451 419.71 • Flow @ 100 psig supply: 200 SCFM • Gauge ports: 1⁄4 NPT
• Maximum pressure: 400 psig • Temperature range: -20° to 180°F
Wall Mount Bracket 29077-M 74741059 19.92 • Supply pressure variation: less than ±0.35 psig for a supply variation of 100 psig High Flow

Basics of...Air System Components

Filters, Regulators and Lubricators
A well planned compressed air system is vital to efficient overall tool operation. Improper tool operation, higher costs per unit of compressed air and reduced
component life are but a few of the many problems created by an inefficient air system.
FILTERS - It is inevitable that impurities will make their way into air distribution lines in any compressed air system. Pipe scale, rust, moisture, compressor oil, pipe
compound and dirt are some of the contaminants that can damage downstream air devices. An air line filter will remove foreign matter and allow clean dry air to flow
freely. The filter capacity must be capable of handling the required flow of air in the system.
OIL COALESCING FILTERS - This type of air line filter should be used when it is mandatory that the compressed air is completely free of dirt, oil and water. An oil
coalescing filter will remove 99.97% of oil and water aerosols as well as solids larger than .3 microns. An oil coalescing filter must be used with a pre-filter in order to
filter out larger particles which will otherwise clog the coalescing filter.
REGULATORS - Pneumatic equipment is designed to operate properly at a certain pressure. If the pressure is greater or less than recommended, the excess force,
torque and wear can shorten the life of air equipment and waste compressed air. An air line regulator will provide a constant set flow of air pressure, thus assuring
optimum operation and life of the downstream air equipment. The size of a regulator is determined by the downstream flow and pressure requirements. While an
undersized regulator will not be able to provide the required air pressure during maximum flow conditions, an oversized regulator will be more costly than necessary to
do the job.
LUBRICATORS - Most moving parts require some form of lubrication. The high costs of running and repairing equipment that is not operated efficiently makes the
addition of an air line lubricator an economical practice. An air line lubricator stores oil and adds a preset amount of oil into the air stream which is then delivered to the
downstream air devices. The size of the lubricator for a particular application is determined by the downstream air requirements.
INTEGRAL FILTER/REGULATORS - This economical and space saving design offers a combination of an air line filter and regulator. The modular design provides both
components in one unit that requires only two pipe connections, reducing installation and maintenance expenses.
FILTER/REGULATOR/LUBRICATOR COMBINATION UNITS - These factory assembled units offer a combination of an air line filter, regulator and lubricator. The modular
design provides all three components in one unit that requires only two pipe connections, reducing installation and maintenance expenses.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 3859

Page 174
SWIVEL JOINTS & ROTARY UNIONS
Self-Aligning Swivel Joints
• Handles angular and rotary motion with positive sealing • End connections: NPT
• Outperforms and outlasts flexible hose with lower pressure drops
• Faster and easier piping installation, simplifies fabrications
• Eliminates the hazards of leaking pipe connections or catastrophic hose failures
• Dog-leg arrangements accommodate hinged and lifting motions of presses Straight Casing/Straight Ball Straight Casing/90° Ball 90° Casing/Straight Ball 90° Casing/90° Ball
Pipe Max. Flange Straight Casing, Straight Ball Straight Casing, 90° Ball 90° Casing, Straight Ball 90° Casing, 90° Ball
Size NPT psi Dia. (in.) OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea. OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 340 psi Water, 240 psi Steam 21⁄2 33⁄8 74088097 $185.78 35⁄8 74088337 $186.10 4 74088204 $149.89 47⁄8 74088147 $186.10
3⁄4 340 psi Water, 240 psi Steam 31⁄8 313⁄16 74088105 215.34 5 74088345 165.17 45⁄8 74088212 183.71 51⁄4 74088154 170.79
1 340 psi Water, 240 psi Steam 31⁄2 45⁄8 74088113 243.80 51⁄8 74088352 220.76 51⁄8 74088220 215.92 6 74088162 234.48
11⁄4 300 psi Water, 200 psi Steam 41⁄4 47⁄8 74088121 367.74 65⁄16 74088360 365.81 6 74088238 386.85 73⁄8 74088170 365.81
11⁄2 300 psi Water, 200 psi Steam 5 59⁄16 74088139 386.73 63⁄8 74088378 405.26 613⁄16 74088246 414.94 79⁄16 74088188 420.57

Water Rotary Unions

• Heavy-duty dual bearings for improved performance and increased life • Dry run capacity • Exact interchange for most OEM equipment and competitive unions • Max. work. press.: 150 psi
Port Rotor Max. LH Thread RH Thread Port Rotor Max. LH Thread RH Thread Port Rotor Max. LH Thread RH Thread
Size Thread psi Max. Rotation Rotation Size Thread psi Max. Rotation Rotation Size Thread psi Max. Rotation Rotation
NPT Size Water RPM Order # Order # Price Ea. NPT Size Water RPM Order # Order # Price Ea. NPT Size Water RPM Order # Order # Price Ea.
Single Flow 11⁄2 11⁄2 NPT 150 2500 01064708 01064690 $336.62 1 1 NPT 150 3000 01064278 01064260 $216.51
3⁄8 1⁄4 NPT 150 3500 01064419 01064401 $143.87 11⁄2 2-12 UN 150 2500 01064682 01064674 336.62 1 11⁄2-12 UNF 150 3000 01064294 01064286 216.51 E75RS Series
3⁄8 3⁄8-18 NPT 150 3500 01064351 01064344 102.73 2 2 NPT 150 750 01064211 01064203 564.21 1 ⁄4 11⁄4 NPT
1 150 2500 01064641 01064633 289.21
3⁄8 5⁄8-18 UNF 150 3500 01064336 01064328 102.73 21⁄2 21⁄2 NPT 150 750 01063965 01063957 991.63 11⁄4 13⁄4-12 UNF 150 2500 01064666 01064658 289.21
1⁄2 1⁄2 NPT 150 3500 01064450 01064443 118.56 3 3 NPT 150 500 01064005 01063999 1639.27 11⁄2 11⁄2 NPT 150 2500 01064740 01064732 372.97
1⁄2 3⁄4-16 UNF 150 3500 01064435 01064427 118.56 Dual Flow 11⁄2 2-12 UN 150 2500 01064724 01064716 372.97
3⁄4 3⁄4 NPT 150 3500 01064534 01064500 142.24 3⁄8 3⁄8 NPT 150 3500 01064393 01064385 116.94 2 2 NPT 150 750 01064237 01064229 600.55
3⁄4 1-14 UNS 150 3500 01064518 01064526 142.24 3⁄8 5⁄8-18 UNF 150 3500 01064377 01064369 116.94 21⁄2 21⁄2 NPT 200 750 01063981 01063973 1007.12
1 1 NPT 150 3500 01064252 01064245 194.39 1⁄2 1⁄2 NPT 150 3500 01064492 01064484 135.92 3 3 NPT 150 500 01064021 01064013 1701.23
1 11⁄2-12 UNF 150 3500 01064310 01064302 194.39 1⁄2 3⁄4-16 UNF 150 3500 01064476 01064468 135.92
11⁄4 11⁄4 NPT 150 2500 01064625 01064617 254.45 3⁄4 3⁄4 NPT 150 3500 01064575 01064567 159.62
11⁄4 13⁄4-12 UNF 150 2500 01064609 01064591 254.45 3⁄4 1-14 UNS 150 3500 01064559 01064542 159.62

General Purpose Rotary Unions

Size Wt. Left Hand Right Hand Size Wt. Left Hand Right Hand
(In.) (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Single Flow Dual Flow
1⁄4 1 730431 06689087 $162.95 730432 06689186 $162.95 1⁄2 3 730397 06689285 $209.25 730398 06689368 $209.25
3⁄8 1 730443 06689095 173.24 730444 06689194 173.24 3⁄4 3 730333 06689293 240.14 730334 06689376 240.14
1⁄2 3 730395 06689103 188.67 730396 06689202 188.67 1 4 730304 06689301 308.76 730305 06689384 308.76
3⁄4 3 730331 06689111 219.55 730332 06689210 219.55 11⁄4 11 440321 06689319 411.29 440322 06689392 411.29
The 9000 Series® general purpose rotary
1 4 730302 06689129 279.57 730303 06689228 279.57 11⁄2 15 440145 06689327 529.07 440146 06689400
529.07 union features a bellows type seal to
11⁄4 11 440319 06689137 372.05 440320 06689236 372.05 2 25 440466 06689335 815.80 440467 06689418 815.80 provide greater flexibility where
11⁄2 15 440143 06689145 483.01 440144 06689244 483.01 21⁄2 41 440574 06689343 1152.01 440575 06689426 1152.01 equipment misalignment is inherent, and
2 25 440464 06689152 766.28 440465 06689251 766.28 3 62 440494 06689350 1756.18 440495 06689434 1756.18 to resist seal hang-up in media
contaminated with debris and
21⁄2 41 440534 06689160 1123.01 440535 06689269 1123.01 suspensions. All sizes over 11⁄4w have dual
3 62 440492 06689178 1561.62 440493 06689277 1561.62 bearings for additional load support.

Basics of...Flexible Tubing

Nylon Polyurethane
Nylon is produced in a number of compounded formulations, such as Nylon-11.
Handles weak acids, solvents, and hydraulic fluids. High resiliency, superior Also known as urethane. Polyurethane (PUR) tubing exhibits excellent flexibility
dimensional stability, minimal moisture absorption, impact and kink resistant. and memory characteristics. Produced in ether and ester based compounds. Ester
Non-toxic, odorless and tasteless. based Polyurethane is durable and exhibits high tensile strength, but tends to
degrade when exposed to water. Ether based Polyurethane is ideal for compressed
PVC air systems and applications involving exposure to water. Kink resistance and
Known as Vinyl or Polyvinyl Chloride, this is one of the most versatile tensile strength makes PUR ideal for pressure and vacuum applications.
thermoplastic compounds. In a flexible tubing form, PVC can handle a variety of Reinforced Polyurethane should be used in applications calling for higher working
materials, including food products and mild chemicals. Limited acid use. Clear with pressures and additional abrasion-resistance. Better than PVC in handling fuels,
excellent visibility of the material being conveyed. PVC is non-wetting and can be oils and other petroleum-based products. Contains no plasticizers.
easily washed clean between applications. When extruded with a braid
reinforcement, PVC offers excellent pressure ratings and kink resistance. PVC is Polyethylene
NOT recommended for use with ketones, esters, chlorinated solvents, highly Polyethylene flexible tubing is an excellent general purpose tubing. It is
corrosive materials, or petroleum based lubricants. lightweight, inexpensive, and suitable for many standard applications. Polyethylene
should be used where above average flexibility and pressure are not required. Can
Silicone be used for a variety of applications, including chemical, food and industrial
Silicone is excellent for applications involving wide temperature ranges. Resistant applications. Excellent weather-resistance and above average chemical-resistance.
to ultraviolet light, ozone, gases and environmental conditions. Its odorless and Can be used in many compressed air applications.
tasteless characteristics make Silicone ideal for food applications. Not
recommended for concentrated solvents, acids, or oils. When produced with Thermoplastic Elastomers
platinum cured material, can be used for sanitary and medical applications.
A hybrid of thermoplastic and rubber based materials. Usually produced with a
TFE, PFA & FEP mixture of EPDM, Buna or SBR or other natural or synthetic rubber. When mixed
Ideal for applications requiring high chemical resistance and the ability to handle with a thermoplastic material, the resulting material offers excellent chemical and
high and low temperature. Friction-resistant and non-toxic. Aging, shock and abrasion-resistance, high tensile strength, and resistance to environmental
abrasion-resistant. conditions.

4018 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 175
 SILICONE & TYGON TUBING
Medical Silicone Tubing
ID OD Wall Std. Coil Price/ ID OD Wall Std. Coil Price/ • Meets USP Class VI requirements • Reusable - will withstand repeated sterilization
(In.) (In.) Thick. (In.) L (Ft.) Order # Coil (In.) (In.) Thick. (In.) L (Ft.) Order # Coil • Manufactured under strict Good Manufacturing Practices
1⁄32 5⁄32 1⁄16
• Nonreactive to body tissues and fluids, can be used in peristaltic pumps
50 48461743 $88.50 1⁄4 3⁄8 1⁄16 50 48461867 $152.07 Applications:
1⁄16 1⁄8 1⁄32 50 48461784 75.66 1⁄4 7⁄16 3⁄32 25 48461875 121.46
1⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄16
• Surgical drains • I.V. administration • Blood and fluid handling
50 48461792 109.43 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄8 25 48461883 168.15 • Pharmaceuticals • Laboratory • Peristaltic pumps • Dialysis
1⁄8 1⁄4 1⁄16 50 48461826 111.05 5⁄16 7⁄16 1⁄16 25 48461891 91.30 Note: This product is not rated for pressure.
3⁄16 5⁄16 1⁄16 50 48461842 151.25 3⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄16 25 48461917 99.76 Use Braid Reinforced Medical tubing.
3⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄32 50 48461859 228.48 1⁄2 5⁄8 1⁄16 25 48461941 128.31 To avoid product contamination, sold in standard coil lengths only.

Braid Reinforced Medical Silicone Tubing

Features:
• Open mesh polyester braiding incorporated within the wall of
Basics of...Tygon®
silicone tubing Chemical Resistance:
• Offers significantly greater pressure resistance than
Tubing Type B-44-4X B-44-3 R-3603 S-50-HL R-3400 F-4040-A R-1000 S-54-HL
unreinforced silicone tubing
• All ingredients are nontoxic and FDA sanctioned for use in Strong Acids Good Good Good Good Excel Fair Fair Good
food contact surfaces Weak Acids Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Good Excel Excel
• Silicone elastomer meets USP Class VI requirements Strong Alkalais Good Good Good Good Good Poor Poor Good
• Translucent natural color • Odorless, tasteless, and inert Weak Alkalais Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Fair Excel Excel
• Able to resist extreme temperature variances: -80°F to 350°F Applications: Organic Solvents Poor Poor Poor Poor Poor Fair (2) Poor Poor
• Each coil is packaged in heat-sealed polybag • Clean rooms
To avoid product contamination, sold in standard coil lengths only. • Food processing Tubing Type B-44-4X B-44-3 R-3603 S-50-HL R-3400 F-4040-A R-1000 S-54-HL
ID (In.) OD (In.) Working psi @ 70° Std. Coil L (Ft.) Order # Price/Coil • Hot viscous material
Max. Oper. Temp. 165°F 166°F 125°F 165°F 165°F 165°F 125°F 185°F
• Sterile filling
1⁄4 0.5200 100 25 48461529 $306.12 Durometer 65 63 40 64 64 57 63 80
• Pharmaceuticals
3⁄8 0.6550 85 25 48461545 371.71 Tensile Strength psi 2100 2300 1650 2000 2250 1821 1200 2700
• Laboratory uses
1⁄2 0.8000 85 25 48461552 459.42 Ult Elon% 450 410 450 350 350 312 375 320
• Adhesive lines
Tensile Set% 78 81 107 76 66 50 73
Brittle Temp -47°F -49°F -58°F -55°F -5°F -35°F -103°F -25°F
Color Clear Clear Clear Clear Black Yellow (trnsl) Clear Clear
Odor Slight None Slight None Slight Slight None None
Ethyl Vinyl Acetate Tubing - Fractional Sizes
Taste None None None None (1) (1) (1) None
Toxicity Non Non Non Non (1) (1) (1) Non
ID (In.) OD (In.) Wall Thick. (In.) Max. psi Order # Price/Ft. Aging Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel
0.125 1⁄4 0.062 65 74203977 $0.12
(1) Not to be used with food, beverage, or drugs (2) Depends on type of solvent; test before use Page
0.170 1⁄4 0.040 40 74203985 0.08
0.188 ⁄16 5 0.062 55 74203993 0.15 Page 176 4027
0.250 3⁄8 0.062 25 74204009 0.23
0.375 1⁄2 0.062 45 74204017 0.31
0.375 5⁄8 0.125 55 74204025 0.75 Surgical & Hospital Tubing
0.500 5⁄8 0.062 30 74204033 0.41 • Superior impact and low temperature
0.500 3⁄4 0.125 45 74204041 0.90 • Low temperature flexibility: to -105°F Formulation S-50-HL
0.625 3⁄4 0.062 30 74204058 0.51 • Standard coil length: 100 Ft. • Clear, 100% visibility
• Durometer: 36 shore D • For many medical and surgical uses
0.750 1 0.125 35 74204066 1.31 • Meets FDA criteria • Color: natural
1.000 11⁄4 0.125 25 74204074 1.68 • Sold in increments of 10v • Used in clinical, biological and
pharmaceutical laboratories
• Nontoxic, nonpyrogenic and compatible
with blood
• Dense, glass-smooth bore prevents
Synthetic Rubber Tubing interior build-up
• Retains its shape after deformation and will not collapse to restrict solution flow
• Excellent temperature resistance: -40°F to 400°F continuously • Safely and easily sterilized by steam, chemical, gas or radiation methods
• Offers the widest range of fluid and chemical resistance of any commercial rubber • Supplied with ends closed, heat sealed and polywrapped to prevent contamination
• High resistance to oils, fuels, lubricants, most mineral acids • Surgical hospital tubing sold in complete 50v coils only to prevent contamination
• Also resistant to many aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons such as carbon tetrachloride, ID OD Wall Max. Std. Coil ID OD Wall Max. Std. Coil
benzene, toluene and xylene (In.) (In.) (In.) psi L (Ft.) Order # Price/Ft. (In.) (In.) (In.) psi L (Ft.) Order # Price/Ft.
• Not affected by environmental exposure to sun and weather 1⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄16 90 50 48521025 $31.77 3⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 41 50 48521231 $208.23
• Fasten using barbed fittings, worm gear clamps or nylon clamps 1⁄8 1⁄4 1⁄16 56 50 48521066 45.39 1⁄2 5⁄8 1⁄16 18 50 48521272 136.74
• Color: Black • Sold in increments of 10v 3⁄16 5⁄16 1⁄16 41 50 48521108 64.68 1⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄8 32 50 48521298 258.16
ID (In.) OD (In.) Std. Coil L (Ft.) Order # Price/Ft. Applications: 1⁄4 3⁄8 1⁄16 32 50 48521140 77.74 5⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 27 50 48521348 293.91
1⁄16 3⁄16 100 79814802 $3.99 • Oil and fuel lines 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄8 56 50 48521165 158.86 3⁄4 1 1⁄8 23 50 48521363 330.79
1⁄8 1⁄4 100 79814810 5.68 • Seals and O-rings 5⁄16 7⁄16 1⁄16 27 50 48521173 87.38 1 11⁄4 1⁄8 18 50 48521421 414.19
3⁄16 5⁄16 100 79814828 7.21 • Cable jacketing 3⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄16 23 50 48521215 111.78
1⁄4 3⁄8 50 79814836 8.81 • Hot lubrication
• Chemical lines
3⁄8 1⁄2 50 79814844 13.11 • Peristaltic pumps
1⁄2 5⁄8 25 79814851 16.74 • Model engine exhaust
Tygothane™ Tubing
Formulation C-210A
• Tough ester-based polyurethane for applications that require high tear strength, abrasion-
Inner Braid, Food & Beverage Tubing resistance and chemical-resistance such as lubricant, fuel or pneumatic lines
Formulation B-44-4X-I.B Wall Max. Std. • Can be safely used in
ID (In.) OD (In.) Thickness (In.) psi Coil L (Ft.) Order # Price/Ft. temperatures from -100°F
Reinforced with Dacron® inner-braid embedded in its wall. (-73°C) to 200°F (93°C)
1⁄8 1⁄4 1⁄16 71 100 48525026 $0.71 • Sold in increments of 10v
• Handles working pressures four times greater than nonreinforced tubing
3⁄16 5⁄16 1⁄16 52 100 48525042 0.88
• Outstanding resistance to harsh alkaline cleaners and sanitizers
1⁄4 3⁄8 1⁄16 41 100 48525075 1.07
• Flexible (Shore A, 65), odorless, taste-free, and clear
1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄8 71 100 48525091 2.61
• Meets FDA and 3-A Plastics Standard Criteria • Nontoxic
• Standard coil length: 50v • Sold in increments of 10v 5⁄16 7⁄16 1⁄16 35 100 48525109 1.59
ID (In.) OD (In.) Wall Thick. (In.) Max. psi Order # Price/Ft. 3⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄16 30 100 48525117 1.34
3⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 52 100 48525125 2.69
1⁄4 7⁄16 3⁄32 196 48523203 $2.71 1⁄2 5⁄8 1⁄16 23 100 48525158 2.01
3⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 180 48523211 4.23
5⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 120 48523237 7.04 1⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄8 41 100 48525174 3.25
3⁄4 1 1⁄8 104 48523245 7.73 5⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 35 100 48525208 4.05
1 13⁄8 3⁄16 112 48523252 13.19 3⁄4 1 1⁄8 30 100 48525224 4.24

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 4027

 QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLINGS
3⁄8w Flow Polysulfone & Polypropylene Quick Disconnect Couplings
Polypropylene HFC-12 Series Polysulfone HFC-35 Series
3⁄8w
Flow Polypropylene Couplings Applications: 3⁄8w Flow Polysulfone Couplings
HFC-12 Series couplings incorporate full 3⁄8w flow with • Agricultural Spraying Systems HFC-35 Series couplings are designed for tough
chemically-resistant polypropylene for handling harsh • Boiler Feed Systems field abuse. The full 3⁄8w flow couplings are Applications:
• Car Wash Equipment • Bottle Filling
chemicals. Available in a wide range of configurations, available in a wide range of configurations to fit • Corrosive Environments
they are used in scientific equipment, chemical systems, • Cooling and Heating Lines almost any application. Excellent for use with
• Corrosive Environments • Corrosive Fluids
drum unloading, agriculture and water transfer. water and mild chemical solutions. Garden hose • High-purity Fluids
• Deionized Water Systems connections for wide utility.
Materials: • High Purity Fluids • Laboratory Systems
• Coupling: Polypropylene • Thumb Latch: Polypropylene • Pharmaceutical Applications Materials: • Low Pressure Process Fluid Supply
• Panel Mount Material: Polypropylene • Waste Fluid Removal • Coupling: Polysulfone • Low Viscosity Adhesive Supply
• O-Ring and EPDM • Panel Mount Gasket • Thumb Latch: Polysulfone • OEM Dispensing
• Color: Light Gray with Charcoal Gray Latch • Panel Mount Nut: Polysulfone • Oil Reclamation
• Spring: 316 Stainless Steel • O-Ring: EPDM • Plating and Dip Tanks
• Panel Mount Gasket: EPDM • Potable Water
• Color: White with Charcoal Gray Latch • Waste Treatment
Flow High Low Max. Working Max. Flow • Water Purification
Series Size (In.) Material O-ring Temp. Temp. Pressure (psi) 8 psi • Spring: 316 Stainless Steel
62 3⁄8 Polypropylene EPDM 230°F/110°C 32°F/0°C 60 11.0
64 3⁄8 Polysulfone EPDM 280°F/137°C -40°F/-40°C 125 11.0

Male Pipe (NPT)/Male Garden Hose (NH) Thread In-Line

Coupling Bodies Coupling Inserts
Thread Thread Valve Series HFC-12 Series HFC-35 Series HFC-12 Series HFC-35
Size (In.) Type Type Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
3⁄8 NPT Straight Thru 48732200 $13.80 48733505 $18.46 48732861 $6.69 48734164 $10.90
3⁄8 NPT Shutoff 48732234 17.38 48733539 23.13 48732895 14.12 48734198 17.66
1⁄2 NPT Straight Thru 48732267 13.80 48733562 18.46 48732929 6.85 48734222 10.90
1⁄2 NPT Shutoff 48732291 17.38 48733596 21.97 48732952 13.76 48734255 16.78
3⁄4 NPT Straight Thru 48732325 14.12 48733620 18.81 48732986 6.96 48734289 10.88
3⁄4 NPT Shutoff 48732358 16.81 48733653 23.55 48733018 14.07 48734313 18.01 Coupling Body Coupling Insert
3⁄4 Garden Hose Straight Thru 48733687 18.51 48734347 10.90
3⁄4 Garden Hose Shutoff 48733711 23.13 48734370 17.66

Bulkhead Panel Mount Hose Barb - Coupling Bodies

Tube Size Valve Series HFC-12 Series HFC-35
ID (In) Type Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Coupling Insert Elbow Hose Barb
3⁄8 Straight Thru 48732382 $20.14 48733745 $22.46 Tube Size Valve Series HFC-12 Series HFC-35
3⁄8 Shutoff 48732416 23.44 48733778 27.94 ID (In) Type Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 Straight Thru 48732440 20.14 48733802 23.65 3⁄8 Straight Thru 48733224 $10.53 48734586 $11.55
1⁄2 Shutoff 48732473 23.44 48733836 29.41 3⁄8 Shutoff 48733257 16.04 48734610 20.14
1⁄2 Straight Thru 48733281 10.53 48734644 11.55
5⁄8 Straight Thru 48732804 20.52 1⁄2 Shutoff 48733315 16.04 48734677 20.14
5⁄8 Shutoff 48732838 23.93 Coupling Body Coupling
3⁄4 Straight Thru 48732507 20.52 48733869 24.08 3⁄4 Straight Thru 06085690 9.93
3⁄4
Insert
Shutoff 48732531 23.93 48733893 29.89 3⁄4 ShutOff 05849468 14.70

In-Line Hose Barb

Coupling Bodies Coupling Inserts
Tube Size Valve Series HFC-12 Series HFC-35 Series 62 Series 64
ID (In) Type Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
3⁄8 Straight Thru 48732564 $14.65 48733927 $18.97 48733042 $6.27 48734404 $9.11
3⁄8 Shutoff 48732598 17.33 48733950 21.85 48733075 13.64 48734438 15.27
1⁄2 Straight Thru 48732622 15.03 48733984 18.97 48733109 6.27 48734461 9.31
1⁄2 Shutoff 48732655 17.33 48734016 23.00 48733133 13.64 48734495 15.27
5⁄8 Straight Thru 48732747 15.26 48733349 6.31
5⁄8 Shutoff 48732770 17.72 48733372 14.07 Coupling Body Coupling Insert
3⁄4 Straight Thru 48732689 15.26 48734040 18.40 48733166 6.31 48734529 9.49
3⁄4 Shutoff 48732713 17.72 48734073 22.28 48733190 14.07 48734552 15.53

Female Thread In-Line

Coupling Bodies Coupling Inserts
Thread Thread Valve Series HFC-35 Series HFC-35
Size (In.) Type Type Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
3⁄4 Garden Hose Straight Thru 48734107 $21.12 48734701 $13.25
3⁄4 Garden Hose Shutoff 48734131 24.44 48734735 20.33 Coupling Body Coupling Insert

Basics of...Compression Tube Fittings

Compression tube fittings typically consist of 3 components: nut, body, and ferrule (gasket ring).
Some may include a ferrule built directly into the nut. They do not require flaring, soldering, or major
tooling of any kind and are easily installed. All that is needed is for the user to insert the tubing into
the fitting and tighten the nut. The nut and ferrule provide the tight seal required. The benefit to
using this type of tubing is that there are no special tubing preparations required allowing for less
repair time and ultimately less maintenance costs.

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 4067

Page 177
 AIR COUPLERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Connector & Coupler Interchange Chart

Male Couplers Female Couplers Hose Barb Couplers Male Connectors Female Connectors Hose Barb Connectors

Thread Barb (In.) Coilhose Dixon Parker Amflo Aro Dynaquip Foster Hansen Milton Tru-Flate Thread Barb (In.) Coilhose Dixon Parker Amflo Aro Dynaquip Foster Hansen Milton Tru-Flate
1⁄2w Industrial 1⁄4w Lincoln
1⁄2 MPT 122 DC9 16 C9 23104-014 D581 5305 530 1816 13-704 1⁄4 FPT 170 DC28 B73 C28 LNCF22-000 LN3003 790 13-434
3⁄8 FPT 123 DC1023 17E C10-23 23104-003 D560 5005 500 1813 13-710 1⁄4 MPT 172 DC27 B72 C27 LNCM22-000 LN3103 794 13-424
3⁄8 ID Hose 127 DC1044 16-5B C10-44 23104-024 D562 5705 570 1⁄4 MPT 1701 DCP27 L2C CP27 LNPM22-000 LN10 791 12-424
1⁄2 ID Hose 128 DC1045 16-6B C10-45 23104-025 D582 5805 580 13-766 1⁄4 FPT 1702 DCP28 L3C CP28 LNPF22-000 LN11 792 12-434
1⁄2 MPT 1201 DCP17 H2F CP17 23904-410 P581 54-5 54 1857 12-752 1⁄4w Industrial
1⁄2 FPT 1202 DCP18 H3F CP19 23904-400 P580 55-5 55 1858 12-762 1⁄8 MPT 159 DC2101 B22A C21-01 23102-011 D321 2903 900 708
3⁄8 MPT 1203 DCP1703 H0F CP17-03 23904-310 P561 52-5 52 1859 1⁄4 FPT 150A DCB20 B33 C40 23102-200 DM340 FM3003 3000 755 13-755
3⁄8 FPT 1204 DCP1823 H1F CP18-23 23904-003 P560 53-5 53 1860 3⁄8 FPT 151A DCB2023 B33E 23102-003 DM360 FM3203 3200
3⁄8 ID Hose 1207 DCP1744 H4F CP17-44 23904-420 P562 59-5 59 1⁄4 MPT 152A DCB21 B32 C41 23102-212 DM341 FM3103 3100 756 13-756
1⁄2 ID Hose 1208 DCP1745 H5F CP17-45 23904-520 P582 60-5 60 12-760 1⁄4 ID Hose 153A DCB2042 B30-3B 23102-022 DM342 FM3603 3600
1⁄2 FPT 120A DCB10 B37 23104-400 DM580 FM5205 5200 3⁄8 MPT 155A DCB2103 B32E 23102-213 DM361 FM3303 3300
3⁄8 MPT 121A DCB903 B36E 23104-013 DM561 FM5105 5100 3⁄8 ID Hose 156A DCB2044 B30-5B 23102-024 DM362 FM3703 3700
1⁄2 MPT 122A DCB9 B36 23104-014 DM581 FM5305 5300 1⁄8 FPT 158A DCB2021 B33A 23102-001 DM320 FM2803 2800
3⁄8 FPT 123A DCB1023 B39F 23104-003 DM560 FM5005 5000 1⁄8 MPT 159A DCB2101 B33A 23102-011 DM321 FM2903 2900
1⁄2 ID Hose 128A DCB1045 B36-6B 23104-025 DM582 FM5805 5800 1⁄4 MPT 1501 DCP21 H2C CP21 23902-210 P341 10-3 10 727 12-224
1⁄4w Aro 1⁄4 FPT 1502 DCP20 H3C CP20 23902-200 P340 11-3 11 728 12-234
1⁄4 FPT 140 DC38 B53 C38 210 DM240 210-3003 20AS-25F 775 13-334 3⁄8 MPT 1503 DCP2103 H2C-E CP21-03 23902-310 P361 14-3 14 733 12-226
3⁄8 FPT 141 DC3823 B53E C38-23 210-203 210-3203 20AS-37F 1⁄8 MPT 1504 DCP2101 H0C CP21-01 23902-110 P321 12-3 12 726
1⁄4 MPT 142 DC37 B52 C37 210-012 210-3103 20AS-25M 776 13-324 3⁄8 FPT 1505 DCP2023 H3C-E CP20-23 23902-003 P360 15-3 15 732 12-236
1⁄4 ID Hose 143 DC3842 B50-3B C38-42 210-214 210-3606 20AS-25H 776-4 1⁄4 ID Hose 1506 DCP2142 H8C CP21-42 23902-220 P342 16-3 16 736 12-264
1⁄4 MPT 1401 DCP37 A2C CP37 2608 P241 210-10 20AP-25M 777 12-324 3⁄8 ID Hose 1508 DCP2144 H9C CP21-44 23902-420 P362 17-3 17 736-6 12-266
1⁄2 FPT 1402 DCP38 A3C CP38 2609 P240 210-11 20AP-25F 778 12-334 1⁄8 FPT 1509 DCP2021 H1C CP20-21 23902-100 P320 13-3 13 729
3⁄8 MPT 1403 DCP3703 A2C-E CP37-03 22236 20AP-37M
3⁄8 FPT 1405 DCP3823 A3C-E CP38-23 22237 20AP-37F
1⁄4 ID Hose 1406 DCP3742 A8C CP37-42 210-214 210-16 20AP-25H 777-4
1⁄4w Industrial 1⁄4w Automotive Tru-Flate
1⁄4 FPT 150 DC20 B23 C20 23102-200 D340 3003 1000 715 13-234 1⁄4 FPT 160 DC B13 C2 TFCF22-000 TF3003 10AS-25F 785 13-134
3⁄8 FPT 151 DC2023 B23E C20-23 23102-003 D360 3203 1200 718 13-254 3⁄8 FPT 161 DC223 B13E C2-23 TFCF23-000 TF3203 10AS-37F 788
1⁄4 MPT 152 DC21 B22 C21 23102-212 D341 3103 1100 716 13-224 1⁄4 MPT 162 DC1 B12 C1 TFCM22-000 TF3103 10AS-25M 786 13-124
1⁄4 ID Hose 153 DC2042 B20-3B C20-42 23102-022 D342 3603 1600 717 13-264 1⁄4 ID Hose 163 DC242 B10-3B C2-42 TFCH22-000 TF3603 10AS-25H 786-4 13-164
3⁄8 MPT 155 DC2103 B22E C21-03 23102-213 D361 3303 1300 719 13-244 3⁄8 MPT 165 DC103 B12E C1-03 TFCM23-000 TF3303 10AS-37M 789
3⁄8 ID Hose 156 DC2044 B20-5B C20-44 23102-024 D362 3703 1700 717-6 13-266 3⁄8 ID Hose 166 DC244 B10-5B C2-44 TFCH23-000 TF3703 10AS-37H 786-6
1⁄8 FPT 158 DC2021 B23A C20-21 23102-001 D320 2803 800 707 1⁄4 MPT 1601 DCP1 2C CP1 TFPM22-000 TF10 10AP-25M 783 12-124
3⁄8w Industrial 1⁄4 FPT 1602 DCP2 3C CP2 TFPF22-000 TF11 10AP-25F 784 12-134
1⁄2 FPT 584A DCB2624 B35F 23103-004 DM480 FM4404 4400 3⁄8 MPT 1603 DCP103 2C-E CP1-03 TFPM23-000 TF14 10AP-37M
3⁄8 ID Hose 586A DCB2644 B34-5B 23103-024 DM462 FM4804 4600 3⁄8 FPT 1605 DCP223 3C-E CP1-43 TFPF23-000 TF15 10AP-37F
1⁄2 MPT 587A DCB2504 B34F 23103-014 DM481 FM4504 4500 1⁄4 ID Hose 1606 DCP142 8C CP1-42 TFPH22-000 TF16 10AP-25H 783-4 13-164
1⁄2 ID Hose 588A DCB2645 B34-6B 23103-025 DM482 FM4904 4800 3⁄8 ID Hose 1608 DCP144 9C CP1-44 TFPH23-000 TF17 10AP-37H 783-6
3⁄8 MPT 5801 DCP25 H2E CP25 23903-310 P461 42-4 42 1837 13-526
3⁄8 FPT 5802 DCP26 H3E CP26 23903-300 P460 43-4 43 1838 13-536
1⁄4 MPT 5803 DCP2502 H0E CP25-02 23903-210 P441 40-4 40 1839
1⁄4 FPT 5804 DCP2622 H1E CP26-22 23903-200 P440 41-4 41 1840 3⁄8w Industrial
1⁄2 FPT 5805 DCP2624 H3E-F CP26-24 23903-004 P480 45-4 45 3⁄8 FPT 580 DC26 25 C26 23103-300 D460 4204 420 1835 13-536
3⁄8 ID Hose 5806 DCP2544 H5E CP25-44 23903-420 P462 48-4 406 1837-6 3⁄8 MPT 581 DC25 24 C25 23103-313 D461 4304 430 1836 13-526
1⁄2 ID Hose 5808 DCP2545 H6E CP25-45 23903-520 P482 49-4 408 1⁄4 FPT 582 DC2622 25C C26-22 23103-002 D440 4004 400 1833
1⁄2 MPT 5809 DCP2504 H2E-F CP25-04 23903-410 P481 44-4 44 1⁄4 MPT 583 DC2502 24C C25-02 23103-012 D441 4104 410 1839
3⁄8w Automotive/Tru-Flate 1⁄2 FPT 584 DC2624 25F C26-24 23103-004 D480 4404 440
3⁄8 FPT 590 DC6 15 C6 TF4204 1805 13-612 3⁄8 ID Hose 586 DC2644 24-5B C26-44 23103-024 D462 4804 4006 1837-6
3⁄8 MPT 591 DC5 14 C5 TF4304 1806 13-604 1⁄2 MPT 587 DC2504 24F C25-04 23103-014 D481 4504 450
1⁄4 FPT 592 DC8 15C C6-22 TF4004 1803 13-610 1⁄2 ID Hose 588 DC2645 24-6B C26-45 23103-025 D482 4904 4008
1⁄4 MPT 593 DC7 14C C5-02 TF4104 1804 13-602 3⁄8 FPT 580A DCB26 B35 23103-300 DM460 FM4204 4200
3⁄8 ID Hose 598 DC644 14-5B CP5-44 TF4804 1806-6 13-666 3⁄8 MPT 581A DCB25 B34 23103-313 DM461 FM4304 4300
3⁄8 MPT 5901 DCP5 2E CP5 TF42 1807 12-604 1⁄4 FPT 582A DCB2622 B35C 23103-002 DM440 FM4004 4000
3⁄8 FPT 5902 DCP6 3E CP6 TF43 1808 12-612 1⁄4 MPT 583A DCB2502 B34C 23103-012 DM441 FM4104 4100
1⁄4 MPT 5903 DCP7 0E CP5-02 TF40 1809 12-602
1⁄4 FPT 5904 DCP8 1E CP6-22 TF41 1810 12-610 Page
3⁄8 ID Hose 5906 DCP544 5E CP5-44 TF48 1807-6
Page 178 4149

200 Pc. Brass 45° Flare Fittings Assortment Kits

MSC-FL3-COMP
• 1 - 20 Bin drawer
• 20 Pc. fitting assortment
Individual Components
Kit Tube Thread Kit Tube Thread
Contains Desc. OD (In.) NPT (In.) Order # Price Ea. Contains Desc. OD (In.) NPT (In.) Order # Price Ea.
10 Male Connector Tube x MPT 1⁄4 1⁄8 BU62397203 $0.59 5 90°Elbow Tube x MPT 1⁄2 1⁄4 BU36985018 $2.94
10 Male Connector Tube x MPT 1⁄4 1⁄4 BU36984367 0.72 10 90°Elbow Tube x MPT 1⁄2 3⁄8 BU36985026 2.42
1
10 Male Connector Tube x MPT 5⁄16 1⁄4 BU36984458 0.99 10 Union Tube x Tube 1⁄4 1⁄4 BU36984615 0.55
1
10 Male Connector Tube x MPT 3⁄8 1⁄4 BU36984490 0.91 10 Union Tube x Tube 5⁄16 5⁄16 BU36984623 1.14
1
5 Male Connector Tube x MPT 1⁄2 1⁄4 BU36984524 1.73 10 Union Tube x Tube 3⁄8 3⁄8 BU36984631 1.14
1
10 Male Connector Tube x MPT 1⁄2 3⁄8 BU36984532 1.36 10 Union Tube x Tube 1⁄2 1⁄2 BU36984649 1.71
10 90°Elbow Tube x MPT 1⁄4 1⁄8 BU36984920 1.85 25 Flare Nut Long 1⁄4 BU36984318 0.56
10 90°Elbow Tube x MPT 1⁄4 1⁄4 BU36984938 2.03 10 Flare Nut Long 5⁄16 BU36984326 1.00 Complete Assortment
10 90°Elbow Tube x MPT 5⁄16 1⁄4 BU36984961 2.10 10 Flare Nut Long 3⁄8 BU36984334 1.12 Order # Price Ea.
10 90°Elbow Tube x MPT 3⁄8 1⁄4 BU36984987 1.64 5 Flare Nut Long 1⁄2 BU36984342 2.07 BU62397252 $255.82
1
Tube OD

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 4149

AIR FILTERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Air Filters

Type of Filter Description
Panel / Cleanroom Cleanroom filter modules and replacement panels designed for ultimate filtration.
HEPA Designed to provide the highest levels of air cleanliness for filtration. Individually tested (99.97 / 99.99995) and certified. HEPA filters have a strong
mechanical efficiency on virus such as influenza including the most recent forms of avian flu.
Medium and High Efficiency Rigid Extended media, rigid filters designed fur use in most commercial or industrial HVAC systems where medium to high efficiency filtration is required.
Bag Designed for use in most commercial or industrial HVAC systems where medium to high efficiency filtration is required. Made in glass and synthetic media.
Gas Phase and Odor Control Designed to bring both types of odor molecules, acid or base, into a more neutral, PH balanced, odor free state.
Pleated Panel Designed to operate in most every type of installation (heating, air conditioning, or ventilating systems), suitable for variable air volume systems. Meets
MERV 8-11 requirements per ASHRAE 52.2 Standards.
Antimicrobial Treated Added layer of Antimicrobial protection on filter helps prevent growth of odor causing bacteria (Lysol Brand).
Paint Booth Wide variety of links, cubes, pads, rolls and liner sheets for any paint booth.
Grease / Metal Heavy-duty metal washable filters suitable for residential and commercial use.
Air Filter Media and Auto Rolls Manufactured in selected widths, prepared in roll lengths that make manageable roll sizes. In most cases, a single cut across the roll will produce a ready-
to-install filter pad. Selection includes polyurethane foam, neoprene coated natural fiber, spun glass and polyester fiber rolls.
Electronic Air Cleaners Designed to catch smaller particles without creating high airflow restriction.
Disposable Designed for use in any application where disposable panel filters are recommended. They can be replied upon for superior performance since they are
specifically designed for heavy workloads.

Panel Filters/Cleanroom HEPA – Particle Board HEPA - Galvaneal V-Bank Mini Pleat
• Hospitals • Hospitals • Hospitals • Hospitals
• Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical
• Research • Research • Research • Research

Bag Filters Rigid Pleat Filters Grease/Metal Filters Gas Phase Absorbers
• Buildings • Hospitals • Food Processing • Food Processing
• Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Residential • Hospitals
• Research • Research • Research • Pharmaceutical

Pleated Air Filters - MERV 11 Hi-Efficiency Pleated Pleated Air Filters – MERV 8 Lysol Pleated Filters
• Hospitals • Hospitals • Schools • Office
• Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Residential
• Research • Research • Research • Research

2 & 3 Ply Links Polyester Air Filter Media Polyester Air Filter Rolls Fiberglass Air filter
• Automotive/Paint Booth • Hospitals • Hospitals • General Purpose
• Hospitals • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Office
• Pharmaceutical • Research • Research • Government

4166 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 179
 AIR FILTERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Air Filters (cont’d)

Type of Filter Airport Automotive Food Processing Government Hospital Manufacturing - Office Building Paint Booth Pharmaceutical Residential Schools
General Purpose
Panel / Cleanroom X X X X
HEPA X X X X X X X
Medium and High Efficiency X X X X X X X X
Rigid
Bag X X X X X X X X X X
Gas Phase and Odor Control X X X X X X X X X X X
Pleated Panel X X X X X X X X X X X
Antimicrobial Treated X X X X
Paint Booth X X X X
Grease / Metal X X
Air Filter Media and Auto Rolls X X X X X X
Electronic Air Cleaners X
Disposable X X X X X X X X X

Glossary of Terms
ASHRAE:
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
DOP:
Dioctiphthalate (diethylhexylohosphate), an oily liquid used in an aerosol form as a challenge for efficiency and leak testing HEPA filters.
HEPA:
High Efficiency Particulate, Air (filter)
Micron:
One millionth of a meter. A micron is more correctly known as a micrometer.
Pressure Drop:
The resistance of a device to the flow of a fluid through it. The pressure drop of a filter is a measure of its resistance to airflow through it.
Resistance is measured in inches w.g. in the Inch-Pound system of measurement. It is measured in Pascals in the SI system.
Resistance:
See Pressure Drop
ULPA:
Ultra Low Penetration, Air (filters). Filters in this category typically have efficiencies of 99.999% on a 0.3 micron DOP particles.
Compiled and averaged from manufacturer’s data. Efficiency per ASHRAE Standards 52 Test methods. Curves and approximations only for
general guidance. Values from them must not be used to specify air filters, since a generally recognized test standard does not exist. Graphs
from Equipment Handbook, Air Cleaners for Particulate Contaminants. Reprinted by permission of the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.

MERV14 - 90-95% Efficiency : V-Bank Mini-Pleat Filters, Synthetic Rigid Pleat, Filters, Steel Rigid Box Filters, Mini Pleat Filters, Bag Filters
MERV13 - 80-85% Efficiency : V-Bank Mini-Pleat Filters, Synthetic Rigid Pleat Filters, Steel Rigid Box Filters, Mini Pleat Filters, Bag Filters
MERV11 - 60-65% Efficiency : V-Bank Mini-Pleat Filters, Synthetic Rigid Pleat Filters, Steel Rigid Box Filters, Mini Pleat Filters, Bag Filters,
High Efficiency Pleated Air Filters
MERV10 - 50-55% Efficiency : Bag Filters

READY TO ORDER? - mscdirect.com 4167

Page 180
ELECTRIC & PORTABLE HEATERS

Basics of...Electric Heat

In choosing a baseboard heater for a room, watts is typically considered instead of BTU/Hr. If you want to convert watts to BTU/Hr, the equation is watts x
3.412=BTU/Hr
Determine Your Heating Needs
The general guideline for electric baseboard is 10 watts per square foot of space and 1.25 watts per cubic foot for fan forced heat in rooms with 8’ ceilings, rounding
up to the product with the next highest wattage rating.
Square Ft. Example: 100 sq. ft x 10 watts per sq. ft. = 1000 watts total (3412 BTU/Hr). A 10’ x 10’ room would require 1000 watt baseboard.
Cubic Ft. Example: 1152 cu. ft. x 1.25 watts per cu. ft. = 1440 watts total (4913 BTU/Hr). A 12’ x 12’ room with an 8’ ceiling would require a 1500 watt fan
forced heater.
The best place for installing a baseboard heater is on an outside wall under a window. This will allow the natural convective currents from the baseboard to provide a
curtain of warm air against the cool wall. Thermostat placement should be on the opposite wall from the baseboard heater. Fan-Forced heaters should be placed on an Page
inside wall with thermostat about 36” above the heater. Page 181 4210

Electric Forced Air Heater Under Desk Heater

• Efficient fan forced heat • Two heat settings • 3-Prong plug • Tip over safety switch
• Adjustable thermostat • Fan-only feature • Polarized 8v cord and plug
• Automatic overheat shutoff • No danger of hot spots or burn
• Wattage: 4000/3000 • Spreads heat evenly over small area, perfect for
• Voltage: 240/208 under the desk to keep warm
• Single phase • CFM: 262 • 100 Amps - same as a light bulb - but keeps you
Order # Price Ea. warm with no danger of burning
• Maximum BTU rating: 13648
• Heating area: 25-46 square feet 95246112 $159.72 • Voltage: 120
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
M202SLB A06715767 $101.37
Portable Heaters
• Operates on 240V or 208V single phase current
Infrared Spot Heaters
• Finned steel tubular heating element
• Internal manual reset thermal cutout Quartz Tube Heaters
• 6v Long cord with molded plug For indoor or outdoor “spot heating.” Heaters can be
• Temperature control thermostat with 35°F to 85°F range
• 10v Forced air throw - 262 CFM installed and moved, much like a shop light, and provide heat
directly to the desired area. Ideal for use over a workbench,
BTU machining center, in shop and garage areas.
Watts Max. Min. Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
• Heaters come complete with quartz tube, mounting
4000/3000 13652 10239 32 85660736 $263.58 brackets and chain and hooks for easy installation
4800/3600 16384 12288 32 85660744 274.56 • 09252164 will heat a 10v x 12v indoor area from an 8v height
5600/4200 19107 14330 35 85660751 309.35 • 09252172 will heat a 12v x 14v indoor area from a 10v height
Voltage Phase L (In.) W (In.) D (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
120 1 46 51⁄2 33⁄8 9 09252164 $157.70
240 1 57 51⁄2 33⁄8 11 09252172 182.16
Portable Electric Heaters
Safe and clean electric heat for all interior jobs. Fully portable, heaters
maintain indoor air quality. No need for fuel, heaters are safe to be left Deluxe Electric Milkhouse Heater
operating unattended. Heaters have a built-in thermostat, quiet 800 CFM
fan and a high temperature cut-out switch with auto reset for maximum • Two-fan-forced heat settings
safety. Work best in enclosed areas with ceiling heights of 15 feet or less. • Automatic thermostat - fan setting only
• No annoying or dangerous fumes • Tip-over safety switch and thermal limit
• Thermostat ranges from 40 to 90°F • 6v Grounded 3-prong cord and plug
kw BTU Rating Voltage Amps Phase Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • 2-Tone finish with chrome handle and guards
• Wattage: 1300-1500
15 51195 240 36 3 51 76933266 $997.02 • Amperage rating: 10.8-12.5
15 51195 480 18 3 51 76933274 1045.92
30 102390 480 36 3 72 09252222 1481.04 Volts Wt. (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Shown with 120 7 MH1502T A06715759 $65.85
Optional 25v Cable Kits Optional Cable Kit
For Use on Heater # Order # Price Ea. For Use on Heater # Order # Price Ea.
76933266 76933308 $149.33 09252222 09252230 $177.26 Portable “Catcher’s Mask” Heater
76933274 76933282 85.66
• Combination radiant and fan forced heat
• 120V, 60Hz, 600, 900, 1500 Watts
• Off, Low, High Fan Settings
General Purpose Heaters • Manual Reset Over Temperature Device

Fan Forced Electric Radiant Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.

• Fan forced instant heat, stay cool metal housing 9 00220806 $89.03
• On/off switch, power indicator light
• Automatic UL thermostat control
• Built in safety tip over switch with alarm light
• 120V/60Hz Pump House Heaters
7 Fins Oil Filled Column Heater
• Plastic coating metal casing Provides 500 Watts of heating for small utility rooms, pumps on well heads.
• On/off switch, 3 power settings • Fully assembled • Thermostat included
• Thermostatic: Cord storage • Single phase • Shipping Weight: 5 lbs.
• Uni-direction castors for easy movement
L W Ht. BTU
Type Watt Order # Price Ea. Desc. (In.) (In.) (In.) Rating Order # Price Ea.
Electric Radiant 1250/1500 60306354 $44.32 500W-120V 20 4 53⁄4 1845 76933811 $146.41
Oil Filled Column Radiator 600/900/1500 60306362 77.90 500W-240V 20 4 53⁄4 1845 76933829 146.41

4210 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES & O-RINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Foam Tape, Cork Tape, Sealing Gum & Sealing Cords
Foam Insulation Tape - Lower cost alternative and is excellent for wrapping pipes
and fittings. It can be used on hot pipes up to 160°F to insulate against heat loss,
or on cold pipes down to -40°F to insulate against heat gain and to stop dripping
caused by condensation forming on the pipes.
• Prevents condensation drip on pipes and tubing
• Black elastomeric nitrile colored cell foam • Convenient 2w X 30v roll Foam Insulation Tape Cork Insulation Tape Permagum Slugs Permagum Cords
Sealing Gum Slugs & Sealing Gum Cords - Nonhardening, water-resistant compound specifically formulated to
Cork Insulation Tape - Synthetic rubber and cork compound designed to exclude moisture, dust and dirt from joints, seams and openings in a wide range of applications. Permagum is
prevent condensation on piping and tubing as well as unit applications such pliable and can be easily manipulated to take on virtually any form. Available in ready to use bulk slugs or
as the outside surfaces of drain pans. extruded cords.
• Prevents condensation on pipes and tubing • Adheres to most clean surfaces allowing for use with a variety of materials • Seals out moisture, dust and dirt
• Soft and pliable enough to wrap around fittings and connections • Resistant to water, water vapor, temperature, alcohol and mild acids or caustics • Off-white color
• Service temperature of -20°F to 158°F • Convenient 2w X 30v roll • Excellent adhesion to wood, metal, plastics, glass as well as many other surfaces • Nonstaining/nondrying
Tapes Sealing Gums
Type W (In.) L (Ft.) Thick. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Trade Name Type Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Foam Insulation Tape 2 30 1⁄8 K502 80217409 $8.63 Permagum® Sealing Gum Slugs PP22 80217250 $8.54
Cork Insulation Tape 2 30 1⁄8 PT1 84933902 11.97 Presstite®Permagum® Sealing Gum Cords PP33 78640877 9.10

Basics of...O-Rings
• O-rings are used for sealing in applications from high vacuum to high pressure
• Used for sealing flanges, valves, faucets, compressors, engines, and boss tube fittings, O-rings are designated by an AS568A Dash Number
• The AS568A Dash Numbers are assigned as an Aerospace Standard and are determined by the Society of Automotive Engineers
• AS568A Dash Numbers are determined by the ID and OD of the O-ring • Metric O-rings are sized by measuring the cross-section, or width and the ID
The following chart will help determine the AS568A Dash Number and the O-ring material required for your application.
Size Guide
AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD
1⁄32w Cross Section 1⁄16w Cross Section 3⁄32w Cross Section 1⁄8w Cross Section 1⁄8w Cross Section
001 1⁄32 x 3⁄32 032 17⁄8 x 2w 123 13⁄16 x 13⁄8w 204 3⁄8 x 5⁄8w 239 35⁄8 x 37⁄8w
3⁄64w Cross Section 033 2 x 21⁄8 124 11⁄4 x 17⁄16 206 1⁄2 x 3⁄4 240 33⁄4 x 4
002 3⁄64 x 9⁄64 034 21⁄8 x 21⁄4 125 15⁄16 x 11⁄2 207 9⁄16 x 13⁄16 242 4 x 41⁄4
1⁄16w Cross Section 035 21⁄4 x 23⁄8 126 13⁄8 x 19⁄16 208 5⁄8 x 7⁄8 243 41⁄8 x 43⁄8
003 1⁄16 x 3⁄16 036 23⁄8 x 21⁄2 127 17⁄16 x 15⁄8 210 3⁄4 x1 246 41⁄2 x 43⁄4
004 5⁄64 x 13⁄64 037 21⁄2 x 25⁄8 128 11⁄2 x 111⁄16 211 13⁄16 x 11⁄16 250 5 x 51⁄4
005 7⁄64 x 15⁄64 038 25⁄8 x 23⁄4 129 19⁄16 x 13⁄4 212 7⁄8 x 11⁄8 264 71⁄2 x 73⁄4
006 1⁄8 x 1⁄4 039 23⁄4 x 27⁄8 130 15⁄8 x 113⁄16 213 15⁄16 x 13⁄16 3⁄16w Cross Section
007 5⁄32 x 9⁄32 040 27⁄8 x 3 131 111⁄16 x 17⁄8 214 1 x 11⁄4 312 5⁄8 x 1

008 3⁄16 x 5⁄16 041 3 x 31⁄8 132 13⁄4 x 115⁄16 215 11⁄16 x 15⁄16 320 11⁄8 x 11⁄2
009 7⁄32 x 11⁄32 042 31⁄4 x 33⁄8 133 113⁄16 x 2 216 11⁄8 x 13⁄8 322 1 ⁄4 x 15⁄8
1

010 1⁄4 x 3⁄8 043 31⁄2 x 35⁄8 134 17⁄8 x 21⁄16 217 13⁄16 x 17⁄16 324 13⁄8 x 13⁄4
011 5⁄16 x 7⁄16 044 33⁄4 x 37⁄8 135 115⁄16 x 21⁄8 218 11⁄4 x 11⁄2 325 11⁄2 x 17⁄8
012 3⁄8 x 1⁄2 045 4 x 41⁄8 136 2 x 23⁄16 219 15⁄16 x 19⁄16 326 15⁄8 x 2
013 7⁄16 x 9⁄16 046 41⁄4 x 43⁄8 137 21⁄16 x 21⁄4 220 13⁄8 x 15⁄8 327 13⁄4 x 21⁄8
014 1⁄2 x 5⁄8 3⁄32w Cross Section 138 21⁄8 x 25⁄16 221 17⁄16 x 111⁄16 328 17⁄8 x 21⁄4
015 9⁄16 x 11⁄16 105 5⁄32 x 11⁄32 139 23⁄16 x 23⁄8 222 11⁄2 x 13⁄4 329 2 x 23⁄8
016 5⁄8 x 3⁄4 106 3⁄16 x 3⁄8 140 21⁄4 x 27⁄16 223 15⁄8 x 17⁄8 330 21⁄8 x 21⁄2
017 11⁄16 x 13⁄16 108 1⁄4
x 7⁄16 141 25⁄16 x 21⁄2 224 13⁄4 x 2 331 21⁄4 x 25⁄8
018 3⁄4 x 7⁄8 109 5⁄16
x 1⁄2 142 23⁄8 x 29⁄16 225 17⁄8 x 21⁄8 332 23⁄8 x 23⁄4
019 13⁄16 x 15⁄16 110 3⁄8 x 9⁄16 143 27⁄16 x 25⁄8 226 2 x 21⁄4 333 21⁄2 x 27⁄8
020 7⁄8 x 1 111 7⁄16 x 5⁄8 144 21⁄2 x 211⁄16 227 21⁄8 x 23⁄8 334 25⁄8 x 3
021 15⁄16 x 11⁄16 112 1⁄2 x 11⁄16 145 29⁄16 x 23⁄4 228 21⁄4 x 21⁄2 335 23⁄4 x 31⁄8
022 1 x 11⁄8 113 9⁄16 x 3⁄4 146 25⁄8 x 213⁄16 229 23⁄8 x 25⁄8 336 27⁄8 x 31⁄4
023 11⁄16 x 13⁄16 114 5⁄8 x 13⁄16 147 211⁄16 x 27⁄8 230 21⁄2 x 23⁄4 337 3 x 33⁄8
024 11⁄8 x 11⁄4 115 11⁄16 x 7⁄8 148 23⁄4 x 215⁄16 231 25⁄8 x 27⁄8 338 31⁄8 x 31⁄2
025 13⁄16 x 15⁄16 116 3⁄4 x 15⁄16 149 213⁄16 x 3 232 23⁄4 x 3 339 31⁄4 x 35⁄8
026 11⁄4 x 13⁄8 117 13⁄16 x 1 150 27⁄8 x 31⁄16 233 27⁄8 x 31⁄8 340 33⁄8 x 33⁄4
027 15⁄16 x 17⁄16 118 7⁄8 x 11⁄16 151 3 x 33⁄16 234 3 x 31⁄4 343 33⁄4 x 41⁄8
028 13⁄8 x 11⁄2 119 15⁄16 x 11⁄8 152 31⁄4 x 37⁄16 235 31⁄8 x 33⁄8 345 4 x 43⁄8
029 11⁄2 x 15⁄8 120 1 x 13⁄16 153 31⁄2 x 311⁄16 236 31⁄4 x 31⁄2 346 41⁄8 x 41⁄2
030 15⁄8 x 13⁄4 121 11⁄16 x 11⁄4 155 4 x 43⁄16 237 33⁄8 x 35⁄8
031 13⁄4 x 17⁄8 122 11⁄8 x 15⁄16 168 71⁄4 x 77⁄16 238 31⁄2 x 33⁄4

Application Guide
Buna-N Viton Silicone EPDM Teflon Neoprene Polyurethane Kalrez®
Temperature Range -65 to 275°F -31 to 400°F -65 to 450°F -65 to 300°F -300 to 500°F -40 to 212°F -60 to 200°F 0 to 500°F
Compression Set GD GD GD GD PR GD GD EX
Resistance to:
Tearing GD GD PR FR GD GD EX GD
Abrasion EX GD PR GD PR EX EX GD
Ozone PR EX EX EX EX EX EX EX
Weather PR EX EX EX EX EX EX EX
Cold Water EX FR GD EX EX FR FR GD NR= Not Recommended;
Hot Water GD PR GD EX EX (To 212° F) FR PR NR PR= Poor;
Steam PR PR PR GD EX PR PR NR FR= Fair;
Dilute Acid GD EX GD GD EX GD PR EX GD= Good;
Concentrated Acid GD EX FR GD EX GD PR EX EX= Excellent
Dilute Alkalies GD EX EX EX EX GD PR EX
Concentrated Alkalies GD EX EX EX EX GD PR EX
Synthetic Lubricants (silicone grease) GD EX NR GD EX PR PE EX
High Aniline Lubricants (ASTM oil # 1) EX EX GD NR EX EX GD EX
Low Aniline Lubricants (ASTM oil # 3) EX EX FR NR EX GD FR EX
Vegetable/Animal Oil GD EX EX EX EX FR EX EX
Aliphatic Hydrocarbons (Fuel Oil A) EX EX NR NR EX FR GD EX
Aromatic Hydrocarbons (Fuel Oil C or Toluene) PR EX NR NR EX PR FR EX

4274 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 182
MECHANICAL PUMP SEALS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Basics of...Mechanical Pump Seals

Pump Model Number and Seal Number Cross Reference Guide

MSC Pump AMT Pump Std. Seal Optional Viton Seal MSC Pump AMT Pump Std. Seal Optional Viton Seal MSC Pump AMT Pump Std. Seal Optional Viton Seal
Order # Model # Order # Upgrade Order # Order # Model # Order # Upgrade Order # Order # Model # Order # Upgrade Order #
09273087 3161-95 09381294 09381351 09274580 3701-95 09381211 09381229 09275629 4895-97 09381252 09381260
09273186 4222-95 09381294 09381351 09274606 3703-95 09381211 09381229 09275645 4896-97 09381252 09381260
09273202 4223-95 09381294 09381351 09274622 3700-95 09381211 09381229 09275660 4890-97 09381252 09381260
09273228 3824-99 09381306 09381369 09274648 3702-95 09381211 09381229 09275686 4891-97 09381252 09381260
09273244 3825-99 09381306 09381369 09274663 3691-95 09381211 09381229 09275702 4902-97 09381252 09381260
09273285 3160-95 09381294 09381351 09274689 3693-95 09381211 09381229 09275728 4903-97 09381252 09381260
09273301 3162-95 09381294 09381351 09274705 3690-95 09381211 09381229 09275744 4904-97 09381252 09381260
1
09273327 3163-95 09381310 09274721 3692-95 09381211 09381229 09275769 4905-97 09381252 09381260
1
09273343 3930-95 09381310 09274747 3682-95 09381237 09381245 09275785 4900-97 09381252 09381260
09273400 3160-99 09381294 09381351 09274762 3704-95 09381237 09381245 06275801 4901-97 09381252 09381260
09273467 3390-96 09381377 09381393 09274788 3694-95 09381237 09381245 09275827 4897-97 09381252 09381260
2
09273509 3390-99 09381377 09381393 09274804 3680-97 09381229 09275843 4906-97 09381252 09381260
1 2 2
09273525 3941-96 09381385 09274820 3701-97 09381229 09275868 4893-98 09381260
1 2 2
09273541 3100-96 09381385 09274846 3703-97 09381229 09575884 4894-98 09381260
1 2 2
09273582 3100-99 09381385 09274861 3700-97 09381229 09275900 4895-98 09381260
2 2
09273624 4210-96 09381377 09381393 09274887 3702-97 09381229 09275926 4896-98 09381260
1 2 2
09273665 3993-96 09381385 09274903 3691-97 09381229 09275942 4890-98 09381260
2 2
09273806 2851-95 09381211 09381229 09274929 3693-97 09381229 09275967 4891-98 09381260
2 2
09273822 2852-95 09381211 09381229 09274945 3690-97 09381229 09275983 4902-98 09381260
2 2
09273848 2853-95 09381211 09381229 09274960 3692-97 09381229 09276007 4903-98 09381260
2 2
09273863 2855-95 09381211 09381229 09274986 3682-97 09381245 09276023 4904-98 09381260
2 2
09273889 2856-95 09381211 09381229 09275009 3704-97 09381245 09276049 4905-98 09381260
2 2
09273905 2857-95 09381211 09381229 09275025 3694-97 09381245 09276064 4900-98 09381260
2 2
09273921 2850-99 09381211 09381229 09275041 3680-98 09381229 09276080 4901-98 09381260
2 2 2
09273962 4294-98 09381229 09275066 3701-98 09381229 09276106 4897-98 09381260
2 2 2
09273988 4295-98 09381229 09275082 3703-98 09381229 09276122 4906-98 09381260
2 2
09274002 4296-98 09381229 09275108 3700-98 09381229 09276163 3150-95 09381377 09381393
2 2
09274028 4297-98 09381229 09275124 3702-98 09381229 09276205 3151-95 09381377 09381393
2 2
09274044 4298-98 09381229 09275140 3691-98 09381229 09276247 3152-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274101 2827-95 09381211 09381229 09275165 3693-98 09381229 09276262 3152-94 09381377 09381393
2
09274127 2825-95 09381211 09381229 09275181 3690-98 09381229 09276288 4241-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274143 2821-95 09381211 09381229 09275207 3692-98 09381229 09276304 4251-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274168 2828-95 09381211 09381229 09275223 3682-98 09381245 09276320 4252-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274184 2762-95 09381211 09381229 09275249 3704-98 09381245 09276346 4260-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274200 2761-95 09381211 09381229 09275264 3694-98 09381245 09276361 4261-95 09381377 09381393
1
09274226 2822-95 09381211 09381229 09275306 4893-95 09381252 09381260 09277328 4850-97 09381203
1
09274242 2763-95 09381211 09381229 09275622 4894-95 09381252 09381260 09277344 4860-97 09381203
1
09274267 2874-95 09381377 09381393 09275348 4895-95 09381252 09381260 09277369 3670-94 09381237
1
09274283 2875-95 09381377 09381393 09275363 4896-95 09381252 09381260 09277385 3201-96 09381278
09274309 2876-95 09381377 09381393 09275389 4890-95 09381252 09381260 09277401 4292-96 09381211 09381229
2
09274325 2820-99 09381211 09381229 09275405 4891-95 09381252 09381260 09277740 3890-97 09381332
2
09274341 2760-99 09381294 09381351 09275421 4902-95 09381252 09381260 09277765 3891-97 09381332
2
09274382 3790-95 09381211 09381229 09275447 4903-95 09381252 09381260 09277781 3892-97 09381332
2
09274408 3791-95 09381211 09381229 09275462 4904-95 09381252 09381260 09277807 3893-97 09381332
2
09274424 3792-95 09381211 09381229 09275488 4905-95 09381252 09381260 09277823 3894-97 09381332
2
09274440 3793-95 09381211 09381229 09275504 4900-95 09381252 09381260 09277849 3890-98 09381344
1 2
09274465 4780-95 09381328 09275520 4901-95 09381252 09381260 09277864 3891-98 09381344
1 2
09274481 4782-95 09381328 09275546 4897-95 09381252 09381260 09277880 3892-98 09381344
2
09274507 3655-95 09381377 09381393 09275561 4906-95 09381252 09381260 09277906 3893-98 09381344
2
09274523 3656-95 09381377 09381393 09275587 4893-97 09381252 09381260 09277922 3894-98 09381344
09274564 3680-95 09381211 09381229 09275603 4894-97 09381252 09381260
1
Viton upgrade not available 2Viton seal standard; upgrade not required

Page 183 Page 4330

Stainless Steel Mechanical Face Seals - Type A

These stainless steel mechanical face seals, also known as pump shaft seals or mechanical shaft seals, are designed for OEM and replacement use on chemical and fertilizer pumps, trash pumps,
pressure booster pumps, straight centrifugal pumps, sump pumps and home water systems. The seal components are locked together by a crimped outer shell providing a unitized construction for
the diaphragm and drive gasket. This prevents reverse thrusts from dislodging the seal components. This mechanical lock eliminates the need for adhesives thereby eliminating leaks between the seal
ring and the diaphragm. All springs and spring retainers are 304 Stainless Steel. All other metal parts are Type 304 Stainless Steel unless otherwise noted.
Industry Shaft Seal Outside Working Seat Seat Diaphragm Washer Seat Specifications:
Std. No. Size (In.) Dia. (In.) L (In.) Bore (In.) Thick. (In.) Material Material Material Order # Price Ea. • Temperature Range: Buna-N -40
511 0.375 0.917 0.625 0.875 0.218 Buna-N Phenolic Ni-Resist 31987241 $17.82 to 200°F; Viton: -15 to 390°F
• Pressure, Unbalanced: 150 psi
162 0.500 0.917 0.656 1.000 0.312 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987258 10.94 • Speed: 5000 ft./min
200U 0.625 1.185 0.718 1.250 0.406 FDA Buna-N Carbon Ceramic 31987266 23.31
100 0.625 1.185 0.718 1.187 0.343 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987274 6.58 Similar To:
• Pac Seal Type 16
200 0.625 1.185 0.718 1.250 0.406 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987282 6.60 • John Crane Type 6
200V 0.625 1.185 0.718 1.250 0.406 Viton Carbon Ceramic 31987290 24.00 • Sealol Type 6
501 0.625 1.185 0.812 1.250 0.406 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987308 10.94
101 0.750 1.300 0.812 1.437 0.406 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987316 9.60 Applications:
201 0.750 1.300 0.718 1.375 0.406 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987324 8.94 • Well Pumps
• Sump Pumps
201V 0.750 1.300 0.718 1.375 0.406 Viton Carbon Ceramic 31987332 30.15 • Spa Pumps
201U 0.750 1.300 0.718 1.375 0.406 FDA Buna-N Carbon Ceramic 31987340 24.13 • Swimming Pool Pumps
360 1.000 1.552 0.812 1.625 0.437 Buna-N Phenolic Ceramic 31987357 24.00 • Other Small Shaft Diameter Pumps

4330 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
 DIMENSIONS OF COUNTERBORING/COUNTERSINKING
FOR SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS
Counter Bore Counter Sink

Counterbore Socket Head Cap Screw Countersink Socket Head Cap Screw
Nominal Clearance Clearance Nominal Clearance Clearance Clearance Diameter of Clearance Diameter of
Thread For Thread For Head Depth Thread For Thread For Head Depth For Thread Countersink For Thread Countersink
Size ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘H’ Size ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘H’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘C’ ‘D’
INCH METRIC INCH METRIC
No. 4 #29 7/32ʺ 0.125ʺ M3 3.4 6.0 3.4 #29 0.255ʺ 3.4 6.7
No. 5 #23 1/4ʺ 0.140ʺ M4 4.5 8.0 4.6 #23 0.281ʺ 4.5 9.0
No. 6 #18 9/32ʺ 0.160ʺ M5 5.5 10.0 5.7 #18 0.307ʺ 5.5 11.2
No. 8 #10 5/16ʺ 0.185ʺ M6 6.6 11.0 6.8 #10 0.359ʺ 6.6 13.4
No. 10 #2 3/8ʺ 0.215ʺ M8 9.0 15.0 9.0 #2 0.411ʺ 9.0 17.9
1/4ʺ 9/32ʺ 7/16ʺ 0.280ʺ M10 11.0 18.0 11.0 9/32ʺ 0.531ʺ 11.0 22.4
5/16ʺ 11/32ʺ 17/32ʺ 0.350ʺ M12 14.0 20.0 13.0 11/32ʺ 0.656ʺ 14.0 26.9
3/8ʺ 13/32ʺ 5/8ʺ 0.415ʺ M14 16.0 23.0 15.2 13/32ʺ 0.781ʺ 16.0 30.3
7/16ʺ 15/32ʺ 23/32ʺ 0.475ʺ M16 18.0 26.0 17.5 15/32ʺ 0.844ʺ 18.0 33.6
1/2ʺ 17/32ʺ 13/16ʺ 0.540ʺ M18 20.0 29.0 19.5 17/32ʺ 0.938ʺ 20.0 37.0
5/8ʺ 21/32ʺ 1ʺ 0.675ʺ M20 22.0 32.0 21.5 21/32ʺ 1.188ʺ 22.0 40.3
3/4ʺ 25/32ʺ 1 3/16ʺ 0.810ʺ M22 24.0 35.0 23.5 25/32ʺ 1.438ʺ — —
7/8ʺ 29/32ʺ 1 3/8ʺ 0.930ʺ M24 26.0 40.0 25.5 — — — —
1ʺ 1 1/32ʺ 1 5/8ʺ 1.050ʺ M27 30.0 43.0 29.0 — — — —
1 1/4ʺ 1 5/16ʺ 2ʺ 1.310ʺ M30 33.0 48.0 32.0 — — — —
Reprinted with permission from the Engineers Black Book—USA Edition. Published by Pat Rapp Enterprises. All rights reserved. Specifications: 168pp. illus. full color, pocket sized 6 1/2ʺ x 4ʺ, every page
laminated (grease proof), lay flat spiral bound. Metal drill point sharpening gage included in every book. For additional technical information, check out the Engineers Black Book, Order# 82714122 located in
section 8. The information on this page is intended as a general guide and is for reference only.
Page 184
 SURFACE COATINGS
Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD)
A low-temperature process that produces very tough coatings with
high lubricity for use on gummy materials, high temperature alloys,
low-carbon steels, and stainless steels at low to medium speeds.
Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD)
A high-temperature process that produces highly crater resistant
coatings with a good balance of toughness and wear resistance for use
on a broad range of carbon and stainless steels at medium to high
speeds.
Medium Temperature Chemical Vapor
Deposition (MTCVD)
This is a medium-temperature process that produces tougher, slightly
less wear-resistant coatings than the traditional CVD process and is
recommended for use on gummy materials, ductile irons and high
temperature alloys at medium speeds.
Blackening
Blackening is a finishing operation that chemically coats the surface of
ferrous metals. Besides enhancing the appearance of the components,
the black deposit holds a sealant, usually oil, into the pores of the
black oxide coating, where it is held in close contact with the metal
and prevents corrosion. There are three types of blackening:
1. Copper/Selenium Blackening—This process uses a room
temperature acid bath to form a black copper selenium coating in
approximately 1-3 minutes.
2. Caustic Black Oxiding—A caustic soda bath operating at
about 140°C produces a black coating on the surface of the ferrous
metal.
3. Black Dyed Oxylate Coating—It provides a high quality black
corrosion resistant coating on ferrous metals without using heated
chemicals. A grey ferrous oxylate coating is applied to the steel and it
is then dyed black. This process operates at room temperature.
The performance of any black coating is gauged by its porosity and
ability to absorb a subsequent coating of oil which acts as a rust
barrier. It is extensively used to coat Tungsten Carbide tool holders,
Boring bars and Milling cutters to enhance appearance of the tool.
Blue Finish
Blue Finish is a thin layer of Iron Oxide produced by a carefully
controlled steam tempering process. This produces a very thin oxide
layer which acts as a lubricant and anti-weld surface. It also increases
resistance to corrosion and enables the surface of a tool to absorb
lubricant in machining operations.
Bronze Finish
The Bronze Finish is a thin oxide layer formed on the tool surface and
is applied on High Speed Cobalt Steels.
Chromium Carbide (CrC)
A super hard coating > HRC 80 is applied to the surface using PVD
coating process. The hardness of the coating is the same as TiN but
with an oxidation resistance that is 20 to 30% higher. Recommended
for machining Titanium and Aluminum alloys.
Reprinted with permission from the Engineers Black Book—USA Edition. Published by Pat Rapp Enterprises. All rights reserved.
Specifications: 168pp. illus. full color, pocket sized 6 1/2ʺ x 4ʺ, every page laminated (grease proof), lay flat spiral bound. Metal drill
point sharpening gage included in every book. For additional technical information, check out the Engineers Black Book, Order#
82714122 located in section 8. The information on this page is intended
Page a general guide and is for reference only.
Chromium Nitride (CrN)
This is a PVD coating and is particularly suitable in non-ferrous
applications where titanium based coatings are not successful. It has a
surface hardness of approximately 80 Rc and has good corrosion and
oxidation resistance. It is mainly used for machining Copper,
Die-casting, Brass forgings.
Diamond Coating
It is an amorphous diamond coating with extremely low coefficient of
friction and high hardness. This coating is specially recommended for
tapping Aluminum alloys with high Silicon content.
Hard-Chromium Plating
The tool is plated with Chromium to improve wear characteristics and
reduce sliding resistance and cutting forces. It is especially suitable
when tapping Structural grade steels, Copper, Brass, etc.
Nitriding
Nitriding is a process which is used to increase the hardness and wear
resistance of the surface of a tool. It is particularly suitable for taps that
are used on abrasive materials such as castings, bakelite, etc.
Steam Tempering
Steam tempering reduces sliding resistance, thus preventing cold
welding, which occurs, for example, during the machining of steels that
have a low carbon content. Steam tempered tools are mainly used for
machining of ferrous materials.
Titanium Aluminum Nitride (TiAIN)
This coating is applied by the PVD process and has a higher hardness
than TiN and TiCN. A very thin film of Al2O3 (Aluminum Oxide) is formed
on the surface of the TiAIN, which greatly increases the service life of
the tool, which can withstand higher temperatures especially when
machining Cast Iron and tough steels.
Titanium Carbonitride –TiCNite (TiCN)
TiCNite coated tools have a very high surface hardness of
approximately 90 Rc. TiCN is harder than other coating materials,
hence cutting speeds similar to carbide tools can be achieved with the
toughness of high-speed steel. This coating is recommended for use
in all steels, cast iron and aluminum.
Titanium Nitride – TiNite (TiN)
A gold colored film of Titanium Nitride with a hardness of approximately
85 Rc is deposited on the tool, which extends tool life by reducing
friction and enables the tool to be operated at higher speeds and
feeds. It is suitable for machining iron-based materials, die-casting and
plastic mold tooling. Other applications include wear parts, medical and
dental instruments, slitting knives, plastic die molds, carbide tools, and
high performance forming tools.
Zirconium Nitride (ZrN)
It is a ceramic coating applied by the PVD process. Especially
recommended for tapping Aluminum and Aluminum alloys.
as 185
 QUICK VISUAL IDENTIFICATION
OF CARBIDE INSERT SHAPES
Common–Turning / Milling Inserts
Common–Ceramic / Cermet /
PCBN / PCD Inserts
Page 186
This chart contains a list of some
of the common basic shapes of
Carbide Inserts that may be found
in most engineering workshops. It
is by no means a comprehensive
list and is provided as a starting
point for insert identification.
NOTE: Chipbreaker shapes and
designs vary considerably between
manufacturers.
Reprinted with permission from the
Engineers Black Book—USA Edition.
Published by Pat Rapp Enterprises. All
rights reserved. Specifications: 168pp.
illus. full color, pocket sized 6 1/2ʺ x 4ʺ,
every page laminated (grease proof),
lay flat spiral bound. Metal drill point
sharpening gage included in every book.
For additional technical information,
check out the Engineers Black Book,
Order# 82714122 located in section 8.
The information on this page is intended
as a general guide and is for reference
only. Not all shapes stocked by MSC.
Contact your Sales Associate for
availability.
 DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS
Conversion Formula: From Inches to Millimeters - multiply by 25.4
From Millimeters to Inches - multiply by 0.0394

Drill Drill Drill Drill

Size Decimal Size Decimal Size Decimal Size Decimal

Standard 0.1mm
0.2mm
.0039
.0079
41
40
.0960
.0980
15/64
6mm
.2344
.2362
33/64
17/32
.5156
.5313
Thread Form
Tap & Drill 0.3mm
80
.0118
.0135
2.5mm
39
.0984
.0995
B
C
.2380
.2420
13.5mm
35/64
.5315
.5469
Tap & Drill
Approx. 75% Thread Approx. 65% Thread
79 .0145 38 .1015 D .2460 14mm .5512
0-80 3/64 1/64 .0156 37 .1040 1/4 & E .2500 9/16 .5625 0-80 54
1-64 53 0.4mm .0157 36 .1065 6.5mm .2559 14.5mm .5709 1-64 1.65mm
1-72 53 78 .0160 7/64 .1094 F .2570 37/64 .5781 1-72 1.7mm
2-56 50 77 .0180 35 .1100 G .2610 15mm .5906 2-56 5/64
2-64 50 0.5mm .0197 34 .1110 17/64 .2656 19/32 .5938 2-64 2mm
3-48 47 76 .0200 33 .1130 H .2660 39/64 .6094 3-48 43
3-56 46 75 .0210 32 .1160 I .2720 15.5mm .6102 3-56 2.3mm
4-40 43 74 .0225 3mm .1181 7mm .2756 5/8 .6250 4-40 39
4-48 42 0.6mm .0236 31 .1200 J .2770 16mm .6299 4-48 2.6mm
5-40 39 73 .0240 1/8 .1250 K .2810 41/64 .6406 5-40 33
5-44 38 72 .0250 30 .1285 9/32 .2812 16.5mm .6496 5-44 2.9mm
6-32 36 71 .0260 29 .1360 L .2900 21/32 .6562 6-32 1/8
6-40 33 0.7mm .0276 3.5mm .1378 M .2950 17mm .6693 6-40 3.2mm
8-32 29 70 .0280 28 .1405 7.5mm .2953 43/64 .6719 8-32 25
8-36 29 69 .0292 9/64 .1406 19/64 .2969 11/16 .6875 8-36 24
10-24 25 68 .0310 27 .1440 N .3020 17.5mm .6890 10-24 11/64
10-32 21 45/64 .7031 10-32 16
1/32 .0312 26 .1470 5/16 .3125
12-24 17 12-24 5mm
0.8mm .0315 25 .1495 8mm .3150 18mm .7087
12-28 15 12-28 8
1/4-20 7 67 .0320 24 .1520 O .3160 23/32 .7188 1/4-20 1
1/4-28 3 66 .0330 23 .1540 P .3230 18.5mm 7283 1/4-28 A
5/16-18 F 65 .0350 5/32 .1562 21/64 .3281 47/64 .7344 5/16-18 7.3mm
5/16-24 I 0.9mm .0354 22 .1570 Q .3320 19mm .7480 5/16-24 M
3/8-16 5/16 64 .0360 4mm .1575 8.5mm .3346 3/4 .7500 3/8-16 S
3/8-24 Q 63 .0370 21 .1590 R .3390 49/64 .7656 3/8-24 T
7/16-14 U 62 .0380 20 .1610 11/32 .3438 19.5mm .7677 7/16-14 13/32
7/16-20 W 61 .0390 19 .1660 S .3480 25/32 .7812 7/16-20 10.5mm
1/2-12 27/64 1mm .0394 18 .1695 9mm .3543 20mm .7874 1/2-13 15/32
1/2-13 27/64 60 .0400 11/64 .1719 T .3580 51/64 .7969 1/2-20 31/64
1/2-20 29/64 59 .0410 17 .1730 23/64 .3594 20.5mm .8071 9/16-12 17/32
9/16-12 31/64 58 .0420 16 .1770 U .3680 13/16 .8125 9/16-18 13.5mm
9/16-18 33/64 57 .0430 4.5mm .1772 9.5mm .3740 21mm .8268 5/8-11 15mm
5/8-11 17/32 56 .0465 15 .1800 3/8 .3750 53/64 .8281 5/8-18 19/32
5/8-18 37/64 3/64 .0469 14 .1820 V .3770 27/32 8438 3/4-10 45/64
3/4-10 21/32 55 .0520 13 .1850 W .3860 21.5mm .8465 3/4-16 23/32
3/4-16 11/16 54 .0550 3/16 .1875 25/64 .3906 55/64 .8594 7/8-9 .823
7/8-9 49/64 12 .1890 10mm .3937 22mm .8661 7/8-14 27/32
1.5mm .0591
7/8-14 13/16 1-8 15/16
53 .0595 11 .1910 X .3970 7/8 .8750
1-8 7/8 1-12 .963
1-12 59/64 1/16 .0625 10 .1935 Y .4040 22.5mm .8858
1-14 15/16 52 .0635 9 .1960 13/32 .4062 57/64 .8906
51 .0670 5mm .1969 Z .4130 23mm .9055

Taper Pipe
50
49
.0700
.0730
8
7
.1990
.2010
10.5mm
27/64
.4134
.4219
29/32
59/64
.9062
.9219
Straight Pipe
Tap & Drill
48
5/64
.0760
.0781
13/64
6
.2031
.2040
11mm
7/16
.4331
.4375
23.5mm
15/16
.9252
.9375
Tap & Drill
NPS
NPT 47 .0785 5 .2055 11.5mm .4528 24mm .9449
2mm .0787 4 .2090 29/64 .4531 61/64 .9531 1/16-27 1/4
1/16-27 D 46 .0810 3 .2130 15/32 .4688 24.5mm .9646 1/8-27 11/32
1/8-27 R 45 .0820 5.5mm .2165 12mm .4724 31/32 .9688 1/4-18 7/16
1/4-18 7/16 44 .0860 7/32 .2188 31/64 .4844 25mm .9843 3/8-18 37/64
3/8-18 37/64 1/2-14 23/32
43 .0890 2 .2210 12.5mm .4921 63/64 .9844
1/2-14 45/64 3/4-14 59/64
42 .0935 1 .2280 1/2 .5000 1 1.000
3/4-14 59/64 1-11 1/2 1 5/32
1-11 1/2 1 5/32 3/32 .0938 A .2340 13mm .5118 1 1/4-11 1/2 1 1/2
1 1/4-11 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2-11 1/2 1 3/4
1 1/2-11 1/2 1 47/64 2-11 1/2 2 7/32
2-11 1/2 2 7/32
Screw Thread Insert (STI)
Metric Tap & Drill Metric
Tap & Drill 2-56
3-48
3/32
36
8-32
8-36
17
17
5/16-24
3/8-16
21/64
X Thread Form
Approx. 70-75% Thread
M1.6 x .35 1.25mm
3-56
4-40
37
31
10-24
10-32
13/64
7
3/8-24
7/16-14
25/64
29/64 Tap & Drill
M2.0 x .40 1.6 4-48 3mm 12-24 1 7/16-20 29/64 Approx. 65% Thread
M2.5 x .45 2.05 5-40 3.4mm 1/4-20 H 1/2-13 33/64 M1.6 x .35 1.45mm
M3.0 x .50 2.5 6-32 26 1/4-28 G 1/2-20 33/64 M2.0 x .40 1.85mm
M3.5 x .60 2.9 6-40 26 5/16-18 Q - - M2.5 x .45 2.30mm
M4.0 x .70 3.3 M3.0 x .50 35
M4.5 x .75 3.75 M3.5 x .60 30
M5.0 x .80 4.2 M4.0 x .70 3.7mm
M6.0 x 1.0 5 M5.0 x .80 14
M7.0 x 1.0 6 M6.0 x 1.0 5.5mm
M8 x 1.25 6.75 M8 x 1.25 7.4mm
M10 x 1.50 8.5 M10 x 1.50 9.3mm
M12 x 1.75 Y M12 x 1.75 7/16
M14 x 2.0 12 M14 x 2.0 13mm
M16 x 2.0 14 M16 x 2.0 15mm
M18 x 2.5 15.5 M20 x 2.5 18.75mm
M20 x 2.5 17.5
Page 187
Conversion Charts
Conversion Formula: From Inches to Millimeters - multiply by 25.4
From Millimeters to Inches - multiply by 0.0394
Inch to Millimeter Conversion (Rounded to nearest mm)
In. mm In. mm In. mm In. mm
1/16 2 21 533 65 1651 123 3124
1/8 3 23 584 66 1676 126 3200
1/4 6 24 610 67 1702 130 3302
5/16 8 27 686 68 1727 132 3353
3/8 10 28 711 69 1753 138 3505
2/5 10 30 762 70 1778 144 3658
7/16 11 31 787 72 1829 147 3734
1/2 13 32 813 73 1854 150 3810
5/8 16 34 864 74 1880 156 3962
3/4 19 36 914 75 1905 162 4115
7/8 22 37 940 76 1930 168 4267
15/16 24 38 965 77 1956 174 4420
1 25 39 991 78 1981 180 4572
2 51 40 1016 79 2007 186 4724
3 76 41 1041 80 2032 192 4877
4 102 42 1067 84 2134 198 5029
5 127 43 1092 85 2159 204 5182
6 152 44 1118 87 2210 210 5334
7 178 45 1143 90 2286 216 5486
8 203 47 1194 94 2388 222 5639
9 229 48 1219 96 2438 228 5791
10 254 50 1270 98 2489 234 5944
11 279 51 1295 99 2515 240 6096
12 305 52 1321 102 2591 246 6248
13 330 53 1346 106 2692 252 6401
14 356 54 1372 108 2743 258 6553
15 381 56 1422 110 2794 264 6706
16 406 60 1524 114 2896 270 6858
17 432 62 1575 118 2997 276 7010
18 457 63 1600 120 3048 282 7163
20 508 64 1626 122 3099 288 7315
Metric Conversion Chart for Popular Gauges
U.S. Std. Gauge Metric Conversion
Gauge Nominal Thickness (In.) (millimeters)
7 .179 4.5
10 .134 3.4
11 .120 3.0
12 .105 2.6
13 .090 2.3
14 .075 1.9
16 .060 1.5
18 .048 1.2
20 .036 .9
22 .030 .7
24 .024 .6
Page 188
liquid measure
conversion chart
1/6 fl oz = 1/3 tbsp = 1 tsp
1/16 cup = 1/2 fl oz = 1 tbsp = 3 tsp
1/8 cup = 1 fl oz = 2 tbsp = 6 tsp
1/4 cup = 2 fl oz = 4 tbsp = 12 tsp
1/2 cup = 4 fl oz = 8 tbsp = 24 tsp
1/4 qt = 1/2 pt = 1 cup = 8 fl oz = 16 tbsp = 48 tsp
1/2 qt = 1 pt = 2 cups = 16 fl oz
1/4 gal = 1 qt = 2 pt = 4 cups = 32 fl oz
1/2 gal = 2 qt = 4 pt = 8 cups = 64 fl oz
1 gal = 4 qt = 8 pt = 16 cups = 128 fl oz

metric conversion chart

from Metric:
When You Know: Multiply By: To Find:
milliliters (mL) 0.03 fluid ounces (fl oz)
liters (L) 2.1 pints (pt)
liters (L) 1.06 quarts (qt)
liters (L) 0.26 gallons (gal)
cubic meters (m3) 35.3 cubic feet (ft3)
cubic meters (m3) 1.3 cubic yards (yd3)

to Metric:
When You Know: Multiply By: To Find:
teaspoon (tsp) 5 milliliters (mL)
tablespoon (tbsp) 15 milliliters (mL)
fluid ounces (fl oz) 30 milliliters (mL)
cups (c) 0.24 liters (L)
pints (pt) 0.47 liters (L)
quarts (qt) 0.95 liters (L)
gallons (gal) 3.8 liters (L)
cubic feet (ft3) 0.03 cubic meters (m3)
cubic yards (yd3) 0.76 cubic meters (m3)

Page 189